Solucion Ejercicios Impares Ed Nagle

Contents
CHAPTER 1: Introduction 1
EXERCISES 1.1: Background, page 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
EXERCISES 1.2: Solutions and Initial Value Problems, page 14 . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EXERCISES 1.3: Direction Fields, page 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
EXERCISES 1.4: The Approximation Method of Euler, page 28 . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CHAPTER 2: First Order Dierential Equations 27

EXERCISES 2.2: Separable Equations, page 46 . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 27
EXERCISES 2.3: Linear Equations, page 54 . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 41
EXERCISES 2.4: Exact Equations, page 65 . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 59
EXERCISES 2.5: Special Integrating Factors, page 71 . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . 72
EXERCISES 2.6: Substitutions and Transformations, page 78 . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
REVIEW PROBLEMS: page 81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
CHAPTER 3: Mathematical Models and Numerical Methods Involving First

Order Equations 103
EXERCISES 3.2: Compartmental Analysis, page 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
EXERCISES 3.3: Heating and Cooling of Buildings, page 107 . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
EXERCISES 3.4: Newtonian Mechanics, page 115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
EXERCISES 3.5: Electrical Circuits, page 122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
EXERCISES 3.6: Improved Eulers Method, page 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
EXERCISES 3.7: Higher Order Numerical Methods: Taylor and Runge-Kutta, page 142 153
CHAPTER 4: Linear Second Order Equations 167

EXERCISES 4.1: Introduction: The Mass-Spring Oscillator, page 159 . . . . . . . . 167
EXERCISES 4.2: Homogeneous Linear Equations; The General Solution, page 167 . 169
EXERCISES 4.3: Auxiliary Equations with Complex Roots, page 177 . . . . . . . . 177
iii
EXERCISES 4.4: Nonhomogeneous Equations: The Method of Undetermined
Coecients, page 186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
EXERCISES 4.5: The Superposition Principle and Undetermined Coecients
Revisited, page 192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
EXERCISES 4.6: Variation of Parameters, page 197 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
EXERCISES 4.7: Qualitative Considerations for Variable-Coecient and Nonlinear
Equations, page 208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
EXERCISES 4.8: A Closer Look at Free Mechanical Vibrations, page 219 . . . . . . 232
EXERCISES 4.9: A Closer Look at Forced Mechanical Vibrations, page 227 . . . . 241
REVIEW PROBLEMS: page 228 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Systems and Phase Plane Analysis 259

EXERCISES 5.2: Elimination Method for Systems, page 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
EXERCISES 5.3: Solving Systems and HigherOrder Equations Numerically, page 261 282
EXERCISES 5.4: Introduction to the Phase Plane, page 274 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
EXERCISES 5.5: Coupled Mass-Spring Systems, page 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
EXERCISES 5.6: Electrical Circuits, page 291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
EXERCISES 5.7: Dynamical Systems, Poincare Maps, and Chaos, page 301 . . . . . 325
CHAPTER 6: Theory of Higher Order Linear Dierential Equations 341

EXERCISES 6.1: Basic Theory of Linear Dierential Equations, page 324 . . . . . . 341
EXERCISES 6.2: Homogeneous Linear Equations with Constant Coecients, page 331 351
EXERCISES 6.3: Undetermined Coecients and the Annihilator Method, page 337 361
EXERCISES 6.4: Method of Variation of Parameters, page 341 . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
CHAPTER 7: Laplace Transforms 389

EXERCISES 7.2: Definition of the Laplace Transform, page 359 . . . . . . . . . . . 389
EXERCISES 7.3: Properties of the Laplace Transform, page 365 . . . . . . . . . . . 396
EXERCISES 7.4: Inverse Laplace Transform, page 374 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
EXERCISES 7.5: Solving Initial Value Problems, page 383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
EXERCISES 7.6: Transforms of Discontinuous and Periodic Functions, page 395 . . 428
EXERCISES 7.7: Convolution, page 405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
EXERCISES 7.8: Impulses and the Dirac Delta Function, page 412 . . . . . . . . . 459
EXERCISES 7.9: Solving Linear Systems with Laplace Transforms, page 416 . . . . 466
iv
CHAPTER 8: Series Solutions of Dierential Equations 491
EXERCISES 8.1: Introduction: The Taylor Polynomial Approximation, page 430 . . 491
EXERCISES 8.2: Power Series and Analytic Functions, page 438 . . . . . . . . . . . 496
EXERCISES 8.3: Power Series Solutions to Linear Dierential Equations, page 449 505
EXERCISES 8.4: Equations with Analytic Coecients, page 456 . . . . . . . . . . . 520
EXERCISES 8.5: Cauchy-Euler (Equidimensional) Equations Revisited, page 460 . 529
EXERCISES 8.6: Method of Frobenius, page 472 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
EXERCISES 8.7: Finding a Second Linearly Independent Solution, page 482 . . . . 547
EXERCISES 8.8: Special Functions, page 493 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
CHAPTER 9: Matrix Methods for Linear Systems 569

EXERCISES 9.1: Introduction, page 507 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
EXERCISES 9.2: Review 1: Linear Algebraic Equations, page 512 . . . . . . . . . . 570
EXERCISES 9.3: Review 2: Matrices and Vectors, page 521 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
EXERCISES 9.4: Linear Systems in Normal Form, page 530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
EXERCISES 9.5: Homogeneous Linear Systems with Constant Coecients, page 541 584
EXERCISES 9.6: Complex Eigenvalues, page 549 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
EXERCISES 9.7: Nonhomogeneous Linear Systems, page 555 . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
EXERCISES 9.8: The Matrix Exponential Function, page 566 . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
CHAPTER 10: Partial Dierential Equations 629

EXERCISES 10.2: Method of Separation of Variables, page 587 . . . . . . . . . . . 629
EXERCISES 10.3: Fourier Series, page 603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
EXERCISES 10.4: Fourier Cosine and Sine Series, page 611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
EXERCISES 10.5: The Heat Equation, page 624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
EXERCISES 10.6: The Wave Equation, page 636 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
EXERCISES 10.7: Laplaces Equation, page 649 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
CHAPTER 11: Eigenvalue Problems and Sturm-Liouville Equations 675

EXERCISES 11.2: Eigenvalues and Eigenfunctions, page 671 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
EXERCISES 11.3: Regular Sturm-Liouville Boundary Value Problems, page 682 . . 683
EXERCISES 11.4: Nonhomogeneous Boundary Value Problems and the Fredholm Al-
ternative, page 692 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
EXERCISES 11.5: Solution by Eigenfunction Expansion, page 698 . . . . . . . . . . 690
EXERCISES 11.6: Greens Functions, page 706 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
EXERCISES 11.7: Singular Sturm-Liouville Boundary Value Problems, page 715 . . 701
v
EXERCISES 11.8: Oscillation and Comparison Theory, page 725 . . . . . . . . . . . 705
CHAPTER 12: Stability of Autonomous Systems 707

EXERCISES 12.2: Linear Systems in the Plane, page 753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
EXERCISES 12.3: Almost Linear Systems, page 764 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
EXERCISES 12.4: Energy Methods, page 774 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
EXERCISES 12.5: Lyapunovs Direct Method, page 782 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
EXERCISES 12.6: Limit Cycles and Periodic Solutions, page 791 . . . . . . . . . . 719
EXERCISES 12.7: Stability of Higher-Dimensional Systems, page 798 . . . . . . . . 722
CHAPTER 13: Existence and Uniqueness Theory 725

EXERCISES 13.1: Introduction: Successive Approximations, page 812 . . . . . . . . 725
EXERCISES 13.2: Picards Existence and Uniqueness Theorem, page 820 . . . . . . 733
EXERCISES 13.3: Existence of Solutions of Linear Equations, page 826 . . . . . . 741
EXERCISES 13.4: Continuous Dependence of Solutions, page 832 . . . . . . . . . . 743
vi
CHAPTER 1: Introduction
EXERCISES 1.1: Background, page 5
1. This equation involves only ordinary derivatives of x with respect to t, and the highest deriva-
tive has the second order. Thus it is an ordinary dierential equation of the second order with
independent variable t and dependent variable x. It is linear because x, dx/dt, and d2 x/dt2
appear in additive combination (even with constant coecients) of their first powers.
3. This equation is an ODE because it contains no partial derivatives. Since the highest order
derivative is dy/dx, the equation is a first order equation. This same term also shows us that
the independent variable is x and the dependent variable is y. This equation is nonlinear
because of the y in the denominator of the term [y(2 3x)]/[x(1 3y)] .
5. This equation is an ODE because it contains only ordinary derivatives. The term dp/dt is the
highest order derivative and thus shows us that this is a first order equation. This term also
shows us that the independent variable is t and the dependent variable is p. This equation
is nonlinear since in the term kp(P p) = kP p kp2 the dependent variable p is squared
(compare with equation (7) on page 5 of the text).
7. This equation is an ordinary first order dierential equation with independent variable x and
dependent variable y. It is nonlinear because it contains the square of dy/dx.
9. This equation contains only ordinary derivative of y with respect to x. Hence, it is an ordi-
nary dierential equation of the second order (the highest order derivative is d2 y/dx2) with
independent variable x and dependent variable y. This equation is of the form (7) on page 5
of the text and, therefore, is linear.
1
Chapter 1
11. This equation contains partial derivatives, thus it is a PDE. Because the highest order deriva-
tive is a second order partial derivative, the equation is a second order equation. The terms
N/t and N/r show that the independent variables are t and r and the dependent variable
is N.
13. Since the rate of change of a quantity means its derivative, denoting the coecient propor-
tionality between dp/dt and p(t) by k (k > 0), we get
dp
= kp.
dt
15. In this problem, T M (coee is hotter than the air), and T is a decreasing function of t,
that is dT /dt 0. Thus
dT
= k(M T ),
dt
where k > 0 is the proportionality constant.
17. In classical physics, the instantaneous acceleration, a, of an object moving in a straight line
is given by the second derivative of distance, x, with respect to time, t; that is
d2 x
= a.
dt2
Integrating both sides with respect to t and using the given fact that a is constant we obtain
dx
= at + C. (1.1)
dt
The instantaneous velocity, v, of an object is given by the first derivative of distance, x,
with respect to time, t. At the beginning of the race, t = 0, both racers have zero velocity.
Therefore we have C = 0. Integrating equation (1.1) with respect to t we obtain
1 2
x= at + C1 .
2
For this problem we will use the starting position for both competitors to be x = 0 at t = 0.
Therefore, we have C1 = 0. This gives us a general equation used for both racers as
!
1 2 2x
x = at or t= ,
2 a
2
Exercises 1.2
where the acceleration constant a has dierent values for Kevin and for Alison. Kevin covers
1
the last 4
of the full distance, L, in 3 seconds. This means Kevins acceleration, aK , is
determined by: "
!
2L 2(3L/4)
tK t3/4 = 3 = ,
aK aK
where tK is the time it takes for Kevin to finish the race. Solving this equation for aK gives,
# $ %2
2 3/2
aK = L.
9
Therefore the time required for Kevin to finish the race is given by:
&
' 2L 3
tK = '( # $ % 2 = $ 2 = 12 + 6 3 22.39 sec.
2 3/2 L/9 2 3/2
Alison covers the last 1/3 of the distance, L, in 4 seconds. This means Alisons acceleration,
aA , is found by: "
!
2L 2(2L/3)
tA t2/3 = 4 = ,
aA aA
where tA is the time required for Alison to finish the race. Solving this equation for aA gives
# $ %2
2 4/3
aA = L.
16
Therefore the time required for Alison to finish the race is given by:
&
' 2L 4
tA = '
( # $ % 2 = $ 2 = 12 + 4 6 21.80 sec.
2 4/3 (L/16) 2 4/3
The time required for Alison to finish the race is less than Kevin; therefore Alison wins the

race by 6 3 4 6 0.594 seconds.
EXERCISES 1.2: Solutions and Initial Value Problems, page 14
1. (a) Dierentiating (x) yields (x) = 6x2 . Substitution and for y and y into the given
equation, xy = 3y, gives
) * ) *
x 6x2 = 3 2x3 ,
3
Chapter 1
which is an identity on (, ). Thus (x) is an explicit solution on (, ).
(b) We compute
d d
= (ex x) = ex 1.
dx dx
Functions (x) and (x) are defined for all real numbers and
d ) *
+(x)2 = (ex 1)+(ex x)2 = (ex 1)+ e2x 2xex + x2 = e2x +(12x)ex +x2 1,
dx
which is identically equal to the right-hand side of the given equation. Thus (x) is an
explicit solution on (, ).
(c) Note that the function (x) = x2 x1 is not defined at x = 0. Dierentiating (x)
twice yields
d d ) 2 *
= x x1 = 2x (1)x2 = 2x + x2 ;
dx dx + ,
d2 d d d ) 2
* 3
) 3
*
= = 2x + x = 2 + (2)x = 2 1 x .
dx2 dx dx dx
Therefore
d2 ) 3
* ) 2 1
*
x2 = x2
2 1 x = 2 x x = 2(x),
dx2
and (x) is an explicit solution to the dierential equation x2 y = 2y on any interval not
containing the point x = 0, in particular, on (0, ).
3. Since y = sin x + x2 , we have y = cos x + 2x and y = sin x + 2. These functions are defined
on (, ). Substituting these expressions into the dierential equation y + y = x2 + 2
gives
y + y = sin x + 2 + sin x + x2 = 2 + x2 = x2 + 2 for all x in (, ).
Therefore, y = sin x + x2 is a solution to the dierential equation on the interval (, ).
5. Dierentiating x(t) = cos 2t, we get
dx d
= (cos 2t) = ( sin 2t)(2) = 2 sin 2t.
dt dt
4
Exercises 1.2
So,
dx
+ tx = 2 sin 2t + t cos 2t
sin 2t
dt
on any interval. Therefore, x(t) is not a solution to the given dierential equation.
7. We dierentiate y = e2x 3ex twice:

dy d ) 2x *
= e 3ex = e2x (2) 3ex (1) = 2e2x + 3ex ;
dx dx + ,
d2 y d dy d ) 2x *
2
= = 2e + 3ex = 2e2x (2) + 3ex (1) = 4e2x 3ex .
dx dx dx dx
Substituting y, y , and y into the dierential equation and collecting similar terms, we get
d2 y dy ) 2x x
* ) 2x x
* ) 2x x
*
2y = 4e 3e 2e + 3e 2 e 3e
dx2 dx
= (4 2 2)e2x + (3 3 2(3))ex = 0.
Hence y = e2x 3ex is an explicit solution to the given dierential equation.
9. Dierentiating the equation x2 + y 2 = 6 implicitly, we obtain

x
2x + 2yy = 0 y = .
y
Since there can be no function y = f (x) that satisfies the dierential equation y = x/y and
the dierential equation y = x/y on the same interval, we see that x2 + y 2 = 6 does not
define an implicit solution to the dierential equation.
11. Dierentiating the equation exy + y = x 1 implicitly with respect to x yields

d xy d
(e + y) = (x 1)
dx dx
d dy
exy (xy) + =1
dx
+ dx
,
xy dy dy
e y+x + =1
dx dx
dy
yexy + (xexy + 1) = 1
dx
dy 1 yexy exy (exy y) exy y
= = = .
dx 1 + xexy exy (exy + x) exy + x
5
Chapter 1
Therefore, the function y(x) defined by exy + y = x 1 is an implicit solution to the given
dierential equation.
13. Dierentiating the equation sin y + xy x3 = 2 implicitly with respect to x, we obtain
y cos y + xy + y 3x2 = 0
3x2 y
(cos y + x)y = 3x2 y y = .
cos y + x
Dierentiating the second equation above again, we obtain
(y sin y + 1)y + (cos y + x)y = 6x y

(cos y + x)y = 6x y + (y )2 sin y y = 6x 2y + (y )2 sin y
6x 2y + (y )2 sin y
y = .
cos y + x
Multiplying the right-hand side of this last equation by y /y = 1 and using the fact that
3x2 y
y = ,
cos y + x
we get
6x 2y + (y )2 sin y y
y =
cos y + x (3x2 y)/(cos y + x)
6xy 2(y )2 + (y )3 sin y
= .
3x2 y
Thus y is an implicit solution to the dierential equation.
15. We dierentiate (x) and substitute and into the dierential equation for y and y . This
yields
d(x) ) 3x *
(x) = Ce3x + 1 = Ce + 1 = 3Ce3x ;
dx
d ) * ) *
3 = 3Ce3x 3 Ce3x + 1 = (3C 3C)e3x 3 = 3,
dx
which holds for any constant C and any x on (, ). Therefore, (x) = Ce3x + 1 is a
one-parameter family of solutions to y 3y = 3 on (, ). Graphs of these functions for
C = 0, 0.5, 1, and 2 are sketched in Figure 1-A.
6
Exercises 1.2
C=2
10
C=1
C=0.5
C=0
0.5 0.5
C=0.5
C=1
10
C=2
Figure 1A: Graphs of the functions y = Ce3x + 1 for C = 0, 0.5, 1, and 2.
17. Dierentiating (x), we find that

+ ,
2 - .

(x) = = 2 (1 cex )1
1 cex
= 2(1) (1 cex )2 (1 cex ) = 2cex (1 cex )2 . (1.2)
On the other hand, substitution of (x) for y into the right-hand side of the given equation
yields
+ ,
(x)((x) 2) 1 2 2
= 2
2 2 1 cex 1 cex
+ ,
2 1 2 1 (1 cex ) 2cex
= 1 = = ,
1 cex 1 cex 1 cex 1 cex (1 cex )2
which is identical to (x) found in (1.2).
19. Squaring and adding the terms dy/dx and y in the equation (dy/dx)2 + y 2 + 3 = 0 gives a
nonnegative number. Therefore when these two terms are added to 3, the left-hand side will
always be greater than or equal to three and hence can never equal the right-hand side which
is zero.
7
Chapter 1
21. For (x) = xm , we have (x) = mxm1 and (x) = m(m 1)xm2 .
(a) Substituting these expressions into the dierential equation, 3x2 y + 11xy 3y = 0,
gives
- . - .
3x2 m(m 1)xm2 + 11x mxm1 3xm = 0
3m(m 1)xm + 11mxm 3xm = 0
[3m(m 1) + 11m 3] xm = 0
- 2 .
3m + 8m 3 xm = 0.
For the last equation to hold on an interval for x, we must have
3m2 + 8m 3 = (3m 1)(m + 3) = 0.

1
Thus either (3m 1) = 0 or (m + 3) = 0, which gives m = , 3.
3
(b) Substituting the above expressions for (x), (x), and (x) into the dierential equa-
tion, x2 y xy 5y = 0, gives
- . - . - .
x2 m(m 1)xm2 x mxm1 5xm = 0 m2 2m 5 xm = 0.
For the last equation to hold on an interval for x, we must have
m2 2m 5 = 0.
To solve for m we use the quadratic formula:

2 4 + 20
m= = 1 6.
2
23. In this problem, f (x, y) = x3 y 3 and so
f (x3 y 3)
= = 3y 2 .
y y
Clearly, f and f /y (being polynomials) are continuous on the whole xy-plane. Thus the
hypotheses of Theorem 1 are satisfied, and the initial value problem has a unique solution for
any initial data, in particular, for y(0) = 6.
8
Exercises 1.2
25. Writing
dx 4t
= = 4tx1 ,
dt x
we see that f (t, x) = 4tx1 and f (t, x)/x = (4tx1 )/x = 4tx2 . The functions
f (t, x) and f (t, x)/x are not continuous only when x = 0. Therefore, they are continuous
in any rectangle R that contains the point (2, ), but does not intersect the t-axis; for
instance, R = {(t, x) : 1 < t < 3, 2 < x < 0}. Thus, Theorem 1 applies, and the given
initial problem has a unique solution.

26. Here f (x, y) = 3x 3
y 1 and f (x, y)/y = 13 (y 1)2/3 . Unfortunately, f /y is not
continuous or defined when y = 1. So there is no rectangle containing (2, 1) in which both f
and f /y are continuous. Therefore, we are not guaranteed a unique solution to this initial
value problem.
27. Rewriting the dierential equation in the form dy/dx = x/y, we conclude that f (x, y) = x/y.
Since f is not continuous when y = 0, there is no rectangle containing the point (1, 0) in
which f is continuous. Therefore, Theorem 1 cannot be applied.
29. (a) Clearly, both functions 1 (x) 0 and 2 (x) = (x 2)3 satisfy the initial condition,
y(2) = 0. Next, we check that they also satisfy the dierential equation dy/dx = 3y 2/3 .
d1 d
= (0) = 0 = 31 (x)2/3 ;
dx dx
d2 d - . - .2/3
= (x 2)3 = 3(x 2)2 = 3 (x 2)3 = 32 (x)2/3 .
dx dx
Hence both functions, 1 (x) and 2 (x), are solutions to the initial value problem of
Exapmle 9.
(b) In this initial value problem,
f (x, y) 2 2
f (x, y) = 3y 2/3 = 3 y 2/31 = 1/3 ,
y 3 y
x0 = 0 and y0 = 107 . The function f (x, y) is continuous everywhere; f (x, y)/y is

continuous in any region which does not intersect the x-axis (where y = 0). In particular,
9
Chapter 1
both functions, f (x, y) and f (x, y)/y, are continuous in the rectangle
/ 0
R = (x, y) : 1 < x < 1, (1/2)107 < y < (2)107
containing the initial point (0, 107 ). Thus, it follows from Theorem 1 that the given
initial value problem has a unique solution in an interval about x0 .
31. (a) To try to apply Theorem 1 we must first write the equation in the form y = f (x, y).
Here f (x, y) = 4xy 1 and f (x, y)/y = 4xy 2 . Neither f nor f /y are continuous
or defined when y = 0. Therefore there is no rectangle containing (x0 , 0) in which both
f and f /y are continuous, so Theorem 1 cannot be applied.
(b) Suppose for the moment that there is such a solution y(x) with y(x0 ) = 0 and x0 = 0.
Substituting into the dierential equation we get
y(x0 )y (x0 ) 4x0 = 0 (1.3)
or
0 y (x0 ) 4x0 = 0 4x0 = 0.
Thus x0 = 0, which is a contradiction.
(c) Taking C = 0 in the implicit solution 4x2 y 2 = C given in Example 5 on page 9 gives
4x2 y 2 = 0 or y = 2x. Both solutions y = 2x and y = 2x satisfy y(0) = 0.
EXERCISES 1.3: Direction Fields, page 22
1. (a) For y = 2x,
dy d 4x 4x
= (2x) = 2 and = = 2, x = 0.
dx dx y 2x
Thus y = 2x and y = 2x are solutions to the dierential equation dy/dx = 4x/y on

any interval not containing the point x = 0.
(b) , (c) See Figures B.1 and B.2 in the answers of the text.
10
Exercises 1.3
(d) As x or x , the solution in part (b) increases unboundedly and has the lines
y = 2x and y = 2x, respectively, as slant asymptotes. The solution in part (c) also
increases without bound as x and approaches the line y = 2x, while it is not even
defined for x < 0.
3. From Figure B.3 in the answers section of the text, we conclude that, regardless of the initial
velocity, v(0), the corresponding solution curve v = v(t) has the line v = 8 as a horizontal
asymptote, that is, limt v(t) = 8. This explains the name terminal velocity for the value
v = 8.
5. (a) The graph of the directional field is shown in Figure B.4 in the answers section of the
text.
(b), (c) The direction field indicates that all solution curves (other than p(t) 0) will approach
the horizontal line (asymptote) p = 1.5 as t +. Thus limt+ p(t) = 1.5 .
(d) No. The direction field shows that populations greater than 1500 will steadily decrease,
but can never reach 1500 or any smaller value, i.e., the solution curves cannot cross
the line p = 1.5 . Indeed, the constant function p(t) 1.5 is a solution to the given
logistic equation, and the uniqueness part of Theorem 1, page 12, prevents intersections
of solution curves.
6. (a) The slope of a solution to the dierential equation dy/dx = x + sin y is given by dy/dx .
Therefore the slope at (1, /2) is equal to
dy
= 1 + sin = 2.
dx 2
(b) The solution curve is increasing if the slope of the curve is greater than zero. From part
(a) we know the slope to be x + sin y. The function sin y has values ranging from 1 to
1; therefore if x is greater than 1 then the slope will always have a value greater than
zero. This tells us that the solution curve is increasing.
(c) The second derivative of every solution can be determined by finding the derivative of
11
Chapter 1
the dierential equation dy/dx = x + sin y. Thus

+ ,
d dy d
= (x + sin y);
dx dx dx
d2 y dy
2
= 1 + (cos y) (chain rule)
dx dx
= 1 + (cos y)(x + sin y) = 1 + x cos y + sin y cos y;
d2 y 1
2
= 1 + x cos y + sin 2y.
dx 2
(d) Relative minima occur when the first derivative, dy/dx, is equal to zero and the second
derivative, d2 y/dx2 , is greater than zero. The value of the first derivative at the point
(0, 0) is given by
dy
= 0 + sin 0 = 0.
dx
This tells us that the solution has a critical point at the point (0, 0). Using the second
derivative found in part (c) we have
d2 y 1
2
= 1 + 0 cos 0 + sin 0 = 1.
dx 2
This tells us the point (0, 0) is a relative minimum.
7. (a) The graph of the directional field is shown in Figure B.5 in the answers section of the
text.
(b) The direction field indicates that all solution curves with p(0) > 1 will approach the
horizontal line (asymptote) p = 2 as t +. Thus limt+ p(t) = 2 when p(0) = 3.
(c) The direction field shows that a population between 1000 and 2000 (that is 1 < p(0) < 2)
will approach the horizontal line p = 2 as t +.
(d) The direction field shows that an initial population less than 1000 (that is 0 p(0) < 1)
will approach zero as t +.
(e) As noted in part (d), the line p = 1 is an asymptote. The direction field indicates that a
population of 900 (p(0) = 0.9) steadily decreases with time and therefore cannot increase
to 1100.
12
Exercises 1.3
9. (a) The function (x), being a solution to the given initial value problem, satisfies
d
= x (x), (0) = 1. (1.4)
dx
Thus + ,
d2 d d d d
2
= = (x (x)) = 1 = 1 x + (x),
dx dx dx dx dx
where we have used (1.4) substituting (twice) x (x) for d/dx.
(b) First we note that any solution to the given dierential equation on an interval I is
continuously diferentiable on I. Indeed, if y(x) is a solution on I, then y (x) does exist
on I, and so y(x) is continuous on I because it is dierentiable. This immediately implies
that y (x) is continuous as the dierence of two continuous functions, x and y(x).
From (1.4) we conclude that
d 11 1
1 = [x (x)] 1x=0 = 0 (0) = 1 < 0
dx x=0
and so the continuity of (x) implies that, for |x| small enough, (x) < 0. By the
Monotonicity Test, negative derivative of a function results that the function itself is
decreasing.
When x increases from zero, as far as (x) > x, one has (x) < 0 and so (x) decreases.
On the other hand, the function y = x increases unboundedly, as x . Thus, by
intermediate value theorem, there is a point, say, x > 0, where the curve y = (x)
crosses the line y = x. At this point, (x ) = x and hence (x ) = x (x ) = 0.
(c) From (b) we conclude that x is a critical point for (x) (its derivative vanishes at this
point). Also, from part (a), we see that
(x ) = 1 (x ) = 1 > 0.
Hence, by Second Derivative Test, (x) has a relative minimum at x .
2, where
(d) Remark that the arguments, used in part (c), can be applied to any point x
(2 2. Since a continuously
x) = 0, to conclude that (x) has a relative minimum at x
13
Chapter 1
dierentiable function on an interval cannot have two relative minima on an interval

without having a point of relative maximum, we conclude that x is the only point where
(x) = 0. Continuity of (x) implies that it has the same sign for all x > x and,
therefore, it is positive there since it is positive for x > x and close to x ( (x ) = 0
and (x ) > 0). By Monotonicity Test, (x) increases for x > x .
(e) For y = x 1, dy/dx = 1 and x y = x (x 1) = 1. Thus the given dierential

equation is satisfied, and y = x 1 is indeed a solution.
To show that the curve y = (x) always stays above the line y = x 1, we note that the
initial value problem
dy
= x y, y(x0 ) = y0 (1.5)
dx
has a unique solution for any x0 and y0 . Indeed, functions f (x, y) = xy and f /y 1
are continuous on the whole xy-plane, and Theorem 1, Section 1.2, applies. This implies
that the curve y = (x) always stays above the line y = x 1:
1
(0) = 1 > 1 = (x 1) 1x=0 ,
x) (2
2 with (2
and the existence of a point x x 1) would imply, by intermediate value
theorem, the existence of a point x0 , 0 < x0 x
2, satisfying y0 := (x0 ) = x0 1 and,
therefore, there would be two solutions to the initial value problem (1.5).
Since, from part (a), (x) = 1(x) = 1x+(x) = (x)(x1) > 0, we also conclude
that (x) is an increasing function and (x) < 1. Thus there exists limx (x) 1.
The strict inequality would imply that the values of the function y = (x), for x large
enough, become smaller than those of y = x 1. Therefore,
lim (x) = 1 lim [x (x)] = 1,

x x
and so the line y = x 1 is a slant asymptote for (x).
(f), (g) The direction field for given dierential equation and the curve y = (x) are shown in
Figure B.6 in the answers of the text.
14
Exercises 1.3
11. For this equation, the isoclines are given by 2x = c. These are vertical lines x = c/2. Each
element of the direction field associated with a point on x = c/2 has slope c. (See Figure B.7
in the answers of the text.)
13. For the equation y/x = x/y, the isoclines are the curves x/y = c. These are lines that
pass through the origin and have equations of the form y = mx, where m = 1/c , c = 0. If
we let c = 0 in x/y = c, we see that the y-axis (x = 0) is also an isocline. Each element
of the direction field associated with a point on an isocline has slope c and is, therefore,
perpendicular to that isocline. Since circles have the property that at any point on the circle
the tangent at that point is perpendicular to a line from that point to the center of the circle,
we see that the solution curves will be circles with their centers at the origin. But since we
cannot have y = 0 (since x/y would then have a zero in the denominator) the solutions will
not be defined on the x-axis. (Note however that a related form of this dierential equation is
yy + x = 0. This equation has implicit solutions given by the equations y 2 + x2 = C. These
solutions will be circles.) The graph of (x), the solution to the equation satisfying the initial
condition y(0) = 4, is the upper semicircle with center at the origin and passing through the
point (0, 4) (see Figure B.8 in the answers of the text).
15. For the equation dy/dx = 2x2 y, the isoclines are the curves 2x2 y = c, or y = 2x2 c. The
curve y = 2x2 c is a parabola which is open upward and has the vertex at (0, c). Three of
them, for c = 1, 0, and 2 (dotted curves), as well as the solution curve satisfying the initial
condition y(0) = 0, are depicted in Figure B.9.
17. The isoclines for the equation

dy 1
=3y+
dx x
are given by
1 1
3y+ =c y= + 3 c,
x x
which are hyperbolas having x = 0 as a vertical asymptote and y = 3 c as a horizontal
asymptote. Each element of the direction field associated with a point on such a hyperbola
has slope c. For x > 0 large enough: if an isocline is located above the line y = 3, then c 0,
15
Chapter 1
c=5
c=4
c=3
c=2
5
c=1
3
c=1
c=2
c=3
0 5 10
c=4
Figure 1B: Isoclines and the direction field for Problem 17.
and so the elements of the direction field have negative or zero slope; if an isocline is located
below the line y = 3, then c > 0, and so the elements of the direction field have positive slope.
In other words, for x > 0 large enough, at any point above the line y = 3 a solution curve
decreases passing through this point, and any solution curve increases passing through a point
below y = 3. The direction field for this dierential equation is depicted in Figure 1-B. From
this picture we conclude that any solution to the dierential equation dy/dx = 3 y + 1/x
has the line y = 3 as a horizontal asymptote.
19. Integrating both sides of the equation dy/y = dx/x yields

3 3
1 1 eC1
dy = dx ln |y| = ln |x| + C1 ln |y| = ln
y x |x|
eC1 C2
|y| = |y| = ,
|x| |x|
where C1 is an arbitrary constant and so C2 := eC1 is an arbitrary positive constant. The last
equality can be written as
C2 C
y= = ,
x x
16
Exercises 1.4
where C = C2 is any nonzero constant. The value C = 0 gives y 0 (for x = 0), which is,
clearly, also a solution to the given equation.
EXERCISES 1.4: The Approximation Method of Euler, page 28
1. In this initial value problem, f (x, y) = x/y, x0 = 0, and y0 = 1. Thus, with h = 0.1, the
recursive formulas (2) and (3) on page 25 of the text become
xn+1 = xn + h = xn + 0.1 ,
+ ,
xn
yn+1 = yn + hf (xn , yn ) = yn + 0.1 , n = 0, 1, . . . .
yn
We set n = 0 in these formulas and obtain
x1 = x0 + 0.1 = 0 + 0.1 = 0.1 ,

+ , + ,
x0 0
y1 = y0 + 0.1 = 1 + 0.1 = 1.
y0 1
Putting n = 1 in the recursive formulas yields
x2 = x1 + 0.1 = 0.1 + 0.1 = 0.2 ,

+ , + ,
x1 0.1
y2 = y1 + 0.1 = 1 + 0.1 = 1.01 .
y1 1
Continuing in the same manner, we find for n = 2, 3, and 4:
+ ,
0.2
x3 = 0.2 + 0.1 = 0.3 , y3 = 1.01 + 0.1 = 1.02980 ;
1.01
+ ,
0.3
x4 = 0.3 + 0.1 = 0.4 , y4 = 1.02980 + 0.1 = 1.05893 ;
1.02980
+ ,
0.4
x5 = 0.4 + 0.1 = 0.5 , y5 = 1.05893 + 0.1 = 1.09671 ,
1.05893
where we have rounded o all answers to five decimal places.
2. In this problem, x0 = 0, y0 = 4, h = 0.1, and f (x, y) = x/y. Thus, the recursive formulas
given in equations (2) and (3) on page 25 of the text become
xn+1 = xn + h = xn + 0.1 ,
17
Chapter 1
+ ,
xn
yn+1 = yn + hf (xn , yn ) = yn + 0.1 , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
yn
To find an approximation for the solution at the point x1 = x0 + 0.1 = 0.1, we let n = 0 in
the last recursive formula to find
+ ,
x0
y1 = y0 + 0.1 = 4 + 0.1 (0) = 4.
y0
To approximate the value of the solution at the point x2 = x1 + 0.1 = 0.2, we let n = 1 in the
last recursive formula to obtain
+ , + ,
x1 0.1 1
y2 = y1 + 0.1 = 4 + 0.1 =4 = 3.9975 3.998 .
y1 4 400
Continuing in this way we find
+ , + ,
x2 0.2
x3 = x2 + 0.1 = 0.3 , y3 = y2 + 0.1 = 3.9975 + 0.1 3.992 ,
y2 3.9975
x4 = 0.4 , y4 3.985 ,
x5 = 0.5 , y5 3.975 ,
where all of the answers have been rounded o to three decimal places.
3. Here f (x, y) = y(2 y), x0 = 0, and y0 = 3. We again use recursive formulas from Eulers
method with h = 0.1. Setting n = 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 and rounding o results to three decimal
places, we get
x1 = x0 + 0.1 = 0.1 , y1 = y0 + 0.1 [y0 (2 y0 )] = 3 + 0.1 [3(2 3)] = 2.700;

x2 = 0.1 + 0.1 = 0.2 , y2 = 2.700 + 0.1 [2.700(2 2.700)] = 2.511;
x3 = 0.2 + 0.1 = 0.3 , y3 = 2.511 + 0.1 [2.511(2 2.511)] 2.383;
x4 = 0.3 + 0.1 = 0.4 , y4 = 2.383 + 0.1 [2.383(2 2.383)] 2.292;
x5 = 0.4 + 0.1 = 0.5 , y5 = 2.292 + 0.1 [2.292(2 2.292)] 2.225 .
5. In this problem, f (x, y) = (y 2 + y)/x, x0 = y0 = 1, and h = 0.2. The recursive formulas (2)
and (3) on page 25 of the text, applied succesively with n = 1, 2, 3, and 4, yield
+ 2 , + 2 ,
y0 + y0 1 +1
x1 = x0 + 0.2 = 1.2 , y1 = y0 + 0.2 = 1 + 0.2 = 1.400;
x0 1
18
Exercises 1.4
+ ,
1.4002 + 1.400
x2 = 1.2 + 0.2 = 1.4 , y2 = 1.400 + 0.2 1.960;
1.2
+ ,
1.9602 + 1.960
x3 = 1.4 + 0.2 = 1.6 , y3 = 1.960 + 0.2 2.789;
1.4
+ ,
2.7892 + 2.789
x4 = 1.6 + 0.2 = 1.8 , y4 = 2.789 + 0.2 4.110 .
1.6
7. For this problem notice that the independent variable is t and the dependent variable is x.
Hence, the recursive formulas given in equations (2) and (3) on page 25 of the text become
tn+1 = tn + h and (tn+1 ) xn+1 = xn + hf (tn , xn ), n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
For this problem, f (t, x) = 1+t sin(tx), t0 = 0, and x0 = 0. Thus the second recursive formula
above becomes
xn+1 = xn + h [1 + tn sin(tn xn )] , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
For the case N = 1, we have h = (1 0)/1 = 1 which gives us
t1 = 0 + 1 = 1 and (1) x1 = 0 + 1 (1 + 0 sin 0) = 1.
For the case N = 2, we have h = 1/2 = 0.5 . Thus we have
t1 = 0 + 0.5 = 0.5 , x1 = 0 + 0.5 (1 + 0 sin 0) = 0.5 ,
and
t2 = 0.5 + 0.5 = 1, (1) x2 = 0.5 + 0.5 [1 + 0.5 sin(0.25)] 1.06185 .
For the case N = 4, we have h = 1/4 = 0.25 , and so the recursive formulas become
tn+1 = tn + 0.25 and xn+1 = xn + 0.25 [1 + tn sin(tn xn )] .
Therefore, we have
t1 = 0 + 0.25 = 0.25 , x1 = 0 + 0.25 [1 + 0 sin(0)] = 0.25 .
19
Chapter 1
Plugging these values into the recursive equations above yields
t2 = 0.25 + 0.25 = 0.5 and x2 = 0.25 + 0.25 [1 + 0.25 sin(0.0625)] = 0.503904 .
Continuing in this way gives
t3 = 0.75 and x3 = 0.503904 + 0.25 [1 + 0.5 sin(0.251952)] = 0.785066 ,

t4 = 1.00 and (1) x4 = 1.13920 .
For N = 8, we have h = 1/8 = 0.125 . Thus, the recursive formulas become
tn+1 = tn + 0.125 and xn+1 = xn + 0.125 [1 + tn sin(tn xn )] .
Using these formulas and starting with t0 = 0 and x0 = 0, we can fill in Table 1-A. From this
we see that (1) x8 = 1.19157, which is rounded to five decimal places.
Table 1A: Eulers method approximations for the solution of x = 1 + t sin(tx), x(0) = 0,
at t = 1 with 8 steps (h = 1/8).
n tn xn
1 0.125 0.125
2 0.250 0.250244
3 0.375 0.377198
4 0.500 0.508806
5 0.625 0.649535
6 0.750 0.805387
7 0.875 0.983634
8 1.000 1.191572
9. To approximate the solution on the whole interval [1, 2] by Eulers method with the step
h = 0.1, we first approximate the solution at the points xn = 1 + 0.1n, n = 1, . . . , 10. Then,
on each subinterval [xn , xn+1 ], we approximate the solution by the linear interval, connecting
20
Exercises 1.4
(xn , yn ) with (xn+1 , yn+1), n = 0, 1, . . . , 9. Since f (x, y) = x2 yx1 y 2 , the recursive

formulas have the form
xn+1 = xn + 0.1 ,
+ ,
1 yn 2
yn+1 = yn + 0.1 yn , n = 0, 1, . . . , 9 ,
x2n xn
x0 = 1, y0 = 1. Therefore,
+ ,
1 1 2
x1 = 1 + 0.1 = 1.1 , y1 = 1 + 0.1 2 (1) = 0.9 ;
1 1
+ ,
1 0.9 2
x2 = 1.1 + 0.1 = 1.2 , y2 = 0.9 + 0.1 (0.9) 0.81653719 ;
1.12 1.1
+ ,
1 0.81653719 2
x3 = 1.2 + 0.1 = 1.3 , y3 = 0.81653719 + 0.1 (0.81653719)
1.22 1.2
0.74572128 ;
+ ,
1 0.74572128 2
x4 = 1.3 + 0.1 = 1.4 , y4 = 0.74572128 + 0.1 (0.74572128)
1.32 1.3
0.68479653 ;
etc.
The results of these computations (rounded to five decimal places) are shown in Table 1-B.
Table 1B: Eulers method approximations for the solutions of y = x2 yx1 y 2 ,

y(1) = 1, on [1, 2] with h = 0.1.
n xn yn n xn yn
0 1.0 1.00000 6 1.6 0.58511

1 1.1 0.90000 7 1.7 0.54371
2 1.2 0.81654 8 1.8 0.50669
3 1.3 0.74572 9 1.9 0.47335
4 1.4 0.68480 10 2.0 0.44314
5 1.5 0.63176
The function y(x) = 1/x = x1 , obviously, satisfies the initial condition, y(1) = 1. Further
21
Chapter 1
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2

0
Polygonal approximation

y=1/x
Figure 1C: Polygonal line approximation and the actual solution for Problem 9.
we compute both sides of the given dierential equation:
) *
y (x) = x1 = x2 ,
) * ) *2
f (x, y(x)) = x2 x1 x1 x1 = x2 + x2 x2 = x2 .
Thus, the function y(x) = 1/x is, indeed, the solution to the given initial value problem.
The graphs of the obtained polygonal line approximation and the actual solution are sketched
in Figure 1-C.
11. In this problem, the independent variable is t and the dependent variable is x; f (t, x) = 1+x2 ,
t0 = 0, and x0 = 0.
The function (t) = tan t satisfies the initial condition: (0) = tan 0 = 0. The dierential
equation is also satisfied:
d
= sec2 t = 1 + tan2 t = 1 + (t)2 .
dt
Therefore, (t) is the solution to the given initial value problem.
22
Exercises 1.4
For approximation of (t) at the point t = 1 with N = 20 steps, we take the step size
h = (1 t0 )/20 = 0.05. Thus, the recursive formulas for Eulers method are
tn+1 = tn + 0.05 ,
) *
xn+1 = xn + 0.05 1 + x2n .
Applying these formulas with n = 0, 1, . . . , 19, we obtain

) *
x1 = x0 + 0.05 1 + x20 = 0.05 ,
) * ) *
x2 = x1 + 0.05 1 + x21 = 0.05 + 0.05 1 + 0.052 = 0.100125 ,
) * ) *
x3 = x2 + 0.05 1 + x22 = 0.100125 + 0.05 1 + 0.1001252 0.150626 ,
..
.
) *
x19 = x18 + 0.05 1 + x218 1.328148 ,
) * ) *
(1) x20 = x19 + 0.05 1 + x219 = 1.328148 + 0.05 1 + 1.3281482 1.466347 ,
which is a good enough approximation to (1) = tan 1 1.557408.
13. From Problem 12, yn = (1 + 1/n)n and so limn [(e yn )/(1/n)] is a 0/0 indeterminant. If
we let h = 1/n in yn and use LHospitals rule, we get
e yn e (1 + h)1/h g(h) g (h)

lim = lim = lim = lim ,
n 1/n h0 h h0 h h0 1
where g(h) = e (1 + h)1/h . Writing (1 + h)1/h as eln(1+h)/h the function g(h) becomes
g(h) = e eln(1+h)/h .
The first derivative is given by

4 5
d - ln(1+h)/h . ln(1+h)/h d 1
g (h) = 0 e = e ln(1 + h) .
dh dh h
Substituting Maclaurins series for ln(1 + h) we obtain

4 + ,5
1/h d 1 1 2 1 3 1 4
g (h) = (1 + h) h h + h h +
dh h 2 3 4
23
Chapter 1
4 5
d
1/h 1 1 2 1 3
= (1 + h) 1 h+ h h +
dh 2 3 4
4 5
1/h 1 2 3 2
= (1 + h) + h h + .
2 3 4
Hence
6 4 57
1/h 1 2 3 2
lim g (h) = lim (1 + h) + h h +
h0 h0 2 3 4
8 9 4 6
1 2 3 2
75
1/h
= lim (1 + h) lim + h h + .
h0 h0 2 3 4
From calculus we know that e = lim (1 + h)1/h , which gives

h0
+ ,
1 e
lim g (h) = e = .
h0 2 2
So we have
e yn e
lim = .
n 1/n 2
15. The independent variable in this problem is the time t and the dependent variable is the
temperature T (t) of a body. Thus, we will use the recursive formulas (2) and (3) on page 25
with x replaced by t and y replaced by T . In the dierential equation describing the Newtons
Law of Cooling, f (t, T ) = K(M(t) T ). With the suggested values of K = 1 (min)1 ,
M(t) 70 , h = 0.1, and the initial condition T (0) = 100 , the initial value problem becomes
dT
= 70 T, T (0) = 100,
dt
and so the recursive formulas are
tn+1 = tn + 0.1 ,
Tn+1 = Tn + 0.1(70 Tn ).
For n = 0,
t1 = t0 + 0.1 = 0.1 , T1 = T0 + 0.1(70 T0 ) = 100 + 0.1(70 100) = 97 ;
24
Exercises 1.4
for n = 1,
t2 = t1 + 0.1 = 0.2 , T2 = T1 + 0.1(70 T1 ) = 97 + 0.1(70 97) = 94.3 ;
for n = 2,
t3 = t2 + 0.1 = 0.3 , T3 = T2 + 0.1(70 T2 ) = 94.3 + 0.1(70 94.3) = 91.87 .
Table 1C: Eulers method approximations for the solutions of T = K(M T ),

T (0) = 100, with K = 1, M = 70, and h = 0.1.
n tn Tn n tn Tn
0 0.0 100.00 11 1.1 79.414

1 0.1 97.000 12 1.2 78.473
2 0.2 94.300 13 1.3 77.626
3 0.3 91.870 14 1.4 76.863
4 0.4 89.683 15 1.5 76.177
5 0.5 87.715 16 1.6 75.559
6 0.6 85.943 17 1.7 75.003
7 0.7 84.349 18 1.8 74.503
8 0.8 82.914 19 1.9 74.053
9 0.9 81.623 20 2.0 73.647
10 1.0 80.460
By continuing this way and rounding results to three decimal places, we fill in Table 1-C.
From this table we conclude that
(a) the temperature of a body after 1 minute T (1) 80.460 and
(b) its temperature after 2 minutes T (2) 73.647 .
16. For this problem notice that the independent variable is t and the dependent variable is T .
Hence, in the recursive formulas for Eulers method, the t will take the place of the x and the
25
Chapter 1
T will take the place of the y. Also we see that h = 0.1 and f (t, T ) = K (M 4 T 4 ), where
K = 404 and M = 70. The recursive formulas (2) and (3) on page 25 of the text become
tn+1 = tn + 0.1 ,
) *) *
Tn+1 = Tn + hf (tn , Tn ) = Tn + 0.1 404 704 Tn4 , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
From the initial condition, T (0) = 100, we see that t0 = 0 and T0 = 100. Therefore, for n = 0,
t1 = t0 + 0.1 = 0 + 0.1 = 0.1 ,

) *) * ) *) *
T1 = T0 + 0.1 404 704 T04 = 100 + 0.1 404 704 1004 97.0316,
where we have rounded o to four decimal places. For n = 1, we have
t2 = t1 + 0.1 = 0.1 + 0.1 = 0.2 ,

) *) * ) *) *
T2 = T1 + 0.1 404 704 T14 = 97.0316 + 0.1 404 704 97.03164 94.5068 .
By continuing this way, we fill in Table 1-D.
Table 1D: Eulers method approximations for the solution of T = K (M 4 T 4 ),

T (0) = 100, with K = 404 , M = 70, and h = 0.1.
n tn Tn n tn Tn n tn Tn
0 0 100 7 0.7 85.9402 14 1.4 79.5681

1 0.1 97.0316 8 0.8 84.7472 15 1.5 78.9403
2 0.2 94.5068 9 0.9 83.6702 16 1.6 78.3613
3 0.3 92.3286 10 1.0 82.6936 17 1.7 77.8263
4 0.4 90.4279 11 1.1 81.8049 18 1.8 77.3311
5 0.5 88.7538 12 1.2 80.9934 19 1.9 76.8721
6 0.6 87.2678 13 1.3 80.2504 20 2.0 76.4459
From this table we see that
T (1) = T (t10 ) T10 = 82.694 and T (2) = T (t20 ) T20 = 76.446 .
26
CHAPTER 2: First Order Dierential Equations
EXERCISES 2.2: Separable Equations, page 46
1. This equation is separable because we can separate variables by multiplying both sides by dx
and dividing by 2y 3 + y + 4.
3. This equation is separable because

+ ,
dy yex+y ex
= 2 = yey = g(x)p(y).
dx x +2 x2 + 2
5. Writing the equation in the form

ds s+1
= s2 ,
dt st
we see that the right-hand side cannot be represented in the form g(t)p(s). Therefore, the
equation is not separable.
7. Multiplying both sides of the equation by y 2 dx and integrating yields

3 3
2 2
y dy = (1 x )dx y dy = (1 x2 )dx
2
1 3 1
y = x x3 + C1 y 3 = 3x x3 + C
3
y= 3x x3 + C ,
3 3
where C := 3C1 is an arbitrary constant.
9. To separate variables, we divide the equation by y and multiply by dx. This results
dy dy
= y(2 + sin x) = (2 + sin x)dx
dx y
3 3
dy
= (2 + sin x)dx ln |y| = 2x cos x + C1
y
|y| = e2xcos x+C1 = eC1 e2xcos x = C2 e2xcos x ,
27
Chapter 2
where C1 is an arbitrary constant and, therefore, C2 := eC1 is an arbitrary positive constant.
We can rewrite the above solution in the form
y = C2 e2xcos x = Ce2xcos x , (2.1)
with C := C2 or C = C2 . Thus C is an arbitrary nonzero constant. The value C = 0 in

(2.1) gives y(x) 0, which is, clearly, is also a solution to the dierential equation. Therefore,
the answer to the problem is given by (2.1) with an arbitrary constant C.
11. Separating variables, we obtain

dy dx
= .
sec2 y 1 + x2
Using the trigonometric identities sec y = 1/ cos y and cos2 y = (1 + cos 2y)/2 and integrating,
we get
dy dx (1 + cos 2y)dy dx
2
= 2
=
sec y 1+x 2 1 + x2
3 3
(1 + cos 2y)dy dx
=
2 1 + x2
+ ,
1 1
y + sin 2y = arctan x + C1
2 2
2y + sin 2y = 4 arctan x + 4C1 2y + sin 2y = 4 arctan x + C.
The last equation defines implicit solutions to the given dierential equation.
13. Writing the given equation in the form dx/dt = x x2 , we separate the variables to get
dx
= dt .
x x2
Integrate (the left side is integrated by partial fractions, with 1/(x x2 ) = 1/x + 1/(1 x))
to obtain:
1 1
1 x 1
ln |x| ln |1 x| = t + c ln 11 1=t+c
1 x1
x
= et+c = Cet , where C = ec
1x
x = Cet xCet x + xCet = Cet
28
Exercises 2.2
) * Cet
x 1 + Cet = Cet x= .
1 + Cet
Note: When C is replaced by K, this answer can also be written as x = Ket /(Ket 1).
Further we observe that since we divide by x x2 = x(1 x), then x 0 and x 1 are also
solutions. Allowing K to be zero gives x 0, but no choice for K will give x 1, so we list
this as a separate solution.
15. To separate variables, we move the term containin dx to the right-hand side of the equation
and divide both sides of the result by y. This yields
y 1dy = yecos x sin x dx y 2dy = ecos x sin x dx.
Integrating the last equation, we obtain

3 3 3
2 1
y dy = (ecos x sin x) dx y +C = eu du (u = cos x)
1 1
+ C = eu = ecos x y= ,
y C ecos x
where C is an arbitrary constant.
17. First we find a general solution to the equation. Separating variables and integrating, we get
dy dy
= x3 (1 y) = x3 dx
dx 1y
3 3
dy x4
= x3 dx ln |1 y| + C1 =
1y 4
+ 4
,
x 4
|1 y| = exp C1 = Cex /4 .
4
To find C, we use the initial condition, y(0) = 3. Thus, substitution 3 for y and 0 for x into
the last equation yields
4 /4
|1 3| = Ce0 2 = C.
4 /4
Therefore, |1 y| = 2ex . Finally, since 1 y(0) = 1 3 < 0, on an interval containing
x = 0 one has 1 y(x) < 0 and so |1 y(x)| = y(x) 1. The solution to the problem is then
4 /4 4 /4
y 1 = 2ex or y = 2ex + 1.
29
Chapter 2
19. For a general solution, separate variables and integrate:

dy dy
= y sin = sin d
d y
3 3
dy
= sin d ln |y| = cos + C1
y
|y| = e cos +C1 = Ce cos y = Ce cos
(because at the initial point, = , y() < 0). We substitute now the initial condition,
y() = 3, and obtain
3 = y() = Ce cos = Ce C = 3e1 .
Hence, the answer is given by y = 3e1 e cos = 3e1cos .
21. Separate variables to obtain

1
(y + 1)1/2 dy = cos x dx.
2
Integrating, we have
(y + 1)1/2 = sin x + C.
Using the fact that y() = 0, we find
1 = sin + C C = 1.
Thus
(y + 1)1/2 = sin x + 1 y = (sin x + 1)2 1 = sin2 x + 2 sin x .
23. We have
dy dy
= 2x cos2 y = 2x dx sec2 y dy = 2x dx
dx cos2 y
3 3
2
sec y dy = 2x dx tan y = x2 + C.
Since y = /4 when x = 0, we get tan(/4) = 02 + C and so C = 1. The solution, therefore,

is
) *
tan y = x2 + 1 y = arctan x2 + 1 .
30
Exercises 2.2
25. By separating variables we obtain (1 + y)1 dy = x2 dx. Integrating yields
x3
ln |1 + y| = +C. (2.2)
3
Substituting y = 3 and x = 0 from the initial condition, we get ln 4 = 0 + C, which implies
that C = ln 4. By substituting this value for C into equation (2.2) above, we have
x3
ln |1 + y| = + ln 4 .
3
Hence,
3 /3)+ln 4 3 /3 3 /3
eln |1+y| = e(x = ex eln 4 = 4ex
3 /3 3 /3
1 + y = 4ex y = 4ex 1.
We can drop the absolute signs above because we are assuming from the initial condition that
y is close to 3 and therefore 1 + y is positive.
2
27. (a) The dierential equation dy/dx = ex separates if we multiply by dx. We integrate the
separated equation from x = 0 to x = x1 to obtain
3x1 3 1
x=x
1x=x1
x2 1
e dx = dy = y 1 = y(x1 ) y(0).
x=0
0 x=0
If we let t be the variable of integration and replace x1 by x and y(0) by 0, then we can
express the solution to the initial value problem as
3x
2
y(x) = et dt.
0
2
(b) The dierential equation dy/dx = ex y 2 separates if we multiply by y 2 and dx. We
integrate the separated equation from x = 0 to x = x1 to obtain
3x1 3x1
x2 1 3 11x=x1 1 - .
e dx = y 2 dy = y 1 = y(x1 )3 y(0)3 .
3 x=0 3
0 0
31
Chapter 2
If we let t be the variable of integration and replace x1 by x and y(0) by 1 in the above
equation, then we can express the initial value problem as
3x
2 1- .
et dt = y(x)3 1 .
3
0
Solving for y(x) we arrive at

1/3
3x
2
y(x) = 1 + 3 et dt . (2.3)
0

(c) The dierential equation dy/dx = 1 + sin x(1 + y 2 ) separates if we divide by (1 + y 2 )
and multiply by dx. We integrate the separated equation from x = 0 to x = x1 and find
3x1 3 1
x=x

1 + sin x dx = (1 + y 2 )1 dy = tan1 y(x1 ) tan1 y(0).
0 x=0
If we let t be the variable of integration and replace x1 by x and y(0) by 1 then we can
express the solution to the initial value problem by
x
3

y(x) = tan 1 + sin t dt + .
4
0
(d) We will use Simpsons rule (Appendix B) to approximate the definite integral found in
part (b). (Simpsons rule is implemented on the website for the text.) Simpsons rule
requires an even number of intervals, but we dont know how many are required to obtain
the desired three-place accuracy. Rather than make an error analysis, we will compute
the approximate value of y(0.5) using 2, 4, 6, . . . intervals for Simpsons rule until the
approximate values for y(0.5) change by less than five in the fourth place.
For n = 2, we divide [0, 0.5] into 4 equal subintervals. Thus each interval will be of length
(0.5 0)/4 = 1/8 = 0.125. Therefore, the integral is approximated by
30.5
2 1 8 0 2 2 2 2
9
ex dx = e + 4e(0.125) + 2e(0.25) + 4e(0.325) + e(0.5) 0.544999003 .
24
0
32
Exercises 2.2
Substituting this value into equation (2.3) from part (b) yields
y(0.5) [1 + 3(0.544999003)]1/3 1.38121 .
Repeating these calculations for n = 3, 4, and 5 yields Table 2-A.
Table 2A: Successive approximations for y(0.5) using Simpsons rule.

Number of Intervals y (0.5)
6 1.38120606
8 1.38120520
10 1.38120497
Since these values do not change by more than 5 in the fourth place, we can conclude that
the first three places are accurate and that we have obtained an approximate solution
y(0.5) 1.381 .
29. (a) Separating variables and integrating yields

3 3
dy dy
= dx = dx
y 1/3 y 1/3
+ ,3/2 + ,3/2
1 2/3 2 2 2x
y = x + C1 y= x + C1 = +C .
2/3 3 3 3
(b) Using the initial condition, y(0) = 0, we find that

4 53/2
2(0)
0 = y(0) = +C = C 3/2 C = 0,
3
and so y = (2x/3 + 0)3/2 = (2x/3)3/2 , x 0, is a solution to the initial value problem.
(c) The function y(x) 0, clearly, satisfies both, the dierential equation dy/dx = y 1/3 and
the initial condition y(0) = 0.
(d) In notation of Theorem 1 on page 12, f (x, y) = y 1/3 and so

f d ) 1/3 * 1 2/3 1
= y = y = 2/3 .
y dy 3 3y
33
Chapter 2
Since f /y is not continuous when y = 0, there is no rectangle containing the point

(0, 0) in which both, f and f /y, are continuous. Therefore, Theorem 1 does not apply
to this initial value problem.
30. (a) Dividing the equation by (y + 1)2/3 and multiplying by dx separate variables. Thus we
get
dy dy
= (x 3)(y + 1)2/3 = (x 3)dx
dx (y + 1)2/3
3 3
dy 1/3 x2
= (x 3)dx 3(y + 1) = 3x + C1
(y + 1)2/3 2
+ 2 ,3 + 2 ,3
x C1 x
y+1= x+ y = 1 + x + C . (2.4)
6 3 6
(b) Substitution y(x) 1 into the dierential equation gives

d(1)
= (x 3)[(1) + 1]2/3 0 = (x 3) 0,
dx
which is an identity. Therefore, y(x) 1 is, indeed, a solution.
(c) With any choice of constant C, x2 /6 x + C is a quadratic polynomial which is not

3
identically zero. So, in (2.4), y = 1 + (x2 /6 x + C)
1 for all C, and the solution
y(x) 1 was lost in separation of variables.
31. (a) Separating variables and integrating yields

3 3
dy dy
= x dx = x dx
y3 y3
1 2 1 2
y = x + C1 y 2 = x2 2C1
2 2
x2 + y 2 = C, (2.5)
where C := 2C1 is an arbitrary constant.
(b) To find the solution satisfying the initial condition y(0) = 1, we substitute in (2.5) 0 for
x and 1 for y and obtain
02 + 12 = C C=1 x2 + y 2 = 1.
34
Exercises 2.2
Solving for y yields

1
y = . (2.6)
1 x2
Since, at the initial point, x = 0, y(0) = 1 > 1, we choose the positive sign in the above
expression for y. Thus, the solution is
1
y= .
1 x2
Similarly we find solutions for the other two initial conditions:
1 1
y(0) = C=4 y= ;
2 4 x2
1 1
y(0) = 2 C= y=$ .
4 (1/4) x2
(c) For the solution to the first initial problem in (b), y(0) = 1, the domain is the set of all
values of x satisfying two conditions
>
1 x2 0 (for existence of the square root)
2
1 x2 > 0.
1 x = 0 (for existence of the quotient)
Solving for x, we get
x2 < 1 |x| < 1 or 1 < x < 1.
In the same manner, we find domains for solutions to the other two initial value problems:
1
y(0) = 2 < x < 2 ;
2
1 1
y(0) = 2 <x< .
2 2
(d) First, we find the solution to the initial value problem y(0) = a, a > 0, and its domain.
Following the lines used in (b) and (c) for particular values of a, we conclude that
1
y(0) = a 02 + a2 = C y= and so its domain is
a2 x2
1 1
a2 x2 > 0 x2 < a2 <x< .
a a
As a +0, 1/a +, and the domain expands to the whole real line; as a +,
1/a 0, and the domain shrinks to x = 0.
35
Chapter 2
1
a= 2 a=1 a=2
2 0 2
1
a= 2 a=1 a=2
Figure 2A: Solutions to the initial value problem y = xy 3 , y(0) = a, a 0.5, 1,

and 2.
(e) For the values a = 1/2, 1, and 2 the solutions are found in (b); for a = 1, we just have
to choose the negative sign in (2.6); similarly, we reverse signs in the other two solutions
in (b) to obtain the answers for a = 1/2 and 2. The graphs of these functions are
shown in Figure 2-A.
33. Let A(t) be the number of kilograms of salt in the tank at t minutes after the process begins.
Then we have
dA(t)
= rate of salt in rate of salt out.
dt
rate of salt in = 10 L/min 0.3 kg/L = 3 kg/min.
Since the tank is kept uniformly mixed, A(t)/400 is the mass of salt per liter that is flowing
out of the tank at time t. Thus we have
A(t) A(t)
rate of salt out = 10 L/min kg/L = kg/min.
400 40
36
Exercises 2.2
Therefore,
dA A 120 A
=3 = .
dt 40 40
Separating this dierential equation and integrating yield
40
dA = dt 40 ln |120 A| = t + C
120 A
t C
ln |120 A| = + C, where is replaced by C
40 40
120 A = Cet/40 , where C can now be positive or negative
A = 120 Cet/40 .
There are 2 kg of salt in the tank initially, thus A(0) = 2. Using this initial condition, we find
2 = 120 C C = 118 .
Substituting this value of C into the solution, we have
A = 120 118et/40 .
Thus
A(10) = 120 118e10/40 28.1 kg.
Note: There is a detailed discussion of mixture problems in Section 3.2.
35. In Problem 34 we saw that the dierential equation dT /dt = k(M T ) can be solved by
separation of variables to yield
T = Cekt + M.
When the oven temperature is 120 we have M = 120. Also T (0) = 40. Thus
40 = C + 120 C = 80.
Because T (45) = 90, we have

+ ,
45k 3 3
90 = 80e + 120 = e45k 45k = ln .
8 8
Thus k = ln(3/8)/45 0.02180. This k is independent of M. Therefore, we have the
general equation
T (t) = Ce0.02180t + M.
37
Chapter 2
(a) We are given that M = 100. To find C we must solve the equation T (0) = 40 = C + 100.
This gives C = 60. Thus the equation becomes
T (t) = 60e0.02180t + 100.
We want to solve for t when T (t) = 90. This gives us
1
90 = 60e0.02180t + 100 = e0.02180t
+ , 6
1
0.0218t = ln 0.0218t = ln 6 .
6
Therefore t = ln 6/0.0218 82.2 min.
(b) Here M = 140, so we solve
T (0) = 40 = C + 140 C = 100.
As above, solving for t in the equation
T (t) = 100e0.02180t + 140 = 90 t 31.8 .
(c) With M = 80, we solve

40 = C + 80,
yielding C = 40. Setting
1
T (t) = 40e0.02180t + 80 = 90 = e0.02180t .
4
This last equation is impossible because an exponential function is never negative. Hence
it never attains desired temperature. The physical nature of this problem would lead
us to expect this result. A further discussion of Newtons law of cooling is given in
Section 3.3.
37. The dierential equation

dP r
= P
dt 100
38
Exercises 2.2
separates if we divide by P and multiply by dt.

3 3
1 r r
dP = dt ln P = t+C P (t) = Kert/100 ,
P 100 100
where K is the initial amount of money in the savings account, K = $1000, and r% is the
interest rate, r = 5. This results in
P (t) = 1000e5t/100 . (2.7)
(a) To determine the amount of money in the account after 2 years we substitute t = 2 into
equation (2.7), which gives
P (2) = 1000e10/100 = $1105.17 .
(b) To determine when the account will reach $4000 we solve equation (2.7) for t with
P = $4000:
4000 = 1000e5t/100 e5t/100 = 4 t = 20 ln 4 27.73 years.
(c) To determine the amount of money in the account after 3 12 years we need to determine
the value of each $1000 deposit after 3 12 years has passed. This means that the initial
$1000 is in the account for the entire 3 12 years and grows to the amount which is given
by P0 = 1000e5(3.5)/100 . For the growth of the $1000 deposited after 12 months, we take
t = 2.5 in equation (2.7) because that is how long this $1000 will be in the account. This
gives P1 = 1000e5(2.5)/100 . Using the above reasoning for the remaining deposits we arrive
at P2 = 1000e5(1.5)/100 and P3 = 1000e5(0.5)/100 . The total amount is determined by the
sum of the Pi s.
- .
P = 1000 e5(3.5)/100 + e5(2.5)/100 + e5(1.5)/100 + e5(0.5)/100 $4, 427.59 .
39. Let s(t), t > 0, denote the distance traveled by driver A from the time t = 0 when he ran
out of gas to time t. Then driver As velocity vA (t) = ds/dt is a solution to the initial value
problem
dvA
= kvA2 , vA (0) = vB ,
dt
39
Chapter 2
where vB is driver Bs constant velocity, and k > 0 is a positive constant. Separating variables
we get
3 3
dvA dvA 1
= k dt = k dt = kt + C .
vA2 vA2 vA (t)
From the initial condition we find
1 1 1
= =k0+C =C C= .
vB vA (0) vB
Thus
1 vB
vA (t) = = .
kt + 1/vB vB kt + 1
The function s(t) therefore satisfies
ds vB
= , s(0) = 0.
dt vB kt + 1
Integrating we obtain
3
vB 1
s(t) = dt = ln (vB kt + 1) + C1 .
vB kt + 1 k
To find C1 we use the initial condition:
1
0 = s(0) = ln (vB k 0 + 1) + C1 = C1 C1 = 0.
k
So,
1
s(t) = ln (vB kt + 1) .
k
At the moment t = t1 when driver As speed was halved, i.e., vA (t1 ) = vA (0)/2 = vB /2, we
have
1 vB 1
vB = vA (t1 ) = and 1 = s(t1 ) = ln (vB kt1 + 1)
2 vB kt1 + 1 k
vB kt1 + 1 = 2 and so k = ln (vB kt1 + 1) = ln 2
1
s(t) = ln (vB t ln 2 + 1) .
ln 2
40
Exercises 2.3
Since driver B was 3 miles behind driver A at time t = 0, and his speed remained constant,
he finished the race at time tB = (3 + 2)/vB = 5/vB . At this moment, driver A had already
gone
+ ,
1 1 5
s(tB ) = ln (vB tB ln 2 + 1) = ln vB ln 2 + 1
ln 2 ln 2 vB
1
= ln (5 ln 2 + 1) 2.1589 > 2 miles,
ln 2
i.e., A won the race.
EXERCISES 2.3: Linear Equations, page 54
1. Writing
dy
x2 y = x2 cos x ,
dx
we see that this equation has the form (4) on page 50 of the text with P (x) = x2 and
Q(x) = x2 cos x. Therefore, it is linear.
Isolating dy/dx yields

dy y cos x
= .
dx x2
Since the right-hand side cannot be represented as a product g(x)p(y), the equation is not
separable.
3. In this equation, the independent variable is t and the dependent variable is x. Dividing by
x, we obtain
dx sin t
= t2 .
dt x
Therefore, it is neither linear, because of the sin t/x term, nor separable, because the right-
hand side is not a product of functions of single variables x and t.
5. This is a linear equation with independent variable t and dependent variable y. This is also
a separable equation because
+ ,
dy y(t 1) t1
= 2 = y = g(t)p(y).
dt t +1 t2 + 1
41
Chapter 2
7. In this equation, P (x) 1 and Q(x) = e3x . Hence the integrating factor
+3 , +3 ,
(x) = exp P (x)dx = exp (1)dx = ex .
Multiplying both sides of the equation by (x) and integrating, we obtain
dy
x x x 3x 2x d (ex y)
e e y =e e =e = e2x
dx 3 dx
x 2x 1 2x
e y = e dx = e + C
2
+ ,
1 2x e3x
y= e + C ex = + Cex .
2 2
9. This is a linear equation with dependent variable r and independent variable . The method
we will use to solve this equation is exactly the same as the method we use to solve an
equation in the variables x and y since these variables are just dummy variables. Thus we
have P () = tan and Q() = sec which are continuous on any interval not containing odd
multiples of /2. We proceed as usual to find the integrating factor (). We have
+3 ,
1
() = exp tan d = e ln | cos |+C = K = K| sec |, where K = eC .
| cos |
Thus we have
() = sec ,
where we can drop the absolute value sign by making K = 1 if is in an interval where sec is
positive or by making K = 1 if sec is negative. Multiplying the equation by the integrating
factor yields
dr
sec + (sec tan )r = sec2 D (r sec ) = sec2 .
d
Integrating with respect to yields
3
r sec = sec2 d = tan + C r = cos tan + C cos r = sin + C cos .
Because of the continuity of P () and Q() this solution is valid on any open interval that
has end points that are consecutive odd multiples of /2.
42
Exercises 2.3
11. Choosing t as the independent variable and y as the dependent variable, we put the equation
put into standard form:
dy dy
t+y+1 =0 y = t + 1. (2.8)
dt dt
-? .
Thus P (t) 1 and so (t) = exp (1)dt = et . We multiply both sides of the second
equation in (2.8) by (t) and integrate. This yields
dy d ) t *
et et y = (t + 1)et e y = (t + 1)et
dt 3 dt 3
e y = (t + 1)e dt = (t + 1)e + et dt
t t t
= (t + 1)et et + C = (t + 2)et + C
) *
y = et (t + 2)et + C = t 2 + Cet ,
?
where we have used integration by parts to find (t + 1)et dt.
13. In this problem, the independent variable is y and the dependent variable is x. So, we divide
the equation by y to rewrite it in standard form.
dx dx 2
y + 2x = 5y 2 + x = 5y 2.
dy dy y
Therefore, P (y) = 2/y and the integrating factor, (y), is

+3 ,
2
(y) = exp dy = exp (2 ln |y|) = |y|2 = y 2 .
y
Multiplying the equation (in standard form) by y 2 and integrating yield
dx d ) 2 *
y2 + 2y x = 5y 4 y x = 5y 4
dy dy
3
) *
y 2x = 5y 4 dy = y 5 + C x = y 2 y 5 + C = y 3 + Cy 2.
15. To put this linear equation in standard form, we divide by (x2 + 1) to obtain
dy x x
+ 2 y= 2 . (2.9)
dx x + 1 x +1
43
Chapter 2
Here P (x) = x/(x2 + 1), so

3 3
x 1
P (x) dx = 2
dx = ln(x2 + 1).
x +1 2
Thus the integrating factor is
= eln[(x ] = (x2 + 1)1/2 .

2 +1) 2 +1)1/2
(x) = e(1/2) ln(x
Multiplying equation (2.9) by (x) yields
dy x x
(x2 + 1)1/2 + 2 1/2
y= 2 ,
dx (x + 1) (x + 1)1/2
which becomes
d - 2 . x
(x + 1)1/2 y = 2 .
dx (x + 1)1/2
Now we integrate both sides and solve for y to find
(x2 + 1)1/2 y = (x2 + 1)1/2 + C y = 1 + C(x2 + 1)1/2 .
This solution is valid for all x since P (x) and Q(x) are continuous for all x.
17. This is a linear equation with P (x) = 1/x and Q(x) = xex which is continuous on any
interval not containing 0. Therefore, the integrating factor is given by
43 + , 5
1 1
(x) = exp dx = e ln x = , for x > 0.
x x
Multiplying the equation by this integrating factor yields
1 dy y #y %
2 = ex Dx = ex .
x dx x x
Integrating gives
y
= ex + C y = xex + Cx.
x
Now applying the initial condition, y(1) = e 1, we have
e1=e+C C = 1.
44
Exercises 2.3
Thus, the solution is

y = xex x, on the interval (0, ).
Note: This interval is the largest interval containing the initial value x = 1 in which P (x) and
Q(x) are continuous.
19. In this problem, t is the independent variable and x is the dependent variable. One can notice
that the left-hand side is the derivative of xt3 with respect to t. Indeed, using product rule
for dierentiation, we get
d ) 3 * dx 3 d (t3 ) dx
xt = t +x = t3 + 3t2 x.
dt dt dt dt
Thus the equation becomes

3
d ) 3* 3 t2
xt = t xt = t dt = + C
dt 2
+ 2 ,
t 1 C
x = t3 +C = + 3.
2 2t t
(Of course, one could divide the given equation by t3 to get standard form, conclude that
P (t) = 3/t, find that (t) = t3 , multiply by t3 back, and come up with the original equation.)
We now use the initial condition, x(2) = 0, to find C.
1 C 1 C
0 = x(2) = + 3 + =0 C = 2.
2(2) 2 4 8
Hence, the solution is x = 1/(2t) 2/(t3 ).
21. Putting the equation in standard form yields
dy sin x dy
+ y = 2x cos x + (tan x)y = 2x cos x.
dx cos x dx
Therefore, P (x) = tan x and so

+3 ,
(x) = exp tan x dx = exp ( ln | cos x|) = | cos x|1 .
45
Chapter 2
At the initial point, x = /4, cos(/4) > 0 and, therefore, we can take (x) = (cos x)1 .
Multiplying the standard form of the given equation by (x) gives
+ ,
1 dy sin x d 1
+ y = 2x y = 2x
cos x dx cos2 x dx cos x
3
1 ) *
y = 2x dx = x2 + C y = cos x x2 + C .
cos x
From the initial condition, we find C:
# % 4 5
15 2 2 # %2
=y = cos +C C = 2 .
32 4 4 4
Hence, the solution is given by y = cos x (x2 2 ).
23. We proceed similarly to Example 2 on page 52 and obtain an analog of the initial value
problem (13), that is,
dy
+ 5y = 40e20t , y(0) = 10. (2.10)
dt
)? *
Thus P (t) 5 and (t) = exp 5dt = e5t . Multiplying the dierential equation in (2.10)
by (t) and integrating, we obtain
dy
e5t + 5e5t y = 40e20t e5t = 40e15t
dt 3
d (e5t y) 15t 40 15t
= 40e e y = 40e15t dt =
5t
e + C.
dt 15
Therefore, a general solution to the dierential equation in (2.10) is
+ ,
5t 40 15t 8
y=e e + C = Ce5t e20t .
15 3
Finally, we find C using the initial condition.
8 200 8 8 38
10 = y(0) = Ce50 e =C C = 10 + = .
3 3 3 3
Hence, the mass of RA2 for t 0 is given by
38 5t 8 20t
y(t) = e e .
3 3
46
Exercises 2.3
25. (a) This is a linear problem and so an integrating factor is

+3 ,
) *
(x) = exp 2x dx = exp x2 .
Multiplying the equation by this integrating factor yields

dy 2 2 2
# 2% 2
ex + 2xex y = ex Dx yex = ex
dx
3x # 2% 3x
2
Dt ye dt = et dt,
t
2 2
where we have changed the dummy variable x to t and integrated with respect to t from
2 (since the initial value for x in the initial condition is 2) to x. Thus, since y(2) = 1,

3x 3x 3x
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
yex e4 = et dt y = ex e4 + et dt = e4x + ex et dt .
2 2 2
(b) We will use Simpsons rule (page A.3 of the Appendix B) to approximate the definite
integral found in part (a) with upper limit x = 3. Simpsons rule requires an even
number of intervals, but we dont know how many are required to obtain the desired 3
place accuracy. Rather than make an error analysis, we will compute the approximate
value of y(3) using 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, . . . intervals for Simpsons rule until the approximate
values for y(3) change by less than 5 in the fourth place. For n = 2 we divide [2, 3] into 4
equal subintervals. Thus, each subinterval will be of length (3 2)/4 = 1/4. Therefore,
the integral is approximated by
33
t2 1 8 (2)2 (2.25)2 (2.5)2 (2.75)2 (3)2
9
e dt e +e +e +e +e 1460.354350 .
12
2
2 2
Dividing this by e(3) and adding e43 = e5 , gives
y(3) 0.186960 .
Doing calculations for 6, 8, 10, and 12 intervals yields Table 2-B.
47
Chapter 2
Table 2B: Successive approximations for y(3) using Simpsons rule.

Number of Intervals y (3)
6 0.183905
8 0.183291
10 0.183110
12 0.183043
Since the last 3 approximate values do not change by more than 5 in the fourth place,
it appears that their first three places are accurate and the approximate solution is
y(3) 0.183 .

27. (a) The given dierential equation is in standard form. Thus P (x) = 1 + sin2 x. Since
?
we cannot express P (x) dx as an elementary function, we use fundamental theorem of
calculus to conclude that, with any fixed constant a,
x
3
P (t)dt = P (x),
a
that is, the above definite integral with variable upper bound is an antiderivative of P (x).
Since, in the formula for (x), one can choose any antiderivative of P (x), we take the
above definite integral with a = 0. (Such a choice of a comes from the initial point x = 0
and makes it easy to satisfy the initial condition.) Therefore, the integrating factor (x)
can be chosen as x
3 $
(x) = exp 1 + sin2 t dt .
0
Multiplying the dierential equaion by (x) and integrating from x = 0 to x = s, we

obtain
d[(x)y]
= (x)x d[(x)y] = (x)x dx
dx
48
Exercises 2.3
3s 3s 1x=s 3s
1
d[(x)y] = (x)x dx (x)y(x) 1 = (x)x dx
x=0
0 0 0
3s
(s)y(s) (0)y(0) = (x)x dx .
0
From the initial condition, y(0) = 2. Also, note that

0
3 $
(0) = exp 1 + sin2 t dt = e0 = 1.
0
This yields (0)y(0) = 2 and so

3s
(s)y(s) = (x)x dx + 2 .
0
Dividing by (s) and interchanging x and s give the required.
(b) The values of (x), x = 0.1, 0.2, . . ., 1.0, approximated by using Simpsons rule, are
given in Table 2-C.
?x
Table 2C: Approximations of (x) = 0
1 + sin2 t dt and (x) = e(x) using Simpsons
rule.
x (x) (x) x (x) (x)
0.0 0.0 1.0000 0.6 0.632016 1.881401

0.1 0.100166 1.105354 0.7 0.748903 2.114679
0.2 0.201315 1.223010 0.8 0.869917 2.386713
0.3 0.304363 1.355761 0.9 0.994980 2.704670
0.4 0.410104 1.506975 1.0 1.123865 3.076723
0.5 0.519172 1.680635
?1
We now use these values of (x) to approximate 0
(s)s ds by applying Simpsons rule
again. With n = 5 and
10
h= = 0.1
2n
49
Chapter 2
the Simpsons rule becomes

31
0.1
(s)s ds [(0)(0) + 4(0.1)(0.1) + 2(0.2)(0.2) + 4(0.3)(0.3)
3
0
+2(0.4)(0.4) + 4(0.5)(0.5) + 2(0.6)(0.6) + 4(0.7)(0.7)
+2(0.8)(0.8) + 4(0.9)(0.9) + (1.0)(1.0)] 1.064539 .
Therefore,
31
1 2 1 2
y(1) (s)s ds + = 1.064539 + = 0.9960 .
(1) (1) 3.076723 3.076723
0
(c) We rewrite the dierential equation in the form used in Eulers method,
dy $
= x 1 + sin2 x y , y(0) = 2,
dx

and conclude that f (x, y) = x 1 + sin2 xy. Thus the recursive formulas (2) and (3)
on page 25 of the text become
xn+1 = xn + h,
# $ %
yn+1 = yn + h xn 1 + sin2 xn yn , n = 0, 1, . . . ,
x0 = 0, y0 = 2. With h = 0.1 we need (1 0)/0.1 steps to get an approximation at

x = 1.
$
n = 0 : x1 = 0.1 , y1 = (2) + 0.1[(0) 1 + sin2 (0) (2)] = 1.8000;
$
n = 1 : x2 = 0.2 , y2 = (1.8) + 0.1[(0.1) 1 + sin2 (0.1) (1.8)] 1.6291;
$
n = 2 : x3 = 0.3 , y3 = (1.6291) + 0.1[(0.2) 1 + sin2 (0.2) (1.6291)] 1.4830;
..
.
Results of these computations, rounded o to four decimal places, are given in Table 2-D.
Thus Eulers method with step h = 0.1 gives y(1) 0.9486 .
Next we take h = 0.05 and fill in the Table 2-E. So, with step h = 0.05, we have
y(1) 0.9729 .
50
Exercises 2.3

Table 2D: Eulers method approximations for the solution of y + y 1 + sin2 x = x,
y(0) = 2, at x = 1 with h = 0.1.
k xk yk k xk yk k xk yk
0 0.0 2.0000 4 0.4 1.3584 8 0.8 1.0304

1 0.1 1.8000 5 0.5 1.2526 9 0.9 0.9836
2 0.2 1.6291 6 0.6 1.1637 10 1.0 0.9486
3 0.3 1.4830 7 0.7 1.0900

Table 2E: Eulers method approximations for the solution of y + y 1 + sin2 x = x,
y(0) = 2, at x = 1 with h = 0.05.
n xn yn n xn yn n xn yn
0 0.00 2.0000 7 0.35 1.4368 14 0.70 1.1144

1 0.05 1.9000 8 0.40 1.3784 15 0.75 1.0831
2 0.10 1.8074 9 0.45 1.3244 16 0.80 1.0551
3 0.15 1.7216 10 0.50 1.2747 17 0.85 1.0301
4 0.20 1.6420 11 0.55 1.2290 18 0.90 1.0082
5 0.25 1.5683 12 0.60 1.1872 19 0.95 0.9892
6 0.30 1.5000 13 0.65 1.1490 20 1.00 0.9729
29. In the presented form, the equation

dy 1
= 4y
dx e + 2x
is, clearly, not linear. But, if we switch the roles of variables and consider y as the independent
variable and x as the dependent variable (using the connection between derivatives of inverse
functions, that is, the formula y (x) = 1/x (y)), then the equation transforms to
dx dx
= e4y + 2x 2x = e4y .
dy dy
This is a linear equation with P (y) = 2. Thus the integrating factor is
+3 ,
(y) = exp (2)dy = e2y
51
Chapter 2
and so 3
d ) 2y * 2y 4y 2y 2y e2y
e x =e e =e e x = e2y dy = + C.
dy 2
Solving for x yields + 2y ,
2y e e4y
x=e +C = + Ce2y .
2 2
31. (a) On the interval 0 x 2, we have P (x) = 1. Thus we are solving the equation
dy
+ y = x, y(0) = 1.
dx
The integrating factor is given by
+3 ,
(x) = exp dx = ex .
Multiplying the equation by the integrating factor, we obtain

3
xdy
e + ex y = xex x
Dx [e y] = xe x
x
e y= xex dx .
dx
Calculating this integral by parts and dividing by ex yields
y = ex (xex ex + C) = x 1 + Cex .
(b) Using the initial condition, y(0) = 1, we see that
1 = y(0) = 0 1 + C = 1 + C C = 2.
Thus the solution becomes

y = x 1 + 2ex .
(c) In the interval x > 2, we have P (x) = 3. Therefore, the integrating factor is given by
+3 ,
(x) = exp 3 dx = e3x .
Multiplying the equation by this factor and solving yields

3
dy ) *
e3x + 3e3x y = xe3x Dx e3x y = xe3x 3x
e y= xe3x dx .
dx
Integrating by parts and dividing by e3x gives
4 5
3x 1 1 3x x 1
y=e xe e + C = + Ce3x .
3x
3 9 3 9
52
Exercises 2.3
(d) We want the value of the initial point for the solution in part (c) to be the value of the
solution found in part (b) at the point x = 2. This value is given by
y(2) = 2 1 + 2e2 = 1 + 2e2 .
Thus the initial point we seek is
y(2) = 1 + 2e2 .
Using this initial point to find the constant C given in part (c) yields
2 1 4 6
1 + 2e2 = y(2) = + Ce6 C= e + 2e4 .
3 9 9
Thus, the solution of the equation on the interval x > 2 is given by
4 5
x 1 4 6
y= + e + 2e e3x .
4
3 9 9
Patching these two solutions together gives us a continuous solution to the original equa-
tion on the interval x 0:

x 1 + 2ex , 0 x 2;

y= + ,

x 1 4 6

+ e + 2e e3x , 2 < x.
4
3 9 9
(e) The graph of the solution is given in Figure B.18 of the answers in the text.
33. (a) Writing the equation in standard form yields

dy 2
+ y = 3.
dx x
Therefore, P (x) = 2/x and
+3 ,
2
(x) = exp dx = exp (2 ln |x|) = |x|2 = x2 .
x
Hence
3
d ) 2 * C
x y = 3x2 2
xy= 3x2 dx = x3 + C y =x+
dx x2
53
Chapter 2
is a general solution to the given dierential equation. Unless C = 0 and so y = x, the

function y = x + C/x2 is not defined when x = 0. Therefore, among all solutions, the
only function defined at x = 0 is (x) = x, and the initial value problem with y(0) = y0
has a solution (and unique) if and only if
1
1
y0 = (x) 1 = 0.
x=0
(b) Standard form of the equation xy 2y = 3x is

dy 2
y = 3.
dx x
-? .
This gives P (x) = 2/x, (x) = exp (2/x)dx = x2 , and
3
d ) 2 * 2
x y = 3x x y = 3x2 dx = 3x1 + C
2
y = 3x + Cx2 .
dx
Therefore, any solution is a polynomial and so is defined for all real numbers. Moreover,
any solution satisfies the initial condition y(0) = 0 because
1
1
3x + Cx2 1 = 3(0) + C(0)2 = 0
x=0
and, therefore, is a solution to the initial value problem. (This also implies that the
initial value problem with y(0) = y0 = 0 has no solution.)
35. (a) This part of the problem is similar to Problem 33 in Section 2.2. So, we proceed in the
same way.
Let A(t) denote the mass of salt in the tank at t minutes after the process begins. Then
we have
rate of input = 5 L/min 0.2 kg/L = 1 kg/min ,

A(t) A(t)
rate of exit = 5 L/min kg/L = kg/min ,
500 100
dA A 100 A
=1 = .
dt 100 100
Separating this dierential equation yields dA/(100 A) = dt/100. Integrating, we
obtain
t
ln |100 A| = + C1 |100 A| = et/100C1 = eC1 et/100
100
54
Exercises 2.3
) *
100 A = Cet/100 C = eC1 A = 100 Cet/100 .
The initial condition, A(0) = 5 (initially, there were 5 kg of salt in the tank) implies that
5 = A(0) = 100 C C = 95.
Substituting this value of C into the solution, we have
A(t) = 100 95et/100 .
Thus the mass of salt in the tank after 10 min is
A(10) = 100 95e10/100 14.04 kg ,
which gives the concentration 14.04 kg/500 L 0.0281 kg/L.
(b) After the leak develops, the system satisfies a new dierential equation. While the rate of
input remains the same, 1 kg/min, the rate of exit is now dierent. Since, every minute,
5 liters of the solution is coming in and 5 + 1 = 6 liters are going out, the volume of
the solution in the tank decreases by 6 5 = 1 liter per minute. Thus, for t 10, the
volume of the solution in the tank is 500 1 (t 10) = 510 t liters. This gives the
concentration of salt in the tank
A(t)
kg/L (2.11)
510 t
and
A(t) 6A(t)
rate of exit = 6 L/min kg/L = kg/min .
510 t 510 t
Hence, the dierential equation, for t > 10, becomes
dA 6A dA 6A
=1 + =1
dt 510 t dt 510 t
with the initial condition A(10) = 14.04 (the value found in (a) ). This equation is a
linear equation. We have
+3 ,
6
(t) = exp dt = exp (6 ln |510 t|) = (510 t)6
510 t
55
Chapter 2
d - .
(510 t)6 A = 1 (510 t)6 = (510 t)6
dt 3
1
(510 t) A = (510 t)6 dt = (510 t)5 + C
6
5
1
A = (510 t) + C(510 t)6 .
5
Using the initial condition, A(10) = 14.04, we compute C.
1 85.96
14.04 = A(10) = (510 10) + C(510 10)6 C= .
5 (500)6
Therefore,
+ ,6
1 85.96 1 510 t
A(t) = (510 t) 6
(510 t)6 = (510 t) 85.96
5 (500) 5 500
and, according to (2.11), the concentration of salt is given by
+ ,6
A(t) 1 85.96 510 t
= .
510 t 5 510 t 500
20 minutes after the leak develops, that is, when t = 30, the concentration will be
+ ,6
1 85.96 510 30
0.0598 kg/L .
5 510 30 500
37. We are solving the equation

+ ,
dx t
+ 2x = 1 cos , x(0) = 10.
dt 12
This is a linear problem with dependent variable x and independent variable t so that P (t) = 2.
Therefore, to solve this equation we first must find the integrating factor (t).
+3 ,
(t) = exp 2 dt = e2t .
Multiplying the equation by this factor yields

4 + ,5 + ,
2t dx 2t 2t t 2t 2t t
e + 2xe = e 1 cos = e e cos
dt 12 12
3 3 + , 3 + ,
2t 2t 2t t 1 2t 2t t
xe = e dt e cos dt = e e cos dt.
12 2 12
56
Exercises 2.3
The last integral can be found by integrating by parts twice which leads back to an integral
similar to the original. Combining these two similar integrals and simplifying, we obtain
3 + , - ) t * ) t *.
2t t e2t 2 cos 12 + 12 sin 12
e cos dt = 2 + C.
12 4 + ( 12 )
Thus we see that ) t * ) t *

1 2 cos 12 + 12 sin 12
x(t) = 2 + Ce2t .
2 4 + ( 12 )
Using the initial condition, t = 0 and x = 10, to solve for C, we obtain
19 2
C= + 2 .
2 4 + ( 12 )
Therefore, the desired solution is

) t * ) t * 4 5
1 2 cos 12 + 12 sin 12 19 2 2t
x(t) = 2 + + 2 e .
2 4 + ( 12 ) 2 4 + ( 12 )
39. Let Tj (t), j = 0, 1, 2, . . ., denote the temperature in the classroom for 9 + j t < 10 + j,
where t = 13 denotes 1 : 00 p.m., t = 14 denotes 2 : 00 p.m., etc. Then
T (9) = 0, (2.12)
and the continuity of the temperature implies that
lim = Tj+1 (10 + j), j = 0, 1, 2, . . . . (2.13)

t10+j
According to the work of the heating unit, the temperature satisfies the equation
>
dTj 1 Tj , if j = 2k
= , 9 + j < t < 10 + j k = 0, 1, . . . .
dt Tj , if j = 2k + 1
The general solutions of these equations are:
for j even
dTj dTj
= 1 Tj = dt
dt 1 Tj
ln |1 Tj | = t + cj Tj (t) = 1 Cj et ;
57
Chapter 2
for j odd
dTj dTj
= Tj = dt
dt Tj
ln |Tj | = t + cj Tj (t) = Cj et ;
where Cj = 0 are constants. From (2.12) we have:

) * 11
0 = T0 (9) = 1 C0 et 1 = 1 C0 e9 C0 = e9 .
t=9
Also from (2.13), for even values of j (say, j = 2k) we get

) * 11
t t
1
1
1 C2k e 1 = C2k+1 e 1
t=9+(2k+1) t=9+(2k+1)
(10+2k) (10+2k)
1 C2k e = C2k+1 e
C2k+1 = e10+2k C2k .
Similarly from (2.13) for odd values of j (say, j = 2k + 1) we get

1 ) * 11
1
C2k+1 et 1 = 1 C2k+2 et 1
t=9+(2k+2) t=9+(2k+2)
(11+2k) (11+2k)
C2k+1 e = 1 C2k+2 e
C2k+2 = e11+2k C2k+1 .
In general we see that for any integer j (even or odd) the following formula holds:
Cj = e9+j Cj1.
Using this recurrence formula we successively compute
C1 = e10 C0 = e10 e9 = e9 (e 1)
C2 = e11 C1 = e11 e10 + e9 = e9 (e2 e + 1)
..
.
j
H
9
Cj = e (1)jk ek .
k=0
58
Exercises 2.4
Therefore, the temperature at noon (when t = 12 and j = 3) is

3
H
T3 (12) = C3 e12 = e12 e9 (1)3k ek = 1 e1 + e2 e3 0.718 = 71.8 F.
k=0
At 5 p.m.(when t = 17 and j = 8), we find

8
H 8
H
T8 (17) = 1 C8 e17 = 1 e17 e9 (1)8k ek = (1)k+1 ek
k=0 k=1
1 (e1 )8
= e1 1
0.269 = 26.9 F.
1+e
EXERCISES 2.4: Exact Equations, page 65
1. In this equation, M(x, y) = x2 y + x4 cos x and N(x, y) = x3 . Taking partial derivatives, we

obtain
M ) 2 * N
= x y + x4 = x2 = 3x2 = .
y y x
Therefore, according to Theorem 2 on page 61 of the text, the equation is not exact.
Rewriting the equation in the form

dy x2 y + x4 cos x 1
= 3
= y + x cos x, (2.14)
dx x x
we conclude that it is not separable because the right-hand side in (2.14) cannot be factored
as p(x)q(y). We also see that the equation is linear with y as the dependent variable.
3. Here M(x, y) = yexy + 2x, N(x, y) = xexy 2y. Thus

M xy
= (yexy + 2x) = exy + y (e ) = exy + yexy x = exy (1 + yx),
y y y
N xy
= (xexy 2y) = exy + x (e ) = exy + xexy y = exy (1 + xy),
x x x
M/y = N/x, and the equation is exact.
We write the equation in the form

dy yexy + 2x
= xy
dx xe 2y
59
Chapter 2
and conclude that it is not separable because the right-hand side cannot be represented as a
product of two functions of single variables x and y. Also, the right-hand side is not linear
with respect to y which implies that the equation is not linear with y as the dependent
variable. Similarly, choosing x as the dependent variable (taking the reciprocals of both sides)
we conclude that the equation is not linear either.
5. The dierential equation is not separable because (2xy + cos y) cannot be factored. This
equation can be put in standard form by defining x as the dependent variable and y as the
independent variable. This gives
dx 2 cos y
+ x= ,
dy y y2
so we see that the dierential equation is linear.
If we set M(x, y) = y 2 and N(x, y) = 2xy + cos y we are able to see that the dierential
equation is also exact because My (x, y) = 2y = Nx (x, y).
7. In this problem, the variables are r and , M(r, ) = , and N(r, ) = 3r 1. Because
M N
= 1 = 3 = ,
r
the equation is not exact. With r as the dependent variable, the equation takes the form
dr 3r 1 3 +1
= = r+ ,
d
and it is linear. Since the right-hand side in the above equation cannot be factored as p()q(r),
the equation is not separable.
9. We have that M(x, y) = 2xy + 3 and N(x, y) = x2 1. Therefore, My (x, y) = 2x = Nx (x, y)

and so the equation is exact. We will solve this equation by first integrating M(x, y) with
respect to x, although integration of N(x, y) with respect to y is equally easy. Thus
3
F (x, y) = (2xy + 3) dx = x2 y + 3x + g(y).
60
Exercises 2.4
Dierentiating F (x, y) with respect to y gives Fy (x, y) = x2 + g (y) = N(x, y) = x2 1.

From this we see that g = 1. (As a partial check we note that g (y) does not involve x.)
Integrating gives 3
g(y) = (1) dy = y.
Since the constant of integration will be incorporated into the parameter of the solution, it is
not written here. Substituting this expression for g(y) into the expression that we found for
F (x, y) yields
F (x, y) = x2 y + 3x y.
Therefore, the solution of the dierential equation is

C 3x
x2 y + 3x y = C y= .
x2 1
The given equation could be solved by the method of grouping. To see this, express the dier-
ential equation in the form
(2xy dx + x2 dy) + (3 dx dy) = 0.
The first term of the left-hand side we recognize as the total dierential of x2 y. The second
term is the total dierential of (3x y). Thus we again find that
F (x, y) = x2 y + 3x y
and, again, the solution is x2 y + 3x y = C.
11. Computing partial derivatives of M(x, y) = cos x cos y + 2x and N(x, y) = (sin x sin y + 2y),
we obtain
M
= (cos x cos y + 2x) = cos x sin y ,
y y
N
= [ (sin x sin y + 2y)] = cos x sin y ,
x x
M N
= ,
y x
and the equation is exact.
61
Chapter 2
Integrating M(x, y) with respect to x yields

3 3
F (x, y) = M(x, y)dx = (cos x cos y + 2x) dx
3 3
= cos y cos x dx + 2x dx = sin x cos y + x2 + g(y).
To find g(y), we compute the partial derivative of F (x, y) with respect to y and compare the
result with N(x, y).
F - .
= sin x cos y + x2 + g(y) = sin x sin y + g (y) = (sin x sin y + 2y)
y y
3

g (y) = 2y g(y) = (2y)dy = y 2 .
(We take the integration constant C = 0.) Therefore,
F (x, y) = sin x cos y + x2 y 2 = c
is a general solution to the given equation.
13. In this equation, the variables are y and t, M(y, t) = t/y, N(y, t) = 1 + ln y. Since
+ ,
M t 1 N 1
= = and = (1 + ln y) = ,
t t y y y y y
the equation is exact.
Integrating M(y, t) with respect to y, we get

3
t
F (y, t) = dy = t ln |y| + g(t) = t ln y + g(t).
y
(From N(y, t) = 1 + ln y we conclude that y > 0.) Therefore,
F
= [t ln y + g(t)] = ln y + g (t) = 1 + ln y
t t
g (t) = 1 g(t) = t
F (y, t) = t ln y + t,
and a general solution is given by t ln y + t = c (or, explicitly, t = c/(ln y + 1)).
62
Exercises 2.4
15. This dierential equation is expressed in the variables r and . Since the variables x and y
are dummy variables, this equation is solved in exactly the same way as an equation in x and
y. We will look for a solution with independent variable and dependent variable r. We see
that the dierential equation is expressed in the dierential form
M(r, ) dr + N(r, ) d = 0, where M(r, ) = cos and N(r, ) = r sin + e .
This implies that

M (r, ) = sin = Nr (r, ),
and so the equation is exact. Therefore, to solve the equation we need to find a function
F (r, ) that has cos dr + (r sin + e ) d as its total dierential. Integrating M(r, ) with
respect to r we see that
3
F (r, ) = cos dr = r cos + g()
F (r, ) = r sin + g () = N(r, ) = r sin + e .
Thus we have that

g () = e g() = e ,
where the constant of integration will be incorporated into the parameter of the solution.
Substituting this expression for g() into the expression we found for F (r, ) yields
F (r, ) = r cos + e .
From this we see that the solution is given by the one parameter family r cos + e = C, or,
solving for r,
C e
r= = (C e ) sec .
cos
17. Partial derivatives of M(x, y) = 1/y and N(x, y) = (3y x/y 2 ) are
+ , + ,
M 1 1 N x 1
= = 2 and = 3y + 2 = 2 .
y y y y x x y y
Since M/y = N/x, the equation is not exact.
63
Chapter 2
19. Taking partial derivatives of M(x, y) = 2x + y/(1 + x2 y 2 ) and N(x, y) = 2y + x/(1 + x2 y 2 )

with respect to y and x, respectively, we get
+ ,
M y (1)(1 + x2 y 2 ) yx2 (2y) 1 x2 y 2
= 2x + = = ,
y y 1 + x2 y 2 (1 + x2 y 2)2 (1 + x2 y 2 )2
+ ,
N x (1)(1 + x2 y 2 ) xy 2 (2x) 1 x2 y 2
= 2y + = = .
x x 1 + x2 y 2 (1 + x2 y 2 )2 (1 + x2 y 2)2
Therefore, the equation is exact.
3 + , 3
y 2 d(xy)
F (x, y) = 2x + 2 2
dx = x + = x2 + arctan(xy) + g(y)
1+x y 1 + (xy)2
F - 2 . x x
= x + arctan(xy) + g(y) = 2
+ g (y) = 2y +
y y 1 + (xy) 1 + x2 y 2
g (y) = 2y g(y) = y 2
F (x, y) = x2 y 2 + arctan(xy)
and a general solution then is given implicitly by x2 y 2 + arctan(xy) = c.
21. We check the equation for exactness. We have M(x, y) = 1/x + 2y 2x, N(x, y) = 2yx2 cos y,
+ ,
M 1 2
= + 2y x = 4yx,
y y x
N ) *
= 2yx2 cos y = 4yx.
x x
Thus M/y = N/x. Integrating M(x, y) with respect to x yields
3 + ,
1
F (x, y) = + 2y x dx = ln |x| + x2 y 2 + g(y).
2
x
Therefore,
F - .
= ln |x| + x2 y 2 + g(y) = 2x2 y + g (y) = N(x, y) = 2yx2 cos y
y y
3

g (y) = cos y g(y) = ( cos y)dy = sin y
F (x, y) = ln |x| + x2 y 2 sin y,
and a general solution to the given dierential equation is
ln |x| + x2 y 2 sin y = c.
64
Exercises 2.4
Substituting the initial condition, y = when x = 1, we find c.
ln |1| + 12 2 sin = c c = 2.
Therefore, the answer is given implicitly by ln |x| + x2 y 2 sin y = 2 . (We also used the fact
that at the initial point, (1, ), x > 0 to skip the absolute value sign in the logarithmic term.)
23. Here M(t, y) = et y + tet y and N(t, y) = tet + 2. Thus My (t, y) = et + tet = Nt (t, y) and so
the equation is exact. To find F (t, y) we first integrate N(t, y) with respect to y to obtain
3
F (t, y) = (tet + 2) dy = (tet + 2)y + h(t),
where we have chosen to integrate N(t, y) because this integration is more easily accomplished.
Thus
Ft (t, y) = et y + tet y + h (t) = M(t, y) = et y + tet y

h (t) = 0 h(t) = C.
We will incorporate this constant into the parameter of the solution. Combining these results
gives F (t, y) = tet y + 2y. Therefore, the solution is given by tet y + 2y = C. Solving for y
yields y = C/(tet + 2). Now we use the initial condition y(0) = 1 to find the solution that
passes through the point (0, 1). Thus
C C
y(0) = = 1 = 1 C = 2.
0+2 2
This gives us the solution
2
y= .
tet + 2
25. One can check that the equation is not exact (M/y = N/x), but it is separable because
it can be written in the form
1y y1
y 2 sin x dx + dy = 0 y 2 sin x dx = dy
x x
y1
x sin x dx = dy.
y2
65
Chapter 2
Integrating both sides yields

3 3 3 3 + ,
y1 1 1
x sin x dx = dy x( cos x) ( cos x)dx = 2 dy
y2 y y
1
x cos x + sin x = ln |y| + + C,
y
?
where we applied integration by parts to find x sin x dx. Substitution of the initial condition,
y() = 1, results
1
cos + sin = ln |1| + +C C = 1.
1
So, the solution to the initial value problem is
x cos x + sin x = ln y + 1/y + 1 .
(Since y() = 1 > 0, we have removed the absolute value sign in the logarithmic term.)
27. (a) We want to find M(x, y) so that for N(x, y) = sec2 y x/y we have
1
My (x, y) = Nx (x, y) = .
y
Therefore, we must integrate this last expression with respect to y. That is,
3 + ,
1
M(x, y) = dy = ln |y| + f (x),
y
where f (x), the constant of integration, is a function only of x.
(b) We want to find M(x, y) so that for
N(x, y) = sin x cos y xy ey
we have
My (x, y) = Nx (x, y) = cos x cos y y.
Therefore, we must integrate this last expression with respect to y. That is

3 3 3
M(x, y) = (cos x cos y y) dy = cos x cos y dy y dy
y2
= cos x sin y + f (x),
2
where f (x), a function only of x, is the constant of integration.
66
Exercises 2.4
29. (a) We have M(x, y) = y 2 + 2xy and N(x, y) = x2 . Therefore My (x, y) = 2y + 2x and
Nx (x, y) = 2x. Thus My (x, y) = Nx (x, y), so the dierential equation is not exact.
(b) If we multiply (y 2 + 2xy)dx x2 dy = 0 by y 2 , we obtain

+ ,
2x x2
1+ dx 2 dy = 0.
y y
In this equation we have M(x, y) = 1 + 2xy 1 and N(x, y) = x2 y 2. Therefore,
M(x, y) 2x N(x, y)
= 2 = .
y y x
So the new dierential equation is exact.
(c) Following the method for solving exact equations we integrate M(x, y) in part (b) with
respect to x to obtain
3 + ,
x x2
F (x, y) = 1+2 dx = x + + g(y) .
y y
To determine g(y), take the partial derivative of both sides of the above equation with
respect to y to obtain
F x2
= 2 + g (y) .
y y
Substituting N(x, y) (given in part (b)) for F/y, we can now solve for g (y) to obtain
x2 x2
N(x, y) = = + g (y) g (y) = 0 .
y2 y2
The integral of g (y) will yield a constant and the choice of the constant of integration
is not important so we can take g(y) = 0. Hence we have F (x, y) = x + x2 /y and the
solution to the equation is given implicitly by
x2
x+ =C.
y
Solving the above equation for y, we obtain
x2
y= .
C x
67
Chapter 2
(d) By dividing both sides by y 2 we lost the solution y 0.
31. Following the proof of Theorem 2, we come to the expression (10) on page 63 of the text for
g (y), that is
3x

g (y) = N(x, y) M(s, y) ds (2.15)
y
x0
(where we have replaced the integration variable t by s). In other words, g(y) is an antideriva-
tive of the right-hand side in (2.15). Since an antiderivative is defined up to an additive
constant and, in Theorem 2, such a constant can be chosen arbitrarily (that is, g(y) can be
any antiderivative), we choose g(y) that vanishes at y0 . According to fundamental theorem
of calculus, this function can be written in the form

3y 3y 3x
g(y) = g (t) dt = N(x, t) M(s, t) ds dt
t
y0 y0 x0
x
3y 3 y 3

= N(x, t) dt M(s, t) ds dt
t
y0 y0 x0
x 1t=y
3y 3 1
1
= N(x, t) dt M(s, t) ds 11

1
y0 x0 t=y0
3y 3x 3x
= N(x, t) dt M(s, y) ds + M(s, y0 ) ds .
y0 x0 x0
Substituting this function into the formula (9) on page 63 of the text, we conclude that
y
3x 3 3x 3x
F (x, y) = M(t, y) dt + N(x, t) dt M(s, y) ds + M(s, y0 ) ds
x0 y0 x0 x0
3y 3x
= N(x, t) dt + M(s, y0 ) ds .
y0 x0
(a) In the dierential form used in Example 1, M(x, y) = 2xy 2 + 1 and N(x, y) = 2x2 y.
68
Exercises 2.4
Thus, N(x, t) = 2x2 t and M(s, y0 ) = 2s 02 + 1 = 1, and (18) yields
3y 3x 3y 3x
) *
2 2
F (x, y) = 2x t dt + 1 ds = x 2t dt + ds
0 0 0 0
1t=y 1s=x
1 1
= x2 t2 1 +s 1 = x2 y 2 + x.
t=0 s=0
(b) Since M(x, y) = 2xy sec2 x and N(x, y) = x2 + 2y, we have
N(x, t) = x2 + 2t and M(s, y0 ) = 2s 0 sec2 s = sec2 s,

3y 3x
) 2 * ) *
F (x, y) = x + 2t dt + sec2 s ds
0 0
) * 11t=y
2
1s=x
1 2
= x t+t 1 tan s 1 = x2 y + y 2 tan x.
t=0 s=0
(c) Here, M(x, y) = 1 + ex y + xex y and N(x, y) = xex + 2. Therefore,
N(x, t) = xex + 2 and M(s, y0 ) = 1 + es 0 + ses 0 = 1,

3y 3x
x
F (x, y) = (xe + 2) dt + 1 ds
0 0
1t=y 1s=x
1 1
= (xex + 2) t 1 +s 1 = (xex + 2) y + x,
t=0 s=0
which is identical to F (x, y) obtained in Example 3.
32. (a) The slope of the orthogonal curves, say m , must be 1/m, where m is the slope of the
original curves. Therefore, we have
Fy (x, y) dy Fy (x, y)
m = = Fy (x, y) dx Fx (x, y) dy = 0.
Fx (x, y) dx Fx (x, y)
(b) Let F (x, y) = x2 + y 2 . Then we have Fx (x, y) = 2x and Fy (x, y) = 2y. Plugging these
expressions into the final result of part (a) gives
2y dx 2x dy = 0 y dx x dy = 0.
69
Chapter 2
To find the orthogonal trajectories, we must solve this dierential equation. To this end,
note that this equation is separable and thus
3 3
1 1
dx = dy ln |x| = ln |y| + C
x y
eln |x|C = eln |y| y = kx, where k = eC .
Therefore, the orthogonal trajectories are lines through the origin.
(c) Let F (x, y) = xy. Then we have Fx (x, y) = y and Fy (x, y) = x. Plugging these expres-
sions into the final result of part (a) gives
x dx y dy = 0.
To find the orthogonal trajectories, we must solve this dierential equation. To this end,
note that this equation is separable and thus
3 3
x2 y2
x dx = y dy = +C x2 y 2 = k ,
2 2
where k := 2C. Therefore, the orthogonal trajectories are hyperbolas.
33. We use notations and results of Problem 32, that is, for a family of curves given by F (x, y) = k,
the orthogonal trajectories satisfy the dierential equation
F (x, y) F (x, y)
dx dy = 0. (2.16)
y x
(a) In this problem, F (x, y) = 2x2 + y 2 and the equation (2.16) becomes
(2x2 + y 2 ) (2x2 + y 2)
dx dy = 0 2y dx 4x dy = 0. (2.17)
y x
Separating variables and integrating yield
3 3
dx 2dy dx 2dy
2y dx = 4x dy = =
x y x y
ln |x| = 2 ln |y| + c1 eln |x| = e2 ln |y|+c1
|x| = ec1 |y|2 = c2 y 2 x = c2 y 2 = cy 2 ,
70
Exercises 2.4
where c as any nonzero constant.

Separating variables, we divided the equation (2.17) by xy. As a result, we lost two
constant solutions x 0 and y 0 (see the discussion on pages 4445 of Section 2.2
of the text). Thus the orthogonal trajectories for the family 2x2 + y 2 = k are x = cy 2 ,
c = 0, x 0, and y 0. (Note that x 0 can be obtained from x = cy 2 by taking c = 0
while y 0 cannot.)
(b) First we rewrite the equation defining the family of curves in the form F (x, y) = k by
dividing it by x4 . This yields yx4 = k. We use (2.17) to set up an equation for the
orthogonal trajectories:
F F ) *
= 4yx5 , = x4 x4 dx 4yx5 dy = 0 .
x y
Solving this separable equation yields
x4 dx = 4yx5 dy = 0 x dx = 4y dy
3 3
x2
x dx = (4y)dy = 2y 2 + c1 x2 + 4y 2 = c.
2
Thus, the family of orthogonal trajectories is x2 + 4y 2 = c.
(c) Taking logarithm of both sides of the equation, we obtain
ln y
ln y = kx = k,
x
and so F (x, y) = (ln y)/x, F/x = (ln y)/x2 , F/y = 1/(xy). The equation (2.17)
becomes + ,
1 ln y 1 ln y
dx 2 dy = 0 dx = 2 dy.
xy x xy x
Separating variables and integrating, we obtain
3 3
x dx = y ln y dy x dx = y ln y dy
3 2
x2 y2 y 1 y2 y2
= ln y + dy = ln y + + c1
2 2 2 y 2 4
x2 y 2 y2
+ ln y = c1 2x2 + 2y 2 ln y y 2 = c,
2 2 4
?
where c := 4c1 , and we have used integration by parts to find y ln y dy.
71
Chapter 2
(d) We divide the equation, y 2 = kx, by x and get y 2 /x = k. Thus, F (x, y) = y 2 /x and
F y2 F 2y
= 2, =
x x y x
+ 2, + ,
2y y 2y y2
dx 2 dy = 0 dx = 2 dy
x x x x
2 y2
2x dx = y dy x = + c1 2x2 + y 2 = c.
2
35. Applying Leibnizs theorem, we switch the order of dierentiation (with respect to y) and
integration. This yields
3x + ,

g = N(x, y) M(t, y) dt.
y
x0

Therefore, g is dierentiable (even continuously) with respect to x as a dierence of two
(continuously) dierentiable functions, N(x, y) and an integral with variable upper bound of
a continuous function My (t, y). Taking partial derivatives of both sides with respect to x and
using fundamental theorem of calculus, we obtain

3x + ,
(g )
= N(x, y) M(t, y) dt
x x y
x0
x
3 + ,

= N(x, y) M(t, y) dt = N(x, y) M(x, y) = 0
x x y x y
x0
due to (5). Thus (g ) /x 0 which implies that g does not depend on x (a consequence of
mean value theorem).
EXERCISES 2.5: Special Integrating Factors, page 71
1. Here M(x, y) = 2y 3 + 2y 2 and N(x, y) = 3y 2 x + 2xy. Computing

M N
= 6y 2 + 4y and = 3y 2 + 2y ,
y x
we conclude that this equation is not exact. Note that these functions, as well as M itself,
depend on y only. Then, clearly, so does the expression (N/x M/y)/M, and the
72
Exercises 2.5
equation has an integrating factor depending on y alone. Also, since

M/y N/x (6y 2 + 4y) (3y 2 + 2y) 3y 2 + 2y 1
= 2
= 2
= ,
N 3y x + 2xy x(3y + 2y) x
the equation has an integrating factor depending on x.
Writing the equation in the form

dx 3y 2 x + 2xy xy(3y + 2) y(3y + 2)
= = = x
dy 2y 3 + y 2 2y 2 (y + 1) 2y 2(y + 1)
we conclude that it is separable and linear with x as the dependent variable.
3. This equation is not separable because of the factor (y 2 + 2xy). It is not linear because of the
factor y 2 . To see if it is exact, we compute My (x, y) and Nx (x, y), and see that
My (x, y)2y + 2x = 2x = Nx (x, y).
Therefore, the equation is not exact. To see if we can find an integrating factor of the form
(x), we compute
M N

y x 2y + 4x
= ,
N x2
which is not a function of x alone. To see if we can find an integrating factor of the form (y),
we compute
N M

x y 4x 2y 2(2x + y) 2
= 2 = = .
M y + 2xy y(y + 2x) y
Thus the equation has an integrating factor that is a function of y alone.
5. In this problem, M(x, y) = 2y 2x y and N(x, y) = x. Therefore,

M N N M
= 4yx 1 and =1 = 2 4yx .
y x x y
The equation is not exact, because M/y = N/x, but it has an integrating factor depend-
ing just on y since
N/x M/y 2 4yx 2(2yx 1) 2
= 2 = = .
M 2y x y y(2yx 1) y
73
Chapter 2
Isolating dy/dx, we obtain

dy y 2y 2x y
= = 2y 2 .
dx x x
The right-hand side cannot be factorized as p(x)q(y), and so the equation is not separable.
Also, it is not linear with y as the dependent variable (because of 2y 2 term). By taking the
reciprocals we also conclude that it is not linear with the dependent variable x.
7. The equation (3x2 + y) dx + (x2 y x) dy = 0 is not separable or linear. To see if it is exact,

we compute
M N
= 1 = 2xy 1 = .
y x
Thus, the equation is not exact. To see if we can find an integrating factor, we compute
M/y N/x 2 2xy 2(xy 1) 2
= 2 = = .
N x yx x(xy 1) x
From this we see that the integrating factor will be
+3 ,
2
(x) = exp dx = exp (2 ln |x|) = x2 .
x
To solve the equation, we multiply it by the integrating factor x2 to obtain
(3 + yx2 ) dx + (y x1 ) dy = 0.
This is now exact. Thus, we want to find F (x, y). To do this, we integrate M(x, y) = 3 + yx2
with respect to x to get
3
) *
F (x, y) = 3 + yx2 dx = 3x yx1 + g(y)
Fy (x, y) = x1 + g (y) = N(x, y) = y x1

y2
g (y) = y g(y) = .
2
Therefore,
y2
F (x, y) = 3x yx1 + .
2
And so we see that an implicit solution is
y2 y
+ 3x = C.
2 x
74
Exercises 2.5
Since (x) = x2 we must check to see if the solution x 0 was either gained or lost. The
function x 0 is a solution to the original equation, but is not given by the above implicit
solution for any choice of C. Hence,
y2 y
+ 3x = C and x0
2 x
are solutions.
9. We compute partial derivatives of M(x, y) = 2y 2 + 2y + 4x2 and N(x, y) = 2xy + x.

M ) 2 * N
= 2y + 2y + 4x2 = 4y + 2, = (2xy + x) = 2y + 1.
y y x x
Although the equation is not exact (M/y = N/x), the quotient
M/y N/x (4y + 2) (2y + 1) 2y + 1 1
= = =
N 2xy + x x(2y + 1) x
depends on x only, and so the equation has an integrating factor, which can be found by
applying formula (8) on page 70 of the text. Namely,
+3 ,
1
(x) = exp dx = exp (ln |x|) = |x|.
x
Note that if is an integrating factor, then is an integrating factor as well. This observation
allows us to take (x) = x. Multiplying given dierential equation by x yields an exact
equation
) *
2y 2 + 2y + 4x2 x dx + x2 (2y + 1) dy = 0.
Therefore,
3
) *
F (x, y) = x2 (2y + 1) dy = x2 y 2 + y + h(x)
F ) * ) *
= 2x y 2 + y + h (x) = 2y 2 + 2y + 4x2 x
x 3
h (x) = 4x3 h(x) = 4x3 dx = x4
) *
F (x, y) = x2 y 2 + y + x4 = x2 y 2 + x2 y + x4 ,
and x2 y 2 + x2 y + x4 = c is a general solution.
75
Chapter 2
11. In this dierential equation, M(x, y) = y 2 + 2xy, N(x, y) = x2 . Therefore,
M N
= 2y + 2x, = 2x,
y x
and so (N/x M/y)/M = (4x 2y)/(y 2 + 2xy) = 2/y is a function of y. Then

43 + , 5
2
(y) = exp dy = exp (2 ln |y|) = y 2 .
y
Multiplying the dierential equation by (y) and solving the obtained exact equation, we get
) *
y 2 y 2 + 2xy dx y 2x2 dy = 0
3
) 2 2 *
F (x, y) = y x dy = y 1 x2 + h(x)
F - 1 2 . ) *
= y x + h(x) = 2y 1x + h (x) = y 2 y 2 + 2xy = 1 + 2xy 1
x x

h (x) = 1 h(x) = x F (x, y) = y 1x2 + x.
Since we multiplied given equation by (y) = y 2 (in fact, divided by y 2 ) to get an exact
equation, we could lose the solution y 0, and this, indeed, happened: y 0 is, clearly, a
solution to the original equation. Thus a general solution is
y 1x2 + x = c and y 0.
13. We will multiply the equation by the factor xn y m and try to make it exact. Thus, we have
) n m+2 * ) *
2x y 6xn+1 y m+1 dx + 3xn+1 y m+1 4xn+2 y m dy = 0.
We want My (x, y) = Nx (x, y). Since
My (x, y) = 2(m + 2)xn y m+1 6(m + 1)xn+1 y m ,

Nx (x, y) = 3(n + 1)xn y m+1 4(n + 2)xn+1 y m ,
we need
2(m + 2) = 3(n + 1) and 6(m + 1) = 4(n + 2).
76
Exercises 2.5
Solving these equations simultaneously, we obtain n = 1 and m = 1. So,
(x, y) = xy.
With these choices for n and m we obtain the exact equation
(2xy 3 6x2 y 2 ) dx + (3x2 y 2 4x3 y) dy = 0.
Solving this equation, we have

3
F (x, y) = (2xy 3 6x2 y 2 ) dx = x2 y 3 2x3 y 2 + g(y)
Fy (x, y) = 3x2 y 2 4x3 y + g (y) = N(x, y) = 3x2 y 2 4x3 y.
Therefore, g (y) = 0. Since the constant of integration can be incorporated into the constant
C of the solution, we can pick g(y) 0. Thus, we have
F (x, y) = x2 y 3 2x3 y 2
and the solution becomes

x2 y 3 2x3 y 2 = C.
Since we have multiplied the original equation by xy we could have added the extraneous
solutions y 0 or x 0. But, since y 0 implies that dy/dx 0 or x 0 implies that
dx/dy 0, y 0 and x 0 are solutions of the original equation as well as the transformed
equation.
15. Assume that, for a dierential equation
M(x, y)dx + N(x, y)dy = 0, (2.18)
the expression
N/x M/y
= H(xy) (2.19)
xM yN
is a function of xy only. Denoting
+3 ,
(z) = exp H(z)dz
77
Chapter 2
and multiplying (2.18) by (xy), we get a dierential equation
(xy)M(x, y)dx + (xy)N(x, y)dy = 0. (2.20)
Let us check it for exactness. First we note that

4 +3 ,5 +3 , 43 5

(z) = exp H(z)dz = exp H(z)dz H(z)dz = (z)H(z).
Next, using this fact, we compute partial derivatives of the coecients in (2.20).
(xy) M(x, y)
{(xy)M(x, y)} = (xy) M(x, y) + (xy)
y y y
M(x, y)
= (xy)H(xy) xM(x, y) + (xy)
y
4 5
M(x, y)
= (xy) H(xy) xM(x, y) + ,
y
(xy) N(x, y)
{(xy)N(x, y)} = (xy) N(x, y) + (xy)
x x x
N(x, y)
= (xy)H(xy) yN(x, y) + (xy)
4 x5
N(x, y)
= (xy) H(xy) yN(x, y) + .
x
But (2.19) implies that

N M N M
= (xM yN)H(xy) yNH(xy) + = xMH(xy) + ,
x y x y
and, therefore,
[(xy)M(x, y)] [(xy)N(x, y)]
= .
y x
This means that the equation (2.20) is exact.
17. (a) Expressing the family y = x 1 + kex in the form (y x + 1)ex = k, we have (with
notation of Problem 32) F (x, y) = (y x + 1)ex . We compute
F (y x + 1) x d(ex )
= [(y x + 1)ex ] = e + (y x + 1)
x x x dx
= ex + (y x + 1)ex = (y x)ex ,
78
Exercises 2.6
F (y x + 1) x
= [(y x + 1)ex ] = e = ex .
y y y
Now we can use the result of Problem 32 to derive an equation for the orthogonal
trajectories (i.e., velocity potentials) of the given family of curves:
F F
dx dy = 0 ex dx (y x)ex dy = 0 dx + (x y)dy = 0.
y x
(b) In the dierential equation dx + (x y)dy = 0, M = 1 and N = x y. Therefore,
N/x M/y (x y)/x (1)/y
= = 1,
M (1)
-? .
and an integrating factor (y) is given by (y) = exp (1)dy = ey . Multiplying the
equation from part (a) by (y) yields an exact equation, and we look for its solutions of
the form G(x, y) = c.
ey dx + (x y)ey dy = 0
3
G(x, y) = ey dx = xey + g(y)
G
= xey + g (y) = (x y)ey g (y) = yey
y
3 + 3 ,
g(y) = (ye )dy = ye e dy = yey + ey .
y y y
Thus, the velocity potentials are given by
G(x, y) = xey yey + ey = c or x = y 1 + cey .
EXERCISES 2.6: Substitutions and Transformations, page 78
1. We can write the equation in the form

dy
= (y 4x 1)2 = [(y 4x) 1]2 = G(y 4x),
dx
where G(t) = (t 1)2 . Thus, it is of the form dy/dx = G(ax + by).
3. In this equation, the variables are x and t. Its coecients, t + x + 2 and 3t x 6, are linear
functions of x and t. Therefore, given equation is an equation with linear coecients.
79
Chapter 2
5. The given dierential equation is not homogeneous due to the e2x terms. The equation
(ye2x + y 3) dx e2x dy = 0 is a Bernoulli equation because it can be written in the form
dy/dx + P (x)y = Q(x)y n as follows:
dy
y = e2x y 3 .
dx
The dierential equation does not have linear coecients nor is it of the form y = G(ax + by).
7. Here, the variables are y and . Writing

dy y 3 y 2 (y/)3 (y/)2
= = ,
d 22 y 2(y/)
we see that the right-hand side is a function of y/ alone. Hence, the equation is homogeneous.
9. First, we write the equation in the form

dy 3x2 + y 2 y 3 3x2 y (y/x)3 3(y/x)
= = = .
dx xy x3 y 1 xy 2 x3 (y/x)2 1
Therefore, it is homogeneous, and we we make a substitution y/x = u or y = xu. Then
y = u + xu , and the equation becomes
du u3 3u
u+x = 2 .
dx u 1
Separating variables and integrating yield
du u3 3u 2u u2 1 2
= 2 u= 2 du = dx
dx u 1 u 1 u + ,x
3 2 3 3 3
u 1 2 1 dx
du = dx u du = 2
u x u x
1 2 ) *
u ln |u| = 2 ln |x| + C1 u2 ln u2 + ln(x4 ) = C.
2
Substituting back y/x for u and simplifying, we finally get
# y %2 + 2, + 6,
y 4 y2 x
ln + ln(x ) = C + ln = C,
x x2 x2 y2
which can also be written as + ,
y2 y2
ln 2 = K.
x6 x
80
Exercises 2.6
11. From
dx xy y 2 y # y %2
= =
dy x2 x x
we conclude that given equation is homogeneous. Let u = y/x. Then y = xu and y = u + xu .
Substitution yields
du du du dx
u+x = u u2 x = u2 2
=
dx 3 3 dx u x
du dx 1
2
= = ln |x| + C
u x u
x x
= ln |x| + C y= .
y ln |x| + C
Note that, solving this equation, we have performed two divisions: by x2 and u2 . In doing
this, we lost two solutions, x 0 and u 0. (The latter gives y 0.) Therefore, a general
solution to the given equation is
x
y= , x 0, and y 0.
ln |x| + C
13. Since we can express f (t, x) in the form G(x/t), that is, (dividing numerator and denominator
by t2 ) I
2
2 2
x +t t +x2 (x/t) + (x/t)2
= ,
tx (x/t)
the equation is homogeneous. Substituting v = x/t and dx/dt = v + tdv/dt into the equation
yields
dv 1 + v2 dv 1 + v2
v+t =v+ t = .
dt v dt v
This transformed equation is separable. Thus we have
v 1
dv = dt 1 + v 2 = ln |t| + C,
1+v 2 t
where we have integrated with the integration on the left hand side being accomplished by
the substitution u = 1 + v 2 . Substituting x/t for v in this equation gives the solution to the
original equation which is !
x2
1+ = ln |t| + C.
t2
81
Chapter 2
15. This equation is homogeneous because
dy x2 y 2 1 (y/x)2
= = .
dx 3xy 3(y/x)
Thus, we substitute u = y/x (y = xu and so y = u + xu ) to get
du 1 u2 du 1 4u2 3u du dx
u+x = x = =
dx3 3u 3 dx 3u 1 4u2 x
3u du dx 3 1 1
2
= ln 11 4u2 1 = ln |x| + C1
1 4u x 8
1 # y %2 11
1
3 ln 111 4 1 = 8 ln |x| + C2
x 1
1 1
3 ln(x2 ) 3 ln 1x2 4y 21 = 8 ln |x| + C2 ,
3
which, after some algebra, gives (x2 4y 2) x2 = C.
17. With the substitutions z = x + y and dz/dx = 1 + dy/dx or dy/dx = dz/dx 1 this equation
becomes the separable equation
dz dz
1 = z1 = z
dx dx
z 1/2 dz = dx 2z 1/2 = x + C .
Substituting x + y for z in this solution gives the solution of the original equation

2 x+y =x+C
which, on solving for y, yields

+ ,2
x C
y= + x.
2 2
Thus, we have
(x + C)2
y= x.
4
19. The right-hand side of this equation has the form G(x y) with G(t) = (t + 5)2 . Thus we
substitute
t=xy y =xt y = 1 t ,
82
Exercises 2.6
separate variables, and integrate.

dt
1 = (t + 5)2
dx
dt
= 1 (t + 5)2 = (1 t 5)(1 + t + 5) = (t + 4)(t + 6)
dx 3 3
dt dt
= dx = dx
(t + 4)(t + 6) (t + 4)(t + 6)
3 + , 3 1 1
1 1 1 1t + 41
dt = dx ln 11 1 = 2x + C1
2 t+4 t+6 t + 61
1 1
1x y + 41 xy+6
1
ln 1 1 = 2x + C1 = C2 e2x
xy+6 1 xy+4
2 2
1+ = C2 e2x y =x+4+ 2x
.
xy+4 Ce + 1
Also, the solution
t+40 y =x+4
has been lost in separation variables.
21. This is a Bernoulli equation with n = 2. So, we make a substitution u = y 1n = y 1 . We

have y = u1 , y = u2 u, and the equation becomes
1 du 1 x2 du 1
+ = u = x2 .
u2 dx ux u2 dx x
The last equation is a linear equation with P (x) = 1/x. Following the procedure of solving
linear equations, we find an integrating factor (x) = 1/x and multiply the equation by (x)
to get
+ ,
1 du 1 d 1
2 u = x u = x
x dx x dx x
3
1 1 1
u = (x)dx = x2 + C1 u = x3 + C1 x
x 2 2
1 2
y= 3
= .
x /2 + C1 x Cx x3
Also, y 0 is a solution which was lost when we multiplied the equation by u2 (in terms of
y, divided by y 2 ) to obtain a linear equation.
83
Chapter 2
23. This is a Bernoulli equation with n = 2. Dividing it by y 2 and rewriting gives

dy
y 2 2x1 y 1 = x2 .
dx
Making the substitution v = y 1 and hence dv/dx = y 2 dy/dx, the above equation becomes
dv v
+ 2 = x2 .
dx x
This is a linear equation in v and x. The integrating factor (x) is given by
+3 ,
2
(x) = exp dx = exp (2 ln |x|) = x2 .
x
Multiplying the linear equation by this integrating factor and solving, we have
dv ) *
x2 + 2vx = x4 Dx x2 v = x4
dx 3
x5 x3 C1
x2 v = x4 dx = + C1 v= + 2.
5 5 x
Substituting y 1 for v in this solution gives a solution to the original equation. Therefore, we
find + ,1
x3 C1
1 x5 + 5C1
y = + 2 y= .
5 x 5x2
Letting C = 5C1 and simplifying yields
5x2
y= .
x5 + C
Note: y 0 is also a solution to the original equation. It was lost in the first step when we
divided by y 2 .
25. In this Bernoulli equation, n = 3. Dividing the equation by x3 , we obtain

dx 1 2
x3 + x = t.
dt t
Now we make a substitution u = x2 to obtain a linear equation. Since u = 2x3 x , the
equation becomes
1 du 1 du 2
+ u = t u = 2t
2 dt t dt t
84
Exercises 2.6
+ 3 ,
2
(t) = exp dt = t2
t
3
d (t2 u) 2 2 2
= t u= dt = 2 ln |t| + C
dt t t
u = 2t2 ln |t| + Ct2 x2 = 2t2 ln |t| + Ct2 .
x 0 is also a solution, which we lost dividing the equation by x3 .
27. This equation is a Bernoulli equation with n = 2, because it can be written in the form
dr 2
r = r 2 2 .
d
Dividing by r 2 and making the substitution u = r 1 , we obtain a linear equation.
dr 2 1 du 2
r 2 r = 2 u = 2
d d +3 ,
du 2 2 2
+ u = () = exp d = 2
d
d (2 u) + C
= 1 2 u = + C u= .
d 2
Making back substitution (and adding the lost solution r 0), we obtain a general solution
2
r= and r 0.
C
29. Solving for h and k in the linear system

>
3h + k 1 = 0
h+k+3=0
gives h = 1 and k = 2. Thus, we make the substitutions x = u 1 and y = v 2, so that

dx = du and dy = dv, to obtain
(3u + v) du + (u + v) dv = 0.
This is the same transformed equation that we encountered in Example 4 on page 77 of the
text. There we found that its solution is
v 2 + 2uv 3u2 = C.
85
Chapter 2
Substituting x + 1 for u and y + 2 for v gives the solution to the original equation
(y + 2)2 + 2(x + 1)(y + 2) 3(x + 1)2 = C.
31. In this equation with linear coecients, we make a substitution x = u + h, y = v + k, where

h and k satisfy
> >
2h k = 0 k = 2h k = 1,

4h + k = 3 4h + 2h = 3 h = 1/2.
Thus x = u + 1/2, y = v + 1. As dx = du and dy = dv, substitution yields
du 4u + v 4(u/v) + 1
(2u v)du + (4u + v)dv = 0 = =
dv 2u v 2(u/v) 1
u du dz
z= u = vz =z+v
v dv dv
dz 4z + 1 dz 4z + 1 (2z + 1)(z + 1)
z+v = v = z =
dv 2z 1 dv 3 2z 1 2z 31
2z 1 1 2z 1 1
dz = dv dz = dv .
(2z + 1)(z + 1) v (2z + 1)(z + 1) v
To find the integral in the left-hand side of the above equation, we use the partial fraction
decomposition
2z 1 4 3
= + .
(2z + 1)(z + 1) 2z + 1 z + 1
Therefore, the integration yields
2 ln |2z + 1| + 3 ln |z + 1| = ln |v| + C1 |z + 1|3 |v| = eC1 |2z + 1|2

#u %3 # u %2
+ 1 v = C2 2 + 1 (u + v)3 = C2 (2u + v)2
v v
(x 1/2 + y 1)3 = C2 (2x 1 + y 1)2 (2x + 2y 3)3 = C(2x + y 2)2 .
33. In Problem 1, we found that the given equation is of the form dy/dx = G(y 4x) with
G(u) = (u 1)2 . Thus we make a substitution u = y 4x to get
dy du
= (y 4x 1)2 4+ = (u 1)2
dx dx
86
Exercises 2.6
3 3
du du
= (u 1)2 4 = (u 3)(u + 1) = dx .
dx (u 3)(u + 1)
To integrate the left-hand side, we use partial fractions:
+ ,
1 1 1 1
= .
(u 3)(u + 1) 4 u3 u+1
Thus
1 1
1 1u 31
(ln |u 3| ln |u + 1|) = x + C1 1
ln 1 1 = 4x + C2
4 u + 11
u3 Ce4x + 3
= Ce4x u=
u+1 1 Ce4x
Ce4x + 3
y = 4x + , (2.21)
1 Ce4x
where C = 0 is an arbitrary constant. Separating variables, we lost the constant solutions
u 3 and u 1, that is, y = 4x + 3 and y = 4x 1. While y = 4x + 3 can be obtained
from (2.21) by setting C = 0, the solution y = 4x 1 is not included in (2.21). Therefore, a
general solution to the given equation is
Ce4x + 3
y = 4x + and y = 4x 1.
1 Ce4x
35. This equation has linear coecients. Thus we make a substitution t = u + h and x = v + k
with h and k satisfying
>
h+k+2 = 0 h = 1,

3h k 6 = 0 k = 3.
As dt = du and dx = dv, the substitution yields

du u+v (u/v) + 1
(u + v)dv + (3u v)du = 0 = = .
dv 3u v 3(u/v) 1
With z = u/v, we have u = vz, u = z + vz , and the equation becomes
dz z+1 dz 3z 2 + 1
z+v = v =
dv 3z 1 dv 3 3z 1 3
3z 1 1 3z 1 1
dz = dv dz = dv
3z 2 + 1 v 3z 2 + 1 v
87
Chapter 2
3 3
3zdz dz
2
2
= ln |v| + C1
3z + 1 3z + 1
1 ) 2 * 1 # %
ln 3z + 1 arctan z 3 = ln |v| + C1
2 3
- 2 . 2 # %
2
ln (3z + 1)v arctan z 3 = C2 .
3
Making back substitution, after some algebra we get
4 5
- 2 2
. 2 x+3
ln 3(t 1) + (x + 3) + arctan = C.
3 3(t 1)
37. In Problem 5, we have written the equation in the form

dy dy
y = e2x y 3 y 3 y 2 = e2x .
dx dx
Making a substitution u = y 2 (and so u = 2y 3y ) in this Bernoulli equation, we get
+3 ,
du 2x
+ 2u = 2e (x) = exp 2dx = e2x
dx
3
d (e2x u) 2x 2x 4x 2x
) * 1
= 2e e = 2e e u= 2e4x dx = e4x + C
dx 2
1 2x 1
u = e + Ce2x y 2 = e2x + Ce2x .
2 2
The constant function y 0 is also a solution, which we lost dividing the equation by y 3 .
39. Since the equation is homogeneous, we make a substitution u = y/. Thus we get
dy (y/)3 (y/)2 du u3 u2 u2 u
= u+ = =
d 2(y/) d 2u 2
2
du u +u 2du d
= =
d 2 u(u + 1)
3 3 2
2du d u
= ln = ln || + C1
u(u + 1) (u + 1)2
u2 C
2
= , C = 0.
(u + 1)
Back substitution u = y/ yields
y2 C
2
= y 2 = C(y + )2 , C = 0.
(y + )
88
Exercises 2.6
When C = 0, the above formula gives 0 or y 0, which were lost in separating variables.
Also, we lost another solution, u + 1 0 or y = . Thus, the answer is
y 2 = C(y + )2 and y = ,
41. The right-hand side of (8) from Example 2 of the text can be written as
y x 1 + (x y + 2)1 = (x y + 2) + 1 + (x y + 2)1 = G(x y + 2)
with G(v) = v + v 1 + 1. With v = x y + 2, we have y = 1 v , and the equation becomes

dv dv v2 1 v
1 = v + v 1 + 1 = 2
dv = dx
dx dx v v 1
ln |v 2 1| = 2x + C1 v 2 1 = Ce2x , C = 0.
Dividing by v 2 1, we lost constant solutions v = 1, which can be obtained by taking C = 0

in the above formula. Therefore, a general solution to the given equation is
(x y + 2)2 = Ce2x + 1,
43. (a) If f (tx, ty) = f (x, y) for any t, then, substituting t = 1/x, we obtain
+ , # y%
1 1
f (tx, ty) = f x, y = f 1, ,
x x x
which shows that f (x, y) depends, in fact, on y/x alone.
(b) Since
dy M(x, y)
= =: f (x, y)
dx N(x, y)
and the function f (x, y) satisfies
M(tx, ty) tn M(x, y) M(x, y)
f (tx, ty) = = n = = f (x, y),
N(tx, ty) t N(x, y) N(x, y)
we apply (a) to conclude that the equation M(x, y)dx + N(x, y)dy = 0 is homogeneous.
89
Chapter 2
45. To obtain (17), we divide given equations:
dy 4x + y 4 + (y/x)
= = .
dx 2x y (y/x) 2
Therefore, the equation is homogeneous, and the substitution u = y/x yields
du 4+u du 4+u u2 + 3u + 4
u+x = x = u =
dx u2 dx u2 3 u2 3
u2 1 u2 1
du = dx du = dx .
u2 3u 4 x u2 3u 4 x
Using partial fractions, we get
u2 2 1 3 1
= + ,
u2 3u 4 5 u4 5 u+1
and so
2 3
ln |u 4| + ln |u + 1| = ln |x| + C1
5 5
(u 4)2 (u + 1)3 x5 = C
#y %2 # y %3
4 + 1 x5 = C (y 4x)2 (y + x)3 = C.
x x
REVIEW PROBLEMS: page 81
1. Separation variables yields

y1
dy = ex dx (y 1)ey dy = ex dx
ey 3 3
y
(y 1)e dy = ex dx
3
(y 1)e + ey dy = ex + C
y
(y 1)ey ey = ex + C
ex + yey = C,
and we can replace C by K.
3. The dierential equation is an exact equation with M = 2xy 3x2 and N = x2 2y 3 because
My = 2x = Nx . To solve this problem we will follow the procedure for solving exact equations
90
Review Problems
given in Section 2.4. First we integrate M(x, y) with respect to x to get

3
) *
F (x, y) = 2xy 3x2 dx + g(y)
F (x, y) = x2 y x3 + g(y). (2.22)
To determine g(y) take the partial derivative with respect to y of both sides and substitute
N(x, y) for F (x, y)/y to obtain
N = x2 2y 3 = x2 + g (y).
Solving for g (y) yields

g (y) = 2y 3 .
Since the choice of the constant of integration is arbitrary we will take g(y) = y 2. Hence,
from equation (2.22) we have F (x, y) = x2 y x3 + y 2 and the solution to the dierential
equation is given implicitly by x2 y x3 + y 2 = C.
5. In this problem,
M(x, y) = sin(xy) + xy cos(xy), N(x, y) = 1 + x2 cos(xy).
We check the equation for exactness:

M
= [x cos(xy)] + [x cos(xy) xy sin(xy)x] = 2x cos(xy) x2 y sin(xy),
y
N
= 0 + [2x cos(xy) x2 sin(xy)y] = 2x cos(xy) x2 y sin(xy).
x
Therefore, the equation is exact. So, we use the method discussed in Section 2.4 and obtain
3 3
- .
F (x, y) = N(x, y)dy = 1 + x2 cos(xy) dy = y + x sin(xy) + h(x)
F
= sin(xy) + x cos(xy)y + h (x) = M(x, y) = sin(xy) + xy cos(xy)
x
h (x) = 0 h(x) 0,
and a general solution is given implicitly by y + x sin(xy) = c.
91
Chapter 2
7. This equation is separable. Separating variables and integrating, we get

dt dy
t3 y 2 dt = t4 y 6 dy = 8
t y
1 7
ln |t| + C1 = y y = (7 ln |t| + C)1/7 .
7
The function t 0 is also a solution. (We lost it when divided the equation by t4 .)
9. The given dierential equation can be written in the form

dy 1 x
+ y = y 1 .
dx 3x 3
This is a Bernoulli equation with n = 1, P (x) = 1/(3x), and Q(x) = x/3. To transform
this equation into a linear equation, we first multiply by y to obtain
dy 1 2 1
y + y = x.
dx 3x 3
Next we make the substitution v = y 2. Since v = 2yy , the transformed equation is
1 1 1
v + v = x,
2 3x 3
2 2
v + v = x. (2.23)
3x 3
The above equation is linear, so we can solve it for v using the method for solving linear
equations discussed in Section 2.3. Following this procedure, the integrating factor (x) is
found to be +3 , + ,
2 2
(x) = exp dx = exp ln |x| = x2/3 .
3x 3
Multiplying equation (2.23) by x2/3 gives
2 2 5/3 ) * 2
x2/3 v + v = x x2/3 v = x5/3 .
3x1/3 3 3
We now integrate both sides and solve for v to find
3
2 5/3 1 8/3 1 2
2/3
x v= x dx = x +C v= x + Cx2/3 .
3 4 4
Substituting v = y 2 gives the solution
1
y 2 = x2 + Cx2/3 (x2 + 4y 2)x2/3 = 4C
4
or, cubing both sides, (x2 + 4y 2)3 x2 = C1 , where C1 := (4C)3 is an arbitrary constant.
92
Review Problems
11. The right-hand side of this equation is of the form G(t x) with G(u) = 1 + cos2 u. Thus we
make a substitution
tx =u x=tu x = 1 u,
which yields
du du
1 = 1 + cos2 u = cos2 u
dt dt 3 3
2 2
sec u du = dt sec u du = dt
tan u = t + C tan(t x) + t = C.
13. This is a linear equation with P (x) = 1/x. Following the method for solving linear equations
given on page 51 of the text, we find that an integrating factor (x) = 1/x, and so
d[(1/x)y] 1
= x2 sin 2x = x sin 2x
dx 3x 3
y 1 1 1 1
= x sin 2x dx = x cos 2x + cos 2x dx = x cos 2x + sin 2x + C
x 2 2 2 4
2
x x
y = cos 2x + sin 2x + Cx.
2 4

15. The right-hand side of the dierential equation y = 2 2x y + 3 is a function of 2x y
and so can be solved using the method for equations of the form y = G(ax + by) on page 74
of the text. By letting z = 2x y we can transform the equation into a separable one. To
solve, we dierentiate z = 2x y with respect to x to obtain
dz dy dy dz
=2 =2 .
dx dx dx dx
Substituting z = 2x y and y = 2 z into the dierential equation yields
dz dz
2 =2 z+3 or = z +3.
dx dx

To solve this equation we divide by z + 3, multiply by dx, and integrate to obtain
3 3
1/2
(z + 3) dz = dx 2(z + 3)1/2 = x + C .
93
Chapter 2
Thus we get
(x + C)2
z+3= .
4
Finally, replacing z by 2x y yields
(x + C)2
2x y + 3 = .
4
Solving for y, we obtain
(x + C)2
y = 2x + 3 .
4
17. This equation is a Bernoulli equation with n = 2. So, we divide it by y 2 and substitute
u = y 1 to get
43 5
du du
+ 2u = 1 2u = 1 () = exp (2)d = e2
d d
) * 3
d e2 u 2 2
) 2 * e2
= e e u= e d = + C1
d 2
1 1 2 1 + Ce2 2
y = + C 1e = y= .
2 2 1 + Ce2
This formula, together with y 0, gives a general solution to the given equation.
19. In the dierential equation M(x, y) = x2 3y 2 and N(x, y) = 2xy. The dierential equation
is not exact because
M N
= 6y = 2x = .
y x
However, because (M/y N/x) /N = (8y)/(2xy) = 4/x depends only on x, we can
determine (x) from equation (8) on page 70 of the text. This gives
+3 ,
4
(x) = exp dx = x4 .
x
When we multiply the dierential equation by (x) = x4 we get the exact equation
(x2 3x4 y 2) dx + 2x3 y dy = 0.
To find F (x, y) we integrate (x2 3x4 y 2) with respect to x:

3
) 2 *
F (x, y) = x 3x4 y 2 dx = x1 + x3 y 2 + g(y).
94
Review Problems
Next we take the partial derivative of F with respect to y and substitute 2x3 y for F/y:
2x3 y = 2x3 y + g (y).
Thus g (y) = 0 and since the choice of the constant of integration is not important, we will
take g(y) 0. Hence, we have F (x, y) = x1 + x3 y 2 and the implicit solution to the
dierential equation is
x1 + x3 y 2 = C.
Solving for y 2 yields y 2 = x2 + Cx3 .
Finally we check to see if any solutions were lost in the process. We multiplied by the
integrating factor (x) = x4 so we check x 0. This is also a solution to the original
equation.
21. This equation has linear coecients. Therefore, we are looking for a substitution x = u + h
and y = v + k with h and k satisfying
>
2h + k 1 = 0 h = 1,

h+k4 = 0 k = 3.
So, x = u + 1 (dx = du) and y = v + 3 (dy = dv), and the equation becomes
dv 2u v 2 (v/u)
(2u + v)du + (u + v)dv = 0 = = .
du u+v 1 + (v/u)
With z = v/u, we have v = z + uz , and so
dz 2z dz 2z z 2 2z + 2
z+u = u = z =
du 1+z du 1 + z3 1+z 3
z+1 du 1+z du
2
dz = 2
dz =
z + 2z 2 u z + 2z 2 u
1 11 2 1 ) 2 * 2
ln z + 2z 21 = ln |u| + C1 z + 2z 2 u = C2 .
2
Back substitution, z = v/u = (y 3)/(x 1), yields
v 2 + 2uv 2u2 = C2 (y 3)2 + 2(x 1)(y 3) 2(x 1)2 = C2

y 2 8y 2x2 2x + 2xy = C.
95
Chapter 2
23. Given equation is homogeneous because

dy xy 1 (y/x)
= = .
dx x+y 1 + (y/x)
Therefore, substituting u = y/x, we obtain a separable equation.
du 1u du u2 2u + 1
u+x = x =
dx 1+u dx 13+ u 3
u+1 dx 1+u dx
2
du = 2
du =
u + 2u 1 x u + 2u 1 x
1 ) *
ln |u2 + 2u 1| = ln |x| + C1 u2 + 2u 1 x2 = C,
2
and, substituting back u = y/x, after some algebra we get a general solution y 2 +2xyx2 = C.
25. In this dierential form, M(x, y) = y(x y 2) and N(x, y) = x(y x + 4). Therefore,
M N
= x 2y 2, = y 2x + 4
y x
N/x M/y (y 2x + 4) (x 2y 2) 3(x y 2) 3
= = = ,
M y(x y 2) y(x y 2) y
which is a function of y alone. Therefore, the equation has a special integrating factor (y).
We use formula (9) on page 70 of the text to find that (y) = y 3. Multiplying the equation
by (y) yields
y 2(x y 2) dx + xy 3 (y x + 4) dy = 0
3
y 2x2 ) 1 *
F (x, y) = y 2(x y 2) dx = y + 2y 2 x + g(y)
2
F ) *
= y 3 x2 y 2 4y 3 x + g (y) = N(x, y) = xy 3 (y x + 4)
y
g (x) = 0 g(y) 0,
and so
y 2x2 ) *
F (x, y) = x y 1 + 2y 2 = C1 x2 y 2 2xy 1 4xy 2 = C
2
is a general solution. In addition, y 0 is a solution that we lost when multiplied the equation
by (y) = y 3 (i.e., divided by y 3 ).
96
Review Problems
27. This equation has linear coecients. Thus we make a substitution x = u + h, y = v + k with
h and k satisfying >
3h k 5 = 0 h = 3,

hk+1 = 0 k = 4.
With this substitution,
dv 3u v 3 (v/u)
(3u v)du + (u v)dv = 0 = =
du uv 1 (v/u)
v
z= , v = uz, v = z + uz
u
dz 3z dz 3z z2 3
z+u = u = z =
du 1z 3 du 1z3 z1
z1 du z1 du
dz = dz = .
z2 3 u z2 3 u
We use partial fractions to find the integral in the left-hand side. Namely,
z1 A B 1 1 1 1
2
= + , A= , B= + .
z 3 z 3 z+ 3 2 2 3 2 2 3
Therefore, integration yields
1 11 1 11
1 1
A ln 1z 31 + B ln 1z + 31 = ln |u| + C1
#
%11/ 3 # %1+1/ 3 2
z 3 z+ 3 u =C
#
%11/ 3 # %1+1/ 3
vu 3 v+u 3 =C
J
K1/ 3
) 2 * v + u 3
v 3u2 =C
vu 3
L
M1/ 3
- . (y 4) + (x 3) 3
(y 4)2 3(x 3)2 = C.
(y 4) (x 3) 3
29. Here M(x, y) = 4xy 3 9y 2 + 4xy 2 and N(x, y) = 3x2 y 2 6xy + 2x2 y. We compute
M N
= 12xy 2 18y + 8xy, = 6xy 2 6y + 4xy,
y x
M/y N/x (12xy 2 18y + 8xy) (6xy 2 6y + 4xy) 2y(3xy 6 + 2x) 2
= 2 2 2
= = ,
N 3x y 6xy + 2x y xy(3xy 6 + 2x) x
97
Chapter 2
which is a function of x alone. Thus, the equation has a special integrating factor
+3 ,
2
(x) = exp dx = x2 .
x
Multiplying the equation by (x), we find that
3
) *
F (x, y) = x2 4xy 3 9y 2 + 4xy 2 dx = x4 y 3 3x3 y 2 + x4 y 2 + g(y)
F ) *
= 3x4 y 2 6x3 y + 2x4 y + g (y) = x2 N(x, y) = x2 3x2 y 2 6xy + 2x2 y
y
g (y) = 0 g(y) 0
F (x, y) = x4 y 3 3x3 y 2 + x4 y 2 = C
is a general solution.
31. In this problem,

M N M/y N/x 2
= 1, = 1, and so = .
y x N x
Therefore, the equation has a special integrating factor
43 + , 5
2
(x) = exp dx = x2 .
x
We multiply the given equation by (x) to get an exact equation.
# y% 1
x 2 dx + dy = 0
x x3 + ,
1 y
F (x, y) = dy = + h(x)
x x
F y y x2
= 2 + h (x) = x 2 h (x) = x h(x) = ,
x x x 2
and a general solution is given by
y x2
F (x, y) = + =C and x 0.
x 2
(The latter has been lost in multiplication by (x).) Substitution the initial values, y = 3
when x = 1, yields
3 12 7
+ =C C= .
1 2 2
98
Review Problems
Hence, the answer is

y x2 7 x3 7x
+ = y= + .
x 2 2 2 2
33. Choosing x as the dependent variable, we transform the equation to
dx
+ x = (t + 3).
dt
)? *
This equation is linear, P (t) 1. So, (t) = exp dt = et and
d (et x)
= (t + 3)et
dt 3 3
t t t
ex= (t + 3)e dt = (t + 3)e + et dt = (t + 2)et + C
x = (t + 2) + Cet .
Using the initial condition, x(0) = 1, we find that
1 = x(0) = (0 + 2) + Ce0 C = 3,
and so x = t 2 + 3et .
35. For M(x, y) = 2y 2 + 4x2 and N(x, y) = xy, we compute
M N M/y N/x 4y (y) 5

= 4y, = y = = ,
y x N xy x
which is a function of x only. Using (8) on page 70 of the text, we find an integrating factor
(x) = x5 and multiply the equation by (x) to get an exact equation,
) *
x5 2y 2 + 4x2 dx x4 y dy = 0.
Hence,
3
) * x4 y 2
F (x, y) = x4 y dy = + h(x)
2
F 4x5 y 2
= + h (x) = x5 M(x, y) = 2x5 y 2 + 4x3
x 2
h (x) = 4x3 h(x) = 2x2
99
Chapter 2
x4 y 2
F (x, y) = 2x2 = C.
2
We find C by substituting the initial condition, y(1) = 2:
(1)4 (2)2
2(1)2 = C C = 4 .
2
So, the solution is
x4 y 2
2x2 = 4
2
y 2 + 4x2 = 8x4
) *
y 2 = 8x4 4x2 = 4x2 2x2 1

y = 2x 2x2 1 ,
where, taking the square root, we have chosen the negative sign because of the initial negative
value for y.
37. In this equation with linear coecients we make a substitution x = u + h, y = v + k with h

and k such that
> >
2h k = 0 k = 2h k = 2,

h+k = 3 h + (2h) = 3 h = 1.
Therefore,
(2u v)du + (u + v)dv = 0

dv v 2u (v/u) 2
= =
du v+u (v/u) + 1
z = v/u, v = uz, v = z + uz
dz z2 dz z2 + 2
z+u = u =
du z+1 du z+1
z+1 du
dz = .
z2 + 2 u
Integration yields
3 3 3 3 3
z+1 du z dz dz du
dz = + =
z2 + 2 u z2 + 2 z2 + 2 u
100
Review Problems
+ ,
1 ) 2 * 1 z
ln z + 2 + arctan = ln |u| + C1
2 2 2
+ ,
-) 2 * 2. z
ln z + 2 u + 2 arctan =C
2
+ ,
) 2 2
* v
ln v + 2u + 2 arctan =C
u 2
4 5
- 2 2
. y2
ln (y 2) + 2(x 1) + 2 arctan = C.
(x 1) 2
The initial condition, y(0) = 2, gives C = ln 2, and so the answer is
4 5
- 2 2
. y2
ln (y 2) + 2(x 1) + 2 arctan = ln 2 .
(x 1) 2
39. Multiplying the equation by y, we get

dy 2 1
y y2 = .
dx x x
We substitute u = y 2 and obtain
1 du 2 1 du 4 2
u= u= ,
2 dx x x dx x x
which is linear and has an integrating factor
43 + , 5
4
(x) = exp dx = x4 .
x
Hence,
d (x4 u)
= 2x5
dx 3
) * x4
x4 u = 2x5 dx = +C
2
x4
x4 y 2 = +C
2
1
y 2 = + Cx4 .
2
Substitution y(1) = 3 yields
1 19
32 = + C(1)4 or C= .
2 2
101
Chapter 2
Therefore, the solution to the given initial value problem is

!
4
1 19x 19x4 1
y2 = + or y= .
2 2 2
102
CHAPTER 3: Mathematical Models and Numerical
Methods Involving First Order Equations
EXERCISES 3.2: Compartmental Analysis, page 98
1. Let x(t) denote the mass of salt in the tank at time t with t = 0 denoting the moment when
the process started. Thus we have x(0) = 0.5 kg. We use the mathematical model described
by equation (1) on page 90 of the text to find x(t). Since the solution is entering the tank
with rate 8 L/min and contains 0.05 kg/L of salt,
input rate = 8 (L/min) 0.05 (kg/L) = 0.4 (kg/min).
We can determine the concentration of salt in the tank by dividing x(t) by the volume of the
solution, which remains constant, 100 L, because the flow rate in is the same as the flow rate
out. Therefore, the concentration of salt at time t is x(t)/100 kg/L and
x(t) 2x(t)
output rate = (kg/L) 8 (L/min) = (kg/min).
100 25
Then the equation (1) yields
dx 2x dx 2x
= 0.4 + = 0.4 , x(0) = 0.5 .
dt 25 dt 25
-? .
This equation is linear, has integrating factor (t) = exp (2/25)dt = e2t/25 , and so
) *
d e2t/25 x
= 0.4e2t/25
dt + ,
25 2t/25
e 2t/25
x = 0.4 e + C = 5e2t/25 + C x = 5 + Ce2t/25 .
2
Using the initial condition, we find C.
0.5 = x(0) = 5 + C C = 4.5 ,
103
Chapter 3
and so the mass of salt in the tank after t minutes is
x(t) = 5 4.5e2t/25 .
If the concentration of salt in the tank is 0.02 kg/L, then the mass of salt is 0.02 100 = 2 kg,
and, to find this moment, we solve
2 25 ln(3/2)
5 4.5e2t/25 = 2 e2t/25 = t= 5.07 (min).
3 2
3. Let x(t) be the volume of nitric acid in the tank at time t. The tank initially held 200 L
of a 0.5% nitric acid solution; therefore, x(0) = 200 0.005 = 1. Since 6 L of 20% nitric
acid solution are flowing into the tank per minute, the rate at which nitric acid is entering
is 6 0.2 = 1.2 L/min. Because the rate of flow out of the tank is 8 L/min and the rate
of flow in is only 6 L/min, there is a net loss in the tank of 2 L of solution every minute.
Thus, at any time t, the tank will be holding 200 2t liters of solution. Combining this
with the fact that the volume of nitric acid in the tank at time t is x(t), we see that the
concentration of nitric acid in the tank at time t is x(t)/(200 2t). Here we are assuming that
the tank is kept well stirred. The rate at which nitric acid flows out of the tank is, therefore,
8 [x(t)/(200 2t)] L/min. From all of these facts, we see that
input rate = 1.2 L/min,

8x(t)
output rate = L/min.
200 2t
We know that
dx
= input rate output rate .
dt
Thus we must solve the dierential equation
dx 4x(t)
= 1.2 , x(0) = 1.
dt 100 t
This is the linear equation
dx 4
+ x = 1.2 , x(0) = 1.
dt 100 t
104
Exercises 3.2
An integrating factor for this equation has the form

+3 ,
4
(t) = exp dt = e4 ln(100t) = (100 t)4 .
100 t
Multiplying the linear equation by the integrating factor yields
dx
(100 t)4 + 4x(100 t)5 = (1.2)(100 t)4
-dt .
Dt (100 t)4 x = (1.2)(100 t)4
3
1.2
(100 t) x = 1.2 (100 t)4 dt =
4
(100 t)3 + C
3
x(t) = (0.4)(100 t) + C(100 t)4 .
To find the value of C, we use the initial condition x(0) = 1. Therefore,
39
x(0) = (0.4)(100) + C(100)4 = 1 C= 4
= 3.9 107 .
100
This means that at time t there is
x(t) = (0.4)(100 t) (3.9 107)(100 t)4
liters of nitric acid in the tank. When the percentage of nitric acid in the tank is 10%, the
concentration of nitric acid is 0.1. Thus we want to solve the equation
x(t)
= 0.1 .
200 2t
Therefore, we divide the solution x(t) that we found above by 2(100 t) and solve for t. That
is, we solve
(0.2) (1.95 107)(100 t)3 = 0.1

4 51/3
107
t = 0.1 + 100 19.96 (min).
1.95
5. Let x(t) denote the volume of chlorine in the pool at time t. Then in the formula
rate of change = input rate output rate
105
Chapter 3
we have
0.001%
input rate = 5 (gal/min) = 5 105 (gal/min),
100%
x(t) (gal)
output rate = 5 (gal/min) = 5 104 x(t) (gal/min),
10, 000 (gal)
and the equation for x(t) becomes

dx dx
= 5 105 5 104 x + 5 104 x = 5 105 .
dt dt
This is a linear equation. Solving yields
4 t
x(t) = 0.1 + Ce510 = 0.1 + Ce0.0005t .
Using the initial condition,

0.01%
x(0) = 10, 000 (gal) = 1 (gal),
100%
we find the value of C:
1 = 0.1 + Ce0.00050 C = 0.9 .
Therefore, x(t) = 0.1 + 0.9e0.0005t and the concentration of chlorine, say, c(t), in the pool at
time t is
x(t) (gal) x(t)
c(t) = 100% = % = 0.001 + 0.009e0.0005t %.
10, 000 (gal) 100
After 1 hour (i.e., t = 60 min),
c(60) = 0.001 + 0.009e0.000560 = 0.001 + 0.009e0.03 0.0097 %.
To answer the second question, we solve the equation

ln(1/9)
c(t) = 0.001 + 0.009e0.0005t = 0.002 t= 4394.45 (min) 73.24 (h).
0.0005
7. Let x(t) denote the mass of salt in the first tank at time t. Assuming that the initial mass is
x(0) = x0 , we use the mathematical model described by equation (1) on page 90 of the text to
106
Exercises 3.2
find x(t). We can determine the concentration of salt in the first tank by dividing x(t) by the
its volume, i.e., x(t)/60 kg/gal. Note that the volume of brine in this tank remains constant
because the flow rate in is the same as the flow rate out. Then
+ ,
x(t) x(t)
output rate1 = (3 gal/min) kg/gal = kg/min.
60 20
Since the incoming liquid is pure water, we conclude that
input rate1 = 0.
Therefore, x(t) satisfies the initial value problem
dx x
= input rate1 output rate1 = , x(0) = x0 .
dt 20
This equation is linear and separable. Solving and using the initial condition to evaluate the
arbitrary constant, we find
x(t) = x0 et/20 .
Now, let y(t) denote the mass of salt in the second tank at time t. Since initially this tank
contained only pure water, we have y(0) = 0. The function y(t) can be described by the same
mathematical model. We get
x(t) x0 t/20
input rate2 = output rate1 = = e kg/min.
20 20
Further since the volume of the second tank also remains constant, we have
+ ,
y(t) y(t)
output rate2 = (3 gal/min) kg/gal = kg/min.
60 20
Therefore, y(t) satisfies the initial value problem
dy x0 t/20 y(t)
= input rate2 output rate2 = e , y(0) = 0 .
dt 20 20
or
dy y(t) x0 t/20
+ = e , y(0) = 0 .
dt 20 20
107
Chapter 3
This is a linear equation in standard form. Using the method given on page 51 of the text we
find the general solution to be
x0 t/20
y(t) = te + Cet/20 .
20
The constant C can be found from the initial condition:
x0
0 = y(0) = 0 e0/20 + Ce0/20 C = 0.
20
Therefore, y(t) = (x0 /20) tet/20 . To investigate y(t) for maximum value we calculate
+ ,
dy x0 t/20 y(t) x0 t/20 t
= e = e 1 .
dt 20 20 20 20
Thus
dy t
=0 1 =0 t = 20,
dt 20
which is the point of global maximum (notice that dy/dt > 0 for t < 20 and dy/dt < 0 for
t > 20). In other words, at this moment the water in the second tank will taste saltiest, and
comparing concentrations, it will be
y(20)/60 y(20) 1
= = 20 e20/20 = e1
x0 /60 x0 20
times as salty as the original brine.
9. Let p(t) be the population of splake in the lake at time t. We start counting the population
in 1980. Thus, we let t = 0 correspond to the year 1980. By the Malthusian law stated on
page 93 of the text, we have
p(t) = p0 ekt .
Since p0 = p(0) = 1000, we see that
p(t) = 1000ekt .
To find k we use the fact that the population of splake was 3000 in 1987. Therefore,
ln 3
p(7) = 3000 = 1000ek7 3 = ek7 k= .
7
108
Exercises 3.2
< < < > > > > > < < < < <
0 a/b
Figure 3A: The phase line for p = (a bp)p.
Putting this value for k into the equation for p(t) gives
p(t) = 1000e(t ln 3)/7 = 1000 3t/7 .
To estimate the population in 2010 we plug t = 2010 1980 = 30 into this formula to get
p(30) = 1000 330/7 110, 868 splakes.
11. In this problem, the dependent variable is p, the independent variable is t, and the function
f (t, p) = (abp)p. Since f (t, p) = f (p), i.e., does not depend on t, the equation is autonomous.
To find equilibrium solutions, we solve
a
f (p) = 0 (a bp)p = 0 p1 = 0, p2 = .
b
Thus, p1 (t) 0 and p2 (t) a/b are equilibrium solutions. For p1 < p < p2 , f (p) > 0, and
f (p) < 0 when p > p2 . (Also, f (p) < 0 for p < p1 .) Thus the phase line for the given equation
is as it is shown in Figure 3-A. From this picture, we conclude that the equilibrium p = p1 is
a source while p = p2 is a sink. Thus, regardless of an initial point p0 > 0, the solution to the
corresponding initial value problem will approach p2 = a/b as t .
13. With year 1980 corresponding to t = 0, the data given can be written as
t0 = 0, p0 = p(t0 ) = 1000;
ta = 1987 1980 = 7, pa = p(ta ) = 3000;
tb = 1994 1980 = 14, pb = p(tb ) = 5000.
Since tb = 2ta , we can use formulas in Problem 12 to compute parameters p1 and A in the
logistic model (14) on page 94 of the text. We have:
(3000)(5000) 2(1000)(5000) + (1000)(3000)
p1 = (3000) = 6000;
(3000)2 (1000)(5000)
109
Chapter 3
4 5
1 5000(3000 1000) ln 5
A= ln = .
(6000)7 1000(5000 3000) 42000
Thus the formula (15) on page 95 of the text becomes
p0 p1 (1000)(6000) 6000
p(t) = Ap t
= (ln 5/42000)6000t
= . (3.1)
p0 + (p1 p0 )e 1 (1000) + (6000 1000)e 1 + 51t/7
In the year 2010, t = 2010 1980 = 30, and the estimated population of splake is
6000
p(30) = 5970.
1 + 5130/7
Taking the limit in (3.1), as t , yields
6000 6000
lim p(t) = lim = = 6000.
t t 1+5 1t/7
1 + lim 51t/7
t
Therefore, the predicted limiting population is 6000.
15. Counting time from the year 1970, we have the following data:
t0 = 0, p0 = p(t0 ) = 300;
ta = 1975 1970 = 5, pa = p(ta ) = 1200;
tb = 1980 1970 = 10, pb = p(tb ) = 1500.
Since tb = 2ta , we use the formulas in Problem 12 to find parameters in the logistic model.
4 5
(1200)(1500) 2(300)(1500) + (300)(1200) 16800
p1 = 2
(1200) = ;
(1200) (300)(1500) 11
4 5
1 (1500)(1200 300) 11 ln(15)
A= ln = .
(16800/11)5 (300)(1500 1200) 84000
Therefore,
300(16800/11) 16800
p(t) = ln(15)t/5
= .
300 + [(16800/11) 300]e 11 + 3 151t/5
In the year 2010, t = 2010 1970 = 40, and so the estimated population of alligators is
16800 16800
p(40) = = 1527.
11 + 3 15 140/5 11 + 3 157
Taking the limit of p(t), as t , we get the predicted limiting population of
16800 16800
lim 1t/5
= 1527.
t 11 + 3 15 11
110
Exercises 3.2
16. By definition,
p(t + h) p(t)
p (t) = lim .
h0 h
Replacing h by h in the above equation, we obtain
p(t h) p(t) p(t) p(t h)
p (t) = lim = lim .
h0 h h0 h
Adding the previous two equations together yields
4 5
p(t + h) p(t) p(t) p(t h)
2p (t) = lim +
h0 h h
4 5
p(t + h) p(t h)
= lim .
h0 h
Thus 4 5
p(t + h) p(t h)
p (t) = lim .
h0 2h
19. This problem can be regarded as a compartmental analysis problem for the population of
fish. If we let m(t) denote the mass in million tons of a certain species of fish, then the
mathematical model for this process is given by
dm
= increase rate decrease rate.
dt
The increase rate of fish is given by 2m million tons/yr. The decrease rate of fish is given as
15 million tons/yr. Substituting these rates into the above equation we obtain
dm
= 2m 15, m(0) = 7 (million tons).
dt
This equation is linear and separable. Using the initial condition, m(0) = 7 to evaluate the
arbitrary constant we obtain
1 15
m(t) = e2t + .
2 2
Knowing this equation we can now find when all the fish will be gone. To determine when all
the fish will be gone we set m(t) = 0 and solve for t. This gives
1 15
0 = e2t +
2 2
111
Chapter 3
and, hence,
1
t= ln(15) 1.354 (years).
2
To determine the fishing rate required to keep the fish mass constant we solve the general
problem
dm
= 2m r, m(0) = 7,
dt
with r as the fishing rate. Thus we obtain
r
m(t) = Ke2t + .
2
The initial mass was given to be 7 million tons. Substituting this into the above equation we
can find the arbitrary constant K:
r r
m(0) = 7 = K + K =7 .
2 2
Thus m(t) is given by
# r % 2t r
m(t) = 7 e + .
2 2
A fishing rate of r = 14 million tons/year will give a constant mass of fish by canceling out
the coecient of the e2t term.
21. Let D = D(t), S(t), and V (t) denote the diameter, surface area, and volume of the snowball
at time t, respectively. From geometry, we know that V = D 3 /6 and S = D 2 . Since we are
given that V (t) is proportional to S(t), the equation describing the melting process is
dV d # 3% ) *
= kS D = k D 2
dt dt 6
2 dD dD
D = kD 2 = 2k = const.
2 dt dt
Solving, we get D = 2kt + C. Initially, D(0) = 4, and we also know that D(30) = 3. These
data allow us to find k and C.
4 = D(0) = 2k 0 + C C = 4;
1
3 = D(30) = 2k 30 + C = 2k 30 + 4 2k = .
30
112
Exercises 3.2
Thus
t
D(t) = +4.
30
The diameter D(t) of the snowball will be 2 inches when
t
+4=2 t = 60 (min) = 1 (h),
30
and the snowball will disappear when
t
+4=0 t = 120 (min) = 2 (h).
30
23. If m(t) (with t measured in days) denotes the mass of a radioactive substance, the law of
decay says that
dm
= km(t) ,
dt
with the decay constant k depending on the substance. Solving this equation yields
m(t) = Cekt .
If the initial mass of the substance is m(0) = m0 , then, similarly to the equation (11) on
page 93 of the text, we find that
m(t) = m0 ekt . (3.2)
In this problem, m0 = 50 g, and we know that m(3) = 10 g. These data yield

ln 5
10 = m(3) = 50 ek(3) k= ,
3
and so the decay is governed by the equation
m(t) = 50e(ln 5)t/3 = (50)5t/3 .
After 4 days, the remaining amount will be m(4) = (50)54/3 g, which is
(50)54/3
100% = 54/3 100% 11.7%
50
of the original amount.
113
Chapter 3
25. Let M(t) denote the mass of carbon-14 present in the burnt wood of the campfire. Then since
carbon-14 decays at a rate proportional to its mass, we have
dM
= M,
dt
where is the proportionality constant. This equation is linear and separable. Using the
initial condition, M(0) = M0 we obtain
M(t) = M0 et .
Given the half-life of carbon-14 to be 5600 years, we solve for since we have
1 1
M0 = M0 e(5600) = e(5600) ,
2 2
which yields
ln(0.5)
= 0.000123776 .
5600
Thus,
M(t) = M0 e0.000123776t .
Now we are told that after t years 2% of the original amount of carbon-14 remains in the
campfire and we are asked to determine t. Thus
0.02M0 = M0 e0.000123776t 0.02 = e0.000123776t

ln 0.02
t= 31, 606 (years).
0.000123776
27. The element Hh decays according to the general law of a radioactive decay, which is described
by (3.2) (this time, with t measured in years). Since the initial mass of Hh is m0 = 1 kg
and the decay constant k = kHh = 2/yr, we get
Hh(t) = ekHh t = e2t . (3.3)
For It, the process is more complicated: it has an incoming mass from the decay of Hh and,
at the same, looses its mass decaying to Bu. (This process is very similar to brine solution
114
Exercises 3.2
problems.) Thus we use the general idea in getting a dierential equation describing this
process:
rate of change = input rate output rate. (3.4)
The input rate is the rate of mass coming from Hhs decay, which is opposite to the rate of
decay of Hh (Hh looses the mass but It gains it), i.e.,
dHh
input rate = = 2e2t , (3.5)
dt
where we have used (3.3). The output rate is the rate with which It decays, which (again,
according to the general law of a radioactive decay) is proportional to its current mass. Since
the decay constant for It is k = kIt = 1/yr,
output rate = kIt It(t) = It(t). (3.6)
Therefore, combining (3.4)(3.6) we get the equation for It, that is,
dIt(t) dIt(t)
= 2e2t It(t) + It(t) = 2e2t .
dt dt
-? .
This is a linear equation with P (t) 1 and an integrating factor (t) = exp (1)dt = et .
Multiplying the equation by (t) yields
d [et It(t)]
= 2et et It(t) = 2et + C It(t) = 2e2t + Cet .
dt
Initially, there were no It, which means that It(0) = 0. With this initial condition we find
that
0 = It(0) = 2e2(0) + Ce(0) = 2 + C C = 2,
and the mass of It remaining after t years is

) *
It(t) = 2e2t + 2et = 2 et e2t . (3.7)
The element Bu only gains its mass from It, and the rate with which it does this is opposite
to the rate with which It looses its mass. Hence (3.6) yields
dBu(t) ) *
= It(t) = 2 et e2t .
dt
115
Chapter 3
Integrating, we obtain
3
) t *
Bu(t) = 2 e e2t dt = 2et + e2t + C,
and the initial condition Bu(0) = 0 gives C = 1. Therefore,
Bu(t) = 2et + e2t + 1.
EXERCISES 3.3: Heating and Cooling of Buildings, page 107
1. Let T (t) denote the temperature of coee at time t (in minutes). According to the Newtons
Law (1) on page 102 of the text,
dT
= K[21 T (t)],
dt
where we have taken H(t) U(t) 0, M(t) 21 C, with the initial condition T (0) = 95 C.
Solving this initial value problem yields
dT
= K dt ln |T 21| = Kt + C1 T (t) = 21 + CeKt ;
21 T
95 = T (0) = 21 + CeK(0) C = 74 T (t) = 21 + 74eKt .
To find K, we use the fact that after 5 min the temperature of coee was 80 C. Thus
ln(74/59)
80 = T (5) = 21 + 74eK(5) K= ,
5
and so ,t/5
+
ln(74/59)t/5 74
T (t) = 21 + 74e = 21 + 74 .
59
Finally, we solve the equation T (t) = 50 to find the time appropriate for drinking coee:
+ ,t/5 + ,t/5
74 74 29 5 ln(74/29)
50 = 21 + 74 = t= 20.7 (min).
59 59 74 ln(74/59)
3. This problem is similar to one of cooling a building. In this problem we have no additional
heating or cooling so we can say that the rate of change of the wines temperature, T (t) is
given by Newtons law of cooling
dT
= K[M(t) T (t)],
dt
116
Exercises 3.3
where M(t) = 32 is the temperature of ice. This equation is linear and is rewritten in the
standard form as
dT
+ KT (t) = 32K.
dt
We find that the integrating factor is eKt . Multiplying both sides by eKt and integrating gives
3
Kt dT Kt Kt
e + e KT (t) = 32Ke e T (t) = 32KeKt dt
Kt
dt
eKt T (t) = 32eKt + C T (t) = 32 + CeKt .
By setting t = 0 and using the initial temperature 70 F, we find the constant C.
70 = 32 + C C = 38 .
Knowing that it takes 15 minutes for the wine to chill to 60 F, we can find the constant, K:
60 = 32 + 38eK(15) .
Solving for K yields + ,

1 60 32
K= ln 0.02035 .
15 38
Therefore,
T (t) = 32 + 38e0.02035t .
We can now determine how long it will take for the wine to reach 56 F. Using our equation
for temperature T (t), we set
56 = 32 + 38e0.02035t
and, solving for t, obtain

+ ,
1 56 32
t= ln 22.6 min.
0.02035 38
5. This problem can be treated as one similar to that of a cooling building. If we assume the air
surrounding the body has not changed since the death, we can say that the rate of change of
the bodys temperature, T (t) is given by Newtons law of cooling:
dT
= K[M(t) T (t)],
dt
117
Chapter 3
where M(t) represents the surrounding temperature which weve assumed to be a constant
16 C. This dierential equation is linear and is solved using an integrating factor of eKt .
Rewriting the above equation in standard form, multiplying both sides by eKt and integrating
gives
dT dT
+ KT (t) = K(16) eKt + eKt KT (t) = 16KeKt
dt dt
eKt T (t) = 16eKt + C T (t) = 16 + CeKt .
Let us take t = 0 as the time at which the person died. Then T (0) = 37 C (normal body
temperature) and we get
37 = 16 + C C = 21 .
Now we know that at sometime, say X hours after death, the body temperature was measured
to be 34.5 C and that at X + 1 hours after death the body temperature was measured to be
33.7 C. Therefore, we have
34.5 = 16 + 21eKX and 33.7 = 16 + 21eK(X+1) .
Solving the first equation for KX we arrive at

+ ,
34.5 16
KX = ln = 0.12675 . (3.8)
21
Substituting this value into the second equation we, can solve for K as follows:
33.7 = 16 + 21e0.12675K
4 + ,5
33.7 16
K = 0.12675 + ln = 0.04421 .
21
This results in an equation for the body temperature of
T (t) = 16 + 21e0.04421t .
From equation (3.8) we now find the number of hours X before 12 Noon when the person
died.
0.12675 0.12675
X= = 2.867 (hours).
K 0.04421
Therefore, the time of death is 2.867 hours (2 hours and 52 min) before Noon or 9 : 08 a.m.
118
Exercises 3.3
7. The temperature function T (t) changes according to Newtons law of cooling (1) on page 102
of the text. Similarly to Example 1 we conclude that, with H(t) U(t) 0 and the outside
temperature M(t) 35 C, a general solution formula (4) on page 102 becomes
T (t) = 35 + CeKt .
To find C, we use the initial condition,
T (0) = T (at noon) = 24C ,
and get
24 = T (0) = 35 + CeK(0) C = 24 35 = 11 T (t) = 35 11eKt .
The time constant for the building 1/K = 4 hr; so K = 1/4 and T (t) = 35 11et/4 .
At 2 : 00 p.m. t = 2, and t = 6 at 6 : 00 p.m. Substituting this values into the solution, we

obtain that the temperature
at 2 : 00 p.m. will be T (2) = 35 11e2/4 28.3 C;

at 6 : 00 p.m. will be T (6) = 35 11e6/4 32.5 C.
Finally, we solve the equation
T (t) = 35 11et/4 = 27
to find the time when the temperature inside the building reaches 27 C.
+ ,
t/4 t/4 11
35 11e = 27 11e =8 t = 4 ln 1.27 .
8
Thus, the temperature inside the building will be 27 C at 1.27 hr after noon, that is, at
1 : 16 : 12 p.m.
9. Since we are evaluating the temperature in a warehouse, we can assume that any heat gener-
ated by people or equipment in the warehouse will be negligible. Therefore, we have H(t) = 0.
119
Chapter 3
Also, we are assuming that there is no heating or air conditioning in the warehouse. There-
fore, we have that U(t). We are also given that the outside temperature has a sinusoidal
fluctuation. Thus, as in Example 2, page 103, we see that
M(t) = M0 B cos t ,
where M0 is the average outside temperature, B is a positive constant for the magnitude of
the temperature shift from this average, and = /2 radians per hour. To find M0 and B,
we are given that at 2 : 00 a.m., M(t) reaches a low of 16 C and at 2 : 00 p.m. it reaches a
high of 32 C. This gives
16 + 32
M0 = = 24 C.
2
By letting t = 0 at 2 : 00 a.m. (so that low for the outside temperature corresponds to the
low for the negative cosine function), we can calculate the constant B. That is
16 = 24 B cos 0 = 24 B B = 8.
Therefore, we see that

M(t) = 24 8 cos t,
where = /12. As in Example 2, using the fact that B0 = M0 + H0 /K = M0 + 0/K = M0 ,

we see that
T (t) = 24 8F (t) + CeKt ,
where 4
cos t + (/K) sin t # %2 51/2
F (t) = = 1+ cos(t ).
1 + (/K)2 K
In the last expression, is chosen such that tan = /K. By assuming that the exponential
term dies o, we obtain
4 # %2 51/2
T (t) = 24 8 1 + cos(t ).
K
This function will reach a minimum when cos(t ) = 1 and it will reach a maximum when
cos(t ) = 1.
120
Exercises 3.3
For the case when the time constant for the building is 1, we see that 1/K = 1 which implies
that K = 1. Therefore, the temperature will reach a maximum of K
4 # %2 51/2
T = 24 + 8 1 + 31.7 C.
12
It will reach a minimum of

4 # %2 51/2
T = 24 8 1 + 16.3 C.
12
For the case when the time constant of the building is 5, we have
1 1
=5 K= .
K 5
Then, the temperature will reach a maximum of

L + ,2 M1/2
5
T = 24 + 8 1 + 28.9C,
12
and a minimum of L + ,2 M1/2

5
T = 24 8 1 + 19.1 C.
12
11. As in Example 3, page 105 of the text, this problem involves a thermostat to regulate the
temperature in the van. Hence, we have
U(t) = KU [TD T (t)] ,
where TD is the desired temperature 16 C and KU is a proportionality constant. We will

assume that H(t) = 0 and that the outside temperature M(t) is a constant 35 C. The time
constant for the van is 1/K = 2 hr, hence K = 0.5. Since the time constant for the van
with its air conditioning system is 1/K1 = 1/3 hr, then K1 = K + KU = 3. Therefore,
KU = 3 0.5 = 2.5. The temperature in the van is governed by the equation
dT
= (0.5)(35 T ) + (2.5)(16 T ) = 57.5 3T.
dt
121
Chapter 3
Solving this separable equation yields
T (t) = 19.17 + Ce3t .
When t = 0 we are given T (0) = 55. Using this information to solve for C gives C = 35.83.
Hence, the van temperature is given by
T (t) = 19.17 + 35.83e3t .
To find out when the temperature in the van will reach 27 C, we let T (t) = 27 and solve for
t. Thus, we see that
7.83
27 = 19.17 + 35.83e3t e3t = 0.2185
35.83
ln(0.2185)
t 0.5070 (hr) or 30.4 min.
3
13. Since the time constant is 64, we have K = 1/64. The temperature in the tank increases at
the rate of 2 F for every 1000 Btu. Furthermore, every hour of sunlight provides an input of
2000 Btu to the tank. Thus,
H(t) = 2 2 = 4 F per hr.
We are given that T (0) = 110, and that the temperature M(t) outside the tank is a constant
80 F. Hence the temperature in the tank is governed by
dT 1 1
= [80 T (t)] + 4 = T (t) + 5.25 , T (0) = 110.
dt 64 64
Solving this separable equation gives
T (t) = 336 + Cet/64 .
To find C, we use the initial condition to see that
T (0) = 110 = 336 + C C = 226.
This yields the equation

T (t) = 336 226et/64 .
122
Exercises 3.4
After 12 hours of sunlight, the temperature will be
T (12) = 336 226e12/64 148.6 F.
15. The equation dT /dt = k (M 4 T 4 ) is separable. Separation variables yields

3 3
dT dT
= k dt = k dt = kt + C1 . (3.9)
T 4 M4 T 4 M4
Since T 4 M 4 = (T 2 M 2 ) (T 2 + M 2 ), we have
4 5
1 1 (M 2 + T 2 ) + (M 2 T 2 ) 1 1 1
= = ,
T 4 M4 2M 2 (T 2 M 2 ) (T 2 + M 2 ) 2M 2 T 2 M 2 T 2 + M 2
and the integral in the left-hand side of (3.9) becomes
3 43 3 5 4 + ,5
dT 1 dT dT 1 T M T
4 4
= 2 2 2
2 2
= 3
ln 2 arctan .
T M 2M T M T +M 4M T +M M
Thus a general solution to Stefans equation is given implicitly by
4 + ,5
1 T M T
3
ln 2 arctan = kt + C1
4M T +M M
or 4 + , 5
T 3
T M = C(T + M) exp 2 arctan 4M kt .
M
When T is close to M,
) * ) *
M 4 T 4 = (M T )(M + T ) M 2 + T 2 (M T )(2M) 2M 2 4M 3 (M T ),
and so
dT
k 4M 3 (M T )4M 3 = k1 (M T )
dt
with k1 = 4M 3 k, which constitutes Newtons law.
EXERCISES 3.4: Newtonian Mechanics, page 115
1. This problem is a particular case of Example 1 on page 110 of the text. Therefore, we can
use the general formula (6) on page 111 with m = 5, b = 50, and v0 = v(0) = 0. But let us
follow the general idea of Section 3.4, find an equation of the motion, and solve it.
123
Chapter 3
With given data, the force due to gravity is F1 = mg = 5g and the air resistance force is
F2 = 50v. Therefore, the velocity v(t) satisfies
dv dv
m = F1 + F2 = 5g 50v = g 10v, v(0) = 0.
dt dt
Separating variables yields
dv 1
= dt ln |10v g| = t + C1
10v g 10
g
v(t) = + Ce10t .
10
Substituting the initial condition, v(0) = 0, we get C = g/10, and so
g ) *
v(t) = 1 e10t .
10
Integrating this equation yields
3 3 + ,
g ) 10t
* g 1 10t
x(t) = v(t) dt = 1e dt = t+ e + C,
10 10 10
and we find C using the initial condition x(0) = 0:

+ ,
g 1 10(0) g
0= 0+ e +C C=
10 10 100
g g ) 10t *
x(t) = t+ e 1 = (0.981)t + (0.0981)e10t 0.0981 (m).
10 100
When the object hits the ground, x(t) = 1000 m. Thus we solve
(0.981)t + (0.0981)e10t 0.0981 = 1000,
which gives (t is nonnegative!) t 1019.468 1019 sec.
3. For this problem, m = 500 kg, v0 = 0, g = 9.81 m/sec2 , and b = 50 kg/sec. We also see that
the object has 1000 m to fall before it hits the ground. Plugging these variables into equation
(6) on page 111 of the text gives the equation
+ ,
(500)(9.81) 500 (500)(9.81) ) *
x(t) = t+ 0 1 e50t/500
50 50 50
124
Exercises 3.4
x(t) = 98.1t + 981et/10 981.
To find out when the object will hit the ground, we solve x(t) = 1000 for t. Therefore, we
have
1000 = 98.1t + 981et/10 981 98.1t + 981et/10 = 1981.
In this equation, if we ignore the term 981et/10 we will find that t 20.2. But this means
that we have ignored the term similar to 981e2 132.8 which we see is to large to ignore.
Therefore, we must try to approximate t. We will use Newtons method on the equation
f (t) = 98.1t + 981et/10 1981 = 0.
(If we can find a root to this equation, we will have found the t we want.) Newtons method
generates a sequence of approximations given by the formula
f (tn )
tn+1 = tn .
f (tn )
) *
Since f (t) = 98.1 98.1et/10 = 98.1 1 et/10 , the recursive equation above becomes
tn + 10etn /10 (1981/98.1)

tn+1 = tn . (3.10)
1 etn /10
To start the process, let t0 = 1981/98.1 20.19368, which was the approximation we obtained
when we neglected the exponential term. Then, by equation (3.10) above we have
20.19368 + 10e2.019368 20.19368

t1 = 20.19368
1 e2.019368
t1 18.663121 .
To find t2 we plug this value for t1 into equation (3.10). This gives t2 18.643753. Continuing
this process, we find that t3 18.643749. Since t2 and t3 agree to four decimal places, an
approximation for the time it takes the object to strike the ground is t 18.6437 sec.
5. We proceed similarly to the solution of Problem 1 to get
F1 = 5g, F2 = 10g
125
Chapter 3
dv
5 = F1 + F2 = 5g 10v
dt
dv
= g 2v, v(0) = 50.
dt
Solving this iniial value problem yields
g
v(t) = + Ce2t ;
2
g 100 g
50 = v(0) = + Ce2(0) C=
2 2
g 100 g 2t
v(t) = + e .
2 2
We now integrate v(t) to obtain the equation of the motion of the object:
3 3 + ,
g 100 g 2t g 100 g 2t
x(t) = v(t) dt = + e dt = t e + C,
2 2 2 4
where C is such that x(0) = 0. Computing
g 100 g 2(0) 100 g
0 = x(0) = (0) e +C C= ,
2 4 4
we answer the first question in this problem, that is,
g 100 g 2t 100 g
x(t) = t e + 4.905t + 22.5475 22.5475 e2t.
2 4 4
Answering the second question, we solve the equation x(t) = 500 to find time t when the
object passes 500 m, and so strikes the ground.
4.905t + 22.5475 22.5475 e2t = 500 t 97.34 (sec).
7. Since the air resistance force has dierent coecients of proportionality for closed and for
opened chute, we need two dierential equations describing the motion. Let x1 (t), x1 (0) = 0,
denote the distance the parachutist has fallen in t seconds, and let v1 (t) = dx/dt denote her
velocity. With m = 75, b = b1 = 30 N-sec/m, and v0 = 0 the initial value problem (4) on
page 111 of the text becomes
dv1 dv1 2
75 = 75g 30v1 + v1 = g, v1 (0) = 0.
dt dt 5
126
Exercises 3.4
This is a linear equation. Solving yields

) * 5g
d e2t/5 v1 = e2t/5 g dt v1 (t) = + C1 e2t/5 ;
2
5g 5g 5g
0 = v1 (0) = + C1 e0 = + C1 C1 =
2 2 2
5g ) *
v1 (t) = 1 e2t/5
2
3t + ,1s=t + ,
5g 5 2s/5 11 5g 5 2t/5 5
x1 (t) = v1 (s)ds = s+ e 1 = t+ e .
2 2 s=0 2 2 2
0
To find the time t when the chute opens, we solve

+ ,
5g ) * 5 8
20 = v1 (t ) 20 = 1 e2t /5 t = ln 1 4.225 (sec).
2 2 g
By this time the parachutist has fallen
+ , + ,
5g 5 2t /5 5 5g 5 24.225/5 5
x1 (t ) = t + e 4.225 + e 53.62 (m),
2 2 2 2 2 2
and so she is 2000 53.62 = 1946.38 m above the ground. Setting the second equation, we for
convenience reset the time t. Denoting by x2 (t) the distance passed by the parachutist from
the moment when the chute opens, and by v2 (t) := x2 (t) her velocity, we have
dv2
75 = 75g 90v2 , v2 (0) = v1 (t ) = 20, x2 (0) = 0.
dt
Solving, we get
5g
v2 (t) = + C2 e6t/5 ;
6
5g 5g
20 = v2 (0) = + C2 C2 = 20
6 + , 6
5g 5g 6t/5
v2 (t) = + 20 e
6 6
3t 4 + , 51s=t
5g 5 5g 6s/5 11
x2 (t) = v2 (s)ds = s 20 e 1
6 6 6 s=0
0
+ ,
5g 5 5g ) *
= t+ 20 1 e6t/5 .
6 6 6
127
Chapter 3
With the chute open, the parachutist falls 1946.38 m. It takes t seconds, where t satisfies
x2 (t ) = 1946.38. Solving yields
+ ,
5g 5 5g ) *
t + 20 1 e6t /5 = 1946.38 t 236.884 (sec).
6 6 6
Therefore, the parachutist will hit the ground after t + t 241.1 seconds.
9. This problem is similar to Example 1 on page 110 of the text with the addition of a buoyancy
force of magnitude (1/40)mg. If we let x(t) be the distance below the water at time t and
v(t) the velocity, then the total force acting on the object is
1
F = mg bv mg.
40
We are given m = 100 kg, g = 9.81 m/sec2 , and b = 10 kg/sec. Applying Newtons Second
Law gives
dv 10 dv
100 = (100)(9.81) 10v (9.81) = 9.56 (0.1)v .
dt 4 dt
Solving this equation by separation of variables, we have
v(t) = 95.65 + Cet/10 .
Since v(0) = 0, we find C = 95.65 and, hence,
v(t) = 95.65 95.65et/10 .
Integrating yields
x(t) = 95.65t 956.5et/10 + C1 .
Using the fact that x(0) = 0, we find C1 = 956.5. Therefore, the equation of motion of the
object is
x(t) = 95.65t 956.5et/10 956.5 .
To determine when the object is traveling at the velocity of 70 m/sec, we solve v(t) = 70.
That is,
) *
70 = 95.65 95.65et/10 = 95.65 1 et/10
+ ,
70
t = 10 ln 1 13.2 sec.
95.65
128
Exercises 3.4
11. Let v(t) = V [x(t)]. Then, using the chain rule, we get
dv dV dx dV
= = V
dt dx dt dx
and so, for V (x), the initial value problem (4) on page 111 of the text becomes
dV
m V = mg bV, V (0) = V [x(0)] = v(0) = v0 .
dx
This dierential equation is separable. Solving yields
4 5
V m g
dV = dx 1 dV = dx
g (b/m)V b g (b/m)V
3 4 5 3
m g
1 dV = dx
b g (b/m)V
m 8 mg 9
ln |g (b/m)V | V = x + C
b b
b2 x
mg ln |mg bV | + bV = + C1 .
m
Substituting the initial condition, V (0) = v0 , we find that C1 = mg ln |mg bv0 | + bv0 and
hence
b2 x
mg ln |mg bV | + bV = + mg ln |mg bv0 | + bv0
m
2 x/m
ebV |mg bV |mg = ebv0 |mg bv0 |mg eb .
13. There are two forces acting on the shell: a constant force due to the downward pull of gravity
and a force due to air resistance that acts in opposition to the motion of the shell. All of the
motion occurs along a vertical axis. On this axis, we choose the origin to be the point where
the shell was shot from and let x(t) denote the position upward of the shell at time t. The
forces acting on the object can be expressed in terms of this axis. The force due to gravity is
F1 = mg,
where g is the acceleration due to gravity near Earth. Note we have a minus force because our
coordinate system was chosen with up as positive and gravity acts in a downward direction.
The force due to air resistance is
F2 = (0.1)v 2 .
129
Chapter 3
The negative sign is present because air resistance acts in opposition to the motion of the
object. Therefore the net force acting on the shell is
F = F1 + F2 = mg (0.1)v 2.
We now apply Newtons second law to obtain

dv - .
m = mg + (0.1)v 2 .
dt
Because the initial velocity of the shell is 500 m/sec, a model for the velocity of the rising
shell is expressed as the initial-value problem
dv - .
m = mg + (0.1)v 2 , v(t = 0) = 500, (3.11)
dt
where g = 9.81. Separating variables, we get
dv dt
=
10mg + v 2 10m
and so
3 3 + ,
dv dt 1 v t
= tan1 = + C.
10mg + v 2 10m 10mg 10mg 10m
Setting m = 3, g = 9.81 and v = 500 when t = 0, we find
J K
1 500
C=$ tan1 $ 0.08956 .
10(3)(9.81) 10(3)(9.81)
Thus the equation of velocity v as a function of time t is

+ ,
1 1 v t
tan = + 0.08956 .
10mg 10mg 10m
From physics we know that when the shell reaches its maximum height the shells velocity
will be zero; therefore tmax will be
L J K M
1 0
tmax = 10(3) $ tan1 $ 0.08956
10(3)(9.81) 10(3)(9.81)
= (30)(0.08956) 2.69 (seconds).
130
Exercises 3.4
Using equation (3.11) and noting that dv/dt = (dv/dx)(dx/dt) = (dv/dx)v, we can determine
the maximum height attained by the shell. With the above substitution, equation (3.11)
becomes
dv ) *
mv = mg + 0.1v 2 , v(0) = 500.
dx
Using separation of variables and integration, we get
v dv dx 1 ) * x
= ln 10mg + v 2 = +C 10mg + v 2 = Kex/(5m) .
10mg + v 2 10m 2 10m
Setting v = 500 when x = 0, we find
) *
K = e0 10(3)(9.81) + (500)2 = 250294.3 .
Thus the equation of velocity as a function of distance is
v 2 + 10mg = (250294.3)ex/(5m) .
The maximum height will occur when the shells velocity is zero, therefore xmax is
+ ,
0 + 10(3)(9.81)
xmax = 5(3) ln 101.19 (meters).
250294.3
15. The total torque exerted on the flywheel is the sum of the torque exerted by the motor and
the retarding torque due to friction. Thus, by Newtons second law for rotation, we have
d
I = T k with (0) = 0 ,
dt
where I is the moment of inertia of the flywheel, (t) is the angular velocity, d/dt is the
angular acceleration, T is the constant torque exerted by the motor, and k is a positive
constant of proportionality for the torque due to friction. Solving this separable equation
gives
T
(t) = + Cekt/I .
k
Using the initial condition (0) = 0 we find C = (0 T /k). Hence,
+ ,
T T
(t) = + 0 ekt/I .
k k
131
Chapter 3
17. Since the motor is turned o, its torque is T = 0, and the only torque acting on the flywheel

is the retarding one, 5 . Then Newtons second law for rotational motion becomes
d ) *
I = 5 with (0) = 0 = 225 (rad/sec) and I = 50 kg/m2 .
dt
The general solution to this separable equation is
$ 5
(t) = t + C = 0.05t + C.
2I
Using the initial condition, we find
$ $
(0) = 0.05 0 + C C= (0) = 225 = 15.
Thus
1 8 $ 9 8 $ 9
t= 15 (t) = 20 15 (t) .
0.05
At the moment t = tstop when the flywheel stops rotating we have (tstop ) = 0 and so

tstop = 20(15 0) = 300 (sec).
19. There are three forces acting on the object: F1 , the force due to gravity, F2 , the air resistance
force, and F3 , the friction force. Using Figure 3.11 (with 30 replaced by 45 ), we obtain

F1 = mg sin 45 = mg 2/2 ,
F2 = 3v,

F3 = N = mg cos 45 = mg 2/2 ,
and so the equation describing the motion is

dv mg 2 mg 2 dv v
m = 3v = 0.475g 2
dt 2 2 dt 20
with the initial condition v(0) = 0. Solving yields

v(t) = 9.5g 2 + Cet/20 ;

0 = v(0) = 9.5g 2 + C C = 9.5g 2
132
Exercises 3.4
) *
v(t) = 9.5g 2 1 et/20 .
Since x(0) = 0, integrating the above equation, we obtain

3t 3t ) * ) * 11s=t
x(t) = v(s)ds = 9.5g 2 1 es/20 ds = 9.5g 2 s + 20es/20 1
s=0
0 0
) *
= 9.5g 2 t + 20et/20 20 131.8t + 2636et/20 2636.
The object reaches the end of the inclined plane when
x(t) = 131.8t + 2636et/20 2636 = 10 t 1.768 (sec).
21. In this problem there are two forces acting on a sailboat: A constant horizontal force due to
the wind and a force due to the water resistance that acts in opposition to the motion of the
sailboat. All of the motion occurs along a horizontal axis. On this axis, we choose the origin
to be the point where the hard blowing wind begins and x(t) denotes the distance the sailboat
travels in time t. The forces on the sailboat can be expressed in terms of this axis. The force
due to the wind is
F1 = 600 N.
The force due to water resistance is
F2 = 100v N.
Applying Newtons second law we obtain

dv
m = 600 100v.
dt
Since the initial velocity of the sailboat is 1 m/sec, a model for the velocity of the moving
sailboat is expressed as the initial-value problem
dv
m = 600 100v, v(0) = 1 .
dt
Using separation of variables, we get, with m = 50 kg,
dv
= 2dt 6 ln(6 v) = 2t + C.
6v
133
Chapter 3
Therefore, the velocity is given by v(t) = 6 Ke2t . Setting v = 1 when t = 0, we find that
1=6K K = 5.
Thus the equation for velocity v(t) is v(t) = 6 5e2t . The limiting velocity of the sailboat
under these conditions is found by letting time approach infinity:
) *
lim v(t) = lim 6 5e2t = 6 (m/sec).
t t
To determine the equation of motion we will use the equation of velocity obtained previously
and substitute dx/dt for v(t) to obtain
dx
= 6 5e2t , x(0) = 0.
dt
Integrating this equation we obtain
5 2t
x(t) = 6t + e + C1 .
2
Setting x = 0 when t = 0, we find
5 5
0=0+ + C1 C1 = .
2 2
Thus the equation of motion for the sailboat is given by
5 2t 5
x(t) = 6t + e .
2 2
23. In this problem, there are two forces acting on a boat: the wind force F1 and the water
resistance force F2 . Since the proportionality constant in the water resistance force is dierent
for the velocities below and above of a certain limit (5 m/sec for the boat A and 6 m/sec for
the boat B), for each boat we have two dierential equations. (Compare with Problem 7.)
(A) (A) (A)
Let x1 (t) denote the distance passed by the boat A for the time t, v1 (t) := dx1 (t)/dt.
Then the equation describing the motion of the boat A before it reaches the velocity 5 m/sec
is
(A) (A)
dv (A) dv1 65 4 (A)
m 1 = F1 + F2 = 650 b1 v1 = v1 . (3.12)
dt dt 6 3
134
Exercises 3.4
(A)
Solving this linear equation and using the initial condition, v1 (0) = 2, we get
(A) 65 49 4t/3
v1 (t) = e ,
8 8
and so
3t + ,
(A) 65 49 4s/3 65 147 ) 4t/3 *
x1 (t) = e ds = t e 1 .
8 8 8 32
0
The boat A will have the velocity 5 m/sec at t = t satisfying
65 49 4t /3 3 ln(25/49)
e =5 t = 0.5 (sec),
8 8 4
and it will be
(A) 65 147 ) 4t /3 *
x1 (t ) = t e 1 1.85 (m)
8 32
away from the starting point or, equivalently, 5001.85 = 498.15 meters away from the finish.
Similarly to (3.12), resetting the time, we obtain an equation of the motion of the boat A
(A)
starting from the moment when its velocity reaches 5 m/sec. Denoting by x2 (t) the distance
(A) (A) (A)
passed by the boat A and by v2 (t) its velocity, we get x2 (0) = 0, v2 (0) = 5, and
(A)
dv2 (A)
m = 650 b2 v2
dt
(A)
dv2 65 (A) (A) 65 35 t
v2
= v2 (t) = e
dt 6 6 6
3t + ,
(A) 65 35 s 65 35 ) t *
x2 (t) = e ds = t+ e 1 .
6 6 6 6
0
(A)
Solving the equation x2 (t) = 498.15, we find the time (counting from the moment when the
boat As velocity has reached 5 m/sec) t 46.5 sec, which is necessary to come to the end
of the first leg. Therefore, the total time for the boat A is t + t 0.5 + 46.5 = 47 sec.
Similarly, for the boat B, we find that

(B) 65 49 5t/3 (B) 65 147 ) 5t/3 * 3 ln(17/49)
v1 (t) = e , x1 (t) = t+ e 1 , t = 0.635 ;
8 8 8 40 5
(B) 65 35 5t/6 (B) 65 42 ) 5t/6 *

v2 (t) = e , x2 (t) = t+ e 1 , t 38.895 .
5 5 5 5
Thus, t + t < 40 sec, and so the boat B will be leading at the end of the first leg.
135
Chapter 3
25. (a) From Newtons second law we have

dv GMm
m = .
dt r2
Dividing both sides by m, the mass of the rocket, and letting g = GM/R2 we get
dv gR2
= ,
dt r2
where g is the gravitational force of Earth, R is the radius of Earth and r is the distance
between Earth and the projectile.
(b) Using the equation found in part (a), letting dv/dt = (dv/dr)(dr/dt) and knowing that
dr/dt = v, we get
dv gR2
v = 2 .
dr r
(c) The dierential equation found in part (b) is separable and can be written in the form
gR2
v dv = dr.
r2
If the projectile leaves Earth with a velocity of v0 we have the initial value problem
gR2 1
1
v dv = 2 dr , v 1 = v0 .
r r=R
Integrating we get
v2 gR2
= + K,
2 r
where K is an arbitrary constant. We can find the constant K by using the initial value
as follows:
v02 gR2 v2
K= = 0 gR.
2 R 2
Substituting this formula for K and solving for the velocity we obtain
2gR2
v2 = + v02 2gR.
r
(d) In order for the velocity of the projectile to always remain positive, (2gR2 /r) + v02 must
be greater than 2gR as r approaches infinity. This means
+ ,
2gR2 2
lim + v0 > 2gR v02 > 2gR.
r r
Therefore, v02 2gR > 0.
136
Exercises 3.5

(e) Using the equation ve = 2gR for the escape velocity and converting meters to kilometers
we have
$ I
ve = 2gR = 2 9.81 m/sec2 (1 km/1000 m)(6370 km) 11.18 km/sec.
(f) Similarly to (e), we find

$ $
ve = 2(g/6)R = 2(9.81/6)(1/1000)(1738) = 2.38 (km/sec).
EXERCISES 3.5: Electrical Circuits, page 122
1. In this problem, R = 5 , L = 0.05 H, and the voltage function is given by E(t) = 5 cos 120t V.
Substituting these data into a general solution (3) to the Kirchhos equation (2) yields
+3 ,
Rt/L Rt/L E(t)
I(t) = e e dt + K
L
+3 , + 3 ,
5t/0.05 5t/0.05 5 cos 120t 100t 100t
= e e dt + K = e 100 e cos 120t dt + K .
0.05
Using the integral tables, we evaluate the integral in the right-hand side and obtain
4 5
100t e100t (100 cos 120t + 120 sin 120t) cos 120t + 1.2 sin 120t
I(t) = e 100 2 2
+K = + Ke100t .
(100) + (120) 2.44
The initial condition, I(0) = 1, implies that
cos(120(0)) + 1.2 sin(120(0)) 1 1 1.44

1 = I(0) = + Ke100(0) = +K K = 1 =
2.44 2.44 2.44 2.44
and so
1.44e100t + cos 120t + 1.2 sin 120t
I(t) = .
2.44
The subsequent inductor voltage is then determined by
+ ,
dI d 1.44e100t + cos 120t + 1.2 sin 120t
EL (t) = L = 0.05
dt dt 2.44
100t
7.2e 6 sin 120t + 7.2 cos 120t
= .
2.44
137
Chapter 3
3. In this RC circuit, R = 100 , C = 1012 F, the initial charge of the capacitor is Q = q(0) = 0
coulombs, and the applied constant voltage is V = 5 volts. Thus we can use a general equation
for the charge q(t) of the capacitor derived in Example 2. Substitution of given data yields
# % # %
q(t) = CV + [Q CV ]et/RC = 1012 (5) 1 et/(10010 ) = 5 1012 1 e10 t
12 10
and so
q(t) # 10
%
EC (t) = = 5 1 e10 t .
C
Solving the equation EC (t) = 3, we get
# 10
% 10 ln 0.4
5 1 e10 t = 3 e10 t = 0.4 t= 9.2 1011 (sec).
1010
Therefore, it will take about 9.21011 seconds for the voltage to reach 3 volts at the receiving
gate.
5. Let V (t) denote the voltage across an element, and let I(t) be the current through this element.
Then for the power, say P = P (t), generated or dissipated by the element we have
P = I(t)V (t). (3.13)
We use formulas given in (a), (b), and (c) on page 119120 of the text to find P for a resistor,
an inductor, and a capacitor.
(a) Resistor. In this case,

V (t) = ER (t) = RI(t),
and substitution into (3.13) yields
PR = I(t) [RI(t)] = I(t)2 R.
(b) Inductor. We have

dI(t)
V (t) = EL (t) = L
4 dt 5 4 5
dI(t) L dI(t) L d [I(t)2 ] d [LI(t)2 /2]
PL = I(t) L = 2I(t) = = .
dt 2 dt 2 dt dt
138
Exercises 3.6
(c) Capacitor. Here, with q(t) denoting the electrical charge on the capacitor,
1 dq(t) d [CEC (t)]

V (t) = EC (t) = q(t) q(t) = CEC (t) I(t) = =
C dt dt
and so
4 5
d [CEC (t)] C dEC (t) C d [EC (t)2 ] d [CEC (t)2 /2]
PC = EC (t) = 2EC (t) = = .
dt 2 dt 2 dt dt
7. First, we find a formula for the current I(t). Given that R = 3 , L = 10 H, and the voltage
function E(t) is a constant, say, V , the formula (3) on page 121 (which describes currents in
RL circuits) becomes
+3 , + ,
3t/10 3t/10 V 3t/10 V 3t/10 V
I(t) = e e dt + K = e e + K = + Ke3t/10 .
10 3 3
The initial condition, I(0) = 0 (there were no current in the electromagnet before the voltage
source was applied), yields
V V V ) *
0= + Ke3(0)/10 K= I(t) = 1 e3t/10 .
3 3 3
Next, we find the limiting value I of I(t), that is,

4 5
V ) 3t/10
* V V
I = lim 1e = (1 0) = .
t 3 3 3
Therefore, we are looking for the moment t when I(t) = (0.9)I = (0.9)V /3. Solving yields
0.9V V ) * 10 ln 0.1
= 1 e3t/10 e3t/10 = 0.1 t= 7.68 .
3 3 3
Thus it takes approximately 7.68 seconds for the electromagnet to reach 90% of its final value.
EXERCISES 3.6: Improved Eulers Method, page 132
1. Given the step size h and considering equally spaced points we have
xn+1 = xn + nh, n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
139
Chapter 3
Eulers method is defined by equation (4) on page 125 of the text to be
yn+1 = yn + hf (xn , yn ), n = 0, 1, 2, . . . ,
where f (x, y) = 5y. Starting with the given value of y0 = 1, we compute
y1 = y0 + h(5y0 ) = 1 + 5h.
We can then use this value to compute y2 to be
y2 = y1 + h(5y1 ) = (1 + 5h)y1 = (1 + 5h)2 .
Proceeding in this manner, we can generalize to yn :
yn = (1 + 5h)n .
Referring back to our equation for xn and using the given values of x0 = 0 and x1 = 1 we find
1
1 = nh n= .
h
Substituting this back into the formula for yn we find the approximation to the initial value
problem
y = 5y, y(0) = 1
at x = 1 to be (1 + 5h)1/h .
3. In this initial value problem, f (x, y) = y, x0 = 0, and y0 = 1. Formula (8) on page 127 of the
text then becomes
h
yn+1 = yn + (yn + yn+1) .
2
Solving this equation for yn+1 yields
+ , + , + ,
h h 1 + h/2
1 yn+1 = 1 + yn yn+1 = yn , n = 0, 1, . . . . (3.14)
2 2 1 h/2
If n 1, we can use (3.14) to express yn in terms of yn1 and substitute this expression into
the right-hand side of (3.14). Continuing this process, we get
+ , 4+ , 5 + ,2 + ,n+1
1 + h/2 1 + h/2 1 + h/2 1 + h/2
yn+1 = yn1 = yn1 = = y0 .
1 h/2 1 h/2 1 h/2 1 h/2
140
Exercises 3.6
In order to approximate the solution (x) = ex at the point x = 1 with N steps, we take
h = (x x0 )/N = 1/N, and so N = 1/h. Then the above formula becomes
+ ,N + ,N + ,1/h
1 + h/2 1 + h/2 1 + h/2
yN = y0 = =
1 h/2 1 h/2 1 h/2
and hence + ,1/h
1 + h/2
e = (1) yN = .
1 h/2
Substituting h = 10k , k = 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4, we fill in Table 3-A.
+ ,1/h
1 + h/2
Table 3A: Approximations to e 2.718281828 . . . .
1 + h/2
h Approximation Error
1 3 0.281718172
101 2.720551414 0.002269586
102 2.718304481 0.000022653
103 2.718282055 0.000000227
104 2.718281831 0.000000003
These approximations are better then those in Tables 3.4 and 3.5 of the text.
5. In this problem, we have f (x, y) = 4y. Thus, we have
f (xn , yn ) = 4yn and f (xn + h, yn + hf (xn , yn )) = 4 [yn + h(4yn )] = 4yn + 16hyn .
By equation (9) on page 128 of the text, we have

h ) *
yn+1 = yn + (4yn + 4yn + 16hyn ) = 1 + 4h + 8h2 yn . (3.15)
2
Since the initial condition y(0) = 1/3 implies that x0 = 0 and y0 = 1/3, equation (3.15) above
yields
) * 1) *
y1 = 1 + 4h + 8h2 y0 = 1 + 4h + 8h2 ,
3
141
Chapter 3
+ ,
) 2
* ) 1 ) 2
* * 1) *2
y2 = 1 + 4h + 8h y1 = 1 + 4h + 8h 1 + 4h + 8h2 = 1 + 4h + 8h2 ,
3 3
+ ,
) * ) * 1 ) *2 1 ) *3
y3 = 1 + 4h + 8h2 y2 = 1 + 4h + 8h2 1 + 4h + 8h2 = 1 + 4h + 8h2 .
3 3
Continuing this way we see that
1) *n
yn = 1 + 4h + 8h2 . (3.16)
3
(This can be proved by induction using equation (3.15) above.) We are looking for an ap-
proximation to our solution at the point x = 1/2. Therefore, we have
1/2 x0 1/2 0 1 1
h= = = n= .
n n 2n 2h
Substituting this value for n into equation (3.16) yields
1) *1/(2h)
yn = 1 + 4h + 8h2 .
3
7. For this problem, f (x, y) = xy 2 . We need to approximate the solution on the interval [1, 1.5]
using a step size of h = 0.1. Thus the number of steps needed is N = 5. The inputs to the
subroutine on page 129 are x0 = 1, y0 = 0, c = 1.5, and N = 5. For Step 3 of the subroutine
we have
F = f (x, y) = x y 2 ,
- .2
G = f (x + h, y + hF ) = (x + h) (y + hF )2 = (x + h) y + h(x y 2) .
Starting with x = x0 = 1 and y = y0 = 0 we get h = 0.1 (as specified) and
F = 1 02 = 1,
- .2
G = (1 + 0.1) 0 + 0.1(1 02 ) = 1.1 (0.1)2 = 1.09 .
Hence in Step 4 we compute
x = 1 + 0.1 = 1.1 ,
y = 0 + 0.05(1 + 1.09) = 0.1045 .
142
Exercises 3.6
Thus the approximate value of the solution at 1.1 is 0.1045. Next we repeat Step 3 with
x = 1.1 and y = 0.1045 to obtain
F = 1.1 + (0.1045)2 1.0891,

- ) *.2
G = (1.1 + 0.1) 0.1045 + 0.1 1.1 (0.1045)2 1.1545 .
x = 1.1 + 0.1 = 1.2 ,

y = 0.1045 + 0.05(1.0891 + 1.1545) 0.21668 .
Thus the approximate value of the solution at 1.2 is 0.21668. By continuing in this way, we
fill in Table 3-B. (The reader can also use the software provided free with the text.)
Table 3B: Improved Eulers method to approximate the solution of y = xy 2 , y(1) = 0,

with h = 0.1 .
i x y
0 1 0
1 1.1 0.10450
2 1.2 0.21668
3 1.3 0.33382
4 1.4 0.45300
5 1.5 0.57135
9. In this initial value problem, f (x, y) = x + 3 cos(xy), x0 = 0, and y0 = 0. To approximate the

solution on [0, 2] with a step size h = 0.2, we need N = 10 steps. The functions F and G in
the improved Eulers method subroutine are
F = f (x, y) = x + 3 cos(xy);
G = f (x + h, y + hF ) = x + h + 3 cos[(x + h)(y + hF )]
= x + 0.2 + 3 cos[(x + 0.2)(y + 0.2 {x + 3 cos(xy)})].
143
Chapter 3
Starting with x = x0 = 0 and y = y0 = 0, we compute
F = 0 + 3 cos(0 0) = 3 ;
G = 0 + 0.2 + 3 cos[(0 + 0.2)(0 + 0.2 {0 + 3 cos(0 0)})] 3.178426 .
Using these values, we find on Step 4 that
x = 0 + 0.2 = 0.2 ,
y = 0 + 0.1(3 + 3.178426) 0.617843 .
With these new values of x and y, we repeat the Step 3 and obtain
F = 0.2 + 3 cos(0.2 0.617843) 3.177125 ;

G = 0.2 + 0.2 + 3 cos[(0.2 + 0.2)(0.617843 + 0.2 {0.2 + 3 cos(0.2 0.617843)})] 3.030865 .
Step 4 then yields an approximation of the solution at x = 0.4:
x = 0.2 + 0.2 = 0.4 ,

y = 0.617843 + 0.1(3.177125 + 3.030865) 1.238642 .
By continuing in this way, we obtain Table 3-C.
Table 3C: Improved Eulers method approximations to the solution of y = x+ 3 cos(xy),

y(0) = 0, on [0, 2] with h = 0.2 .
i x y i x y
0 0 0 6 1.2 1.884609
1 0.2 0.617843 7 1.4 1.724472
2 0.4 1.238642 8 1.6 1.561836
3 0.6 1.736531 9 1.8 1.417318
4 0.8 1.981106 10 2.0 1.297794
5 1.0 1.997052
144
Exercises 3.6
y
2
1.5
0.5
x
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
Figure 3B: Polygonal line approximation to the solution of y = x + 3 cos(xy), y(0) = 0.
A polygonal line, approximating the graph of the solution to the given initial value problem,
which has vertices at points (x, y) from Table 3-C, is sketched in Figure 3-B.
13. We want to approximate the solution (x) to y = 1 y + y 3, y(0) = 0, at x = 1. (In other

words, we want to find an approximate value for (1).) To do this, we will use the algorithm
on page 130 of the text. (We assume that the reader has a programmable calculator or
microcomputer available and can transform the step-by-step outline on page 130 into an
executable program. Alternatively, the reader can use the software provided free with the
text.)
The inputs to the program are x0 = 0, y0 = 0, c = 1, = 0.003, and, say, M = 100. Notice
that by Step 6 of the improved Eulers method with tolerance, the computations should
terminate when two successive approximations dier by less that 0.003. The initial value for
h in Step 1 of the improved Eulers method subroutine is
h = (1 0)20 = 1.
For the given equation, we have f (x, y) = 1 y + y 3, and so the numbers F and G in Step 3
145
Chapter 3
of the improved Eulers method subroutine are
F = f (x, y) = 1 y + y 3 ,
G = f (x + h, y + hF ) = 1 (y + hF ) + (y + hF )3 .
From Step 4 of the improved Eulers method subroutine with x = 0, y = 0, and h = 1, we get
x = x + h = 0 + 1 = 1,
h 1- .
y = y + (F + G) = 0 + 1 + (1 1 + 13 ) = 1.
2 2
Thus,
(1) y(1; 1) = 1.
The algorithm (Step 1 of the improved Eulers method subroutine) next sets h = 21 = 0.5.
The inputs to the subroutine are x = 0, y = 0, c = 1, and N = 2. For Step 3 of the subroutine
we have
F = 1 0 + 0 = 1,
G = 1 [0 + 0.5(1)] + [0 + 0.5(1)]3 = 0.625 .
x = 0 + 0.5 = 0.5 ,
y = 0 + 0.25(1 + 0.625) = 0.40625 .
Thus the approximate value of the solution at 0.5 is 0.40625. Next we repeat Step 3 with
x = 0.5 and y = 0.40625 to obtain
F = 1 0.40625 + (0.40625)3 = 0.6607971 ,

G = 1 [0.40625 + 0.5(0.6607971)] + [0.40625 + 0.5(0.6607971)]3 0.6630946 .
In Step 4 we compute
x = 0.5 + 0.5 = 1,
146
Exercises 3.6
Table 3D: Improved Eulers method approximations to (1), where (x) is the solution
to y = 1 y + y 3, y(0) = 0.
h y(1; h) (1)
1 1.0
21 0.7372229
22 0.7194115
23 0.7169839
y = 0.40625 + 0.25(0.6607971 + 0.6630946) 0.7372229 .
Thus the approximate value of the solution at x = 1 is 0.7372229. Further outputs of the
algorithm are given in Table 3-D.
Since
1 1
1y(1; 23) y(1; 22)1 = |0.7169839 0.7194115| < 0.003 ,
the algorithm stops (see Step 6 of the improved Eulers method with tolerance) and prints
out that (1) is approximately 0.71698.
15. For this problem, f (x, y) = (x + y + 2)2 . We want to approximate the solution, satisfying
y(0) = 2, on the interval [0, 1.4] to find the point, with two decimal places of accuracy, where
it crosses the x-axis, that is y = 0. Our approach is to use a step size of 0.005 and look for a
change in the sign of y. This requires 280 steps. For this procedure inputs to the improved
Eulers method subroutine are x0 = 0, y0 = 2, c = 1.4, and N = 280. We will stop the
subroutine when we see a sign change in the value of y. (The subroutine is implemented on
the software package provided free with the text.)
For Step 3 of the subroutine we have
F = f (x, y) = (x + y + 2)2 ,
G = f (x + h, y + hF ) = (x + h + y + hF + 2)2 = [x + y + 2 + h(1 + F )]2 .
147
Chapter 3
Starting with the inputs x = x0 = 0, y = y0 = 2, and h = 0.005 we obtain
F = (0 2 + 2)2 = 0,
G = [0 2 + 2 + 0.005(1 + 0)]2 = 0.000025 .
Thus, in Step 4 we compute
x = 0 + 0.005 = 0.005 ,
y = 2 + 0.005(0 + 0.000025)(1/2) 2.
Thus the approximate value of the solution at x = 0.005 is 2. We continue with Steps 3 and 4
of the improved Eulers method subroutine until we arrive at x = 1.270 and y 0.04658269.
The next iteration, with x = 1.275, yields y 0.006295411. This tells us that y = 0 is occurs
somewhere between x = 1.270 and x = 1.275. Therefore, rounding o to two decimal places
yields x = 1.27.
17. In this initial value problem, f (x, y) = 20y, x0 = 0, and y0 = 1. By applying formula (4) on
page 125 of the text, we can find a general formula for yn in terms of h. Indeed,
yn = yn1 + h(20yn1 ) = (1 20h)yn1 = = (1 20h)n y0 = (1 20h)n = [c(h)]n ,
where c(h) = 1 20h. For suggested values of h, we have
h = 0.1 c(0.1) = 1 xn = 0.1n, yn = (1)n , n = 1, . . . , 10;

h = 0.025 c(0.025) = 0.5 xn = 0.025n, yn = (0.5)n , n = 1, . . . , 40;
h = 0.2 c(0.2) = 3 xn = 0.2n, yn = (3)n , n = 1, . . . , 5.
These values are shown in Table 3-E.
Thus, for h = 0.1 we have alternating yn = 1; for h = 0.2, yn s have an increasing magnitude
and alternating sign; h = 0.025 is a good step size. From this example we conclude that, in
Eulers method, one should be very careful in choosing a step size. Wrong choice can even
lead to a diverging process.
148
Exercises 3.6
Table 3E: Eulers method approximations to the solution of y = 20y, y(0) = 1, on

[0, 1] with h = 0.1, 0.2 , and 0.025.
yn yn yn
xn
(h = 0.2) (h = 0.1) (h = 0.025)
0.1 1 0.062500
0.2 3 1 0.003906
0.3 1 0.000244
0.4 9 1 0.000015
0.5 1 0.000001
0.6 27 1 0.000000
0.7 1 0.000000
0.8 81 1 0.000000
0.9 1 0.000000
1.0 243 1 0.000000
19. In this problem, the variables are t and p. With suggested values of parameters, the initial
value problem (13) becomes
dp
= 3p pr , p(0) = 1.
dt
Therefore, f (t, p) = 3p pr and, with h = 0.25, functions F and G in improved Eulers
method subroutine have the form
F = f (t, p) = 3p pr ;
G = f (t + 0.25, p + 0.25F ) = 3[p + 0.25F ] [p + 0.25F ]r
= 3 [p + 0.25 (3p pr )] [p + 0.25 (3p pr )]r .
The results of computations are shown in Table 3-F.
These results indicate that the limiting populations for r = 1.5, r = 2, and r = 3 are p = 9,

p = 3, and p = 3, respectively.
Since the right-hand side of the given logistic equation, f (t, p) = 3p pr , does not depend on
t, we conclude that this equation is autonomous. Therefore, its equilibrium solutions (if any)
149
Chapter 3
Table 3F: Improved Eulers method approximations to the solution of p = 3p pr ,

p(0) = 1, on [0, 5] with h = 0.25 for r = 1.5, 2, and 3.
yn yn yn
xn
(r = 1.5) (r = 2) (r = 3)
0.25 1.582860 1.531250 1.390625
0.5 2.351441 2.049597 1.553472
0.75 3.267498 2.440027 1.628847
1.0 4.253156 2.686754 1.669992
1.25 5.216751 2.829199 1.694056
1.5 6.083402 2.908038 1.708578
1.75 6.811626 2.950802 1.717479
2.0 7.392146 2.973767 1.722980
2.25 7.837090 2.986037 1.726396
2.5 8.168507 2.992574 1.728522
2.75 8.410362 2.996053 1.729847
3.0 8.584317 2.997903 1.730674
3.25 8.708165 2.998886 1.731191
3.5 8.795710 2.999408 1.731513
3.75 8.857285 2.999685 1.731715
4.0 8.900443 2.999833 1.731841
4.25 8.930619 2.999911 1.731920
4.5 8.951682 2.999953 1.731969
4.75 8.966366 2.999975 1.732000
5.0 8.976596 2.999987 1.732019
can be found by solving

) *
f (p) = 3p pr = 0 p 3 pr1 = 0 p = 0 or p = 31/(r1) .
) * ) *
The condition r > 1 implies that f (p) > 0 on 0, 31/(r1) and f (p) < 0 on 31/(r1) , .
Therefore, p = 31/(r1) is a sink and, regardless of the initial value p(0) = p0 > 0, there holds
lim p(t) = 31/(r1) .

t
21. We will use the improved Eulers method with h = 2/3 to approximate the solution of the
150
Exercises 3.6
problem
64 + ,5 7
t
75 20 cos T (t) + 0.1 + 1.5[70 T (t)], T (0) = 65,
12
with K = 0.2 . Since h = 2/3, it will take 36 steps to go from t = 0 to t = 24. By simplifying
the above expression, we obtain
+ ,
dT t
= (75K + 105.1) 20K cos (K + 1.5)T (t), T (0) = 65.
dt 12
(Note that here t takes the place of x and T takes the place of y.) Therefore, with K = 0.2
the inputs to the subroutine are t0 = 0, T0 = 65, c = 24, and N = 36. For Step 3 of the
subroutine we have
+ ,
t
F = f (t, T ) = (75K + 105.1) 20K cos (K + 1.5)T, (3.17)
12
G = f (t + h, T + hF )
+ ,
(t + h)
= (75K + 105.1) 20K cos (K + 1.5){T + hF }. (3.18)
12
For Step 4 in the subroutine we have
t = t + h,
h
T = T + (F + G).
2
Now, starting with t = t0 = 0 and T = T0 = 65, and h = 2/3 (as specified) we have Step 3 of
the subroutine to be
F = [75(0.2) + 105.1] 20(0.2) cos 0 [(0.2) + 1.5](65) = 5.6 ,

4 5
(0.6667)
G = [75(0.2) + 105.1]20(0.2) cos [(0.2) + 1.5][65 + (0.6667)(5.6)] 0.6862 .
12
t = 0 + 0.6667 = 0.6667
T = 65 + 0.3333(5.6 0.6862) 66.638 .
151
Chapter 3
Table 3G: Improved Eulers method to approximate the temperature in a building over
a 24-hour period (with K = 0.2).
Time tn Tn
Midnight 0 65
12:40 a.m. 0.6667 66.63803
1:20 a.m. 1.3333 67.52906
2:00 a.m. 2.0000 68.07270
2:40 a.m. 2.6667 68.46956
3:20 a.m. 3.3333 68.81808
4:00 a.m. 4.0000 69.16392
8:00 a.m. 8.0000 71.48357
Noon 12.000 72.90891
4:00 p.m. 16.000 72.07140
8:00 p.m. 20.000 69.80953
Midnight 24.000 68.38519
Recalling that t0 is midnight, we see that these results imply that at 0.6667 hours after
midnight (or 12 : 40 a.m.) the temperature is approximately 66.638 . Continuing with this
process for n = 1, 2, . . . , 35 gives us the approximate temperatures in a building with K = 0.2
over a 24 hr period. These results are given in Table 3-G. (This is just a partial table.)
The next step is to redo the above work with K = 0.4. That is, we substitute K = 0.4 and
h = 2/3 0.6667 into equations (3.17) and (3.18) above. This yields
+ ,
t
F = 135.1 8 cos 1.9T,
12
4 5
(t + 0.6667)
G = 135.1 8 cos 1.9(T + 0.6667F ),
12
and
T = T + (0.3333)(F + G).
Then, using these equations, we go through the process of first finding F , then using this
result to find G, and finally using both results to find T . (This process must be done for
152
Exercises 3.7
n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , 35.) Lastly, we redo this work with K = 0.6 and h = 2/3. By so doing, we
obtain the results given in the table in the answers of the text. (Note that the values for T0 ,
T6 , T12 , T18 , T24 , T30 , and T36 are given in the answers.)
EXERCISES 3.7: Higher Order Numerical Methods: Taylor and Runge-Kutta, page 142
1. In this problem, f (x, y) = cos(x + y). Applying formula (4) on page 135 of the text we
compute
f (x, y)
= [cos(x + y)] = sin(x + y) (x + y) = sin(x + y);
x x x
f (x, y)
= [cos(x + y)] = sin(x + y) (x + y) = sin(x + y);
y y y
4 5
f (x, y) f (x, y)
f2 (x, y) = + f (x, y) = sin(x + y) + [ sin(x + y)] cos(x + y)
x y
= sin(x + y)[1 + cos(x + y)],
and so, with p = 2, (5) and (6) on page 135 yield
xn+1 = xn + h ,
h2
yn+1 = yn + h cos (xn + yn ) sin (xn + yn ) [1 + cos (xn + yn )] .
2
3. Here we have f (x, y) = x y and so
(x y) (x y)
f2 (x, y) = + (x y) = 1 + (1)(x y) = 1 x + y.
x y
To obtain f3 (x, y) and then f4 (x, y), we dierentiate the equation y = f2 (x, y) twice. This
yields
y (x) = [f2 (x, y)] = (1 x + y) = 1 + y = 1 + x y =: f3 (x, y);
y (4) (x) = [f3 (x, y)] = (1 + x y) = 1 y = 1 x + y =: f4 (x, y).
153
Chapter 3
Therefore, the recursive formulas of order 4 for the Taylor method are
xn+1 = xn + h,
h2 h3 h4
yn+1 = yn + h (xn yn ) + (1 xn + yn ) + (1 + xn yn ) + (1 xn + yn )
2 3! 4!
h2 h3 h4
= yn + h (xn yn ) + (1 xn + yn ) (1 xn + yn ) + (1 xn + yn )
2 + 6 , 24
h2 h3 h4
= yn + h + (1 xn + yn ) h + +
2 6 24
+ 2 3
,
h h h4
= yn + h (xn yn ) + (1 xn yn ) + .
2 6 24
5. For the Taylor method of order 2, we need to find (see equation (4) on page 135 of the text)
4 5
f (x, y) f (x, y)
f2 (x, y) = + f (x, y)
x y
for f (x, y) = x + 1 y. Thus, we have
f2 (x, y) = 1 + (1)(x + 1 y) = y x.
Therefore, by equations (5) and (6) on page 135 of the text, we see that the recursive formulas
with h = 0.25 become
xn+1 = xn + 0.25 ,
(0.25)2
yn+1 = yn + 0.25 (xn + 1 yn ) + (yn xn ) .
2
By starting with x0 = 0 and y0 = 1 (the initial values for the problem), we find
0.0625
y1 = 1 + 1.03125 .
2
Plugging this value into the recursive formulas yields

+ ,
0.0625
y2 = 1.03125 + 0.25(0.25 + 1 1.03125) + (1.03125 0.25) 1.11035 .
2
By continuing in this way, we can fill in the first three columns in Table 3-H.
154
Exercises 3.7
For the Taylor method of order 4, we need to find f3 and f4 . Thus, we have
4 5
f2 (x, y) f2 (x, y)
f3 (x, y) = + f (x, y) = 1 + 1 (x + 1 y) = x y,
x y
4 5
f3 (x, y) f3 (x, y)
f4 (x, y) = + f (x, y) = 1 + (1) (x + 1 y) = y x.
x y
Hence, by equation (6) on page 135 of the text, we see that the recursive formula for yn+1 for
the Taylor method of order 4 with h = 0.25 is given by
(0.25)2 (0.25)3 (0.25)4
yn+1 = yn + 0.25 (xn + 1 yn ) + (yn xn ) + (xn yn ) + (yn xn ) .
2 6 24
By starting with x0 = 0 and y0 = 1, we can fill in the fourth column of Table 3-H.
Table 3H: Taylor approximations of order 2 and 4 for the equation y = x + 1 y.
n xn yn (order 2) yn (order 4)
0 0 1 1
1 0.25 1.03125 1.02881
2 0.50 1.11035 1.10654
3 0.75 1.22684 1.22238
4 1.00 1.37253 1.36789
Thus, the approximation (rounded to 4 decimal places) of the solution by the Taylor method
at the point x = 1 is given by 2 (1) = 1.3725 if we use order 2 and by 4 (1) = 1.3679 if we use
order 4. The actual solution is y = x + ex and so has the value y(1) = 1 + e1 1.3678794
at x = 1. Comparing these results, we see that
|y(1) 2 (1)| = 0.00462 and |y(1) 4 (1)| = 0.00002 .
7. We will use the 4th order Runge-Kutta subroutine described on page 138 of the text. Since
x0 = 0 and h = 0.25, we need N = 4 steps to approximate the solution at x = 1. With
f (x, y) = 2y 6, we set x = x0 = 0, y = y0 = 1 and go to Step 3 to compute kj s.
k1 = hf (x, y) = 0.25[2(1) 6] = 1 ;
155
Chapter 3
k2 = hf (x + h/2, y + k1 /2) = 0.25[2(1 + (1)/2) 6] = 1.25 ;

k3 = hf (x + h/2, y + k2 /2) = 0.25[2(1 + (1.25)/2) 6] = 1.3125 ;
k4 = hf (x + h, y + k3 ) = 0.25[2(1 + (1.3125)) 6] = 1.65625 .
Step 4 then yields
x = 0 + 0.25 = 0.25 ,
1 1
y = 1 + (k1 + 2k2 + 2k3 + k4 ) = 1 + (1 2 1.25 2 1.3125 1.65625) 0.29688 .
6 6
Now we go back to Step 3 and recalculate kj s for new values of x and y.
k1 = 0.25[2(0.29688) 6] = 1.64844 ;
k2 = 0.25[2(0.29688 + (1.64844)/2) 6] = 2.06055 ;
k3 = 0.25[2(0.29688 + (2.06055)/2) 6] = 2.16358 ;
k4 = 0.25[2(0.29688 + (2.16358)) 6] = 2.73022 ;
x = 0.25 + 0.25 = 0.5 ,
1
y = 0.29688 + (1.64844 2 2.06055 2 2.16358 2.73022) 2.43470 .
6
We repeat the cycle two more times:
k1 = 0.25[2(2.43470) 6] = 2.71735 ;
k2 = 0.25[2(2.43470 + (2.71735)/2) 6] = 3.39670 ;
k3 = 0.25[2(2.43470 + (3.39670)/2) 6] = 3.56652 ;
k4 = 0.25[2(2.43470 + (3.56652)) 6] = 4.50060 ;
x = 0.5 + 0.25 = 0.75 ,
1
y = 2.43470 + (2.71735 2 3.39670 2 3.56652 4.50060) 5.95876
6
and
k1 = 0.25[2(5.95876) 6] = 4.47938 ;
k2 = 0.25[2(5.95876 + (4.47938)/2) 6] = 5.59922 ;
156
Exercises 3.7
k3 = 0.25[2(5.95876 + (5.59922)/2) 6] = 5.87918 ;

k4 = 0.25[2(5.95876 + (5.87918)) 6] = 7.41895 ;
x = 0.75 + 0.25 = 1.00 ,
1
y = 5.95876 + (4.47938 2 5.59922 2 5.87918 7.41895) 11.7679 .
6
Thus (1) 11.7679 . The actual solution, (x) = 3 2e2x , evaluated at x = 1, gives
(1) = 3 2e2(1) = 3 2e2 11.7781 .
9. For this problem we will use the 4th order Runge-Kutta subroutine with f (x, y) = x + 1 y.
Using the step size of h = 0.25, the number of steps needed is N = 4 to approximate the
solution at x = 1. For Step 3 we have
k1 = hf (x, y) = 0.25(x + 1 y),

+ ,
h k1
k2 = hf x + , y + = 0.25(0.875x + 1 0.875y),
2 2
+ ,
h k2
k3 = hf x + , y + = 0.25(0.890625x + 1 0.890625y),
2 2
k4 = hf (x + h, y + k3 ) = 0.25(0.77734375x + 1 0.77734375y).
Hence, in Step 4 we have
x = x + 0.25 ,
1
y = y + (k1 + 2k2 + 2k3 + k4 ) .
6
Using the initial conditions x0 = 0 and y0 = 1, c = 1, and N = 4 for Step 3 we obtain
k1 = 0.25(0 + 1 1) = 0,
k2 = 0.25(0.875(0) + 1 0.875(1)) = 0.03125,
k3 = 0.25(0.890625(0) + 1 0.890625(1)) 0.0273438,
k4 = 0.25(0.77734375(0) + 1 0.77734375(1)) 0.0556641.
Thus, Step 4 gives
x = 0 + 0.25 = 0.25 ,
157
Chapter 3
1
y 1+ [0 + 2(0.03125) + 2(0.0273438) + 0.0556641] 1.02881 .
6
Thus the approximate value of the solution at 0.25 is 1.02881. By repeating Steps 3 and 4 of
the algorithm we fill in the following Table 3-I.
Table 3I: 4th order Runge-Kutta subroutine approximations for y = x + 1 y at x = 1

with h = 0.25 .
x 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.0
y 1 1.02881 1.10654 1.22238 1.36789
Thus, our approximation at x = 1 is approximately 1.36789. Comparing this with Problem 5,

we see we have obtained accuracy to four decimal places as we did with the Taylor method
of order four, but without having to compute any partial derivatives.
11. In this problem, f (x, y) = 2x4 y 2 . To find the root of the solution within two decimal
places of accuracy, we choose a step size h = 0.005 in 4th order Runge-Kutta subroutine. It
will require (2 1)/0.005 = 200 steps to approximate the solution on [1, 2]. With the initial
input x = x0 = 1, y = y0 = 0.414, we get
k1 = hf (x, y) = 0.005[2(1)4 (0.414)2 ] = 0.009143;

k2 = hf (x + h/2, y + k1 /2) = 0.005[2(1 + 0.005/2)4 (0.414 + 0.009143/2)2] = 0.009062;
k3 = hf (x + h/2, y + k2 /2) = 0.005[2(1 + 0.005/2)4 (0.414 + 0.009062/2)2] = 0.009062;
k4 = hf (x + h, y + k3 ) = 0.005[2(1 + 0.005)4 (0.414 + 0.009062)2] = 0.008983;

x = 1 + 0.005 = 1.005,
1
y = 0.414 + (0.009143 + 2 0.009062 + 2 0.009062 + 0.008983) 0.404937;
6
..
.
158
Exercises 3.7
On the 82nd step we get
x = 1.405 + 0.005 = 1.410 ,

1
y = 0.004425 + (0.002566 + 2 0.002548 + 2 0.002548 + 0.002530) 0.001876 ,
6
and the next step gives
k1 = 0.005[2(1.410)4 (0.001876)2 ] = 0.002530 ;

k2 = 0.005[2(1.410 + 0.005/2)4 (0.001876 + 0.002530/2)2] = 0.002512 ;
k3 = 0.005[2(1.410 + 0.005/2)4 (0.001876 + 0.002512/2)2] = 0.002512 ;
k4 = 0.005[2(1.410 + 0.005)4 (0.001876 + 0.002512)2] = 0.002494 ;

x = 1.410 + 0.005 = 1.415 ,
1
y = 0.414 + (0.002530 + 2 0.002512 + 2 0.002512 + 0.002494) 0.000636 .
6
Since y(1.41) < 0 and y(1.415) > 0 we conclude that the root of the solution is on the interval
(1.41, 1.415).
As a check, we apply the 4th order Runge-Kutta subroutine to approximate the solution
to the given initial value problem on [1, 1.5] with a step size h = 0.001, which requires
N = (1.5 1)/0.001 = 500 steps. This yields y(1.413) 0.000367, y(1.414) 0.000134,
and so, within two decimal places of accuracy, x 1.41 .
13. For this problem f (x, y) = y 2 2ex y +e2x +ex . We want to find the vertical asymptote located
in the interval [0, 2] within two decimal places of accuracy using the Forth Order Runge-Kutta
subroutine. One approach is to use a step size of 0.005 and look for y to approach infinity.
This would require 400 steps. We will stop the subroutine when the value of y (blows up)
becomes very large. For Step 3 we have
) *
k1 = hf (x, y) = 0.005 y 2 2ex y + e2x + ex ,
+ , L+ ,2 + , M
h k1 k1 k 1
k2 = hf x + , y + = 0.005 y + 2e(x+h/2) y + + e2(x+h/2) + e(x+h/2) ,
2 2 2 2
159
Chapter 3
+ , L+ ,2 + , M
h k2 k2 (x+h/2) k2 2(x+h/2) (x+h/2)
k3 = hf x + , y + = 0.005 y + 2e y+ +e +e ,
2 2 2 2
- .
k4 = hf (x + h, y + k3 ) = 0.005 (y + k3 )2 2e(x+h) (y + k3 ) + e2(x+h) + e(x+h) .
Hence in Step 4 we have
x = x + 0.005 ,
1
y = y + (k1 + 2k2 + 2k3 + k4 ) .
6
Using the initial conditions x0 = 0, y0 = 3, c = 2, and N = 400 on Step 3 we obtain

) *
k1 = 0.005 32 2e0 (3) + e2(0) + e0 = 0.025 ,
- .
k2 = 0.005 (3 + 0.0125)2 2e(0+0.0025) (3 + 0.0125) + e2(0+0.0025) + e(0+0.0025) 0.02522 ,
- .
k3 = 0.005 (3 + 0.01261)2 2e(0+0.0025) (3 + 0.01261) + e2(0+0.0025) + e(0+0.0025) 0.02522 ,
- .
k4 = 0.005 (3 + 0.02522)2 2e(0+0.0025) (3 + 0.02522) + e2(0+0.0025) + e(0+0.0025) 0.02543 .
Thus, Step 4 yields

x = 0 + 0.005 = 0.005
and
1
y 3+ (0.025 + 2(0.02522) + 2(0.02522) + 0.02543) 3.02522 .
6
Thus the approximate value at x = 0.005 is 3.02522. By repeating Steps 3 and 4 of the
subroutine we find that, at x = 0.505, y = 2.0201 1013 . The next iteration gives a floating
point overflow. This would lead one to think the asymptote occurs at x = 0.51 .
As a check lets apply the 4th order Runge-Kutta subroutine with the initial conditions x0 = 0,
y0 = 3, c = 1, and N = 400. This gives a finer step size of h = 0.0025. With these inputs, we
find y(0.5025) 4.0402 1013 .
Repeating the subroutine one more time with a step size of 0.00125, we obtain the value
y(0.50125) 8.0804 1013 . Therefore we conclude that the vertical asymptote occurs at
x = 0.50 and not at 0.51 as was earlier thought.
160
Exercises 3.7
y
0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
0 x
Figure 3C: Polygonal line approximation to the solution of y = cos(5y) x, y(0) = 0,

on [0, 3].
15. Here f (x, y) = cos(5y) x, x0 = 0, and y0 = 0. With a step size h = 0.1 we take N = 30 in
order to approximate the solution on [0, 3]. We set x = x0 = 0, y = y0 = 0 and compute
k1 = hf (x, y) = 0.1[cos(5 0) 0] = 0.1 ;

k2 = hf (x + h/2, y + k1 /2) = 0.1[cos(5(0 + 0.1/2)) (0 + 0.1/2)] = 0.091891 ;
k3 = hf (x + h/2, y + k2 /2) = 0.1[cos(5(0 + 0.091891/2)) (0 + 0.1/2)] = 0.092373 ;
k4 = hf (x + h, y + k3 ) = 0.1[cos(5(0 + 0.092373)) (0 + 0.1)] = 0.079522 ;

x = 0 + 0.1 = 0.1 ,
1
y = 0 + (0.1 + 2 0.091891 + 2 0.092373 + 0.079522) 0.091342 ;
6
..
.
The results of computations are shown in Table 3-J.
Using these value, we sketch a polygonal line approximating the graph of the solution on [0, 3].
See Figure 3-C.
161
Chapter 3
Table 3J: 4th order Runge-Kutta approximations to the solution of y = cos(5y) x,

y(0) = 0, on [0, 3] with h = 0.1 .
xn yn xn yn
0 0 1.5 0.02668
0.1 0.09134 1.6 0.85748
0.2 0.15663 1.7 0.17029
0.3 0.19458 1.8 0.30618
0.4 0.21165 1.9 0.53517
0.5 0.21462 2.0 0.81879
0.6 0.20844 2.1 1.02887
0.7 0.19629 2.2 1.17307
0.8 0.18006 2.3 1.30020
0.9 0.16079 2.4 1.45351
1.0 0.13890 2.5 1.69491
1.1 0.11439 2.6 2.03696
1.2 0.08686 2.7 2.30917
1.3 0.05544 2.8 2.50088
1.4 0.01855 2.9 2.69767
3.0 2.99510
17. Taylor method of order 2 has recursive formulas given by equations (5) and (6) on page 135
of the text: that is
h2
xj+1 = xj + h and yj+1 = yj + hf (xj , yj ) + f2 (xj , yj ) .
2!
With f (x, y) = y, we have
4 5
f (x, y) f (x, y)
f2 (x, y) = y = + f (x, y) = 0 + 1 (y) = y.
x y
Therefore, since h = 1/n, the recursive formula for yj+1 is given by the equation
+ ,
1 1 1 1
yj+1 = yj + yj + 2 yj = 1 + + 2 yj .
n 2n n 2n
We are starting the process at x0 = 0 and y0 = 1, and we are taking steps of size 1/n until we
reach x = 1. This means that we will take n steps. Thus, yn will be an approximation for the
162
Exercises 3.7
solution to the dierential equation at x = 1. Since the actual solution is y = ex , this means
that yn e. To find the equation we are looking for, we see that
+ , + ,
1 1 1 1
y1 = 1 + + 2 y0 = 1 + + 2 ,
n 2n n 2n
+ , + ,2
1 1 1 1
y2 = 1 + + 2 y1 = 1 + + 2 ,
n 2n n 2n
+ , + ,3
1 1 1 1
y3 = 1 + + 2 y2 = 1 + + 2 ,
n 2n n 2n
+ , + ,4
1 1 1 1
y4 = 1 + + 2 y3 = 1 + + 2 ,
n 2n n 2n
..
.
+ , + ,n
1 1 1 1
yn = 1 + + 2 yn1 = 1 + + 2 .
n 2n n 2n
(This can be proved rigorously by mathematical induction.) As we observed above, yn e,

and so we have + ,n
1 1
e 1+ + 2 .
n 2n
19. In this initial value problem, the independent variable is u, the dependent variable is v, u0 = 2,
v0 = 0.1, and + ,
#u % 5
3
f (u, v) = u +1 v + u+ v2 .
2 2
We will use the classical 4th order Runge-Kutta algorithm with tolerance given on page 139 of
the text but, since the stopping criteria should be based on the relative error, we will replace
the condition |z v| < in Step 6 by |(z v)/v| < (see Step 6 on page 138).
We start with m = 0, N = 2m = 1, and a step size h = (3 2)/N = 1. Setting u = u0 = 2,

v = v0 = 0.1, on Step 4 we compute
4 + , + , 5
2 3 5 2
k1 = hf (u, v) = (1) 2 + 1 (0.1) + 2 + (0.1) = 0.049;
2 2
4 + ,
2 + 1/2
k2 = hf (u + h/2, v + k1 /2) = (1) (2 + 1/2) + 1 (0.1 + 0.049/2)3
2
+ , 5
5 2
+ (2 + 1/2) + (0.1 + 0.049/2) = 0.088356 ;
2
163
Chapter 3
4 + ,
2 + 1/2
k3 = hf (u + h/2, v + k2 /2) = (1) (2 + 1/2) + 1 (0.1 + 0.088356/2)3
2
+ , 5
5 2
+ (2 + 1/2) + (0.1 + 0.088356/2) = 0.120795 ;
2
4 + ,
2+1
k4 = hf (u + h, v + k3 ) = (1) (2 + 1) + 1 (0.1 + 0.120795)3
2
+ , 5
5 2
+ (2 + 1) + (0.1 + 0.120795) = 0.348857 .
2
So,
u = u + h = 2 + 1 = 3,
1
v = v + (0.049 + 2 0.088356 + 2 0.120795 + 0.348857) 0.236027 .
6
Because the relative error between two successive approximations, v(3; 20) = 0.236027 and
v = 0.1 is = |(0.236027 0.1)/0.236027| 0.576320 > 0.0001, we go back to Step 2 and
set m = 1, take N = 2m = 2 on Step 3, compute h = 1/N = 0.5, and use the 4th order
Runge-Kutta subroutine on page 138 of the text to find v(3; 0.5). This takes two steps and
yields
4 + , + , 5
2 3 5 2
k1 = (0.5) 2 + 1 (0.1) + 2 + (0.1) = 0.0245;
2 2
4 + ,
2 + 0.5/2
k2 = (0.5) (2 + 0.5/2) + 1 (0.1 + 0.0245/2)3
2
+ , 5
5 2
+ (2 + 0.5/2) + (0.1 + 0.0245/2) = 0.033306 ;
2
4 + ,
2 + 0.5/2
k3 = (0.5) (2 + 0.5/2) + 1 (0.1 + 0.033306/2)3
2
+ , 5
5 2
+ (2 + 0.5/2) + (0.1 + 0.033306/2) = 0.036114 ;
2
4 + ,
2 + 0.5
k4 = (0.5) (2 + 0.5) + 1 (0.1 + 0.036114)3
2
+ , 5
5 2
+ (2 + 0.5) + (0.1 + 0.036114) = 0.053410 .
2
164
Exercises 3.7
This gives
u = 2 + 0.5 = 2.5 ,
1
v = 0.1 + (0.0245 + 2 0.033306 + 2 0.036114 + 0.053410) 0.136125 .
6
We compute kj s again and find an approximate value of v(3).

4 + , + , 5
2.5 3 5 2
k1 = (0.5) 2.5 + 1 (0.136125) + 2.5 + (0.136125) = 0.053419;
2 2
4 + ,
2.5 + 0.5/2
k2 = (0.5) (2.5 + 0.5/2) + 1 (0.136125 + 0.053419/2)3
2
+ , 5
5 2
+ (2.5 + 0.5/2) + (0.136125 + 0.053419/2) = 0.083702 ;
2
4 + ,
2.5 + 0.5/2
k3 = (0.5) (2.5 + 0.5/2) + 1 (0.136125 + 0.083702/2)3
2
+ , 5
5 2
+ (2.5 + 0.5/2) + (0.136125 + 0.083702/2) = 0.101558 ;
2
4 + ,
2.5 + 0.5
k4 = (0.5) (2.5 + 0.5) + 1 (0.136125 + 0.101558)3
2
+ , 5
5 2
+ (2.5 + 0.5) + (0.136125 + 0.101558) = 0.205709 .
2
Therefore, at u = 2.5 + 0.5 = 3.0,
1
v = 0.136125 + (0.053419 + 2 0.083702 + 2 0.101558 + 0.205709) 0.241066 .
6
This time the relative error is

1 1
1 v(3; 21) v(3; 20) 1 0.241066 0.236027
=1 1 1= 0.020903 > 0.0001 .
v(3; 21) 1 0.241066
Thus we set m = 2, N = 2m = 4, h = 1/N = 0.25, repeat computations with this new step,
and find that v(3; 22) 0.241854 and
1 1
1 v(3; 22) v(3; 21) 1 0.241854 0.241066
1
=1 1= 0.003258 > 0.0001 .
v(3; 21) 1 0.241854
165
Chapter 3
We continue increasing m and get

1 1
1 0.241924 0.241854 1
m = 3, h = 0.125 , v(3; 23) = 0.241924 , = 11 1 0.00029 > 104 ;
1
0.241924
1 1
1 0.241929 0.241924 1
m = 4, h = 0.0625 , v(3; 2 ) = 0.241929 , = 11
4 1 0.00002 < 104 .
1
0.241929
Therefore, within an accuracy of 0.0001, v(3) 0.24193 .
166
CHAPTER 4: Linear Second Order Equations
EXERCISES 4.1: Introduction: The Mass-Spring Oscillator, page 159
1. With b = 0 and Fext = 0, equation (3) on page 155 becomes
my + ky = 0.
$
Substitution y = sin t, where = k/m, yields
m(sin t) + k(sin t) = m 2 sin t + k sin t

) *
= sin t m 2 + k = sin t (m(k/m) + k) = 0.
Thus y = sin t is indeed a solution.
3. Dierentiating y(t), we find
y = 2 sin 3t + cos 3t
y = 6 cos 3t 3 sin 3t
y = 18 sin 3t 9 cos 3t.
Substituting y, y , and y into the given equation, we get
2y + 18y = 2(18 sin 3t 9 cos 3t) + 18(2 sin 3t + cos 3t)

= [2(18) + 18(2)] sin 3t + [2(9) + 18(1)] cos 3t = 0.
Next, we check that the initial conditions are satisfied.

1
y(0) = (2 sin 3t + cos 3t) 1t=0 = 2 sin 0 + cos 0 = 1,
1
y (0) = (6 cos 3t 3 sin 3t) 1t=0 = 6 cos 0 3 sin 0 = 6.
167
Chapter 4
Writing y(t) in the form

+ ,
2 1
y(t) = 5 sin 3t + cos 3t = 5 sin(3t + ),
5 5

where = arctan(1/2), we conclude that |y(t)| = 5| sin(3t + )|, and so max |y(t)| = 5
(since max | sin(3t + )| = 1).
5. We dierentiate y(t) twice and obtain

y(t) = e2t sin( 2t)

y (t) = e2t [(2) sin( 2t) + 2 cos( 2t)]
8 9
y (t) = e2t (2)2 sin( 2t) + (2) 2 cos( 2t) + (2) 2 cos( 2t) ( 2)2 sin( 2t)
8 9
= e2t 2 sin( 2t) 4 2 cos( 2t) .
Substituting these functions into the dierential equation, we get

8 9
2t
my + by + ky = y + 4y + 6y = e 2 sin( 2t) 4 2 cos( 2t)

+4e2t [(2) sin( 2t) + 2 cos( 2t)] + 6e2t sin( 2t)
8 9
= e2t (2 8 + 6) sin( 2t) + (4 2 + 4 2) cos( 2t) = 0.

Therefore, y = e2t sin( 2t) is a solution. As t +, e2t 0 while sin( 2t) remains
bounded. Therefore, lim y(t) = 0.
t+
7. For y = A cos 5t + B sin 5t,
y = 5A sin 5t + 5B cos 5t, y = 25A cos 5t 25B sin 5t.
Inserting y, y , and y into the given equation and matching coecients yield
y + 2y + 4y = 3 sin 5t
(25A cos 5t 25B sin 5t) + 2(5A sin 5t + 5B cos 5t) + 4(A cos 5t + B sin 5t)
= (21A + 10B) cos 5t + (10A 21B) sin 5t = 3 sin 5t
21A + 10B = 0, A = 30/541,

10A 21B = 3 B = 63/541.
Thus, y = (30/541) cos 5t(63/541) sin 5t is a synchronous solution to y +2y +4y = 3 sin 5t.
168
Exercises 4.2
9. We dierentiate y = A cos 2t + B sin 2t twice to get
y = 2A sin 2t + 2B cos 2t and y = 4A cos 2t 4B sin 2t,
substitute y, y , and y into the given equation, and compare coecients. This yields
y + 2y + 4y = (4A cos 2t 4B sin 2t) + 2(2A sin 2t + 2B cos 2t) + 4(A cos 2t + B sin 2t)
= 4B cos 2t 4A sin 2t = 3 cos 2t + 4 sin 2t
4B = 3, A = 1,
y = cos 2t + (3/4) sin 2t.
4A = 4 B = 3/4
EXERCISES 4.2: Homogeneous Linear Equations; The General Solution, page 167
1. The auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 + 5r + 6 = (r + 2)(r + 3) = 0, which has the
roots r = 2 and r = 3. Thus {e2t , e3t } is a set of two linearly independent solutions for
this dierential equation. Therefore, a general solution is given by
y(t) = c1 e2t + c2 e3t ,
where c1 and c2 are arbitrary constants.
3. The auxiliary equation, r 2 + 8r + 16 = (r + 4)2 = 0, has a double root r = 4. Therefore, e4t

and te4t are two linearly independent solutions for this dierential equation, and a general
solution is given by
y(t) = c1 e4t + c2 te4t ,
5. The auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 + r 1 = 0. By the quadratic formula, we have

1 1 + 4 1 5
r= = .
2 2
Therefore, a general solution is

z(t) = c1 e(1 5)t/2
+ c2 e(1+ 5)t/2
.
169
Chapter 4
7. Solving the auxiliary equation, 2r 2 + 7r 4 = 0, yields r = 1/2, 4. Thus a general solution

is given by
u(t) = c1 et/2 + c2 e4t ,
9. The auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 r 11 = 0, which has roots

1 1 + 4 11 13 5
r= = .
2 2
Thus, a general solution to the given equation is

y(t) = c1 e(1+3 5)t/2
+ c2 e(13 5)t/2
.
11. Solving the auxiliary equation, 4r 2 + 20r + 25 = (2r + 5)2 = 0, we conclude that r = 5/2 is
its double root. Therefore, a general solution to the given dierential equation is
w(t) = c1 e5t/2 + c2 te5t/2 .
13. The auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 + 2r 8 = 0, which has roots r = 4, 2. Thus,
a general solution is given by
y(t) = c1 e4t + c2 e2t ,
where c1 , c2 are arbitrary constants. To satisfy the initial conditions, y(0) = 3, y (0) = 12,
we find the derivative y (t) = 4c1 e4t + 2c2 e2t and solve the system
y(0) = c1 e40 + c2 e20 = c1 + c2 = 3, c1 = 3,

40 20

y (0) = 4c1 e + 2c2 e = 4c1 + 2c2 = 12 c2 = 0.
y(t) = (3)e4t + (0)e2t = 3e4t .
15. The auxiliary equation for this equation is r 2 + 2r + 1 = (r + 1)2 = 0. We see that r = 1
is a repeated root. Thus, two linearly independent solutions are y1 (t) = et and y2 (t) = tet .
This means that a general solution is given by y(t) = c1 et + c2 tet .
170
Exercises 4.2
To find the constants c1 and c2 , we substitute the initial conditions into the general solution
and its derivative, y (t) = c1 et + c2 (et tet ), and obtain
y(0) = 1 = c1 e0 + c2 0 = c1 ,
y (0) = 3 = c1 e0 + c2 (e0 0) = c1 + c2 .
So, c1 = 1 and c2 = 2. Therefore, the solution that satisfies the initial conditions is given by
y(t) = et 2tet .

17. The auxiliary equation for this problem, r 2 2r 2 = 0, has roots r = 1 3. Thus,

a general solution is given by z(t) = c1 e(1+ 3)t + c2 e(1 3)t . Dierentiating, we find that

z (t) = c1 (1 + 3)e(1+ 3)t + c2 (1 3)e(1 3)t . Substitution of z(t) and z (t) into the initial
conditions yields the system

z(0) = c1 + c2 = 0, c1 = 3/2,

z (0) = c1 (1 + 3) + c2 (1 3) = 3(c1 c2 ) = 3 c2 = 3/2.
Thus, the solution satisfying the given initial conditions is

#
3 (1+3)t 3 (13)t 3 (1+3)t %
z(t) = e e = e e(1 3)t .
2 2 2
19. Here, the auxiliary equation is r 2 4r 5 = (r 5)(r + 1) = 0, which has roots r = 5, 1.

Consequently, a general solution to the dierential equation is y(t) = c1 e5t + c2 et , where
c1 and c2 are arbitrary constants. To find the solution that satisfies the initial conditions,
y(1) = 3 and y (1) = 9, we first dierentiate the solution found above, then plug in y and
y into the initial conditions. This gives
y(1) = 3 = c1 e5 + c2 e
y (1) = 9 = 5c1 e5 c2 e.
Solving this system yields c1 = 2e5 , c2 = e1 . Thus y(t) = 2e5(t+1) + e(t+1) is the desired
solution.
171
Chapter 4
21. (a) With y(t) = ert , y (t) = rert , the equation becomes
arert + bert = (ar + b)ert = 0.
Since the function ert is never zero on (, ), to satisfy the above equation we must
have
ar + b = 0.
(b) Solving the characteristic equation, ar + b = 0, obtained in part (a), we get r = b/a. So
y(t) = ert = ebt/a , and a general solution is given by y = cebt/a , where c is an arbitrary
constant.
23. We form the characteristic equation, 5r + 4 = 0, and find its root r = 4/5. Therefore,
y(t) = ce4t/5 is a general solution to the given equation.
25. The characteristic equation, 6r 13 = 0, has the root r = 13/6. Therefore, a general solution
is given by w(t) = ce13t/6 .
27. Assuming that y1 (t) = et cos 2t and y2 (t) = et sin 2t are linearly dependent on (0, 1), we
conclude that, for some constant c and all t (0, 1),
y1 (t) = cy2 (t) et cos 2t = cet sin 2t cos 2t = c sin 2t.
Choosing, say, t = /4, we get cos(/2) = c sin(/2) or c = 0. This implies that
cos 2t 0 sin 2t 0, t (0, 1),
which is a contradiction. Thus, y1 (t) and y2 (t) are linearly independent on (0, 1) (and so on
(, ); see Problem 33(a) below).
29. These functions are linearly independent, because the equality y1 (t) cy2 (t) would imply
that, for some constant c,
te2t ce2t tc
on (0, 1).
172
Exercises 4.2
31. Using the trigonometric identity 1 + tan2 t sec2 t, we conclude that
y1 (t) = tan2 t sec2 t 1 y2 (t) 3 (3)y1 (t),
and so y1 (t) and y2 (t) are linearly dependent on (0, 1) (even on (, )).
33. (a) True. Since y1 (t) and y2 (t) are linearly dependent on [a, b], there exists a constant c such
that y1 (t) = cy2 (t) (or y2 (t) = cy1(t)) for all t in [a, b]. In particular, this equality is
satisfied on any smaller interval [c, d], and so y1 (t) and y2 (t) are linearly dependent on
[c, d].
(b) False. As an example, consider y1 (t) = t and y2 (t) = |t| on [1, 1]. For t in [0, 1],
y2 (t) = t = y1 (t), and so y2 (t) c1 y1 (t) with constant c1 = 1. For t in [1, 0], we have
y2 (t) = t = y1 (t), and so y2 (t) c2 y1 (t) with constant c2 = 1. Therefore, these two
functions are linearly dependent on [0, 1] and on [1, 0]. Since c1 = c2 , there is no such
a constant c that y1 (t) cy2 (t) on [1, 1]. So, y1 (t) and y2 (t) are linearly independent
on [1, 1].
35. (a) No, because, for t 0, y2 (t) = |t3 | = t3 = y1 (t).
(b) No, because, for t 0, y2 (t) = |t3 | = t3 = y1 (t).
(c) Yes, because there is no constant c such that y2 (t) = cy1 (t) is satisfied for all t (for
positive t we have c = 1, and c = 1 for negative t).
(d) While y1 (t) = 3t2 on (, ), for the derivative of y2 (t) we consider three dierent
cases: t < 0, t = 0, and t > 0. For t < 0, y2 (t) = t3 , y2 (t) = 3t2 , and so
1 1
1 t3 t3 1
1 1
W [y1 , y2 ](t) = 1 2 1 = t3 (3t2 ) 3t2 (t3 ) = 0.
1 3t 3t2 1
Similarly, for t > 0, y2 (t) = t3 , y2 (t) = 3t2 , and

1 1
1 t3 t3 1
1 1
W [y1, y2 ](t) = 1 2 1 = t3 3t2 3t2 t3 = 0.
1 3t 3t2 1
173
Chapter 4
For t = 0, y1 (0) = 302 = 0 and y2 (0) = 0. The latter follows from the fact that one-sided
derivatives of y2 (t), 3t2 and 3t2 , are both zero at t = 0. Also, y1 (0) = y2 (0) = 0. Hence
1 1
1 0 0 1
1 1
W [y1 , y2](0) = 1 1 = 0,
1 0 0 1
and so W [y1 , y2 ](t) 0 on (, ). This result does not contradict part (b) in Prob-
lem 34 because these functions are not a pair of solutions to a homogeneous linear
equation with constant coecients.
37. If y1 (t) and y2 (t) are solutions to the equation ay + by + c = 0, then, by Abels formula,
W [y1 , y2](t) = Cebt/a , where C is a constant depending on y1 and y2 . Thus, if C = 0, then
W [y1 , y2](t) = 0 for any t in (, ), because the exponential function, ebt/a , is never zero.
For C = 0, W [y1 , y2 ](t) 0 on (, ).
39. (a) A linear combination of y1 (t) = 1, y2 (t) = t, and y3 (t) = t2 ,
C1 1 + C2 t + C3 t2 = C1 + C2 t + C3 t2 ,
is a polynomial of degree at most two and so can have at most two real roots, unless it is
a zero polynomial, i.e., has all zero coecients. Therefore, the above linear combination
vanishes on (, ) if and only if C1 = C2 = C3 = 0, and y1 (t), y2 (t), and y3 (t) are
linearly independent on (, ).
(b) Since
5y1(t) + 3y2(t) + 15y3(t) = 15 + 15 sin2 t + 15 cos2 t = 15(1 + sin2 t + cos2 t) 0
on (, ) (the Pythagorean identity), given functions are linearly dependent.

(c) These functions are linearly independent. Indeed, since the function et does not vanish
on (, ),
) *
C1 y1 + C2 y2 + C3 y3 = C1 et + C2 tet + C3 t2 et = C1 + C2 t + C3 t2 et = 0
if and only if C1 + C2 t + C3 t2 = 0. But functions 1, t, and t2 are linearly independent

on (, ) (see (a)) and so their linear combination is identically zero if and only if
C1 = C2 = C3 = 0.
174
Exercises 4.2
(d) By the definition of cosh t,
et + et 1 1 1 1
y3 (t) = cosh t = = et + et = y1 (t) + y2 (t) ,
2 2 2 2 2
and given functions are linearly dependent on (, ).
41. The auxiliary equation for this problem is r 3 + r 2 6r + 4 = 0. Factoring yields

) 3 * ) *
r 3 + r 2 6r + 4 = r r 2 + 2r 2 2r + (4r + 4)
= r 2 (r 1) + 2r(r 1) 4(r 1) = (r 1)(r 2 + 2r 4).
Thus the roots of the auxiliary equation are

$
2 (2)2 4(1)(4)
r = 1 and r = = 1 5 .
2

Therefore, the functions et , e(1 5)t
, and e(1+ 5)t
are solutions to the given equation, and
they are linearly independent on (, ) (see Problem 40). Hence, a general solution to
y + y 6y + 4y = 0 is given by

y(t) = c1 et + c2 e(1 5)t
+ c3 e(1+ 5)t
.
42. The auxiliary equation associated with this dierential equation is r 3 6r 2 r + 6 = 0. We

see, by inspection, that r = 1 is a root. Dividing the cubic polynomial r 3 6r 2 r + 6 by
r 1, we find that
r 3 6r 2 r + 6 = (r 1)(r 2 5r 6) = (r 1)(r + 1)(r 6).
Hence r = 1, 1, 6 are the roots to the auxiliary equation, and a general solution is
y(t) = c1 et + c2 et + c3 e6t .
43. Factoring the auxiliary polynomial yields
r 3 + 2r 2 4r 8 = (r 3 + 2r 2 ) (4r + 8)
= r 2 (r + 2) 4(r + 2) = (r + 2) (r 2 4) = (r + 2)(r + 2)(r 2).
175
Chapter 4
Therefore, the auxiliary equation has a double root 2 and a root 2. The functions e2t ,
te2t , and e2t form a linearly independent solution set. Therefore, a general solution in this
problem is
z(t) = c1 e2t + c2 te2t + c3 e2t .
45. By inspection, we see that r = 2 is a root of the auxiliary equation, r 3 + 3r 2 4r 12 = 0.

Dividing the polynomial r 3 + 3r 2 4r 12 by r 2 yields
) *
r 3 + 3r 2 4r 12 = (r 2) r 2 + 5r + 6 = (r 2)(r + 2)(r + 3).
Hence, two other roots of the auxiliary equation are r = 2 and r = 3. The functions e3t ,
e2t , and e2t are three linearly independent solutions to the given equation, and a general
y(t) = c1 e3t + c2 e2t + c3 e2t .
47. First we find a general solution to the equation y y = 0. Its characteristic equation,
r 3 r = 0, has roots r = 0, 1, and 1, and so a general solution is given by
y(t) = c1 e(0)t + c2 e(1)t + c3 e(1)t = c1 + c2 et + c3 et .
Dierentiating y(t) twice yields
y (t) = c2 et + c3 et , y (t) = c2 et + c3 et .
Now we substitute y, y , and y into the initial conditions and find c1 , c2 , and c3 .
y(0) = c1 + c2 + c3 = 2, c1 = 3,

y (0) = c2 + c3 = 3, c2 = 2,

y (0) = c2 + c3 = 1 c3 = 1.
y(t) = 3 2et + et .
176
Exercises 4.3
49. (a) To find the roots of the auxiliary equation, p(r) := 3r 3 + 18r 2 + 13r 19 = 0, one can
use Newtons method or intermediate value theorem. We note that
p(5) = 9 < 0, p(4) = 25 > 0,
p(2) = 3 > 0, p(1) = 17 < 0,
p(0) = 19 < 0, p(1) = 15 > 0.
Therefore, the roots of p(r) belong to the intervals [5, 4], [2, 1], and [0, 1], and
we can take r = 5, r = 2, and r = 0 as initial quesses. Approximation yields
r1 4.832, r2 1.869, and r3 0.701. So, a general solution is given by
y(t) = c1 er1 t + c2 er2 t + c3 er3 t = c1 e4.832t + c2 e1.869t + c3 e0.701t .
(b) The auxiliary equation, r 4 5r 2 + 5 = 0, is of quadratic type. The substitution s = r 2

yields
"

2 5 5 5 5
s 5s + 5 = 0 s= r= s= .
2 2
Therefore,
" "

5 5 5+ 5
r1 = 1.176 , r2 = 1.902 , r3 = r1 , and r4 = r2
2 2
are the roots of the auxiliary equation, and a general solution to y (v) 5y + 5y = 0 is
given by y(t) = c1 er1 t + c2 er1 t + c3 er2 t + c4 er2 t .
(c) We can use numerical tools to find the roots of the auxiliary fifth degree polynomial
equation r 5 3r 4 5r 3 + 15r 2 + 4r 12 = 0. Alternatively, one can involve the rational
root theorem and examine the divisors of the free coecient, 12. These divisors are
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 12. By inspection, r = 1, 2, and 3 satisfy the equation.
Thus, a general solution is y(t) = c1 et + c2 et + c3 e2t + c4 e2t + c5 e3t .
EXERCISES 4.3: Auxiliary Equations with Complex Roots, page 177
1. The auxiliary equation in this problem is r 2 + 9 = 0, which has roots r = 3i. We see that
= 0 and = 3. Thus, a general solution to the dierential equation is given by
y(t) = c1 e(0)t cos 3t + c2 e(0)t sin 3t = c1 cos 3t + c2 sin 3t.
177
Chapter 4
) *
3. The auxiliary equation, r 2 6r + 10 = 0, has roots r = 6 62 40 /2 = 3 i. So = 3,
= 1, and
z(t) = c1 e3t cos t + c2 e3t sin t
5. This dierential equation has the auxiliary equation r 2 +4r +6 = 0. The roots of this auxiliary
) *
equation are r = 4 16 24 /2 = 2 2 i. We see that = 2 and = 2. Thus,
a general solution to the dierential equation is given by

w(t) = c1 e2t cos 2t + c2 e2t sin 2t.
7. The auxiliary equation for this problem is given by

2 2 2 4 104 1 5
4r 4r + 26 = 0 2r 2r + 13 = 0 r= = i.
4 2 2
Therefore, = 1/2 and = 5/2. Thus, a general solution is given by
+ , + ,
t/2 5t t/2 5t
y(t) = c1 e cos + c2 e sin .
2 2
9. The associated auxiliary equation, r 2 8r + 7 = 0, has two real roots, r = 1, 7. Thus the
answer is
y(t) = c1 et + c2 e7t .
11. The auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 + 10r + 25 = (r + 5)2 = 0. We see that r = 5
is a repeated root. Thus two linearly independent solutions are z1 (t) = e5t and z2 (t) = te5t .
This means that a general solution is given by
z(t) = c1 e5t + c2 te5t ,
13. Solving the auxiliary equation yields complex roots

$
2 22 4(1)(5)
r 2 + 2r + 5 = 0 r= = 1 2i.
2
178
Exercises 4.3
So, = 1, = 2, and a general solution is given by
y(t) = c1 et cos 2t + c2 et sin 2t.
15. First, we find the roots of the auxiliary equation.

$
10 102 4(1)(41)
r 2 + 10r + 41 = 0 r= = 5 4i.
2
These are complex numbers with = 5 and = 4. Hence, a general solution to the given
y(t) = c1 e5t cos 4t + c2 e5t sin 4t.
17. The auxiliary equation in this problem, r 2 r + 7 = 0, has the roots

$
1 12 4(1)(7) 1 27 1 3 3
r= = = i.
2 2 2 2
J K J K
3 3 3 3
y(t) = c1 et/2 cos t + c2 et/2 sin t .
2 2
19. The auxiliary equation, r 3 + r 2 + 3r 5 = 0, is a cubic equation. Since any cubic equation has
a real root, first we examine the divisors of the free coecient, 5, to find integer real roots (if
any). By inspection, r = 1 satisfies the equation. Dividing r 3 + r 2 + 3r 5 by r 1 yields
r 3 + r 2 + 3r 5 = (r 1)(r 2 + 2r + 5).
Therefore, the other two roots of the auxiliary equation are the roots of the quadratic equation
r 2 + 2r + 5 = 0, which are r = 1 2i. A general solution to the given equation is then given
by
y(t) = c1 et + c2 et cos 2t + c3 et sin 2t.
21. The auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 + 2r + 2 = 0, which has the roots

2 4 8
r= = 1 i.
2
179
Chapter 4
So, a general solution is given by
y(t) = c1 et cos t + c2 et sin t ,
where c1 and c2 are arbitrary constants. To find the solution that satisfies the initial conditions,
y(0) = 2 and y (0) = 1, we first dierentiate the solution found above, then plug in given
initial conditions. This yields y (t) = c1 et ( cos t sin t) + c2 et (cos t sin t) and
y(0) = c1 = 2,
y (0) = c1 + c2 = 1 .
Thus c1 = 2, c2 = 3, and the solution is given by
y(t) = 2et cos t + 3et sin t .
23. The auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 4r + 2 = 0. The roots of this equation are

4 16 8
r= = 2 2,
2

which are real numbers. A general solution is given by w(t) = c1 e(2+ 2)t
+ c2 e(2 2)t
, where
c1 and c2 are arbitrary constants. To find the solution that satisfies the initial conditions,
w(0) = 0 and w (0) = 1, we first dierentiate the solution found above, then plug in our
initial conditions. This gives
w(0) = c1 + c2 = 0,
# % # %
w (0) = 2 + 2 c1 + 2 2 c2 = 1 .

Solving this system of equations yields c1 = 1/(2 2) and c2 = 1/(2 2). Thus
#
1 (2+2)t 1 (22)t 2 (2+2)t %
w(t) = e e = e e(2 2)t
2 2 2 2 4
is the desired solution.
180
Exercises 4.3
25. The auxiliary equation, r 2 2r + 2 = 0, has the roots r = 1 i. Thus, a general solution is
y(t) = c1 et cos t + c2 et sin t ,
where c1 and c2 are arbitrary constants. To find the solution that satisfies the initial conditions,
y() = e and y () = 0, we find y (t) = c1 et (cos t sin t) + c2 et (sin t + cos t) and solve the
system
e = y() = c1 e ,
0 = y () = c1 e c2 e .
This yields c1 = 1, c2 = c1 = 1. So, the answer is
y(t) = et cos t + et sin t = et (sin t cos t) .
27. To solve the auxiliary equation, r 3 4r 2 + 7r 6 = 0, which is of the third order, we find its
real root first. Examining the divisors of 6, that is, 1, 2, 3, and 6, we find that r = 2
satisfies the equation. Next, we divide r 3 4r 2 + 7r 6 by r 2 and obtain
) *
r 3 4r 2 + 7r 6 = (r 2) r 2 2r + 3 .
Therefore, the other two roots of the auxiliary equation are

2 4 12
r= = 1 2i ,
2
and a general solution to the given dierential equation is given by

y(t) = c1 e2t + c2 et cos 2t + c3 et sin 2t .
Next, we find the derivatives,

# % # %
2t t t
y (t) = 2c1 e + c2 e cos 2t 2 sin 2t + c3 e sin 2t + 2 cos 2t ,
# % # %
y (t) = 4c1 e2t + c2 et cos 2t 2 2 sin 2t + c3 et sin 2t + 2 2 cos 2t ,
181
Chapter 4
and substitute y, y , and y into the initial conditions. This yields
c1 + c2 = 1, c1 = 1,

2c1 + c2 + 2c3 = 0, c2 = 0,

4c1 c2 + 2 2c3 = 0 c3 = 2 .
With these values of the constants c1 , c2 , and c3 , the solution becomes

y(t) = e2t 2et sin 2t .
29. (a) As it was stated in Section 4.2, third order linear homogeneous dierential equations
with constant coecients can be handled in the same way as second order equations.
Therefore, we look for the roots of the auxiliary equation r 3 r 2 + r + 3 = 0. By
the rational root theorem, the only possible rational roots are r = 1 and 3. By
checking these values, we find that one of the roots of the auxiliary equation is r = 1.
Factorization yields
r 3 r 2 + r + 3 = (r + 1)(r 2 2r + 3).
Using the quadratic formula, we find that the other two roots are

2 4 12
r= = 1 2 i.
2
A general solution is, therefore,

y(t) = c1 et + c2 et cos 2t + c3 et sin 2t .
(b) By inspection, r = 2 is a root of the auxiliary equation, r 3 + 2r 2 + 5r 26 = 0. Since

) *
r 3 + 2r 2 + 5r 26 = (r 2) r 2 + 4r + 13 ,
the other two roots are the roots of r 2 + 4r + 13 = 0, that is, r = 2 3i. Therefore, a
general solution to the given equation is
y(t) = c1 e2t + c2 e2t cos 3t + c3 e2t sin 3t .
182
Exercises 4.3
(c) The fourth order auxiliary equation r 4 + 13r 2 + 36 = 0 can be reduced to a quadratic
equation by making a substitution s = r 2 . This yields

13 169 144 13 5
s2 + 13r + 36 = 0 s= = .
2 2
Thus, s = (13 + 5)/2 = 4 or s = (13 5)/2 = 9, and the solutions to the auxiliary

equation are r = 4 = 2i and r = 9 = 3i. A general solution, therefore,
has the form
y(t) = c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t + c3 cos 3t + c4 sin 3t .
31. (a) Comparing the equation y + 16y = 0 with the mass-spring model (16) in Example 4,
we conclude that the damping coecient b = 0 and the stiness constant k = 16 > 0.
Thus, solutions should have an oscillatory behavior.
Indeed, the auxiliary equation, r 2 + 16 = 0, has roots r = 4i, and a general solution is
given by
y(t) = c1 cos 4t + c2 sin 4t .
Evaluating y (t) and substituting the initial conditions, we get
y(0) = c1 = 2, c1 = 2,
y(t) = 2 cos 4t .
y (0) = 4c2 = 0 c2 = 0
(b) Positive damping b = 100 and stiness k = 1 imply that the displacement y(t) tends to
zero, as t .
To confirm this prediction, we solve the given initial value problem explicitly. The roots
of the associated equation are

100 1002 4
r= = 50 2499 .
2

Thus the roots r1 = 50 2499 and r2 = 50 + 2499 are both negative. A general
y(t) = c1 er1 t + c2 er2 t y (t) = c1 r1 er1 t + c2 r2 er2 t .
183
Chapter 4
Solving the initial value problem yields
y(0) = 1 = c1 + c2 , c1 = r2 /(r2 r1 ),

y (0) = 0 = c1 r1 + c2 r2 c2 = r1 /(r1 r2 ),
and so the desired solution is

50 + 2499 (502499)t 50 + 2499 (50+2499)t
y(t) = e + e .
2 2499 2 2499
Since both powers in exponential functions tend to as t , y(t) 0.
(c) The corresponding mass-spring model has negative damping b = 6 and positive stiness
k = 8. Thus the magnitude |y(t)| of the displacement y(t) will increase without bound,
as t . Moreover, because of the positive initial displacement and initial zero velocity,
the mass will move in the negative direction. Thus, our guess is that y(t) as
t .
Now we find the actual solution. Since the roots of the auxiliary equation are r = 2 and
r = 4, a general solution to the given equation is y(t) = c1 e2t + c2 e4t . Next, we find c1
and c2 satisfying the initial conditions.
y(0) = 1 = c1 + c2 , c1 = 2,

y (0) = 0 = 2c1 + 4c2 c2 = 1.
Thus, the desired solution is

y(t) = 2e2t e4t ,
and it approaches as t .
(d) In this problem, the stiness k = 3 is negative. In the mass-spring model, this means
that the spring forces the mass to move in the same direction as the sign of the displace-
ment is. Initially, the displacement y(0) = 2 is negative, and the mass has no initial
velocity. Thus the mass, when released, will move in the negative direction, and the
spring will enforce this movement. So, we expect that y(t) as t .
To find the actual solution, we solve the auxiliary equation r 2 + 2r 3 = 0 and obtain
r = 3, 1. Therefore, a general solution is given by y(t) = c1 e3t + c2 et . We find c1 and
184
Exercises 4.3
c2 from the initial conditions.
y(0) = 2 = c1 + c2 , c1 = 1/2,

y (0) = 0 = 3c1 + c2 c2 = 3/2.
Thus, the solution to the initial value problem is
e3t 3et
y(t) = ,
2 2
and, as t , it approaches .
(e) As in the previous problem, we have negative stiness k = 6. But this time the initial
displacement, y(0) = 1, as well as the initial velocity, y (0) = 1, is positive. So, the
mass will start moving in the positive direction, and will continue doing this (due to the
negative stiness) with increasing velocity. Thus our prediction is that y(t) when
t .
Indeed, the roots of the characteristic equation in this problem are r = 2 and 3, and
so a general solution has the form y(t) = c1 e2t + c2 e3t . To satisfy the initial conditions,
we solve the system
y(0) = 1 = c1 + c2 , c1 = 2/5,

y (0) = 1 = 2c1 + 3c2 c2 = 3/5.

2e2t 3e3t
y(t) = + ,
5 5
and it approaches as t .
33. From Example 3 we see that, in the study of a vibrating spring with damping, we have the
initial value problem
my (t) + by (t) + ky(t) = 0; y(0) = y0 , y (0) = v0 ,
where m is the mass of the spring system, b is the damping constant, k is the spring constant,
y(0) is the initial displacement, y (0) is the initial velocity, and y(t) is the displacement of the
mass from the equilibrium at time t.
185
Chapter 4
(a) We want to determine the equation of motion for a spring system with m = 10 kg,
b = 60 kg/sec, k = 250 kg/sec2 , y(0) = 0.3 m, and y (0) = 0.1 m/sec. That is, we seek
the solution to the initial value problem
10y (t) + 60y (t) + 250y(t) = 0; y(0) = 0.3 , y (0) = 0.1 .
The auxiliary equation for the above dierential equation is
10r 2 + 60r + 250 = 0 r 2 + 6r + 25 = 0,
which has the roots

6 36 100 6 8i
r= = = 3 4i.
2 2
Hence = 3 and = 4, and the displacement y(t) has the form
y(t) = c1 e3t cos 4t + c2 e3t sin 4t.
We find c1 and c2 by using the initial conditions. We first dierentiate y(t) to get
y (t) = (3c1 + 4c2 )e3t cos 4t + (4c1 3c2 )e3t sin 4t.
Substituting y and y into the initial conditions, we obtain the system
y(0) = 0.3 = c1 ,
y (0) = 0.1 = 3c1 + 4c2 .
Solving, we find that c1 = 0.3 and c2 = 0.2. Therefore the equation of motion is given
by
y(t) = 0.3e3t cos 4t + 0.2e3t sin 4t (m).
(b) From Problem 32 we know that the frequency of oscillation is given by /(2). In part
(a) we found that = 4. Therefore the frequency of oscillation is 4/(2) = 2/.
(c) We see a decrease in the frequency of oscillation. We also have the introduction of the
factor e3t , which causes the solution to decay to zero. This is a result of energy loss due
to the damping.
186
Exercises 4.3
35. The equation of the motion of a swinging door is similar to that for mass-spring model (with
the mass m replaced by the moment of inertia I and the displacement y(t) replaced by the
angle that the door is open). So, from the discussion following Example 3 we conclude that
the door will not continually swing back and forth (that is, the solution (t) will not oscillate)

if b 4Ik = 2 Ik.
37. (a) The auxiliary equation for this problem is r 4 + 2r 2 + 1 = (r 2 + 1)2 = 0. This equation
has the roots r1 = r2 = i, r3 = r4 = i. Thus, cos t and sin t are solutions and, since the
roots are repeated, we get two more solutions by multiplying cos t and sin t by t, that is,
t cos t and t sin t are also solutions. This gives a general solution
y(t) = c1 cos t + c2 sin t + c3 t cos t + c4 t sin t.
(b) The auxiliary equation in this problem is
r 4 + 4r 3 + 12r 2 + 16r + 16 = (r 2 + 2r + 4)2 = 0.
The roots of the quadratic equation r 2 + 2r + 4 = 0 are

2 4 16
r= = 1 3i.
2

Hence the roots of the auxiliary equation are r1 = r2 = 1 3i and r3 = r4 = 1+ 3i.

Thus two linearly independent solutions are et cos( 3t) and et sin( 3t), and we get
two more linearly independent by multiplying them by t. This gives a general solution
of the form

y(t) = (c1 + c2 t)et cos( 3t) + (c3 + c4 t)et sin( 3t).
39. (a) Comparing given equation with the Cauchy-Euler equation (21) in general form, we
conclude that a = 3, b = 11, and c = 3. Thus, the substitution x = et leads to the
equation (22) in Problem 38 with these values of parameters. That is,
d2 y dy d2 y dy
a + (b a) + cy = 0 3 + 8 3y = 0.
dt2 dt dt2 dt
187
Chapter 4
(b) The auxiliary equation to the dierential equation obtained in (a) is 3r 2 + 8r 3 = 0,

which has the roots
$
8 64 4(3)(3) 8 10 1
r= = r = 3, .
6 6 3
This yields a general solution y(t) = c1 et/3 + c2 e3t .
(c) Since x = et , we can express y(t) as a function of x by writing

) *1/3 ) *3
y = c1 et/3 + c2 e3t = c1 et + c2 et = c1 x1/3 + c2 x3 .
41. This equation is a Cauchy-Euler equation. The substitution x = et leads to the equation (22)
with a = 1, b = 2, and c = 6. Thus we have
d2 y dy d2 y dy
a 2
+ (b a) + cy = 0 + 6y = 0.
dt dt dt2 dt
The auxiliary equation, r 2 + r 6 = 0, has the roots r = 3 and r = 2. Therefore, a general

solution can be written as
) *3 ) *2
y = c1 e3t + c2 e2t = c1 et + c2 et = c1 x3 + c2 x2 .
43. The substitution x = et yields the equation
d2 y dy d2 y dy
+ (9 1) + 17y = 0 + 8 + 17y = 0.
dt2 dt dt2 dt
Solving the characteristic equation, r 2 + 8r + 17 = 0, we get

8 64 68
r= = 4 i.
2
Thus, the roots are complex with = 4, = 1, and a general solution, as a function of t, is
given by y(t) = c1 e4t cos t + c2 e4t sin t. Now we make the back substitution. Since x = et ,
we have t = ln x and so
) *4
y = et (c1 cos t + c2 sin t) = x4 [c1 cos(ln x) + c2 sin(ln x)] .
188
Exercises 4.4
EXERCISES 4.4: Nonhomogeneous Equations: The Method of Undetermined

Coecients, page 186
1. We cannot use the method of undetermined coecients to find a particular solution because
of the t1 term, which is not a polynomial.
3. Rewriting the right-hand side in the form 3t = e(ln 3)t = ert , where r = ln 3, we conclude that
the method of undetermined coecients can be applied.
5. Since sec = 1/ cos , we cannot use the method of undetermined coecients.
7. Given equation is not an equation with constant coecients. Thus the method of undeter-
mined coecients cannot be applied.

9. The roots of the auxiliary equation, r 2 + 3 = 0, are r = 3i. Since they are dierent from
zero, we look for a particular solution of the form yp (t) A. Substitution into the original
equation yields
(A) + 3A = 9 3A = 9 A = 3.
Thus, yp (t) 3 is a particular solution to the given nonhomogeneous equation.
11. The auxiliary equation in this problem, 2r 2 + 1 = 0, has complex roots. Therefore, e2t is not a
solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation, and a particular solution to the original
nonhomogeneous equation has the form zp (t) = Ae2t . Substituting this expression into the
equation, we find the constant A.
) * ) *
2 Ae2t + Ae2t = 2 4Ae2t + Ae2t = 9Ae2t = 9e2t A = 1.
Hence, zp (t) = e2t .
12. This equation is a linear first order dierential equation with constant coecients. The
corresponding homogeneous equation, 2x +x = 0, can be solved by the methods of Chapter 2.
Alternatively, one can use the result of Problem 21 in Section 4.2. Either approach yields
189
Chapter 4
xh (t) = Cet/2 . So, the homogeneous equation does not have a polynomial solution (other
than x(t) 0), and we look for a particular solution to the nonhomogeneous equation of the
form xp (t) = A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 . Substitution into the original dierential equation yields
2xp (t) + xp (t) = 2 (2A2 t + A1 ) + A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 = A2 t2 + (4A2 + A1 ) t + (2A1 + A0 ) = 3t2 .
By equating coecients we obtain
A2 = 3,
4A2 + A1 = 0 A1 = 12,
2A1 + A0 = 0 A0 = 24.
Therefore, a particular solution is xp (t) = 3t2 12t + 24.
13. The right-hand side of the original nonhomogeneous equation suggest us the form
yp (t) = ts (A cos 3t + B sin 3t)
for a particular solution. Since the roots of the auxiliary equation, r 2 r + 9 = 0, are dierent
from 3i, neither cos 3t nor sin 3t is a solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation.
Therefore, we can choose s = 0, and so
yp (t) = A cos 3t + B sin 3t,

yp (t) = 3A sin 3t + 3B cos 3t,
yp (t) = 9A cos 3t 9B sin 3t.
Substituting these expressions into the original equation and equating the corresponding co-
ecients, we conclude that
(9A cos 3t 9B sin 3t) (3A sin 3t + 3B cos 3t) + 9 (A cos 3t + B sin 3t) = 3 sin 3t
3B cos 3t + 3A sin 3t = 3 sin 3t A = 1, B = 0.
Hence, the answer is yp (t) = cos 3t.
190
Exercises 4.4
15. For this problem, the corresponding homogeneous equation is y 5y + 6y = 0, which has
the associated auxiliary equation r 2 5r + 6 = 0. The roots of this equation are r = 3 and
r = 2. Therefore, neither y = ex nor y = xex satisfies the homogeneous equation, and in the
expression yp (x) = xs (Ax + B)ex for a particular solution we can take s = 0. So
yp (x) = (Ax + B)ex

yp (x) = (Ax + B + A)ex
yp (x) = (Ax + B + 2A)ex
(Ax + B + 2A)ex 5(Ax + B + A)ex + 6(Ax + B)ex = xex
2A = 1, A = 1/2,
(2Ax 3A + 2B)ex = xex
3A + 2B = 0 B = 3/4 ,
and yp (x) = (x/2 + 3/4)ex .
16. The corresponding homogeneous equation has the auxiliary equation r 2 1 = 0, whose roots
are r = 1. Thus, in the expression p (t) = (A1 t + A0 ) cos t + (B1 t + B0 ) sin t none of the
terms is a solution to the homogeneous equation. We find
p (t) = (A1 t + A0 ) cos t + (B1 t + B0 ) sin t

p (t) = A1 cos t (A1 t + A0 ) sin t + B1 sin t + (B1 t + B0 ) cos t
= (B1 t + A1 + B0 ) cos t + (A1 t A0 + B1 ) sin t
p (t) = B1 cos t (B1 t + B0 + A1 ) sin t A1 sin t + (A1 t A0 + B1 ) cos t
= (A1 t A0 + B1 ) cos t + (B1 t B0 2A1 ) sin t.
Substituting these expressions into the original dierential equation, we get
p p = (A1 t A0 + 2B1 ) cos t + (B1 t B0 2A1 ) sin t

(A1 t + A0 ) cos t (B1 t + B0 ) sin t
= 2A1 t cos t + (2A0 + 2B1 ) cos t 2B1 t sin t + (2A1 2B0 ) sin t
= t sin t.
191
Chapter 4
Equating the coecients, we see that
2A1 = 0 A1 = 0,
2A0 + 2B1 = 0 B1 = A0 ,
1 1
2B1 = 1 B1 = and so A0 = ,
2 2
2A1 2B0 = 0 B0 = 0.
Therefore, a particular solution of the nonhomogeneous equation = t sin t is given by
t sin t + cos t
p (t) = .
2
17. The right-hand side of the original equation suggests that a particular solution should be of
the form yp (t) = Ats et . Since r = 1 is a double root of the corresponding auxiliary equation,
r 2 2r + 1 = (r 1)2 = 0, we take s = 2. Hence
) * ) *
yp (t) = At2 et yp (t) = A t2 + 2t et yp(t) = A t2 + 4t + 2 et .
Substituting these expressions into the original equation, we find the constant A.
) * ) *
A t2 + 4t + 2 et 2A t2 + 2t et + At2 et = 8et 2Aet = 8et A = 4.
Thus, yp (t) = 4t2 et .
19. According to the right-hand side of the given equation, a particular solution has the form
yp (t) = ts (A1 t + A0 )e3t . To choose s, we solve the auxiliary equation, 4r 2 + 11r 3 = 0, and
find that r = 3 is its simple root. Therefore, we take s = 1, and so
) *
yp (t) = t (A1 t + A0 ) e3t = A1 t2 + A0 t e3t .
Dierentiating yields
- .
yp (t) = 3A1 t2 + (2A1 3A0 ) t + A0 e3t ,
- .
yp (t) = 9A1 t2 + (9A0 12A1 ) t + 2A1 6A0 e3t .
192
Exercises 4.4
Substituting y, y , and y into the original equation, after some algebra we get
26A1 = 2, A1 = 1/13,
[26A1 t + (8A1 13A0 )]e3t = 2te3t
8A1 13A0 = 0 A0 = 8/169.
Therefore, + ,
t 8
yp (t) = + te3t .
13 169
21. The nonhomogeneous term of the original equation is te2t . Therefore, a particular solution
has the form xp (t) = ts (A1 t + A0 ) e2t . The corresponding homogeneous dierential equation
has the auxiliary equation r 2 4r + 4 = (r 2)2 = 0. Since r = 2 is its double root, s is
chosen to be 2. Thus a particular solution to the nonhomogeneous equation has the form
) *
xp (t) = t2 (A1 t + A0 ) e2t = A1 t3 + A0 t2 e2t .
We compute
) * ) *
xp = 3A1 t2 + 2A0 t e2t + 2 A1 t3 + A0 t2 e2t ,
) * ) *
xp = (6A1 t + 2A0 ) e2t + 4 3A1 t2 + 2A0 t e2t + 4 A1 t3 + A0 t2 e2t .
Substituting these expressions into the original dierential equation yields

) * ) *
xp 4xp + 4xp = (6A1 t + 2A0 ) e2t + 4 3A1 t2 + 2A0 t e2t + 4 A1 t3 + A0 t2 e2t
) * ) * ) *
4 3A1 t2 + 2A0 t e2t 8 A1 t3 + A0 t2 e2t + 4 A1 t3 + A0 t2 e2t
= (6A1 t + 2A0 ) e2t = te2t .
Equating coecients yields A0 = 0 and A1 = 1/6. Therefore xp (t) = t3 e2t /6 is a particular

solution to the given nonhomogeneous equation.
23. The right-hand side of this equation suggests that yp () = s (A2 2 + A1 + A0 ). We choose
s = 1 because r = 0 is a simple root of the auxiliary equation, r 2 7r = 0. Therefore,
yp () = (A2 2 + A1 + A0 ) = A2 3 + A1 2 + A0
yp () = 3A2 2 + 2A1 + A0 yp() = 6A2 + 2A1 .
193
Chapter 4
So,
) *
yp 7yp = (6A2 + 2A1 )7 3A2 2 + 2A1 + A0 = 21A2 2 +(6A2 14A1 )+2A1 7A0 = 2 .
Comparing the corresponding coecients, we find A2 , A1 , and A0 .
21A2 = 1, A2 = 1/21,
6A2 14A1 = 0, A1 = 3A2 /7 = 1/49,
2A1 7A0 = 0 A0 = 2A1 /7 = 2/343.
Hence
1 3 1 2 2
yp () = .
21 49 343
25. We look for a particular solution of the form yp (t) = ts (A cos 3t + B sin 3t)e2t . Since r = 2 + 3i
is not a root of the auxiliary equation, which is r 2 + 2r + 4 = 0, we can take s = 0. Thus,
yp (t) = (A cos 3t + B sin 3t)e2t

yp (t) = [(2A + 3B) cos 3t + (3A + 2B) sin 3t)]e2t
yp(t) = [(5A + 12B) cos 3t + (12A 5B) sin 3t)]e2t .
Next, we substitute yp , yp , and yp into the original equation and compare the corresponding
coecients.
yp + 2yp + 4yp = [(3A + 18B) cos 3t + (18A + 3B) sin 3t]e2t = 111e2t cos 3t
3A + 18B = 111,

18A + 3B = 0.
This system has the solution A = 1, B = 6. So,
yp (t) = (cos 3t + 6 sin 3t)e2t .
27. The right-hand side of this equation suggests that

) * ) *
yp (t) = ts A3 t3 + A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 cos 3t + ts B3 t3 + B2 t2 + B1 t + B0 sin 3t.
194
Exercises 4.4
To choose s, we find the roots of the characteristic equation, which is r 2 + 9 = 0. Since

r = 3i are its simple roots, we take s = 1. Thus
) * ) *
yp (t) = t A3 t3 + A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 cos 3t + t B3 t3 + B2 t2 + B1 t + B0 sin 3t.
29. The characteristic equation r 2 6r + 9 = (r 3)2 = 0 has a double root r = 3. Therefore, a

particular solution is of the form
) *
yp (t) = t2 A6 t6 + A5 t5 + A4 t4 + A3 t3 + A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 e3t .
31. From the form of the right-hand side, we conclude that a particular solution should be of the
form
-) * ) * .
yp (t) = ts A3 t3 + A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 cos t + B3 t3 + B2 t2 + B1 t + B0 sin t et .
Since r = 1 i are simple roots of the characteristic equation, r 2 + 2r + 2 = 0, we should

take s = 1. Therefore,
-) * ) * .
yp (t) = t A3 t3 + A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 cos t + B3 t3 + B2 t2 + B1 t + B0 sin t et .
33. The right-hand side of the equation suggests that yp (t) = ts (A cos t + B sin t). By inspection,
we see that r = i is not a root of the corresponding auxiliary equation, r 3 r 2 + 1 = 0. Thus,
with s = 0,
yp (t) = A cos t + B sin t,

yp (t) = A sin t + B cos t,
yp(t) = A cos t B sin t,
yp(t) = A sin t B cos t,
and substitution into the original equation yields
(A sin t B cos t) (A cos t B sin t) + (A cos t + B sin t) = sin t

(2A B) cos t + (A + 2B) sin t = sin t
2A B = 0, A = 1/5, 1 2
yp (t) = cos t + sin t.
A + 2B = 1 B = 2/5 5 5
195
Chapter 4
35. We look for a particular solution of the form yp (t) = ts (A1 t + A0 )et , and choose s = 1 because
the auxiliary equation, r 3 + r 2 2 = (r 1)(r 2 + 2r + 2) = 0 has r = 1 as a simple root.
Hence,
yp (t) = t(A1 t + A0 )et = (A1 t2 + A0 t)et

- .
yp (t) = A1 t2 + (2A1 + A0 )t + A0 et
- .
yp (t) = A1 t2 + (4A1 + A0 )t + (2A1 + 2A0 ) et
- .
yp (t) = A1 t2 + (6A1 + A0 )t + (6A1 + 3A0 ) et
y + y 2y = [10A1 t + (8A1 + 5A0 )] et = tet .
Equating the corresponding coecients, we find that

+ ,
10A1 = 1, A1 = 1/10, 1 2 4
yp (t) = t t et .
8A1 + 5A0 = 0 A0 = 8A1 /5 = 4/25 10 25
EXERCISES 4.5: The Superposition Principle and Undetermined Coecients

Revisited, page 192
1. Let g1 (t) := sin t and g2 (t) := e2t . Then y1 (t) = cos t is a solution to
y y + y = g1 (t)
and y2 (t) = e2t /3 is a solution to
y y + y = g2 (t).
(a) The right-hand side of the given equation is 5 sin t = 5g1 (t). Therefore, the function
y(t) = 5y1 (t) = 5 cos t is a solution to y y + y = 5 sin t.
(b) We can express sin t3e2t = g1 (t) 3g2 (t). So, by the superposition principle the desired
solution is y(t) = y1 (t) 3y2 (t) = cos t e2t .
(c) Since 4 sin t + 18e2t = 4g1 (t) + 18g2 (t), the function
y(t) = 4y1(t) + 18y2(t) = 4 cos t + 6e2t
is a solution to the given equation.
196
Exercises 4.5
3. The corresponding homogeneous equation, y y = 0, has the associated auxiliary equation

r 2 1 = (r 1)(r + 1) = 0. This gives r = 1 as the roots of this equation, and a general
solution to the homogeneous equation is yh (t) = c1 et + c2 et . Combining this solution with
the particular solution, yp (t) = t, we find that a general solution is given by
y(t) = yp (t) + yh (t) = t + c1 et + c2 et .
5. The corresponding auxiliary equation, r 2 r 2 = 0, has the roots r = 1, 2. Hence, a

general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is h (t) = c1 e2t + c2 et . By the
superposition principle, a general solution to the original nonhomogeneous equation is
(t) = p (t) + h (t) = t 1 + c1 e2t + c2 et .
7. First, we rewrite the equation in standard form, that is,
y 2y + y = 2ex .
The corresponding homogeneous equation, y 2y + y = 0, has the associated auxiliary

equation r 2 2r + 1 = (r 1)2 = 0. Thus r = 1 is its double root, and a general solution
to the homogeneous equation is yh (x) = c1 xex + c2 ex . Combining this with the particular
solution, yp (x) = x2 ex , we find that a general solution is given by
y(x) = yp (x) + yh (x) = x2 ex + c1 xex + c2 ex .
9. We can write the nonhomogeneous term as a dierence
t2 + 4t t2 et sin t = (t2 + 4t) (t2 et sin t) = g1 (t) g2 (t).
Both, g1 (t) and g2 (t), have a form suitable for the method of undetermined coecients. There-
fore, we can apply this method to find particular solutions yp,1(t) and yp,2 (t) to
3y + 2y + 8y = g1 (t) and 3y + 2y + 8y = g2 (t),
respectively. Then, by the superposition principle, yp (t) = yp,1(t) yp,2(t) is a particular

solution to the given equation.
197
Chapter 4
11. The answer is no, because the method of undetermined coecients cannot be applied to
1
y 6y 4y = .
t
13. In the original form, the function sin2 t does not fit any of the cases in the method of unde-
termined coecients. But it can be written as sin2 t = (1 cos 2t)/2, and so
+ , + ,
2 1 cos 2t 7 1
2t + sin t + 3 = 2t + + 3 = 2t + cos 2t .
2 2 2
Now, the method of undetermined coecients can be applied to each term in the above
dierence to find a particular solution to the corresponding nonhomogeneous equation, and
the dierence of these particular solutions, by the superposition principle, is a particular
solution to the original equation. Thus, the answer is yes.
15. No, because the given equation is not an equation with constant coecients.
17. The auxiliary equation in this problem is r 2 1 = 0 with roots r = 1. Hence,
yh (t) = c1 et + c2 et
is a general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation. Next, we find a particu-

lar solution yp (t) to the original nonhomogeneous equation. The method of undetermined
coecients yields
yp (t) = At + B yp (t) A yp(t) 0;

yp yp = 0 (At + B) = At B = 11t + 1 A = 11, B = 1
yp (t) = 11t 1.
By the superposition principle, a general solution is given by
y(t) = yp (t) + yh (t) = 11t 1 + c1 et + c2 et .
19. Solving the auxiliary equation, r 2 3r + 2 = 0, we find that r = 1, 2. Therefore, a general

solution to the homogeneous equation, y 3y + 2y = 0, is
yh (x) = c1 ex + c2 e2x .
198
Exercises 4.5
By the method of undetermined coecients, a particular solution yp (x) to the original equation
has the form yp (x) = xs (A cos x + B sin x)ex . We choose s = 0 because r = 1 + i is not a root
of the auxiliary equation. So,
yp (x) = (A cos x + B sin x)ex

yp (x) = [(A + B) cos x + (B A) sin x]ex
yp(x) = (2B cos x 2A sin x)ex .
Substituting these expressions into the equation, we compare the corresponding coecients
and find A and B.
{(2B cos x 2A sin x) 3[(A + B) cos x + (B A) sin x] + 2(A cos x + B sin x)} ex = ex sin x
A + B = 0, A = 1/2,
(A + B) cos x + (A B) sin x = sin x
AB =1 B = 1/2.
Therefore,
(cos x sin x)ex
yp (x) =
2
and
(cos x sin x)ex
y(x) = + c1 ex + c2 e2x
2
is a general solution to the given nonhomogeneous equation.
21. Since the roots of the auxiliary equation, which is r 2 + 2r + 2 = 0, are r = 1 i, we have a
general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation
yh () = c1 e cos + c2 e sin = (c1 cos + c2 sin ) e ,
and look for a particular solution of the form
yp () = s (A cos + B sin )e with s = 1.
Dierentiating yp (), we get

- .
yp () = (A cos + B sin )e + (A cos + B sin )e ,
199
Chapter 4
- . - .
yp() = 2 (A cos + B sin )e + (A cos + B sin )e
- .
= 2 [(B A) cos (B + A) sin ] e + (A cos + B sin )e .
(Note that we did not evaluate the terms containing the factor because they give zero result
when substituted into the original equation.) Therefore,
yp + 2yp + 2yp = 2 [(B A) cos (B + A) sin ] e + 2(A cos + B sin )e

= 2 (B cos A sin ) e = e cos .
Hence A = 0, B = 1/2, yp () = (1/2)e sin , and a general solution is given by
1
y() = e sin + (c1 cos + c2 sin ) e .
2
23. The corresponding homogeneous equation, y y = 0, is separable. Solving yields
dy dy
=y = dt ln |y| = t + c y = ec et = Cet ,
dt y
where C = 0 is an arbitrary constant. By inspection, y 0 is also a solution. Therefore,

yh (t) = Cet , where C is an arbitrary constant, is a general solution to the homogeneous
equation. (Alternatively, one can apply the method of solving first order linear equations in
Section 2.3 or the method discussed in Problem 21, Section 4.2.) A particular solution has
the form yp (t) = A. Substitution into the original equation yields
(A) A = 1 A = 1.
Thus y(t) = Cet 1 is a general solution. To satisfy the initial condition, y(0) = 0, we find
0 = y(0) = Ce0 1 = C 1 C = 1.
So, the answer is y(t) = et 1.
25. The auxiliary equation, r 2 + 1 = 0, has roots r = i. Therefore, a general solution to the
corresponding homogeneous equation is zh (x) = c1 cos x + c2 sin x, and a particular solution
200
Exercises 4.5
to the original equation has the form zp (x) = Aex . Substituting this function into the given
equation, we find the constant A.
) *
z + z = Aex + Aex = 2Aex = 2ex A = 1,
and a general solution to the given nonhomogeneous equation is
z(x) = ex + c1 cos x + c2 sin x .
Next, since z (x) = ex c1 sin x + c2 cos x, from the initial conditions we get a system for
determining constants c1 and c2 .
0 = z(0) = 1 + c1 , c1 = 1,

0 = z (0) = 1 + c2 c2 = 1.
Hence, z = (x) = ex cos x + sin x is the solution to the given initial value problem.
27. The roots of the auxiliary equation, r 2 r 2 = 0, are r = 1 and r = 2. This gives a general
solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation of the form yh (x) = c1 ex + c2 e2x . We
use the superposition principle to find a particular solution to the nonhomogeneous equation.
(i) For the equation

y y 2y = cos x,
a particular solution has the form yp,1(x) = A cos x + B sin x. Substitution into the above
equation yields
(A cos x B sin x) (A sin x + B cos x) 2(A cos x + B sin x)

= (3A B) cos x + (A 3B) sin x = cos x
3A B = 1, A = 3/10,

A 3B = 0 B = 1/10.
So, yp,1(x) = (3/10) cos x (1/10) sin x.
201
Chapter 4
(ii) For the equation

y y 2y = sin 2x,
a particular solution has the form yp,2(x) = A cos 2x + B sin 2x. Substitution yields
(4A cos 2x 4B sin 2x) (2A sin 2x + 2B cos 2x) 2(A cos 2x + B sin 2x)
= (6A 2B) cos 2x + (2A 6B) sin 2x = sin 2x
6A 2B = 0, A = 1/20,

2A 6B = 1 B = 3/20.
So,
1 3
yp,2(x) = cos 2x sin 2x.
20 20
Therefore, a general solution to the original equation is
y(x) = yp,1(x) yp,2(x) + yh (x)

3 1 1 3
= cos x sin x cos 2x + sin 2x + c1 ex + c2 e2x .
10 10 20 20
Next, we find c1 and c2 such that the initial conditions are satisfied.
7/20 = y(0) = 3/10 1/20 + c1 + c2 , c1 + c2 = 0, c1 = 0,

1/5 = y (0) = 1/10 + 2(3/20) c1 + 2c2 c1 + 2c2 = 0 c2 = 0.
With these constants, the solution becomes
3 1 1 3
y(x) = cos x sin x cos 2x + sin 2x .
10 10 20 20
29. The roots of the auxiliary equation, r 2 1 = 0, are r = 1. Therefore, a general solution to
the corresponding homogeneous equation is
yh () = c1 e + c2 e .
(i) For the equation

y y = sin ,
202
Exercises 4.5
a particular solution has the form yp,1(x) = A cos + B sin . Substitution into the
equation yields
(A cos B sin ) (A cos + B sin ) = 2A cos 2B sin = sin

2A = 0, A = 0,

2B = 1 B = 1/2.
So, yp,1() = (1/2) sin .
(ii) For the equation

y y = e2 ,
a particular solution has the form yp,2() = Ae2 . Substitution yields
) 2 * ) 2 *
Ae Ae = 3Ae2 = e2 A = 1/3,
and yp,2() = (1/3)e2 .
By the superposition principle, a particular solution to the original nonhomogeneous equation

is given by
yp () = yp,1() yp,2() = (1/2) sin (1/3)e2 ,
and a general solution is
y() = yp () + yh () = (1/2) sin (1/3)e2 + c1 e + c2 e .
Next, we satisfy the initial conditions.
1 = y(0) = 1/3 + c1 + c2 , c1 + c2 = 4/3, c1 = 3/4,

1 = y (0) = 1/2 2/3 + c1 c2 c1 c2 = 1/6 c2 = 7/12.
1 1 3 7
y() = sin e2 + e + e .
2 3 4 12
203
Chapter 4
31. For the nonhomogeneous term sin t + t cos t, a particular solution has the form
yp,1(t) = (A1 t + A0 )ts cos t + (B1 t + B0 )ts sin t.
For 10t = et ln 10 , a particular solution should be of the form
yp,2(t) = Ctp et ln 10 = Ctp 10t .
Since the roots of the auxiliary equation, r 2 + 1 = 0, are r = i, we choose s = 1 and p = 0.

Thus, by the superposition principle,
yp (t) = yp,1(t) + yp,2(t) = (A1 t + A0 )t cos t + (B1 t + B0 )t sin t + C 10t .
33. The roots of the auxiliary equation, which is r 2 r 2 = 0, are r = 1, 2. The right-hand
side of the given equation is a sum of two terms, et cos t and t2 + t + 1. Corresponding
particular solutions have the forms
yp,1(t) = (A cos t + B sin t)ts et and yp,2(t) = (C2 t2 + C1 t + C0 )tp ,
and we can take s = p = 0 since neither r = 1 + i nor r = 0 is a root of the auxiliary equation.
By the superposition principle,
yp (t) = (A cos t + B sin t)et + C2 t2 + C1 t + C0 .
35. Since the roots of the auxiliary equation are

4 16 20
r= = 2 i,
2
which are dierent from 5 and 3i, a particular solution has the form
yp (t) = (A1 t + A0 ) cos 3t + (B1 t + B0 ) sin 3t + Ce5t .
(The last term corresponds to e5t in the right-hand side of the original equation, and the first
two come from t sin 3t cos 3t.)
204
Exercises 4.5
37. Clearly, r = 0 is not a root of the auxiliary equation, r 3 2r 2 r + 2 = 0. (One can find
the roots, say, using the factorization r 3 2r 2 r + 2 = (r 2)(r 1)(r + 1), but they are
not needed for the form of a particular solution: the only important thing is that they are
dierent from zero.) Therefore, a particular solution has the form
yp (t) = A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 .
Substitution into the original equation yields
yp 2yp yp + 2yp = (0) 2(2A2 ) (2A2 t + A1 ) + 2(A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 )

= 2A2 t2 + (A1 2A2 )t + (A0 A1 4A2 ) = 2t2 + 4t 9.
Equating the coecients, we obtain
2A2 = 2, A2 = 1,
2A1 2A2 = 4, A1 = 3,
2A0 A1 4A2 = 9 A0 = 1.
Therefore, yp (t) = t2 + 3t 1.
39. The auxiliary equation in this problem is r 3 + r 2 2 = 0. By inspection, we see that r = 0 is

not a root. Next, we find that r = 1 is a simple root because
) 3 2
* 11 ) 3 2
* 11 ) 2 * 11
r +r 2 1 =0 and r +r 2 1 = 3r + 2r 1 = 0.
r=1 r=1 r=1
Therefore, by the superposition principle, a particular solution has the form
yp (t) = t(A1 t + A0 )et + B = (A1 t2 + A0 t)et + B.
Dierentiating, we get
- .
yp (t) = A1 t2 + (A0 + 2A1 )t + A0 et ,
- .
yp(t) = A1 t2 + (A0 + 4A1 )t + 2A0 + 2A1 et ,
- .
yp(t) = A1 t2 + (A0 + 6A1 )t + 3A0 + 6A1 et .
205
Chapter 4
We substitute yp and its derivatives into the original equation and equate the corresponding
coecients. This yields
/- . - .
A1 t2 + (A0 + 6A1 )t + 3A0 + 6A1 + A1 t2 + (A0 + 4A1 )t + 2A0 + 2A1
- .0
2 A1 t2 + A0 t et 2B = tet + 1
[10A1 t + 8A1 + 5A0 ] et 2B = tet + 1
10A1 = 1, A1 = 1/10,
8A1 + 5A0 = 0, A0 = 4/25,
2B = 1 B = 1/2.
Hence, a particular solution is

+ ,
1 4 1
yp (t) = t tet .
10 25 2
41. The characteristic equation in this problem is r 2 + 2r + 5 = 0, which has roots r = 1 2i.
Therefore, a general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is given by
yh (t) = (c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t) et . (4.1)
(a) For 0 t 3/2, g(t) 10, and so the equation becomes
y + 2y + 5y = 10.
Hence a particular solution has the form yp (t) A. Substitution into the equation yields
(A) + 2(A) + 5(A) = 10 5A = 10 A = 2,
and so, on [0, 3/2], a general solution to the original equation is
y1 (t) = (c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t) et + 2.
We find c1 and c2 by substituting this function into the initial conditions.
0 = y1 (0) = c1 + 2, c1 = 2,

0 = y1 (0) = c1 + 2c2 c2 = 1
t
y1 (t) = (2 cos 2t + sin 2t) e + 2.
206
Exercises 4.5
(b) For t > 3/2, g(t) 0, and so the given equation becomes homogeneous. Thus, a general
solution, y2 (t), is given by (4.1), i.e.,
y2 (t) = yh (t) = (c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t) et .
(c) We want to satisfy the conditions
y1 (3/2) = y2 (3/2),
y1 (3/2) = y2 (3/2).
Evaluating y1 , y2 , and their derivatives at t = 3/2, we solve the system

) *
2e3/2 + 2 = c1 e3/2 , c1 = 2 e3/2 + 1 ,
) *
0 = (c1 2c2 )e3/2 c2 = e3/2 + 1 .
43. Recall that the motion of a mass-spring system is governed by the equation
my + by + ky = g(t),
where m is the mass, b is the damping coecient, k is the spring constant, and g(t) is the
external force. Thus, we have an initial value problem
1
y + 4y + 3y = 5 sin t, y(0) = , y (0) = 0.
2
The roots of the auxiliary equation, r 2 + 4r + 3 = 0, are r = 3, 1, and a general solution
to the corresponding homogeneous equation is
yh (t) = c1 e3t + c2 et .
We look for a particular solution to the original equation of the form yp (t) = A cos t + B sin t.
Substituting this function into the equation, we get
yp + 4yp + 3yp = (A cos t B sin t) + 4(A sin t + B cos t) + 3(A cos t + B sin t)
= (2A + 4B) cos t + (2B 4A) sin t = 5 sin t
2A + 4B = 0, A = 1,

2B 4A = 5 B = 1/2.
207
Chapter 4
Thus, a general solution to the equation describing the motion is

1
y(t) = cos t + sin t + c1 e3t + c2 et .
2
Dierentiating, we find y (t) = sin t + (1/2) cos t 3c1 e3t c2 et . Initial conditions give
y(0) = 1 + c1 + c2 = 1/2, c1 = 1/2,

y (0) = 1/2 3c1 c2 = 0 c2 = 2.
Hence, the equation of motion is
1 1
y(t) = cos t + sin t e3t + 2et .
2 2
45. (a) With m = k = 1 and L = given initial value problem becomes

y(t) = 0, t ,
> 2V
cos V t, /(2V ) < t < /(2V ),
y + y =
0, t /(2V ) .
The corresponding homogeneous equation y + y = 0 is the simple harmonic equation

whose general solution is
yh (t) = C1 cos t + C2 sin t . (4.2)
First, we find the solution to the given problem for /(2V ) < t < /(2V ). The
nonhomogeneous term, cos V t, suggests a particular solution of the form
yp (t) = A cos V t + B sin V t.
Substituting yp (t) into the equation yields
(A cos V t + B sin V t) + (A cos V t + B sin V t) = cos V t

) *
V 2 A cos V t V 2 B sin V t + (A cos V t + B sin V t) = cos V t
) * ) *
1 V 2 A cos V t + 1 V 2 B sin V t = cos V t .
Equating coecients, we get

1
A= , B = 0,
1V2
208
Exercises 4.5
Thus a general solution on (/(2V ), /(2V )) is

1
y1 (t) = yh (t) + yp (t) = C1 cos t + C2 sin t + cos V t . (4.3)
1V2
Since y(t) 0 for t /(2V ), the initial conditions for the above solution are
# % # %
y1 = y1 = 0.
2V 2V
From (4.3) we obtain
# % # % # %
y1 = C1 cos + C2 sin =0
2V 2V 2V
# % # % # % V
y1 = C1 sin + C2 cos + = 0.
2V 2V 2V 1V2
Solving the system yields
V V
C1 = 2
sin , C2 = 2
cos ,
V 1 2V V 1 2V
and
V V 1
y1 (t) = sin
2
cos t + 2 cos sin t + cos V t
V 1 2V V 1 2V 1V2
V # % 1
= 2
sin t + 2 cos V t, <t< .
V 1 2V V 1 2V 2V
For t > /(2V ) given equation is homogeneous, and its general solution, y2 (t), is given
by (4.2). That is,
y2 (t) = C3 cos t + C4 sin t.
From the initial conditions

# % # %
y2 = y1 ,
2V
# % 2V
# %
y2 = y1 ,
2V 2V
we conclude that
V
C3 cos + C4 sin = 2 sin ,
2V 2V V 1 V
209
Chapter 4
|A(V )|
1.5
0.5
0.73
V
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Figure 4A: The graph of the function |A(V )|.
V V 2V
C3 sin + C4 cos = 2 cos + 2 = 2 cos2 .
2V 2V V 1 V V 1 V 1 2V
The solution of this system is
2V
C3 = 0, C4 = 2
cos .
V 1 2V
So,
2V
y2 (t) = 2
cos sin t.
V 1 2V
(b) The graph of the function 1 1
1 2V 1
|A(V )| = 11 2 cos 1
V 1 2V 1
is given in Figure 4-A. From this graph, we find that the most violent shaking of the
vehicle (the maximum of |A(V )|) happens when the speed V 0.73 .
47. The auxiliary equation in this problem is r 2 + 9 = 0 with roots r = 3i. So, a general solution
yh = c1 cos 3t + c2 sin 3t.
The form of a particular solution, corresponding to the right-hand side, is
yp (t) = A cos 6t + B sin 6t.
210
Exercises 4.6
27(A cos 6t + B sin 6t) = 27 cos 6t A = 1, B = 0 yp (t) = cos 6t.
Therefore, a general solution has the form
y(t) = c1 cos 3t + c2 sin 3t cos 6t.
In (a)(c), we have the same boundary condition at t = 0, that is, y(0) = 1. This yields
1 = y(0) = c1 1 c1 = 0.
Hence, all the solutions satisfying this condition are given by
y(t) = c2 sin 3t cos 6t. (4.4)
(a) The second boundary condition gives 3 = y (/6) = c2 + 1 c2 = 2, and the answer
is y = 2 sin 3t cos 6t.
(b) This time we have 5 = y (/3) = c2 0 1 5 = 1, and so there is no solution of

the form (4.4) satisfying this second boundary condition.
(c) Now we have 1 = y (/3) = c2 0 1 1 = 1, which is a true identity. This

means that any function in (4.4) satisfies both boundary conditions.
EXERCISES 4.6: Variation of Parameters, page 197
1. The auxiliary equation in this problem is r 2 + 4 = 0, which has the roots r = 2i. Therefore,
y1 (t) = cos 2t and y2 (t) = sin 2t are two linearly independent solutions, and a general solution
to the corresponding homogeneous equation is given by
yh (t) = c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t.
Using the variation of parameters method, we look for a particular solution to the original
nonhomogeneous equation of the form
yp (t) = v1 (t)y1 (t) + v2 (t)y2 (t) = v1 (t) cos 2t + v2 (t) sin 2t.
211
Chapter 4
The system (9) on page 195 in the text becomes
v1 (t) cos 2t + v2 (t) sin 2t = 0

(4.5)
2v1 (t) sin 2t + 2v2 (t) cos 2t = tan 2t.
Multiplying the first equation in (4.5) by sin 2t, the second equation by (1/2) cos 2t, and adding
the resulting equations together, we get
3
1 1 1
v2 (t) = sin 2t v2 = sin 2t dt = cos 2t + c3 .
2 2 4
From the first equation in (4.5) we also obtain
1 sin2 2t 1 1 cos2 2t 1
v1 (t) = v2 (t) tan 2t = = = (cos 2t sec 2t)
3 2 cos 2t 2 cos 2t 2
1 1
v1 (t) = (cos 2t sec 2t) dt = (sin 2t ln | sec 2t + tan 2t|) + c4 .
2 4
We take c3 = c4 = 0 since we need just one particular solution. Thus
1 1
yp (t) = (sin 2t ln | sec 2t + tan 2t|) cos 2t cos 2t sin 2t
4 4
1
= cos 2t ln | sec 2t + tan 2t|
4
and a general solution to the given equation is
1
y(t) = yh (t) + yp (t) = c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t cos 2t ln | sec 2t + tan 2t|.
4
2. From Example 1 on page 196 in the text, we know that functions y1 (t) = cos t and y2 (t) = sin t
are two linearly independent solutions to the corresponding homogeneous equation, and so its
general solution is given by
yh (t) = c1 cos t + c2 sin t.
Now we apply the method of variation of parameters to find a particular solution to the
original equation. By the formula (3) on page 194 in the text, yp (t) has the form
yp (t) = v1 (t)y1 (t) + v2 (t)y2 (t).
212
Exercises 4.6
Since
y1 (t) = (cos t) = sin t, y2 (t) = (sin t) = cos t,
the system (9) on page 195 becomes
v1 (t) cos t + v2 (t) sin t = 0,

(4.6)
v1 (t) sin t + v2 (t) cos t = sec t.
Multiplying the first equation by sin t and the second equation by cos t yields
v1 (t) sin t cos t + v2 (t) sin2 t = 0,

v1 (t) sin t cos t + v2 (t) cos2 t = 1.
Adding these equations together, we obtain

) *
v2 (t) cos2 t + sin2 t = 1 or v2 (t) = 1.
From the first equation in (4.6), we can now find v1 (t):
sin t
v1 (t) = v2 (t) = tan t.
cos t
So,
?
v1 (t) = tan t, v1 (t) = tan t dt = ln | cos t| + c3 ,
?
v2 (t) = 1 v2 (t) = dt = t + c4 .
Since we are looking for a particular solution, we can take c3 = c4 = 0 and get
yp (t) = cos t ln | cos t| + t sin t.
Thus a general solution to the given equation is
y(t) = yp (t) + yh (t) = cos t ln | cos t| + t sin t + c1 cos t + c2 sin t.
3. First, we can simplify the equation by dividing both sides by 2. This yields
x x 2x = e3t .
213
Chapter 4
This equation has associated homogeneous equation x x 2x = 0. The roots of the

associated auxiliary equation, r 2 r 2 = 0, are r = 2 and r = 1. Therefore, a general
solution to this equation is
xh (t) = c1 e2t + c2 et .
For the variation of parameters method, we let
xp (t) = v1 (t)x1 (t) + v2 (t)x2 (t) , where x1 (t) = e2t and x2 (t) = et .
Thus, x1 (t) = 2e2t and x2 (t) = et . This means that we have to solve the system
e2t v1 + et v2 = 0,
2e2t v1 et v2 = e3t .
Adding these two equations yields

1 t 1 t
3e2t v1 = e3t v1 = e v1 (t) = e .
3 3
Substututing v1 into the first equation, we get
1 3t 1 1 4t
e + et v2 = 0 v2 = e4t v2 (t) = e .
3 3 12
Therefore,
1 t 2t 1 4t t 1 3t
xp (t) = ee e e = e ,
3 12 4
1 3t
x(t) = c1 e2t + c2 et + e .
4
5. This equation has associated homogeneous equation y 2y + y = 0. Its auxiliary equation,
r 2 2r + 1 = 0, has a double root r = 1. Thus a general solution to the homogeneous equation
is
yh (t) = c1 et + c2 tet .
For the variation of parameters method, we let
yp (t) = v1 (t)y1 (t) + v2 (t)y2 (t) , where y1 (t) = et and y2 (t) = tet .
214
Exercises 4.6
Thus, y1 (t) = et and y2 (t) = tet + et . This means that we want to solve the system (see
system (9) on page 195 of text)
et v1 + tet v2 = 0,
) *
et v1 + tet + et v2 = t1 et .
Subtracting these two equations yields
et v2 = t1 et v2 = t1 .
So
3
v2 (t) = t1 dt = ln |t| + c3 .
Also, we have from the first equation of the system
et v1 = tet v2 = tet t1 = et v1 = 1.
So,
v1 (t) = t + c4 .
By letting c3 and c4 equal to zero, and plugging the expressions found above for v1 (t) and
v2 (t) into the equation defining yp (t) , we obtain a particular solution
yp (t) = tet + tet ln |t|.
We obtain a general solution of the nonhomogeneous equation by adding this expression for
yp (t) to the expression for yh (t). Thus, we obtain
y(t) = c1 et + c2 tet tet + tet ln |t| = c1 et + (c2 1)tet + tet ln |t|.
If we let C1 = c1 and C2 = c2 1, we can express this general solution in the form
y(t) = C1 et + C2 tet + tet ln |t|.
215
Chapter 4
7. The auxiliary equation in this problem is r 2 + 16 = 0, which has the roots r = 4i. Therefore,
y1 () = cos 4 and y2 () = sin 4 are two linearly independent solutions, and a general solution
to the corresponding homogeneous equation is given by
yh () = c1 cos 4 + c2 sin 4.
Using the variation of parameters method, we look for a particular solution to the original
nonhomogeneous equation of the form
yp () = v1 ()y1 () + v2 ()y2 () = v1 () cos 4 + v2 () sin 4.
The system (9) on page 195 in the text becomes
v1 () cos 4 + v2 () sin 4 = 0,
(4.7)
4v1 () sin 4 + 4v2 () cos 4 = sec 4.
Multiplying the first equation in (4.7) by sin 4 and the second equation by (1/4) cos 4, and
adding the resulting equations together, we get
1 1
v2 () = v2 = + c3 .
4 4
From the first equation in (4.7) we also obtain
3
1 1 1
v1 () = tan 4 v1 () = tan 4 d = ln | cos 4| + c4 .
4 4 16
Taking c3 = c4 = 0, we obtain
cos 4 1
yp () = ln | cos 4| + sin 4
16 4
cos 4
y() = c1 cos 4 + c2 sin 4 + sin 4 + ln | cos 4|.
4 16
9. In this problem, the corresponding homogeneous equation is the same as that in Problem 1.
Hence y1 (t) = cos 2t and y2 (t) = sin 2t are two linearly independent solutions, and a general
solution to the homogeneous equation is given by
yh (t) = c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t,
216
Exercises 4.6
and, in the variation of parameters method, a particular solution has the form
yp (t) = v1 (t) cos 2t + v2 (t) sin 2t,
where v1 (t), v2 (t) satisfy the system
v1 (t) cos 2t + v2 (t) sin 2t = 0,

2v1 (t) sin 2t + 2v2 (t) cos 2t = csc2 2t.
Multiplying the first equation by sin 2t and the second equation by (1/2) cos 2t, and adding
the resulting equations, we get
3
1 1 1
v2 (t) = csc2 2t cos 2t v2 = csc2 2t cos 2t dt = csc 2t + c3 .
2 2 4
From the first equation in the system above we also find
1 1
v1 (t) = v2 (t) tan 2t = csc2 2t cos 2t tan 2t = csc 2t
3 2 2
1 1
v1 (t) = csc 2t dt = ln | csc 2t + cot 2t| + c4 .
2 4
With c3 = c4 = 0,
1 1 1
yp (t) = cos 2t ln | csc 2t + cot 2t| csc 2t sin 2t = (cos 2t ln | csc 2t + cot 2t| 1)
4 4 4
1
y(t) = c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t + (cos 2t ln | csc 2t + cot 2t| 1) .
4
11. This equation is similar to that in Example 1 on page 196 in the text. Only the nonhomoge-
neous term is dierent. Thus we will follow steps in Example 1. Two independent solutions
to the corresponding homogeneous equation, y + y = 0, are y1 (t) = cos t and y2 (t) = sin t. A
particular solution to the original equation is of the form
yp (t) = v1 (t) cos t + v2 (t) sin t,
where v1 (t) and v2 (t) satisfy
v1 (t) cos t + v2 (t) sin t = 0,

v1 (t) sin t + v2 (t) cos t = tan2 t.
217
Chapter 4
Multiplying the first equation by sin t and the second equation by cos t, and adding them
together yield
v2 (t) = tan2 t cos t = (sec2 t 1) cos t = sec t cos t.
We find v1 (t) from the first equation in the system.

sin t
v1 (t) = v2 (t) tan t = (sec t cos t) tan t = sin t .
cos2 t
Integrating, we get
3 + ,
sin t
v1 (t) = sin t dt = cos t sec t,
cos2 t
3
v2 (t) = (sec t cos t) dt = ln | sec t + tan t| sin t,
where we have taken zero integration constants. Therefore,
yp (t) = (cos t + sec t) cos t + (ln | sec t + tan t| sin t) sin t = sin t ln | sec t + tan t| 2,
y(t) = c1 cos t + c2 sin t + sin t ln | sec t + tan t| 2.
13. The corresponding homogeneous equation in this problem is the same as that in Problem 1
(with y replaced by v). Similarly to the solution of Problem 1, we conclude that v1 (t) = cos 2t
and v2 (t) = sin 2t are two linearly independent solutions of the corresponding homogeneous
equation, and a particular solution to the original equation can be found as
vp (t) = u1 (t) cos 2t + u2 (t) sin 2t ,
where u1 (t) and u2 (t) satisfy
u1 (t) cos 2t + u2 (t) sin 2t = 0,

2u1 (t) sin 2t + 2u2(t) cos 2t = sec4 2t.
Multiplying the first equation by sin 2t and the second equation by (1/2) cos 2t, and adding
the results together, we get
1
u2 (t) = sec3 2t.
2
218
Exercises 4.6
From the first equation in the above system we also obtain

1
u1 (t) = u2 (t) tan 2t = sec4 2t sin 2t .
2
Integrating yields
3 3
1 1 1
u1 (t) = 4
sec 2t sin 2t dt = cos4 2t sin 2t dt = sec3 2t,
2 2 12
3
1 1
u2 (t) = sec3 2t dt = (sec 2t tan 2t + ln | sec 2t + tan 2t|).
2 8
Thus,
1 1
vp (t) = sec3 2t cos 2t + (sec 2t tan 2t + ln | sec 2t + tan 2t|) sin 2t
12 8
1 2 1 2 1
= sec 2t + tan 2t + sin 2t ln | sec 2t + tan 2t|
12 8 8
1 2 1 1
= sec 2t + sin 2t ln | sec 2t + tan 2t|,
24 8 8
and a general solution to the given equation is
1 1 1
v(t) = c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t + sec2 2t + sin 2t ln | sec 2t + tan 2t|.
24 8 8
15. The corresponding homogeneous equation is y + y = 0. Its auxiliary equation has the roots
r = i. Hence, a general solution to the homogeneous problem is given by
yh (t) = c1 cos t + c2 sin t.
We will find a particular solution to the original equation by first finding a particular solution
for each of two problems, one with the nonhomogeneous term g1 (t) = 3 sec t and the other one
with the nonhomogeneous term g2 (t) = t2 + 1. Then we will use the superposition principle
to obtain a particular solution for the original equation. The term 3 sec t is not in a form that
allows us to use the method of undetermined coecients. Therefore, we will use the method of
variation of parameters. To this end, let y1 (t) = cos t and y2 (t) = sin t (linearly independent
solutions to the corresponding homogeneous problem). Then a particular solution yp,1 to
y + y = 3 sec t has the form
yp,1(t) = v1 (t)y1 (t) + v2 (t)y2 (t) = v1 (t) cos t + v2 (t) sin t,
219
Chapter 4
where v1 (t) and v2 (t) are determined by the system
v1 cos t + v2 sin t = 0,
v1 sin t + v2 cos t = 3 sec t.
Multiplying the first equation by cos t and the second equation by sin t and subtracting the
results, we get
v1 = 3 sec t sin t = 3 tan t.
Hence 3
v1 (t) = 3 tan t dt = 3 ln | cos t| + C1 .
To find v2 (t), we multiply the first equation of the above system by sin t, the second by cos t,
and add the results to obtain
v2 = 3 sec t cos t = 3 v2 (t) = 3t + C2 .
Therefore, for this first equation (with g1 (t) = 3 sec t), by letting C1 = C2 = 0, we have a
particular solution given by
yp,1(t) = 3 cos t ln | cos t| + 3t sin t.
The nonhomogeneous term g2 (t) = t2 + 1 is of a form that allows us to use the method of
undetermined coecients. Thus, a particular solution to this nonhomogeneous equation will
have the form

yp,2(t) = A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 yp,2 (t) = 2A2 t + A1 yp,2 (t) = 2A2 .
Plugging these expressions into the equation y + y = t2 + 1 yields

yp,2 + yp,2 = 2A2 + A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 = A2 t2 + A1 t + (2A2 + A0 ) = t2 + 1.
By equating coecients, we obtain
A2 = 1, A1 = 0, 2A2 + A0 = 1 A0 = 3.
220
Exercises 4.6
Therefore, we have
yp,2(t) = t2 + 3.
By the superposition principle, we see that a particular solution to the original problem is
given by
yp (t) = yp,1(t) + yp,2 (t) = 3 cos t ln | cos t| + 3t sin t t2 + 3.
Combining this solution with the general solution to the homogeneous equation yields a general
solution to the original dierential equation,
y(t) = c1 cos t + c2 sin t t2 + 3 + 3t sin t + 3 cos t ln | cos t|.
17. Multiplying the given equation by 2, we get
y + 4y = 2 tan 2t et .
The nonhomogeneous term, 2 tan 2t et , can be written as a linear combination 2g1 (t) g2 (t),
where g1 (t) = tan 2t and g2 (t) = et . A particular solution to the equation
y + 4y = tan 2t
is found in Problem 1, that is,

1
yp,1(t) = cos 2t ln | sec 2t + tan 2t|.
4
A particular solution to
y + 4y = et
can be found using the method of undetermined coecients. We look for yp,2 of the form
yp,2(t) = Aet . Substitution yields
) t * ) * 1
Ae + 4 Aet = et 5Aet = et A= ,
5
and so yp,2 = (1/5)et . By the superposition principle, a particular solution to the original
equation is
1 1
yp (t) = 2yp,1 yp,2 = cos 2t ln | sec 2t + tan 2t| et .
2 5
221
Chapter 4
Adding a general solution to the homogeneous equation, we get

1 1
y(t) = c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t cos 2t ln | sec 2t + tan 2t| et .
2 5
19. A general solution of the corresponding homogeneous equation is given by
yh (t) = c1 et + c2 et .
We will try to find a particular solution to the original nonhomogeneous equation of the form
yp (t) = v1 (t)y1 (t) + v2 (t)y2 (t), where y1 (t) = et and y2 (t) = et . We apply formulas (10) on
page 195 in the text, but replace indefinite integrals by definite integrals. Note that
) *
y1 (t)y2 (t) y1 (t)y2 (t) = ex ex ex ex = 2.
With g(t) = 1/t and integration from 1 to t, formulas (10) yield

3t 3t
g(x)y2 (x) 1 ex
v1 (t) = dx = dx ,
2 2 x
1 1
3t 3t
g(x)y1 (x) 1 ex
v2 (t) = dx = dx .
2 2 x
1 1
(Notice that we have chosen the lower limit of integration to be equal to 1 because the initial
conditions are given at 1. We could have chosen any other value for the lower limit, but the
choice of 1 will make the determination of the constants c1 and c2 easier.) Thus
3t 3t
et ex et ex
yp (t) = dx dx ,
2 x 2 x
1 1
and so a general solution to the original dierential equation is

3t 3t
t et
t ex et ex
y(t) = c1 e + c2 e + dx dx .
2 x 2 x
1 1
By plugging in the first initial condition (and using the fact that the integral of a function
from a to a is zero which is why we have chosen the lower limit of integration to be the initial
point, t = 1), we find that
y(1) = c1 e1 + c2 e1 = 0.
222
Exercises 4.6
Dierentiating y(t) yields

3t + t , + t , 3t x + t , + t ,
t t et ex e e et e e e
y (t) = c1 e + c2 e + dx + + dx ,
2 x 2 t 2 x 2 t
1 1
where we have used the product rule and the fundamental theorem of calculus to dierentiate
the last two terms of y(t). We now plug in the second initial condition into the equation we
just found for y (t) to obtain
+ 1 , + 1 , + 1 , + 1 ,
1 e e e e 1 1
y (1) = c1 e + c2 e + 1
+ = c1 e1 + c2 e1 + = 2.
2 1 2 1 2 2
Solving the system
c1 e1 + c2 e1 = 0,
c1 e1 + c2 e1 = 2
yields c2 = e1 and c1 = e1 . Therefore, the solution to our problem is given by

3t 3t
1t t1 et ex et ex
y(t) = e e + dx dx . (4.8)
2 x 2 x
1 1
Simpsons rule is implemented on the software package provided free with the text (see also
the discussion of the solution to Problem 25 in Exercises 2.3). Simpsons rule requires an even
number of intervals, but we dont know how many are required to obtain the 2-place accuracy
desired. We will compute the approximate value of y(t) at t = 2 using 2, 4, 6, . . . intervals
for Simpsons rule until the approximate value changes by less than five in the third place.
For n = 2, we divide [1, 2] into 4 equal subintervals. Thus each interval will be of length
(2 1)/4 = 1/4. Therefore the integrals are approximated by
32 4 5
ex 1 e1 e1.25 e1.5 e1.75 e2
dx +4 +2 +4 + 3.0592 ,
x 12 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
1
32 4 5
ex 1 e1 e1.25 e1.5 e1.75 e2
dx +4 +2 +4 + 0.1706 .
x 12 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2
1
223
Chapter 4
Substituting these values into equation (4.8) we obtain
12 21 e2 e2
y(2) e e (3.0592) + (0.1706) = 1.9271 .
2 2
Repeating these calculations for n = 3, 4, and 5 yields the approximations in Table 4-A.
Table 4A: Successive approximations for y(2) using Simpsons rule.
Intervals y(2)
6 1.9275
8 1.9275
10 1.9275
Since these values do not change in the third place, we can expect that the first three places
are accurate and we obtained an approximate solution of y(2) = 1.93 .
21. A particular solution to the given equation has the form
yp (t) = v1 (t)y1 (t) + v2 (t)y2 (t) = v1 (t)et + v2 (t)(t + 1).
Since y1 (t) = et , y2 (t) 1, the system (9), with a = a(t) = t and g(t) = t2 , becomes
v1 (t)et + v2 (t)(t + 1) = 0,
t t2
v1 (t)e + v2 (t) = = t.
t
Subtracting the second equation from the first one, we get
tv2 (t) = t v2 (t) = 1 v2 (t) = t.
Substituting v2 (t) into the first equation yields
v1 (t)et (t + 1) = 0 v1 (t) = (t + 1)et

3 3
v1 (t) = (t + 1)e dt = (t + 1)e + et dt = (t + 2)et .
t t
224
Exercises 4.6
Thus
yp (t) = (t + 2)et et t(t + 1) = t2 2t 2.
(Note that 2t 2 = 2(t + 1) = 2y2 (t) is a solution to the corresponding homogeneous

equation. Thus, t2 = yp (t) + 2y2 (t) is another particular solution.)
23. We are seeking for a particular solution to the given equation of the form
yp (t) = v1 (t)y1 (t) + v2 (t)y2 (t) = v1 (t)(5t 1) + v2 (t)e5t .
Since y1 (t) 5, y2 (t) = 5e5t , the system (9), with a = a(t) = t and g(t) = t2 e5t , becomes
v1 (t)(5t 1) + v2 (t)e5t = 0,
t2 e5t
5v1 (t) 5v2 (t)e5t = = te5t .
t
Dividing the second equation by 5 and adding to the first equation yields
1 5t 1 5t 1 5t
5tv1 (t) = te v1 (t) = e v1 (t) = e .
5 25 125
Substituting v1 (t) into the first equation, we get
1 5t 5t 1 t2 t
e (5t 1) + v2 (t)e5t = 0 v2 (t) = v2 (t) = + .
25 25 10 25
Thus + 2 , + ,
1 5t t t 5t 1 t2
yp (t) = e (5t 1) + + e = e5t .
125 10 25 125 10
(Since (1/125)e5t = (1/125)y2(t) is a solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation,
the function (t2 /10)e5t is also a particular solution.)
25. A general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is
yh (x) = c1 y1 (x) + c2 y2 (x) = x1/2 (c1 cos x + c2 sin x) .
To find a particular solution to the original equation, we apply the method of variation of
parameters. To form the system (9) on page 195, we need y1 and y2 . Applying the product
rule, we get
1
y1 (x) = x3/2 cos x x1/2 sin x,
2
225
Chapter 4
1
y2 (x) = x3/2 sin x + x1/2 cos x.
2
Thus, functions v1 (x) and v2 (x) in a particular solution,
yp (x) = v1 (x)y1 (x) + v2 (x)y2 (x),
satisfy the system
v1 x1/2 cos x + v2 x1/2 sin x = 0,

+ , + ,
1 3/2 1/2 1 3/2 1/2 x5/2
v1 x cos x x sin x + v2 x sin x + x cos x = 2 = x1/2 .
2 2 x
From the first equation, we express v1 = v2 tan x and substitute this expression into the
second equation. After some algebra, the result simplifies to
v2 = x cos x v1 = v2 tan x = x sin x.
Integrating, we get
3
v1 (x) = x sin x dx = x cos x sin x + C1 ,
3
v2 (x) = x cos x dx = x sin x + cos x + C2 .
With C1 = C2 = 0,
yp (x) = (x cos x sin x)x1/2 cos x + (x sin x + cos x)x1/2 sin x = x1/2 .
Therefore, a general solution to the given nonhomogeneous Bessel equation is
y(t) = x1/2 + x1/2 (c1 cos x + c2 sin x) .
EXERCISES 4.7: Qualitative Considerations for Variable-Coecient and Nonlinear

Equations, page 208
1. Let Y (t) := y(t). Then, using the chain rule, we get

dY d(t)
= y (t) = y (t),
dt dt
226
Exercises 4.7
d2 Y d[y (t)] d(t)

2
= = y (t) = y (t).
dt dt dt
Therefore, denoting t = s, we obtain
Y (t) + tY (t) = y (t) + ty(t) = y (s) sy(s) = 0.
2. Comparing the given equation with (13) on page 202 in the text, we conclude that
inertia m = 1, damping b = 0, stiness k = 6y.
For y > 0, the stiness k is negative, and it tends to reinforce the displacement. So, we
should expect that the solutions y(t) grow without bound.
3. As in Problem 2, this equation describes the motion of the mass-spring system with unit
mass, no damping, and stiness k = 6y. The initial displacement y(0) = 1 is negative
as well as the initial velocity y (0) = 1. So, starting from t = 0, y(t) will decrease for a
while. This will result increasing positive stiness, 6y, i.e., the spring will become stier
and stier. Eventually, the spring will become so strong that the mass will stop and then
go in the positive direction. While y(t) is negative, the positive stiness will force the mass
to approach zero displacement point, y = 0. Thereafter, with y(t) > 0, the stiness becomes
negative, which means that the spring itself will push the mass further away from y = 0 in
the positive direction with force, which increases with y. Thus, the curve y(t) will increase
unboundedly. Figure 4.23 confirms our prediction.
5. (a) Comparing the equation y = 2y 3 with equation (7) in Lemma 3, we conclude that
f (y) = 2y 3 , and so 3
1 4
F (y) = 2y 3 dy =
y + C,
2
where C is a constant. We can choose any particular value for C, say, C = 0. Thus
F (y) = (1/2)y 4. Next, with constant K = 0 and sign in front of the integral,
equation (11) on page 201, becomes
3 3
dy
t= $ = y 2 dy = y 1 + c,
2(1/2)y 4
227
Chapter 4
or, equivalently,
1
y= ,
tc
where c is an arbitrary constant.
(b) A linear combination of y1 (t) := 1/(t c1 ) and y2 (t) := 1/(t c2 ),
C1 C2 (C1 + C2 )t (C1 c2 + C2 c1 )
C1 y1 (t) + C2 y2 (t) = + = ,
t c1 t c2 (t c1 )(t c2 )
is identically zero in a neighborhood of t = 0 if and only if (C1 + C2 )t(C1 c2 + C2 c1 ) 0.

Thus the numerator must be the zero polynomial, i.e., C1 and C2 must satisfy
C1 + C2 = 0, C2 = C1 ,

C 1 c2 + C 2 c1 = 0 C1 (c2 c1 ) = 0.
Since c1 = c2 , the second equation implies that C1 = 0, and then C2 = 0 from the first
equation. Thus, only the trivial linear combination of y1 (t) and y2 (t) vanishes identically
around the origin, and so these functions are linearly independent.
(c) For any function of the form yc (t) := 1/(t c), the equality
1
yc (t) = = [yc (t)]2
(t c)2
holds for all t = c. In particular, at t = 0,
yc (0) = [yc (0)]2 .
(We assume that c = 0; otherwise, t = 0 is not in the domain.) Obviously, this equality
fails for any positive initial velocity y (0), in particular, it is false for given data, y(0) = 1
and y (0) = 2.
6. Rewriting given equation in the equivalent form y = (k/m)y, we see that the function f (y)
in the energy integral lemma is (k/m)y. So,
3 + ,
k k 2
F (y) = y dy = y + C.
m 2m
228
Exercises 4.7
With C = 0, F (y) = [k/(2m)]y 2 , and the energy

+ ,
1 2 1 2 k 2 1 2 k 2
E(t) = [y (t)] F [y(t)] = [y (t)] y = [y (t)] + y .
2 2 2m 2 2m
By the energy integral lemma,
1 2 k 2
[y (t)] + y = const.
2 2m
Multiplying both sides by 2m, we get the stated equation.
7. (a) Since, for a point moving along a circle of radius , the magnitude v of its linear velocity
v and the angular velocity = d/dt are connected by v = = (d/dt), and the vector
v is tangent to the circle (and so, perpendicular to the radius), we have
d d
angular momentum = mv = m = m2 .
dt dt
(b) From Figure 4.18, we see that the component of the gravitational force, mg, which is
perpendicular to the level arm, has the magnitude |mg sin | and is directed towards
decreasing . Thus,
torque = (mg sin ) = mg sin .
(c) According to the Newtons law of rotational motion,

+ ,
d d 2 d
torque = (angular momentum) mg sin = m
dt dt dt
d2 d2 g
mg sin = m2 2 + sin = 0.
dt dt2
9. According to Problem 8, with = g, the function (t) satisfies the identity
( )2
cos = C = const. (4.9)
2
Our first purpose is to determine the constant C. Let ta denote the moment when pendulum is
in the apex point, i.e., (ta ) = . Since it doesnt cross the apex over, we also have (ta ) = 0.
Substituting these two values into (4.9), we obtain
02
cos = C C = 1.
2
229
Chapter 4
Thus (4.9) becomes

( )2
cos = 1.
2
In particular, at the initial moment, t = 0,
[ (0)]2
cos[(0)] = 1.
2
Since (0) = 0, we get
[ (0)]2 2
cos 0 = 1 [ (0)] = 4
2
(0) = 2 or (0) = 2.
11. The damping coecient in the Rayleigh equation is b = (y )2 1. Thus, for low velocities
y , we have b < 0, and b > 0 for high velocities. Therefore, the low velocities are boosted,
while high velocities are slowed, and so one should expect a limit cycle.
13. Qualitative features of solutions to Airy, Dung, and van der Pol equations, are discussed
after Example 3, in Examples 6 and 7, respectively. Comparing curves in Figure 4.26 with
graphs depicted in Figures 4.13, 4.16, and 4.17, we conclude that the answers are
(a) Airy;
(b) Dung;
(c) van der Pol.
15. (a) Yes, because the stiness t2 is positive and no damping.
(b) No, because of the negative stiness t2 .
(c) Writing y + y 5 = y + (y 4 )y, we conclude that the mass-spring model, corresponding to

this equation, has positive stiness y 4 and no damping. Thus the answer is yes.
(d) Here, the stiness is y 5 , which is negative for y < 0. So, no.
(e) Yes, because the stiness 4 + 2 cos t 2 > 0 and no damping.
(f) Since both the damping t and the stiness 1 are positive, all solutions are bounded.
230
Exercises 4.7
(g) No, because the stiness, 1, is negative.
17. For the radius, r(t), we have the initial value problem
r (t) = GMr 2 , r(0) = a, r (0) = 0.
Thus, in the energy integral lemma, f (r) = GMr 2 . Since

3 3
) *
f (r)dr = GMr 2 dr = GMR1 + C,
we can take F (r) = GMR1 , and the energy integral lemma yields
1 2 GM
[r (t)] = C1 = const.
2 r(t)
To find the constant C1 , we use the initial conditions.
1 2 GM 1 GM GM
C1 = [r (0)] = 02 = .
2 r(0) 2 a a
Therefore, r(t) satisfies

! !
1 2 GM GM 1 2 GM GM 2GM ar
[r (t)] = (r ) = r = .
2 r(t) a 2 r a a r
(Remember, r(t) is decreasing, and so r (t) < 0.) Separating variables and integrating, we get
3 ! 3 J ! K J ! $ K !
r 2GM r r(a r) 2GM
dr = dt a arctan = t+C2 .
ar a ar a a
We apply the initial condition, r(0) = a, once again to find the constant C2 . But this time
we have to be careful because the argument of arctan function becomes infinite at r = a.
So, we take the limit of both sides rather than making simple substitution.
J " $ K
r(t) r(t)[a r(t)]
lim a arctan
t+0 a r(t) a
J " $ K
r(t) r(t)[a r(t)] # %
= a lim arctan lim =a 0 =a ,
t+0 a r(t) t+0 a 2 2
231
Chapter 4
and, in the right-hand side,

J ! K !
2GM 2GM
lim t + C2 = 0 + C2 = C2 .
t+0 a a
Thus C2 = a/2 and r(t) satisfies

J " $ K !
r(t) r(t)[a r(t)] 2GM a
a arctan = t+ .
a r(t) a a 2
At the moment t = T0 , when Earth splashes into the sun, we have r(T0 ) = 0. Substituting
this condition into the last equation yields
J ! $ K !
0 0(a 0) 2GM a
a arctan = T0 +
a0 a a 2
!
2GM a
0= T0 +
a 2
! !
a a a3
T0 = = .
2 2GM 2 2 GM
Then the required ratio is
! !
T0 a3 N a3 1
= 2 = .
T 2 2 GM GM 4 2
EXERCISES 4.8: A Closer Look at Free Mechanical Vibrations, page 219
1. In this problem, we have undamped free vibration case governed by equation (2) on page 210
in the text. With m = 3 and k = 48, the equation becomes
3y + 48y = 0 (4.10)
with the initial conditions y(0) = 0.5, y (0) = 2.
The angular velocity of the motion is

! !
k 48
= = = 4.
m 3
232
Exercises 4.8
It follows that
2 2
period = = = ,
4 2
2
natural frequency = = .
2
A general solution to (4.10), given in (4) on page 211 in the text, becomes
y(t) = C1 cos t + C2 sin t = C1 cos 4t + C2 sin 4t.
We find C1 and C2 from the initial conditions.

1
y(0) = (C1 cos 4t + C2 sin 4t) 1t=0 = C1 = 1/2 , C1 = 1/2,
1
y (0) = (4C1 sin 4t + 4C2 cos 4t) 1 = 4C2 = 2
t=0
C2 = 1/2.

#
1 1 2 %
y(t) = cos 4t + sin 4t = sin 4t ,
2 2 2 4
where we have used formulas (6) rewriting the solution in form (5), page 211 in the text. The

amplitude of the motion therefore is 2/2.
Setting y = 0 in the above solution, we find values of t when the mass passes through the
point of equilibrium.
#
2 %
sin 4t =0 4t = n, n = 0, 1, . . . .
2 4 4
(Time t is nonnegative.) The first moment when this happens, i.e., the smallest value of t,
corresponds to n = 0. So,

4t =0 t= .
4 16
3. The characteristic equation in this problem, r 2 + br + 16 = 0, has the roots

b b2 64
r= . (4.11)
2
Substituting given particular values of b into (4.11), we find roots of the characteristic equation
and solutions to the initial value problems in each case.
233
Chapter 4
b = 00.
64
r= = 4i.
2
A general solution has the form y = C1 cos 4t + C2 sin 4t. Constants C1 and C2 can be
found from the initial conditions.
1
y(0) = (C1 cos 4t + C2 sin 4t) 1t=0 = C1 = 1 , C1 = 1,
1
y (0) = (4C1 sin 4t + 4C2 cos 4t) 1t=0 = 4C2 = 0 C2 = 0
and so y(t) = cos 4t.
b = 66.
36 64
6
r= = 3 7i.
2

A general solution has the form y = (C1 cos 7t + C2 sin 7t)e3t . For constants C1 and
C2 , we have the system
) * 1
y(0) = C1 cos 7t + C2 sin 7t e3t 1t=0 = C1 = 1 ,
- . 1
y (0) = ( 7C2 3C1 ) cos 7t ( 7C1 + 3C2 ) sin 7t e3t 1t=0 = 7C2 3C1 = 0
C1 = 1,

C2 = 3/ 7 ,
and so 4 5
3 4 # %
y(t) = cos 7t + sin 7t e3t = e3t sin 7t + ,
7 7

where = arctan( 7/3) 0.723 .
b = 88.
8 64 64
r= = 4.
2
Thus, r = 4 is a double root of the characteristic equation. So, a general solution has
the form y = (C1 t + C0 )e4t . For constants C1 and C2 , we obtain the system
1
y(0) = (C1 t + C0 ) e4t 1t=0 = C0 = 1 , C0 = 1,
1
y (0) = (4C1 t 4C0 + C1 ) e4t 1t=0 = C1 4C0 = 0 C1 = 4,
and so y(t) = (4t + 1)e4t .
234
Exercises 4.8
b = 10
10.
10
100 64
r= = 5 3.
2
Thus, r = 2, 8, and a general solution is given by y = C1 e2t + C2 e8t . Initial
conditions yield
1
y(0) = (C1 e2t + C2 e8t ) 1t=0 = C1 + C2 = 1 , C1 = 4/3,
1
y (0) = (2C1 e2t 8C2 e8t ) 1t=0 = 2C1 8C2 = 0 C2 = 1/3,
and, therefore, y(t) = (4/3)e2t (1/3)e8t is the solution to the initial value problem.
The graphs of the solutions are depicted in Figures B.19B.22 in the answers in the text.
5. The auxiliary equation associated with given dierential equation is r 2 + 10r + k = 0, and its

roots are r = 5 25 k.

20. In this case, r = 5
k = 20 25 20 = 5 5. Thus, a general solution is given

by y = C1 e(5+ 5)t + C2 e(5 5)t . The initial conditions yield
8 91
1
y(0) = C1 e(5+ 5)t + C2 e(5 5)t 1 = C1 + C2 = 1 ,
8 t=0 91
(5+ 5)t (5 5)t 1
y (0) = (5 + 5)C1 e + (5 5)C2 e 1
t=0
= (5 + 5)C1 + (5 5)C2 = 0
) *
C1 = 1 + 5 /2,
) *
C2 = 1 5 /2,
) * ) *
and, therefore, y(t) = [ 1 + 5 /2]e(5+ 5)t + [ 1 5 /2]e(5 5)t is the solution to
the initial value problem.

k = 25
25. Then r = 5 25 25 = 5. Thus, r = 5 is a double root of the
characteristic equation. So, a general solution has the form y = (C1 t + C0 )e5t . For
constants C1 and C2 , using the initial conditions, we obtain the system
1
y(0) = (C1 t + C0 ) e5t 1t=0 = C0 = 1 , C0 = 1,
1
y (0) = (5C1 t 5C0 + C1 ) e5t 1 = C1 5C0 = 0
t=0
C1 = 5,
and so y(t) = (5t + 1)e5t .
235
Chapter 4

30. In this case, r = 5 25 30 = 5 5i. A general solution has the form
k = 30

y = (C1 cos 5t + C2 sin 5t)e5t . For constants C1 and C2 , we have the system
) * 1
y(0) = C1 cos 5t + C2 sin 5t e5t 1t=0 = C1 = 1 ,
- . 1
y (0) = ( 5C2 5C1 ) cos 5t ( 5C1 + 5C2 ) sin 5t e5t 1t=0 = 5C2 5C1 = 0
C1 = 1,

C2 = 5,
and so
8 9 5t 5t # %
y(t) = cos 5t + 5 sin 5t e = 6e sin 5t + ,

where = arctan(1/ 5) 0.421 .
Graphs of the solutions for k = 20, 25, and 30 are shown in Figures B.23B.25 in the answers
in the text.
7. The motion of this mass-spring system is governed by equation (12) on page 213 in the text.
With m = 1/8, b = 2, and k = 16 this equation becomes
1
y + 2y + 16y = 0, (4.12)
8
and the initial conditions are y(0) = 3/4, y (0) = 2. Since
b2 4mk = 4 4(1/8)16 = 4 < 0,
we have a case of underdamped motion. A general solution to (4.12) is given in (16), that is,

with = b/(2m) = 8 and = (1/2m) 4mk b2 = 8, we have
y = (C1 cos 8t + C2 sin 8t) e8t .
Using the initial conditions, we find the constants C1 and C2 .

1
y(0) = (C1 cos 8t + C2 sin 8t) e8t 1t=0 = C1 = 3/4 ,
1
y (0) = 8 [(C2 C1 ) cos 8t (C2 + C1 ) sin 8t] e8t 1t=0 = 8 (C2 C1 ) = 2
C1 = 3/4,

C2 = 1,
236
Exercises 4.8
and so 4 5
3 5
y(t) = cos 8t sin 8t e8t = e8t sin(8t + ),
4 4
where tan = (3/4)/(1) = 3/4 and cos = 1 < 0. Thus,
= + arctan(3/4) 3.785 .
The damping factor is (5/4)e8t , the quasiperiod is P = 2/8 = /4, and the quasifrequency
is 1/P = 4/.

9. Substituting the values m = 2, k = 40, and b = 8 5 into equation (12) on page 213 in the
text and using the initial conditions, we obtain the initial value problem
d2 y dy
2 + 8 5 + 40y = 0, y(0) = 0.1 (m), y (0) = 2 (m/sec).
dt2 dt
The initial conditions are positive to reflect the fact that we have taken down to be positive
in our coordinate system. The auxiliary equation for this system is

2r 2 + 8 5r + 40 = 0 or r 2 + 4 5r + 20 = 0.

This equation has a double root at r = 2 5. Therefore, this system is critically damped
and the equation of motion has the form

y(t) = (C1 + C2 t) e2 5t
.
To find the constants C1 and C2 , we use the initial conditions y(0) = 0.1 and y (0) = 2. Thus,
we have
y(0) = 0.1 = C1 ,

y (0) = 2 = C2 2 5C1 C2 = 2 + 0.2 5 .
From this we obtain

8 # % 9
y(t) = 0.1 + 2 + 0.2 5 t e2 5t .
237
Chapter 4
The maximum displacement of the mass is found by determining the first time the velocity
of the mass becomes zero. Therefore, we have
# % 8 # % 9
y (t) = 0 = 2 + 0.2 5 e2 5t 2 5 0.1 + 2 + 0.2 5 t e2 5t ,
which gives
2 1
t= = .
2 5(2 + 0.2 5) 5(2 + 0.2 5)
Thus the maximum displacement is
4 5 4 # + ,5
1 % 1
y = 0.1 + 2 + 0.2 5 e2 5/[ 5(2+0.2 5)] 0.242 (m).
5(2 + 0.2 5) 5(2 + 0.2 5)
11. The equation of the motion of this mass-spring system is
y + 0.2y + 100y = 0, y(0) = 0, y (0) = 1.
Clearly, this is an underdamped motion because
b2 4mk = (0.2)2 4(1)(100) = 399.96 < 0.
So, we use use equation (16) on page 213 in the text for a general solution. With
b 0.2 1 1
= = = 0.1 and = 4mk b2 = 399.96 = 99.99 ,
2m 2 2m 2
equation (16) becomes
# %
y(t) = C1 cos 99.99t + C2 sin 99.99t e0.1t .
From the initial condiions,

) * 1
y(0) = C1 cos 99.99t + C2 sin 99.99t e0.1t 1t=0 = C1 = 0 ,
-) * ) * . 1
y (0) = 99.99C2 0.1C1 cos 99.99t 0.1C2 + 99.99C1 sin 99.99t e0.1t 1t=0

= 99.99C2 0.1C1 = 1
C1 = 0,

C2 = 1/ 99.99 .
238
Exercises 4.8
Therefore, the equation of motion is given by

1
y(t) = e0.1t sin 99.99t .
99.99
The maximum displacement to the right occurs at the first point of local maximum of y(t).
The critical points of y(t) are solutions to
e0.1t # %
y (t) = 99.99 cos 99.99t 0.1 sin 99.99t = 0
99.99

99.99 cos 99.99t 0.1 sin 99.99t = 0

tan 99.99t = 10 99.99 = 9999 .
Solving for t, we conclude that the first point of local maximum is at

t = (1/ 99.99) arctan 9999 0.156 sec.
13. In Example 3, the solution was found to be

! # %
7 2t
y(t) = e sin 2 3t + , (4.13)
12

where = + arctan( 3/2). Therefore, we have
! # % # %
7 2t
y (t) = e sin 2 3t + + 7 e2t cos 2 3t + .
3
Thus, to find the relative extrema for y(t), we set
! # % # %
7 2t
y (t) = e sin 2 3t + + 7 e2t cos 2 3t + = 0
3
) *
sin 2 3t + 7
) *=$ = 3
cos 2 3t + 7/3
# %
tan 2 3t + = 3 .

Since tan = 3 when = (/3) + n, where n is an integer, we see that the relative extrema
will occur at the points tn , where
(/3) + n
2 3tn + = + n tn = .
3 2 3
239
Chapter 4
) *
By substituting + arctan 3/2 for in the last equation above and by requiring that t be
greater than zero, we obtain
) *
(/3) + (n 1) arctan 3/2
tn = , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
2 3
We see that the solution curve given by equation (4.13) above will touch the exponential
#$ %
curves y(t) = 7/12 e2t when we have
! # % !
7 2t 7 2t
e sin 2 3t + = e ,
12 12
) * ) *
where = + arctan 3/2 . This will occur when sin 2 3t + = 1. Since sin = 1
when = (/2) + m for any integer m, we see that the times Tm , when the solution touches
the exponential curves, satisfy
(/2) + m
2 3Tm + = + m Tm = ,
2 2 3
) *
where = + arctan 3/2 and m is an integer. Again requiring that t be positive we see
that y(t) touches the exponential curve when
) *
(/2) + (m 1) arctan 3/2
Tm = , m = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
2 3
From these facts it follows that, for y(t) to be an extremum and, at the same time, touch the
$
curves y(t) = 7/12e2t , there must be integers m and n such that
) * ) *
(/3) + n arctan 3/2 (/2) + m arctan 3/2
=
2 3 2 3

+ n = + m
3 2
1 1 1
nm= = .
2 3 6
But, since m and n are integers, their dierence is an integer and never 1/6. Thus, the extrema
of y(t) do not occur on the exponential curves.
240
Exercises 4.9
15. Since the exponential function is never zero, from the equation of motion (16) on page 213 in
the text we conclude that the mass passes the equilibrium position, that is, y(t) = 0, if and
only if
sin(t + ) = 0.
Therefore, the time between two successive crossings of the equilibrium position is /, which
is a half of the quasiperiod P . So, we can find the quasiperiod P by multiplying the time
between two successive crossings of the equilibrium position by two. Whenever P is computed,
we can measure the displacement y(t) at any moment t (with y(t) = 0) and then at the moment
t + P . Taking the quotient
y(t + P ) Ae(b/2m)(t+P ) sin[(t + P ) + ]

= = e(b/2m)P ,
y(t) Ae(b/2m)t sin(t + )
we can calculate the damping coecient b as
2m ln[y(t + P )/y(t)]
b= .
P
EXERCISES 4.9: A Closer Look at Forced Mechanical Vibrations, page 227
1. The frequency response curve (13) on page 223, with m = 4, k = 1, and b = 2, becomes
1 1
M() = $ =$ .
(k m 2 )2 + b2 2 (1 4 2 )2 + 4 2
The graph of this function is shown in Figure B.26 in the answers in the text.
3. The auxiliary equation in this problem is r 2 + 9 = 0, which has roots r = 3i. Thus, a general
solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation has the form
yh (t) = C1 cos 3t + C2 sin 3t.
We look for a particular solution to the original nonhomogeneous equation of the form
yp (t) = ts (A cos 3t + B sin 3t),
241
Chapter 4
where we take s = 1 because r = 3i is a simple root of the auxiliary equation. Computing

the derivatives
y (t) = A cos 3t + B sin 3t + t(3A sin 3t + 3B cos 3t),

y (t) = 6B cos 3t 6A sin 3t + t(9A cos 3t 9B sin 3t),
and substituting y(t) and y (t) into the original equation, we get
6B cos 3t 6A sin 3t + t(9A cos 3t 9B sin 3t) + 9t(A cos 3t + B sin 3t) = 2 cos 3t
A = 0,
6B cos 3t 6A sin 3t = 2 cos 3t
B = 1/3.
So, yp (t) = (1/3)t sin 3t, and y(t) = C1 cos 3t + C2 sin 3t + (1/3)t sin 3t is a general solution.
To satisfy the initial conditions, we solve
y(0) = C1 = 1, C1 = 1,

y (0) = 3C2 = 0 C2 = 0.
So, the solution to the given initial value problem is
1
y(t) = cos 3t + t sin 3t .
3
The graph of y(t) is depicted in Figure B.27 in the answers section in the text.
5. (a) The corresponding homogeneous equation, my + ky = 0, is the equation of a simple

harmonic motion, and so its general solution is given by
$
yh (t) = C1 cos t + C2 sin t, = k/m .
Since = , we look for a particular solution of the form
yp (t) = A cos t + B sin t

yp (t) = A sin t + B cos t
yp (t) = A 2 cos t B 2 sin t.
242
Exercises 4.9

) *
m A 2 cos t B 2 sin t + k (A cos t + B sin t) = F0 cos t
) * ) *
A m 2 + k cos t + B m 2 + k sin t = F0 cos t
A = F0 / (k m 2 ) , F0
yp (t) = cos t.
B=0 k m 2
Therefore, a general solution to the original equation is

F0
y(t) = C1 cos t + C2 sin t + cos t .
k m 2
With the initial conditions, y(0) = y (0) = 0, we get
y(0) = C1 + F0 / (k m 2 ) = 0, C1 = F0 / (k m 2 ) ,

y (0) = C2 = 0 C2 = 0.
Therefore,
F0 F0
y(t) = 2
cos t + cos t ,
k m k m 2
which can also be written in the form
F0 F0
y(t) = 2
(cos t cos t) = (cos t cos t) .
k m m( 2 )
2
(b) Here one can apply the dierence-to-product identity

+ , + ,
B+A BA
cos A cos B = 2 sin sin
2 2
with A = t and B = t to get
+ , + ,
2F0 +
y(t) = sin t sin t .
m( 2 2 ) 2 2
(c) For F0 = 32, m = 2, = 9, and = 7, the solution in part (b) becomes

+ , + ,
2(32) 9+7 97
y(t) = sin t sin t = sin 8t sin t .
2(92 72 ) 2 2
The graph of this function is shown in Figure B.28.
243
Chapter 4
7. The auxiliary equation to equation (1) on page 220 in the text, mr 2 + br + k = 0, has roots

b b2 4mk
r= ,
2m

which are both real (b2 > 4mk) and negative because b2 4mk < b. Let

b b2 4mk
r1 := ,
2m
b + b2 4mk
r2 := .
2m
Then a general solution to the homogeneous equation corresponding to (1) has the form
yh (t) = c1 er1 t + c2 er2 t .
A particular solution to (1) is still given by (7) on page 221 in the text. Thus,
F0
y(t) = c1 er1 t + c2 er2 t + $ sin(t + ),
(k m 2 )2 + b2 2
tan = (k m 2 )/(b), is a general solution to the forced overdamped equation.
9. If a mass of m = 8 kg stretches the spring by = 1.96 m, then the spring stiness must be
mg 8 9.8
k= = = 40 (N/m).
1.96
Substitution m = 8, b = 3, k = 40, and the external force F (t) = cos 2t into the equation (23)
on page 226 in the text yields
8y + 3y + 40y = cos 2t.
The steady-state (a particular) solution to this equation is given in (6) and (7), page 221, that
is,
F0 /) * 0
yp (t) = 2 2 2 2
k m 2 cos t + b sin t
(k m ) + b
1 /) 2
* 0
= 40 8(2) cos 2t + (3)(2) sin 2t
[40 (8)(2)2 ]2 + (3)2 (2)2
1 1
= {8 cos 2t + 6 sin 2t} = sin(2t + ),
100 10
where = arctan(8/6) 0.927 .
244
Exercises 4.9
11. First, we find the mass

8 lb 1
m= = slug.
32 ft/sec2 4
Thus the equation (23), describing the motion, with m = 1/4, b = 1, k = 10, and the external
force F (t) = 2 cos 2t becomes
1
y + y + 10y = 2 cos 2t, (4.14)
4
with the initial conditions are y(0) = y (0) = 0. A general solution to the corresponding
homogeneous equation is given in Section 4.8, formula (16). That is,
yh (t) = et (C1 cos t + C2 sin t) .
We compute
b 1 1 $
= = = 2 and = 4(1/4)(10) 12 = 6.
2m 2(1/4) 2(1/4)
So,
yh (t) = e2t (C1 cos 6t + C2 sin 6t) .
For a particular solution, we use formula (7), page 221 in the text.
F0
yp (t) = $ sin(t + )
(k m 2 )2 + b2 2
2 2
= I sin(2t + ) = sin(2t + ),
[10 (1/4)(2)2]2 + (1)2 (2)2 85
where = arctan[(k m 2 )/(b)] = arctan(9/2) 1.352 . A general solution to (4.14) is then

given by
2
y(t) = e2t (C1 cos 6t + C2 sin 6t) + sin(2t + ) .
85
From the initial conditions, we find

y(0) = C1 + (2/ 85) sin = 0,

y (0) = 2C1 + 6C2 + (4/ 85) cos = 0

C1 = (2/ 85) sin = 18/85,
- .
C2 = C1 (2/ 85) cos /3 = 22/255.
245
Chapter 4
4 5
2t 18 22 2
y(t) = e cos 6t sin 6t + sin(2t + ) .
85 255 85
The resonance frequency for the system is
$
r (k/m) (b2 )/(2m2 ) 40 8 2 2
= = = ,
2 2 2
where we have used formula (15) on page 223 in the text for r .
13. The mass attached to the spring is

32 lb
m= = 1 slug.
32 ft/sec2
Thus the equation governing the motion, my + by + ky = Fext , with m = 1, b = 2, k = 5,
and Fext (t) = 3 cos 4t becomes
y + 2y + 5y = 3 cos 4t.
This is an underdamped motion because b2 4mk = (2)2 4(1)(5) = 16 < 0. For the
steady-state solution of this equation we use formula (6) on page 221 in the text. Since
Fext (t) = 3 cos 4t, we have F0 = 3, and = 4. Substituting m, b, k, F0 , and into (6), we
obtain
3 / 2
0
yp (t) = [5 (1)(4) ] cos 4t + (2)(4) sin 4t
[5 (1)(4)2 ]2 + (2)2 (4)2
3
= (8 sin 4t 11 cos 4t) .
185
1. Solving the auxiliary equation, r 2 + 8r 9 = 0, we find r1 = 9, r2 = 1. Thus a general

y(t) = c1 er1 t + c2 er2 t = c1 e9t + c2 et .
3. The auxiliary equation, 4r 2 4r + 10 = 0, has roots r1,2 = (1 3i)/2. Therefore a general

solution is 4 + , + ,5
3t 3t
y(t) = c1 cos + c2 sin et/2 .
2 2
246
Review Problems
5. The roots of the auxiliary equation, 6r 2 11r + 3 = 0, are r1 = 3/2 and r2 = 1/3. Thus,
y(t) = c1 er1 t + c2 er2 t = c1 e3t/2 + c2 et/3
7. Solving the auxiliary equation, 36r 2 + 24r + 5 = 0, we find

$
24 242 4(36)(5) 1 1
r= = i.
2(36) 3 6
Thus a general solution is given by
4 + , + ,5
t t
y(t) = c1 cos + c2 sin et/3 .
6 6
9. The auxiliary equation, 16r 2 56r + 49 = (4r 7)2 = 0, has a double root r = 7/4. Therefore,
e7t/4 and te7t/4 are two linearly independent solutions, and a general solution is given by
y(t) = c1 e7t/4 + c2 te7t/4 = (c1 + c2 t) e7t/4 .
11. This equation is a Cauchy-Euler equation. Using the approach discussed in Problem 38,
Exercises 4.3, we make the substitution t = es and obtain
dx dx dt dx
= =t ,
ds dt ds
+ ,dt
d2 x d dx dx 2
2d x
= = + t ,
ds2 ds ds ds dt2
2
+ 2 ,
2d x d x dx d2 x dx
t 2 + 5x = + 5x = + 5x = 0.
dt ds2 ds ds2 ds
The axiliary equation to this constant coecient linear equation is r 2 r + 5 = 0, which has
roots $
1 12 4(1)(5) 1 19
r= = .
2 2
Thus, L J K J KM
19s 19s
y(s) = es/2 c1 cos + c2 sin
2 2
247
Chapter 4
is a general solution as a function of s. The back substitution, s = ln t, yields

L J K J KM
19 19
y(t) = t1/2 c1 cos ln t + c2 sin ln t .
2 2
13. The roots of the auxiliary equation, r 2 + 16 = 0, are r = 4i. Thus a general solution to the
corresponding homogeneous equation is given by
yh (t) = c1 cos 4t + c2 sin 4t .
The method of undetermined coecients suggests the form yp (t) = (A1 t+A0 )et for a particular
solution to the original equation. We compute
yp (t) = (A1 t + A0 + A1 )et , yp (t) = (A1 t + A0 + 2A1 )et
and substitute yp(t) and yp (t) into the given equation. This yields
- . - .
yp + 16yp = (A1 t + A0 + 2A1 )et + 16 (A1 t + A0 )et = tet
1 2
(17A1 t + 17A0 + 2A1 ) et = tet A1 = , A0 = .
17 289
Therefore,
+ ,
t 2
yp (t) = et
17 289
+ ,
t 2
y(t) = yh (t) + yp (t) = c1 cos 4t + c2 sin 4t + et .
17 289
15. This is a third order homogeneous linear dierential equation with constant coecients. Its
auxiliary equation is 3r 3 + 10r 2 + 9r + 2 = 0. Factoring yields
3r 3 + 10r 2 + 9r + 2 = (3r 3 + 3r 2 ) + (7r 2 + 7r) + (2r + 2) = (3r 2 + 7r + 2)(r + 1).
Thus the roots of the auxiliary equation are

$
7 72 4(3)(2) 1
r = 1 and r = = 2, ,
6 3
y(t) = c1 e2t + c2 et + c3 et/3 .
248
Review Problems
17. To solve the auxiliary equation, r 3 + 10r 11 = 0, we note that r1 = 1 is a root. Dividing the
polynomial r 3 + 10r 11 by r 1 we get
r 3 + 10r 11 = (r 1)(r 2 + r + 11),
and so the other two roots are

$
1 1 4(1)(11) 1 43
r2,3 = = i.
2 2 2
A general solution is then given by

L J K J KM
43t 43t
y(t) = c1 et + et/2 c2 cos + c3 sin .
2 2
19. By inspection, we find that r = 3 as a root of the auxiliary equation, 4r 3 + 8r 2 11r + 3 = 0.

Using, say, the long division, we get
4r 3 + 8r 2 11r + 3 = (r + 3)(4r 2 4r + 1) = (r + 3)(2r 1)2 .
Thus, in addition, r = 1/2 is a double root of the auxiliary equation. A general solution then
has the form
y(t) = c1 e3t + c2 et/2 + c3 tet/2 .
21. First, we solve the corresponding homogeneous equation,
y 3y + 7y = 0.
Since the roots of the auxiliary equation, r 2 3r + 7 = 0, are

3 9 28 3 19i
r= = ,
2 2
a general solution to the homogeneous equation is

L J K J KM
19t 19t
yh (t) = c1 cos + c2 sin e3t/2 .
2 2
249
Chapter 4
We use the superposition principle to find a particular solution to the original nonhomogeneous
equation.
A particular solution, yp,1 (t) to y 3y + 7y = 7t2 has the form
yp,1(t) = A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 .
Substitution yields

yp,1 3yp,1 + 7yp,1 = 2A2 3(2A2 t + A1 ) + 7(A2 t2 + A1 t + A0 ) = 7t2
(7A2 )t2 + (7A1 6A2 )t + (7A0 3A1 + 2A2 ) = 7t2
7A2 = 7, A2 = 1,
7A1 6A2 = 0, A1 = 6/7,
7A0 3A1 + 2A2 = 0 A0 = 4/49,
and so
6 4
yp,1 (t) = t2 +
t+ .
7 49
The other term in the right-hand side of the original equation is et . A particular solution to
y 3y + 7y = et has the form yp,2(t) = Aet . Substitution yields
1 1 t
yp,2 3yp,2 + 7yp,2 = 5Aet = et A= yp,2 (t) = e .
5 5
By the superposition principle, a general solution to the original equation is
y(t) = yh (t) yp,2(t) + yp,1(t)

L J K J KM
19t 19t 1 6 4
= c1 cos + c2 sin e3t/2 et + t2 + t + .
2 2 5 7 49
23. The corresponding homogeneous equation in this problem is similar to that in Problem 13.
Thus, y1 (t) = cos 4 and y2 (t) = sin 4 are its two linearly independent solutions, and a
yh () = c1 cos 4 + c2 sin 4 .
For a particular solution to the original equation, we use the variation of parameters method.
Letting
yp () = v1 () cos 4 + v2 () sin 4,
250
Review Problems
we get the following system for v1 and v2 (see (9) on page 195 in the text):
v1 () cos 4 + v2 () sin 4 = 0
4v1 () sin 4 + 4v2 () cos 4 = tan 4.
Multiplying the first equation by sin 4 and the second equation by (1/4) cos 4, and adding
the resulting equations together, we get
1 1
v2 () = sin 4 v2 = cos 4 + c3 .
4 16
From the first equation in the above system we also obtain
1 sin2 4 1
v1 () = v2 () tan 4 = = (sec 4 cos 4)
3 4 cos 4 4
1 1 1
v1 () = (sec 4 cos 4) d = ln | sec 4 + tan 4| + sin 4 + c4 .
4 16 16
Taking c3 = c4 = 0, we obtain
+ , + ,
1 1 1
yp () = ln | sec 4 + tan 4| + sin 4 cos 4 + cos sin 4
16 16 16
1
= (cos 4) ln | sec 4 + tan 4|,
16
and a general solution to the original equation is
1
y() = c1 cos 4 + c2 sin 4 (cos 4) ln | sec 4 + tan 4| .
16
25. Since the auxiliary equation, 4r 2 12r + 9 = (2r 3)2 = 0, has a double root r = 3/2, a
general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is
yh (t) = c1 e3t/2 + c2 te3t/2 .
By the superposition principle, a particular solution to the original equation has the form
yp (t) = Ae5t + Be3t .
Substituting this expression into the given nonhomogeneous equation, we get

) * ) * ) *
4yp 12yp + 9yp = 4 25Ae5t + 9Be3t 12 5Ae5t + 3Be3t + 9 Ae5t + Be3t
251
Chapter 4
= 49Ae5t + 9Be3t = e5t + e3t A = 1/49, B = 1/9.
Therefore, yp (t) = (1/49)e5t + (1/9)e3t and a general solution to the original equation is
1 5t 1 3t
y(t) = c1 e3t/2 + c2 te3t/2 + e + e .
49 9
27. This is a Cauchy-Euler equation. Thus we make the substitution x = et and get
d2 y dy
x2 2
+ 2x 2y = 6x2 + 3x
dx + dx ,
d2 y dy dy
+ 2 2y = 6(et )2 + 3(et )
dt2 dt dt
d2 y dy
2
+ 2y = 6e2t + 3et . (4.15)
dt dt
The auxiliary equation, r 2 + r 2 = 0, has the roots r = 2, 1. Therefore, a general solution
yh (t) = c1 et + c2 e2t .
A particular solution to (4.15) has the form
yp (t) = Ate2t + Btet .
(The factor t appeared in both terms because et and e2t are both solutions to the homogeneous
equation.) Dierentiating, we find
yp (t) = Ate2t + Btet

yp (t) = A(1 2t)e2t + B(t + 1)et
yp (t) = A(4t 4)e2t + B(t + 2)et .
Substitution into (4.15) yields
3Ae2t + 3Bet = 6e2t + 3et A = 2, B = 1.
Thus a general solution to (4.15) is given by
y(t) = yh (t) + yp (t) = c1 et + c2 e2t 2te2t + tet .
252
Review Problems
The back substitution et = x (or t = ln x) results
y(x) = c1 x + c2 x2 2x2 ln x + x ln x .
29. The roots of the auxiliary equation in this problem are

$
4 42 4(1)(7)
r= = 2 3i .
2
Therefore, a general solution is given by
# %
y(t) = c1 cos 3t + c2 sin 3t e2t .
Substituting the initial conditions, we obtain

) * 1
y(0) = c1 cos 3t + c2 sin 3t e2t 1t=0 = c1 = 1,
- . 1
y (0) = (2c1 + 3c2 ) cos 3t ( 3c1 + 2c2 ) sin 3t e2t 1t=0 = 2c1 + 3c2 = 2.
Solving this system yields c1 = 1, c2 = 0. The solution to the given initial value problem is

y(t) = e2t cos 3t .
31. We solve the corresponding homogeneous equation. Its auxiliary equation, r 2 2r + 10 = 0,

has the roots r = 1 3i. Thus
yh (t) = (c1 cos 3t + c2 sin 3t) et
Now, we apply the method of undetermined coecients and look for a particular solution to
the original nonhomogeneous equation of the form yp (t) = A cos 3t + B sin 3t. Dierentiating
yp (t) twice, we obtain yp (t) = 3A sin 3t+3B cos 3t, yp = 9A cos 3t9B sin 3t and substitute
these expressions into the original equation. Thus we get
(9A cos 3t 9B sin 3t) 2(3A sin 3t + 3B cos 3t) + 10(A cos 3t + B sin 3t)
= 6 cos 3t sin 3t
253
Chapter 4
(A 6B) cos 3t + (6A + B) sin 3t = 6 cos 3t sin 3t

A 6B = 6, A = 0,

6A + B = 1 B = 1.
So, yp (t) = sin 3t, and y(t) = (c1 cos 3t + c2 sin 3t) et sin 3t is a general solution to the
given equation.
Next, we satisfy the initial conditions.
y(0) = c1 = 2, c1 = 2,

y (0) = c1 + 3c2 3 = 8 c2 = 7/3.
Hence, the answer is + ,
7
y(t) = 2 cos 3t sin 3t et sin 3t.
3
33. The associated characteristic equation in this problem is r 3 12r 2 + 27r + 40 = 0, which is
a third order equation. Using the rational root theorem, we look for its integer roots among
the divisors of 40, which are 1, 2, 4, 8, 10, 20, and 40. By inspection, r = 1 is
a root. Dividing r 3 12r 2 + 27r + 40 by r + 1, we get
r 3 12r 2 + 27r + 40 = (r 2 13r + 40)(r + 1),
and so the other two roots of the auxiliary equation are the roots of r 2 13r+40 = 0, which are
r = 5 and 8. Therefore, a general solution to the given equation is y(t) = c1 et + c2 e5t + c3 e8t .
We find the values of c1 , c2 , and c3 from the initial conditions.
1
y(0) = (c1 et + c2 e5t + c3 e8t ) 1t=0 = c1 + c2 + c3 = 3, c1 = 1,
1
y (0) = (c1 et + 5c2 e5t + 8c3 e8t ) 1t=0 = c1 + 5c2 + 8c3 = 6, c2 = 3,
1
y (0) = (c1 et + 25c2 e5t + 64c3 e8t ) 1t=0 = c1 + 25c2 + 64c3 = 12 c3 = 1.
Therefore, y(t) = et 3e5t + e8t is the solution to the given initial value problem.
35. Since the roots of the auxiliary equation, r 2 + 1 = 0, are r = i, the functions y1 () = cos
and y2 () = sin are two linearly independent solutions to the corresponding homogeneous
equation, and its general solution is given by
yh () = c1 cos + c2 sin .
254
Review Problems
We apply the method of variation of parameters to find a particular solution to the original
equation. We look for a particular solution of the form
yp () = v1 () cos + v2 () sin ,
where v1 () and v2 () satisfy the system (9), Section 4.6. That is,
v1 cos + v2 sin = 0,
v1 sin + v2 cos = sec .
Multiplying the first equation by sin , the second equation by cos , and adding them together
yield
v2 sin2 + v2 cos2 = sec cos v2 = 1 v2 () = .
From the first equation in the above system we also get

3
v1 = v2 tan = tan v1 () = tan d = ln | cos |,
where we have taken the zero integration constant. So,
yp () = cos ln | cos | + sin ,
and
y() = c1 cos + c2 sin + cos ln | cos | + sin
is a general solution to the original equation. Dierentiating we find that
y () = c1 sin + c2 cos sin ln | cos | + cos .
Substitution of y() and y () into the initial conditions yields
y(0) = c1 = 1, c1 = 1,

y (0) = c2 = 2 c2 = 2,
and so the answer is y() = cos + 2 sin + cos ln | cos | + sin .
255
Chapter 4
37. Comparing the given homogeneous equations with mass-spring oscillator equation (13) in
Section 4.7,
[inertia] y + [damping] y + [stiness] y = 0,
we see that in equations (a) through (d) the damping coecient is 0. So, the behavior, of
solutions, as t +, depends on the sign of the stiness coecient k.
(a) k= t4 > 0. This implies that all the solutions remain bounded as t +.
(b) k= t4 < 0. The stiness of the system is negative and increases unboundedly as
t +. It reinforces the displacement, y(t), with magnitude increasing with time.
Hence some solutions grow rapidly with time.
(c) k= y 6 > 0. Similarly to (a), we conclude that all the solutions are bounded.
(d) k= y 7. The function f (y) = y 7 is positive for positive y and negative if y is negative.
Hence, we can expect that some of the solutions (say, ones satisfying negative initial
conditions) are unbounded.
(e) k= 3 + sin t. Since | sin t| 1 for any t, we conclude that
k 3 + (1) = 2 > 0,
and all the solutions are bounded as t +.
(f) Here there is positive damping b= t2 increasing with time, which results an increasing
drain of energy from the system, and positive constant stiness k = 1. Thus all the
solutions are bounded.
(g) Negative damping b= t2 increases (in absolute value) with time, which imparts energy
to the system instead of draining it. Note that the stiness k = 1 is also negative. Thus
we should expect that some of the solutions increase unboundedly as t +.
39. If a weight of w = 32 lb stretches the spring by = 6 in = 0.5 ft, then the spring stiness must
be
w 32
k= = = 64 (lb/ft).
0.5
256
Review Problems
Also, the mass m of the weight is

w 32
m= = = 1 (slug),
g 32
and the damping constant b = 2 lb-sec/ft. The external force is given to be F (t) = F0 cos t
with F0 = 4 and = 8.
Clearly, we have an underdamped motion because b2 4mk = 4 256 < 0. So, we can use
formula (6) in Section 4.9 for the steady-state solution. This yields
F0 / 2
0
yp (t) = (k m ) cos t + b sin t
(k m 2 )2 + b2 2
4 / 0 1
= 2 2 2 2
(64 82 ) cos 8t + (2)(8) sin 8t = sin 8t .
(64 8 ) + 2 8 4
The resonant frequency for the system is r /(2), where r is given in (15), Section 4.9.
Applying this formula, we get
! "
1 k b2 1 64 22 62
resonant frequency = 2
= 2
= .
2 m 2m 2 1 2(1 ) 2
257
Chapter 4
258
CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Systems and Phase
Plane Analysis
EXERCISES 5.2: Elimination Method for Systems, page 250
1. Subtracting the second equation in the system from the first one, we eliminate y and obtain
x + y = 2y,

x = x.
y = x 2y
This equation is separable (also, it is linear). Separation yields

dx
= dt ln |x| = t + C x(t) = c2 et .
x
Substituting this solution into the second equation, we obtain an equation for y:
y + 2y = x = c2 et .
This equation is a first order linear equation. Solving we obtain

+3 ,
(t) = exp (2)dt = e2t
3 3
2t
) t * 2t
e y= c2 e e dt = c2 et dt = c2 et + c1
y(t) = c1 e2t + c2 et .
x(t) = c2 et , y(t) = c1 e2t + c2 et .
3. We eliminate x by subtracting the second equation from the first equation. This yields
dy
y + 2y = 0 = 2dt ln |y| = 2t + c y(t) = c2 e2t .
y
259
Chapter 5
From the second equation we get
x y = 0 (xy) = 0 x(t) y(t) = c1 x(t) = c1 + c2 e2t ,
x(t) = c1 + c2 e2t , y(t) = c2 e2t .
5. Writing this system in operator notation yields the system
(D 1)[x] + D[y] = 5,
(5.1)
D[x] + (D + 1)[y] = 1.
We will first eliminate the function x(t), although we could proceed just as easily by eliminat-
ing the function y(t). Thus, we apply the operator D to the first equation and the operator
(D 1) to the second equation to obtain
D(D 1)[x] + D 2 [y] = D[5] = 0,

(D 1)D[x] (D 1)(D + 1)[y] = (D 1)[1] = 1.

/ 0
{D(D 1) (D 1)D} [x] + D 2 (D 2 1) [y] = 1
0x+1y = 1 y(t) = 1.
To find the function x(t), we will eliminate y from the system given in (5.1). Therefore, we
multiply the first equation in (5.1) by (D + 1) and the second by D to obtain the system
(D + 1)(D 1)[x] + (D + 1)D[y] = (D + 1)[5] = 5,

D 2 [x] D(D + 1)[y] = D[1] = 0.
By adding these two equations we obtain

/ 2 0
(D 1) D 2 [x] = 5 x = 5 x(t) = 5.
Therefore, this system of linear dierential equation is solved by the functions
x(t) = 5 and y(t) = 1.
260
Exercises 5.2
7. In order to eliminate u, we multiply the first equation by (D 1), the second equation by
(D + 1), and subtract the results.

(D 1) {(D + 1)[u] (D + 1)[v]} = (D 1) [et ] = (et ) et = 0,
(D + 1) {(D 1)[u] + (2D + 1)[v]} = (D + 1) [5] = (5) + 5 = 5
(D 2 1) [u] (D 2 1) [v] = 0,

(D 2 1) [u] + {(D + 1)(2D + 1)} [v] = 5
/ ) *0 5
(D + 1)(2D + 1) + D2 1 [v] = 5 {D(D + 1)} [v] = . (5.2)
3
The corresponding homogeneous equation, {D(D + 1)} [v] = 0, has the characteristic equation
r(r + 1) = 0 r = 0, 1,
and so its general solution is

vh (t) = c1 + c2 et .
Applying the method of undetermined coecients, we look for a particular solution to (5.2) of
the form vp (t) = cts , where we choose s = 1 (because the homogeneous equation has constant
solutions and does not have solutions of the form ct). Substitution v = ct into (5.2) yields
5 5
{D(D + 1)} [ct] = (D + 1)[c] = c = vp (t) = t.
3 3
Therefore, a general solution to (5.2) is
5
v(t) = vh (t) + vp (t) = c1 + c2 et + t.
3
We now go back to the original system and subtract the second equation from the first one.
2u (3D + 2)[v] = et 5
+ ,
3 1 5
u= D + 1 [v] + et
2 2 2
+ , + ,
3 t 5 t 5 1 5
u= c1 + c2 e + t + c1 + c2 e + t + et
2 3 3 2 2
1 1 5
u(t) = c1 c2 et + et + t.
2 2 3
261
Chapter 5
Thus, a general solution to the given system is

1 1 5
u(t) = c1 c2 et + et + t,
2 2 3
5
v(t) = c1 + c2 et + t.
3
9. Expressed in operator notation, this system becomes
(D + 2)[x] + D[y] = 0,
(D 1)[x] + (D 1)[y] = sin t.
In order to eliminate the function y(t), we will apply the operator (D 1) to the first equation
above and the operator D to the second one. Thus, we have
(D 1)(D + 2)[x] + (D 1)D[y] = (D 1)[0] = 0,

D(D 1)[x] D(D 1)[y] = D[sin t] = cos t.
Adding these two equations yields the dierential equation involving the single function x(t)
given by
/ 2 0
(D + D 2) (D 2 D) [x] = cos t
2(D 1)[x] = cos t. (5.3)
This is a linear first order dierential equation with constant coecients and so can be solved
by the methods of Chapter 2. (See Section 2.3.) However, we will use the methods of
Chapter 4. We see that the auxiliary equation associated with the corresponding homogeneous
equation is given by 2(r 1) = 0, which has the root r = 1. Thus, a general solution to the
corresponding homogeneous equation is
xh (t) = C1 et .
We will use the method of undetermined coecients to find a particular solution to the
nonhomogeneous equation. To this end, we note that a particular solution to this dierential
equation will have the form
xp (t) = A cos t + B sin t xp (t) = A sin t + B cos t.
262
Exercises 5.2
Substituting these expressions into the nonhomogeneous equation given in (5.3) yields
2xp 2xp = 2(A sin t + B cos t) 2(A cos t + B sin t)

= (2B 2A) cos t + (2A 2B) sin t = cos t.
By equating coecients we obtain
2B 2A = 1 and 2A 2B = 0.
By solving these two equations simultaneously for A and B, we see that
1 1
A= and B= .
4 4
Thus, a particular solution to the nonhomogeneous equation given in (5.3) will be
1 1
xp (t) = cos t sin t
4 4
and a general solution to the nonhomogeneous equation (5.3) will be
1 1
x(t) = xh (t) + xp (t) = C1 et + cos t sin t.
4 4
We now must find a function y(t). To do this, we subtract the second of the two dierential
equations in the system from the first to obtain
3x + y = sin t y = 3x sin t.

4 5
1 t 1
y(t) = 3 C1 e + cos t sin t sin t
4 4
3 1
y(t) = 3C1 et cos t sin t.
4 4
Hence this system of dierential equations has the general solution
1 1 3 1
x(t) = C1 et + cos t sin t and y(t) = 3C1 et cos t sin t.
4 4 4 4
263
Chapter 5
11. From the second equation, we obtain u = (D 2 + 2) [v]/2. Substitution into the first equation
eliminates u and gives
6 7
) 1) 2
* *
D 1 D + 2 [v] + 5v = et
2
2
-) 2 *) * .
D 1 D 2 + 2 10 [v] = 2et
) 4 *
D + D 2 12 [v] = 2et . (5.4)
Solving the characteristic equation, r 4 + r 2 12 = 0,

) *) *
r 4 + r 2 12 = 0 r2 + 4 r2 3 = 0 r = 2i, 3 ,
we conclude that a general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is

vh (t) = c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t + c3 e 3t
+ c4 e 3t
.
A particular solution to (5.4) has the form vp (t) = cet . Substitution yields
) *- . 1
D 4 + D 2 12 cet = cet + cet 12cet = 10cet = 2et c= .
5

Therefore, v = vh + vp = c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t + c3 e 3t
+ c4 e 3t
+ et /5 and
+ ,
1) * 1
3t 1
u = D 2 + 2 [v] = c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t + c3 e + c4 e 3t
+ et
2 2 5
+
,
3t 3t 1 t
c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t + c3 e + c4 e + e
5
5 5 3 t
= c1 cos 2t + c2 sin 2t c3 e 3t c4 e 3t e .
2 2 10
By replacing (5/2)c3 by c3 and (5/2)c4 by c4 we obtain the same answer as given in the
text.
13. Expressing x from the second equation and substituting the result into the first equation, we
obtain
d(y y)
x = y y = (y y) 4y y 2y + 5y = 0.
dt
264
Exercises 5.2
This homogeneous linear equation with constant coecients has the characteristic equation
r 2 2r + 5 = 0 with roots r = 1 2i. Thus a general solution is
y = c1 et cos 2t + c2 et sin 2t .
Therefore,
) * ) *
x = c1 et cos 2t + c2 et sin 2t c1 et cos 2t + c2 et sin 2t
) * ) *
= c1 et cos 2t 2c1 et sin 2t + c2 et sin 2t + 2c2 et cos 2t c1 et cos 2t + c2 et sin 2t
= 2c2 et cos 2t 2c1 et sin 2t.
15. In operator form, the system becomes
2z + (D 5)[w] = 5t,
(D 4)[z] 3w = 17t.
We multiply the first equation by 3, the second equation by (D 5), and add the resulting
equations.
{6 + (D 5)(D 4)} [z] = 3(5t) + (D 5)[17t] = 70t + 17

) 2 *
D 9D + 14 [z] = 70t + 17.
Solving the characteristic equation, r 2 9r + 14 = 0, we obtain r = 2, 7. Hence, a general

solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is zh (t) = c1 e2t + c2 e7t . A particular
solution has the form zp (t) = At + B. Substitution yields
) 2 *
D 9D + 14 [At + B] = (At + B) 9(At + B) + 14(At + B)
= 14At 9A + 14B = 70t + 17
70 17 + 9A
A= = 5, B = = 2
14 14
z(t) = zh (t) + zp (t) = c1 e2t + c2 e7t 5t 2.
We use now the second equation from the original system to find w.
1 2
w= (z 4z 17t) = c1 e2t + c2 e7t + t + 1.
3 3
265
Chapter 5
17. Expressed in operator notation, this system becomes
(D 2 + 5) [x] 4[y] = 0,
[x] + (D 2 + 2) [y] = 0.
In order to eliminate the function x(t), we apply the operator (D 2 + 5) to the second equation.
Thus, we have
) *
D 2 + 5 [x] 4[y] = 0,
) * ) *) *
D 2 + 5 [x] + D 2 + 5 D 2 + 2 [y] = 0.
Adding these two equations together yields the dierential equation involving the single func-
tion y(t) given by
/ 2 0 ) 4 *
(D + 5)(D 2 + 2) 4 [y] = 0 D + 7D 2 + 6 [y] = 0.
The auxiliary equation for this homogeneous equation, r 4 + 7r 2 + 6 = (r 2 + 1)(r 2 + 6) = 0,

has roots r = i, i 6. Thus, a general solution is

y(t) = C1 sin t + C2 cos t + C3 sin 6t + C4 cos 6t.
We must now find a function x(t) that satisfies the system of dierential equations given in
the problem. To do this we solve the second equation of the system of dierential equations
for x(t) to obtain
) *
x(t) = D 2 + 2 [y].
Substituting the expression we found for y(t), we see that

x(t) = C1 sin t C2 cos t 6C3 sin 6t 6C4 cos 6t
# %
+2 C1 sin t + C2 cos t + C3 sin 6t + C4 cos 6t

x(t) = C1 sin t + C2 cos t 4C3 sin 6t 4C4 cos 6t.
Hence this system of dierential equations has the general solution

x(t) = C1 sin t + C2 cos t 4C3 sin 6t 4C4 cos 6t

y(t) = C1 sin t + C2 cos t + C3 sin 6t + C4 cos 6t.
266
Exercises 5.2
19. From the first equation, we conclude that y = x 4x. Substitution into the second equation
yields

(x 4x) = 2x + (x 4x) x 5x + 6x = 0.
The characteristic equation, r 2 5r + 6 = 0, has roots r = 2, 3, and so a general solution is
x(t) = c1 e2t + c2 e3t

) * ) *
y(t) = c1 e2t + c2 e3t 4 c1 e2t + c2 e3t = 2c1 e2t c2 e3t .
We find constants c1 and c2 from the initial condition.
1 = x(0) = c1 e2(0) + c2 e3(0) = c1 + c2 , c1 = 1,

2(0) 3(0)

0 = y(0) = 2c1 e c2 e = 2c1 c2 c2 = 2.
Therefore, the answer to this problem is
x(t) = e2t + 2e3t , y(t) = 2e2t 2e3t .
21. To apply the elimination method, we write the system using operator notation:
D 2 [x] y = 0,
(5.5)
x + D 2 [y] = 0.
Eliminating y by applying D 2 to the first equation and adding to the second equation gives
) *
D 2 D 2 1 [x] = 0,
which reduces to
) 4 *
D 1 [x] = 0. (5.6)
The corresponding auxiliary equation, r 4 1 = 0, has roots 1, i. Thus, the general solution
to (5.6) is given by
x(t) = C1 et + C2 et + C3 cos t + C4 sin t. (5.7)
Substituting x(t) into the first equation in (5.5) yields
y(t) = x (t) = C1 et + C2 et C3 cos t C4 sin t. (5.8)
267
Chapter 5
We use initial conditions to determine constants C1 , C2 , C3 , and C4 . Dierentiating (5.7) and

(5.8), we get
3 = x(0) = C1 e0 + C2 e0 + C3 cos 0 + C4 sin 0 = C1 + C2 + C3 ,

1= x (0) = C1 e0 C2 e0 C3 sin 0 + C4 cos 0 = C1 C2 + C4 ,
1 = y(0) = C1 e0 + C2 e0 C3 cos 0 C4 sin 0 = C1 + C2 C3 ,
1 = y (0) = C1 e0 C2 e0 + C3 sin 0 C4 cos 0 = C1 C2 C4
C1 + C2 + C3 = 3,
C1 C2 + C4 = 1,

C1 + C2 C3 = 1,
C1 C2 C4 = 1.
Solving we obtain C1 = C2 = C3 = C4 = 1. So, the desired solution is
x(t) = et + et + cos t + sin t,

y(t) = et + et cos t sin t.
23. We will attempt to solve this system by first eliminating the function y(t). Thus, we multiply
the first equation by (D + 2) and the second by (D 1). Therefore, we obtain
- .
(D + 2)(D 1)[x] + (D + 2)(D 1)D[y] = (D + 2) 3e2t = 6e2t 6e2t = 0,
- .
(D 1)(D + 2)[x] (D 1)(D + 2)[y] = (D 1) 3et = 3et + 3et = 0.
0 x + 0 y = 0,
which will be true for any two functions x(t) and y(t). (But not every pair of functions
will satisfy this system of dierential equations.) Thus, this is a degenerate system, and has
infinitely many linearly independent solutions. To see if we can find these solutions, we will
examine the system more closely. Notice that we could write this system as
(D 1)[x + y] = 3e2t ,
(D + 2)[x + y] = 3et .
268
Exercises 5.2
Therefore, lets try the substitution z(t) = x(t) + y(t). We want a function z(t) that satisfies
the two equations
z (t) z(t) = 3e2t and z (t) + 2z(t) = 3et , (5.9)
simultaneously. We start by solving the first equation given in (5.9). This is a linear dierential
equation with constant coecients which has the associated auxiliary equation r 1 = 0.
Hence, the solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is
zh (t) = Cet .
By the method of undetermined coecients, we see that a particular solution will have the
form
zp (t) = Ae2t zp = 2Ae2t .
Substituting these expressions into the first dierential equation given in (5.9) yields
zp (t) zp (t) = 2Ae2t Ae2t = 3Ae2t = 3e2t A = 1.
Thus, the first equation given in (5.9) has the general solution
z(t) = Cet + e2t .
Now, substituting z(t) into the second equation in (5.9) gives

) *
Cet 2e2t + 2 Cet + e2t = 3et 3Cet = 3et .
Hence, C must be 1. Therefore, z(t) = et + e2t is the only solution that satisfies both
dierential equations given in (5.9) simultaneously. Thus, any two dierentiable functions
that satisfy the equation x(t) + y(t) = et + e2t will satisfy the original system.
25. Writing the system in operator form yields
(D 1)[x] 2y + z = 0,
x + D[y] z = 0,
4x + 4y + (D 5)[z] = 0.
269
Chapter 5
We use the second equation to express z in terms of x and y.
z = x + D[y]. (5.10)
Substituting this expression into the other two equations, we obtain
(D 1)[x] 2y + (x + D[y]) = 0,
4x + 4y + (D 5)[x + D[y]] = 0
(D 2)[x] + (D 2)[y]) = 0,
(5.11)
(D 1)[x] + (D2 5D + 4) [y] = 0.
Now we eliminate x by multiplying the first equation by (D 1), the second equation by
(D 2), and adding the results. This yields
/ 0
(D 1)(D 2) + (D 2)(D 2 5D + 4) [y] = 0
/ 0
(D 2)(D 2 4D + 3) [y] = 0 {(D 2)(D 1)(D 3)} [y] = 0.
The roots of the characteristic equation, (r 2)(r 1)(r 3) = 0, are r = 1, 2, and 3. Thus,
a general solution for y is
y = c1 et + c2 e2t + c3 e3t .
With h := x + y, the first equation in (5.11) can be written in the form
(D 2)[h] = 0 or h 2h = 0,
which has a general solution h = Ke2t . Therefore,
x = h y = c1 et + (K c2 )e2t c3 e3t .
To find K, we substitute the above solutions x(t) and y(t), with c1 = c3 = 0, into the second
equation in (5.11). Thus we get
- . ) *- .
(D 1) (K c2 )e2t + D 2 5D + 4 c2 e2t = 0
(K c2 )e2t + (4(c2 ) 5(2c2 ) + 4(c2 )) e2t = 0
K c2 = 0 K = c2 .
270
Exercises 5.2
Hence,
x = c1 et 2c2 e2t c3 e3t .
Finally, we find z using (5.10).

) * ) *
z = c1 et 2c2 e2t c3 e3t + c1 et + c2 e2t + c3 e3t = 2c1 et + 4c2 e2t + 4c3 e3t .
27. We eliminate z by expressing
1 1
z= (x + 4x) = (D 4)[x] (5.12)
4 4
from the first equation and substituting (5.12) into the second and third equations. We obtain
6 7
1
2 (D 4)[x] + (D 4)[y] = 0,
4
4 5 6 7
1 1
2x + 4y + D (D 4)[x] 4 (D 4)[x] = 0.
4 4
After some algebra, the above system simplifies to
(D 4)[x] + 2(D 4)[y] = 0,

) 2 *
D 8D + 8 [x] 16y = 0.
We use the second equation to find that
1 ) 2 *
y= D 8D + 8 [x]. (5.13)
16
Then the first equation becomes

4 5
1 ) 2 *
(D 4)[x] + 2(D 4) D 8D + 8 [x] = 0
16
6 7
1) 2 *
(D 4) 1 + D 8D + 8 [x] = 0 (D 4)D(D 8)[x] = 0.
8
Solving the characteristic equation, we get r = 0, 4, and 8; so
x = c1 e8t + c2 e4t + c3 .
271
Chapter 5
Substitution of this solution into (5.12) and (5.13) yield
1
z= (x + 4x) = c1 e8t + c3 ,
4
1 1 ) 8t *
y= (x 8x + 8x) = c1 e c2 e4t + c3 .
16 2
29. We begin by expressing the system in operator notation
(D )[x] + y = 0,
3x + (D 1)[y] = 0.
We eliminate y by applying (D 1) to the first equation and subtracting the second equation
from it. This gives
{(D 1)(D ) (3)} [x] = 0

/ 2 0
D ( + 1)D + ( + 3) [x] = 0. (5.14)
Note that since the given system is homogeneous, y(t) also satisfies this equation (compare
(7) and (8) on page 247 of the text). So, we can investigate solutions x(t) only. The auxiliary
equation, r 2 ( + 1)r + ( + 3) = 0, has roots

( + 1) ( + 1) +
r1 = , r2 = ,
2 2
where the discriminant := ( + 1)2 4( + 3). We consider two cases:
i) If + 3 < 0, i.e. < 3, then > ( + 1)2 and the root
( + 1) + | + 1|
r2 > = 0.
2
Therefore, the solution x(t) = er2 t is unbounded as t +.
ii) If + 3 0, i.e. 3, then ( + 1)2 . If < 0, then a fundamental solution set

to (5.14) is
6 + , + ,7
(+1)t/2 t (+1)t/2 t
e cos ,e sin . (5.15)
2 2
272
Exercises 5.2

If 0, then < | + 1| and a fundamental solution set is
{er1 t , er2 t } , if > 0,

r1 t r1 t
(5.16)
{e , te } , if = 0,
where both roots r1 , r2 are non-positive if and only if 1. For = 1 we have

= (1 + 1)2 4(1 + 3) < 0, and we have a particular case of the fundamental
solution set (5.15) (without exponential term) consisting of bounded functions. Finally,
if < 1, then r1 < 0, r2 0, and all the functions listed in (5.15), (5.16) are bounded.
Any solution x(t) is a linear combination of fundamental solutions and, therefore, all solutions
x(t) are bounded if and only if 3 1.
31. Solving this problem, we follow the arguments described in Section 5.1, page 242 of the text,
i.e., x(t), the mass of salt in the tank A, and y(t), the mass of salt in the tank B, satisfy the
system
dx
= inputA outputA ,
dt
(5.17)
dy
= inputB outputB ,
dt
with initial conditions x(0) = 0, y(0) = 20. It is important to notice that the volume of each
tank stays at 100 L because the net flow rate into each tank is the same as the net outflow.
Next we observe that inputA consists of the salt coming from outside, which is
0.2 kg/L 6 L/min = 1.2 kg/min,
and the salt coming from the tank B, which is given by
y(t) y(t)
kg/L 1 L/min = kg/min.
100 100
Thus, 4 5
y(t)
inputA = 1.2 + kg/min.
100
273
Chapter 5
outputA consists of two flows: one is going out of the system and the other one is going to
the tank B. So,
x(t) 7x(t)
outputA = kg/L (4 + 3) L/min = kg/min,
100 100
and the first equation in (5.17) becomes
dx y 7x
= 1.2 + .
dt 100 100
Similarly, the second equation in (5.17) can be written as
dy 3x 3y
= .
dt 100 100
Rewriting this system in the operator form, we obtain
(D + 0.07)[x] 0.01y = 1.2 ,

(5.18)
0.03x + (D + 0.03)[y] = 0 .
Eliminating y yields
{(D + 0.07)(D + 0.03) (0.01)(0.03)} [x] = (D + 0.03)[1.2] = 0.036 ,
which simplifies to
) *
D2 + 0.1D + 0.0018 [x] = 0.036 . (5.19)
The auxiliary equation, r 2 + 0.1r + 0.0018 = 0, has roots

!
1 1 18 1 7 5 7
r1 = = = 0.0765 ,
20 400 10000 20 100 100

5 + 7
r2 = 0.0235 .
100
Therefore, the general solution the corresponding homogeneous equation is
xh (t) = C1 er1 t + C2 er2 t .
Since the nonhomogeneous term in (5.19) is a constant (0.036), we are looking for a particular
solution of the form xp (t) = A =const. Substituting into (5.19) yields
0.0018A = 0.036 A = 20,
274
Exercises 5.2
and the general solution, x(t), is
x(t) = xh (t) + xp (t) = C1 er1 t + C2 er2 t + 20.
From the first equation in (5.18) we find

dx
y(t) = 100 {(D + 0.07)[x] 1.2} = 100 + 7x(t) 120
/ 0 / dt 0
= 100 r1 C1 er1 t + r2 C2 er2 t + 7 C1 er1 t + C2 er2 t + 20 120
# % # %
= 2 7 C1 e + 2 + 7 C2 er2 t + 20.
r1 t
The initial conditions imply
0 = x(0) = C1 + C2 + 20,
) * ) *
20 = y(0) = 2 7 C1 + 2 + 7 C2 + 20
C1 + C2 = 20,
) * ) *
2 7 C1 + 2 + 7 C2 = 0
+ , + ,
20 20
C1 = 10 + , C2 = 10 .
7 7
Thus the solution to the problem is
+ , + ,
20 20
x(t) = 10 + e 10 er2 t + 20 (kg),
r1 t
7 7
30 r1 t 30 r2 t
y(t) = e e + 20 (kg).
7 7
33. Since no solution flows in or out of the system from the tank B, we conclude that the solution
flows from the tank B to the tank A with the same rate as it does from A to B, that is, 1 L/min.
Furthermore, the solution flows in and out of the tank A with the same rate, 4 L/min, and so
the volume of the solution in the tank A (as well as in the tank B) remains constant, 100 L.
Thus, with x(t) and y(t) denoting the amount of salt in the tanks A and B, respectively, the
law rate of change = input rate output rate becomes
Tank A:
# y % x
x = 4 L/min 0.2 kg/L + 1 L/min kg/L kg/L (1 L/min + 4 L/min);
100 100
275
Chapter 5
Tank B:
x y
y = 1 L/min kg/L 1 L/min kg/L.
100 100
Hence, we obtain the system
x y
x = 0.8 + ,
20 100
x y
y = .
100 100
From the second equation, we find that x = 100y + y. Substitution into the first equation
yields
100y + y y
(100y + y) = 0.8 +
20 100
1
100y + 6y + y = 0.8 y + 0.06y + 0.0004y = 0.008 . (5.20)
25
The characteristic equation r 2 +0.06r+0.0004 = 0 of the corresponding homogeneous equation

has roots $
0.06 (0.06)2 4(1)(0.0004) 3 5
r= = ,
2 100
and so

yh (t) = c1 e(3 5)t/100
+ c2 e(3+ 5)t/100
is a general solution to the homogeneous equation. We now look for a particular solution of
the form yp (t) = c. Substitution into (5.20) gives
0.008
0.0004c = 0.008 c= = 20.
0.0004
Thus

y(t) = yp (t) + yh (t) = 20 + c1 e(3 5)t/100
+ c2 e(3+ 5)t/100
(5.21)
is a general solution to (5.20). Then

x(t) = y + 100y = 20 + (1 3 5)c1 e(3 5)t/100 + (1 3 + 5)c2 e(3+ 5)t/100

= 20 (2 + 5)c1 e(3 5)t/100 + (2 + 5)c2 e(3+ 5)t/100 . (5.22)
276
Exercises 5.2
Next, we use the initial condition, x(0) = 0, y(0) = 20, to find values of c1 and c2 .

20 (2 + 5)c1 + (2 + 5)c2 = 0, c1 = 10/ 5 ,

20 + c1 + c2 = 20 c2 = 10/ 5.
With these values, the solution given in (5.21), (5.22) becomes
J K J K
20 + 10 5 20 10 5
x(t) = 20 e(3 5)t/100 + e(3+ 5)t/100 ,
5 5
+ ,
+ ,
10 10
y(t) = 20 + e(3 5)t/100 e(3+ 5)t/100 .
5 5
35. Let x(t) and y(t) denote the temperatures at time t in zones A and B, respectively. Therefore,
the rate of change of temperature in zone A will be x (t) and in zone B will be y (t). We
can apply Newtons law of cooling to help us express these rates of change in an alternate
manner. Thus, we observe that the rate of change of the temperature in zone A due to the
outside temperature is k1 [100 x(t)] and due to the temperature in zone B is k2 [y(t) x(t)].
Since the time constant for heat transfer between zone A and the outside is 2 hrs (= 1/k1 ),
we see that k1 = 1/2. Similarly, we see that 1/k2 = 4 which implies that k2 = 1/4. Therefore,
since there is no heating or cooling source in zone A, we can write the equation for the rate
of change of the temperature in the attic as
1 1
x (t) = [100 x(t)] + [y(t) x(t)].
2 4
In the same way, we see that the rate of change of the temperature in zone B due to the
temperature of the attic is k3 [x(t) y(t)], where 1/k3 = 4; and the rate of change of the
temperature in this zone due to the outside temperature is k4 [100 y(t)], where 1/k4 = 4.
In this zone, however, we must consider the cooling due to the air conditioner. Since the
heat capacity of zone B is (1/2) F per thousand Btu and the air conditioner has the cooling
capacity of 24 thousand Btu per hr, we see that the air conditioner removes heat from this
zone at the rate of (1/2) 24 = 12 F/hr. (Since heat is removed from the house, this rate
will be negative.) By combining these observations, we see that the rate of change of the
temperature in zone B is given by
1 1
y (t) = 12 + [x(t) y(t)] + [100 y(t)].
4 4
277
Chapter 5
By simplifying these equations, we observe that this cooling problem satisfies the system
4x (t) + 3x(t) y(t) = 200,

x (t) + 4y (t) + 2y(t) = 52.
In operator notation, this system becomes
(4D + 3)[x] [y] = 200,

[x] + (4D + 2)[y] = 52.
Since we are interested in the temperature in the attic, x(t), we will eliminate the function
y(t) from the system above by applying (4D + 2) to the first equation and adding the resulting
equations to obtain
{(4D + 2)(4D + 3) 1} [x] = (4D + 2)[200] + 52 = 452

) *
16D 2 + 20D + 5 [x] = 452. (5.23)
This last equation is a linear equation with constant coecients whose corresponding homo-
geneous equation has the associated auxiliary equation 16r 2 + 20r + 5 = 0. By the quadratic
formula, the roots to this auxiliary equation are

5 + 5 5 5
r1 = 0.345 and r2 = 0.905 .
8 8
Therefore, the homogeneous equation associated with this equation has a general solution
given by
xh (t) = c1 er1 t + c2 er2 t ,
where r1 and r2 are given above. By the method of undetermined coecients, we observe that
a particular solution to equation (5.23) will have the form
xp (t) = A xp (t) = 0 xp (t) = 0.
Substituting these expressions into equation (5.23) yields
16xp + 20xp + 5xp = 5A = 452 A = 90.4 .
278
Exercises 5.2
Thus, a particular solution to the dierential equation given in (5.23) is xp (t) = 90.4 and the
general solution to this equation will be
x(t) = c1 er1 t + c2 er2 t + 90.4 ,

where r1 = (5 + 5)/8 and r2 = (5 5)/8. To determine the maximum temperature of
the attic, we will assume that zones A and B have suciently cool initial temperatures. (So
that, for example, c1 and c2 are negative.) Since r1 and r2 are negative, as t goes to infinity,
c1 er1 t and c2 er2 t each go to zero. Therefore, the maximum temperature that can be attained
in the attic will be
lim x(t) = 90.4 F.
t
37. In this problem, we combine the idea exploded in interconnected tanks problems,
rate of change = rate in rate out, (5.24)
with the Newtons law of cooling

dT
= K(T M). (5.25)
dt
Let x(t) and y(t) denote temperatures in rooms A and B, respectively.
Room A. It gets temperature only from the heater with a rate

1/4
rate in = 80, 000 Btu/h = 20 /h.
1000 Btu
Temperature goes out of the room A into the room B and outside with dierent coe-
cients of proportionality in (5.25): K1 = 1/2 and K2 = 1/4, respectively. Therefore,
rate out = rate into B + rate outside

1 1 3 1
= (x y) + (x 0) = x y.
2 4 4 2
Thus, (5.24) implies that
+ ,
3 1 3 1
x = 20 x y = 20 x + y.
4 2 4 2
279
Chapter 5
Room B. Similarly, we obtain

4 5
2 1 1 1 7
y = 1000 + (x y) (y 0) = 2 + x y.
1000 2 5 2 10
Hence, the system governing the temperature exchange is
x = 20 (3/4)x + (1/2)y,
y = 2 + (1/2)x (7/10)y.
We find the critical points of this system by solving
20 (3/4)x + (1/2)y = 0, 3x 2y = 80, x = 600/11 ,

2 + (1/2)x (7/10)y = 0 5x + 7y = 20 y = 460/11 .
Therefore, (600/11, 460/11) is the only critical point of the system. Analyzing the direction
field, we conclude that (600/11, 460/11) is an asymptotically stable node. Hence,
460
lim y(t) = 41.8 F.
t 11
(One can also find an explicit solution y(t) = 460/11 + c1 er1 t + c2 er2 t , where r1 < 0, r2 < 0,
to conclude that y(t) 460/11 as t .)
39. Let y be an arbitrary function dierentiable as many times as necessary. Note that, for a
dierential operator, say, A, A[y] is a function, and so we can use commutative, associative,
and distributive laws operating such functions.
(a) It is straightforward that
(A + B)[y] := A[y] + B[y] = B[y] + A[y] =: (B + A)[y].
To prove commutativity of the multiplication, we will use the linearity of the dierential
operator D, that is, D[x+y] = D[x]+D[y] and the fact that D i D j = D i+j = D j D i .
For the latter,
) * - . ) *(i) ) *(j) - . ) *
D iD j [y] := D i D j [y] = y (j) = y (i+j) = y (i) = D j D i [y] =: D j D i [y].
280
Exercises 5.2
Thus we have
J 2
K LJ 2
K M
-
. H H
(AB)[y] := A B[y] = aj D j bi D i [y]
j=0 i=0
J 2
KL 2 M 2
> L 2 MO
H H H H
:= aj D j bi D i [y] := aj D j bi D i [y]
j=0 i=0 j=0 i=0
2 H
H 2 2 H
H 2
) * ) *
= aj D j bi D i [y] = bi D i aj D j [y]
j=0 i=0 i=0 j=0
2
> L 2 MO J 2
KL 2 M
H H H H
= bi D i aj D j [y] =: bi D i aj D j [y]
i=0 j=0 i=0 j=0
J 2
K LJ 2
K M
H H - .
=: bi D i aj D j [y] = B A[y] =: (BA)[y].
i=0 j=0
(b) We have
{(A + B) + C} [y] := (A + B)[y] + C[y] := (A[y] + B[y]) + C[y]

= A[y] + (B[y] + C[y]) =: A[y] + (B + C)[y] =: {A + (B + C)} [y]
and
- . 8 - .9 - .
{(AB)C} [y] := (AB) C[y] := A B C[y] =: A (BC)[y] =: {A(BC)} [y].
(c) Using the linearity of dierential operators, we obtain

- . - .
{A(B + C)} [y] := A (B + C)[y] := A B[y] + C[y]
- . - .
= A B[y] +A C[y] =: (AB)[y] + (AC)[y] =: {(AB) + (AC)} [y].
41. As it was noticed in Example 2, we can treat a polynomial in D, that is, an expression
Pn i
Pn i
of the form p(D) = i=0 ai D , as a regular polynomial, i.e., p(r) = i=0 ai r , while per-
forming arithmetic operations. Hence, the factorization problem for p(D) is equivalent to the
factorization problem for p(r), which is the same as finding its roots.
$
3 32 4(4) 3 5
(a) r = = = 4, 1 D 2 + 3D 4 = (D + 4)(D 1).
2 2
281
Chapter 5
$
1 12 4(6) 1 5
(b) r = = = 3, 2 D 2 + D 6 = (D + 3)(D 2).
2 2
$
9 92 4(5)2 9 11
(c) r = = = 5, 1/2 2D 2 + 9D 5 = (D + 5)(2D 1).
4 4
2

(d) r = 2 D 2 = (D + 2)(D 2).
EXERCISES 5.3: Solving Systems and HigherOrder Equations Numerically, page 261
1. We isolate y (t) first and obtain an equivalent equation
y (t) = 3y(t) ty (t) + t2 .
Denoting x1 := y, x2 := y we conclude that
x1 = y = x2 ,
x2 = (y ) = y = 3y ty + t2 = 3x1 tx2 + t2 ,
with initial conditions x1 (0) = y(0) = 3, x2 (0) = y (0) = 6. Therefore, given initial value
problem is equivalent to
x1 = x2 ,
x2 = 3x1 tx2 + t2 ,
x1 (0) = 3, x2 (0) = 6.
3. Isolating y (4) (t), we get

y (4) (t) = y (3) (t) 7y(t) + cos t .
In this problem, we need four new variables for y(t), y (t), y (t), and y (3) (t). Thus we denote
x1 = y, x2 = y , x3 = y , and x4 = y (3) .
The initial conditions then become
x1 (0) = y(0) = 1, x2 (0) = y (0) = 1, x3 (0) = y (0) = 0, x4 (0) = y (3) (0) = 2.
We have
x1 = y = x2 ,
282
Exercises 5.3
x2 = (y ) = y = x3 ,
x3 = (y ) = y (3) = x4 ,
) *
x4 = y (3) = y (4) = y (3) 7y + cos t = x4 7x1 + cos t .
Hence, the required initial value problem for a system in normal form is
x1 = x2 ,
x2 = x3 ,
x3 = x4 ,
x4 = x4 7x1 + cos t,
x1 (0) = x2 (0) = 1, x3 (0) = 0, x4 (0) = 2 .
5. First we express the given system as
x = x y + 2t,
y = x y 1.
Setting x1 = x, x2 = x , x3 = y, x4 = y we obtain
x1 = x = x2 , x1 = x2 ,
x2 = x = x2 x3 + 2t , x2 = x2 x3 + 2t ,

x3 = y = x4 , x3 = x4 ,
x4 = y = x1 x3 1 x4 = x1 x3 1
with initial conditions x1 (3) = 5, x2 (3) = 2, x3 (3) = 1, and x4 (3) = 1.
7. In an equivalent form, we have a system
x = y + t,
2y 2x + 1
y = .
5
Setting
x1 = x, x2 = x , x3 = x , x4 = y, x5 = y ,
283
Chapter 5
we obtain a system in normal form
x1 = x2 ,
x2 = x3 ,
x3 = x4 + t ,
x4 = x5 ,
1
x5 = (2x4 2x3 + 1)
5
with initial conditions
x1 (0) = x2 (0) = x3 (0) = 4, x4 (0) = x5 (0) = 1.
9. To see how the improved Eulers method can be extended lets recall, from Section 3.6, the
improved Eulers method (pages 127128 of the text). For the initial value problem
x = f (t, x), x(t0 ) = x0 ,
the recursive formulas for the improved Eulers method are
tn+1 = tn + h,
h
xn+1 = xn + [f (tn , xn ) + f (tn + h, xn + hf (tn , xn ))] ,
2
where h is the step size. Now suppose we want to approximate the solution x1 (t), x2 (t) to the
system
x1 = f1 (t, x1 , x2 ) and x2 = f2 (t, x1 , x2 ),
that satisfies the initial conditions
x1 (t0 ) = a1 , x2 (t0 ) = a2 .
Let x1;n and x2;n denote approximations to x1 (tn ) and x2 (tn ), respectively, where tn = t0 + nh
for n = 0, 1, 2, . . .. The recursive formulas for the improved Eulers method are obtained by
forming the vector analogue of the scalar formula. We obtain
tn+1 = tn + h,
284
Exercises 5.3
h
x1;n+1 = x1;n + [f1 (tn , x1;n , x2;n )
2
+f1 (tn + h, x1;n + hf1 (tn , x1;n , x2;n ), x2;n + hf2 (tn , x1;n , x2;n ))],
h
x2;n+1 = x2;n + [f2 (tn , x1;n , x2;n )
2
+f2 (tn + h, x1;n + hf1 (tn , x1;n , x2;n ), x2;n + hf2 (tn , x1;n , x2;n ))].
The approach can be used more generally for systems of m equations in normal form.
Suppose we want to approximate the solution x1 (t), x2 (t), . . ., xm (t) to the system
x1 = f1 (t, x1 , x2 , . . . , xm ) ,
x2 = f2 (t, x1 , x2 , . . . , xm ) ,
..
.
xm = fm (t, x1 , x2 , . . . , xm ) ,
with the initial conditions
x1 (t0 ) = a1 , x2 (t0 ) = a2 , ... , xm (t0 ) = am .
We adapt the recursive formulas above to obtain
tn+1 = tn + h, n = 0, 1, 2, . . . ;
h
x1;n+1 = x1;n + [f1 (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ) + f1 (tn + h, x1;n + hf1 (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ),
2
x2;n + hf2 (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ), . . . , xm;n + hfm (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ))] ,
h
x2;n+1 = x2;n + [f2 (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ) + f2 (tn + h, x1;n + hf1 (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ),
2
x2;n + hf2 (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ), . . . , xm;n + hfm (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ))] ,
..
.
h
xm;n+1 = xm;n + [fm (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ) + fm (tn + h, x1;n + hf1 (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ),
2
x2;n + hf2 (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ), . . . , xm;n + hfm (tn , x1;n , x2;n , . . . , xm;n ))] .
11. See the answer in the text.
285
Chapter 5
17. Let x1 := u and x2 := v, and denote the independent variable by t (in order to be consistent
with formulas in Section 5.3). In new notation, we have an initial value problem
x1 = 3x1 4x2 ,
x2 = 2x1 3x2 ,
x1 (0) = x2 (0) = 1
for a system in normal form. Here
f1 (t, x1 , x2 ) = 3x1 4x2 , f2 (t, x1 , x2 ) = 2x1 3x2 .
Thus formulas for ki,j s in vectorized Runge-Kutta algorithm become
k1,1 = h(3x1;n 4x2;n ),

k2,1 = h(2x1;n 3x2;n ),
4 + , + ,5
k1,1 k2,1
k1,2 = h 3 x1;n + 4 x2;n + ,
2 2
4 + , + ,5
k1,1 k2,1
k2,2 = h 2 x1;n + 3 x2;n + ,
2 2
4 + , + ,5
k1,2 k2,2
k1,3 = h 3 x1;n + 4 x2;n + ,
2 2
4 + , + ,5
k1,2 k2,2
k2,3 = h 2 x1;n + 3 x2;n + ,
2 2
k1,4 = h [3 (x1;n + k1,3 ) 4 (x2;n + k2,3 )] ,
k2,4 = h [2 (x1;n + k1,3 ) 3 (x2;n + k2,3 )] .
With the inputs t0 = 0, x1;0 = x2;0 = 1, and step size h = 1 we compute
k1,1 = h(3x1;0 4x2;0 ) = 3(1) 4(1) = 1,

k2,1 = h(2x1;0 3x2;0 ) = 2(1) 3(1) = 1,
4 + , + ,5 + , + ,
k1,1 k2,1 1 1 1
k1,2 = h 3 x1;0 + 4 x2;0 + =3 1+ 4 1+ = ,
2 2 2 2 2
286
Exercises 5.3
4 + , + ,5 + , + ,
k1,1 k2,1 1 1 1
k2,2 = h 2 x1;0 + 3 x2;0 + =2 1+ 3 1+ = ,
2 2 2 2 2
4 + , + ,5 + , + ,
k1,2 k2,2 1/2 1/2 3
k1,3 = h 3 x1;0 + 4 x2;0 + =3 1+ 4 1+ = ,
2 2 2 2 4
4 + , + ,5 + , + ,
k1,2 k2,2 1/2 1/2 3
k2,3 = h 2 x1;0 + 3 x2;0 + =2 1+ 3 1+ = ,
2 2 2 2 4
+ , + ,
3 3 1
k1,4 = h [3 (x1;0 + k1,3 ) 4 (x2;0 + k2,3 )] = 3 1 + 4 1+ = ,
4 4 4
+ , + ,
3 3 1
k2,4 = h [2 (x1;0 + k1,3 ) 3 (x2;0 + k2,3 )] = 2 1 + 3 1+ = .
4 4 4
Using the recursive formulas, we find t1 = t0 + h = 0 + 1 = 1 and
1 (1) + 2(1/2) + 2(3/4) + (1/4) 3

x1;1 = x1;0 + (k1,1 + 2k1,2 + 2k1,3 + k1,4 ) = 1 + = ,
6 6 8
1 (1) + 2(1/2) + 2(3/4) + (1/4) 3
x2;1 = x2;0 + (k2,1 + 2k2,2 + 2k2,3 + k2,4 ) = 1 + =
6 6 8
as approximations to x1 (1) and x2 (1) with step h = 1.
We repeat the algorithm with h = 2m , m = 1, 2, . . . . The results of these computations are

listed in Table 5-A.
Table 5A: Approximations of the solution to Problem 17.
m h = 2m x1 (1; h) x2 (1; h)
0 1.0 0.375 0.375

1 0.5 0.36817 0.36817
2 0.25 0.36789 0.36789
We stopped at m = 2, since
1 1 1 1
1x1 (1; 21 ) x1 (1; 22 )1 = 1x2 (1; 21 ) x2 (1; 22 )1 = 0.36817 0.36789 = 0.00028 < 0.001 .
Hence u(1) = v(1) 0.36789 .
287
Chapter 5
18. For starting values we take t0 = 0, x0,1 = 10, and x0,2 = 15, which are determined by the
initial conditions. Here h = 0.1, and
f1 (t, x1 , x2 ) = (0.1)x1 x2 ,
f2 (t, x1 , x2 ) = x1 .
Now, using the definitions of tn , xi;n , ki,1 , ki,2 , ki,3 , and ki,4 on page 258 of the text, we have
k1,1 = hf1 (tn , x1;n , x2;n ) = h(0.1)x1;n x2;n ,

k2,1 = hf2 (tn , x1;n , x2;n ) = hx1;n ,
+ , + ,+ ,
h k1,1 k2,1 k1,1 k2,1
k1,2 = hf1 tn + , x1;n + , x2;n + = h(0.1) x1;n + x2;n + ,
2 2 2 2 2
+ , + ,
h k1,1 k2,1 k1,1
k2,2 = hf2 tn + , x1;n + , x2;n + = h x1;n + ,
2 2 2 2
+ , + ,+ ,
h k1,2 k2,2 k1,2 k2,2
k1,3 = hf1 tn + , x1;n + , x2;n + = h(0.1) x1;n + x2;n + ,
2 2 2 2 2
+ , + ,
h k1,2 k2,2 k1,2
k2,3 = hf2 tn + , x1;n + , x2;n + = h x1;n + ,
2 2 2 2
k1,4 = hf1 (tn + h, x1;n + k1,3 , x2;n + k2,3 ) = h(0.1) (x1;n + k1,3 ) (x2;n + k2,3 ) ,
k2,4 = hf2 (tn + h, x1;n + k1,3 , x2;n + k2,3 ) = h (x1;n + k1,3 ) .
Using these values, we find
tn+1 = tn + h = tn + 0.1 ,
1
x1;n+1 = x1;n + (k1,1 + 2k1,2 + 2k1,3 + k1,4 ) ,
6
1
x2;n+1 = x2;n + (k2,1 + 2k2,2 + 2k2,3 + k2,4 ) .
6
In Table 5-B we give approximate values for tn , x1;n , and x2;n .
From Table 5-B we see that the strength of the guerrilla troops, x1 , approaches zero, therefore
with the combat eectiveness coecients of 0.1 for guerrilla troops and 1 for conventional
troops the conventional troops win.
288
Exercises 5.3
Table 5B: Approximations of the solutions to Problem 18.
tn x1;n x2;n
0 10 15
0.1 3.124 9.353
0.2 1.381 7.254
0.3 0.707 6.256
0.4 0.389 5.726
0.5 0.223 5.428
21. First, we convert given initial value problem to an initial value problem for a normal system.
Let x1 (t) = H(t), x2 (t) = H (t). Then H (t) = x2 (t), x1 (0) = H(0) = 0, x2 (0) = H (0) = 0,
and we get
x1 = x2 , x1 = x2 ,
60 x1 = (77.7)x2 + (19.42)x22 , x2 = [60 x1 (19.42)x22] /77.7 ,
x1 (0) = x2 (0) = 0 x1 (0) = x2 (0) = 0.
Thus f1 (t, x1 , x2 ) = x2 , f2 (t, x1 , x2 ) = [60 x1 (19.42)x22 ] /77.7, t0 = 0, x1;0 = 0, and

x2;0 = 0. With h = 0.5, we need (5 0)/0.5 = 10 steps to approximate the solution over the
interval [0, 5]. Taking n = 0 in the vectorized Runge-Kutta algorithm, we approximate the
solution at t = 0.5.
k1,1 = hx2;0 = 0.5(0) = 0,

- . - .
k2,1 = h 60 x1;0 (19.42)x22;0 /77.7 = 0.5 60 (0) (19.42)(0)2 /77.7 = 0.38610 ,
+ , + ,
k2,1 0.38610
k1,2 = h x2;0 + = 0.5 (0) + = 0.09653 ,
2 2
L + , + ,2 M
k1,1 k2,1
k2,2 = h 60 x1;0 + (19.42) x2;0 + /77.7 = 0.38144 ,
2 2
+ , + ,
k2,2 0.38144
k1,3 = h x2;0 + = 0.5 (0) + = 0.09536 ,
2 2
289
Chapter 5
L + , + ,2 M
k1,2 k2,2
k2,3 = h 60 x1;0 + (19.42) x2;0 + /77.7 = 0.38124 ,
2 2
k1,4 = h (x2;0 + k2,3 ) = 0.5 ((0) + 0.38124) = 0.19062 ,
- .
k2,4 = h 60 (x1;0 + k1,3 ) (19.42) (x2;0 + k2,3 )2 /77.7 = 0.36732 .
Using the recursive formulas, we find
t1 = t0 + h = 0 + 0.5 = 0.5
1
x1 (0.5) x1;1 = x1;0 + (k1,1 + 2k1,2 + 2k1,3 + k1,4 ) = 0.09573 ,
6
1
x2 (0.5) x2;1 = x2;0 + (k2,1 + 2k2,2 + 2k2,3 + k2,4 ) = 0.37980 .
6
Next, we repeat the procedure with n = 1, 2, . . . , 9. The results of these computations (the
values of x1;n only) are presented in Table 5-C.
Table 5C: Approximations of the solution to Problem 21.
n tn x1;n H(tn) n tn x1;n H(tn)
0 0 0 6 3.0 2.75497
1 0.5 0.09573 7 3.5 3.52322
2 1.0 0.37389 8 4.0 4.31970
3 1.5 0.81045 9 4.5 5.13307
4 2.0 1.37361 10 5.0 5.95554
5 2.5 2.03111
23. Let x1 = y and x2 = y to give the initial value problem
x1 = f1 (t, x1 , x2 ) = x2 , x1 (0) = a,
x2 = f2 (t, x1 , x2 ) = x1 (1 + rx21 ) , x2 (0) = 0.
Now, using the definitions of tn , xi;n , ki,1 , ki,2 , ki,3 , and ki,4 on page 258 of the text, we have
k1,1 = hf1 (tn , x1;n , x2;n ) = hx2;n ,
290
Exercises 5.3
) *
k2,1 = hf2 (tn , x1;n , x2;n ) = hx1;n 1 + rx21;n ,
+ , + ,
h k1,1 k2,1 k2,1
k1,2 = hf1 tn + , x1;n + , x2;n + = h x2;n + ,
2 2 2 2
+ , + ,L + ,2 M
h k1,1 k2,1 k1,1 k1,1
k2,2 = hf2 tn + , x1;n + , x2;n + = h x1;n + 1 + r x1;n + ,
2 2 2 2 2
+ , + ,
h k1,2 k2,2 k2,2
k1,3 = hf1 tn + , x1;n + , x2;n + = h x2;n + ,
2 2 2 2
+ , + ,L + ,2 M
h k1,2 k2,2 k1,2 k1,2
k2,3 = hf2 tn + , x1;n + , x2;n + = h x1;n + 1 + r x1;n + ,
2 2 2 2 2
k1,4 = hf1 (tn + h, x1;n + k1,3 , x2;n + k2,3 ) = h (x2;n + k2,3 ),
- .
k2,4 = hf2 (tn + h, x1;n + k1,3 , x2;n + k2,3 ) = h (x1;n + k1,3 ) 1 + r (x1;n + k1,3 )2 .
Using these values, we find
tn+1 = tn + h = tn + 0.1 ,
1
x1;n+1 = x1;n + (k1,1 + 2k1,2 + 2k1,3 + k1,4 ) ,
6
1
x2;n+1 = x2;n + (k2,1 + 2k2,2 + 2k2,3 + k2,4 ) .
6
In Table 5-D we give the approximate period for r = 1 and 2 with a = 1, 2 and 3, from this
we see that the period varies as r is varied or as a is varied.
Table 5D: Approximate period of the solution to Problem 23.
r a=1 a=2 a=3
1 4.8 3.3 2.3

2 4.0 2.4 1.7
25. With x1 = y, x2 = y , and x3 = y , the initial value problem can be expressed as the system
x1 = x2 , x1 (0) = 1,
x2 = x3 , x2 (0) = 1,
x3 = t x3 x21 , x3 (0) = 1.
291
Chapter 5
Here
f1 (t, x1 , x2 , x3 ) = x2 ,
f2 (t, x1 , x2 , x3 ) = x3 ,
f3 (t, x1 , x2 , x3 ) = t x3 x21 .
Since we are computing the approximations for c = 1, the initial value for h in Step 1 of the
algorithm in Appendix E of the text is h = (1 0)20 = 1. The equations in Step 3 are
k1,1 = hf1 (t, x1 , x2 , x3 ) = hx2 ,

k2,1 = hf2 (t, x1 , x2 , x3 ) = hx3 ,
) *
k3,1 = hf3 (t, x1 , x2 , x3 ) = h t x3 x21 ,
+ , + ,
h k1,1 k2,1 k3,1 k2,1
k1,2 = hf1 t + , x1 + , x2 + , x3 + = h x2 + ,
2 2 2 2 2
+ , + ,
h k1,1 k2,1 k3,1 k3,1
k2,2 = hf2 t + , x1 + , x2 + , x3 + = h x3 + ,
2 2 2 2 2
+ , L + ,2 M
h k1,1 k2,1 k3,1 h k3,1 k1,1
k3,2 = hf3 t + , x1 + , x2 + , x3 + = h t + x3 x1 + ,
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
+ , + ,
h k1,2 k2,2 k3,2 k2,2
k1,3 = hf1 t + , x1 + , x2 + , x3 + = h x2 + ,
2 2 2 2 2
+ , + ,
h k1,2 k2,2 k3,2 k3,2
k2,3 = hf2 t + , x1 + , x2 + , x3 + = h x3 + ,
2 2 2 2 2
+ , L + ,2 M
h k1,2 k2,2 k3,2 h k3,2 k1,2
k3,3 = hf3 t + , x1 + , x2 + , x3 + = h t + x3 x1 + ,
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
k1,4 = hf1 (t + h, x1 + k1,3 , x2 + k2,3 , x3 + k3,3 ) = h (x2 + k2,3 ) ,
k2,4 = hf2 (t + h, x1 + k1,3 , x2 + k2,3 , x3 + k3,3 ) = h (x3 + k3,3 ) ,
- .
k3,4 = hf3 (t + h, x1 + k1,3 , x2 + k2,3 , x3 + k3,3 ) = h t + h x3 k3,3 (x1 + k1,3 )2 .
Using the starting values t0 = 0, a1 = 1, a2 = 0, and a3 = 1, we obtain the first approximations
x1 (1; 1) = 1.29167 ,
x2 (1; 1) = 0.28125 ,
292
Exercises 5.4
x3 (1; 1) = 0.03125 .
Repeating the algorithm with h = 21 , 22 , 23 we obtain the approximations in Table 5-E.
Table 5E: Approximations of the Solution to Problem 25.
n h y(1) x1 (1; 2n ) x2(1; 2n ) x3(1; 2n )
0 1.0 1.29167 0.28125 0.03125

1 0.5 1.26039 0.34509 0.06642
2 0.25 1.25960 0.34696 0.06957
3 0.125 1.25958 0.34704 0.06971
We stopped at n = 3 since
1 1 1 1
1 x1 (1; 23 ) x1 (1; 22 ) 1 1 1.25958 1.25960 1
1 1=1 1 = 0.00002 < 0.01 ,
1 x1 (1; 23 ) 1 1 1.25958 1
1 1 1 1
1 x2 (1; 23 ) x2 (1; 22 ) 1 1 0.34704 0.34696 1
1 1=1 1 = 0.00023 < 0.01 , and
1 x2 (1; 23 ) 1 1 0.34704 1
1 1 1 1
1 x3 (1; 23 ) x3 (1; 22 ) 1 1 0.06971 + 0.06957 1
1 1=1 1 = 0.00201 < 0.01 .
1 x3 (1; 23 ) 1 1 0.06971 1
Hence
) *
y(1) x1 1; 23 = 1.25958 ,
with tolerance 0.01 .
EXERCISES 5.4: Introduction to the Phase Plane, page 274
1. Substitution of x(t) = e3t , y(t) = et into the system yields

dx d ) 3t * ) *3
= e = 3e3t = 3 et = 3y 3 ,
dt dt
293
Chapter 5
dy d ) t*
= e = et = y.
dt dt
Thus, given pair of functions is a solution. To sketch the trajectory of this solution, we express
x as a function of y.
) *3
x = e3t = et = y 3 for y = et > 0.
Since y = et is an increasing function, the flow arrows are directed away from the origin. See
3. In this problem, f (x, y) = x y, g(x, y) = x2 + y 2 1. To find the critical point set, we solve
the system
x y = 0, x = y,
2 2

x +y 1 = 0 x + y 2 = 1.
2
Eliminating y yields
1
2x2 = 1 x = .
2
Substituting x into the first equation, we find the corresponding value for y. Thus the critical

points of the given system are (1/ 2, 1/ 2) and (1/ 2, 1/ 2).
5. In this problem,
f (x, y) = x2 2xy, g(x, y) = 3xy y 2,
and so we find critical points by solving the system
x2 2xy = 0, x(x 2y) = 0,

2

3xy y = 0 y(3x y) = 0.
From the first equation we conclude that either x = 0 or x = 2y. Substituting these values
into the second equation, we get
x=0 y[3(0) y] = 0 y 2 = 0 y = 0;
x = 2y y[3(2y) y] = 0 5y 2 = 0 y = 0, x = 2(0) = 0.
Therefore, (0, 0) is the only critical point.
294
Exercises 5.4
6. We see by Definition 1 on page 266 of the text that we must solve the system of equations
given by
y 2 3y + 2 = 0,
(x 1)(y 2) = 0.
By factoring the first equation above, we find that this system becomes
(y 1)(y 2) = 0,
(x 1)(y 2) = 0.
Thus, we observe that if y = 2 and x is any constant, then the system of dierential equations
given in this problem will be satisfied. Therefore, one family of critical points is given by the
line y = 2. If y = 2, then the system of equations above simplifies to y 1 = 0, and x 1 = 0.
Hence, another critical point is the point (1, 1).
7. Here f (x, y) = y 1, g(x, y) = ex+y . Thus the phase plane equation becomes
dy ex+y ex ey
= = .
dx y1 y1
3 3
y x y
(y 1)e dy = e dx (y 1)e dy = ex dx
yey + C = ex or ex + yey = C.
9. The phase plane equation for this system is
dy g(x, y) ex + y
= = .
dx f (x, y) 2y x
We rewrite this equation in symmetric form,
(ex + y) dx + (2y x) dy = 0,
and check it for exactness.

M
= [(ex + y)] = 1,
y y
295
Chapter 5
N
= (2y x) = 1.
x x
Therefore, the equation is exact. We have
3 3
F (x, y) = N(x, y) dy = (2y x) dy = y 2 xy + g(x);
) 2 *
M(x, y) = F (x, y) = y xy + g(x) = y + g (x) = (ex + y)
x x 3
g (x) = ex g(x) = (ex ) dx = ex .
Hence, a general solution to the phase plane equation is given implicitly by
F (x, y) = y 2 xy ex = C or ex + xy y 2 = C = c,
where c is an arbitrary constant.
11. In this problem, f (x, y) = 2y and g(x, y) = 2x. Therefore, the phase plane equation for given
system is
dy 2x x
= = .
dx 2y y
Separation variables and integration yield
3 3
y dy = x dx y dy = x dx
1 2 1 2
y = x +C y 2 x2 = c.
2 2
Thus, the trajectories are hyperbolas if c = 0 and, for c = 0, the lines y = x.
In the upper half-plane, y > 0, we have x = 2y > 0 and, therefore, x(t) increases. In the
lower half-plane, x < 0 and so x(t) decreases. This implies that solutions flow from the left
to the right in the upper half-plane and from the right to the left in the lower half-plane. See
Figure B.30 in the text.
13. First, we will find the critical points of this system. Therefore, we solve the system
(y x)(y 1) = 0,
(x y)(x 1) = 0.
296
Exercises 5.4
Notice that both of these equations will be satisfied if y = x. Thus, x = C and y = C, for
any fixed constant C, will be a solution to the given system of dierential equations and one
family of critical points is the line y = x. We also see that we have a critical point at the
point (1, 1). (This critical point is, of course, also on the line y = x.)
Next we will find the integral curves. Therefore, we must solve the first order dierential
equation given by
dy dy/dt (x y)(x 1) dy 1x
= = = .
dx dx/dt (y x)(y 1) dx y1
We can solve this last dierential equation by the method of separation of variables. Thus,
we have
3 3
(y 1)dy = (1 x)dx
y2 x2
y = x +C
2 2
x2 2x + y 2 2y = 2C.
By completing the square, we obtain
(x 1)2 + (y 1)2 = c,
where c = 2C +2. Therefore, the integral curves are concentric circles with centers at the point
(1, 1), including the critical point for the system of dierential equations. The trajectories
associated with the constants c = 1, 4, and 9, are sketched in Figure B.31 in the answers of
the text.
Finally we will determine the flow along the trajectories. Notice that the variable t imparts a
flow to the trajectories of a solution to a system of dierential equations in the same manner
as the parameter t imparts a direction to a curve written in parametric form. We will find this
flow by determining the regions in the xy-plane where x(t) is increasing (moving from left to
right on each trajectory) and the regions where x(t) is decreasing (moving from right to left on
each trajectory). Therefore, we will use four cases to study the equation dx/dt = (yx)(y1),
the first equation in our system.
297
Chapter 5
Case 1 : y > x and y < 1. (This region is above the line y = x but below the line y = 1.)
In this case, y x > 0 but y 1 < 0. Thus, dx/dt = (y x)(y 1) < 0. Hence, x(t)
will be decreasing here. Therefore, the flow along the trajectories will be from right to
left and so the movement is clockwise.
Case 2 : y > x and y > 1. (This region is above the lines y = x and y = 1.) In this case,
we see that y x > 0 and y 1 > 0. Hence, dx/dt = (y x)(y 1) > 0. Thus, x(t) will
be increasing and the flow along the trajectories in this region will still be clockwise.
Case 3 : y < x and y < 1. (This region is below the lines y = x and y = 1.) In this case,
y x < 0 and y 1 < 0. Thus, dx/dt > 0 and so x(t) is increasing. Thus, the movement
is from left to right and so the flow along the trajectories will be counterclockwise.
Case 4 : y < x and y > 1. (This region is below the line y = x but above the line y = 1.)
In this case, y x < 0 and y 1 > 0. Thus, dx/dt < 0 and so x(t) will be decreasing
here. Therefore, the flow is from right to left and, thus, counterclockwise here also.
Therefore, above the line y = x the flow is clockwise and below that line the flow is counter-
clockwise. See Figure B.31 in the answers of the text.
15. From Definition 1 on page 266 of the text, we must solve the system of equations given by
2x + y + 3 = 0,
3x 2y 4 = 0.
By eliminating y in the first equation we obtain
x+2 =0
and by eliminating x in the first equation we obtain
y + 1 = 0.
Thus, we observe that x = 2 and y = 1 will satisfy both equations. Therefore (2, 1) is a
critical point.
From Figure B.32 in the answers of the text we see that all solutions passing near the point
(2, 1) do not stay close to it therefore the critical point (2, 1) is unstable.
298
Exercises 5.4
17. For critical points, we solve the system
f (x, y) = 0, 2x + 13y = 0, 2(2y) + 13y = 0, y = 0,

g(x, y) = 0 x 2y = 0 x = 2y x = 0.
Therefore, the system has just one critical point, (0, 0). The direction field is shown in
Figure B.33 in the text. From this picture we conclude that (0, 0) is a center (stable).
19. We set v = y . Then y = (y ) = v and so given equation is equivalent to the system
y = v, y = v,

v y = 0 v = y.
In this system, f (y, v) = v and g(y, v) = y. For critical points we solve
f (y, v) = v = 0, y = 0,

g(y, v) = y = 0 v=0
and conclude that, in yv-plane, the system has only one critical point, (0, 0). In the upper
half-plane, y = v > 0 and, therefore, y increases and solutions flow to the right; similarly,
solutions flow to the left in the lower half-plane. See Figure B.34 in the answers of the text.
The phase plane equation for the system is

dv dv/dx y
= = v dv = y dy v 2 y 2 = c.
dy dy/dx v
Thus, the integral curves are hyperbolas for c = 0 and lines v = y for c = 0. On the line
v = y, the solutions flow into the critical point (0, 0), whereas solutions flow away from (0, 0)
on v = y. So, (0, 0) is a saddle point (unstable).
21. First we convert the given equation into a system of first order equations involving the func-
tions y(t) and v(t) by using the substitution
v(t) = y (t) v (t) = y (t).
Therefore, this equation becomes the system
y = v,
v = y y 5 = y (1 + y 4) .
299
Chapter 5
To find the critical points, we solve the system of equations given by v = 0 and y (1 + y 4 ) = 0.
This system is satisfied only when v = 0 and y = 0. Thus, the only critical point is the point
(0, 0). To find the integral curves, we solve the first order equation given by
dv dv/dt y y 5
= = .
dy dy/dt v
This is a separable equation and can be written as
) * v2 y2 y6
v dv = y y 5 dy = +C
2 2 6
3v 2 + 3y 2 + y 6 = c (c = 6C),
where we have integrated to obtain the second equation above. Therefore, the integral curves
for this system are given by the equations 3v 2 + 3y 2 + y 6 = c for each positive constant c.
To determine the flow along the trajectories, we will examine the equation dy/dt = v. Thus,
we see that
dy dy
> 0 when v > 0, and < 0 when v < 0.
dt dt
Therefore, y will be increasing when v > 0 and decreasing when v < 0. Hence, above the
y-axis the flow will be from left to right and below the x-axis the flow will be from right to
left. Thus, the flow on these trajectories will be clockwise (Figure B.35 in the answers of the
text). Thus (0, 0) is a center (stable).
23. With v = y , v = y , the equation transforms to the system
y = v, y = v,
(5.26)
v + y y4 = 0 v = y 4 y.
Therefore, f (y, v) = v and g(y, v) = y 4 y = y(y 3 1). We find critical points by solving
v = 0, v = 0,

y(y 3 1) = 0 y = 0 or y = 1.
Hence, system (5.26) has two critical points, (0, 0) and (1, 0).
In the upper half plane, y = v > 0 and so solutions flow to the right; similarly, solutions flow
to the left in the lower half-plane. See Figure B.36 in the text for the direction field. This
300
Exercises 5.4
figure indicates that (0, 0) is a stable critical point (center) whereas (1, 0) is a saddle point
(unstable).
25. This system has two critical points, (0, 0) and (1, 0), which are solutions to the system
y = 0,
x + x3 = 0.
The direction field for this system is depicted in Figure B.37. From this figure we conclude
that
(a) the solution passing through the point (0.25, 0.25) flows around (0, 0) and thus is periodic;
(b) for the solution (x(t), y(t)) passing through the point (2, 2), y(t) as t , and so
this solution is not periodic;
(c) the solution passing through the critical point (1, 0) is a constant (equilibrium) solution
and so is periodic.
27. The direction field for given system is shown in Figure B.38 in the answers of the text. From
the starting point, (1, 1), following the direction arrows the solution flows down and to the left,
crosses the x-axis, has a turning point in the fourth quadrant, and then does to the left and
up toward the critical point (0, 0). Thus we predict that, as t , the solution (x(t), y(t))
approaches (0, 0).
29. (a) The phase plane equation for this system is
dy 3y
= .
dx x
It is separable. Separating variables and integrating, we get
dy 3dx
= ln |y| = 3 ln |x| + C y = cx3 .
y x
So, integral curves are cubic curves. Since in the right half-plane x = x > 0, in the left
half-plane x < 0, the solutions flow to the right in the right half-plane and to the left
301
Chapter 5
in the left half-plane. Solutions starting on the y-axis stay on it (x = 0); they flow up
if the initial point is in the upper half-plane (because y = y > 0) and flow down if the
initial point in the lower half-plane. This matches the figure for unstable node.
(b) Solving the phase plane equation for this system, we get
dy 4x
= y dy = 4x dx y 2 + 4x2 = C.
dx y
Thus the integral curves are ellipses. (Also, notice that the solutions flow along these
ellipses in clockwise direction because x increases in the upper half-plane and decreases
in the lower half-plane.) Therefore, here we have a center (stable).
(c) Solving 5x + 2y > 0 and x 4y > 0 we find that x increases in the half-plane y > 5x
and decreases in the half-plane y < 5x, and y increases in the half-plane y < x/4 and

decreases in the half-plane y > x/4. This leads to the scheme for the solutions

flows. Thus all solutions approach the critical point (0, 0), as t , which corresponds
to a stable node.
(d) An analysis, similar to that in (c), shows that all the solutions flow away from (0, 0).
Among pictures shown in Figure 5.7, only the unstable node and the unstable spiral have
this feature. Since the unstable node is the answer to (a), we have the unstable spiral in
this case.
(e) The phase plane equation

dy 4x 3y
= ,
dx 5x 3y
has two linear solutions, y = 2x and y = 2x/3. (One can find them by substituting
y = ax into the above phase plane equation and solving for a.) Solutions starting from
a point on y = 2x in the first quadrant, have x = 5x 3(2x) = x < 0 and so flow
toward (0, 0); similarly, solutions, starting from a point on this line in the third quadrant,
have x = x > 0 and, again, flow to (0, 0). On the other line, y = 2x/3, the picture
is opposite: in the first quadrant, x = 5x 3(2x/3) = 3x > 0, and x < 0 in the third
quadrant. Therefore, there are two lines, passing through the critical point (0, 0), such
302
Exercises 5.4
that solutions to the system flow into (0, 0) on one of them and flow away from (0, 0) on
the other. This is the case of a saddle (unstable) point.
(f) The only remaining picture is the asymptotically stable spiral. (One can also get a

diagram for solutions flows with just one matching picture in Figure 5.7.)

31. (a) Setting y = v and so y = v , we transform given equation to a first order system
dy
= v,
dx
dv
= f (y).
dx
(b) By the chain rule,
Q
dv dv dx dv dy f (y) dv f (y)
= = = = .
dy dx dy dx dx v dy v
This equation is separable. Separation variables and integration yield
3 3
v dv = f (y) dy v dv = f (y) dy
1 2
v = F (y) + K,
2
where F (y) is an antiderivative of f (y). Substituting back v = y gives the required.
33. Since S(t) and I(t) represent population and we cannot have a negative population, we are
only interested in the first quadrant of the SI-plane.
(a) In order to find the trajectory corresponding to the initial conditions I(0) = 1 and
S(0) = 700, we must solve the first order equation
dI dI/dt aSI bI aS b
= = =
dS dS/dt aSI aS
dI b 1
= 1 + . (5.27)
dS aS
By integrating both sides of equation (5.27) with respect to S, we obtain the integral
curves given by
b
I(S) = S + ln S + C.
a
303
Chapter 5
A sketch of this curve for a = 0.003 and b = 0.5 is shown in Figure B.39 in the answers
of the text.
(b) From the sketch in Figure B.39 in the answers of the text we see that the peak number
of infected people is 295.
(c) The peak number of infected people occurs when dI/dS = 0. From equation (5.27) we
have
dI b 1
= 0 = 1 + .
dS aS
Solving for S we obtain
b 0.5
S= = 167 people.
a 0.003
35. (a) We denote v(t) = x (t) to transform the equation
d2 x 1
= x +
dt2 x
to an equivalent system of two first order dierential equations, that is
dx
= v,
dt
dv 1
= x + .
dt x
(b) The phase plane equation in xv-plane for the system in (a) is
dv x + 1/( x)
= .
dx v
This equation is separable. Separating variables and integrating, we obtain

+ , 3 3 + ,
1 1
v dv = x + dx v dv = x + dx
x x
1 2 1
v = x2 ln | x| + C1 v 2 = C x2 2 ln | x|
2 $ 2
v = C x2 2 ln( x) .
(The absolute value sign is not necessary because x < .)
304
Exercises 5.4
(c) To find critical points for the system in (a), we solve
v = 0, v = 0, v = 0,

1 2 4
x + =0 x2 x + 1 = 0 x= .
x 2
For 0 < < 2, 2 4 < 0 and so both roots are complex numbers. However, for > 2
there are two distinct real solutions,

2 4 + 2 4
x1 = and x2 = ,
2 2
and the critical points are
+ , + ,
2 4 + 2 4
,0 and ,0 .
2 2
(d) The phase plane diagrams for = 1 and = 3 are shown in Figures B.40 and B.41 in
the answers section of the text.
(e) From Figures B.40 we conclude that, for = 1, all solution curves approach the vertical
line x = 1(= ). This means that the bar is attracted to the magnet. The case = 3
is more complicated. The behavior of the bar depends on the initial displacement x(0)
and the initial velocity v(0) = x (0). From Figure B.41 we see that (with v(0) = 0) if
x(0) is small enough, then the bar will oscillate about the position x = x1 ; if x(0) is
close enough to , then the bar will be attracted to the magnet. It is also possible that,
with an appropriate combination of x(0) and v(0), the bar will come to rest at the saddle
point (x2 , 0).
37. (a) Denoting y = v, we have y = v , and (with m = = k = 1) (16) can be written as a

system
y = v,

if |y| < 1, v = 0, if |y| < 1, v = 0,
y,
0,

v = y + sign(y), if |y| 1, v = 0, = y + sign(y), if |y| 1, v = 0,

sign(v), if v = 0 y sign(v), if v = 0.
305
Chapter 5
(b) The condition v = 0 corresponds to the third case in (5.28), i.e., the system has the form
y = v,
v = y sign(v).
The phase plane equation for this system is
dv dv/dt y sign(v)
= = .
dy dy/dt v
We consider two cases.
1) v > 0. In this case sign(v) = 1 and we have
dv y 1
= v dv = (y + 1)dy
dy v
3 3
v dv = (y + 1)dy
1 2 1
v = (y + 1)2 + C v 2 + (y + 1)2 = c,
2 2
where c = 2C.
2) v < 0. In this case sign(v) = 1 and we have
dv y + 1
= v dv = (y 1)dy
dy v
3 3
v dv = (y 1)dy
1 2 1
v = (y 1)2 + C v 2 + (y 1)2 = c.
2 2
(c) The equation v 2 + (y + 1)2 = c defines a circle in the yv-plane centered at (1, 0) and of

the radius c if c > 0, and it is the empty set if c < 0. The condition v > 0 means that
we have to take only the half of these circles lying in the upper half plane. Moreover, the
first equation, y = v, implies that trajectories flow from left to right. Similarly, in the
lower half plane, v < 0, we have concentric semicircles v 2 + (y 1)2 = c, c 0, centered
at (1, 0) and flowing from right to left.
306
Exercises 5.5
(d) For the system found in (a),
f (y, v) = v,

if |y| < 1, v = 0,
0,

g(y, v) = y + sign(y), if |y| 1, v = 0,

y sign(v), if v = 0.
Since f (y, v) = 0 v = 0 and

>
0, if |y| < 1,
g(y, 0) =
y + sign(y), if |y| 1,
we consider two cases. If y < 1, then g(y, 0) 0. This means that any point of the
interval 1 < y < 1 is a critical point. If |y| 1, then g(y, 0) = y + sign(y) which is 0
if y = 1. Thus the critical point set is the segment v = 0, 1 y 1.
(e) According to (c), the mass released at (7.5, 0) goes in the lower half plane from right to
left along a semicircle centered at (1, 0). The radius of this semicircle is 7.5 1 = 6.5,
and its other end is (1 6.5, 0) = (5.5, 0). From this point, the mass goes from left to
right in the upper half plane along the semicircle centered at (1, 0) and of the radius
1 (5.5) = 4.5, and comes to the point (1 + 4.5, 0) = (3.5, 0). Then the mass
again goes from right to left in the lower half plane along the semicircle centered at
(1, 0) and of the radius 3.5 1 = 2.5, and comes to the point (1 2.5, 0) = (1.5, 0).
From this point, the mass goes in the upper half plane from left to right along the
semicircle centered at (1, 0) and of the radius 1 (1.5) = 0.5, and comes to the
point (1 + 0.5, 0) = (0.5, 0). Here it comes to rest because | 0.5| < 1, and there is
not a lower semicircle starting at this point. See the colored curve in Figure B.42 of the
text.
EXERCISES 5.5: Coupled Mass-Spring Systems, page 284
1. For the mass m1 there is only one force acting on it; that is the force due to the spring with
constant k1 . This equals k1 (x y). Hence, we get
m1 x = k1 (x y).
307
Chapter 5
For the mass m2 there are two forces acting on it: the force due to the spring with constant
k2 is k2 y; and the force due to the spring with constant k1 is k1 (y x). So we get
m2 y = k1 (x y) k2 y.
So the system is
m1 x = k1 (y x),
m2 y = k1 (y x) k2 y,
or, in operator form,

) *
m1 D 2 + k1 [x] k1 y = 0,
/ 0
k1 x + m2 D 2 + (k1 + k2 ) [y] = 0.
With m1 = 1, m2 = 2, k1 = 4, and k2 = 10/3, we get
(D 2 + 4) [x] 4y = 0,
(5.28)
4x + (2D 2 + 22/3) [y] = 0,
with initial conditions:
x(0) = 1, x (0) = 0, y(0) = 0, y (0) = 0.
Multiplying the second equation of the system given in (5.28) by 4, applying (2D 2 + 22/3) to
the first equation of this system, and adding the results, we get
+ ,
) 2 * 2 22
D + 4 2D + [x] 16x = 0
3
+ ,
4 46 2 40
2D + D + [x] = 0
3 3
) 4 *
3D + 23D 2 + 20 [x] = 0.
The characteristic equation is

3r 4 + 23r 2 + 20 = 0,
308
Exercises 5.5
which is a quadratic in r 2 . So

2 23 529 240 23 17
r = = .
6 6
Since 20/3 and 1 are negative, the roots of the characteristic equation are i1 and i2 ,
where !
20
1 = , 2 = 1.
3
Hence
x(t) = c1 cos 1 t + c2 sin 1 t + c3 cos 2 t + c4 sin 2 t.
Solving the first equation of the system given in (5.28) for y, we get
1) 2 * 1 -) 2 * ) *
y(t) = D + 4 [x] = 1 + 4 c1 cos 1 t + 12 + 4 c2 sin 1 t
4 4 ) * ) * .
+ 22 + 4 c3 cos 2 t + 22 + 4 c4 sin 2 t .
Next we substitute into the initial conditions. Setting x(0) = 1, x (0) = 0 yields
1 = c1 + c3 ,
0 = c2 1 + c4 2 .
From the initial conditions y(0) = 0, y (0) = 0, we get

1 -) 2 * ) * .
0= 1 + 4 c1 + 22 + 4 c3 ,
4
1- ) 2 * ) * .
0= 1 1 + 4 c2 + 2 22 + 4 c4 .
4
The solution to the above system is
9 8
c2 = c4 = 0, c1 = , c3 = ,
17 17
which yields the solutions
!
9 20 8
x(t) = cos t cos t ,
17 3 17
!
6 20 6
y(t) = cos t cos t .
17 3 17
309
Chapter 5
3. We define the displacements of masses from equilibrium, x, y, and z, as in Example 2. For

each mass, there are two forces acting on it due to Hooks law.
For the mass on the left,
F11 = kx and F12 = k(y x);
for the mass in the middle,
F21 = k(y x) and F22 = k(z y);
finally, for the mass on the right,
F31 = k(z y) and F32 = kz.
Applying Newtons second law for each mass, we obtain the following system
mx = kx + k(y x),
my = k(y x) + k(z y),
mz = k(z y) kz,

) *
mD 2 + 2k [x] ky = 0,
) *
kx + mD 2 + 2k [y] kz = 0,
) *
ky + mD 2 + 2k [z] = 0.
From the first equation, we express

1) *
y= mD 2 + 2k [x] (5.29)
k
and substitute this expression into the other two equations to get
4 5
) 2
* 1) 2
*
kx + mD + 2k mD + 2k [x] kz = 0,
k
) * ) *
mD 2 + 2k [x] + mD 2 + 2k [z] = 0.
310
Exercises 5.5
The first equation yields

6 7 6 7
1) 2
* 2 1 ) 2
*2
z = x + mD + 2k [x] = mD + 2k 1 [x], (5.30)
k k2
and so
46 7 5
) 2
* ) 2
* 1 ) 2
*2
mD + 2k [x] + mD + 2k mD + 2k 1 [x]
k2
6 7
) 2
* 1 ) 2
*2
= mD + 2k mD + 2k 2 [x] = 0.
k2
The characteristic equation for this homogeneous linear equation with constant coecients is
6 7
) 2 * 1 ) 2 *2
mr + 2k mr + 2k 2 = 0,
k2
which splits onto two equations,
!
2 2k
mr + 2k = 0 r = i (5.31)
m
and
1 ) 2 *2 ) 2 *2
mr + 2k 2 = 0 mr + 2k 2k 2 = 0
k2 # %# %
mr 2 + 2k 2k mr 2 + 2k + 2k = 0
" "

(2 2)k (2 + 2)k
r = i , r = i . (5.32)
m m
Solutions (5.31) and (5.32) give normal frequences
! " "

1 2k 1 (2 2)k 1 (2 + 2)k
1 = , 2 = , 3 = .
2 m 2 m 2 m
Thus, a general solution x(t) has the form x(t) = x1 (t) + x2 (t) + x3 (t), where functions
xj (t) = c1j cos(2j t) + c2j sin(2j t).
Note that xj s satisfy the following dierential equations:

) *
mD 2 + 2k [x1 ] = 0,
311
Chapter 5
# %
mD 2 + 2k
2k [x2 ] = 0, (5.33)
# %
mD 2 + 2k + 2k [x3 ] = 0.
For normal modes, we find solutions yj (t) and zj (t), corresponding to xj , j = 1, 2, and 3 by
using (5.29), (5.30), and identities (5.33).
1 :
1) *
y1 = mD 2 + 2k [x1 ] 0,
k
6 7
1) 2
*2
z1 = mD + 2k 1 [x1 ] = x1 ;
k
2 :
6 # 7
1) 2
* 1 2
%
y2 = mD + 2k [x2 ] = mD + 2k 2k + 2 [x2 ] = 2x2 ,
k k
6 7 64 5 7
1) 2
*2 1) 2
*2
z2 = mD + 2k 1 [x2 ] = mD + 2k 2 + 1 [x2 ] = x2 ;
k k
3 :
6 # 7
1) 2
* 1 2
%
y3 = mD + 2k [x3 ] = mD + 2k + 2k 2 [x3 ] = 2x3 ,
k k
6 7 64 5 7
1) 2
*2 1) 2
*2
z3 = mD + 2k 1 [x3 ] = mD + 2k 2 + 1 [x3 ] = x3 ;
k k
5. This spring system is similar to the system in Example 2 on page 282 of the text, except the
middle spring has been replaced by a dashpot. We proceed as in Example 1. Let x and y
represent the displacement of masses m1 and m2 to the right of their respective equilibrium
positions. The mass m1 has a force F1 acting on its left side due to the left spring and a force
F2 acting on its right side due to the dashpot. Applying Hookes law, we see that
F1 = k1 x.
Assuming as we did in Section 4.1 that the damping force due to the dashpot is proportional
to the magnitude of the velocity, but opposite in direction, we have
F2 = b (y x ) ,
312
Exercises 5.5
where b is the damping constant. Notice that velocity of the arm of the dashpot is the
dierence between the velocities of mass m2 and mass m1 . The mass m2 has a force F3 acting
on its left side due to the dashpot and a force F4 acting on its right side due to the right
spring. Using similar arguments, we find
F3 = b (y x ) and F4 = k2 y.
Applying Newtons second law to each mass gives
m1 x (t) = F1 + F2 = k1 x(t) + b [y (t) x (t)] ,

m2 y (t) = F3 + F4 = b [y (t) x (t)] k2 y.
Plugging in the constants m1 = m2 = 1, k1 = k2 = 1, and b = 1, and simplifying yields
x (t) + x (t) + x(t) y (t) = 0,

(5.34)
x (t) + y (t) + y (t) + y(t) = 0.
The initial conditions for the system will be y(0) = 0 (m2 is held in its equilibrium position),
x(0) = 2 (m1 is pushed to the left 2 ft), and x (0) = y (0) = 0 (the masses are simply
released at time t = 0 with no additional velocity). In operator notation this system becomes
(D 2 + D + 1) [x] D[y] = 0,
D[x] + y (t) + (D 2 + D + 1) [y] = 0.
By multiplying the first equation above by D and the second by (D 2 + D + 1) and adding the
resulting equations, we can eliminate the function y(t). Thus, we have
R) *2 S
2 2
D + D + 1 D [x] = 0
/-) 2 * . -) * .0
D + D + 1 D D2 + D + 1 + D [x] = 0
/) 2 * 0
D + 1 (D + 1)2 [x] = 0.
This last equation is a fourth order linear dierential equation with constant coecients whose
associated auxiliary equation has roots r = 1, 1, i, and i. Therefore, the solution to this
x(t) = c1 et + c2 tet + c3 cos t + c4 sin t
313
Chapter 5
x (t) = (c1 + c2 )et c2 tet c3 sin t + c4 cos t

x (t) = (c1 2c2 )et + c2 tet c3 cos t c4 sin t.
To find y(t), note that by the first equation of the system given in (5.34), we have
y (t) = x (t) + x (t) + x(t).
Substituting x(t), x (t), and x (t) into this equation yields
y (t) = (c1 2c2 )et + c2 tet c3 cos t c4 sin t

+(c1 + c2 )et c2 tet c3 sin t + c4 cos t + c1 et + c2 tet + c3 cos t + c4 sin t
y (t) = (c1 c2 )et + c2 tet c3 sin t + c4 cos t.
By integrating both sides of this equation with respect to t, we obtain
y(t) = (c1 c2 )et c2 tet c2 et + c3 cos t + c4 sin t + c5 ,
where we have integrated c2 tet by parts. Simplifying yields
y(t) = c1 et c2 tet + c3 cos t + c4 sin t + c5 .
To determine the five constants, we will use the four initial conditions and the second equation
in system (5.34). (We used the first equation to determine y). Substituting into the second
equation in (5.34) gives
- .
(c1 + c2 )et c2 tet c3 sin t + c4 cos t
- .
+ (c1 + 2c2 )et c2 tet c3 cos t c4 sin t
- .
+ (c1 c2 )et + c2 tet c3 sin t + c4 cos t
- .
+ c1 et c2 tet + c3 cos t + c4 sin t + c5 = 0,
which reduces to c5 = 0. Using the initial conditions and the fact that c5 = 0, we see that
x(0) = c1 + c3 = 2, x (0) = (c1 + c2 ) + c4 = 0,

y(0) = c1 + c3 = 0, y (0) = (c1 c2 ) + c4 = 0 .
314
Exercises 5.5
By solving these equations simultaneously, we find
c1 = 1, c2 = 1, c3 = 1, and c4 = 0.
Therefore, the solution to this spring-mass-dashpot system is
x(t) = et tet cos t, y(t) = et + tet cos t.
7. In operator notations,
) *
D 2 + 5 [x] 2y = 0,
) *
2x + D 2 + 2 [y] = 3 sin 2t.
Multiplying the first equation by (D 2 + 2) and the second equation by 2, and adding the
results, we obtain
/) 2 *) * 0
D + 2 D 2 + 5 4 [x] = 6 sin 2t
) 4 *
D + 7D 2 + 6 [x] = 6 sin 2t
) 2 *) *
D + 1 D 2 + 6 [x] = 6 sin 2t . (5.35)

Since the characteristic equation, (r 2 + 1)(r 2 + 6) = 0, has the roots r = i and r = i 6, a
general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is given by

xh (t) = c1 cos t + c2 sin t + c3 cos 6t + c4 sin 6t .
Due to the right-hand side in (5.35), a particular solution has the form
xp (t) = A cos 2t + B sin 2t .
In order to simplify computations, we note that both functions, cos 2t and sin 2t, and so xp (t),
satisfy the dierential equation (D 2 + 4)[x] = 0. Thus,
) *) * / 2 0/ 0 / 0
D2 + 1 D 2 + 6 [xh ] = (D + 4) 3 (D 2 + 4) + 2 [xh ] = 2 (D 2 + 4) 3 [xh ]
= 6xh = 6A cos 2t 6B sin 2t = 6 sin 2t
315
Chapter 5
A = 0, B = 1 xh (t) = sin 2t
and

x(t) = xh (t) + xp (t) = c1 cos t + c2 sin t + c3 cos 6t + c4 sin 6t sin 2t .
From the first equation in the original system, we have

1
y(t) = (x + 5x)
2
1 1 1
= 2c1 cos t + 2c2 sin t c3 cos 6t c4 sin 6t sin 2t .
2 2 2
We determine constants c1 and c3 using the initial conditions x(0) = 0 and y(0) = 1.
0 = x(0) = c1 + c3 , c3 = c1 , c3 = 2/5,

1 = y(0) = 2c1 c3 /2 2c1 (c1 ) /2 = 1 c1 = 2/5.
To find c2 and c4 , compute x (t) and y (t), evaluate these functions at t = 0, and use the other
two initial conditions, x (0) = y (0) = 0. This yields

0 = x (0) = c2 + 6c4 2, c4 = 6/5,

0 = y (0) = 2c2 6c4 /2 1 c2 = 4/5.
Therefore, the required solution is

2 4 2 6
x(t) = cos t + sin t cos 6t + sin 6t sin 2t ,
5 5 5 5
4 8 1 6 1
y(t) = cos t + sin t + cos 6t sin 6t sin 2t .
5 5 5 10 2
9. Writing the equations of this system in operator form we obtain

R # mg %S
2
mD + + k [x1 ] kx2 = 0,
R l # mg %S
kx1 + mD 2 + + k [x2 ] = 0.
l
Applying {mD 2 + (mg/l + k)} to the first equation, multiplying the second equation by k,
and then adding, results in
68 # mg %92 7
2 2
mD + +k k [x1 ] = 0.
l
316
Exercises 5.6
This equation has the auxiliary equation

# mg %2 # mg % # 2 mg %
2 2 2
mr + + k k = mr + mr + + 2k = 0
l l l
$ $ $
with roots i g/l and i (g/l) + (2k/m). As discussed on page 211 of the text g/l
$
and (g/l) + (2k/m) are the normal angular frequencies. To find the normal frequencies we
divide each one by 2 and obtain
+ ,! + ,!
1 g 1 g 2k
and + .
2 l 2 l m
EXERCISES 5.6: Electrical Circuits, page 291
1. In this problem, R = 100 , L = 4 H, C = 0.01 F, and E(t) = 20 V. Therefore, the equation

(4) on page 287 of the text becomes
d2 I dI d(20) d2 I dI
4 2
+ 100 + 100I = =0 2
+ 25 + 25I = 0.
dt dt dt dt dt
The roots of the characteristic equation, r 2 + 25r + 25 = 0, are

$
25 (25)2 4(25)(1) 25 5 21
r= = ,
2 2
and so a general solution is

I(t) = c1 e(255 21)t/2
+ c2 e(25+5 21)t/2
.
To determine constants c1 and c2 , first we find the initial value I (0) using given I(0) = 0 and
q(0) = 4. Substituting t = 0 into equation (3) on page 287 of the text (with dq/dt replaced
by I(t)), we obtain
d[I(t)] 1
L + RI(t) + q(t) = E(t)
dt C
1
4I (0) + 100(0) + (4) = 20
0.01
I (0) = 95.
317
Chapter 5
Thus, I(t) satisfies I(0) = 0, I (0) = 95. Next, we compute

c1 (25 5 21) (25521)t/2 c2 (25 + 5 21) (25+521)t/2
I (t) = e + e ,
2 2
substitute t = 0 into formulas for I(t) and I (t), and obtain the system

0 = I(0) = c1 + c2 , c1 = 19/ 21 ,

95 = I (0) = c1 (25 5 21)/2 + c2 (25 + 5 21)/2 c2 = 19/ 21.
So, the solution is

19 # (25521)t/2 %
I(t) = e e(25+5 21)t/2 .
21
3. In this problem L = 4, R = 120, C = (2200)1 , and E(t) = 10 cos 20t. Therefore, we see
that 1/C = 2200 and E (t) = 200 sin 20t. By substituting these values into equation (4) on
page 287 of the text, we obtain the equation
d2 I dI
4 + 120 + 2200I = 200 sin 20t.
dt2 dt
By simplifying, we have
d2 I dI
2
+ 30 + 550I = 50 sin 20t. (5.36)
dt dt
The auxiliary equation associated with the homogeneous equation corresponding to (5.36)

above is r 2 + 30r + 550 = 0. This equation has roots r = 15 5 13i. Therefore, the
transient current, that is Ih (t), is given by
8 # % # %9
15t
Ih (t) = e C1 cos 5 13t + C2 sin 5 13t .
By the method of undetermined coecients, a particular solution, Ip (t), of equation (5.36) will
be of the form Ip (t) = ts [A cos 20t + B sin 20t]. Since neither y(t) = cos 20t nor y(t) = sin 20t
is a solution to the homogeneous equation (that is the system is not at resonance), we can let
s = 0 in Ip (t). Thus, we see that Ip (t), the steady-state current, has the form
Ip (t) = A cos 20t + B sin 20t.
318
Exercises 5.6
To find the steady-state current, we must, therefore, find A and B. To accomplish this, we
observe that
Ip (t) = 20A sin 20t + 20B cos 20t,

Ip (t) = 400A cos 20t 400B sin 20t.
Plugging these expressions into equation (5.36) yields
Ip (t) + 30Ip (t) + 550I(t) = 400A cos 20t 400B sin 20t 600A sin 20t + 600B cos 20t
+550A cos 20t + 550B sin 20t = 50 sin 20t
(150A + 600B) cos 20t + (150B 600A) sin 20t = 50 sin 20t.
By equating coecients we obtain the system of equations
15A + 60B = 0,
60A + 15B = 5.
By solving these equations simultaneously for A and B, we obtain A = 4/51 and B = 1/51.
Thus, we have the steady-state current given by
4 1
Ip (t) = cos 20t sin 20t.
51 51
As was observed on page 290 of the text, there is a correlation between the RLC series circuits
and mechanical vibration. Therefore, we can discuss the resonance frequency of the RLC series
circuit. To do so we associate the variable L with m, R with b, and 1/C with k. Thus, we see
that the resonance frequency for an RLC series circuit is given by r /(2), where
!
1 R2
r = 2,
CL 2L
2
provided that R < 2L/C. For this problem
R2 = 14, 400 < 2L/C = 17, 600 .
Therefore, we can find the resonance frequency of this circuit. To do so we first find
! !
1 R2 2200 14400
r = 2 = = 10.
CL 2L 4 32
Hence the resonance frequency of this circuit is 10/(2) = 5/.
319
Chapter 5
5. In this problem, C = 0.01 F, L = 4 H, and R = 10 . Hence, the equation governing the RLC
circuit is
d2 I dI 1 d E0
4 + 10 + I = (E0 cos t) = sin t .
dt2 dt 0.01 dt 4
The frequency response curve M() for an RLC curcuit is determined by
1
M() = $ ,
[(1/C) L 2 ]2 + R2 2
which comes from the comparison Table 5.3 on page 290 of the text and equation (13) in
Section 4.9. Therefore
1 1
M() = $ =$ .
[(1/0.01) 4 2 ]2 + (10)2 2 (100 4 2 )2 + 100 2
The graph of this function is shown in Figure B.43 in the answers of the text. M() has its

maximal value at the point 0 = x0 , where x0 is the point where the quadratic function
(100 4x)2 + 100x attains its minimum (the first coordinate of the vertex). We find that
!
175 2
0 = and M(0 ) = 0.02 .
8 25 15
7. This spring system satisfies the dierential equation

d2 x dx
7 + 2 + 3x = 10 cos 10t.
dt2 dt
Since we want to find an RLC series circuit analog for the spring system with R = 10 ohms,
we must find L, 1/C, and E(t) so that the dierential equation
d2 q dq 1
L 2
+ 10 + q = E(t)
dt dt C
corresponds to the one above. Thus, we want E(t) = 50 cos 10t volts, L = 35 henrys, and
C = 1/15 farads.
11. For this electric network, there are three loops. Loop 1 is through a 10V battery, a 10 resistor,
and a 20H inductor. Loop 2 is through a 10V battery, a 10 resistor, a 5 resistor, and a
(1/30)F capacitor. Loop 3 is through a 5 resistor, a (1/30)F capacitor, and a 20H inductor.
320
Exercises 5.6
Therefore, applying Kirchhos second law to this network yields the three equations given
by
dI2
Loop 1 : 10I1 + 20 = 10,
dt
Loop 2 : 10I1 + 5I3 + 30q3 = 10,
dI2
Loop 3 : 5I3 + 30q3 20 = 0.
dt
Since the equation for Loop 2 minus the equation for Loop 1 yields the remaining equation,
we will use the first and second equations above for our calculations. By examining a junction
point, we see that we also have the equation I1 = I2 +I3 . Thus, we have I1 = I2 +I3 . We begin
by dividing the equation for Loop 1 by 10 and the equation for Loop 2 by 5. Dierentiating
the equation for Loop 2 yields the system
dI2
I1 + 2 = 1,
dt
dI1 dI3
2 + + 6I3 = 0,
dt dt
where I3 = q3 . Since I1 = I2 + I3 and I1 = I2 + I3 , we can rewrite the system using operator
notation in the form
(2D + 1)[I2 ] + I3 = 1,
(2D)[I2 ] + (3D + 6)[I3 ] = 0.
If we multiply the first equation above by (3D + 6) and then subtract the second equation,
we obtain
) *
{(3D + 6)(2D + 1) 2D} [I2 ] = 6 6D 2 + 13D + 6 [I2 ] = 6.
This last dierential equation is a linear equation with constant coecients whose associated
equation, 6r 2 +13r+6 = 0, has roots 3/2, 2/3. Therefore, the solution to the homogeneous
equation corresponding to the equation above is given by
I2h (t) = c1 e3t/2 + c2 e2t/3 .
By the method of undetermined coecients, the form of a particular solution to the dierential
equation above will be I2p (t) = A. By substituting this function into the dierential equation,
321
Chapter 5
we see that a particular solution is given by
I2p (t) = 1.
Thus, the current, I2 , will satisfy the equation
I2 (t) = c1 e3t/2 + c2 e2t/3 + 1.
As we noticed above, I3 can now be found from the first equation

4 5
3 3t/2 2 2t/3
- .
I3 (t) = (2D + 1)[I2 ] + 1 = 2 c1 e c2 e c1 e3t/2 + c2 e2t/3 + 1 + 1
2 3
1
I3 (t) = 2c1 e3t/2 + c2 e2t/3 .
3
To find I1 , we will use the equation I1 = I2 + I3 . Therefore, we have
1
I1 (t) = c1 e3t/2 + c2 e2t/3 + 1 + 2c1 e3t/2 + c2 e2t/3
3
4
I1 (t) = 3c1 e3t/2 + c2 e2t/3 + 1.
3
We will use the initial condition I2 (0) = I3 (0) = 0 to find the constants c1 and c2 . Thus, we
have
1
I2 (0) = c1 + c2 + 1 = 0 and I3 (0) = 2c1 + c2 = 0.
3
Solving these two equations simultaneously yields c1 = 1/5 and c2 = 6/5. Therefore, the
equations for the currents for this electric network are given by
3 3t/2 8 2t/3
I1 (t) = e e + 1,
5 5
1 6 2t/3
I2 (t) = e3t/2 e + 1,
5 5
2 3t/2 2 2t/3
I3 (t) = e e .
5 5
13. In this problem, there are three loops. Loop 1 is through a 0.5 H inductor and a 1 resistor.
Loop 2 is through is through a 0.5 H inductor, a 0.5 F capacitor, and a voltage source supplying
the voltage cos 3t V at time t. Loop 3 is through a 1 resistor, a 0.5 F capacitor, and the
322
Exercises 5.6
voltage source. We apply Kirchhos voltage law, EL + ER + EC = E(t), to Loop 1 and

Loop 2 to get two equations connecting currents in the network. (Similarly to Example 2 and
Problem 11, there is no need to apply Kirchhos voltage law to Loop 3 because the resulting
equation is just a linear combination of those for other two loops.)
Loop 1:
dI1 dI1
EL + ER = 0 0.5 + 1 I2 = 0 + 2I2 = 0. (5.37)
dt dt
Loop 2:
dI1 q3 dI1
EL + EC = cos 3t 0.5 + = cos 3t + 4q3 = 2 cos 3t. (5.38)
dt 0.5 dt
Additionally, at joint points, by Kirchhos current law,
dq3
I1 + I2 + I3 = 0 I1 + I2 + = 0. (5.39)
dt
Putting (5.37)(5.39) together yields the following system:
dI1
+ 2I2 = 0,
dt
dI1
+ 4q3 = 2 cos 3t,
dt
dq3
I1 + I2 + =0
dt
D[I1 ] + 2I2 = 0,
D[I1 ] + 4q3 = 2 cos 3t,
I1 + I2 + D[q3 ] = 0
with the initial condition I1 (0) = I2 (0) = I3 (0) = 0 (I3 = dq3 /dt).
From the first equation, I2 = (1/2)D[I1 ], which (when substituted into the third equation)
leads to the system
D[I1 ] + 4q3 = 2 cos 3t,
(D + 2)[I1 ] + 2D[q3 ] = 0.
323
Chapter 5
Multiplying the first equation by D, the second equation by 2, and subtracting the results,
we eliminate q3 :
/ 2 0 ) *
D + 2(D + 2) [I1 ] = 6 sin 3t D 2 + 2D + 4 [I1 ] = 6 sin 3t.

The roots of the characteristic equation, r 2 + 2r + 4 = 0, are r = 1 3i, and so a general
solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is

I1h = C1 et cos 3t + C2 et sin 3t.
A particular solution has the form I1p = A cos 3t + B sin 3t. Substitution into the equation
yields
(5A + 6B) cos 3t + (6A 5B) sin 3t = 6 sin 3t

5A + 6B = 0, A = 36/61,

6A 5B = 6 B = 30/61.
Therefore,
I1 = I1h + I1p
36 30
= C1 et cos 3t + C2 et sin 3t + cos 3t + sin 3t.
61 61
Substituting this solution into (5.37)we find that
1 dI1
I2 =
2 dt
C1 C2 3 t C1 3 + C2 t 45 54
= e cos 3t + e sin 3t cos 3t + sin 3t.
2 2 61 61
The initial condition, I1 (0) = I2 (0) = 0 yields
C1 + 36/61 = 0, C1 = 36/61,

(C1 C2 3)/2 45/61 = 0 C2 = 42 3/61.
Thus

36 t 42 3 t 36 30
I1 = e cos 3t e sin 3t + cos 3t + sin 3t,
61 61 61 61
45 t 39 3 t 45 54
I2 = e cos 3t e sin 3t cos 3t + sin 3t,
61 61 61 61
81 3 3 t 81 24
I3 = I1 I2 = et cos 3t e sin 3t + cos 3t sin 3t.
61 61 61 61
324
Exercises 5.7
EXERCISES 5.7: Dynamical Systems, Poincare Maps, and Chaos, page 301
1. Let = 3/2. Using system (3) on page 294 of the text with A = F = 1, = 0, and = 3/2,
we define the Poincare map
1 4 4
xn = sin(3n) + = sin(3n) + = ,
(9/4) (4/4) 5 5
3 3
vn = cos(3n) = (1)n ,
2 2
for n = 0, 1, 2, . . . . Calculating the first few values of (xn , vn ), we find that they alternate
between (4/5, 3/2) and (4/5, 3/2). Consequently, we can deduce that there is a subharmonic
solution of period 4. Let = 3/5. Using system (3) on page 294 of the text with A = F = 1,
= 0, and = 3/5, we define the Poincare map
+ , + ,
6n 1 6n
xn = sin + = sin 1.5625 ,
5 (9/25) 1 5
+ , + ,
3 6n 6n
vn = cos = (0.6) cos ,
5 5 5
for n = 0, 1, 2, . . . . Calculating the first few values of (xn , vn ), we find that the Poincare map
cycles through the points
(1.5625, 0.6), n = 0, 5, 10, . . . ,
(2.1503, 0.4854), n = 1, 6, 11, . . . ,
(0.6114, 0.1854), n = 2, 7, 12, . . . ,
(2.5136, 0.1854), n = 3, 8, 13, . . . ,
(0.9747, 0.4854), n = 4, 9, 14, . . . .
Consequently, we can deduce that there is a subharmonic solution of period 10.
3. With A = F = 1, = 0, = 1, b = 0.1, and = 0 (because tan = ( 2 1)/b = 0) the

solution (5) to equation (4) becomes

3.99
x(t) = e0.05t sin t + 10 sin t.
2
Thus J K
3.99 3.99 3.99
v(t) = x (t) = e0.05t 0.05 sin t+ cos t + 10 cos t
2 2 2
325
Chapter 5
v
500
400
300
200
100
x
80 60 40 20 0
Figure 5A: Poincare section for Problem 3.
and, therefore,
xn = x(2n) e0.1n sin(1.997498n),

vn = v(2n) e0.1n (0.05 sin(1.997498n) + 0.998749 cos(1.997498n)) + 10.
The values of xn and vn for n = 0, 1, . . . , 20 are listed in Table 5-F, and points (xn , vn ) are
shown in Figure 5-A. When n , the points (xn , vn ) become unbounded because of e0.1n
term.
5. We want to construct the Poincare map using t = 2n for x(t) given in equation (5) on
page 295 of the text with A = F = 1, = 0, = 1/3, and b = 0.22. Since
2 1
tan = = 4.040404 ,
b
we take = tan1 (4.040404) = 1.328172 and get
xn = x(2n) = e0.22n sin(0.629321n) (1.092050) sin(1.328172),

vn = x (2n) = 0.11e0.22n sin(0.629321n) + (1.258642)e0.22n cos(0.629321n)
+(1.092050) cos(1.328172).
326
Exercises 5.7
Table 5F: Poincare map for Problem 3.
n xn vn n xn vn
0 0 10.998749 11 2.735915 41.387469

1 0.010761 11.366815 12 4.085318 52.925111
2 0.029466 11.870407 13 6.057783 68.700143
3 0.060511 12.559384 14 8.929255 90.267442
4 0.110453 13.501933 15 13.09442 119.75193
5 0.189009 14.791299 16 19.11674 160.05736
6 0.310494 16.554984 17 27.79923 215.15152
7 0.495883 18.967326 18 40.28442 290.45581
8 0.775786 22.266682 19 58.19561 393.37721
9 1.194692 26.778923 20 83.83579 534.03491
10 1.817047 32.949532
In Table 5-G we have listed the first 21 values of the Poincare map.
As n gets large, we see that
xn (1.092050) sin(1.328172) 1.060065 ,

vn (1.092050) cos(1.328172) 0.262366 .
Hence, as n , the Poincare map approaches the point (1.060065, 0.262366).
7. Let A, and A , denote the values of constants A, in solution formula (2), corresponding
to initial values (x0 , v0 ) and (x0 , v0 ), respectively.
(i) From recursive formulas (3) we conclude that
xn F/( 2 1) = A sin(2n + ),
vn / = A cos(2n + ),
and so (A, 2n+) are polar coordinates of the point (vn /, xn F/( 2 1)) in vx-plane.
Similarly, (A , 2n+ ) represent polar coordinates of the point (vn /, xn F/( 2 1)).
327
Chapter 5
Table 5G: Poincare map for Problem 5.
n xn vn n xn vn
0 1.060065 1.521008 11 1.059944 0.261743

1 0.599847 0.037456 12 1.060312 0.262444
2 1.242301 0.065170 13 1.059997 0.262491
3 1.103418 0.415707 14 1.060030 0.262297
4 0.997156 0.251142 15 1.060096 0.262362
5 1.074094 0.228322 16 1.060061 0.262385
6 1.070300 0.278664 17 1.060058 0.262360
7 1.052491 0.264458 18 1.060068 0.262364
8 1.060495 0.257447 19 1.060065 0.262369
9 1.061795 0.263789 20 1.060064 0.262366
10 1.059271 0.263037
Therefore,
(vn /, xn F/( 2 1)) (vn /, xn F/( 2 1))
as A A and if A = 0 or as A 0 (regardless of ) if A = 0. Note that

the convergence is uniform with respect to n. (One can easily see this from the distance
formula in polar coordinates.) This is equivalent to
xn F/( 2 1) xn F/( 2 1), xn xn ,

vn / vn / vn vn
uniformly with respect to n.
(ii) On the other hand, A and satisfy

I
A sin + F/( 2 1) = x0 , A = (x0 F/( 2 1))2 + (v0 /)2 ,

A cos = v0 cos = v0 / (A ) .
Therefore, A is a continuous function of (x0 , v0 ) and so A A as (x0 , v0 ) (x0 , v0 ).

If (x0 , v0 ) is such that A = 0, then , as a function of (x0 , v0 ), is also continuous at
(x0 , v0 ) and, therefore, as (x0 , v0 ) (x0 , v0 ).
328
Exercises 5.7
Combining (i) and (ii) we conclude that
(xn , vn ) (xn , vn ) as (x0 , v0 ) (x0 , v0 )
uniformly with respect to n. Thus, if (x0 , v0) is close to (x0 , v0 ), (xn , vn ) is close to (xn , vn )
for all n.
9. (a) When x0 = 1/7, the doubling modulo 1 map gives
2 2 4 4
x1 = (mod 1) = , x2 = (mod 1) = ,
7 7 7 7
8 1 2 2
x3 = (mod 1) = , x4 = (mod 1) = ,
7 7 7 7
4 4 8 1
x5 = (mod 1) = , x6 = (mod 1) = ,
7 7 7 7
2 2
x7 = (mod 1) = , etc.
7 7
6 7
1 2 4 1 k
This is the sequence , , , , . . . . For x0 = , k = 2, . . . , 6, we obtain
7 7 7 7 7
6 7 6 7
2 4 1 2 3 6 5 3
, , , ,... , , , , ,... ,
67 7 7 7 7 67 7 7 7 7
4 1 2 4 5 3 6 5
, , , ,... , , , , ,... ,
67 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
6 5 3 6
, , , ,... .
7 7 7 7
1 2 4
These sequences fall into two classes. The first has the repeating sequence , , and
7 7 7
3 6 5
the second has the repeating sequence , , .
7 7 7
k 3 3
(c) To see what happens, when x0 = j
, lets consider the special case when x0 = 2 = .
2 2 4
Then,
+ ,
3 3 1
x1 = 2 (mod 1) = (mod 1) = ,
4 2 2
329
Chapter 5
+ ,
1
x2 = 2 (mod 1) = 1 (mod 1) = 0,
2
x3 = 0,
x4 = 0,
etc.
Observe that + ,
2 3
x2 = 2 (mod 1) = 3 (mod 1) = 0.
22
In general, + ,
j k
xj = 2 (mod 1) = k (mod 1) = 0.
2j
Consequently, xn = 0 for n j.
11. (a) A general solution to equation (6) is given by x(t) = xh (t) + xp (t), where
# %
xh (t) = Ae0.11t sin 9879t +
is the transient term (a general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation)

and
1 1 # % 1
xp (t) = sin t + $ sin 2t + , tan = ,
0.22 1 + 2(0.22)2 0.22 2
is the steady-state term (a particular solution to (6)). (xp (t) can be found, say, by
applying formula (7), Section 4.12, and using Superposition Principle of Section 4.7.)
Dierentiating x(t) we get
# %
1 2
v(t) = xh (t) + xp (t) = xh (t) + cos t + $ cos 2t + .
0.22 1 + 2(0.22)2
The steady-state solution does not depend on initial values x0 and v0 ; these values aect
only constants A and in the transient part. But, as t , xh (t) and xh (t) tend to zero
and so the values of x(t) and v(t) approach the values of xp (t) and xp (t), respectively.
Thus the limit set of points (x(t), v(t)) is the same as that of (xp (t), xp (t)) which is
independent of initial values.
330
Review Problems
(b) Substitution t = 2n into xp (t) and xp (t) yields
1 # %
xn = x(2n) = xh (2n) + $ sin 22n + ,
1 + 2(0.22)2
# %
1 2
vn = v(2n) = xh (2n) + +$ cos 22n + .
0.22 1 + 2(0.22)2
As n , xh (2n) 0 and xh (2n) 0. Therefore, for n large,
1 # % # %
xn $ sin 22n + = a sin 2 2n + ,
1 + 2(0.22)2
# % # %
1 2
vn +$ cos 22n + = c + 2a cos 2 2n + .
0.22 1 + 2(0.22)2
(c) From part (b) we conclude that, for n large

# % # %
x2n a2 sin2 2 2n + and (vn c)2 2a2 cos2 2 2n + .
Dividing the latter by 2 and summing yields
(vn c)2 8 # % # %9
x2n + a2 sin2 2 2n + + cos2 2 2n + = a2 ,
2
and the error (coming from the transient part) tends to zero as n . Thus any
limiting point of the sequence (xn , vn ) satisfies the equation
(v c)2
x2 + = a2 ,
2

which is an ellipse centered at (0, c) with semiaxes a and a 2.
1. Expressing the system in the operator notation gives

) *
D[x] + D 2 + 1 [y] = 0,
D 2 [x] + D[y] = 0.
331
Chapter 5
Eliminating x by applying D to the first equation and subtracting the second equation from
it yields
/ ) 2 * 0
D D + 1 D [y] = 0 D 3 [y] = 0.
Thus on integrating 3 times we get
y(t) = C3 + C2 t + C1 t2 .
We substitute this solution into the first equation of given system to get
- . - .
x = (y + y) = (2C1 ) + (C3 + C2 t + C1 t2 ) = (C3 + 2C1 ) + C2 t + C1 t2 .
Integrating we obtain
3
- . 1 1
x(t) = (C3 + 2C1 ) + C2 t + C1 t2 dt = C4 (C3 + 2C1 )t C2 t2 C1 t3 .
2 3
Thus the general solution of the given system is
1 1
x(t) = C4 (C3 + 2C1 )t C2 t2 C1 t3 ,
2 3
y(t) = C3 + C2 t + C1 t2 .
(2D 3)[x] (D + 1)[y] = et ,

(5.40)
(4D + 15)[x] + (3D 1)[y] = et .
We eliminate y by multiplying the first equation by (3D 1), the second by (D + 1), and
summing the results.
{(2D 3)(3D 1) + (4D + 15)(D + 1)} [x] = (3D 1)[et ] + (D + 1)[et ]

(D 2 + 9)[x] = et .
Since the characterictic equation, r 2 + 9 = 0, has roots r = 3i, a general solution to the
corresponding homogeneous equation is
xh (t) = c1 cos 3t + c2 sin 3t.
332
Review Problems
We look for a particular solution of the form xp (t) = Aet . Substituting this function into the
equation, we obtain
1 et
Aet + 9Aet = et A= xp (t) = ,
10 10
and so
et
.
x(t) = xh (t) + xp (t) = c1 cos 3t + c2 sin 3t +
10
To find y, we multiply the first equation in (5.40) by 3 and add to the second equation. This
yields
2(D + 3)[x] 4y = 3et + et .
Thus
1 3 1
y = (D + 3)[x] et et
2 4 4
3(c1 + c2 ) 3(c1 c2 ) 11 t 1 t
= cos 3t sin 3t e e .
2 2 20 4
5. Dierentiating the second equation, we obtain y = z . We eliminate z from the first and the
third equations by substituting y for z and y for z into them:
x = y y, x y + y = 0,
(5.41)
y = y x y y + x = 0
or, in operator notation,
D[x] (D 1)[y] = 0,
x + (D 2 D)[y] = 0.
We eliminate y by applying D to the first equation and adding the result to the second
equation:
/ 2 0 / 0 ) *
D [x] D(D 1)[y] + x + (D 2 D)[y] = 0 D 2 + 1 [x] = 0.
This equation is the simple harmonic equation, and its general solution is given by
x(t) = C1 cos t + C2 sin t.
333
Chapter 5
Substituting x(t) into the first equation of the system (5.41) yields
y y = C1 sin t + C2 cos t. (5.42)
The general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation, y y = 0, is
yh (t) = C3 et .
We look for a particular solution to (5.42) of the form yp (t) = C4 cos t+C5 sin t. Dierentiating,
we obtain yp (t) = C4 sin t + C5 cos t. Thus the equation (5.42) becomes
C1 sin t + C2 cos t = yp y = (C4 sin t + C5 cos t) (C4 cos t + C5 sin t)

= (C5 C4 ) cos t (C5 + C4 ) sin t.
Equating the coecients yields
C5 C4 = C2 ,
(5.43)
C5 + C4 = C1
C1 + C2
(by adding the equations) 2C5 = C1 + C2 C5 = .
2
From the second equation in (5.43), we find
C1 C2
C4 = C1 C5 = .
2
Therefore, the general solution to the equation (5.42) is
C1 C2 C1 + C2
y(t) = yh (t) + yp (t) = C3 et + cos t + sin t.
2 2
Finally, we find z(t) from the second equation:
+ ,
t C1 C2 C1 + C2
z(t) = y (t) = C3 e + cos t + sin t
2 2
C1 C2 C1 + C2
= C3 et sin t + cos t.
2 2
Hence, the general solution to the given system is
x(t) = C1 cos t + C2 sin t,
334
Review Problems
C1 C2 C1 + C2
y(t) = C3 et + cos t + sin t,
2 2
C1 C2 C1 + C2
z(t) = C3 et sin t + cos t.
2 2
To find constants C1 , C2 , and C3 , we use the initial conditions. So we get
0 = x(0) = C1 cos 0 + C2 sin 0 = C1 ,

C1 C2 C1 + C2 C1 C2
0 = y(0) = C3 e0 + cos 0 + sin 0 = C3 + ,
2 2 2
C1 C2 C1 + C2 C1 + C2
2 = z(0) = C3 e0 sin 0 + cos 0 = C3 + ,
2 2 2
which simplifies to
C1 = 0,
C1 C2 + 2C3 = 0,
C1 + C2 + 2C3 = 4.
Solving we obtain C1 = 0, C2 = 2, C3 = 1 and so
x(t) = 2 sin t, y(t) = et cos t + sin t, z(t) = et + cos t + sin t.
7. Let x(t) and y(t) denote the mass of salt in tanks A and B, respectively. The only dierence
between this problem and the problem in Section 5.1 is that a brine solution flows in tank A
instead of pure water. This change aects the input rate for tank A only, adding
6 L/min 0.2 kg/L = 1.2 kg/min
to the original (y/12) kg/min. Thus the system (1) on page 242 becomes
1 1
x = x + y + 1.2 ,
3 12
1 1
y = x y.
3 3
Following the solution in Section 5.1, we express x = 3y + y from the second equation and
substitute it into the first equation.
1 1 1
(3y + y) = (3y + y) + y + 1.2 3y + 2y + y = 1.2 .
3 12 4
335
Chapter 5
A general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is given in (3) on page 243 of
the text:
yh (t) = c1 et/2 + c2 et/6 .
A particular solution has the form yp (t) C, which results

1
3(C) + 2(C) + C = 1.2 C = 4.8 .
4
Therefore, yp (t) 4.8, and a general solution to the system is
y(t) = yh (t) + yp (t) = c1 et/2 + c2 et/6 + 4.8 ,

c1 c2
x(t) = 3y (t) + y(t) = et/2 + et/6 + 4.8 .
2 2
We find constants c1 and c2 from the initial conditions, x(0) = 0.1 and y(0) = 0.3 . Substitu-
tion yields the system
c1 c2
+ + 4.8 = 0.1 ,
2 2
c1 + c2 + 4.8 = 0.3 .
Solving, we obtain c1 = 49/20, c2 = 139/20, and so

49 t/2 139 t/6
x(t) = e e + 4.8 ,
40 40
49 t/2 139 t/6
y(t) = e e + 4.8 .
20 20
9. We first rewrite the given dierential equation in an equivalent form as

1) *
y = 5 + et y 2y .
3
Denoting x1 (t) = y(t), x2 (t) = y (t), and x3 (t) = y (t), we conclude that
x1 = y = x2 ,

x2 = (y ) = y = x3 ,
1) *
x3 = (y ) = y = 5 + et x1 2x2 ,
3
336
Review Problems
that is,
x1 = x2 ,
x2 = x3 ,
1) *
x3 = 5 + et x1 2x2 .
3
11. This system is equivalent to
x = t y y ,
y = x x .
Next, we introduce, as additional unknowns, derivatives of x(t) and y(t):
x1 (t) := x(t), x2 (t) := x (t), x3 (t) := x (t),

x4 (t) := y(t), x5 (t) := y (t), x6 (t) := y (t).
With new variables, the system becomes
x = (x ) =: x3 = t y y =: t x5 x6 ,
y = (y ) =: x6 = x x =: x2 x3 .
Also, we have four new equations connecting xj s:
x1 = x =: x2 ,
x2 = (x ) = x =: x3 ,
x4 = y =: x5 ,
x5 = (y ) = y =: x6 .
Therefore, the answer is
x1 = x2 ,
x2 = x3 ,
x3 = t x5 x6 ,
337
Chapter 5
x4 = x5 ,
x5 = x6 ,
x6 = x2 x3 .
13. With the notation used in (1) on page 264 of the text,
f (x, y) = 4 4y,
g(x, y) = 4x,
and the phase plane equation (see equation (2) on page 265 of the text) can be written as
dy g(x, y) 4x x
= = = .
dx f (x, y) 4 4y y1
This equation is separable. Separating variables yields

3 3
(y 1) dy = x dx (y 1) dy = x dx (y 1)2 + C = x2
or x2 (y 1)2 = C, where C is an arbitrary constant. We find the critical points by solving

the system
f (x, y) = 4 4y = 0, y = 1,

g(x, y) = 4x = 0 x = 0.
So, (0, 1) is the unique critical point. For y > 1,
dx
= 4(1 y) < 0,
dt
which implies that trajectories flow to the left. Similarly, for y < 1, trajectories flow to the
right. Comparing the phase plane diagram with those given on Figure 5.12 on page 270 of
the text, we conclude that the critical point (0, 1) is a saddle (unstable) point.
15. Some integral curves and the direction field for the given system are shown in Figure 5-B.
Comparing this picture with Figure 5.12 on page 270 of the text, we conclude that the origin
is an asymptotically stable spiral point.
338
Review Problems
0.5
1 0.5 0 0.5 1
0.5
Figure 5B: Integral curves and the direction field for Problem 15.
17. A trajectory is a path traced by an actual solution pair (x(t), y(t)) as t increases; thus it is
a directed (oriented) curve. An integral curve is the graph of a solution to the phase plane
equation; it has no direction. All trajectories lie along (parts of) integral curves. A given
integral curve can be the underlying point set for several dierent trajectories.
19. We apply Kirchhos voltage law to Loops 1 and 2.
Loop 1 contains a capacitor C and a resistor R2 ; note that the direction of the loop is
opposite to that of I2 . Thus we have
q q
R2 I2 = 0 = R2 I2 ,
C C
where q denotes the charge of the capacitor.
Loop 2 consists of an inductor L and two resistors R1 and R2 ; note that the loop direction
is opposite to the direction of I3 . Therefore,
R2 I2 R1 I3 LI3 = 0 R2 I2 = R1 I3 + LI3 .
339
Chapter 5
For the top juncture, all the currents flow out, and the Kirchhos current law gives
I1 I2 I3 = 0 I1 + I2 + I3 = 0.
Therefore, the system, describing the current in RLC, is

q
= R2 I2 ,
C
R2 I2 = R1 I3 + LI3 ,
I1 + I2 + I3 = 0.
With given data, R1 = R2 = 1 , L = 1 H, and C = 1 F, and the relation I1 = dq/dt, this

system becomes
q = I2 ,
I2 = I3 + I3 ,
q + I2 + I3 = 0.
Replacing in the last two equations I2 by q, we get
I3 + I3 q = 0,
q + q + I3 = 0.
We eliminate q by substituting q = I3 + I3 into the second equation and obtain
I3 + 2I3 + 2I3 = 0.
The characteristic equation, r 2 + 2r + 2 = 0, has roots r = 1 i and so, a general solution

to this homogeneous equation is I3 = et (A cos t + B sin t). Thus
I2 = q = I3 + I3
= et (A cos t + B sin t) + et (A sin t + B cos t) + et (A cos t + B sin t)
= et (B cos t A sin t)
and
dq
I1 = = et (B cos t A sin t) + et (B sin t A cos t)
dt
= et [(A B) sin t (A + B) cos t].
340
CHAPTER 6: Theory of Higher Order Linear
Dierential Equations
EXERCISES 6.1: Basic Theory of Linear Dierential Equations, page 324
1. Putting the equation in standard form,

3 ex x2 1
y y + y= ,
x x x
we find that
3 ex x2 1
p1 (x) 0, p2 (x) = , p3 (x) = , and q(x) = .
x x x
Functions p2 (x), p3 (x), and q(x) have only one point of discontinuity, x = 0, while p1 (x) is
continuous everywhere. Therefore, all these functions are continuous on (, 0) and (0, ).
Since the initial point, x0 = 2, belongs to (, 0), Theorem 1 guarantees the existence of a
unique solution to the given initial value problem on (, 0).

3. For this problem, p1 (x) = 1, p2 (x) = x 1, and g(x) = tan x. Note that p1 (x) is contin-
uous everywhere, p2 (x) is continuous for x 1, and g(x) is continuous everywhere except at
odd multiples of /2. Therefore, these three functions are continuous simultaneously on the
intervals
8 % + 3 , + 3 5 ,
1, , , , , ,... .
2 2 2 2 2
Because 5, the initial point, is in the interval (3/2, 5/2), Theorem 1 guarantees that we
have a unique solution to the initial value problem on this interval.

5. Dividing the equation by x x + 1, we obtain
1 1
y y + y = 0.
x x+1 x+1
341
Chapter 6

Thus p1 (x) 0, p2 (x) = 1/(x x + 1), p3 (x) = 1/ x + 1, and g(x) 0. Functions p1 (x) and
q(x) are continuous on whole real line; p3 (x) is defined and continuous for x > 1; p2 (x) is
defined and continuous for x > 1 and x = 0. Therefore, all these function is continuous on
(1, 0) and (0, ). The initial point lies on (0, ), and so, by Theorem 1, the given initial
value problem has a unique solution on (0, ).
7. Assume that c1 , c2 , and c3 are constants for which
c1 e3x + c2 e5x + c3 ex 0 on (, ). (6.1)
If we show that this is possible only if c1 = c2 = c3 = 0, then linear independence will follow.
Evaluating the linear combination in (6.1) at x = 0, x = ln 2, and x = ln 2, we find that
constants c1 , c2 , and c3 satisfy
c1 + c2 + c3 = 0,
1
8c1 + 32c2 + c3 = 0,
2
1 1
c1 + c2 + 2c3 = 0.
8 32
This system is a homogeneous system of linear equations whose determinant

1 1
1 1
1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 32 1/2 11 11 8 1/2 11 11 8 32 1 2827
1
1 8 1
32 1/2 1 = 1 1 1 1 + 1 1= = 0.
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1/32 2 1/8 2 1/8 1/32 1 64
1 1/8 1/32 2 1
Hence it has the unique trivial solution, that is, c1 = c2 = c3 = 0.
9. Let y1 = sin2 x, y2 = cos2 x, and y3 = 1. We want to find c1 , c2 , and c3 , not all zero, such that
c1 y1 + c2 y2 + c3 y3 = c1 sin2 x + c2 cos2 x + c3 1 = 0,
for all x in the interval (, ). Since sin2 x + cos2 x = 1 for all real numbers x, we can
choose c1 = 1, c2 = 1, and c3 = 1. Thus, these functions are linearly dependent.
342
Exercises 6.1
11. Let y1 = x1 , y2 = x1/2 , and y3 = x. We want to find constants c1 , c2 , and c3 such that
c1 y1 + c2 y2 + c3 y3 = c1 x1 + c2 x1/2 + c3 x = 0,
for all x on the interval (0, ). This equation must hold if x = 1, 4, or 9 (or any other values
for x in the interval (0, )). By plugging these values for x into the equation above, we see
that c1 , c2 , and c3 must satisfy the three equations
c1 + c2 + c3 = 0,
c1
+ 2c2 + 4c3 = 0,
4
c1
+ 3c2 + 9c3 = 0.
9
Solving these three equations simultaneously yields c1 = c2 = c3 = 0. Thus, the only way for
c1 x1 + c2 x1/2 + c3 x = 0 for all x on the interval (0, ), is for c1 = c2 = c3 = 0. Therefore,
these three functions are linearly independent on (0, ).
13. A linear combination, c1 x + c2 x2 + c3 x3 + c4 x4 , is a polynomial of degree at most four, and so,

by the fundamental theorem of algebra, it cannot have more than four zeros unless it is the
zero polynomial (that is, it has all zero coecients). Thus, if this linear combination vanishes
on an interval, then c1 = c2 = c3 = c4 = 0. Therefore, the functions x, x2 , x3 , and x4 are
linearly independent on any interval, in particular, on (, ).
15. Since, by inspection, r = 3, r = 1, and r = 4 are the roots of the characteristic equation,
r 3 + 2r 2 11r 12 = 0, the functions e3x , ex , and e4x form a solution set. Next, we check
that these functions are linearly independent by showing that their Wronskian is never zero.
1 1 1 1
1 3x 1 1 1
1 e ex e4x 1 1 1 1 1 1
- 3x x 4x . 1 1 1 1
W e ,e ,e (x) = 11 3e3x ex 4e4x 1 = e3x ex e4x 1 3 1 4 1 = 84e2x ,
1 1 1
1 3x 1 1 1
1 9e ex 16e4x 1 1 9 1 16 1
which does not vanish. Therefore, {e3x , ex , e4x } is a fundamental solution set and, by
Theorem 4, a general solution to the given dierential equation is
y = C1 e3x + C2 ex + C3 e4x .
343
Chapter 6
17. Writing the given dierential equation,
x3 y 3x2 y + 6xy 6y = 0,
in standard form (17), we see that its coecients, 3/x, 6/x2 , and 6/x3 are continuous on
the specified interval, which is x > 0.
Next, substituting x, x2 , and x3 into the dierential equation, we verify that these functions
are indeed solutions.
x3 (x) 3x2 (x) + 6x(x) 6(x) = 0 0 + 6x 6x = 0,

x3 (x2 ) 3x2 (x2 ) + 6x(x2 ) 6(x2 ) = 0 6x2 + 12x2 6x2 = 0,
x3 (x3 ) 3x2 (x3 ) + 6x(x3 ) 6(x3 ) = 6x3 18x3 + 18x3 6x3 = 0.
Evaluating the Wronskian yields

1 1
1 1
1 x x2 x3 1
- . 1 1
W x, x2 , x3 (x) = 11 1 2x 3x2 11
1 1
1 0 2 6x 1
1 1 1 1
1 2x 3x2 1 1 x2 x3 1 ) * ) *
1 1 1 1
= x1 11 1 = x 6x2 4x3 = 2x3 .
1 2 6x 1 1 2 6x 1
Thus W [x, x2 , x3 ] (x) = 0 on (0, ) and so {x, x2 , x3 } is a fundamental solution set for the
given dierential equation. We involve Theorem 2 to conclude that
y = C1 x + C2 x2 + C3 x3
19. (a) Since {ex , ex cos 2x, ex sin 2x, } is a fundamental solution set for the associated homo-
geneous dierential equation and since yp = x2 is a solution to the nonhomogeneous
equation, by the superposition principle, we have a general solution given by
y(x) = C1 ex + C2 ex cos 2x + C3 ex sin 2x + x2 .
344
Exercises 6.1
(b) To find the solution that satisfies the initial conditions, we must dierentiate the general
solution y(x) twice with respect to x. Thus, we have
y (x) = C1 ex C2 ex cos 2x 2C2 ex sin 2x C3 ex sin 2x + 2C3 ex cos 2x + 2x

= C1 ex + (C2 + 2C3 ) ex cos 2x + (2C2 C3 ) ex sin 2x + 2x ,
y (x) = C1 ex + (C2 2C3 ) ex cos 2x 2 (C2 + 2C3 ) ex sin 2x
(2C2 C3 ) ex sin 2x + 2 (2C2 C3 ) ex cos 2x + 2
= C1 ex + (3C2 4C3 ) ex cos 2x + (4C2 3C3 ) ex sin 2x + 2 .
Plugging the initial conditions into these formulas, yields the equations
y(0) = C1 + C2 = 1,
y (0) = C1 C2 + 2C3 = 1,
y (0) = C1 3C2 4C3 + 2 = 3.
By solving these equations simultaneously, we obtain C1 = 1, C2 = 0, and C3 = 1.

Therefore, the solution to the initial value problem is given by
y(x) = ex + ex sin 2x + x2 .
21. In the standard form, given equation becomes
1 1 3 ln x
y + 2
y 3y= .
x x x3
Since its coecients are continuous on (0, ), we can apply Theorems 2 and 4 to conclude
that a general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is
yh (x) = C1 x + C2 x ln x + C3 x(ln x)2
and a general solution to the given nonhomogeneous equation is
y(x) = yp (x) + yh (x) = ln x + C1 x + C2 x ln x + C3 x(ln x)2 .
345
Chapter 6
To satisfy the initial conditions, first we find
1 - .
y (x) = + C1 + C2 (ln x + 1) + C3 (ln x)2 + 2 ln x ,
x 4 5
1 C2 2 ln x 2
y (x) = 2 + + C3 + .
x x x x
Substituting the initial conditions, y(1) = 3, y (1) = 3, and y (1) = 0, we get the system
3 = y(1) = C1 , C1 = 3, C1 = 3,

3 = y (1) = 1 + C1 + C2 , C1 + C2 = 2, C2 = 1,
0 = y (1) = 1 + C2 + 2C3 C2 + 2C3 = 1 C3 = 1.
Thus,
y(x) = ln x + 3x x ln x + x(ln x)2
23. Substituting y1 (x) = sin x and y2 (x) = x into the given dierential operator yields
L[sin x] = (sin x) + (sinx) + x(sin x) = cos x + cos x + x sin x = x sin x,

L[x] = (x) + (x) + x(x) = 0 + 1 + x2 = x2 + 1.
Note that L[y] is a linear operator of the form (7). So, we can use the superposition principle.
(a) Since 2x sin x x2 1 = 2(x sin x) (x2 + 1), by the superposition principle,
y(x) = 2y1(x) y2 (x) = 2 sin x x
is a solution to L[y] = 2x sin x x2 1.
(b) We can express 4x2 + 4 6x sin x = 4(x2 + 1) 6(x sin x). Hence,
y(x) = 4y2 (x) 6y1 (x) = 4x 6 sin x
is a solution to L[y] = 4x2 + 4 6x sin x.
346
Exercises 6.1
25. Clearly, it is sucient to prove (9) just for two functions, y1 and y2 . Using the linear property
of dierentiation, we have
L [y1 + y2 ] = [y1 + y2 ](n) + p1 [y1 + y2 ](n1) + + pn [y1 + y2 ]

8 9 8 9
(n) (n) (n1) (n1)
= y 1 + y 2 + p1 y 1 + y2 + + pn [y1 + y2 ]
8 9 8 9
(n) (n1) (n) (n1)
= y 1 + p1 y 1 + + pn y 1 + y 2 + p1 y 2 + + pn y2 = L [y1 ] + L [y1 ] .
Next, we verify (10).
L [cy] = [cy](n) + p1 [cy](n1) + + pn [cy] = cy (n) + p1 cy (n1) + + pn cy

- .
= c y (n) + p1 y (n1) + + pn y = cL [y] .
27. A linear combination

c0 + c1 x + c2 x2 + + cn xn
of the functions from the given set is a polynomial of degree at most n and so, by the funda-
mental theorem of algebra, it cannot have more than n zeros unless it is the zero polynomial,
i.e., it has all zero coecients. Thus, if this linear combination vanishes on a whole interval
(a, b), then it follows that c0 = c1 = c2 = . . . = cn = 0. Therefore, the set of functions
{1, x, x2 , . . . , xn } is linearly independent on any interval (a, b).
29. (a) Assuming that functions f1 , f2 , . . . , fm are linearly dependent on (, ), we can find
their nontrivial linear combination vanishing identically on (, ), i.e.,
c1 f1 + c2 f2 + + cm fm 0 on (, ),
where not all cj s are zeros. In particular, this linear combination vanishes on (1, 1),
which contradicts the assumption that f1 , f2 , . . . , fm are linearly independent on (1, 1).
(b) Let
f1 (x) := |x 1| , f2 (x) := x 1 .
347
Chapter 6
On (1, 1) (even on (, 1) ) we have f1 (x) f2 (x) or, equivalently, f1 (x) + f2 (x) 0

and so these functions are linearly dependent on (1, 1). However, their linear combina-
tion >
(c2 c1 ) (x 1), x 1;
c1 f1 (x) + c2 f2 (x) =
(c1 + c2 ) (x 1), x > 1
cannot vanish identically on (, ) unless c1 c2 = 0 and c1 + c2 = 0, which implies
c1 = c2 = 0.
31. (a) Linearity of dierentiation and the product rule yield
y (x) = (v(x)ex ) = v (x)ex + v(x) (ex ) = [v (x) + v(x)] ex ,

y (x) = [v (x) + v(x)] ex + [v (x) + v(x)] (ex ) = [v (x) + 2v (x) + v(x)] ex ,

y (x) = [v (x) + 2v (x) + v(x)] ex + [v (x) + 2v (x) + v(x)] (ex )
= [v (x) + 3v (x) + 3v (x) + v(x)] ex .
(b) Substituting y, y , y , and y into the dierential equation (32), we obtain
[v + 3v + 3v + v] ex 2 [v + 2v + v] ex 5 [v + v] ex + 6vex = 0
[(v + 3v + 3v + v) 2 (v + 2v + v) 5 (v + v) + 6v] ex = 0
v + v 6v = 0,
where we have used the fact that the function ex is never zero. Let v =: w. Then
v = w , v = w , and so the above equation becomes
w + w 6w = 0. (6.2)
(c) The auxiliary equation for (6.2), r 2 + r 6 = 0, has the roots r = 3 and r = 2.
Therefore, a general solution to this dierential equation is
w(x) = C1 e3x + C2 e2x ,
where C1 and C2 are arbitrary constants. Choosing, say, C1 = 3, C2 = 0 and C1 = 0,

C2 = 2, we find two linearly independent solutions,
w1 (x) = 3e3x and w2 (x) = 2e2x .
348
Exercises 6.1
Integration yields
3 3
) *
v1 (x) = w1 (x) dx = 3e3x dx = e3x ,
3 3
) *
v2 (x) = w2 (x) dx = 2e2x dx = e2x ,
where we have chosen zero integration constants.
(d) With functions v1 (x) and v2 (x) obtained in (c), we have
y1 (x) = v1 (x)ex = e3x ex = e2x , y2 (x) = v2 (x)ex = e2x ex = e3x .
To show that the functions ex , e2x , and e3x are linearly independent on (, ), we
can use the approach similar to that in Problem 7. Alternatively, since these functions
are solutions to the dierential equation (32), one can apply Theorem 3, as we did in
Problem 15. To this end,
1 1 1 1
1 x 1 1 1
1 e e2x e3x 1 1 1 1 1 1
- x 2x 3x . 1 1 1 1
W e , e , e (x) = 11 ex 2e2x 3e3x 1 = ex e2x e3x 1 1 2 3
1 1
1 = 30e2x = 0
1
1 x 1 1 1
1 e 4e2x 9e3x 1 1 1 4 9 1
on (, ) and so the functions ex , e2x , and e3x are linearly independent on (, ).
33. Let y(x) = v(x)e2x . Dierentiating y(x), we obtain
y (x) = [v (x) + 2v(x)] e2x ,

y (x) = [v (x) + 4v (x) + 4v(x)] e2x ,
y (x) = [v (x) + 6v (x) + 12v (x) + 8v(x)] e2x .
Substituting these expressions into the given dierential equation yields
[(v + 6v + 12v + 8v) 2 (v + 4v + 4v) + (v + 2v) (2v)] e2x = 0

[v + 4v + 5v ] e2x = 0 v + 4v + 5v = 0.
With w(x) := v (x), the above equation becomes
w (x) + 4w (x) + 5w(x) = 0.
349
Chapter 6
The roots of the auxiliary equation, r 2 + 4r + 5 = 0, for this second order equation are
r = 2 i. Therefore,
/ 0
{w1 (x), w2 (x)} = e2x cos x, e2x sin x
form a fundamental solution set. Integrating, we get

3 3
e2x (sin x 2 cos x)
v1 (x) = w1 (x) = e2x cos x dx = ,
5
3 3
e2x (2 sin x + cos x)
v2 (x) = w2 (x) = e2x sin x dx = ,
5
where we have chosen integration constants to be zero. Thus, functions
f (x) = e2x ,
e2x (sin x 2 cos x) 2x sin x 2 cos x
y1 (x) = v1 (x)f (x) = e = ,
5 5
e2x (2 sin x + cos x) 2x 2 sin x + cos x
y2 (x) = v2 (x)f (x) = e =
5 5
are three linearly independent solutions to the given dierential equation.
35. First, let us evaluate the Wronskian of the system {x, sin x, cos x} to make sure that the result
of Problem 34 can be applied.
1 1
1 1
1 x sin x cos x 1
1 1
W [x, sin x, cos x] = 11 1 cos x sin x 11
1 1
1 0 sin x cos x 1
1 1 1 1
1 cos x sin x 1 1 sin x cos x 11
1 1 1
= x1 11 1
1 sin x cos x 1 1 sin x cos x 1
) *
= x cos2 x sin2 x ( sin x cos x + sin x cos x) = x.
Thus, W [x, sin x, cos x] = 0 on (, 0) and (0, ). Therefore, on either of these two intervals,
{x, sin x, cos x} is a fundamental solution set for the third order linear dierential equation
350
Exercises 6.2
given in Problem 34. Expanding the determinant over its last column yields
1 1
1 x sin x cos x y 11 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1 x sin x cos x 1
1 1 cos x sin x y 1 1 1
1 1 = y W [x, sin x, cos x] y 1 1

cos x sin x 1
1 1 1 1
1 0 sin x cos x y 1 1 1
1 1 1 0 cos x sin x 1
1 0 cos x sin x y 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 x sin x cos x 1 1 1 cos x sin x 1
1 1 1 1
+y 11 0 sin x cos x 11 y 11 0 sin x cos x 1
1
1 1 1 1
1 0 cos x sin x 1 1 0 cos x sin x 1
L 1 1 1 1M
1 cos x sin x 1 1 sin x cos x 1
1 1 1 1
= xy y x 1 11 1
1 cos x sin x 1 1 cos x sin x 1
1 1 1 1
1 sin x cos x 1 1 sin x cos x 1
1 1 1 1
+y x 1 1y1 1
1 cos x sin x 1 1 cos x sin x 1
= xy + y xy + y = 0.
EXERCISES 6.2: Homogeneous Linear Equations with Constant Coecients, page 331
1. The auxiliary equation

) *
r 3 + 2r 2 8r = 0 r r 2 + 2r 8 = r(r 2)(r + 4) = 0
has the roots r = 0, 2, and 4. Thus a general solutions to the dierential equation has the
form
y = c1 + c2 e2x + c3 e4x .
3. The auxiliary equation for this problem is 6r 3 + 7r 2 r 2 = 0. By inspection we see that

r = 1 is a root to this equation and so we can factor it as follows
6r 3 + 7r 2 r 2 = (r + 1)(6r 2 + r 2) = (r + 1)(3r + 2)(2r 1) = 0.
Thus, we see that the roots to the auxiliary equation are r = 1, 2/3, and 1/2. These roots
are real and non-repeating. Therefore, a general solution to this problem is given by
z(x) = c1 ex + c2 e2x/3 + c3 ex/2 .
351
Chapter 6
5. We can factor the auxiliary equation, r 3 + 3r 2 + 28r + 26 = 0, as follows:
r 3 + 3r 2 + 28r + 26 = (r 3 + r 2 ) + (2r 2 + 2r) + (26r + 26)

= r 2 (r + 1) + 2r(r + 1) + 26(r + 1) = (r + 1)(r 2 + 2r + 26) = 0.
Thus either r + 1 = 0 r = 1 or r 2 + 2r + 26 = 0 r = 1 5i. Therefore, a

y(x) = c1 ex + c2 ex cos 5x + c3 ex sin 5x .
7. Factoring the characteristic polynomial yields
2r 3 r 2 10r 7 = (2r 3 + 2r 2 ) + (3r 2 3r) + (7r 7)

= 2r 2 (r + 1) 3r(r + 1) 7(r + 1) = (r + 1)(2r 2 3r 7).
Thus the roots of the characteristic equation, 2r 3 r 2 10r 7 = 0, are
r+1=0 r = 1 ,
$
3 32 4(2)(7) 3 65
2r 2 3r 7 = 0 r= = ,
4 4

y(x) = c1 ex + c2 e(3+ 65)x/4
+ c3 e(3 65)x/4
.
9. In the characteristic equation, r 3 9r 2 + 27r 27 = 0, we recognize a complete cube, namely,

(r 3)3 = 0. Thus, it has just one root, r = 3, of multiplicity three. Therefore, a general
solution to the given dierential equation is given by
u(x) = c1 e3x + c2 xe3x + c3 x2 e3x .
11. Since r 4 + 4r 3 + 6r 2 + 4r + 1 = (r + 1)4 , the characteristic equation becomes (r + 1)4 = 0, and it

has the root r = 1 of multiplicity four. Therefore, the functions ex , xex , x2 ex , and x3 ex
form a fundamental solution set and a general solution to the given dierential equation is
) *
y(x) = c1 ex + c2 xex + c3 x2 ex + c4 x3 ex = c1 + c2 x + c3 x2 + c4 x3 ex .
352
Exercises 6.2
2
13. The auxiliary equation in this problem is r 4 +4r 2 +4 = 0. This can be factored as (r 2 + 2) = 0.

Therefore, this equation has roots r = 2i, 2i, 2i, 2i, which we see are repeated and
complex. Therefore, a general solution to this problem is given by
# % # % # % # %
y(x) = c1 cos 2x + c2 x cos 2x + c3 sin 2x + c4 x sin 2x .
15. The roots to this auxiliary equation, (r 1)2 (r + 3)(r 2 + 2r + 5)2 = 0, are
r = 1, 1, 3, 1 2i, 1 2i ,
where we note that 1 and 1 2i are repeated roots. Therefore, a general solution to the
dierential equation with the given auxiliary equation is
y(x) = c1 ex + c2 xex + c3 e3x + (c4 + c5 x)ex cos 2x + (c6 + c7 x)ex sin 2x .
17. From the dierential operator, replacing D by r, we obtain the characteristic equation
(r + 4)(r 3)(r + 2)3 (r 2 + 4r + 5)2 r 5 = 0 ,
whose roots
r+4=0 r = 4,
r3=0 r = 3,
3
(r + 2) = 0 r = 2 of multiplicity 3,
(r 2 + 4r + 5)2 = 0 r = 2 i of multiplicity 2,
r5 = 0 r = 0 of multiplicity 5.
Therefore, a general solution is given by
) *
y(x) = c1 e4x + c2 e3x + c3 + c4 x + c5 x2 e2x + (c6 + c7 x) e2x cos x + (c8 + c9 x) e2x sin x
+c10 + c11 x + c12 x2 + c13 x3 + c14 x4 .
19. First, we find a general solution to the given equation. Solving the auxiliary equation,
r 3 r 2 4r + 4 = (r 3 r 2 ) (4r 4) = (r 1)(r 2 4) = (r 1)(r + 2)(r 2) = 0,
353
Chapter 6
yields the roots r = 1, 2, and 2. Thus a general solution has the form
y(x) = c1 ex + c2 e2x + c3 e2x .
Next, we find constants c1 , c2 , and c3 such that the solution satisfies the initial conditions.
Dierentiating y(x) and substituting the initial conditions, we obtain the system
) *1
y(0) = c1 ex + c2 e2x + c3 e2x 1x=0 = c1 + c2 + c3 = 4,
) *1
y (0) = c1 ex 2c2 e2x + 2c3 e2x 1x=0 = c1 2c2 + 2c3 = 1,
) *1
y (0) = c1 ex + 4c2 e2x + 4c3 e2x 1x=0 = c1 + 4c2 + 4c3 = 19.
Solving yields
c1 = 1, c2 = 2, c3 = 3.
With these coecients, the solution to the given initial problem is
y(x) = ex 2e2x 3e2x .
21. By inspection, r = 2 is a root of the characteristic equation, r 3 4r 2 + 7r 6 = 0. Factoring

yields
r 3 4r 2 + 7r 6 = (r 2)(r 2 2r + 3) = 0.

Therefore, the other two roots are the roots of r 2 2r + 3 = 0, which are r = 1 2i, and
so a general solution to the given dierential equation is given by
# %
y(x) = c1 e2x + c2 cos 2x + c3 sin 2x ex .
Dierentiating, we obtain
8# % # % 9 x
2x
y = 2c1 e + c2 + c3 2 cos 2x + c3 c2 2 sin 2x e ,
8# % # % 9
y = 4c1 e2x + 2c3 2 c2 cos 2x 2c2 2 + c3 sin 2x ex .
Hence, the initial conditions yield
y(0) = c1 + c2 = 1, c1 = 1,

y (0) = 2c1 + c2 + c3 2 = 0, c2 = 0,

y (0) = 4c1 c2 + 2c3 2 = 0 c3 = 2 .
354
Exercises 6.2
Substituting these constants into the general solution, we get the answer

y(x) = e2x 2ex sin 2x .
23. Rewriting the system in operator form yields
(D 3 1) [x] + (D + 1)[y] = 0,
(D 1)[x] + y = 0.
Multiplying the second equation in this sytem by (D + 1) and subtracting the result from the
first equation, we get
/) 3 * 0
D 1 (D + 1)(D 1) [x] = D 2 (D 1)[x] = 0.
Since the roots of the characteristic equation, r 2 (r 1) = 0 are r = 0 of multiplicity two and
r = 1, a general solution x(t) is given by
x(t) = c1 + c2 t + c3 et .
From the second equation in the original system, we obtain

) * ) *
y(t) = x(t) x (t) = c1 + c2 t + c3 et c1 + c2 t + c3 et = (c1 c2 ) + c2 t.
25. A linear combination of the given functions

) *
c0 erx + c1 xerx + c2 x2 erx + + cm1 xm1 erx = c0 + c1 x + c2 x2 + + cm xm erx (6.3)
vanishes on an interval if and only if its polynomial factor, c0 + c1 x + c2 x2 + + cm1 xm1 ,

vanishes on this interval (the exponential factor, erx , is never zero). But, as we have proved
in Problem 27, Section 6.1, the system of monomials {1, x, . . . , xn } is linearly independent on
any interval. Thus, the linear combination (6.3) vanishes on an inteval if and only if it has all
zero coecients, i.e., c0 = c1 = . . . = cm1 = 0. Therefore, the system {erx , xerx , . . . , xm1 erx }
is linearly independent on any interval, in particular, on (, ).
355
Chapter 6
27. Solving the auxiliary equation, r 4 + 2r 3 3r 2 r + (1/2) = 0, using computer software yields
the roots
r1 = 1.119967680, r2 = 0.2963247800, r3 = 0.5202201098, r4 = 2.896072350 .
Thus, all the roots are real and distinct. A general solution to the given equation is, therefore,
y(x) = c1 er1 x + c2 er2 x + c3 er3 x + c4 er4 x c1 e1.120x + c2 e0.296x + c3 e0.520x + c4 e2.896x .
29. The auxiliary equation in this problem is r 4 + 2r 3 + 4r 2 + 3r + 2 = 0. Let
g(r) = r 4 + 2r 3 + 4r 2 + 3r + 2
g (r) = 4r 3 + 6r 2 + 8r + 3.
Then the Newtons recursion formula (2) in Appendix A of the text becomes
rn4 + 2rn3 + 4rn2 + 3rn + 2

rn+1 = rn .
4rn3 + 6rn2 + 8rn + 3
With initial guess r0 = 1 + i, this formula yields
(1 + i)4 + 2(1 + i)3 + 4(1 + i)2 + 3(1 + i) + 2

r1 = (1 + i) 0.481715 + 0.837327i ,
4(1 + i)3 + 6(1 + i)2 + 8(1 + i) + 3
r 4 + 2r 3 + 4r 2 + 3r1 + 2
r2 = r1 1 3 1 2 1 0.052833 + 0.763496i ,
4r1 + 6r1 + 8r1 + 3
r 4 + 2r 3 + 4r 2 + 3r2 + 2
r3 = r2 2 3 2 2 2 0.284333 + 0.789859i ,
4r2 + 6r2 + 8r2 + 3
..
.
r 4 + 2r 3 + 4r 2 + 3r6 + 2
r7 = r6 6 3 6 2 6 0.500000 + 0.866025i ,
4r6 + 6r6 + 8r6 + 3
r 4 + 2r 3 + 4r 2 + 3r7 + 2
r8 = r7 7 3 7 2 7 0.500000 + 0.866025i .
4r7 + 6r7 + 8r7 + 3
Therefore, first two roots of the auxiliary equation are
r 0.5 + 0.866i and r = 0.5 + 0.866i = 0.5 0.866i .
356
Exercises 6.2
Similarly, we find other two roots. With the initial guess r0 = 1 2i, we find that
(1 2i)4 + 2(1 2i)3 + 4(1 2i)2 + 3(1 2i) + 2
r1 = (1 2i)
4(1 2i)3 + 6(1 2i)2 + 8(1 2i) + 3
0.830703 1.652798i ,
..
.
r6 0.499994 1.322875i ,
r7 0.500000 1.322876i ,
r8 0.500000 1.322876i .
Therefore, the other two roots are
r 0.5 1.323i and r = 0.5 1.323i = 0.5 + 1.323i .
Thus, the auxiliary equation has four complex roots, and a general solution to the given
dierential equation is given by
y(x) c1 e0.5x cos(0.866x) + c2 e0.5x sin(0.866x) + c3 e0.5x cos(1.323x) + c4 e0.5x sin(1.323x) .
31. (a) If we let y(x) = xr , then we see that
y = rxr1 ,
y = r(r 1)xr2 = (r 2 r)xr2 , (6.4)
y = r(r 1)(r 2)xr3 = (r 3 3r 2 + 2r)xr3 .
Thus, if y = xr is a solution to this third order Cauchy-Euler equation, then we must
have
x3 (r 3 3r 2 + 2r)xr3 + x2 (r 2 r)xr2 2xrxr1 + 2xr = 0

(r 3 3r 2 + 2r)xr + (r 2 r)xr 2rxr + 2xr = 0
(r 3 2r 2 r + 2)xr = 0. (6.5)
Therefore, in order for y = xr to be a solution to the equation with x > 0, we must have
r 3 2r 2 r + 2 = 0. Factoring this equation yields
r 3 2r 2 r + 2 = (r 3 2r 2) (r 2) = (r 2)(r 2 1) = (r 2)(r + 1)(r 1) = 0.
357
Chapter 6
Equation (6.5) will equal zero and, therefore, the dierential equation will be satisfied for
r = 1 and r = 2. Thus, three solutions to the dierential equation are y = x, y = x1 ,
and y = x2 . Since these functions are linearly independent, they form a fundamental
solution set.
(b) Let y(x) = xr . In addition to (6.4), we need the fourth derivative of y(x).

y (4) = (y ) = r(r 1)(r 2)(r 3)xr4 = (r 4 6r 3 + 11r 2 6r)xr4 .
Thus, if y = xr is a solution to this fourth order Cauchy-Euler equation, then we must

have
x4 (r 4 6r 3 + 11r 2 6r)xr4 + 6x3 (r 3 3r 2 + 2r)xr3

+2x2 (r 2 r)xr2 4xrxr1 + 4xr = 0
(r 4 6r 3 + 11r 2 6r)xr + 6(r 3 3r 2 + 2r)xr + 2(r 2 r)xr 4rxr + 4xr = 0
(r 4 5r 2 + 4)xr = 0. (6.6)
Therefore, in order for y = xr to be a solution to the equation with x > 0, we must have
r 4 5r 2 + 4 = 0. Factoring this equation yields
r 4 5r 2 + 4 = (r 2 4)(r 2 1) = (r 2)(r + 2)(r 1)(r + 1) = 0.
Equation (6.6) will be satisfied if r = 1, 2. Thus, four solutions to the dierential

equation are y = x, y = x1 , y = x2 , and y = x2 . These functions are linearly
independent, and so form a fundamental solution set.
(c) Substituting y = xr into this dierential equation yields
(r 3 3r 2 + 2r)xr 2(r 2 r)xr + 13rxr 13xr = 0

(r 3 5r 2 + 17r 13)xr = 0.
Thus, in order for y = xr to be a solution to this dierential equation with x > 0, we

must have r 3 5r 2 + 17r 13 = 0. By inspection we find that r = 1 is a root to this
equation. Therefore, we can factor this equation as follows
(r 1)(r 2 4r + 13) = 0.
358
Exercises 6.2
We find the remaining roots by using the quadratic formula. Thus, we obtain the roots
r = 1, 2 3i. From the root r = 1, we obtain the solution y = x. From the roots
r = 2 3i, by applying the hint given in the problem, we see that a solution is given by
y(x) = x2+3i = x2 {cos(3 ln x) + i sin(3 ln x)} .
Therefore, by Lemma 2 on page 172 of the text, we find that two real-valued solutions to
this dierential equation are y(x) = x2 cos(3 ln x) and y(x) = x2 sin(3 ln x). Since these
functions and the function y(x) = x are linearly independent, we obtain the fundamental
solution set
/ 0
x, x2 cos(3 ln x), x2 sin(3 ln x) .
33. With suggested values of parameters m1 = m2 = 1, k1 = 3, and k2 = 2, the system (34)(35)

becomes
x + 5x 2y = 0,
(6.7)
y 2x + 2y = 0.
(a) Expressing y = (x + 5x) /2 from the first equation and substituting this expression into
the second equation, we obtain
1
(x + 5x) 2x + (x + 5x) = 0
2 ) (4) *
x + 5x 4x + 2 (x + 5x) = 0
x(4) + 7x + 6x = 0, (6.8)
as it is stated in (36).
(b) The characteristic equation corresponding to (6.8) is r 4 + 7r 2 + 6 = 0. This equation is
of quadratic type. Substitution s = r 2 yields
s2 + 7s + 6 = 0 s = 1, 6.
Thus

r = 1 = i and r = 6 = i 6 ,
and a general solution to (6.8) is given by

x(t) = c1 cos t + c2 sin t + c3 cos 6t + c4 sin 6t .
359
Chapter 6
(c) As we have mentioned in (a), the first equation in (6.7) implies that y = (x + 5x) /2.
Substituting the solution x(t) yields
1 8# %
y(t) = c1 cos t + c2 sin t + c3 cos 6t + c4 sin 6t
2 # %9
+5 c1 cos t + c2 sin t + c3 cos 6t + c4 sin 6t
1 8# %
= c1 cos t c2 sin t 6c3 cos 6t 6c4 sin 6t
2 # %9
+5 c1 cos t + c2 sin t + c3 cos 6t + c4 sin 6t
c3 c4
= 2c1 cos t + 2c2 sin t cos 6t sin 6t .
2 2
(d) Initial conditions x(0) = y(0) = 1 and x (0) = y (0) = 0 imply the system of linear
equations for c1 , c2 , c3 , and c4 . Namely,
x(0) = c1 + c3 = 1, c1 = 3/5,
y(0) = 2c1 (c3 /2) = 1, c3 = 2/5,

x (0) = c2 + c4 6 = 0, c2 = 0,

y (0) = 2c2 (c4 6/2) = 0 c4 = 0.
Thus, the solution to this initial value problem is

3 2 6 1
x(t) = cos t + cos 6t , y(t) = cos t cos 6t .
5 5 5 5
35. Solving the characteristic equation yields
k
EIr 4 k = 0 r4 =
! EI !
k k
r2 = or r2 =
!EI ! EI !
4 k 4 k 4 k
r= or r= = i .
EI EI EI
The first two roots are real numbers, the other two are pure imaginary numbers. Therefore,
a general solution to the vibrating beam equation is
J! K J! K
k k
y(x) = C1 e k/(EI)x + C2 e k/(EI)x + C3 sin
4 4
x + C4 cos x .
EI EI
360
Exercises 6.3
Using the identities
eax = cosh ax + sinh ax, eax = cosh ax sinh ax,
we can express the solution in terms of hyperbolic and trigonometric functions as follows.
J! K J! K
k k
y(x) = C1 e k/(EI)x + C2 e k/(EI)x + C3 sin
4 4
x + C4 cos x
EI EI
L J! K J! KM L J! K J! KM
4 k 4 k 4 k 4 k
= C1 cosh x + sinh x + C2 cosh x sinh x
EI EI EI EI
J! K J! K
4 k 4 k
+C3 sin x + C4 cos x
EI EI
J! K J! K J! K J! K
4 k 4 k 4 k 4 k
= c1 cosh x + c2 sinh x + c3 sin x + c4 cos x ,
EI EI EI EI
where c1 := C1 + C2 , c2 := C1 C2 , c3 := C3 , and c4 := C4 are arbitrary constants.
EXERCISES 6.3: Undetermined Coecients and the Annihilator Method, page 337
1. The corresponding homogeneous equation for this problem is y 2y 5y + 6y = 0 which

has the associated auxiliary equation given by r 3 2r 2 5r + 6 = 0. By inspection we see
that r = 1 is a root to this equation. Therefore, this equation can be factored as follows
r 3 2r 2 5r + 6 = (r 1)(r 2 r 6) = (r 1)(r 3)(r + 2) = 0.
Thus, the roots to the auxiliary equation are given by r = 1, 3, and 2, and a general solution
to the homogeneous equation is
yh (x) = c1 ex + c2 e3x + c3 e2x .
The nonhomogeneous term, g(x) = ex +x2 , is the sum of an exponential term and a polynomial
term. Therefore, according to Section 4.5, this equation has a particular solution of the form
) *
yp (x) = xs1 C1 ex + xs2 C2 + C3 x + C4 x2 .
361
Chapter 6
Since ex is a solution to the associated homogeneous equation and xex is not, we set s1 = 1.
Since none of the terms x2 , x, or 1 is a solution to the associated homogeneous equation, we
set s2 = 0. Thus, the form of a particular solution is
yp (x) = C1 xex + C2 + C3 x + C4 x2 .
3. The associated homogeneous equation for this equation is y + 3y 4y = 0. This equation

has the corresponding auxiliary equation y 3 + 3r 2 4 = 0, which, by inspection, has r = 1 as
one of its roots. Thus, the auxiliary equation can be factored as follows
(r 1)(r 2 + 4r + 4) = (r 1)(r + 2)2 = 0.
From this we see that the roots to the auxiliary equation are r = 1, 2, 2. Therefore, a
general solution to the homogeneous equation is
yh (x) = c1 ex + c2 e2x + c3 xe2x .
The nonhomogeneous term is g(x) = e2x . Therefore, a particular solution to the original
dierential equation has the form yp (x) = xs c1 e2x . Since both e2x and xe2x are solutions
to the associated homogeneous equation, we set s = 2. (Note that this means that r = 2 will
be a root of multiplicity three of the auxiliary equation associated with the operator equation
A[L[y]](x) = 0, where A is an annihilator of the nonhomogeneous term g(x) = e2x and L
is the linear operator L := D 3 + 3D 2 4.) Thus, the form of a particular solution to this
equation is
yp (x) = C1 x2 e2x .
5. In the solution to Problem 1, we determined that a general solution to the homogeneous

dierential equation associated with this problem is
yh (x) = c1 ex + c2 e3x + c3 e2x ,
and that a particular solution has the form
yp (x) = C1 xex + C2 + C3 x + C4 x2 .
362
Exercises 6.3
By dierentiating yp (x), we find
yp (x) = C1 xex + C1 ex + C3 + 2C4 x

yp(x) = C1 xex + 2C1 ex + 2C4
yp(x) = C1 xex + 3C1 ex .
Substituting these expressions into the original dierential equation, we obtain
yp (x) 2yp(x) 5yp (x) + 6yp (x) = C1 xex + 3C1 ex 2C1 xex 4C1 ex 4C4
5C1 xex 5C1 ex 5C3 10C4 x + 6C1 xex + 6C2 + 6C3 x + 6C4 x2 = ex + x2
6C1 ex + (4C4 5C3 + 6C2 ) + (10C4 + 6C3 )x + 6C4 x2 = ex + x2 .
Equating coecients yields

1
6C1 = 1 C1 = ,
6
1
6C4 = 1 C4 = ,
6
10C4 10 5
10C4 + 6C3 = 0 C3 = = = ,
6 36 18
4C4 + 5C3 4(1/6) + 5(5/18) 37

4C4 5C3 + 6C2 = 0 C2 = = = .
6 6 108
Thus, a general solution to the nonhomogeneous equation is given by
1 x 1 2 5 37
y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x) = c1 ex + c2 e3x + c3 e2x xe + x + x+ .
6 6 18 108
7. In Problem 3, a general solution to the associated homogeneous equation was found to be
yh (x) = c1 ex + c2 e2x + c3 xe2x ,
and the form of a particular solution to the nonhomogeneous equation was
yp (x) = C1 x2 e2x .
363
Chapter 6
Dierentiating yp (x) yields
yp (x) = 2C1 xe2x 2C1 x2 e2x = 2C1 (x x2 )e2x

yp(x) = 4C1 (x x2 )e2x + 2C1 (1 2x)e2x = 2C1 (2x2 4x + 1)e2x
yp (x) = 4C1 (2x2 4x + 1)e2x + 2C1 (4x 4)e2x = 4C1 (2x2 + 6x 3)e2x .
By substituting these expressions into the nonhomogeneous equation, we obtain
yp (x) + 3yp (x) 4yp (x) = 4C1 (2x2 + 6x 3)e2x

+6C1 (2x2 4x + 1)e2x 4C1 x2 e2x = e2x
6C1 e2x = e2x .
By equating coecients, we see that C1 = 1/6. Thus, a general solution to the nonhomoge-
neous dierential equation is given by
1 2 2x
y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x) = c1 ex + c2 e2x + c3 xe2x xe .
6
9. Solving the auxiliary equation, r 3 3r 2 + 3r 1 = (r 1)3 = 0, we find that r = 1 is its root

of multiplicity three. Therefore, a general solution to the associated homogeneous equation is
given by
yh (x) = c1 ex + c2 xex + c3 x2 ex .
The nonhomogeneous term, ex , suggests a particular solution of the form yp (x) = Axs ex ,
where we have to choose s = 3 since the root r = 1 of the auxiliary equation is of multiplicity
three. Thus
yp (x) = Ax3 ex .
Dierentiating yp (x) yields

) *
yp (x) = A x3 + 3x2 ex ,
) *
yp(x) = A x3 + 6x2 + 6x ex ,
) *
yp(x) = A x3 + 9x2 + 18x + 6 ex .
364
Exercises 6.3
By substituting these expressions into the original equation, we obtain
yp 3yp + 3yp y = ex
- ) 3 * . - ) * .
A x + 9x2 + 18x + 6 ex 3 A x3 + 6x2 + 6x ex
- ) * .
+3 A x3 + 3x2 ex Ax3 ex = ex
1
6Aex = ex A= ,
6
and so yp (x) = x3 ex /6. A general solution to the given equation then has the form
1 3 x
y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x) = c1 ex + c2 xex + c3 x2 ex + xe .
6
11. The operator D 5 , that is, the fifth derivative operator, annihilates any polynomial of degree
at most four. In particular, D 5 annihilates the polynomial x4 x2 + 11.
13. According to (i) on page 334 of the text, the operator [D (7)] = (D + 7) annihilates the
exponential function e7x .
15. The operator (D2) annihilates the function f1 (x) := e2x and the operator (D1) annihilates
the function f2 (x) := ex . Thus, the composition of these operators, namely, (D 2)(D 1),
annihilates both of these functions and so, by linearity, it annihilates their algebraic sum.
17. This function has the same form as the functions given in (iv) on page 334 of the text. Here
we see that = 1, = 2, and m 1 = 2. Thus, the operator
- .3 - .3
(D {1})2 + 22 = (D + 1)2 + 4
annihilates this function.
19. Given function as a sum of two functions. The first term, xe2x , is of the type (ii) on the
page 334 of the text with m = 2 and r = 2; so [D (2)]2 = (D + 2)2 annihilates this
function. The second term, xe5x sin 3x, is annihilated by
- .2 - .2
(D (5))2 + 32 = (D + 5)2 + 9
2
according to (iv). Therefore, the composition [(D + 2)2 (D + 5)2 + 9] annihilates the function
xe2x + xe5x sin 3x.
365
Chapter 6
21. In operator form, the given equation can be written as

) 2 *
D 5D + 6 [u] = cos 2x + 1.
The function g(x) = cos 2x + 1 is a sum of two functions: cos 2x is of the type (iii) on page 334
of the text with = 2, and so it is innihilated by (D 2 + 4); 1, as a constant, is annihilated
by D. Therefore, the operator D(D 2 + 4) innihilates the right-hand side, g(x). Applying this
operator to both sides of the dierential equation given in this problem yields
) *) * ) *
D D 2 + 4 D 2 5D + 6 [u] = D D 2 + 4 [cos 2x + 1] = 0
) *
D D 2 + 4 (D 3)(D 2)[u] = 0.
This last equation has the associated auxiliary equation r (r 2 + 4) (r 3)(r 2) = 0, which
has roots r = 2, 3, 0, 2i. Thus, a general solution to the dierential equation associated
with this auxiliary equation is
u(x) = c1 e2x + c2 e3x + c3 cos 2x + c4 sin 2x + c5 .
The homogeneous equation, u 5u + 6u = 0, associated with the original problem, has as

its corresponding auxiliary equation r 2 5r + 6 = (r 2)(r 3) = 0. Therefore, the solution
to the homogeneous equation associated with the original problem is uh (x) = c1 e2x + c2 e3x .
Since a general solution to this original problem is given by
u(x) = uh (x) + up (x) = c1 e2x + c2 e3x + up (x)
and since u(x) must be of the form
u(x) = c1 e2x + c2 e3x + c3 cos 2x + c4 sin 2x + c5 ,
we see that
up (x) = c3 cos 2x + c4 sin 2x + c5 .
23. The function g(x) = e3x x2 is annihilated by the operator A := D 3 (D 3). Applying the
operator A to both sides of the dierential equation given in this problem yields
- .
A [y 5y + 6y] = A e3x x2 = 0
366
Exercises 6.3
D 3 (D 3)(D 2 5D + 6)[y] = D 3 (D 3)2 (D 2)[y] = 0.
This last equation has the associated auxiliary equation
r 3 (r 3)2 (r 2) = 0,
which has roots r = 0, 0, 0, 3, 3, 2. Thus, a general solution to the dierential equation

associated with this auxiliary equation is
y(x) = c1 e2x + c2 e3x + c3 xe3x + c4 x2 + c5 x + c6 .
The homogeneous equation, y 5y + 6y = 0, associated with the original problem, is the

same as in Problem 21 (with u replaced by y). Therefore, the solution to the homogeneous
equation associated with the original problem is yh (x) = c1 e2x +c2 e3x . Since a general solution
to this original problem is given by
y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x) = c1 e2x + c2 e3x + yp (x)
and since y(x) must be of the form
y(x) = c1 e2x + c2 e3x + c3 xe3x + c4 x2 + c5 x + c6 ,
we see that
yp (x) = c3 xe3x + c4 x2 + c5 x + c6 .
25. First, we rewrite the equation in operator form, that is,

) *
D 2 6D + 9 [y] = sin 2x + x (D 3)2 [y] = sin 2x + x .
In this problem, the right-hand side is a sum of two functions. The first function, sin 2x, is
annihilated by (D 2 + 4), and the operator D 2 annihilates the term x. Thus A := D 2 (D 2 + 4)
annihilates the function sin 2x+x. Applying this operator to the original equation (in operator
form) yields
D 2 (D 2 + 4)(D 3)2 [y] = D 2 (D 2 + 4)[sin 2x + x] = 0. (6.9)
367
Chapter 6
This homogeneous equation has associated characteristic equation
r 2 (r 2 + 4)(r 3)2 = 0
with roots 2i, and double roots r = 0 and r = 3. Therefore, a general solution to (6.9) is
given by
y(x) = c1 e3x + c2 xe3x + c3 + c4 x + c5 cos 2x + c6 sin 2x . (6.10)
Since the homogeneous equation, (D 3)2 [y] = 0, which corresponds to the original equation,
has a general solution yh (x) = c1 e3x + c2 xe3x , the tail in (6.10) gives the form of a particular
solution to the given equation.
27. Since
) * / 0
y + 2y + 2y = D 2 + 2D + 2 [y] = (D + 1)2 + 1 [y],
the auxiliary equation in this problm is (r +1)2 +1 = 0, whose roots are r = 1i. Therefore,
a general solution to the homogeneous equation, corresponding to the original equation, is
yh (x) = (c1 cos x + c2 sin x) ex .
Applying the operator D 3 {(D+1)2 +1} to the given equation, which annihilates its right-hand
side, yields
/ 0/ 0 / 0- .
D 3 (D + 1)2 + 1 (D + 1)2 + 1 [y] = D 3 (D + 1)2 + 1 ex cos x + x2 = 0
- .2
D 3 (D + 1)2 + 1 [y] = 0. (6.11)
The corresponding auxiliary equation, r 3 [(r + 1)2 + 1]2 = 0 has a root r = 0 of multiplicity
three and double roots r = 1 i. Therefore, a general solution to (6.11) is given by
y(x) = (c1 cos x + c2 sin x) ex + (c3 cos x + c4 sin x) xex + c5 x2 + c6 x + c7 .
Since y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x), we conclude that
yp (x) = (c3 cos x + c4 sin x) xex + c5 x2 + c6 x + c7 .
368
Exercises 6.3
29. In operator form, the equation becomes

) *
D 3 2D 2 + D [z] = D(D 1)2 [z] = x ex . (6.12)
Solving the corresponding auxiliary equation, r(r 1)2 = 0, we find that r = 0, 1, and 1.
Thus
zh (x) = C1 + C2 ex + C3 xex
is a general solution to the homogeneous equation associated with the original equation. To
annihilate the right-hand side in (6.12), we apply the operator D 2 (D 1) to this equation.
Thus we obtain
D 2 (D 1)D(D 1)2 [z] = D 2 (D 1) [x ex ] D 3 (D 1)3 = 0.
Solving the corresponding auxiliary equation, r 3 (r 1)3 = 0, we see that r = 0 and r = 1 are
its roots of multiplicity three. Hence, a general solution is given by
z(x) = c1 + c2 x + c3 x2 + c4 ex + c5 xex + c6 x2 ex .
This general solution, when compared with zh (x), gives
zp (x) = c2 x + c3 x2 + c6 x2 ex .
31. Writing this equation in operator form yields

) *
D 3 + 2D 2 9D 18 [y] = 18x2 18x + 22 . (6.13)
Since,
) *
D 3 + 2D 2 9D 18 = D 2 (D + 2) 9(D + 2) = (D + 2) D 2 9 = (D + 2)(D 3)(D + 3),
(6.13) becomes
(D + 2)(D 3)(D + 3)[y] = 18x2 18x + 22 .
The auxiliary equation in this problem is (r + 2)(r 3)(r + 3) = 0 with roots r = 2, 3, and
3. Hence, a general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation has the form
yh (x) = c1 e2x + c2 e3x + c3 e3x .
369
Chapter 6
Since the operator D 3 annihilates the nonhomogeneous term in the original equation and
r = 0 is not a root of the auxiliary equation, we seek for a particular solution of the form
yp (x) = C0 x2 + C1 x + C2 .
Substituting yp into the given equation (for convenience, in operator form) yileds
) 3 *- .
D + 2D 2 9D 18 C0 x2 + C1 x + C2 = 18x2 18x + 22
- .
0 + 2 (2C0 ) 9 [2C0 x + C1 ] 18 C0 x2 + C1 x + C2 = 18x2 18x + 22
18C0 x2 + (18C1 18C0 )x + (18C2 9C1 + 4C0 ) = 18x2 18x + 22.
Equating coecients, we obtain the system
18C0 = 18, C0 = 1,
18C1 18C0 = 18, C1 = 0,
18C2 9C1 + 4C0 = 22 C2 = 1.
Thus, yp (x) = x2 1 and
y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x) = c1 e2x + c2 e3x + c3 e3x + x2 1
is a general solution to the original nonhomogeneous equation. Next, we satisfy the initial
conditions. Dierentiation yields
y (x) = 2c1 e2x + 3c2 e3x 3c3 e3x + 2x,

y (x) = 4c1 e2x + 9c2 e3x + 9c3 e3x + 2.
Therefore,
2 = y(0) = c1 + c2 + c3 1, c1 + c2 + c3 = 1,
8 = y (0) = 2c1 + 3c2 3c3 , 2c1 + 3c2 3c3 = 8,

12 = y (0) = 4c1 + 9c2 + 9c3 + 2 4c1 + 9c2 + 9c3 = 14.
Solving this system, we find that c1 = 1, c2 = 2, and c3 = 0, and so
y(x) = e2x 2e3x + x2 1
gives the solution to the given initial value problem.
370
Exercises 6.3
33. Let us write given equation in operator form.

) 3 *
D 2D 2 3D + 10 [y] = (34x 16)e2x 10x2 + 6x + 34 .
By inspection, r = 2 is a root of the characteristic equation, r 3 2r 2 3r + 10 = 0. Using,

say, long division we find that
) * - .
r 3 2r 2 3r + 10 = (r + 2) r 2 4r + 5 = (r + 2) (r 2)2 + 1
and so the other two roots of the auxiliary equation are r = 2i. This gives a general solution
to the corresponding homogeneous equation
yh (x) = c1 e2x + (c2 cos x + c3 sin x) e2x .
According to the nonhomogeneous term, we look for a particular solution to the original
equation of the form
yp (x) = x (C0 x + C1 ) e2x + C2 x2 + C3 x + C4 ,
where the factor x in the exponential term appears due to the fact that r = 2 is a root of
the characteristic equation. Substituting yp (x) into the given equation and simplifying yield
) *
D 3 2D 2 3D + 10 [yp (x)] = (34x 16)e2x 10x2 + 6x + 34
(34C0 x + 17C1 16C0 ) e2x + 10C2 x2 + (10C3 6C2 )x
+10C4 3C3 4C2 = (34x 16)e2x 10x2 + 6x + 34.
Equating corresponding coecients, we obtain the system
34C0 = 34, C0 = 1,
17C1 16C0 = 16, C1 = 0,
10C2 = 10, C2 = 1,
10C3 6C2 = 6, C3 = 0,
10C4 3C3 4C2 = 34 C4 = 3.
Thus, yp (x) = x2 e2x x2 + 3 and
y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x) = c1 e2x + (c2 cos x + c3 sin x) e2x + x2 e2x x2 + 3
371
Chapter 6
is a general solution to the given nonhomogeneous equation. Next, we find constants c1 , c2 ,

and c3 such that the initial conditions are satisfied. Dierentiation yields
y (x) = 2c1 e2x + [(2c2 + c3 ) cos x + (2c3 c2 ) sin x] e2x + (2x 2x2 )e2x 2x,
y (x) = 4c1 e2x + [(3c2 + 4c3 ) cos x + (3c3 4c2 ) sin x] e2x + (2 8x + 4x2 )e2x 2.
Therefore,
3 = y(0) = c1 + c2 + 3, c1 + c2 = 0,

0 = y (0) = 2c1 + 2c2 + c3 , 2c1 + 2c2 + c3 = 0,
0 = y (0) = 4c1 + 3c2 + 4c3 4c1 + 3c2 + 4c3 = 0.
The solution of this homogeneous linear system is c1 = c2 = c3 = 0. Hence, the answer is

y(x) = x2 e2x x2 + 3.
35. If a0 = 0, then equation (4) becomes
an y (n) + an1 y (n1) + + a1 y = f (x)

) *
an D n + an1 D n1 + + a1 D [y] = f (x)
) *
D an D n1 + an1 D n2 + + a1 [y] = f (x). (6.14)
Since the operator D m+1 annihilates any polynomial f (x) = bm xm + + b0 , applying D m+1
to both sides in (6.14) yields
) *
D m+1 D an D n1 + an1 D n2 + + a1 [y] = D m+1 [f (x)] = 0
) *
D m+2 an D n1 + an1 D n2 + + a1 [y] = 0. (6.15)
The auxiliary equation, corresponding to this homogeneous equation is,

) *
r m+2 an r n1 + an1 r n2 + + a1 = 0. (6.16)
Since a1 = 0,
) *1
an r n1 + an1 r n2 + + a1 1r=0 = a1 = 0,
372
Exercises 6.3
which means that r = 0 is not a root of this polynomial. Thus, for the auxiliary equation
(6.16), r = 0 is a root of exact multiplicity m + 2, and so a general solution to (6.15) is given
by
y(x) = c0 + c1 x + + cm+1 xm+1 + Y (x), (6.17)
where Y (x), being associated with roots of an r n1 + an1 r n2 + + a1 = 0, is a general

solution to (an D n1 + an1 D n2 + + a1 ) [y] = 0. (One can write down Y (x) explicitly but
there is no need in doing this.)
On the other hand, the auxiliary equation for the homogeneous equation, associated with
(6.14), is r(an r n1 + an1 r n2 + + a1 ) = 0, and r = 0 is its simple root. Hence, a general
solution yh (x) to the homogeneous equation is given by
yh (x) = c0 + Y (x), (6.18)
where Y (x) is the same as in (6.17). Since y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x), it follows from (6.17) and
(6.18) that
yp (x) = c1 x + + cm+1 xm+1 = x (c1 + + cm+1 xm ) ,
as stated.
37. Writing equation (4) in operator form yields

) *
an D n + an1 D n1 + + a0 [y] = f (x). (6.19)
The characteristic equation, corresponding to the associated homogeneous equation, is
an r n + an1 r n1 + + a0 = 0. (6.20)
Suppose that r = i is a root of (6.20) of multiplicity s 0. (s = 0 means that r = i is not

a root.) Then (6.20) can be factored as
) *s ) *
an r n + an1 r n1 + + a0 = r 2 + 2 an r n2s + + a0 / 2s = 0
and so a general solution to the homogeneous equation is given by
yh (x) = (c1 cos x + c2 sin x) + x(c3 cos x + c4 sin x)

(6.21)
+ + xs1 (c2s1 cos x + c2s sin x) + Y (x),
373
Chapter 6
where Y (x) is the part of yh (x) corresponding to the roots of an r n2s + + a0 / 2s = 0.
Since the operator (D 2 + 2 ) annihilates f (x) = a cos x + b sin x, applying this operator to
both sides in (6.19), we obtain
) *
(D 2 + 2 ) an D n + an1 D n1 + + a0 [y] = (D 2 + 2 )[f (x)] = 0.
The corresponding auxiliary equation,

) * ) 2 *s+1 ) n2s *
(r 2 + 2 ) an r n + an1 r n1 + + a0 = 0 r + 2 an r + + a0 / 2s = 0
has r = i as its root of multiplicity s + 1. Therefore, a general solution to this equation is

given by
y(x) = (c1 cos x + c2 sin x) + x(c3 cos x + c4 sin x)

+ + xs1 (c2s1 cos x + c2s sin x) + xs (c2s+1 cos x + c2s+2 sin x) + Y (x).
Since, y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x), comparing y(x) with yh (x) given in (6.21), we conclude that
yp (x) = xs (c2s+1 cos x + c2s+2 sin x).
All that remains is to note that, for any m < s, the functions xm cos x and xm sin x are
presented in (6.21), meaning that they are solutions to the homogeneous equation correspond-
ing to (6.19). Thus s is the smallest number m such that xm cos x and xm sin x are not
solutions to the corresponding homogeneous equation.
(D 2 1) [x] + y = 0,
x + (D 2 1) [y] = e3t .
Subtracting the first equation from the second equation multiplied by (D 2 1), we get
R) * ) S /)
*2 * 0 ) *- .
D 1 [x] + D 1 [y] D 2 1 [x] + y = D 2 1 e3t 0 = 8e3t
2 2
R) *2 S ) *
D 2 1 1 [y] = 8e3t D 2 D 2 2 [y] = 8e3t . (6.22)
374
Exercises 6.4

The auxiliary equation, r 2 (r 2 2) = 0, has roots r = 2 and a double root r = 0. Hence,

yh (t) = c1 + c2 t + c3 e 2t
+ c4 e 2t
is a general solution to the homogeneous equation coresponding to (6.22). A particular solution

to (6.22) has the form yp (t) = Ae3t . Substitution yields
) *- . ) *- .
D 2 D 2 2 Ae3x = D 4 2D 2 Ae3x = 81Ae3x (2)9Ae3x = 63Ae3x = 8e3x
3x 8e3x
yp (t) = Ae = ,
63
and so
8e3x
y(t) = yp (t) + yh (t) = + c1 + c2 t + c3 e 2t + c4 e 2t
63
is a general solution to (6.22). We find x(t) from the second equation in the original system.
x(t) = e3t + y(t) y (t)

+ 3x , + ,
3t 8e
2t

2t 72e3x
2t

2t
= e + + c1 + c2 t + c3 e + c4 e + 2c3 e + 2c4 e
63 63
e3x
= + c1 + c2 t c3 e 2t c4 e 2t .
63
EXERCISES 6.4: Method of Variation of Parameters, page 341
1. To apply the method of variation of parameters, first we have to find a fundamental solution
set for the corresponding homogeneous equation, which is
y 3y + 4y = 0.
Factoring the auxiliary polynomial, r 3 3r 2 + 4, yields

) * ) *
r 3 3r 2 + 4 = r 3 + r 2 4r 2 4 = r 2 (r + 1) 4(r 1)(r + 1) = (r + 1)(r 2)2 .
Therefore, r = 1, 2, and 2 are the roots of the auxiliary equation, and y1 = ex , y2 = e2x ,
and y3 = xe2x form a fundamental solution set. According to the variation of parameters
method, we seek for a particular solution of the form
yp (x) = v1 (x)y1 (x) + v2 (x)y2 (x) + v3 (x)y3 (x) = v1 (x)ex + v2 (x)e2x + v3 (x)xe2x .
375
Chapter 6
To find functions vj s we need four determinants, the Wronskian W [y1 , y2 , y3](x) and W1 (x),
W2 (x), and W3 (x) given in (10) on page 340 of the text. Thus we compute
1 1 1 1
1 x 2x 2x 1 1 1
1 e e xe 1 1 1 1 x 1
- x 2x 2x . 1 1 1 1
W e , e , xe (x) = 11 e x
2e2x
(1 + 2x)e 11 = e e e 11 1 2 1 + 2x
2x x 2x 2x 1 = 9e3x ,
1
1 1 1 1
1 ex 4e2x (4 + 4x)e2x 1 1 1 4 4 + 4x 1
1 1
- . 1 e2x xe2x 11
1
W1 (x) = (1)31 W e2x , xe2x (x) = 1 2x 1 = e4x ,
1 2e (1 + 2x)e 2x 1
1 1
- . 1 ex xe 2x 1
1 1
W2 (x) = (1)32 W ex , xe2x (x) = 1 1 = (1 + 3x)ex ,
1 ex (1 + 2x)e2x 1
1 1
- . 1 ex e2x 1
1 1
W3 (x) = (1)33 W ex , e2x (x) = 1 1 = 3ex .
1 e x
2e 1
2x
Substituting these expressions into the formula (11) for determining vj s, we obtain
3 3 2x 4x
g(x)W1 (x) e e 1 3x
v1 (x) = x 2x 2x
dx = 3x
dx = e ,
W [e , e , xe ] 9e 27
3 3 3
g(x)W2 (x) e2x (1 + 3x)ex 1 x x2
v2 (x) = dx = dx = (1 + 3x) dx = ,
W [ex , e2x , xe2x ] 9e3x 9 9 6
3 3 2x x
g(x)W3 (x) e 3e x
v3 (x) = x 2x 2x
dx = 3x
dx = ,
W [e , e , xe ] 9e 3
where we have chosen zero integration constants. Then formula (12), page 340 of the text,
gives a particular solution
+ ,
1 3x x x x2 x 2x 1 2x xe2x x2 e2x
yp (x) = e e + e2x + xe = e + .
27 9 6 3 27 9 6
Note that the first two terms in yp (x) are solutions to the corresponding homogeneous equa-
tion. Thus, another (and simpler) answer is yp (x) = x2 e2x /6.
3. Let us find a fundamental solution set for the corresponding homogeneous equation,
z + 3z 4z = 0.
Factoring the auxiliary polynomial, r 3 + 3r 2 4, yields

) * ) *
r 3 + 3r 2 4 = r 3 r 2 + 4r 2 4 = r 2 (r 1) + 4(r + 1)(r 1) = (r 1)(r + 2)2 .
376
Exercises 6.4
Therefore, r = 1, 2, and 2 are the roots of the auxiliary equation, and so the functions
z1 = ex , z2 = e2x , and z3 = xe2x form a fundamental solution set. A particular solution
then has the form
zp (x) = v1 (x)z1 (x) + v2 (x)z2 (x) + v3 (x)z3 (x) = v1 (x)ex + v2 (x)e2x + v3 (x)xe2x . (6.23)
To find functions vj s we need four determinants, the Wronskian W [z1 , z2 , z3 ](x) and W1 (x),
W2 (x), and W3 (x) given in (10) on page 340 of the text. Thus we compute
1 1 1 1
1 x 1 1 1
1 e e2x xe2x 1 1 1 1 x 1
- x 2x 2x . 1 1 1 1
W e , e , xe (x) = 11 ex 2e2x (1 2x)e2x 11 = e 3x 1 1 2 1 2x
1
1 = 9e3x ,
1
1 x 2x 2x 1 1 1
1 e 4e (4x 4)e 1 1 1 4 4x 4 1
1 1
- . 1 e2x xe2x 11
1
W1 (x) = (1)31 W e2x , xe2x (x) = 1 1 = e4x ,
1 2e2x (1 2x)e2x 1
1 1
- . 1 ex xe 2x 1
1 1
W2 (x) = (1)32 W ex , xe2x (x) = 1 x 1 = (3x 1)ex ,
1 e (1 2x)e 2x 1
1 1
- . 1 ex e2x 11
1
W3 (x) = (1)33 W ex , e2x (x) = 1 x 1 = 3ex .
1 e 2e2x 1
Substituting these expressions into the formula (11) on page 340 of the text, we obtain
3 3 2x 4x
g(x)W1 (x) e e 1
v1 (x) = x 2x 2x
dx = 3x
dx = ex ,
W [e , e , xe ] 9e 9
3 3 2x x
g(x)W2 (x) e (3x 1)e
v2 (x) = 2x 2x
dx = dx
x
W [e , e , xe ] 9e3x
3 + ,
1 4x x 7
= (3x 1)e dx = e4x ,
9 12 144
3 3 2x
g(x)W3 (x) e (3ex ) 1
v3 (x) = x 2x 2x
dx = 3x
dx = e4x .
W [e , e , xe ] 9e 12
Substituting these expressions into (6.23) yields

+ ,
1 x 7 1 4x 2x 1 2x
zp (x) = ex ex + e4x e2x e xe = e .
9 12 144 12 16
377
Chapter 6
5. Since the nonhomogeneous term, g(x) = tan x, is not a solution to a homogeneous linear
dierential equation with constant coecients, we will find a particular solution by the method
of variation of parameters. To do this, we must first find a fundamental solution set for the
corresponding homogeneous equation, y + y = 0. Its auxiliary equation is r 3 + r = 0,
which factors as r 3 + r = r(r 2 + 1). Thus, the roots to this auxiliary equation are r = 0, i.
Therefore, a fundamental solution set to the homogeneous equation is {1, cos x, sin x} and
yp (x) = v1 (x) + v2 (x) cos x + v3 (x) sin x.
To accomplish this, we must find the four determinants W [1, cos x, sin x](x), W1 (x), W2 (x),
W3 (x). That is, we calculate
1 1
1 1
1 1 cos x sin x 1
1 1
W [1, cos x, sin x](x) = 11 0 sin x cos x 11 = sin2 x + cos2 x = 1,
1 1
1 0 cos x sin x 1
1 1
1 cos x sin x 1 ) *
1 1
W1 (x) = (1)31 W [cos x, sin x](x) = 1 1 = cos2 x + sin2 x = 1,
1 sin x cos x 1
1 1
1 1 sin x 1
1 1
W2 (x) = (1)32 W [1, sin x](x) = 1 1 = cos x,
1 0 cos x 1
1 1
1 1 cos x 11
33 1
W3 (x) = (1) W [1, cos x](x) = 1 1 = sin x.
1 0 sin x 1
By using formula (11) on page 340 of the text, we can now find v1 (x), v2 (x), and v3 (x). Since
g(x) = tan x, we have (assuming that all constants of integration are zero)
3 3
g(x)W1 (x)
v1 (x) = dx = tan x dx = ln(sec x),
W [1, cos x, sin x](x)
3 3 3
g(x)W2 (x)
v2 (x) = dx = tan x( cos x) dx = sin x dx = cos x,
W [1, cos x, sin x](x)
3 3 3
g(x)W3 (x) sin2 x
v3 (x) = dx = tan x( sin x) dx = dx
W [1, cos x, sin x](x) cos x
3 3
1 cos2 x
= dx = (cos x sec x) dx = sin x ln(sec x + tan x).
cos x
378
Exercises 6.4
Therefore, we have
yp (x) = v1 (x) + v2 (x) cos x + v3 (x) sin x

= ln(sec x) + cos2 x + sin2 x sin x ln(sec x + tan x)
yp (x) = ln(sec x) sin x ln(sec x + tan x) + 1.
Since y 1 is a solution to the homogeneous equation, we may choose
yp (x) = ln(sec x) sin x ln(sec x + tan x).
Note: We left the absolute value signs o ln(sec x) and ln(sec x + tan x) because of the stated
domain: 0 < x < /2.
7. First, we divide the dierential equation by x3 to obtain the standard form
y 3x1 y + 6x2 y 6x3 y = x4 , x > 0,
from which we see that g(x) = x4 . Given that {x, x2 , x3 } is a fundamental solution set for
the corresponding homogeneous equation, we are looking for a particular solution of the form
yp (x) = v1 (x)x + v3 (x)x2 + v3 (x)x3 . (6.24)
Evaluating determinants W [x, x2 , x3 ](x), W1 (x), W2 (x), and W3 (x) yileds

1 1
1 2 3 1 1 1 1 1
1 x x x 1 1 2x 3x2 1 1 x2 x3 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
W [x, x2 , x3 ](x) = 11 1 2x 3x2 11 = x 1 11 1 = 2x3 ,
1 1 1 2 6x 1 1 2 6x 1
1 0 2 6x 1
1 1
1 x2 x3 1
1 1
W1 (x) = (1)31 W [x2 , x3 ](x) = 1 1 = x4 ,
1 2x 3x2 1
1 1
1 x x3 1
1 1
W2 (x) = (1)32 W [x, x3 ](x) = 1 1 = 2x3 ,
1 1 3x 12
1 1
1 x x2 1
1 1
W3 (x) = (1)33 W [x, x2 ](x) = 1 1 = x2 .
1 1 2x 1
379
Chapter 6
So,
3 3 4 4
g(x)W1 (x) x x 1
v1 (x) = 2 3
dx = 3
dx = 2 + c1 ,
W [x, x , x ](x) 2x 4x
3 3 4 3
g(x)W2 (x) x (2x ) 1
v2 (x) = 2 3
dx = 3
dx = 3 + c2 ,
W [x, x , x ](x) 2x 3x
3 3 4 2
g(x)W3 (x) x (x ) 1
v3 (x) = 2 3
dx = 3
dx = 4 + c3 ,
W [x, x , x ](x) 2x 8x
where c1 , c2 , and c3 are constants of integration. Substitution back into (6.24) yields
+ , + , + ,
1 1 1 1
yp (x) = 2 + c1 x + 3
+ c2 x + 4 + c3 x3 =
2
+ c1 x + c2 x2 + c3 x3 .
4x 3x 8x 24x
Since {x, x2 , x3 } is a fundamental solution set for the homogeneous equation, taking c1 , c2 ,
and c3 to be arbitrary constants, we obtain a general solution to the original nonhomogeneous
equation. That is,
1
y(x) = + c1 x + c2 x2 + c3 x3 .
24x
9. To find a particular solution to the nonhomogeneous equation, we will use the method of
variation of parameters. We must first calculate the four determinants W [ex , ex , e2x ](x),
W1 (x), W2 (x), W3 (x). Thus, we have
1 1
1 x 1
1 e ex e2x 1
1 1
W [ex , ex , e2x ](x) = 11 ex ex 2e2x 11 = 4e2x + 2e2x + e2x + e2x 2e2x 4e2x = 6e2x ,
1 x 1
1 e ex 4e2x 1
1 1
1 1 1 1
1 0 ex e2x 1 1 ex e2x 1
1 1 1 1
W1 (x) = 11 0 ex 2e2x 11 = (1)31 1 1 = 2ex + ex = 3ex ,
1 1 1 ex
2e 2x 1
1 1 ex 4e2x 1
1 1
1 x 2x 1 1 1
1 e 0 e 1 1 ex e2x 1
1 1 1 1 ) 3x *
W2 (x) = 11 ex 0 2e2x 11 = (1)32 1 x 1 = 2e e3x
= e3x ,
1 x 1 1 e 2e 2x 1
1 e 1 4e2x 1
1 1
1 x 1 1 1
1 e ex 0 1 1 ex x 1
1 1 1 e 1
W3 (x) = 11 ex ex 0 11 = (1)33 1 x 1 = 1 1 = 2.
1 x 1 1 e e x 1
1 e x
e 1 1
380
Exercises 6.4
Therefore, according to formula (12) on page 340 of the text, a particular solution, yp (x), will
be given by
3 3 3
3ex g(x) e3x g(x) 2g(x)
yp (x) = ex
2x
dx + ex 2x
dx + e2x dx
6e 6e 6e2x
3 3 3
1 1 1
yp (x) = ex e g(x) dx + ex
x
e g(x) dx + e2x
x
e2x g(x) dx.
2 6 3
11. First, we find a fundamental solution set to the corresponding homogeneous equation,
x3 y 3xy + 3y = 0. (6.25)
Here we involve the procedure of solving Cauchy-Euler equations discussed in Problem 38,
Section 4.3. Thus, let x = et . Then dx/dt = et = x and so the chain rule yields
dy dy dx dy
= =x ,
dt dx dt+ , dx + , 4 5
d2 y d dy d dy dx dy d2 y dy 2d y
2
dy 2
2d y
= = x = + x x == x + x = + x ,
dt2 dt dt dx dx dt dx dx2 dx dx2 dt dx2
d2 y d2 y dy
x2 2 = 2 ,
dx , dt
+ dt
+ , 4 5
d3 y d d2 y d dy 2
2d y dx dy d2 y 3
2d y
= = x +x = + 3x 2 + x x
dt3 dt dt2 dx dx dx2 dt dx dx dx3
2 3
+ 2 , 3
dy 2d y 3d y dy d y dy 3d y d2 y dy 3
3d y
= x + 3x + x = + 3 + x = 3 2 + x
dx dx2 dx3 dt dt2 dt dx3 dt2 dt dx3
3
3d y d3 y d2 y dy
x = 3 + 2 .
dx3 dt3 dt2 dt
Substituting these expressions into (6.25), we obtain

4 3 5 4 5
dy d2 y dy dy d3 y d2 y dy
3
3 2 +2 3 + 3y = 0 3 + 3y = 0.
dt dt dt dt dt3 dt2 dt
The auxiliary equation corresponding to this linear homogeneous equation with constant co-
ecients is
r 3 3r 2 r + 3 = 0 r 2 (r 3) (r 3) = 0 (r 3)(r + 1)(r 1) = 0,
381
Chapter 6
whose roots are r = 1, 1, and 3. Therefore, the functions
y1 (t) = et , y2 (t) = et , and y3 (t) = e3t
form a fundamental solution set. Substituting back et = x we find that
y1 (x) = et = x ,
1
y2 (x) = et = (et ) = x1 ,
3
y3 (x) = e3t = (et ) = x3
form a fundamental solution set for the homogeneous equation (6.25). Next, we apply the
variation of parameters to find a particular solution to the original equation. A particular
solution has the form
yp (x) = v1 (x)x + v2 (x)x1 + v3 (x)x3 . (6.26)
To find functions v1 (x), v2 (x), and v3 (x) we use formula (11) on page 340 of the text. We
compute
1 1
1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1
1 x x x 1 1 x2 3x2 1 1 x1 x3 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
W [x, x1 , x3 ](x) = 11 1 x2 3x2 11 = x 1 1 1 3 1 = 16 ,
1 1 1 2x 3
6x 1 1 2x 6x 1
1 0 2x3 6x 1
1 1
1 x1 x3 1
1 1
W1 (x) = (1)31 W [x1 , x3 ](x) = 1 1 = 4x ,
1 x2 3x2 1
1 1
1 x x3 1
1 1
W2 (x) = (1)32 W [x, x3 ](x) = 1 1 = 2x3 ,
1 1 3x2 1
1 1
1 x x1 1
1 1
W3 (x) = (1)33 W [x, x1 ](x) = 1 1 = 2x1 .
1 1 x 12
Also, writing the given equation in standard form,

3 3
y 2
y + 3 y = x cos x,
x x
we see that the nonhomogeneous term is g(x) = x cos x. Thus, by (11),
3 3
x cos x(4x) 1 1) *
v1 (x) = dx = x2 cos x dx = x2 sin x + 2x cos x 2 sin x + c1 ,
16 4 4
382
Exercises 6.4
3 3
x cos x(2x3 ) 1
v2 (x) = dx = x4 cos x dx
16 8
1) 4 *
= x sin x + 4x3 cos x 12x2 sin x 24x cos x + 24 sin x + c2 ,
8
3 3
x cos x(2x1 ) 1 1
v3 (x) = dx = cos x dx = sin x + c3 ,
16 8 8
where c1 , c2 , c3 are constants of integration, and we have used integration by parts to evaluate
v1 (x) and v2 (x). Substituting these functions into (6.26) and simplifying yields
(x2 sin x + 2x cos x 2 sin x) x

yp (x) = + c1 x
4
(x4 sin x + 4x3 cos x 12x2 sin x 24x cos x + 24 sin x) x1 x3 sin x
+ + c2 x1 + + c3 x3
8 8
= c1 x + c2 x1 + c3 x3 x sin x 3 cos x + 3x1 sin x .
If we allow c1 , c2 , and c3 in the above formula to be arbitrary constants, we obtain a general

solution to the original Cauchy-Euler equation. Thus, the answer is
y(x) = c1 x + c2 x1 + c3 x3 x sin x 3 cos x + 3x1 sin x .
13. Since 1 1
1 y1 . . . yk1 0 yk+1 . . . yn 1
1 1
1 1
1 y1
. . . yk1 0
yk+1 . . . yn 1
1 1
1 .. .. .. .. .. 1
Wk (x) = 1 . . . . . 1,
1 1
1 (n2)
y1
(n2)
. . . yk1 0 yk+1
(n2) (n2)
. . . yn 1
1 1
1 1
1 (n1)
y1
(n1)
. . . yk1 1 yk+1
(n1) (n1)
. . . yn 1
the kth column of this determinant consists of all zeros except the last entry, which is 1.
Therefore, expanding Wk (x) by the cofactors in the kth column, we get
Wk (x) = (0)C1,k + (0)C2,k + + (0)Cn1,n + (1)Cn,k

1 1
1 1
1 y1 . . . yk1 yk+1 . . . yn 1
1 1
1 y
. . . yk1
yk+1 ... yn 1
n+k 1 1 1
= (1)(1) 1 . .. .. .. 1
1 .. . . . 1
1 1
1 (n2) (n2) (n2) (n2) 1
1 y1 . . . yk1 yk+1 . . . yn 1
383
Chapter 6
= (1)n+k W [y1 , . . . , yk1, yk+1, . . . , yn ] (x).
Finally,
(1)n+k = (1)(nk)+(2k) = (1)nk .
1. (a) In notation of Theorem 1, we have p1 (x) 0, p2 (x) = ln x, p3 (x) = x, p4 (x) 2,

and g(x) = cos 3x. All these functions, except p2 (x), are continuous on (, ), and
p2 (x) is defined and continuous on (0, ). Thus, Theorem 1 guarantees the existence of
a unique solution on (0, ).
(b) By dividing both sides of the given dierential equation by x2 1, we rewrite the equation
in standard form, that is,

sin x
x+4 ex x2 + 3
y + 2 y + 2 y + 2 y= 2 .
x 1 x 1 x 1 x 1
Thus we see that

sin x x+4 ex x2 + 3
p1 (x) = 2 , p2 (x) = 2
, p3 (x) = , and g(x) = .
x 1 x 1 x2 1 x2 1
Functions p1 (x), p3 (x), and g(x) are defined and continuous on (, ) except x = 1;
p2 (x) is defined and continuous on {x 4, x = 1}. Thus, the common domain for
p1 (x), p2 (x), p3 (x), and g(x) is {x 4, x = 1}, and, in addition, these functions are
continuous there. This set consists of three intervals,
[4, 1), (1, 1), and (1, ).
Theorem 1 guarantees the existence of a unique solution on each of these intervals.
3. A linear combination,
) *
c1 sin x + c2 x sin x + c3 x2 sin x + c4 x3 sin x = c1 + c2 x + c3 x2 + c4 x3 sin x (6.27)
vanishes identically on (, ) if and only if the polynomial c1 + c2 x + c3 x2 + c4 x3 vanishes

identically on (, ). Since the number of real zeros of a polynomial does not exceed
384
Review Problems
its degree, unless its the zero polynomial, we conclude that the linear combination (6.27)
vanishes identically on (, ) if and only if c1 = c2 = c3 = c4 = 0. This means that the
given functions are linearly independent on (, ).
5. (a) Solving the auxiliary equation yields
(r + 5)2 = 0 or
(r + 5)2 (r 2)3 (r 2 + 1)2 = 0 (r 2)3 = 0 or
(r 2 + 1)2 = 0.
Thus, the roots of the auxiliary equation are
r = 5 of multiplicity 2,
r=2 of multiplicity 3,
r = i of multiplicity 2.
According to (22) on page 329 and (28) on page 330 of the text, the set of functions
(assuming that x is the independent variable)
e5x , xe5x , e2x , xe2x , x2 e2x , cos x, x cos x, sin x, x sin x
forms an independent solution set. Thus, a general solution is given by
c1 e5x + c2 xe5x + c3 e2x + c4 xe2x + c5 x2 e2x + c6 cos x + c7 x cos x + c8 sin x + c9 x sin x .
(b) Solving the auxiliary equation yields
r 4 = 0 or
r 4 (r 1)2 (r 2 + 2r + 4)2 = 0 (r 1)2 = 0 or
(r 2 + 2r + 4)2 = 0.
Thus, the roots of the auxiliary equation are

r = 1 3i of multiplicity 2.
385
Chapter 6
Using (22) on page 329 and (28) on page 330 of the text, we conclude that the set of
functions (with x as the independent variable)

1 , x , x2 , x3 , ex , xex , ex cos 3x, xex cos 3x, sin 3x, xex sin 3x
forms an independent solution set. A general solution is given then by

c1 + c2 x + c3 x2 + c4 x3 + c5 ex + c6 xex + c7 ex cos 3x + c8 xex cos 3x

+c9 sin 3x + c10 xex sin 3x

= c1 + c2 x + c3 x2 + c4 x3 + (c5 + c6 x)ex + (c7 + c8 x)ex cos 3x

+(c9 + c10 x)ex sin 3x .
7. (a) D 3 , since the third derivative of a quadratic polynomial is identically zero.
(b) The function e3x + x 1 is the sum of e3x and x 1. The function x 1 is annihilated by
D 2 , the second derivative operator, and, according to (i) on page 334 of the text, (D 3)
annihilates e3x . Therefore, the composite operator
D 2 (D 3) = (D 3)D 2
annihilates both functions and, hence, there sum.
(c) The function x sin 2x is of the form given in (iv) on page 334 of the text with m = 2,
= 0, and = 2. Thus, the operator
- .2 ) *2
(D 0)2 + 22 = D2 + 4
annihilates this function.
(d) We again use (iv) on page 334 of the text, this time with m = 3, = 2, and = 3, to
conclude that the given function is annihilated by
/ 03 - .3
[D (2)]2 + 32 = (D + 2)2 + 9 .
386
Review Problems
(e) Representing the given function as a linear combination,

) * ) *
x2 2x + xex + (sin 2x) (cos 3x),
we find an annihilator for each term. Thus, we have:
x2 2x is annihilated by D 3 ,
xex is annihilated by [D (1)]2 = (D + 1)2 (by (ii), page 334) ,
sin 2x is annihilated by D 2 + 22 = D 2 + 4 (by (iii), page 334) ,
cos 3x is annihilated by D 2 + 32 = D 2 + 9 (by (iii), page 334) .
Therefore, the product D 3 (D + 1)2 (D 2 + 4)(D 2 + 9) annihilates the given function.
9. A general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation,
x3 y 2x2 y 5xy + 5y = 0,
is given by yh (x) = c1 x + c2 x5 + c3 x1 . We now apply the variation of parameters method

described in Section 6.4, and seek for a particular solution to the original nonhomogeneous
equation in the form
yp (x) = v1 (x)x + v2 (x)x5 + v3 (x)x1 .
Since
(x) = 1, (x) = 0 ,
(x5 ) = 5x4 , (x5 ) = 20x3 ,
(x1 ) = x2 , (x1 ) = 2x3 ,
the Wronskian W [x, x5 , x1 ](x) and determinants Wk (x) given in (10) on page 340 of the text
become
1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 x x5 x1 1 1 1 1 x5 x1 1
1 1 4 2
W [x, x5 , x1 ](x) = 11 1 5x4 x2 1 = (x) 11 5x x 1 1
1 (1) 1
1
1
1 1 20x3 2x3 1 1 20x3 2x3 1
1 1
1 0 20x3 2x3 1
= (x)(30x) (18x2 ) = 48x2 ,
1 1
1 x5 x1 1
1 1
W1 (x) = (1)31 1 4 1 = 6x3 ,
1 5x x2 1
387
Chapter 6
1 1
1 x x1 11
32 1
W2 (x) = (1) 1 1 = 2x1 ,
1 1 x2 1
1 1
1 x x5 11
1
W3 (x) = (1)33 1 1 = 4x5 .
1 1 5x4 1
Now we divide both sides of the given equation by x3 to obtain an equation in standard form,
that is,
y 2x1 y 5x2 y + 5x3 y = x5 .
Hence, the right-hand side, g(x), in formula (1) on page 339 of the text equals to x5 . Applying
formula (11), page 340 of the text, yields
3 5 3
x (6x3 ) 1 1 3
v1 (x) = 2
dx = x4 dx = x ,
48x 8 24
3 5 1 3
x (2x ) 1 1 7
v2 (x) = 2
dx = x8 dx = x ,
48x 24 168
3 5 5 3
x (4x ) 1 1
v3 (x) = 2
dx = x2 dx = x1 .
48x 12 12
Therefore,
+ , + , + ,
1 3 1 7 1 1
yp (x) = x x+ x 5
x + x x1
24 168 12
+ ,
1 1 1 1
= x2 = x2 ,
24 168 12 21
and a general solution to the given equation is given by
1 2
y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x) = c1 x + c2 x5 + c3 x1 x .
21
388
CHAPTER 7: Laplace Transforms
EXERCISES 7.2: Definition of the Laplace Transform, page 359
1. For s > 0, using Definition 1 on page 351 and integration by parts, we compute
3 3N 3N + st ,
st st e
L {t} (s) = e t dt = lim e t dt = lim td
N N s
0 0 0

st 1N
4 3N
st 1N st 1N
5
te 1 1 te 1 e 1
= lim 1 + e dt = lim
st
1 2 1
N s 0 s N s 0 s 0
0
4 5
NesN esN 1 1
= lim +0 2 + 2 = 2
N s s s s
because, for s > 0, esN 0 and NesN = N/esN 0 as N .
3. For s > 6, we have

3 3 3N
L {t} (s) = est e6t dt = e(6s)t dt = lim e(6s)t dt
N
0 0 0
4 1N 5
(6s)t
4 (6s)N 5
e 1 e 1 1 1
= lim 1 = lim =0 = .
N 6s 0 N 6s 6s 6s s6
5. For s > 0,
3 3N
L {cos 2t} (s) = est cos 2t dt = lim est cos 2t dt
N
0 0
4 5
(s cos 2t + 2 sin 2t) 11N
st
e
= lim 1
N s2 + 4 0
4 sN 5
e (s cos 2N + 2 sin 2N) s s
= lim = ,
N s2 + 4 s2 + 4 s2 + 4
where we have used integration by parts to find an antiderivative of est cos 2t.
389
Chapter 7
7. For s > 2,
3 3
/ 0
L e2t cos 3t (s) = est e2t cos 3t dt = e(2s)t cos 3t dt
0 0
4 5
e(2s)t ((2 s) cos 3t + 3 sin 3t) 11N
= lim 1
N (2 s)2 + 9 0
e(2s)N [(2 s) cos 3N + 3 sin 3N] (2 s) s2

= lim 2
= .
N (2 s) + 9 (s 2)2 + 9
9. As in Example 4 on page 353 in the text, we first break the integral into separate parts. Thus,
3 32 3 3
L {f (t)} (s) = est f (t) dt = est 0 dt + test dt = test dt .
0 0 2 2
An antiderivative of test was, in fact, obtained in Problem 1 using integration by parts. Thus,
we have
3 4+ , 5 4 5
test est 11N NesN esN 2e2s e2s
test dt = lim 2 1 = lim 2 + + 2
N s s 2 N s s s s
2
+ , + ,
2e2s e2s 2 1 2s + 1
= + 2 = e2s + 2 = e2s .
s s s s s2
11. In this problem, f (t) is also a piecewise defined function. So, we split the integral and obtain
3 3 3 3
L {f (t)} (s) = est f (t) dt = est sin t dt + est 0 dt = est sin t dt
0 0 0
e st
(s sin t cos t) 11 es (1) es + 1
= 1 = = ,
s2 + 1 0 s2 + 1 s2 + 1
which is valid for all s.
13. By the linearity of the Laplace transform,

/ 0 / 0 / 0
L 6e3t t2 + 2t 8 (s) = 6L e3t (s) L t2 (s) + 2L {t} (s) 8L {1} (s).
From Table 7.1 on page 358 in the text, we see that

/ 0 1 1
L e3t (s) = = , s > 3;
s (3) s+3
390
Exercises 7.2
/ 0 2! 2 1! 1 1
L t2 (s) = 2+1 = 3 , L {t} (s) = = , L {1} (s) = , s > 0.
s s s1+1 s2 s
Thus the formula
/ 0 1 2 1 1 6 2 2 8
L 6e3t t2 + 2t 8 (s) = 6 3 +2 2 8 = 3+ 2 ,
s+3 s s s s+3 s s s
is valid for s in the intersection of the sets s > 3 and s > 0, which is s > 0.
15. Using the linearity of Laplace transform and Table 7.1 on page 358 in the text, we get
/ 0 / 0 / 0 / 0
L t3 tet + e4t cos t (s) = L t3 (s) L tet (s) + L e4t cos t (s)
3! 1! s4
= 3+1 +
s (s 1)1+1 (s 4)2 + 12
6 1 s4
= 4 2
+ ,
s (s 1) (s 4)2 + 1
which is valid for s > 4.
17. Using the linearity of Laplace transform and Table 7.1 on page 358 in the text, we get
/ 0 / 0 / 0 / 0
L e3t sin 6t t3 + et (s) = L e3t sin 6t (s) L t3 (s) + L et (s)
6 3! 1 6 6 1
= 2 2
3+1 + = 2
4+ ,
(s 3) + 6 s s1 (s 3) + 36 s s1
valid for s > 3.
19. For s > 5, we have

R S / 0 R S
L t4 e5t et cos 7t (s) = L t4 e5t (s) L et cos 7t (s)
4! s1 24 s1
= 4+1
= 5
.
(s 5) (s 1)2 + ( 7)2 (s 5) (s 1)2 + 7
21. Since the function g1 (t) 1 is continuous on (, ) and f (t) = g1 (t) for t in [0, 1], we
conclude that f (t) is continuous on [0, 1) and continuous from the left at t = 1. The function
g2 (t) (t 2)2 is also continuous on (, ), and so f (t) (which is the same as g2 (t) on
(1, 10]) is continuous on (1, 10]. Moreover,
lim+ f (t) = lim+ g2 (t) = g2 (1) = (1 2)2 = 1 = f (1),

t1 t1
391
Chapter 7
which implies that f (t) is continuous from the right at t = 1. Thus f (t) is continuous at t = 1
and, therefore, is continuous at any t in [0, 10].
23. All the functions involved in the definition of f (t), that is, g1 (t) 1, g2 (t) = t 1, and
g3 (t) = t2 4, are continuous on (, ). So, f (t), being a restriction of these functions, on
[0, 1), (1, 3), and (3, 10], respectively, is continuous on these three intervals. At points t = 1
and 3, f (t) is not defined and so is not continuous. But one-sided limits
lim f (t) = lim g1 (t) = g1 (1) = 1,

t1 t1
lim f (t) = lim+ g2 (t) = g2 (1) = 0,
t1+ t1
lim f (t) = lim g2 (t) = g2 (3) = 2,
t3 t3
lim f (t) = lim+ g3 (t) = g3 (3) = 5,
t3+ t3
exist and pairwise dierent. Therefore, f (t) has jump discontinuities at t = 1 and t = 3, and
hence piecewise continuous on [0, 10].
25. Given function is a rational function and, therefore, continuous on its domain, which is all
reals except zeros of the denominator. Solving t2 + 7t + 10 = 0, we conclude that the points
of discontinuity of f (t) are t = 2 and t = 5. These points are not in [0, 10]. So, f (t) is
continuous on [0, 10].
27. Since
1
lim+ f (t) = lim+ = ,
t0 t0 t
f (t) has infinite discontinuity at t = 0, and so neither continuous nor piecewise continuous
[0, 10].
29. (a) First observe that |t3 sin t| |t3 | for all t. Next, three applications of LHospitals rule
show that
t3 3t2 6t 6
lim t
= lim t
= lim 2 t = lim 3 t = 0
t e t e t e t e
392
Exercises 7.2
for all > 0. Thus, fixed > 0, for some T = T () > 0, we have |t3 | < et for all t > T ,
and so
13 1 1 1
1t sin t1 1t3 1 < et , t > T.
Therefore, t3 sin t is of exponential order , for any > 0.
(b) Clearly, for any t, |f (t)| = 100e49t , and so Definition 3 is satisfied with M = 100, = 49,
and any T . Hence, f (t) is of exponential order 49.
(c) Since
f (t) 3 2
lim t
= lim et t = lim e(t )t = ,
t e t t
t
we see that f (t) grows faster than e for any . Thus f (t) is not of exponential order.
(d) Similarly to (a), for any > 0, we get

|t ln t| t ln t ln t + 1 1/t
lim t
= lim t = lim t
= lim 2 t = 0 ,
t e t e t e t e
and so f (t) is of exponential order for any positive .
(e) Since,
) 2 * et2 + et2 1 2
f (t) = cosh t = > et
2 2
t2 t
and e grows faster than e for any fixed (see page 357 in the text), we conclude that
cosh (t2 ) is not of exponential order.
(f) This function is bounded:

1 1
1 1 1
1
|f (t)| = 1 2 1 = f r1t2 + 1 1 = 1,
t + 11 0+1
and so Definition 3 is satisfied with M = 1 and = 0. Hence, f (t) is of exponential
order 0.
(g) The function sin (t2 ) is bounded, namely, |sin (t2 )| 1. For any fixed > 0, the limit of
t4 /et , as t , is 0, which implies that t4 et for all t > T = T (). Thus,
1 ) 2* 1
1sin t + t4 e6t 1 1 + et e6t = 2e+6t .
This means that f (t) is of exponential order for any > 6.
393
Chapter 7
(h) The function 3 + cos 4t is bounded because
|3 + cos 4t| 3 + | cos 4t| 4.
Therefore, by the triangle inequality,

1 1
1 21 2
|f (t)| 1et 1 |3 + cos 4t| et 4,
2
and, therefore, for any fixed , f (t) grows faster than et (because et does, and the other
term is bounded). So, f (t) is not of exponential order.
(i) Clearly, for any t > 0,
t2 t
= t < (1)t = t.
t+1 t+1
Therefore,
2 /(t+1)
et < et ,
and Definition 3 holds with M = 1, = 1, and T = 0.
(j) Since, for any x, 1 sin x 1, the given function is bounded. Indeed,
1 # % 1 1 # %1
1 2 1 1 2 1
1sin et + esin t 1 1sin et 1 + esin t 1 + e
Thus it is of exponential order 0.
31. (a)
3 3 3N
/ 0 st (a+ib)t
L e(a+ib)t (s) := e e dt = e(a+ibs)t
dt = lim e(a+ibs)t dt
N
0 0 0
+ 1N ,
e(a+ibs)t
1 1 ) *
= lim 1 = lim e(as+ib)N 1 . (7.1)
N a + ib s 0 a + ib s N
Since
e(as+ib)x = e(as)x eibx ,
where the first factor vanishes at if a s < 0 while the second factor is a bounded
1 1
(1eibx 1 1) and periodic function, the limit in (7.1) exists if and only if a s < 0.
Assuming that s > a, we get
1 ) * 1 1
lim e(as+ib)N 1 = (0 1) = .
a + ib s N a + ib s s (a + ib)
394
Exercises 7.2
(b) Note that s (a + ib) = (s a) ib. Multiplying the result in (a) by the complex
conjugate of the denominator, that is, (s a) + bi, we get
1 (s a) + ib (s a) + ib
= = ,
s (a + ib) [(s a) ib] [(s a) + ib] (s a)2 + b2
where we used the fact that, for any complex number z, zz = |z|2 .
(c) From (a) and (b) we klnow that

/ 0 (s a) + ib
L e(a+ib)t (s) = .
(s a)2 + b2
Writing
(s a) + ib sa b
2 2
= 2 2
+ i,
(s a) + b (s a) + b (s a)2 + b2
we see that
4 5
- / 0 . sa b sa
Re L e(a+ib)t (s) = Re + i = , (7.2)
(s a)2 + b2 (s a)2 + b2 (s a)2 + b2
4 5
- / (a+ib)t 0 . sa b b
Im L e (s) = Im + i = . (7.3)
(s a)2 + b2 (s a)2 + b2 (s a)2 + b2
On the other hand, by Eulers formulas,
- . - .
Re est e(a+ib)t = est Re eat (cos bt + i sin bt) = est eat cos bt
and so

3 3
- / 0 .
Re L e(a+ib)t (s) = Re est e(a+ib)t dt = Re es e(a+ib)t dt
0 0
3 3
- . / 0
= Re es e(a+ib)t dt = est eat cos bt dt = L eat cos bt (s),
0 0
which together with (7.2) gives the last entry in Table 7.1. Similarly,
- / 0 . / 0
Im L e(a+ib)t (s) = L eat sin bt (s),
and so (7.3) gives the Laplace transform of eat sin bt.
395
Chapter 7
33. Let f (t) be a piecewise continuous function on [a, b], and let a function g(t) be continuous on
[a, b]. At any point of continuity of f (t), the function (f g)(t) is continuous as the product of
two continuous functions at this point. Suppose now that c is a point of discontinuity of f (t).
Then one-sided limits
lim f (t) = L and lim f (t) = L+

tc tc+
exist. At the same time, continuity of g(t) yields
lim g(t) = lim+ g(t) = lim g(t) = g(c).

tc tc tc
Thus, the product rule implies that one-sided limits
lim (f g)(t) = lim f (t) lim g(t) = L g(c)

tc tc tc
lim (f g)(t) = lim+ f (t) lim+ g(t) = L+ g(c)
tc+ tc tc
exist. So, f g has a jump (even removable if g(c) = 0) discontinuity at t = c.
Therefore, the product (f g)(t) is continuous at any point on [a, b] except possibly a finite
number of points (namely, points of discontinuity of f (t)).
EXERCISES 7.3: Properties of the Laplace Transform, page 365
1. Using the linearity of the Laplace transform we get

/ 0 / 0 / 0
L t2 + et sin 2t (s) = L t2 (s) + L et sin 2t (s).
From Table 7.1 in Section 7.2 we know that

/ 0 2! 2 / 0 2 2
L t2 (s) = 3 = 3 , L et sin 2t (s) = 2 2
= .
s s (s 1) + 2 (s 1)2 + 4
Thus
/ 0 2 2
L t2 + et sin 2t (s) = 3 + .
s (s 1)2 + 4
396
Exercises 7.3
3. By the linearity of the Laplace transform,

/ 0 / 0 / 0
L et cos 3t + e6t 1 (s) = L et cos 3t (s) + L e6t (s) L {1} (s).
From Table 7.1 of the text we see that

/ 0 s (1) s+1
L et cos 3t (s) = 2 2
= , s > 1; (7.4)
[s (1)] + 3 (s + 1)2 + 9
/ 0 1
L e6t (s) = , s > 6; (7.5)
s6
1
L {1} (s) = , s > 0. (7.6)
s
Since (7.4), (7.5), and (7.6) all hold for s > 6, we see that our answer,
/ 0 s+1 1 1
L et cos 3t + e6t 1 (s) = 2
+ ,
(s + 1) + 9 s 6 s
is valid for s > 6. Note that (7.4) and (7.5) could also be obtained from the Laplace transforms
for cos 3t and 1, respectively, by applying the translation Theorem 3.
5. We use the linearity of the Laplace transform and Table 7.1 to get
/ 0 / 0
L 2t2 et t + cos 4t (s) = 2L t2 et (s) L {t} (s) + L {cos 4t} (s)
2 1 s 4 1 s
= 2 3
2+ 2 2
= 3
2+ 2 ,
(s + 1) s s +4 (s + 1) s s + 16
which is valid for s > 0.
7. Since (t 1)4 = t4 4t3 + 6t2 4t + 1, we have from the linearity of the Laplace transform
that
/ 0 / 0 / 0 / 0
L (t 1)4 (s) = L t4 (s) 4L t3 (s) + 6L t2 (s) 4L {t} (s) + L {1} (s).
From Table 7.1 of the text, we get that, for s > 0,

/ 0 4! 24
L t4 (s) = 5 = ,
s s5
/ 30 3! 6
L t (s) = 4 = ,
s s4
397
Chapter 7
/ 0 2! 2
L t2 (s) = 3 = 3 ,
s s
1! 1
L {t} (s) = 2 = 2 ,
s s
1
L {1} (s) = .
s
Thus
/ 0 24 24 12 4 1
L (t 1)4 (s) = 5 4 + 3 2 + , s > 0.
s s s s s
9. Since
/ 0 2
L et sin 2t (s) = ,
(s + 1)2 + 4
we use Theorem 6 to get
4 5
/ 0 / ) *0 - / 0 . 2
L et t sin 2t (s) = L t et sin 2t (s) = L et sin 2t (s) =
(s + 1)2 + 4
- .2 - . 4(s + 1)
= 2(1) (s + 1)2 + 4 (s + 1)2 + 4 = .
[(s + 1)2 + 4]2
11. We use the definition of cosh x and the linear property of the Laplace transform.
6 bt 7
e + ebt
L {cosh bt} (s) = L (s)
2
4 5
1 - / bt 0 / bt 0 . 1 1 1 s
= L e (s) + L e (s) = + = 2 .
2 2 sb s+b s b2
13. In this problem, we need the trigonometric identity sin2 t = (1 cos 2t)/2 and the linearity of
the Laplace transform.
6 7
/ 0 1 cos 2t
L sin2 t (s) = L (s)
2
4 5
1 1 1 s 2
= [L {1} (s) L {cos 2t} (s)] = 2 = 2
.
2 2 s s +4 s(s + 4)
15. From the trigonometric identity cos2 t = (1 + cos 2t)/2, we find that
1 1
cos3 t = cos t cos2 t = cos t + cos t cos 2t .
2 2
398
Exercises 7.3
Next we write
1 1 1
cos t cos 2t = [cos(2t + t) + cos(2t t)] = cos 3t + cos t.
2 2 2
Thus,
1 1 1 3 1
cos3 t =cos t + cos 3t + cos t = cos t + cos 3t.
2 4 4 4 4
We now use the linearity of the Laplace transform and Table 7.1 to find that
/ 0 3 1 3 s 1 s
L cos3 t (s) = L {cos t} (s) + L {cos 3t} (s) = + ,
4 4 4 s2 + 1 4 s2 + 9
which holds for s > 0.
17. Since sin A sin B = [cos(A B) cos(A + B)]/2, we get

6 7
cos 3t cos 7t 1
L {sin 2t sin 5t} (s) = L (s) = [L {cos 3t} (s) L {cos 7t} (s)]
2 2
4 5
1 s s 20s
= 2
2 = 2 .
2 s + 9 s + 49 (s + 9)(s2 + 49)
19. Since sin A cos B = [sin(A + B) + sin(A B)]/2, we get

6 7
sin[(m + n)t] + sin[(m n)t]
L {cos nt sin mt} (s) = L (s)
2
1 m+n 1 mn
= 2 2
+ .
2 s + (m + n) 2 s + (m n)2
2
21. By the translation property of the Laplace transform (Theorem 3),

/ 0 u 1 sa
1
L eat cos bt (s) = L {cos bt} (s a) = 2 1 = .
u + b u=sa (s a)2 + b2
2
23. Clearly,
(t sin bt) = (t) sin bt + t(sin bt) = sin bt + bt cos bt.
Therefore, using Theorem 4 and the entry 30, that is, L {t sin bt} (s) = (2bs)/[(s2 + b2 )2 ], we
obtain
1
L {sin bt + bt cos bt} (s) = L {(t sin bt) } (s) = sL {t sin bt} (s) (t sin bt) 1t=0
s(2bs) 2bs2
= 0 = .
(s2 + b2 )2 (s2 + b2 )2
399
Chapter 7
25. (a) By property (6) on page 363 of the text,

4 5
s s2 b2
L {t cos bt} (s) = [L {cos bt} (s)] = 2 = , s > 0.
s + b2 (s2 + b2 )2
(b) Again using the same property, we get

/ 0
L t2 cos bt (s) = L {t(t cos bt)} (s) = [L {t cos bt} (s)]
4 2 5
s b2 2s3 6sb2
= = , s > 0.
(s2 + b2 )2 (s2 + b2 )3
27. First observe that since f (t) is piecewise continuous on [0, ) and f (t)/t approaches a finite
limit as t 0+ , we conclude that f (t)/t is also piecewise continuous on [0, ). Next, since
for t 1 we have |f (t)/t| |f (t)|, we see that f (t)/t is of exponential order since f (t) is.
These observations and Theorem 2 on page 357 of the text show that L{f (t)/t} exists. When
the results of Problem 26 are applied to f (t)/t, we see that
6 7
f (t)
lim L (N) = 0.
N t
By Theorem 6, we have that
3 3 6 7
st test f (t) d f (t)
F (s) = e f (t) dt = dt = L (s) .
t ds t
0 0
Thus,
3 3 46 7 5 3s 6 7
d f (t) d f (t)
F (u) du = L (u) du = L (u) du
du t du t
s s
6 7 6 7 6 7
f (t) f (t) f (t)
= L (s) lim L (N) = L (s) .
t N t t
29. From the linearity properties (2) and (3) on page 354 of the text we have
L {g(t)} (s) = L {y (t) + 6y (t) + 10y(t)} (s) = L {y (t)} (s) + 6L {y (t)} (s) + 10L {y(t)} (s).
Next, applying properties (2) and (4) on pages 361 and 362 yields
- .
L {g} (s) = s2 L {y} (s) sy(0) y (0) + 6 [sL {y} (s) y(0)] + 10L {y} (s).
400
Exercises 7.3
Keeping in mind the fact that all initial conditions are zero the above becomes
) *
G(s) = s2 + 6s + 10 Y (s), where Y (s) = L {y} (s).
Therefore, the transfer function H(s) is given by

Y (s) 1
H(s) = = 2 .
G(s) s + 6s + 10
31. Using Definition 1 of the Laplace transform in Section 7.2, we obtain

3 3c 3
st
) *
L {g(t)} (s) = e g(t) dt = (0) dt + est f (t c) dt = t c u, dt du
0 0 c
3 3
= es(u+c) f (u) du = ecs esu f (u) du = ecs L {f (t)} (s).
0 0
33. The graphs of the function f (t) = t and its translation g(t) to the right by c = 1 are shown
in Figure 7-A(a).
We use the result of Problem 31 to find L{g(t)}.

es
L {g(t)} (s) = e(1)s L {t} (s) = .
s2
35. The graphs of the function f (t) = sin t and its translation g(t) to the right by c = /2 units
are shown in Figure 7-A(b).
We use the formula in Problem 31 to find L{g(t)}.

e(/2)s
L {g(t)} (s) = e(/2)s L {sin t} (s) = .
s2 + 1
37. Since f (t) is of exponential order on [0, ), for some , M > 0, and T > 0,
|f (t)| Met , for all t T. (7.7)
On the other hand, piecewise continuity of f (t) on [0, ) implies that f (t) is bounded on
any finite interval, in particular, on [0, T ]. That is,
|f (t)| C, for all t in [0, T ]. (7.8)
401
Chapter 7
f (t)=t
g(t)
g(t)
2
0 /2
f (t)=sin t
0 1 2 3
(a) (b)
Figure 7A: Graphs of functions in Problems 33 and 35.
From (7.7) and (7.8) it follows that, for s > ,
3 3T 3 3T 3
st st st st
e |f (t)| dt = e |f (t)| dt + e |f (t)| dt C e dt + M est et dt
0 0 0
1 LT 1 M - .
T
st 1T (s)t 1N sT
Ce 1 Me 1 C 1e Me(s)T
= + lim = + 0
s 10 N s 1T s s
as s . Therefore, (7) yields

1 1
13 1 3
1 1
0 |sL {f } (s) f (0)| = 11 est f (t) dt11 est |f (t)| dt 0 as s .
1 1
0 0
Hence, by the squeeze theorem,
lim |sL {f } (s) f (0)| = 0 lim [sL {f } (s) f (0)] = 0 lim sL {f } (s) = f (0).
s s s
EXERCISES 7.4: Inverse Laplace Transform, page 374
1. From Table 7.1, the function 6/(s 1)4 = (3!)/(s 1)4 is the Laplace transform of et tn with
= 1 and n = 3. Therefore, 6 7
1 6
L (t) = et t3 .
(s 1)4
402
Exercises 7.4
3. Writing
s+1 s+1 s+1
= 2 = ,
s2 + 2s + 10 (s + 2s + 1) + 9 (s + 1)2 + 32
we see that this function is the Laplace transform of et cos 3t (the last entry in Table 7.1
with = 1 and b = 3). Hence
6 7
1 s+1
L 2
(t) = et cos 3t .
s + 2s + 10
5. We complete the square in the denominator and use the linearity of the inverse Laplace
transform to get
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
L 2
(t) = L 2 2
(t) = L 2 2
(t) = e2t sin 2t.
s + 4s + 8 (s + 2) + 2 2 (s + 2) + 2 2
(See the Laplace transform formula for et sin bt in Table 7.1).
7. By completing the square in the denominator, we can rewrite (2s + 16)/(s2 + 4s + 13) as
2s + 16 2s + 16 2(s + 2) 4(3)
= = + .
s2 + 4s + 4 + 9 2
(s + 2) + 3 2 2
(s + 2) + 3 2 (s + 2)2 + 32
Thus, by the linearity of the inverse Laplace transform,

6 7 6 7 6 7
1 2s + 16 1 s+2 1 3
L (t) = 2L (t) + 4L (t)
s2 + 4s + 13 (s + 2)2 + 32 (s + 2)2 + 32
= 2e2t cos 3t + 4e2t sin 3t .
9. We complete the square in the denominator, rewrite the given function as a sum of two entries
in Table 7.1, and use the linearity of the inverse Laplace transform. This yields
3s 15 3 s5 3 (s 1) 4 (3/2)(s 1) 3(2)
= = =
2s2 4s + 10 2 s2 2s + 5 2 (s 1)2 + 22 (s 1)2 + 22 (s 1)2 + 22
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 3s 15 3 1 s1 1 2
L = L 3L
2s2 4s + 10 2 (s 1)2 + 22 (s 1)2 + 22
3
= et cos 2t 3et sin 2t.
2
403
Chapter 7
11. In this problem, we use the partial fractions decomposition method. Since the denominator,
(s 1)(s + 2)(s + 5), is a product of three nonrepeated linear factors, the expansion has the
form
s2 26s 47 A B C
= + +
(s 1)(s + 2)(s + 5) s1 s+2 s+5
A(s + 2)(s + 5) + B(s 1)(s + 5) + C(s 1)(s + 2)
= .
(s 1)(s + 2)(s + 5)
Therefore,
s2 26s 47 = A(s + 2)(s + 5) + B(s 1)(s + 5) + C(s 1)(s + 2). (7.9)
Evaluating both sides of (7.9) for s = 1, s = 2, and s = 5, we find constants A, B, and C.
s=1: (1)2 26(1) 47 = A(1 + 2)(1 + 5) A = 4,

2
s = 2 : (2) 26(2) 47 = B(2 1)(2 + 5) B = 1,
s = 5 : (5)2 26(5) 47 = C(5 1)(5 + 2) C = 6.
Hence,
s2 26s 47 6 1 4
= .
(s 1)(s + 2)(s + 5) s+5 s+2 s1
13. The denominator has a simple linear factor, s, and a double linear factor, s + 1. Thus, we
look for the decomposition of the form
2s2 3s 2 A B C A(s + 1)2 + Bs(s + 1) + Cs
= + + = ,
s(s + 1)2 s s + 1 (s + 1)2 s(s + 1)2
which yields
2s2 3s 2 = A(s + 1)2 + Bs(s + 1) + Cs. (7.10)
Evaluating this equality for s = 0 and s = 1, we find A and C, respectively.
s=0: 2 = A(0 + 1)2 A = 2,

s = 1 : 2(1)2 3(1) 2 = C(1) C = 1.
To find B, we compare the coecients at s2 in both sides of (7.10).
2 = A + B B = 2 A = 0.
404
Exercises 7.4
Hence,
2s2 3s 2 1 2
= .
s(s + 1)2 (s + 1)2 s
15. First, we complete the square in the quadratic s2 2s + 5 to make sure that this polynomial
is irreducible and to find the form of the decomposition. Since
s2 2s + 5 = (s2 2s + 1) + 4 = (s 1)2 + 22 ,
we have
8s 2s2 14 A B(s 1) + C(2) A [(s 1)2 + 4] + [B(s 1) + 2C] (s + 1)
= + =
(s + 1)(s2 2s + 5) s + 1 (s 1)2 + 22 (s + 1) [(s 1)2 + 4]
which implies that
- .
8s 2s2 14 = A (s 1)2 + 4 + [B(s 1) + 2C] (s + 1).
Taking s = 1, s = 1, and s = 0, we find A, B, and C, respectively.
s = 1 : 8(1) 2(1)2 14 = A [(1 1)2 + 4] A = 3,

2 2
s=1: 8(1) 2(1) 14 = A [(1 1) + 4] + 2C(1 + 1) C = 1,
2 2
s=0: 8(0) 2(0) 14 = A [(0 1) + 4] + [B(0 1) + 2C] (0 + 1) B = 1,
and so
8s 2s2 14 3 (s 1) + 2
2
= +
(s + 1)(s 2s + 5) s + 1 (s 1)2 + 4
17. First we need to completely factor the denominator. Since s2 + s 6 = (s 2)(s + 3), we have
3s + 5 3s + 5
= .
s(s2+ s 6) s(s 2)(s + 3)
Since the denominator has only nonrepeated linear factors, we can write
3s + 5 A B C
= + +
s(s 2)(s + 3) s s2 s+3
for some choice of A, B and C. Clearing fractions gives us
3s + 5 = A(s 2)(s + 3) + Bs(s + 3) + Cs(s 2).
405
Chapter 7
With s = 0, this yields 5 = A(2)(3) so that A = 5/6. With s = 2, we get 11 = B(2)(5) so

that B = 11/10. Finally, s = 3 yields 4 = C(3)(5) so that C = 4/15. Thus,
3s + 5 5 11 4
= + .
s(s2+ s 6) 6s 10(s 2) 15(s + 3)
19. First observe that the quadratic polynomial s2 + 2s + 2 is irreducible because the discriminant
22 4(1)(2) = 4 is negative. Since the denominator has one nonrepeated linear factor and
one nonrepeated quadratic factor, we can write
1 1 A B(s + 1) + C
= = + ,
(s 3)(s2+ 2s + 2) 2
(s 3)[(s + 1) + 1] s3 (s + 1)2 + 1
where we have chosen a form which is more convenient for taking the inverse Laplace trans-
form. Clearing fractions gives us
- .
1 = A (s + 1)2 + 1 + [B(s + 1) + C] (s 3). (7.11)
With s = 3, this yields 1 = 17A so that A = 1/17. Substituting s = 1, we see that

1 = A(1) +C(4), or C = (A1)/4 = 4/17. Finally, the coecient A+ B at s2 in the right-
hand side of (7.11) must be the same as in the left-hand side, that is, 0. So B = A = 1/17
and 4 5
1 1 1 s+1 4
= .
(s 3)(s2 + 2s + 2) 17 s 3 (s + 1)2 + 1 (s + 1)2 + 1
21. Since the denominator contains only nonrepeated linear factors, the partial fractions decom-
position has the form
6s2 13s + 2 A B C A(s 1)(s 6) + Bs(s 6) + Cs(s 1)
= + + = .
s(s 1)(s 6) s s1 s6 s(s 1)(s 6)
Therefore,
6s2 13s + 2 = A(s 1)(s 6) + Bs(s 6) + Cs(s 1).
Evaluating both sides of this equation for s = 0, s = 1, and s = 6, we find constants A, B,

and C.
s = 0 : 2 = 6A A = 1/3,
s = 1 : 5 = 5B B = 1,
s = 6 : 140 = 30C C = 14/3.
406
Exercises 7.4
Hence,
6s2 13s + 2 1/3 1 14/3
= + +
s(s 1)(s 6) s s1 s6
and the linear property of the inverse Laplace transform yields
6 2 7 6 7 6 7 6 7
1 6s 13s + 2 1 1 1 1 1 14 1 1 1 14 6t
L = L +L + L = + et + e .
s(s 1)(s 6) 3 s s1 3 s6 3 3
23. In this problem, the denominator of F (s) has a simple linear factor, s + 1, and a double linear
factor, s + 3. Thus, the decomposition is the form
5s2 + 34s + 53 A B C A(s + 1) + B(s + 1)(s + 3) + C(s + 3)2

= + + = .
(s + 3)2 (s + 1) (s + 3)2 s + 3 s + 1 (s + 3)2 (s + 1)
Therefore, we must have
5s2 + 34s + 53 = A(s + 1) + B(s + 1)(s + 3) + C(s + 3)2 .
Substitutions s = 3 and s = 1 yield values of A and C, respectively.
s = 3 : 4 = 2A A = 2,
s = 1 : 24 = 4C C = 6.
To find B, we take, say, s = 0 and get
53 A 9C
53 = A + 3B + 9C B= = 1.
3
Hence,
6 2 7 6 7 6 7 6 7
1 5s + 34s + 53 1 1 1 1 1 1
L (t) = 2L (t) L (t) + 6L (t)
(s + 3)2 (s + 1) (s + 3)2 s+3 s+1
= 2te3t e3t + 6et .
25. Observing that the quadratic s2 + 2s + 5 = (s + 1)2 + 22 is irreducible, the partial fractions
decomposition for F (s) has the form
7s2 + 23s + 30 A B(s + 1) + C(2)

2
= + .
(s 2)(s + 2s + 5) s2 (s + 1)2 + 22
407
Chapter 7
Clearing fractions gives us

- .
7s2 + 23s + 30 = A (s + 1)2 + 4 + [B(s + 1) + C(2)] (s 2).
With s = 2, this yields 104 = 13A so that A = 8; s = 1 gives 14 = A(4) + C(6), or C = 3.

Finally, the coecient A + B at s2 in the right-hand side must match the one in the left-hand
side, which is 7. So B = 7 A = 1. Therefore,
7s2 + 23s + 30 8 (s + 1) + 3(2)
2
= + ,
(s 2)(s + 2s + 5) s2 (s + 1)2 + 22
which yields
6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7
1 7s2 + 23s + 30 1 1 1 s+1 1 2
L = 8L L + 3L
(s 2)(s2 + 2s + 5) s2 (s + 1)2 + 22 (s + 1)2 + 22
= 8e2t et cos 2t + 3et sin 2t .
27. First, we find F (s).

) * 5 5 5
F (s) s2 4 = F (s) = = .
s+1 (s + 1)(s2 4) (s + 1)(s 2)(s + 2)
The partial fractions expansion yields
5 A B C
= + + .
(s + 1)(s 2)(s + 2) s+1 s2 s+2
Clearing fractions gives us
5 = A(s 2)(s + 2) + B(s + 1)(s + 2) + C(s + 1)(s 2).
With s = 1, s = 2, and s = 2 this yields A = 5/3, B = 5/12, and C = 5/4. So,

6 7 6 7 6 7
1 5 1 1 5 1 1 5 1 1
L {F (s)} (t) = L (t) + L (t) + L (t)
3 s+1 12 s2 4 s+2
5 5 2t 5 2t
= et + e + e .
3 12 4
29. Solving for F (s) yields

10s2 + 12s + 14 10s2 + 12s + 14
F (s) = = .
(s + 2)(s2 2s + 2) (s + 2)[(s 1)2 + 1]
408
Exercises 7.4
Since, in the denominator, we have nonrepeated linear and quadratic factors, we seek for the
decomposition
10s2 + 12s + 14 A B(s 1) + C(1)
= + .
(s + 2)[(s 1)2 + 1] s+2 (s 1)2 + 1
Clearing fractions, we conclude that
10s2 + 12s + 14 = A[(s 1)2 + 1] + [B(s 1) + C] (s + 2).
Substitution s = 2 into this equation yields 30 = 10A or A = 3. With s = 1, we get

36 = A+3C and so C = (36A)/3 = 11. Finally, substitution s = 0 results 14 = 2A+2(CB)
or B = A + C 7 = 7. Now we apply the linearity of the inverse Laplace transform and
obtain
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 s1 1 1
L {F (s)} (t) = 3L (t) + 7L (t) + 11L (t)
s+2 (s 1)2 + 1 (s 1)2 + 1
= 3e2t + 7et cos t + 11et sin t .
31. Functions f1 (t), f2 (t), and f3 (t) coincide for all t in [0, ) except a finite number of points.
Since the Laplace transform a function is a definite integral, it does not depend on values of
the function at finite number of points. Therefore, in (a), (b), and (c) we have one and the
same answer, that is
1
L {f1 (t)} (s) = L {f2 (t)} (s) = L {f3 (t)} (s) = L {t} (s) = .
s2
By Definition 4, the inverse Laplace transform is a continuous function on [0, ). f3 (t) = t

clearly satisfies this condition while f1 (t) and f2 (t) have removable discontinuities at t = 2
and t = 1, 6, respectively. Therefore,
6 7
1 1
L (t) = f3 (t) = t.
s2
33. We are looking for L1 {F (s)} (t) = f (t). According to the formula given just before this
problem, 6 7
1 1 dF
f (t) = L (t)
t ds
409
Chapter 7
(take n = 1 in the formula). Since

+ ,
s+2
F (s) = ln = ln(s + 2) ln(s 5),
s5
we have
dF (s) d 1 1
= (ln(s + 2) ln(s 5)) =
ds ds6 7 6 s + 2 7s 5
dF 1 1
L1 (t) = L1 (t) = e2t e5t
ds s+2 s5
1 ) 2t * e5t e2t
L1 {F (s)} (t) = e e5t = .
t t
35. Taking the derivative of F (s), we get
dF (s) d s2 + 9 d - . 2s 2s
= ln 2 = ln(s2 + 9) ln(s2 + 1) = 2 2 .
ds ds s +1 ds s +9 s +1
So, using the linear property of the inverse Laplace transform, we obtain
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 dF (s) 1 s 1 s
L (t) = 2L (t) 2L (t) = 2(cos 3t cos t).
ds s2 + 9 s2 + 1
Thus 6 7
1 1 1 dF (s) 2(cos t cos 3t)
L {F (s)} (t) = L (t) = .
t ds t
37. By the definition, both, L1 {F1 } (t) and L1 {F2 } (t), are continuous functions on [0, ).
Therefore, their sum, (L1 {F1 } + L1 {F2 }) (t), is also continuous on [0, ). Furthermore,
the linearity of the Laplace transform yields
/) 1 *0 / 0 / 0
L L {F1 } + L1 {F2 } (s) = L L1 {F1 } (s) + L L1 {F2 } (s) = F1 (s) + F2 (s).
Therefore, L1 {F1 } + L1 {F2 } is a continuous function on [0, ) whose Laplace transform

is F1 + F2 . By the definition of the inverse Laplace transform, this function is the inverse
Laplace transform of F1 + F2 , that is,
L1 {F1 } (t) + L1 {F2 } (t) = L1 {F1 + F2 } (t),
410
Exercises 7.4
and (3) in Theorem 7 is proved.
To show (4), we use the continuity of L1 {F } to conclude that cL1 {F } is a continuous

function. Since the linearity of the Laplace transform yields
/ 0 / 0
L cL1 {F } (s) = cL L1 {F } (s) = cF (s),
we have cL1 {F } (t) = L1 {cF } (t).
39. In this problem, the denominator Q(s) := s(s 1)(s + 2) has only nonrepeated linear factors,
and so the partial fractions decomposition has the form
2s + 1 A B C
F (s) := = + + .
s(s 1)(s + 2) s s1 s+2
To find A, B, and C, we use the residue formula in Problem 38. This yields
2s + 1 2(0) + 1 1
A = lim sF (s) = lim = = ,
s0 s0 (s 1)(s + 2) (0 1)(0 + 2) 2
2s + 1 2(1) + 1
B = lim(s 1)F (s) = lim = = 1,
s1 s1 s(s + 2) (1)(1 + 2)
2s + 1 2(2) + 1 1
C = lim (s + 2)F (s) = lim = = .
s2 s2 s(s 1) (2)(2 1) 2
Therefore,
2s + 1 1/2 1 1/2
= + .
s(s 1)(s + 2) s s1 s+2
41. In notation of Problem 40,
P (s) = 3s2 16s + 5, Q(s) = (s + 1)(s 3)(s 2).
We can apply the Heavisides expansion formula because Q(s) has only nonrepeated linear
factors. We need the values of P (s) and Q (s) at the points r1 = 1, r2 = 3, and r3 = 2.
Using the product rule, we find that
Q (s) = (s 3)(s 2) + (s + 1)(s 2) + (s + 1)(s 3),
and so
Q (1) = (1 3)(1 2) = 12, Q (3) = (3 + 1)(3 2) = 4, Q (2) = (2 + 1)(2 3) = 3.
411
Chapter 7
Also, we compute
P (1) = 24, P (3) = 16, P (2) = 15.
Therefore,
6 7
1 3s2 16s + 5 P (1) (1)t P (3) (3)t P (2) (2)t
L (t) = e + e + e = 2et 4e3t + 5e2t .
(s + 1)(s 3)(s 2) Q (1) Q (3) Q (2)
43. Since s2 2s + 5 = (s 1)2 + 22 , we see that the denominator of F (s) has nonrepeated linear
factor s + 2 and nonrepeated irreducible quadratic factor s2 2s + 5 with = 1 and = 2
(in notation of Problem 40). Thus the partial fractions decomposition has the form
6s2 + 28 A(s 1) + 2B C
F (s) = 2
= 2 2
+ .
(s 2s + 5)(s + 2) (s 1) + 2 s+2
We find C by applying the real residue formula derived in Problem 38.
(s + 2)(6s2 + 28) 6s2 + 28 52

C = lim 2
= lim 2
= = 4.
s2 (s 2s + 5)(s + 2) s2 s 2s + 5 13
Next, we use the complex residue formula given in Problem 42, to find A and B. Since = 1
and = 2, the formula becomes
(s2 2s + 5)(6s2 + 28) 6s2 + 28 6(1 + 2i)2 + 28 10 + 24i

2B + i2A = lim = lim = = .
s1+2i (s2 2s + 5)(s + 2) s1+2i s + 2 (1 + 2i) + 2 3 + 2i
Dividing we get
(10 + 24i)(3 2i) 78 + 52i
2B + i2A = = = 6 + 4i.
(3 + 2i)(3 2i) 13
Taking the real and imaginary parts yields
2B = 6, B = 3,

2A = 4 A = 2.
Therefore,
6s2 + 28 2(s 1) + 2(3) 4
2
= 2 2
+ .
(s 2s + 5)(s + 2) (s 1) + 2 s+2
412
Exercises 7.5
EXERCISES 7.5: Solving Initial Value Problems, page 383
1. Let Y (s) := L {y} (s). Taking the Laplace transform of both sides of the given dierential
equation and using its linearity, we obtain
L {y } (s) 2L {y } (s) + 5Y (s) = L {0} (s) = 0. (7.12)
We can express L {y } (s) and L {y } (s) in terms of Y (s) using the initial conditions and
Theorem 5 in Section 7.3.
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) 2,

L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) 2s 4.
Substituting back into (7.12) and solving for Y (s) yield

- .
s2 Y (s) 2s 4 2 [sY (s) 2] + 5Y (s) = 0
) *
Y (s) s2 2s + 5 = 2s
2s 2s 2(s 1) 2
Y (s) = 2 = 2 2
= 2 2
+ .
s 2s + 5 (s 1) + 2 (s 1) + 2 (s 1)2 + 22
Applying now the inverse Laplace transform to both sides, we obtain
6 7 6 7
1 s1 1 2
y(t) = 2L (t) + L (t) = 2et cos 2t + et sin 2t.
(s 1)2 + 22 (s 1)2 + 22
3. Let Y (s) := L {y} (s). Taking the Laplace transform of both sides of the given dierential
equation, y + 6y + 9y = 0, and using the linearity of the Laplace transform, we obtain
L {y } (s) + 6L {y } (s) + 9Y (s) = 0.
We use formula (4), page 362, to express L {y } (s) and L {y } (s) in terms of Y (s).
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) + 1,

L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) + s 6.
Therefore,
- .
s2 Y (s) + s 6 + 6 [sY (s) + 1] + 9Y (s) = 0
413
Chapter 7
) *
Y (s) s2 + 6s + 9 = s
s s 3 1
Y (s) = 2 = = ,
s + 6s + 9 (s + 3)2 (s + 3)2 s + 3
where the last equality comes from the partial fraction expansion of s/(s + 32 ). We apply
the inverse Laplace transform to both sides and use Table 7.1 to obtain
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1
y(t) = 3L (t) L (t) = 3te3t e3t .
(s + 3)2 s+3
5. Let W (s) = L {w} (s). Then taking the Laplace transform of the equation and using linearity
yield
/ 0 / 0 2 2
L {w } (s) + W (s) = L t2 + 2 (s) = L t2 (s) + 2L {1} (s) = 3 + .
s s
Since L {w } (s) = s2 W (s) sw(0) w (0) = s2 W (s) s + 1, we have
- 2 . 2 2
s W (s) s + 1 + W (s) = 3 +
s s
) 2 * 2(s2 + 1) s 1 2
s + 1 W (s) = s 1 + W (s) = 2 + 3.
s3 s2 +1 s +1 s
Now, taking the inverse Laplace transform, we obtain
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 s 1 1 1 2
w=L 2
L 2
+L 3
= cos t sin t + t2 .
s +1 s +1 s
7. Let Y (s) := L {y} (s). Using the initial conditions and Theorem 5 in Section 7.3 we can
express L {y } (s) and L {y } (s) in terms of Y (s), namely,
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) 5,

L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) 5s + 4.
Taking the Laplace transform of both sides of the given dierential equation and using its
linearity, we obtain
L {y 7y + 10y} (s) = L {9 cos t + 7 sin t} (s)

- 2 . 9s 7
s Y (s) 5s + 4 7 [sY (s) 5] + 10Y (s) = + 2
s2 +1 s +1
414
Exercises 7.5
) * 9s + 7 5s3 39s2 + 14s 32
s2 7s + 10 Y (s) = 2 + 5s 39 =
s +1 s2 + 1
3 2
9s + 7 5s 39s + 14s 32 5s3 39s2 + 14s 32
Y (s) = 2 + 5s 39 = 2 = 2 .
s +1 (s + 1)(s2 7s + 10) (s + 1)(s 5)(s 2)
The partial fractions decomposition of Y (s) has the form
5s3 39s2 + 14s 32 As + B C D

2
= 2 + + .
(s + 1)(s 5)(s 2) s +1 s5 s2
Clearing fractions yields
5s3 39s2 + 14s 32 = (As + B)(s 5)(s 2) + C(s2 + 1)(s 2) + D(s2 + 1)(s 5).
We substitute s = 5 and s = 2 to find C and D, resprectively, and then s = 0 to find B.
s = 5 : 312 = 78C C = 4,
s = 2 : 120 = 15D D = 8,
s = 0 : 32 = 10B 2C 5D B = 0.
Equating the coecients at s3 , we also get A + C + D = 5, which implies that A = 1. Thus

s 4 8
Y (s) = + y(t) = L1 {Y (s)} (t) = cos t 4e5t + 8e2t .
s2 +1 s5 s2
9. First, note that the initial conditions are given at t = 1. Thus, to use the method of Laplace
transform, we make a shift in t and move the initial conditions to t = 0.
z (t) + 5z (t) 6z(t) = 21et1

z (t + 1) + 5z (t + 1) 6z(t + 1) = 21e(t+1)1 = 21et . (7.13)
Now, let y(t) := z(t + 1). Then the chain rule yields
y (t) = z (t + 1)(t + 1) = z (t + 1),

y (t) = [y (t)] = z (t + 1)(t + 1) = z (t + 1),
and (7.13) becomes

y (t) + 5y (t) 6y(t) = 21et (7.14)
415
Chapter 7
with initial conditions
y(0) = z(0 + 1) = z(1) = 1, y (0) = z (0 + 1) = z (1) = 9.
With Y (s) := L {y(t)} (s), we apply the Laplace transform to both sides of (7.14) and obtain
/ 0 21
L {y } (s) + 5L {y } (s) 6Y (s) = L 21et (s) = . (7.15)
s1
By Theorem 5, Section 7.3,
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) + 1,

L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) + s 9.
Substituting these expressions back into (7.15) and solving for Y (s) yield
- 2 . 21
s Y (s) + s 9 + 5 [sY (s) + 1] 6Y (s) =
s1
) 2 * 21 s2 + 5s + 17
s + 5s 6 Y (s) = s+4 =
s1 s1
s2 + 5s + 17 s2 + 5s + 17 s2 + 5s + 17
Y (s) = = = .
(s 1)(s2 + 5s 6) (s 1)(s 1)(s + 6) (s 1)2 (s + 6)
The partial fractions decomposition for Y (s) has the form
s2 + 5s + 17 A B C
= + + .
(s 1)2 (s + 6) (s 1)2 s 1 s + 6
s2 + 5s + 17 = A(s + 6) + B(s 1)(s + 6) + C(s 1)2 .
Substitutions s = 1 and s = 6 give A = 3 and C = 1. Also, with s = 0, we have

17 = 6A 6B + C or B = 0. Therefore,
6 7
3 1 1 3 1
Y (s) = 2
y(t) = L 2
(t) = 3tet e6t .
(s 1) s+6 (s 1) s+6
Finally, shifting the argument back, we obtain
z(t) = y(t 1) = 3(t 1)et1 e6(t1) .
416
Exercises 7.5
11. As in the previous problem (and in Example 3 in the text), we first need to shift the initial
conditions to 0. If we set v(t) = y(t + 2), the initial value problem for v(t) becomes
v (t) v(t) = (t + 2) 2 = t, v(0) = y(2) = 3, v (0) = y (2) = 0.
Taking the Laplace transform of both sides of this new dierential equation gives us
1
L {v } (s) L {v} (s) = L {t} (s) = .
s2
If we denote V (s) := L {v} (s) and express L {v } (s) in terms of V (s) using (4) in Section 4.3
(with n = 2), that is, L {v } (s) = s2 V (s) 3s, we obtain
- 2 . 1
s V (s) 3s V (s) = 2
s
3s3 + 1 3s3 + 1 1 1 2
V (s) = 2 2 = 2 = 2 + + .
s (s 1) s (s + 1)(s 1) s s+1 s1
Hence,
6 7
1 1 1 1 2
v(t) = L {V (s)} (t) = L 2+ + (t) = t + et + 2et .
s s+1 s1
Since v(t) = y(t + 2), we have y(t) = v(t 2) and so
y(t) = (t 2) + e(t2) + 2et2 = 2 t + e2t + 2et2 .
13. To shift the initial conditions to t = 0, we make the substitution x(t) := y(t + /2) in the
original equation and use the fact that
x (t) := y (t + /2), x (t) := y (t + /2).
This yields
y (t) y (t) 2y(t) = 8 cos t 2 sin t

# % # % # % # %
8 cos t + 2 sin t + = 8 cos t + 2 sin t + = 8 sin t 2 cos t
2 2 2 2
x (t) x (t) 2x(t) = 8 sin t 2 cos t, x(0) = 1, x (0) = 0.
417
Chapter 7
Taking the Laplace transform of both sides in this last dierential equation and using the fact
that, with X(s) := L {x} (s),
L {x } (s) = sX(s) 1 and L {x } (s) = s2 X(s) s
(which comes from the initial conditions and (4) in Section 7.3), we obtain
- . 8 2s
s2 X(s) s [sX(s) 1] 2X(s) = L {8 sin t 2 cos t} (s) = 2
s2 +1 s +1
) 2 * 8 2s s3 s2 s + 7
s s 2 X(s) = 2 +s1=
s +1 s2 + 1
3 2 3 2
s s s+7 s s s+7
X(s) = 2 = .
(s + 1)(s2 s 2) (s2 + 1)(s 2)(s + 1)
We seek for the partial fractions decomposition of X(s) in the form
s 3 s2 s + 7 As + B C D
2
= 2 + + .
(s + 1)(s 2)(s + 1) s +1 (s 2) s + 1
Solving yields
7 11 3
A= , B= , C= , D = 1.
5 5 5
Therefore,
(7/5)s (11/5) (3/5) 1
X(s) = 2
+ 2 +
s +1 s +1 (s 2) s + 1
7 11 3
x(t) = L1 {X(s)} (t) = cos t sin t + e2t et .
5 5 5
Finally, since y(t) = x(t /2), we obtain the solution
7 # % 11 # % 3 2(t/2)
y(t) = cos t sin t + e e(t/2)
5 2 5 2 5
7 11 3 2t (/2)t)
= sin t + cos t + e e
5 5 5
15. Taking the Laplace transform of y 3y + 2y = cos t and applying the linearity of the Laplace
transform yields
s
L {y } (s) 3L {y } (s) + 2L {y} (s) = L {cos t} (s) = . (7.16)
s2 +1
418
Exercises 7.5
If we put Y (s) = L {y} (s) and apply the property (4), page 362 of the text, we get
L {y } (s) = sY (s), L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) + 1.
Substitution back into (7.16) yields

- 2 . s
s Y (s) + 1 3 [sY (s)] + 2Y (s) =
s2 +1
) * s s2 + s 1
s2 3s + 2 Y (s) = 1 =
s2 + 1 s2 + 1
s2 + s 1 s2 + s 1
Y (s) = 2 = .
(s + 1)(s2 3s + 2) (s2 + 1)(s 1)(s 2)
17. With Y (s) := L {y} (s), we find that
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) 1, L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) s,
and so the Laplace transform of both sides of the original equation yields
/ 0
L {y + y y} (s) = L t3 (s)
- 2 . 6
s Y (s) s + [sY (s) 1] Y (s) = 4
+ , s
1 6 s5 + s4 + 6
Y (s) = 2 + s + 1 = .
s + s 1 s4 s4 (s2 + s 1)
19. Let us denote Y (s) := L {y} (s). From the initial conditions and formula (4) on page 362 of
the text we get
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) 1, L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) s 1.
The Laplace transform, applied to both sides of the given equation, yields
- 2 . / 0 1 1 1
s Y (s) s 1 + 5 [sY (s) 1] Y (s) = L et (s) L {1} (s) = =
s1 s s(s 1)
) * 1 s3 + 5s2 6s + 1
s2 + 5s 1 Y (s) = +s+6=
s(s 1) s(s 1)
3 2
s + 5s 6s + 1
Y (s) = .
s(s 1)(s2 + 5s 1)
419
Chapter 7
21. Applying the Laplace transform to both sides of the given equation yields
s1
L {y } (s) 2L {y } (s) + L {t} (s) = L {cos t} (s) L {sin t} (s) = .
s2 + 1
If L {y} (s) =: Y (s), then it follows from the initial conditions and (4) on page 362 of the text
that
L {y } (s) = sY (s) 1, L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) s 3.
Therefore, Y (s) satisfies

- 2 . s1
s Y (s) s 3 2 [sY (s) 1] + Y (s) = 2 .
s +1
Solving for Y (s) gives us
) * s1 s3 + s2 + 2s
s2 2s + 1 Y (s) = 2 +s+1=
s +1 s2 + 1
3 2
s + s + 2s s3 + s2 + 2s
Y (s) = 2 = 2 .
(s + 1)(s2 2s + 1) (s + 1)(s 1)2
23. In this equation, the right-hand side is a piecewise defined function. Let us find its Laplace
transform first.
3 32 3
st st
L {g(t)} (s) = e g(t) dt = e t dt + est 5 dt
0 0 2
12 32 st 1N
test 11 e 5est 11
= dt + lim
s 10 s N s 1
2
4 2s 50 4 2s 5
2e e 1 5e2s 1 + 3se2s e2s
= + + = ,
s s2 s2 s s2
where we used integration by parts integrating est t.
Using this formula and applying the Laplace transform to the given equation yields
L {y } (s) + 4L {y} (s) = L {g(t)} (s)

s2 L {y} (s) + s + 4L {y} (s) = L {g(t)} (s)
) 2 * s3 + 1 + 3se2s e2s
s + 4 L {y} (s) = L {g(t)} (s) s =
s2
420
Exercises 7.5
s3 + 1 + 3se2s e2s
L {y} (s) = .
s2 (s2 + 4)
25. Taking the Laplace transform of y y + y y = 0 and applying the linearity of the Laplace
transform yields
L {y } (s) L {y } (s) + L {y } (s) L {y} (s) = L {0} (s) = 0. (7.17)
If we denote Y (s) := L {y} (s) and and apply property (4) on page 362 of the text, we get
L {y } (s) = sY (s) 1, L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) s 1, LT y = s3 Y (s) s2 s 3.
Combining these equations with (7.17) gives us

- . - .
s3 Y (s) s2 s 3 s2 Y (s) s 1 + [sY (s) 1] Y (s) = 0
) 3 *
s s2 + s 1 Y (s) = s2 + 3
s2 + 3 s2 + 3
Y (s) = 3 = .
s s2 + s 1 (s 1)(s2 + 1)
Expanding Y (s) by partial fractions results
2 s+1 2 s 1
Y (s) = 2 = 2 2 .
s1 s +1 s1 s +1 s +1
From Table 7.1 on page 358 of the text, we see that
y(t) = L1 {Y (s)} (t) = 2et cos t sin t.
27. Let Y (s) := L {y} (s). Then, by Theorem 5 in Section 7.3,
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) + 4,

L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) + 4s 4,
L {y } (s) = s3 Y (s) s2 y(0) sy (0) y (0) = s3 Y (s) + 4s2 4s + 2.
Using these equations and applying the Laplace transform to both sides of the given dierential
equation, we get
- 3 . - .
s Y (s) + 4s2 4s + 2 + 3 s2 Y (s) + 4s 4 + 3 [sY (s) + 4] + Y (s) = 0
421
Chapter 7
) * ) *
s3 + 3s2 + 3s + 1 Y (s) + 4s2 + 8s + 2 = 0
4s2 + 8s + 2 4s2 + 8s + 2
Y (s) = 3 = .
s + 3s2 + 3s + 1 (s + 1)3
Therefore, the partial fractions decomposition of Y (s) has the form
4s2 + 8s + 2 A B C A + B(s + 1) + C(s + 1)2
= + + =
(s + 1)3 (s + 1)3 (s + 1)2 s + 1 (s + 1)3
(4s2 + 8s + 2) = A + B(s + 1) + C(s + 1)2 .
Substitution s = 1 yields A = 2. Equating coecients at s2 , we get C = 4. At last,

substituting s = 0 we obtain
2 = A + B + C B = 2 A C = 0.
Therefore,
2 4 ) *
Y (s) = 3
+ y(t) = L1 {Y } (t) = t2 et 4et = t2 4 et .
(s + 1) s+1
29. Using the initial conditions, y(0) = a and y (0) = b, and formula (4) on page 362 of the text,
we conclude that
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) a,

L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) as b,
where Y (s) = L {y} (s). Applying the Laplace transform to the original equation yields
- 2 .
s Y (s) as b 4 [sY (s) a] + 3Y (s) = L {0} (s) = 0
) 2 *
s 4s + 3 Y (s) = as + b 4a
as + b 4a as + b 4a A B
Y (s) = 2 = = + .
s 4s + 3 (s 1)(s 3) s1 s3
Solving for A and B, we find that A = (3a b)/2, B = (b a)/2. Hence
(3a b)/2 (b a)/2
Y (s) = +
s1 s3 6 7 6 7
1 3a b 1 1 b a 1 1
y(t) = L {Y } (t) = L (t) + L (t)
2 s1 2 s3
3a b t b a 3t
= e + e .
2 2
422
Exercises 7.5
31. Similarly to Problem 29, we have
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) a, L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) as b,
with Y (s) := L {y} (s). Thus the Laplace transform of both sides of the the given equation
yields
L {y + 2y + 2y} (s) = L {5} (s)

- 2 . 5
s Y (s) as b + 2 [sY (s) a] + 2Y (s) =
s
) 2 * 5 2
as + (2a + b)s + 5
s + 2s + 2 Y (s) = + as + 2a + b =
s s
as2 + (2a + b)s + 5 as2 + (2a + b)s + 5
Y (s) = = .
s(s2 + 2s + 2) s[(s + 1)2 + 1]
We seek for an expansion of Y (s) of the form
as2 + (2a + b)s + 5 A B(s + 1) + C

2
= + .
s[(s + 1) + 1] s (s + 1)2 + 1
Clearing fractions, we obtain
- .
as2 + (2a + b)s + 5 = A (s + 1)2 + 1 + [B(s + 1) + C] s .
Substitutions s = 0 and s = 1 give us
s=0: 5 = 2A A = 5/2,
s = 1 : 5 a b = A C C = A + a + b 5 = a + b 5/2.
To find B, we can compare coecients at s2 :
a=A+B B = a A = a 5/2.
So,
5/2 (a 5/2)(s + 1) a + b 5/2
Y (s) = + +
s (s + 1)2 + 1 (s + 1)2 + 1
+ , + ,
1 5 5 t 5 t
y(t) = L {Y } (t) = + a e cos t + a + b e sin t .
2 2 2
423
Chapter 7
33. By Theorem 6 in Section 7.3,

/ 0 d2 d2
L t2 y (t) (s) = (1)2 2 [L {y (t)} (s)] = 2 [L {y (t)} (s)] . (7.18)
ds ds
On the other hand, equation (4) on page 362 says that
L {y (t)} (s) = sY (s) y(0), Y (s) := L {y} (s).

6 7
/ 0 d2 d d
L t2 y (t) (s) = [sY (s) y(0)] = [sY (s) y(0)]
ds2 ds ds
d
= [sY (s) + Y (s)] = (sY (s) + Y (s)) + Y (s) = sY (s) + 2Y (s).
ds
35. Taking the Laplace transform of y + 3ty 6y = 1 and applying the linearity of the Laplace
transform yields
1
L {y } (s) + 3L {ty } (s) 6L {y} (s) = L {1} (s) = . (7.19)
s
If we put Y (s) = L {y} (s) and apply property (4) on page 362 of the text with n = 2, we get
L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s). (7.20)
Furthermore, as it was shown in Example 4, Section 4.5,
L {ty } (s) = sY (s) Y (s). (7.21)
Substitution (7.20) and (7.21) back into (7.19) yields

1
s2 Y (s) + 3 [sY (s) Y (s)] 6Y (s) =
s
) * 1
3sY (s) + s2 9 Y (s) =
+ , s
3 s 1
Y (s) + Y (s) = 2 .
s 3 3s
This is a first order linear dierential equation in Y (s), which can be solved by the techniques
of Section 2.3. Namely, it has the integrating factor
43 + , 5 4 5
3 s s2 2
(s) = exp ds = exp 3 ln s = s3 es /6 .
s 3 6
424
Exercises 7.5
Thus
3 + , 3
1 1 1 s s2 /6
Y (s) = (s) 2 ds = 3 s2 /6 e ds
(s) 3s se 3
1 # 2 % 1 # 2
%
= 3 s2 /6 es /6 + C = 3 1 + Ces /6 .
se s
Just as in Example 4 on page 380 of the text, C must be zero in order to ensure that Y (s) 0
as s . Thus Y (s) = 1/s3 , and from Table 7.1 on page 358 of the text we get
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 2 t2
y(t) = L (t) = L (t) = .
s3 2 s3 2
37. We apply the Laplace transform to the given equation and obtain
L {ty } (s) 2L {y } (s) + L {ty} (s) = 0. (7.22)
Using Theorem 5 (Section 7.3) and the initial conditions, we express L {y } (s) and L {y } (s)
in terms of Y (s) := L {y} (s).
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) 1, (7.23)

L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) s. (7.24)
We now involve Theorem 6 in Section 7.3 to get

d
L {ty} (s) = [L {y} (s)] = Y (s). (7.25)
ds
Also, Theorem 6 and equation (7.24) yield
d d - 2 .
L {ty } (s) = [L {y } (s)] = s Y (s) s = 1 2sY (s) s2 Y (s). (7.26)
ds ds
Substituting (7.23), (7.25), and (7.26) into (7.22), we obtain
- .
1 2sY (s) s2 Y (s) 2 [sY (s) 1] + [Y (s)] = 0
) *
s2 + 1 Y (s) 4sY (s) + 3 = 0
4s 3
Y (s) + 2 Y (s) = 2 .
s +1 s +1
425
Chapter 7
The integrating factor of this first order linear dierential equation is

43 5
4s - ) *. ) *2
(s) = exp 2
ds = exp 2 ln s2 + 1 = s2 + 1 .
s +1
Hence
3 + , 3
1 3 1 ) 2 *
Y (s) = (s) 2 ds = 2 3 s + 1 ds
(s) s +1 (s + 1)2
1 ) 3 * (s3 + s) + (2s + C) s 2s C
= 2 2
s + 3s + C = 2 2
= 2 + 2 2
+ 2 ,
(s + 1) (s + 1) s + 1 (s + 1) (s + 1)2
where C is an arbitrary constant. Therefore,
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 1 s 1 2s C 1 2
y(t) = L {Y } (t) = L (t) + L (t) + L (t) .
s2 + 1 (s2 + 1)2 2 (s2 + 1)2
Using formulas (24), (29) and (30) on the inside back cover of the text, we finally get
y(t) = cos t + t sin t + c(sin t t cos t),
where c := C/2 is an arbitrary constant.
39. Similarly to Example 5, we have the initial value problem (18), namely,
Iy (t) = ke(t), y(0) = 0, y (0) = 0,
for the model of the mechanism. This equation leads to equation (19) for the Laplace trans-
forms Y (s) := L {y(t)} (s) and E(s) := L {e(t)} (s):
s2 IY (s) = kE(s). (7.27)
But, this time, e(t) = y(t) a and so

a a
E(s) = L {y(t) a} (s) = Y (s) Y (s) = E(s) + .
s s
Substituting this relation into (7.27) yields
aIs as
s2 IE(s) + aIs = kE(s) E(s) = 2
= 2 .
s I +k s + (k/I)
Taking the inverse Laplace transform, we obtain
> O
s #$ %
1 1
e(t) = L {E(s)} (t) = aL $ (t) = a cos k/It .
s + ( k/I)2
2
426
Exercises 7.5
41. As in Problem 40, the dierential equation modeling the automatic pilot is
Iy (t) = ke(t) e (t) , (7.28)
but now the error e(t) is given by e(t) = y(t) at.
Let Y (s) := L {y(t)} (s), E(s) := L {e(t)} (s). Notice that, as in Example 5 on page 382,
we have y(0) = y (0) = 0, and so e(0) = 0. Using these initial conditions and Theorem 5 in
Section 7.3, we obtain
L {y (t)} (s) = s2 Y (s) and L {e (t)} (s) = sE(s).
Applying the Laplace transform to both sides of (7.28) we then conclude that
IL {y (t)} (s) = kL {e(t)} (s) L {e (t)} (s)

Is2 Y (s) = kE(s) sE(s) = (k + s)E(s). (7.29)
Since e(t) = y(t) at,
a
E(s) = L {e(t)} (s) = L {y(t) at} (s) = Y (s) aL {t} (s) = Y (s)
s2
or Y (s) = E(s) + a/s2 . Substitution back into (7.29) yields

# a%
Is2 E(s) + 2 = (k + s)E(s)
) 2 s *
Is + s + k E(s) = aI
aI a
E(s) = 2 = 2 .
Is + s + k s + (/I)s + (k/I)
Completing the square in the denominator, we write E(s) in the form suitable for inverse
Laplace transform.
a
E(s) =
[s + /(2I)]2 + (k/I) 2 /(4I 2 )
$
a 2Ia 4kI 2 /(2I)
= = $ .
[s + /(2I)]2 + (4kI 2 )/(4I 2 ) 4kI 2 [s + /(2I)]2 + (4kI 2 )/(4I 2)
427
Chapter 7
Thus, using Table 7.1 on page 358 of the text, we find that
L$ M
2Ia 4kI 2t
e(t) = L1 {E(s)} (t) = $ et/(2I) sin .
4kI 2 2I
Compare this with Example 5 of the text and observe, how for moderate damping with

< 2 kI, the oscillations of Example 5 die out exponentially.
EXERCISES 7.6: Transforms of Discontinuous and Periodic Functions, page 395
1. To find the Laplace transform of g(t) = (t 1)2 u(t 1) we apply formula (5) on page 387 of
the text with a = 1 and f (t) = t2 . This yields
/ 0 / 0 2es
L (t 1)2 u(t 1) (s) = es L t2 (s) = 3 .
s
The graph of g(t) = (t 1)2 u(t 1) is shown in Figure 7-B(a).
3. The graph of the function y = t2 u(t 2) is shown in Figure 7-B(b). For this function, formula
(8) on page 387 is more convenient. To apply the shifting property, we observe that g(t) = t2
and a = 2. Hence
g(t + a) = g(t + 2) = (t + 2)2 = t2 + 4t + 4.
Now the Laplace transform of g(t + 2) is

/ 0 / 0 2 4 4
L t2 + 4t + 4 (s) = L t2 (s) + 4L {t} (s) + 4L {1} (s) = 3 + 2 + .
s s s
Hence, by formula (8), we have
+ ,
/ 0 2 4 4 e2s (4s2 + 4s + 2)
L t2 u(t 2) (s) = e2s L {g(t + 2)} (s) = e2s + + = .
s3 s2 s s3
5. The function g(t) equals zero until t reaches 1, at which point g(t) jumps to 2. We can express
this jump by (2 0)u(t 1). At t = 2 the function g(t) jumps from the value 2 to the value
1. This can be expressed by adding the term (1 2)u(t 2). Finally, the jump at t = 3 from
1 to 3 can be accomplished by the function (3 1)u(t 3). Hence
g(t) = 0 + (2 0)u(t 1) + (1 2)u(t 2) + (3 1)u(t 3) = 2u(t 1) u(t 2) + 2u(t 3)
428
Exercises 7.6
y=(t1)2 u(t1) y=t2 u(t2)
0 1 2 3 0 2
(a) (b)
Figure 7B: Graphs of functions in Problems 1 and 3.
and, by the linearity of the Laplace transform,
L {g(t)} (s) = 2L {u(t 1)} (s) L {u(t 2)} (s) + 2L {u(t 3)} (s)
es e2s e3s
= 2 +2
s s s
s 2s 3s
e e + 2e
= .
s
7. Observe from the graph that g(t) is given by

0, t < 1,

t, 1 < t < 2,

1, 2 < t.
The function g(t) equals zero until t reaches 1, at which point g(t) jumps to the function t.
We can express this jump by tu(t 1). At t = 2 the function g(t) jumps from the function t
to the value 1. This can be expressed by adding the term (1 t)u(t 2). Hence
g(t) = 0 + tu(t 1) + (1 t)u(t 2) = tu(t 1) (t 1)u(t 2).
429
Chapter 7
Taking the Laplace transform of both sides and using formula (8) on page 387, we find that
the Laplace transform of the function g(t) is given by
L {g(t)} (s) = L {tu(t 1)} (s) L {(t 1)u(t 2)} (s)

= es L {(t + 1)} (s) e2s L {(t 1) + 2} (s)
+ ,
) s 2s
* ) s 2s
* 1 1 (es e2s )(s + 1)
= e e L {t + 1} (s) = e e + = .
s2 s s2
9. First, we find the formula for g(t) from the picture given.

0, t < 1,

t 1, 1 < t < 2,

3 t, 2 < t < 3,

0, 3 < t.
Thus, this function jumps from 0 to t 1 at t = 1, from t 1 to 3 t at t = 2, and from

3 t to 0 at t = 3. Since the function u(t a) has the unit jump from 0 to 1 at t = a, we can
express g(t) as
g(t) = [(t 1) 0]u(t 1) + [(3 t) (t 1)]u(t 2) + [0 (3 t)]u(t 3)

= (t 1)u(t 1) + (4 2t)u(t 2) + (t 3)u(t 3).
Therefore,
L {g(t)} (s) = L {(t 1)u(t 1)} (s) + L {(4 2t)u(t 2)} (s) + L {(t 3)u(t 3)} (s)
= es L {(t + 1) 1} (s) + e2s L {4 2(t + 2)} (s) + e3s L {(t + 3) 3} (s)
es 2e2s + e3s
= es L {t} (s) 2e2s L {t} (s) + e3s L {t} (s) = .
s2
11. We use formula (6) on page 387 of the text with a = 2 and F (s) = 1/(s 1). Since
6 7
1 1 1
f (t) = L {F (s)} (t) = L (t) = et f (t 2) = et2 ,
s1
we get 6 7
1 e2s
L (t) = f (t 2)u(t 2) = et2 u(t 2).
s1
430
Exercises 7.6
13. Using the linear property of the inverse Laplace transform, we obtain
6 2s 7 6 2s 7 6 4s 7
1 e 3e4s 1 e 1 e
L (t) = L (t) 3L (t) .
s+2 s+2 s+2
To each term in the above equation, we can apply now formula (6), page 387 of the text with
F (s) = 1/(s + 2) and a = 2 and a = 4, respectively. Since
f (t) := L1 {F (s)} (t) = L1 {1/(s + 2)} (t) = e2t ,
we get
6 7 6 7
1 e2s 1 e4s
L (t) 3L (t) = f (t 2)u(t 2) 3f (t 4)u(t 4)
s+2 s+2
= e2(t2) u(t 2) 3e2(t4) u(t 4) .
15. Since
s s s+2 1
F (s) := = = 2
s2 + 4s + 5 2
(s + 2) + 1 2 2
(s + 2) + 1 2 (s + 2)2 + 12
f (t) := L1 {F (s)} (t) = e2t (cos t 2 sin t) ,
applying Theorem 8 we get

6 7
1 se3s
L (t) = f (t 3)u(t 3) = e2(t3) [cos(t 3) 2 sin(t 3)] u(t 3).
s2 + 4s + 5
17. By partial fractions,

s5 6 7
= +
(s + 1)(s + 2) s+1 s+2
so that
6 3s 7 6 3s 7 6 3s 7
1 e (s 5) 1 e 1 e
L (t) = 6L (t) + 7L (t)
(s + 1)(s + 2) s+1 s+2
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1
= 6L (t 3)u(t 3) + 7L (t 3)u(t 3)
s+1 s+2
- . - .
= 6e(t3) + 7e2(t3) u(t 3) = 7e62t 6e3t u(t 3).
431
Chapter 7
19. In this problem, we apply methods of Section 7.5 of solving initial value problems using the
Laplace transform. Taking the Laplace transform of both sides of the given equation and
using the linear property of the Laplace transform, we get
L {I } (s) + 2L {I } (s) + 2L {I} (s) = L {g(t)} (s). (7.30)
Let us denote I(s) := L {I} (s). By Theorem 5, Section 7.3,
L {I } (s) = sI(s) I(0) = sI(s) 10,

(7.31)
L {I } (s) = s2 I(s) sI(0) I (0) = s2 I(s) 10s.
To find the Laplace transform of g(t), we express this function using the unit step function
u(t). Since g(t) identically equals to 20 for 0 < t < 3, jumps from 20 to 0 at t = 3 and
then jumps from 0 to 20 at t = 4, we can write
g(t) = 20 + (0 20)u(t 3) + (20 0)u(t 4) = 20 20u(t 3) + 20u(t 4).
Therefore,
L {g(t)} (s) = L {20 20u(t 3) + 20u(t 4)} (s)

+ ,
1 3s 4s
= 20L {1 u(t 3) + u(t 4)} (s) = 20 e +e .
s
Substituting this equation and (7.31) into (7.30) yields
+ ,
- 2
. 1 e3s e4s
s I(s) 10s + 2 [sI(s) 10] + 2I(s) = 20 +
s s s
3s 4s
1 e +e
I(s) = 10 + 20 . (7.32)
s s[(s + 1)2 + 1]
Since L1 {1/s} (t) = 1 and
6 7 6 4 57
1 1 1 1 s+1 1
L (t) = L 1s (t)
s[(s + 1)2 + 1] 2 (s + 1)2 + 1 (s + 1)2 + 1
1- .
= 1 et (cos t + sin t) ,
2
applying the inverse Laplace transform to both sides of (7.32) yields
6 7
1 1 e3s e4s
I(t) = L 10 + 20 + 20 (t)
s s[(s + 1)2 + 1] s[(s + 1)2 + 1]
432
Exercises 7.6
y=I(t)
10
3 4 8
0
Figure 7C: The graph of the function y = I(t) in Problem 19.
- .
= 10 10u(t 3) 1 e(t3) (cos(t 3) + sin(t 3))
- .
+10u(t 4) 1 e(t4) (cos(t 4) + sin(t 4))
- .
= 10 10u(t 3) 1 + e(t3) (cos t + sin t)
- .
+10u(t 4) 1 e(t4) (cos t + sin t) .
The graph of the solution, y = I(t), 0 < t < 8, is depicted in Figure 7-C.
21. In the windowed version (11) of f (t), fT (t) = t and T = 2. Thus
3 32 12
st st test est 11
FT (s) := e fT (t) dt = e t dt = 2 1
s s 0
0 0
2s 2s
2e e 1 1 2se2s e2s
= + = .
s s2 s2 s2
From Theorem 9 on page 391 of the text, we obtain
FT (s) 1 2se2s e2s
L {f (t)} (s) = = .
1 e2s s2 (1 e2s )
The graph of the function y = f (t) is given in Figure B.45 in the answers of the text.
23. We use formula (12) on page 391 of the text. With the period T = 2, the windowed version
433
Chapter 7
fT (t) of f (t) is

> t
f (t), 0 < t < 2, e , 0 < t < 1,

fT (t) = = 1, 1 < t < 2,
0, otherwise

0, otherwise.
Therefore,
3 31 32
st st t
FT (s) = e fT (t) dt = e e dt + est dt
0 0 1
11 1
st 12
1
(s+1)t (s+1)
es e2s
=
e 1 + e 1 = 1e +
(s + 1) 10 s 11 s+1 s
and, by (12), 4 5
1 1 e(s+1) es e2s
L {f (t)} (s) = + .
1 e2s s+1 s
The graph of f (t) is shown in Figure B.46 in the answers of the text.
25. Similarly to Example 6 on page 392 of the text, f (t) is a periodic function with period T = 2a,
whose windowed version has the form
f2a (t) = 1 u(t a), 0 < t < 2a.
Thus, using the linearity of the Laplace transform and formula (4) on page 386 for the Laplace
transform of the unit step function, we have
1 eas 1 eas
F2a (s) = L {f2a (t)} (s) = L {1} (s) L {u(t a)} (s) = = .
s s s
Applying now Theorem 9 yields
1 1 eas 1 1 eas 1
L {f (t)} (s) = 2as
= as as
= .
1e s (1 e )(1 + e ) s s(1 + eas )
27. Observe that if we let >

f (t), 0 < t < 2a,
f2a (t) =
0, otherwise,
434
Exercises 7.6
denote the windowed version of f (t), then from formula (12) on page 391 of the text we have
L {f2a (t)} (s) L {f2a (t)} (s)
L {f (t)} (s) = = .
1 e2as (1 eas )(1 + eas )
Now
4+ , 5 4 + ,5
t t t t
f2a (t) = + 2 u(t a) + 0 2 u(t 2a)
a a a a
t 2(t a)u(t a) (t 2a)u(t 2a)
= + .
a a a
Hence,
1 2 1
L {f2a (t)} (s) = L {t} (s) L {(t a)u(t a)} (s) + L {(t 2a)u(t 2a)} (s)
a a a
11 2e as
1eas
1 ) as 2as
* (1 eas )2
= + = 1 2e + e =
a s2 a s2 a s2 as2 as2
and 2
(1 eas ) /(as2 ) 1 eas
L {f (t)} (s) = = .
(1 eas )(1 + eas ) as2 (1 + eas )
29. Applying the Laplace transform to both sides of the given dierential equation, we obtain
e3s
L {y } (s) + L {y} (s) = L {u(t 3)} (s) = .
s
Since
L {y } (s) = s2 L {y} (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 L {y} (s) 1,
substitution yields
- 2 . e3s
s L {y} (s) 1 + L {y} (s) =
s 4 5
1 e3s 1 3s 1 s
L {y} (s) = 2 + = 2 +e .
s + 1 s(s2 + 1) s +1 s s2 + 1
By formula (6) on page 387 of the text,
6 4 57 6 7
1 3s 1 s 1 1 s
L e (t) = L (t 3)u(t 3) = [1 cos(t 3)]u(t 3).
s s2 + 1 s s2 + 1
Hence
6 4 57
1 1 3s 1 s
y(t) = L +e (t) = sin t + [1 cos(t 3)]u(t 3)
s2 + 1 s s2 + 1
The graph of the solution is shown in Figure B.47 in the answers of the text.
435
Chapter 7
31. We apply the Laplace transform to both sides of the dierential equation and get
1
L {y } (s) + L {y} (s) = L {t (t 4)u(t 2)} (s) = L {(t 4)u(t 2)} (s) . (7.33)
s2
Since (t 4)u(t 2) = [(t 2) 2]u(t 2), we can use formula (5) from Theorem 8 to find
its Laplace transform. With f (t) = t 2 and a = 2, this formula yields
4 5
2s 2s 1 2
L {(t 4)u(t 2)} (s) = e L {t 2} (s) = e .
s2 s
Also,
L {y } (s) = s2 L {y} (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 L {y} (s) 1.

4 5
- 2
. 1 2s 1 2
s L {y} (s) 1 + L {y} (s) = 2 e
s s2 s
4 5
1 2s 1 2s 1 2s 1 2 2s 1
L {y} (s) = 2 e = 2 e + .
s s2 (s2 + 1) s s2 s s2 + 1 s2 + 1
Applying now the inverse Laplace transform and using formula (6) on page 387 of the text,
we obtain
6 4 57
11 2s 1 2 2s 1
y(t) = L e + (t)
s2 s2 s s2 + 1 s2 + 1
6 7
1 1 2 2s 1
= tL + (t 2)u(t 2)
s2 s s2 + 1 s2 + 1
= t [(t 2) 2 + 2 cos(t 2) sin(t 2)] u(t 2)
= t + [4 t + sin(t 2) 2 cos(t 2)] u(t 2).
See Figure B.48 in the answers of the text.
33. By formula (4) on page 386 of the text,

e2s e4s
L {u(t 2) u(t 4)} (s) = .
s s
Thus, taking the Laplace transform of y + 2y + 2y = u(t 2) u(t 4) and applying the
initial conditions y(0) = y (0) gives us
- 2 . e2s e4s
s Y (s) s 1 + 2 [sY (s) 1] + 2Y (s) = ,
s
436
Exercises 7.6
where Y (s) is the Laplace transform of y(t). Solving for Y (s) yields
s+3 e2s e4s

Y (s) = +
s2 + 2s + 2 s(s2 + 2s + 2)
s+1 2(1) e2s e4s
= + + . (7.34)
(s + 1)2 + 12 (s + 1)2 + 12 s[(s + 1)2 + 12 ] s[(s + 1)2 + 12 ]
Since
4 5
1 1 (s2 + 2s + 2) (s2 + 2s) 1 1 s+1 1
= = ,
s[(s + 1)2 + 12 ] 2 s[(s + 1)2 + 12 ] 2 s (s + 1)2 + 12 (s + 1)2 + 12
we have
6 7 6 4 57
1 1 1 1 1 s+1 1
L (t) = L (t)
s[(s + 1)2 + 12 ] 2 s (s + 1)2 + 12 (s + 1)2 + 12
1- .
= 1 et cos t et sin t
2
and, by formula (6) on page 387 of the text,

6 7
1 e2s 1- .
L 1 e(t2) cos(t 2) e(t2) sin(t 2) u(t 2)
(t) =
s[(s + 1)2 + 12 ] 2
1- .
= 1 e2t (cos t + sin t) u(t 2)
6 7 2
e4s
1 - .
L1 (t) = 1 e(t4)
cos(t 4) e(t4)
sin(t 4) u(t 4)
s[(s + 1)2 + 12 ] 2
1- .
= 1 e4t (cos t + sin t) u(t 4).
2
Finally, taking the inverse Laplace transform in (7.34) yields
1- .
y(t) = et cos t + 2et sin t + 1 e2t (cos t + sin t) u(t 2)
2
1- .
1 e4t (cos t + sin t) u(t 4) .
2
35. We take the Laplace transform of the both sides of the given equation and obtain
/ 0
L {z } (s) + 3L {z } (s) + 2L {z} (s) = L e3t u(t 2) (s). (7.35)
437
Chapter 7
We use the initial conditions, z(0) = 2 and z (0) = 3, and formula (4) from Section 7.3 to
express L {z } (s) and L {z } (s) in terms of Z(s) := L {z} (s). That is,
L {z } (s) = sZ(s) z(0) = sZ(s) 2, L {z } (s) = s2 Z(s) sz(0) z (0) = s2 Z(s) 2s + 3.
In the right-hand side of (7.35), we can use, say, the translation property of the Laplace
transform (Theorem 3, Section 7.3) and the Laplace transform of the unit step function
(formula (4), Section 7.6).
/ 0 e2(s+3)
L e3t u(t 2) (s) = L {u(t 2)} (s + 3) = .
s+3
Therefore, (7.35) becomes
- . e2(s+3)
s2 Z(s) 2s + 3 + 3 [sZ(s) 2] + 2Z(s) =
s+3
) 2 * e2(s+3)
s + 3s + 2 Z(s) = 2s + 3 +
s+3
2s + 3 1
Z(s) = 2 + e2s6
s + 3s + 2 (s + 3)(s2 + 3s + 2)
4 5
1 1 2s6 1/2 1 1/2
= + +e + .
s+1 s+2 s+3 s+2 s+1
Hence,
6 4 57
1 1 1 6 2s 1/2 1 1/2
z(t) = L + +e e + (t)
s+1 s+2 s+3 s+2 s+1
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1
= L (t) + L (t)
s+1 s+2
4 6 7 6 7 6 75
e6 1 1 1 1 1 1
+ L 2L +L (t 2)u(t 2)
2 s+3 s+2 s+1
e6 - 3(t2) .
= et + e2t + e 2e2(t2) + e(t2) u(t 2)
2
1 - .
= et + e2t + e3t 2e2(t+1) + e(t+4) u(t 2)
2
37. Since
3 32 12
est 1 1 e2s
L {g(t)} (s) = e st
g(t) dt = st
e sin t dt = 2 (s sin t cos t)11 = 2 ,
s +1 0 s +1
0 0
438
Exercises 7.6
applying the Laplace transform to the original equation yields
L {y } (s) + 4L {y} (s) = L {g(t)} (s)

- 2 . 1 e2s
s L {y} (s) s 3 + 4L {y} (s) =
s2 + 1
s+3 1 e2s
L {y} (s) = 2 + .
s + 4 (s2 + 1)(s2 + 4) (s2 + 1)(s2 + 4)
Using the partial fractions decomposition

4 5
1 1 (s2 + 4) (s2 + 1) 1 1 1 2
= = ,
(s2 + 1)(s2 + 4) 3 (s2 + 1)(s2 + 4) 3 s2 + 1 6 s2 + 4
we conclude that
4 5
s 4 2 1 1 2s 1 1 1 2
L {y} (s) = 2 + + e
s + 4 3 s2 + 4 3 s2 + 1 3 s2 + 1 6 s2 + 4
and so
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 s 4 2 1 1
y(t) = L 2
(t) + L1 (t) + L 1
(t)
s +4 3s2 + 4 3 s2 + 1
6 7
1 1 1 1 2
L (t 2)u(t 2)
3 s2 + 1 6 s2 + 4
4 5
4 1 1 1
= cos 2t + sin 2t + sin t sin(t 2) sin 2(t 2) u(t 2)
3 3 3 6
4 5
4 1 1 1
= cos 2t + sin 2t + sin t sin t sin 2t u(t 2)
3 3 3 6
1 1
= cos 2t + [1 u(t 2)] sin t + [8 + u(t 2)] sin 2t .
3 6
39. We can express g(t) using the unit step function as
g(t) = tu(t 1) + (1 t)u(t 5) = [(t 1) + 1]u(t 1) [(t 5) + 4]u(t 5).
Thus, formula (5) on page 387 of the text yields

+ , + ,
s 5s s 1 1 5s 1 4
L {g(t)} (s) = e L {t + 1} (s) e L {t + 4} (s) = e 2
+ e 2
+ .
s s s s
439
Chapter 7
Let Y (s) = L {y} (s). Applying the Laplace transform to the given equation and using the
initial conditions, we obtain
L {y } (s) + 5L {y } (s) + 6Y (s) = L {g(t)} (s)

- 2 .
s Y (s) 2 + 5 [sY (s)] + 6Y (s) = L {g(t)} (s)
+ , + ,
) 2 * s 1 1 5s 1 4
s + 5s + 6 Y (s) = 2 + e + e +
s2 s s2 s
2 s+1 4s + 1
Y (s) = 2 + es 2 2 e5s 2 2 . (7.36)
s + 5s + 6 s (s + 5s + 6) s (s + 5s + 6)
Using partial fractions decomposition, we can write
2 2 2
= ,
s2 + 5s + 6 s+2 s+3
s+1 1/36 1/6 1/4 2/9
2 2
= + 2 + ,
s (s + 5s + 6) s s s+2 s+3
4s + 1 1/6 19/36 7/4 11/9
2 2
= 2 + + .
s (s + 5s + 6) s s s+2 s+3
Therefore,
6 7
1 2
L (t) = 2e2t 2e3t ,
s2 + 5s + 6
6 7
1 s+1 1 t e2t 2e3t
L (t) = + + ,
s2 (s2 + 5s + 6) 36 6 4 9
6 7
1 4s + 1 19 t 7e2t 11e3t
L (t) = + + .
s2 (s2 + 5s + 6) 36 6 4 9
Using these equations and taking the inverse Laplace transform in (7.36), we finally obtain
4 5
2t 3t 1 t 1 e2(t1) 2e3(t1)
y(t) = 2e 2e + + + u(t 1)
36 6 4 9
4 5
19 t 5 7e2(t5) 11e3(t5)
+ + + u(t 5).
36 6 4 9
41. First observe that for s > 0, T > 0, we have 0 < eT s < 1 so that
1
T s
= 1 + eT s + e2T s + e3T s + (7.37)
1e
440
Exercises 7.6
and the series converges for all s > 0. Thus,
1 1 1 1 ) T s 2T s 3T s
*
= = 1 + e + e + e +
(s + )(1 eT s ) s + 1 eT s s+
1 eT s e2T s
= + + + ,
s+ s+ s+
and so
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 eT s e2T s
L (t) = L + + + (t). (7.38)
(s + )(1 eT s ) s+ s+ s+
Taking for granted that the linearity of the inverse Laplace transform extends to the infinite
sum in (7.38) and ignoring convergence questions yields
6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 1 eT s 1 e2T s
L = L +L +L +
(s + )(1 eT s ) s+ s+ s+
= et + e(tT ) u(t T ) + e(t2T ) u(t 2T ) +
as claimed.
43. Using the expansion (7.37) obtained in Problem 41, we can represent L {g} (s) as
1 ) T s 2T s 3T s
*
L {g} (s) = = 1 + e + e + e +
s2 + 2 1 eT s s2 + 2

= 2 2
+ eT s 2 2
+ e2T s 2 + .
s + s + s + 2
Since L1 {/(s2 + 2 )} (t) = sin t, using the linearity of the inverse Laplace transform
(extended to infinite series) and formula (6) in Theorem 8, we obtain
6 7 6 7
1 1
g(t) = L (t) + L (t T )u(t T )
s + 2
2 s + 2
2
6 7
1
+L (t 2T )u(t 2T ) +
s2 + 2
= sin t + [sin (t T )]u(t T ) + [sin (t 2T )]u(t 2T ) +
as stated.
441
Chapter 7
45. In order to apply the method of Laplace transform to given initial value problem, let us find
L {f } (s) first. Since the period of f (t) is T = 1 and f (t) = et on (0, 1), the windowed version
of f (t) is >
et , 0 < t < 1,
f1 (t) =
0, otherwise,
and so
3 31 11
st st t e(1s)t 11 1 e1s
F1 (s) = e f1 (t) dt = e e dt = = .
1 s 10 s1
0 0
Hence, Theorem 9 yields the following formula for L {f } (s):

1 e1s
L {f } (s) = .
(s 1)(1 es )
We can now apply the Laplace transform to the given dierential equation and obtain
1 e1s
L {y } (s) + 3L {y } (s) + 2L {y} (s) =
(s 1)(1 es )
- 2 . 1 e1s
s L {y} (s) + 3 [sL {y} (s)] + 2L {y} (s) =
(s 1)(1 es )
1s
1e 1 e1s
L {y} (s) = =
(s 1)(s2 + 3s + 2)(1 es ) (s 1)(s + 1)(s + 2)(1 es )
e 1e 1
L {y} (s) = + .
(s 1)(s + 1)(s + 2) 1 es (s 1)(s + 1)(s + 2)
Using the partial fractions decomposition
1 1/6 1/2 1/3
= +
(s 1)(s + 1)(s + 2) s1 s+1 s+2
we find that
e/6 e/2 e/3 1e 1
L {y} (s) = + +
s1 s+1 s+2 6 (s 1)(1 es )
1e 1 1e 1
s
+
2 (s + 1)(1 e ) 3 (s + 2)(1 es )
6 7
e e e 1 e 1 1
y(t) = et et + e2t + L (t)
6 2 3 6 (s 1)(1 es )
6 7 6 7
1 e 1 1 1 e 1 1
L (t) + L (t). (7.39)
2 (s + 1)(1 es ) 3 (s + 2)(1 es )
442
Exercises 7.6
To each of the three inverse Laplace transforms in the above formula we can apply results of
Problem 42(a) with T = 1 and = 1, 1, and 2, respectively. Thus, for n < t < n + 1, we
have
6 7 4 (n+1) 5
1 1 t e 1
L (t) = e ,
(s 1)(1 es ) e1 1
6 7 4 n+1 5
1 1 t e 1
L (t) = e ,
(s + 1)(1 es ) e1
6 7 4 2(n+1) 5
1 1 2t e 1
L (t) = e .
(s + 2)(1 es ) e2 1
Finally, substitution back into (7.39) yields
4 5
e t e t e 2t 1 e t e(n+1) 1
y(t) = e e + e + e
6 2 3 6 e1 1
4 5 4 5
1 e t en+1 1 1 e 2t e2(n+1) 1
e + e
2 e1 3 e2 1
etn et (1 + e en+1 ) e2t (1 + e + e2 e2n+2 )
= + .
6 2 3(e + 1)
47. Since k
H t
et =
k=0
k!
and
/ 0 k!
L tk (s) = k+1 ,
s
using the linearity of the Laplace transform we have
> O / 0 + ,k
/ t0 H tk H L tk (s) H k!/sk+1 1H 1
L e (s) = L (s) = = = . (7.40)
k=0
k! k=0
k! k=0
k! s k=0 s
We can apply now the summation formula for geometric series, that is,
1
1 + x + x2 + = ,
1x
which is valid for |x| < 1. With x = 1/s, s > 1, (7.40) yields
/ 0 1 1 1
L et (s) = = .
s 1 (1/s) s1
443
Chapter 7
49. Recall that the Taylors series for cos t about t = 0 is

t2 t4 t6 t2n
cos t = 1 + + + (1)n +
2! 4! 6! (2n)!
so that
1 cos t t t3 t5 t2n1
= + + + (1)n+1 + .
t 2! 4! 6! (2n)!
Thus
6 7
1 cos t 1 1 / 0 (1)n+1 / 2n1 0
L (s) = L {t} (s) L t3 (s) + + L t (s) +
t 2! 4! (2n)!
11 11 (1)n+1 1
= ++ +
2 s2 4 s4 2n s2n
H H
(1)n+1 1 (1)n+1
= 2n
= 2n
.
n=1
2n s n=1
2ns
To sum this series, recall that

H xn
ln(1 x) = .
n=1
n
Hence,
+ , H
1 (1)n H (1)n+1
ln 1 + 2 = 2n
= 2n
.
s n=1
ns n=1
ns
Thus, we have
+ , H 6 7
1 1 (1)n+1 1 cos t
ln 1 + 2 = =L (s) .
2 s n=1
2ns2n t
This formula can also be obtained by using the result of Problem 27 in Section 7.3 of the text.
51. We use formula (17) on page 394 of the text.
(a) With r = 1/2, (17) yields

!
/ 1/2 0 [(1/2) + 1] (1/2)
L t (s) = (1/2)+1
= 1/2 = = .
s s s s
(b) This time, r = 7/2, and (17) becomes

/ 0 [(7/2) + 1] (9/2)
L t7/2 (s) = (7/2)+1
= 9/2 .
s s
444
Exercises 7.6
From the recursive formula (16) we find that

+ , + , + , + , + , + ,
9 7 7 7 75 5 753 3 7531 1 105
= +1 = = = = = .
2 2 2 2 22 2 222 2 2222 2 16
Therefore,
/ 7/2 0 105
L t (s) = .
16s9/2
53. According to the definition (11) of the function fT (t), fT (t kT ) = 0 if the point t kT does
not belong to (0, T ). Therefore, fixed t, in the series (13) all the terms containing fT (t kT )
with ks such that t kT 0 or t kT T vanish. In the remaining terms, k satisfies
t t
0 < t kT < T 1<k < .
T T
But, for any fixed t, there is at most one k satisfying this condition.
55. Recall that

x2 xn
ex = 1 + x + ++ + .
2! n!
Substituting 1/s for x above yields
1 1 1 (1)n
e1/s = 1 + + + + .
s 2!s2 3!s3 n!sn
Thus, we have

H (1)n
1/2 1/s 1 1 1 (1)n
s e = + + + + = .
s1/2 s3/2 2!s5/2 n!sn+1/2 n=0
n!s n+1/2
By Problem 52 of this section,

6 7
1 1 2n tn(1/2)
L (t) = ,
sn+(1/2) 1 3 5 (2n 1)
so that

> O
/ 0 H (1) n
L1 s1/2 e1/s (t) = L1 (t)
n=0
n!sn+1/2
H 6 7 H
(1)n 1 1 (1)n 2n tn(1/2)
= L n+(1/2)
(t) = .
n=0
n! s n=0
n! 1 3 5 (2n 1)
445
Chapter 7
Multiplying the nth term by [2 4 (2n)]/[2 4 (2n)], we obtain

H
1
/ 1/2 1/s 0 (1)n (2n )2 tn(1/2) H (1)n (2n )2 tn
L s e (t) = =
n=0
(2n)! n=0
(2n)! t
+ ,H + , # %
1 (1)n (2 t)2n 1
= = cos 2 t .
t n=0 (2n)! t
57. Recall that the Maclaurin expansion of ln(1 x) is

H xn
ln(1 x) = ,
n=1
n
which converges for |x| < 1. Hence, substitution 1/s2 for x yields
+ , H
1 (1)n H (1)n+1
ln 1 + 2 = 2n
= 2n
.
s n=1
ns n=1
ns
Assuming that the inverse Laplace transform can be computed termwise, we obtain
6 + ,7 > O 6 7
1 H (1)n+1 H (1)n+1 1 1
1 1
L ln 1 + 2 =L = L .
s n=1
ns2n n=1
n s2n
/ 0 / 0
From Table 7.1 in Section 7.2, L tk = k!/sk+1, k = 1, 2, . . . . Thus L1 1/sk+1 = tk /k!.
With k = 2n 1, this yields
6 7
1 1 t2n1
L (t) = , n = 1, 2, . . .
s2n (2n 1)!
and, therefore,
6 + ,7 H
1 1 (1)n+1 t2n1 2 H (1)n 2n
L ln 1 + 2 (t) = = t . (7.41)
s n=1
n (2n 1)! t n=1
(2n)!
Since
H (1)n H (1)n
2n
cos t = t =1+ t2n ,
n=0
(2n)! n=1
(2n)!
(7.41) implies that
6 + ,7
1 1 2 2(1 cos t)
L ln 1 + 2 (t) = (cos t 1) = .
s t t
446
Exercises 7.6
59. Applying the Laplace transform to both sides of the original equation and using its linearity,
we obtain
L {y } (s) L {y} (s) = L {G3 (t 1)} (s). (7.42)
Initial conditions, y(0) = 0 and y (0)=2, and Theorem 5 in Section 7.3 imply that
L {y } (s) = s2 L {y} (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 L {y} (s) 2.
In the right-hand side of (7.42), we can apply the result of Problem 58(c) with a = 3 and
b = 1 to get
es e4s
L {G3 (t 1)} (s) = .
s
Thus (7.42) becomes
- 2
. es e4s
s L {y} (s) 2 L {y} (s) =
s
2 es e4s
L {y} (s) = 2 + .
s 1 s(s2 1)
Substituting partial fraction decompositions
2 1 1 1 1/2 1/2 1
= , = +
s2 1 s1 s+1 s(s2 1) s1 s+1 s
yields
4 5
1 1 ) s 4s
* 1/2 1/2 1
L {y} (s) = + e e +
s1 s+1 s1 s+1 s
4 5 4 5
1 1 s 1/2 1/2 1 4s 1/2 1/2 1
= +e + e + . (7.43)
s1 s+1 s1 s+1 s s1 s+1 s
Since 6 7
1 1/2 1/2 1 et + et 2
L + (t) = ,
s1 s+1 s 2
formula (6) on page 387 of the text gives us
6 4 57 6 7
1 s 1/2 1/2 1 1 1/2 1/2 1
L e + (t) = L + (t 1)u(t 1)
s1 s+1 s s1 s+1 s
et1 + e1t 2
= u(t 1),
2
447
Chapter 7
6 4 57 6 7
1 4s 1/2 1/2 1 1 1/2 1/2 1
L e + (t) = L + (t 4)u(t 4)
s1 s+1 s s1 s+1 s
et4 + e4t 2
= u(t 4).
2
Taking the inverse Laplace transform in (7.43) yields
et1 + e1t 2 et4 + e4t 2

y(t) = et et + u(t 1) u(t 4).
2 2
61. In this problem, we use the method of solving mixing problems discussed in Section 3.2.
So, let x(t) denote the mass of salt in the tank at time t with t = 0 denoting the moment
when the process started. Thus, using the formula
mass = volume concentration ,
we have the initial condition
x(0) = 500 (L) 0.2 (kg/L) = 100 (kg).
For the rate of change of x(t), that is, x (t), we use then relation
x (t) = input rate output rate . (7.44)
While the output rate (through the exit valve C) can be computed as
x(t) 3x(t)
output rate = (kg/L) 12 (L/min) = (kg/min)
500 125
for all t, the input rate has dierent formulas for the first 10 minute and after that. Namely,
0 < t < 10 (valve A) : input rate = 12 (L/min) 0.4 (kg/L) = 4.8 (kg/min);
10 < t (valve B) : input rate = 12 (L/min) 0.6 (kg/L) = 7.2 (kg/min).
In other words, the input rate is a function of t, which can be written as

>
4.8, 0 < t < 10,
input rate = g(t) =
7.2, 10 < t.
448
Exercises 7.6
Using the unit step function, we can express g(t) = 4.8 + 2.4u(t 10) (kg/min). Therefore
(7.44) becomes
3x(t) 3
x (t) = g(t) x (t) + x(t) = 4.8 + 2.4u(t 10) (7.45)
125 125
with the initial condition x(0) = 100. Taking the Laplace transform of both sides yields
3 4.8 2.4e10s
L {x } (s) + L {x} (s) = L {4.8 + 2.4u(t 10)} (s) = +
125 s s
3 4.8 2.4e10s
[sL {x} (s) 100] + L {x} (s) = +
125 s s
100s + 4.8 2.4 10s
L {x} (s) = + e . (7.46)
s[s + (3/125)] s[s + (3/125)]
Since
+ ,
2.4 1 1
= 100 ,
s[s + (3/125)] s s + (3/125)
+ ,
100s + 4.8 2 1
= 100 ,
s[s + (3/125)] s s + (3/125)
applying the inverse Laplace transform in (7.46), we get
) * ) *
x(t) = 100 2 e3t/125 + 100 1 e3(t10)/125 u(t 10).
Finally, dividing by the volume of the solution in the tank, which constantly equals to 500 L,
we conclude that
) *
concentration = 0.4 0.2e3t/125 + 0.2 1 e3(t10)/125 u(t 10).
63. In this problem, the solution still enters the tank at the rate 12 L/min, but leaves the tank at
the rate only 6 L/min. Thus, every minute, the volume of the solution in the tank increases
by 12 6 = 6 L. Therefore, the volume, as a function of t, is given by 500 + 6t and so
x(t) 3x(t)
output rate = (kg/L) 6 (L/min) = (kg/min).
500 + 6t 250 + 3t
Instead of equation (7.45) in Problem 61, we now have
3x(t)
x (t) = g(t) (250 + 3t)x (t) + 3x(t) = (250 + 3t)[48 + 24u(t 10)].
250 + 3t
449
Chapter 7
This equation has polynomial coecients and can also be solved using the Laplace transform
method. (See the discussion in Section 7.5, page 380, and Example 4.) But, as an intermediate
step, one will obtain a first order linear dierential equation for L {x} (s).
EXERCISES 7.7: Convolution, page 405
1. Let Y (s) := L {y} (s), G(s) := L {g} (s). Taking the Laplace transform of both sides of the
given dierential equation and using the linear property of the Laplace transform, we obtain
L {y } (s) 2L {y } (s) + Y (s) = G(s).
The initial conditions and Theorem 5, Section 7.3, imply that
L {y } (s) = sY (s) + 1,
L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) + s 1.
Thus, substitution yields

- 2 .
s Y (s) + s 1 2 [sY (s) + 1] + Y (s) = G(s)
) 2 *
s 2s + 1 Y (s) = 3 s + G(s)
3s G(s) 2 1 G(s)
Y (s) = 2 + 2 = 2
+ .
s 2s + 1 s 2s + 1 (s 1) s 1 (s 1)2
Taking now the inverse Laplace transform, we obtain
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 1 G(s)
y(t) = 2L (t) L (t) + L (t) .
(s 1)2 s1 (s 1)2
Using Table 7.1, we find that
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1
L (t) = et , L (t) = tet ,
s1 (s 1)2
and, by the convolution theorem,
6 7 6 7 3t
1 G(s) 1 1 ) t*
L (t) = L G(s) (t) = te g(t) = (t v)etv g(v) dv.
(s 1)2 (s 1)2
0
450
Exercises 7.7
Thus
3t
y(t) = 2tet et + (t v)etv g(v) dv.
0
3. Taking the Laplace transform of y + 4y + 5y = g(t) and applying the initial conditions
y(0) = y (0) = 1 gives us
- .
s2 Y (s) s 1 + 4 [sY (s) 1] + 5Y (s) = G(s),
where Y (s) := L {y} (s), G(s) := L {g} (s). Thus

s+5 G(s) s+2 3 G(s)
Y (s) = + 2 = + + .
s2 + 4s + 5 s + 4s + 5 (s + 2) + 1 (s + 2) + 1 (s + 2)2 + 1
2 2
Taking the inverse Laplace transform of Y (s) with the help of the convolution theorem yields
3t
y(t) = e2t cos t + 3e2t sin t + e2(tv) sin(t v)g(v) dv..
0
5. Since L1 {1/s} (t) = 1 and L1 {1/(s2 + 1)} (t) = sin t, writing

1 1 1
= 2
s(s2 + 1) s s +1
and using the convolution theorem, we obtain
6 7 3t
1 1t
L1 2
(t) = 1 sin t = sin v dv = cos v 10 = 1 cos t.
s(s + 1)
0
7. From Table 7.1, L1 {1/(s a)} (t) = eat . Therefore, using the linearity of the inverse Laplace
transform and the convolution theorem, we have
6 7 6 7 3t
14 1 1
L1 (t) = 14L1 (t) = 14e2t e5t = 14 e2(tv) e5v dv
(s + 2)(s 5) s+2 s5
0
3t
) * ) *
= 14e2t e7v dv = 2e2t e7t 1 = 2 e5t e2t .
0
451
Chapter 7
9. Since s/(s2 + 1)2 = [s/(s2 + 1)] [1/(s2 + 1)] the convolution theorem tells us that
6 7 6 7 3t
s s s
L1 (t) = L1 2 (t) = cos t sin t = cos(t v) sin v dv.
(s + 1)2
2 2
s +1 s +1
0
Using the identity sin cos = [sin( + ) + sin( )]/2, we get

6 7 3t
s 1
L1 (t) = [sin t + sin(t 2v)] dv
(s + 1)2
2 2
0
+ ,1t
1 cos(t 2v) 11 t sin t
= v sin t + 1 = .
2 2 0 2
11. Using the hint, we can write

s 1 1
= + ,
(s 1)(s + 2) s + 2 (s 1)(s + 2)
so that by the convolution theorem, Theorem 11 on page 400 of the text,
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 s 1 1 1 1
L (t) = L (t) + L (t)
(s 1)(s + 2) s+2 (s 1)(s + 2)
3t
= e + e e = e + etv e2v dv
2t t 2t 2t
0
3t
et ) 3t * 2e2t et
= e2t + et e3v dv = e2t e 1 = + .
3 3 3
0
13. Note that f (t) = t e3t . Hence, by (8) on page 400 of the text,
/ 0 1 1 1
L {f (t)} (s) = L {t} (s)L e3t (s) = 2 = 2 .
s s3 s (s 3)
15. Note that

3t
y(v) sin(t v) dv = sin t y(t).
0
Let Y (s) := L {y} (s). Taking the Laplace transform of the original equation, we obtain
Y (s) + 3L {sin t y(t)} (s) = L {t} (s)
452
Exercises 7.7
1 3 1
Y (s) + 3L {sin t} (s)Y (s) = Y (s) + Y (s) =
s2 s2 + 1 s2
2
s +1 (1/4) (3/8)2
Y (s) = 2 2 = 2
+ 2
s (s + 4) s s + 22
6 7
(1/4) (3/8)2 t 3 sin 2t
y(t) = L1 2
+ 2 2
(t) = + .
s s +2 4 8
17. We use the convolution Theorem 11 to find the Laplace transform of the integral term.
t
3 Y (s)
L (t v)y(v) dv (s) = L {t y(t)} (s) = L {t} (s)L {y(t)} (s) = 2 ,
s
0
where Y (s) denotes the Laplace transform of y(t). Thus taking the Laplace transform of both
sides of the given equation yields
6 7
Y (s) 1 s 1 s
Y (s) + 2 = Y (s) = 2 y(t) = L 2
(t) = cos t .
s s s +1 s +1
19. By the convolution theorem,

t
3 / 0 / 0 2Y (s)
L (t v) y(v) dv (s) = L t2 y(t) (s) = L t2 (s)L {y(t)} (s) =
2
.
s3
0
Hence, applying the Laplace transform to the original equation yields

2Y (s) /3 0 6 3
Y (s) + 3
= L t + 3 (s) = 4 +
s s s
s3 6 + 3s3 3
Y (s) = 3 4
=
s + 2
6 7 s s
3
y(t) = L1 (t) = 3.
s
21. As in Example 3 on page 402 of the text, we first rewrite the integro-dierential equation as
y (t) + y(t) y(t) sin t = sin t , y(0) = 1. (7.47)
We now take the Laplace transform of (7.47) to obtain

1 1
[sY (s) 1] + Y (s) Y (s) = 2 ,
s2 +1 s +1
453
Chapter 7
where Y (s) = L {y} (s). Thus,
s2 s s
Y (s) = 3 2
= 2 =
s +s +s s +s+1 (s + 1/2)2 + 3/4

s + 1/2 (1/ 3)( 3/2)
= .
(s + 1/2) + 3/4 (s + 1/2)2 + 3/4
2
Taking the inverse Laplace transform yields

J K J K
3t 1 3t
y(t) = et/2 cos et/2 sin .
2 3 2
23. Taking the Laplace transform of the dierential equation, and assuming zero initial conditions,
we obtain
s2 Y (s) + 9Y (s) = G(s),
where Y = L {y}, G = L {g}. Thus,
Y (s) 1
H(s) = = 2 .
G(s) s +9
The impulse response function is then
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 3 sin 3t
h(t) = L {H(s)} (t) = L (t) = L1 (t) = .
s2 + 9 3 s2 + 3 2 3
To solve the initial value problem, we need the solution to the corresponding homogeneous
problem. The auxiliary equation, r 2 + 9 = 0, has roots, r = 3i. Thus, a general solution to
the homogeneous equation is
yh (t) = C1 cos 3t + C2 sin 3t.
Applying the initial conditions y(0) = 2 and y (0) = 3, we obtain

1
2 = y(0) = (C1 cos 3t + C2 sin 3t) 1t=0 = C1 , C1 = 2 ,
1
3 = y (0) = (3C1 sin 3t + 3C2 cos 3t 1 = 3C2 t=0
C2 = 1 .
So
yk (t) = 2 cos 3t sin 3t,
454
Exercises 7.7
and the formula for the solution to the original initial value problem is
3t
1
y = (h g)(t) + yk (t) = g(v) sin 3(t v) dv + 2 cos 3t sin 3t.
3
0
25. Taking the Laplace transform of both sides of the given equation and assuming zero initial
conditions, we get
L {y y 6y} (s) = L {g(t)} (s) s2 Y (s) sY (s) 6Y (s) = G(s).
Thus,
Y (s) 1 1
H(s) = = 2 =
G(s) s s6 (s 3)(s + 2)
is the transfer function. The impulse response function h(t) is then given by
6 7 3t 1t
1 1 3t 2t 3(tv) 2v 3t e5v 11 e3t e2t
h(t) = L (t) = e e = e e dv = e = .
(s 3)(s + 2) 5 10 5
0
To solve the given initial value problem, we use Theorem 12. To this end, we need the solution
yk (t) to the corresponding initial value problem for the homogeneous equation. That is,
y y 6y = 0, y(0) = 1, y (0) = 8
(see (19) in the text). Applying the Laplace transform yields

- 2 .
s Yk (s) s 8 [sYk (s) 1] 6Yk (s) = 0
s+7 s+7 2 1
Yk (s) = 2 = =
s s6 (s 3)(s + 2) s3 s+2
6 7
1 1 2 1
yk (t) = L {Yk (s)} (t) = L (t) = 2e3t e2t .
s3 s+2
So,
3t
1 - 3(tv) .
y(t) = (h g)(t) + yk (t) = e e2(tv) g(v) dv + 2e3t e2t .
5
0
455
Chapter 7
27. Taking the Laplace transform and assuming zero initial conditions, we find the transfer func-
tion H(s).
Y (s) 1
s2 Y (s) 2sY (s) + 5Y (s) = G(s) H(s) = = 2 .
G(s) s 2s + 5
Therefore, the impulse response function is
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 t
h(t) = L {H(s)} (t) = L (t) = L (t) = e sin 2t .
(s 1)2 + 22 2 (s 1)2 + 22 2
Next, we find the solution yk (t) to the corresponding initial value problem for the homogeneous
equation,
y 2y + 5y = 0, y(0) = 0, y (0) = 2.
Since the associated equation, r 2 2r + 5 = 0, has roots r = 1 2i, a general solution to the
homogeneous equations is
yh (t) = et (C1 cos 2t + C2 sin 2t) .
We satisfy the initial conditions by solving
0 = y(0) = C1 C1 = 0,

2 = y (0) = C1 + 2C2 C2 = 1.
Hence, yk (t) = et sin 2t and

3t
1
y(t) = (h g)(t) + yk (t) = etv sin 2(t v)g(v) dv + et sin 2t
2
0
29. With given data, the initial value problem becomes

1
5I (t) + 20I (t) + I(t) = e(t), I(0) = 1, I (0) = 8.
0.005
Using formula (15) on page 403 of the text, we find the transfer function
1 1 1
H(s) = = .
5s2 + 20s + 200 5 (s + 2)2 + 62
456
Exercises 7.7
Therefore,
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 1 6 1 2t
h(t) = L (t) = L (t) = e sin 6t.
5 (s + 2)2 + 62 30 (s + 2)2 + 62 30
Next, we consider the initial value problem
5I (t) + 20I (t) + 200I(t) = 0, I(0) = 1, I (0) = 8
for the corresponding homogeneous equation. Its characteristic equation, 5r 2 + 20r + 200 = 0,
has roots r = 2 6i, which yield a general solution
Ih (t) = e2t (C1 cos 6t + C2 sin 6t) .
We find constants C1 and C2 so that the solution satisfies the initial conditions. Thus we have
1 = I(0) = C1 , C1 = 1 ,

8 = I (0) = 2C1 + 6C2 C2 = 1 ,
and so Ik (t) = e2t (sin 6t cos 6t). Finally,

3t
1
I(t) = h(t) e(t) + Ik (t) = e(v)e2(tv) sin 6(t v) dv + e2t (sin 6t cos 6t) .
30
0
31. By the convolution theorem, we get

+ ,3
1 1
L {1 1 1} (s) = L {1} (s)L {1 1} (s) = L {1} (s)L {1} (s)L {1} (s) = = 3.
s s
Therefore, the definition of the inverse Laplace transform yields
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 2 1 2
111=L (t) = L (t) = t .
s3 2 s3 2
33. Using the linear property of integrals, we have

3t 3t
f (g + h) = f (t v)[g + h](v) dv = f (t v)[g(v) + h(v)] dv
0 0
3t 3t
= f (t v)g(v) dv + f (t v)h(v) dv = f g + f h.
0 0
457
Chapter 7
35. Since
3t 3t
f (v) dv = 1 f (v) dv = 1 f (t),
0 0
we conclude that
t
3 1
L f (v) dv (s) = L {1 f (t)} (s) = L {1} (s)L {f (t)} (s) = F (s).
s
0
Hence, by the definition of the inverse Laplace transform,

3t 6 7
1 1
f (v) dv = L F (s) (t).
s
0
(Note that the integral in the left-hand side is a continuous function.)
37. Actually, this statement holds for any continuously dierentiable function h(t) on [0, )
satisfying h(0) = 0. Indeed, first of all,
1
3t 1 30
1
(h g)(0) = h(t v)g(v) dv 11 = h(v)g(v) dv = 0
1
0 t=0 0
since the interval of integration has zero length. Next, we apply the Leibnizs rule to find the
derivative of (h g)(t).
t
3 3t 1
h(t v)g(v) 1
(h g)(t) = h(t v)g(v) dv = dv + h(t v)g(v) 1
t v=t
0 0
3t 3t
= h (t v)g(v) dv + h(0)g(t) = h (t v)g(v) dv
0 0
since h(0) = 0. Therefore,

30

(h g) (0) = h (v)g(v) dv = 0,
0
again as a definite integral with equal limits of integration.
458
Exercises 7.8
EXERCISES 7.8: Impulses and the Dirac Delta Function, page 412
1. By equation (3) on page 407 of the text,

3
) *1
(t2 1)(t) dt = t2 1 1t=0 = 1.

3. By equation (3) on page 407 of the text,

3 # % # %
(sin 3t) t dt = sin 3 = 1.
2 2

5. Formula (6) of the Laplace transform of the Dirac delta function yields
3
1
e2t (t 1) dt = L {(t 1)} (2) = es 1s=2 = e2 .
0
7. Using the linearity of the Laplace transform and (6) on page 409 of the text, we get
L {(t 1) (t 3)} (s) = L {(t 1)} (s) L {(t 3)} (s) = es e3s .
9. Since (t 1) = 0 for t < 1,

3 3
1
L {t(t 1)} (s) := est
t(t 1) dt = est t(t 1) dt = est t 1t=1 = es
0
by equation (3) on page 407 of the text.
Another way to solve this problem is to use Theorem 6 inj Section 7.3. This yields
d d (es )
L {t(t 1)} (s) = L {(t 1)} (s) = = es .
ds ds
11. Since (t ) = 0 for t < , we use the definition of the Laplace transform and formula (3),
page 407 of the text, to conclude that
3 3
st
L {(sin t)(t )} (s) := e (sin t)(t ) dt = est (sin t)(t ) dt = et sin = 0.
0
459
Chapter 7
13. Let W (s) := L {w} (s). Using the initial conditions and Theorem 5 in Section 7.3, we find
that
L {w } (s) = s2 W (s) sw(0) w (0) = s2 W (s).
Thus, applying the Laplace transform to both sides of the given equation yields
es
s2 W (s) + W (s) = L {(t )} (s) = es W (s) = .
s2 + 1
Taking the inverse Laplace transform of both sides of the last equation and using Theorem 8
in Section 7.6, we get
6 s 7 6 7
1 e 1 1
w(t) = L (t) = L (t)u(t) = sin(t)u(t) = (sin t)u(t).
s2 + 1 s2 + 1
15. Let Y := L {y}. Taking the Laplace transform of y + 2y 3y = (t 1) (t 2) and

applying the initial conditions y(0) = 2, y (0) = 2, we obtain
- 2 .
s Y (s) 2s + 2 + 2 [sY (s) 2] 3Y (s) = L {(t 1) (t 2)} (s) = es e2s
2s + 2 + es e2s 2s + 2 es e2s
Y (s) = = +
s2 + 2s 3 (s + 3)(s 1) (s + 3)(s 1) (s + 3)(s 1)
s
+ , + ,
1 1 e 1 1 e2s 1 1
= + + ,
s1 s+3 4 s1 s+3 4 s1 s+3
so that by Theorem 8 on page 387 of the text we get
1 ) t1 * 1 ) t2 *
y(t) = et + e3t + e e3(t1) u(t 1) e e3(t2) u(t 2).
4 4
17. Let Y := L {y}. We use the initial conditions to find that
L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) 2.
Thus taking the Laplace transform of both sides of the given equation and using formula (6)
on page 409, we get
- . / 0 2
s2 Y (s) 2 Y (s) = 4L {(t 2)} (s) + L t2 (s) = 4e2s + 3
+ , s
4e2s 2(s3 + 1) 1 1 2 2 2
Y (s) = 2 + 3 2 = 2e2s + 3 .
s 1 s (s 1) s1 s+1 s1 s s
460
Exercises 7.8
Now we can apply the inverse Laplace transform.

6 + , 7
1 2s 1 1 2 2 2
y(t) = L 2e + (t)
s1 s+1 s 1 s3 s
+ 6 7 6 7,
1 1 1 1
= 2 L L (t 2)u(t 2)
s1 s+1
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 1 1 2 1 1
+2L (t) L 3
(t) 2L (t)
s1 s s
) *
= 2 et2 e2t u(t 2) + 2et t2 2.
19. Let W (s) := L {w} (s). We apply the Laplace transform to the given equation and obtain
/ 0
L {w } (s) + 6L {w } (s) + 5W (s) = L et (t 1) (s). (7.48)
From formula (4) on page 362 of the text we see that
L {w } (s) = sW (s) w(0) = sW (s),

(7.49)
L {w } (s) = s2 W (s) sw(0) w (0) = s2 W (s) 4.
Also, the translation property (1), Section 7.3, of the Laplace transform yields
/ 0
L et (t 1) (s) = L {(t 1)} (s 1) = e(s1) = e1s . (7.50)
Substituting (7.49) and (7.50) back into (7.48), we obtain

- 2 .
s W (s) 4 + 6 [sW (s)] + 5W (s) = e1s
+ ,
4 + e1s 4 + e1s 1 1 e s 1 1
W (s) = 2 = = + e .
s + 6s + 5 (s + 1)(s + 5) s+1 s+5 4 s+1 s+5
Finally, the inverse Laplace transform of both sides of this equation yields
e - (t1) .
w(t) = et e5t + e e5(t1) u(t 1) .
4
21. We apply the Laplace transform to the given equation, solve the resulting equation for
L {y} (s), and then use the inverse Laplace transforms. This yields
L {y } (s) + L {y} (s) = L {(t 2)} (s)
461
Chapter 7
- 2 . 1 + e2s
s L {y} (s) 1 + L {y} (s) = e2s L {y} (s) = 2
6 7 6 7 s +1
1 1
y(t) = L1 (t) + L1 (t 2)u(t 2)
s2 + 1 s2 + 1
= sin t + [sin(t 2)]u(t 2) = [1 + u(t 2)] sin t.
The graph of the solution is shown in Figure B.49 in the answers of the text.
23. The solution to the initial value problem
y + y = (t 2), y(0) = 0, y (0) = 1
is given in Problem 21, that is
y1 (t) = [1 + u(t 2)] sin t.
Thus, if y2 (t) is the solution to the initial value problem
y + y = (t ), y(0) = 0, y (0) = 0, (7.51)
then, by the superposition principle (see Section 4.5), y(t) = y1 (t) + y2 (t) is the desired
solution. The Laplace transform of both sides in (7.51) yields
es
s2 L {y} (s) + L {y} (s) = es L {y} (s) = 2
6 7 s +1
1
y2 (t) = L1 2
(t )u(t ) = [sin(t )]u(t ) = u(t ) sin t.
s +1
(We have used zero initial conditions to express L {y } in terms of L {y}.) Therefore, the
answer is
y(t) = y1 (t) + y2 (t) = [1 + u(t 2)] sin t + u(t ) sin t = [1 + u(t ) + u(t 2)] sin t.
The sketch of this curve is given in Figure B.50 .
25. Taking the Laplace transform of y + 4y + 8y = (t) with zero initial conditions yields
s2 Y (s) + 4sY (s) + 8Y (s) = L {(t)} (s) = 1.
462
Exercises 7.8
Solving for Y (s), we obtain

1 1 1 2
Y (s) = = =
s2 + 4s + 8 2
(s + 2) + 4 2 (s + 2)2 + 22
so that 6 7
1 1 2 1 2t
h(t) = L (t) = e sin 2t .
2 (s + 2)2 + 22 2
Notice that H(s) for y +4y +8y = g(t) with y(0) = y (0) = 0 is given by H(s) = 1/(s2 +4s+8),
so that again
1 2t
h(t) = L1 {H(s)} (t) = e sin 2t .
2
27. The Laplace transform of both sides of the given equation, with zero initial conditions and
g(t) = (t), gives us
s2 L {y} (s) 2sL {y} (s) + 5L {y} (s) = L {(t)} (s)

1 1
L {y} (s) = 2 = .
s 2s + 5 (s 1)2 + 22
The inverse Laplace transform now yields
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 2 1 t
h(t) = L (t) = L (t) = e sin 2t .
(s 1)2 + 22 2 (s 1)2 + 22 2
29. We solve the given initial value problem to find the displacement x(t). Let X(s) := L {x} (s).
Applying the Laplace transform to the dierential equation yields
R # %S

L {x } (s) + 9X(s) = L 3 t (s) = 3es/2 .
2
Since
L {x } (s) = s2 X(s) sx(0) x (0) = s2 X(s) s,
the above equation becomes

- 2 . s 3es/2 s 3
s X(s) s + 9X(s) = 3es/2 X(s) = 2
= 2 2
es/2 2 .
s +9 s +3 s + 32
Therefore,
6 7
1 s 3
x(t) = L 2 2
es/2 2 (t)
s +3 s + 32
463
Chapter 7
8 # %9 # % 8 # %9
= cos 3t sin 3 t u t = 1u t cos 3t .
2 2 2
Since, for t > /2, u(t /2) 1, we conclude that

x(t) 0 for t > .
2
This means that the mass stops after the hit and remains in the equilibrium position thereafter.
31. By taking the Laplace transform of
ay + by = cy = (t), y(0) = y (0) = 0,
and solving for Y := L {y}, we find that the transfer function is given by
1
H(s) = .
as2 + bs + c
If the roots of the polynomial as2 + bs + c are real and distinct, say r1 , r2 , then
1 1/(r1 r2 ) 1/(r1 r2 )
H(s) = = .
(s r1 )(s r2 ) s r1 s r2
Thus
1 ) r1 t *
h(t) = e er2 t
r1 r2
and clearly h(t) is bounded as t if and only if r1 and r2 are less than or equal to zero.
If the roots of as2 + bs + c are complex, then, by the quadratic formula, they are given by

b 4ac b2
i
2a 2a
so that the real part of the roots is b/(2a). Now
1 1 1 1 1
H(s) = = 2 =
as2
+ bs + c a s + (b/a)s + (c/a) a [s + b/(2a)] + (4ac b2 )/(4a2 )
2

2 4ac b2 /(2a)
=
4ac b2 [s + b/(2a)]2 + [ 4ac b2 /(2a)]2
so that + ,
2 (b/2a)t 4ac b2
h(t) = e sin t ,
4ac b2 2a
and again it is clear that h(t) is bounded if and only if b/(2a), the real part of the roots of
as2 + bs + c, is less than or equal to zero.
464
Exercises 7.8
33. Let a function f (t) be defined on (, ) and continuous in a neighborhood of the origin,
t = 0. Since (t) = 0 for any t = 0, so does the product f (t)(t). Therefore,
3 3
f (t)(t) dt = f (t)(t) dt for any > 0. (7.52)

By the mean value theorem, for any small enough (so that f (t) is continuous on (, ))
there exists a point in (, ) such that
3 3 3
f (t)(t) dt = f ( ) (t) dt = f ( ) (t) dt = f ( ) .

Together with (7.52) this yields
3
f (t)(t) dt = f ( ) , for any > 0.

Now we take limit, as 0, in both sides.

3
lim f (t)(t) dt = lim [f ( )] .
0 0

Note that the integral in the left-hand side does not depend on , and so the limit equals
to the integral itself. In the right-hand side, since belongs to (, ), 0 as 0,
and the continuity of f (t) implies that f ( ) converges to f (0), as 0. Combining these
observations, we get the required.
35. Following the hint, we solve the initial value problem
EIy (4) (x) = L(x ), y(0) = y (0) = 0, y (0) = A, y (0) = B.
Using these initial conditions and Theorem 5 in Section 7.3 with n = 4, we obtain
/ 0
L y (4) (x) (s) = s4 L {y(x)} (s) sA B,
465
Chapter 7
and so the Laplace transform of the given equation yields

- .
EI s4 L {y(x)} (s) sA B = LL {(x )} (s) = Les .
Therefore,
L es A B
L {y(x)} (s) = 4
+ 3+ 4
EI 6s s s 7
s
1 L e A B
y(x) = L + 3 + 4 (x)
EI s4 s s
6 7 6 7 6 7
L 1 3! A 1 2! B 1 3!
= L (x )u(x ) + L (x) + L (x)
EI3! s4 2! s3 3! s4
L A B
= (x )3 u(x ) + x2 + x3 . (7.53)
6EI 2 6
Next, we are looking for A and B such that y (2) = y (2) = 0. Note that, for x > ,
u(x ) 1 and so (7.53) becomes
L A B
y(x) = (x )3 + x2 + x3 .
6EI 2 6
Dierentiating we get
L L
y (x) = (x ) + A + Bx and y (x) = + B.
EI EI
Hence, A and B must satisfy
0 = y (2) = [L/(EI)](2 ) + A + 2B, A = L/(EI),

0 = y (2) = L/(EI) + B B = L/(EI).
Substitution back into (7.53) yields the solution

L - .
y(x) = (x )3 u(x ) + 3x2 x3 .
6EI
EXERCISES 7.9: Solving Linear Systems with Laplace Transforms, page 416
1. Let X(s) = L {x} (s), Y (s) = L {y} (s). Applying the Laplace transform to both sides of the
given equations yields
L {x } (s) = 3X(s) 2Y (s),
(7.54)
L {y } (s) = 3Y (s) 2X(s).
466
Exercises 7.9
Since
L {x } (s) = sX(s) x(0) = sX(s) 1,
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) 1,
the system (7.54) becomes
sX(s) 1 = 3X(s) 2Y (s), (s 3)X(s) + 2Y (s) = 1,

(7.55)
sY (s) 1 = 3Y (s) 2X(s) 2X(s) + (s 3)Y (s) = 1.
Subtracting the second equation from the first equation yields
(s 5)X(s) + (5 s)Y (s) = 0 X(s) = Y (s).
So, from the first equation in (7.55) we get

6 7
1 1 1
(s 3)X(s) + 2X(s) = 1 X(s) = x(t) = L (t) = et .
s1 s1
Since Y (s) = X(s), y(t) = x(t) = et .
3. Let Z(s) = L {z} (s), W (s) = L {w} (s). Using the initial conditions we conclude that
L {z } (s) = sZ(s) z(0) = sZ(s) 1, L {w } (s) = sW (s) w(0) = sW (s).
Using these equations and taking the Laplace transform of the equations in the given system,
we obtain
[sZ(s) 1] + [sW (s)] = Z(s) W (s), (s 1)W (s) + (s + 1)W (s) = 1,

(7.56)
sZ(s) 1] [sW (s)] = Z(s) W (s) (s 1)W (s) (s 1)W (s) = 1.
Subtracting equations yields
2sW (s) = 0 W (s) = 0 w(t) = L1 {0} (t) 0.
Substituting W (s) into either equation in (7.56), we obtain

6 7
1 1 1
(s 1)Z(s) = 1 Z(s) = z(t) = L (t) = et .
s1 s1
467
Chapter 7
5. Denote X(s) = L {x} (s), Y (s) = L {y} (s). The Laplace transform of the given equations
yields
L {x } (s) = Y (s) + L {sin t} (s),
L {y } (s) = X(s) + 2L {cos t} (s),
which becomes
sX(s) 2 = Y (s) + 1/(s2 + 1), sX(s) Y (s) = (2s2 + 3)/(s2 + 1),

sY (s) = X(s) + 2s/(s2 + 1) X(s) + sY (s) = 2s/(s2 + 1)
after expressing L {x } and L {y } in terms of X(s) and Y (s). Multiplying the second equation
by s and adding the result to the first equation, we get
) * 4s2 + 3 4s2 + 3
s2 1 Y (s) = 2 Y (s) = .
s +1 (s 1)(s + 1)(s2 + 1)
Since the partial fractions decomposition for Y (s) is
4s2 + 3 7/4 7/4 1/2

= + ,
(s 1)(s + 1)(s2 + 1) s 1 s + 1 s2 + 1
taking the inverse Laplace transform yields
6 7
1 7/4 7/4 1/2 7 7 1
y(t) = L + 2 (t) = et et + sin t .
s1 s+1 s +1 4 4 2
From the second equation in the original system,
7 t 7 t 3
x(t) = y 2 cos t = e + e cos t .
4 4 2
7. We will first write this system without using operator notation. Thus, we have
x 4x + 6y = 9e3t ,
(7.57)
x y + y = 5e3t .
By taking the Laplace transform of both sides of both of these dierential equations and using
the linearity of the Laplace transform, we obtain
L {x } (s) 4X(s) + 6Y (s) = 9/(s + 3) ,

(7.58)
X(s) L {y } (s) + Y (s) = 5/(s + 3) ,
468
Exercises 7.9
where X(s) and Y (s) are the Laplace transforms of x(t) and y(t), respectively. Using the
initial conditions x(0) = 9 and y(0) = 4, we can express
L {x } (s) = sX(s) x(0) = sX(s) + 9,

L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) 4.
Substituting these expressions into the system given in (7.58) and simplifying yields
9 9s 18
(s 4)X(s) + 6Y (s) = 9 + = ,
s+3 s+3
5 4s 7
X(s) + (s + 1)Y (s) = 4 + = .
s+3 s+3
By multiplying the second equation above by (s 4), adding the resulting equations, and
simplifying, we obtain
) * (4s + 7)(s 4) 9s 18 4s2 18s 46
s2 5s + 10 Y (s) = + =
s+3 s+3 s+3
2
4s 18s 46
Y (s) = .
(s + 3)(s2 5s + 10)
Note that the quadratic s2 5s + 10 = (s 5/2)2 + 15/4 is irreducible. The partial fractions
decomposition yields
4 5
1 46s 334 22
Y (s) = +
17 (s 5/2)2 + 15/4 s + 3
L + , J K M
1 s 5/2 146 15 15/2 1
= 46 + 22 ,
17 (s 5/2)2 + 15/4 5 (s 5/2)2 + 15/4 s+3
and so
J K J K
46 5t/2 15t 146 15 5t/2 15t 22 3t
y(t) = L1 {Y (s)} (t) = e cos e sin + e .
17 2 85 2 17
From the second equation in the system (7.57) above, we find that
J K
115 15t
x(t) = 5e3t + y (t) y(t) = 5e3t + e5t/2 cos
17 2
J K J K J K
23 15 73 15 15t 219 15t 66
+ e5t/2 sin e5t/2 cos e3t
17 17 2 17 2 17
469
Chapter 7
J K J K
150 5t/2 15t 334 15 5t/2 15t 3
= e cos e sin e3t .
17 2 85 2 17
9. Taking the Laplace transform of both sides of both of these dierential equations yields the
system
L {x } (s) + X(s) + 2L {y } (s) = 0,
3L {x } (s) 3X(s) + 2L {y } (s) + 4Y (s) = 0,
where X(s) = L {x} (s), Y (s) = L {y} (s). Using the initial conditions x(0) = 2, x (0) = 7
and y(0) = 4, y (0) = 9, we see that
L {x } (s) = s2 X(s) sx(0) x (0) = s2 X(s) 2s + 7,

L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) 4,
L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) 4s + 9.
Substituting these expressions into the system given above yields
[s2 X(s) 2s + 7] + X(s) + 2 [sY (s) 4] = 0,

3 [s2 X(s) 2s + 7] 3X(s) + 2 [s2 Y (s) 4s + 9] + 4Y (s) = 0,
which simplifies to
(s2 + 1) X(s) + 2sY (s) = 2s + 1,
(7.59)
3 (s2 + 1) X(s) + 2 (s2 + 2) Y (s) = 2s + 3.
Multiplying the first equation by 3 and adding the two resulting equations eliminates the
function X(s). Thus, we obtain
) * 4s + 3 5 1
2s2 + 6s + 4 Y (s) = 8s + 6 Y (s) = = ,
(s + 2)(s + 1) s+2 s+1
where we have factored the expression 2s2 + 6s + 4 and used the partial fractions expansion.
Taking the inverse Laplace transform, we obtain
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 1
y(t) = L {Y (s)} (t) = 5L (t) L (t) = 5e2t et .
s+2 s+1
To find the solution x(t), we again examine the system given in (7.59) above. This time we
will eliminate the function Y (s) by multiplying the first equation by s2 + 2 and the second
470
Exercises 7.9
equation by s and adding the resulting equations. Thus, we have

) *) *
s2 + 3s + 2 s2 + 1 X(s) = 2s3 s2 + s + 2
2s3 s2 + s + 2
X(s) = .
(s + 2)(s + 1)(s2 + 1)
Expressing X(s) in a partial fractions expansion, we find that
4 1 s
X(s) = 2
s+2 s+1 s +1
and so 6 7
1 4 1 s
x(t) = L 2 (t) = 4e2t et cos t.
s+2 s+1 s +1
Hence, the solution to this initial value problem is
x(t) = 4e2t et cos t and y(t) = 5e2t et .
11. Since
L {x } (s) = sX(s) x(0) = sX(s) and

L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) ,
applying the Laplace transform to the given equations yields

1 e2s 1 e2s
sX(s) + Y (s) = L {1 u(t 2)} (s) = = ,
s s s
X(s) + sY (s) = L {0} (s) = 0 .
From the second equation, X(s) = sY (s). Substituting this into the first equation, we
eliminate X(s) and obtain
1 e2s
s2 Y (s) + Y (s) =
s + ,
1e 2s ) 2s
* 1 1/2 1/2
Y (s) = = 1e .
s(1 s2 ) s s1 s+1
Using now the linear property of the inverse Laplace transform and formula (6) on page 387,
we get
6 7 6 7
1 1 1/2 1/2 1 1 1/2 1/2
y(t) = L (t) L (t 2)u(t 2)
s s1 s+1 s s1 s+1
471
Chapter 7
4 5
et + et et2 + e(t2)
= 1 1 u(t 2).
2 2
Since, from the second equation in the original system, x = y , we have

6 4 5 7
et + et et2 + e(t2)
x(t) = 1 1 u(t 2)
2 2
4 t2 5
et et e e(t2)
= u(t 2).
2 2
13. Since, by formula (8) on page 387 of the text,
es
L {(sin t)u(t )} (s) = es L {sin(t + )} (s) = es L { sin t} (s) = ,
s2 + 1
applying the Laplace transform to the given system yields
L {x } (s) L {y } (s) = L {(sin t)u(t )} (s),

L {x} (s) + L {y } (s) = L {0} (s)
es
[sX(s) 1] [sY (s) 1] = ,
s2 + 1
X(s) + [sY (s) 1] = 0,
where we have used the initial conditions, x(0) = 1 and y(0) = 1, and Theorem 4, Section 7.3,
to express L {x } (s) and L {y } (s) in terms of X(s) = L {x} (s) and Y (s) = L {y} (s). The
above system simplifies to
es
X(s) Y (s) = ,
s(s2 + 1)
X(s) + sY (s) = 1.
From the second equation, X(s) = 1 sY (s), and with this substitution the first equation
becomes
4 5
es es 1 1 es
1 sY (s) Y (s) = 2 Y (s) = 1 + = + .
s(s + 1) s(s2 + 1) s + 1 s + 1 s(s + 1)(s2 + 1)
Using partial fractions we express
4 5
1 s 1 1/2 (1/2)s 1/2
Y (s) = +e
s+1 s s + 1 s2 + 1 s2 + 1
472
Exercises 7.9
and so
4 5
1 1 1
y(t) = e + 1 e(t)
t
cos(t ) sin(t ) u(t )
2 2 2
4 5
1 1 1
= et + 1 e(t) + cos t + sin t u(t ).
2 2 2
Finally, 4 5
t 1 (t) 1 1
x(t) = y (t) = e e sin t + cos t u(t ).
2 2 2
15. First, note that the initial conditions are given at the point t = 1. Thus, for the Laplace
transform method, we have to shift the argument to get zero initial point. Let us denote
u(t) := x(t + 1) and v(t) := y(t + 1).
The chain rule yields
u (t) = x (t + 1)(t + 1) = x (t + 1), v (t) = y (t + 1)(t + 1) = y (t + 1).
In the original system, we substitute t + 1 for t to get
x (t + 1) 2y(t + 1) = 2,
x (t + 1) + x(t + 1) y (t + 1) = (t + 1)2 + 2(t + 1) 1,
and make u and v substitution. This yields
u(t) 2v(t) = 2,
u(t) + u(t) v (t) = (t + 1)2 + 2(t + 1) 1 = t2 + 4t + 2
with initial conditions u(0) = 1, v(0) = 0. Taking the Laplace transform and using formula
(2) on page 361 of the text, we obtain the system
2
[sU(s) 1] 2V (s) = ,
s
2 4 2
[sU(s) 1] + U(s) sV (s) = 3
+ 2+ ,
s s s
where U(s) = L {u} (s), V (s) = L {v} (s). Expressing
2V (s) 2 1
U(s) = + 2+
s s s
473
Chapter 7
from the first equation and substituting this into the second equation, we obtain
4 5 4 5
2 2V (s) 2 1 2 4 2
+ 2V (s) + + 2+ sV (s) = 3 + 2 + ,
s s s s s s s
which yields
1 2 2 1
2

V (s) = U(s) = 3 + 2 + .
s s s s
Applying now inverse Laplace transforms yields
6 7
2 2 1 1
u(t) = t + 2t + 1 = (t + 1) , v(t) = L (t) = t.
s2
Finally,
x(t) = u(t 1) = t2 and y(t) = v(t 1) = t 1.
17. As in Problem 15, first we make a shift in t to move the initial conditions to t = 0. Let
u(t) := x(t + 2) and v(t) := y(t + 2).
With t replaced by t + 2, the original system becomes
x (t + 2) + x(t + 2) y (t + 2) = 2tet ,
x (t + 2) x (t + 2) 2y(t + 2) = et
or
u(0) = 0,
u (t) + u(t) v (t) = 2tet ,
t
with u (0) = 1,
u (t) u (t) 2v(t) = e ,
v(0) = 1.
Applying the Laplace transform to these equations and expressing L {u }, L {u }, and L {v }
in terms of U = L {u} and V = L {v} (see formula (4) on page 362 of the text, we obtain
/ 0 2
[sU(s)] + U(s) [sV (s) 1] = 2L tet (s) = ,
(s 1)2
- . 1
s2 U(s) 1 [sU(s)] 2V (s) = .
s1
We multiply the first equation by 2, the second equation by s, and subtract the resulting
equations in order to eliminate V (s). Thus we get
- . s 4
s(s2 s) 2(s + 1) U(s) = s +2
s 1 (s 1)2
474
Exercises 7.9
) 3 * s3 s2 2s 2 1
s s2 2s 2 U(s) = U(s) = .
(s 1)2 (s 1)2
The inverse Laplace transform then yields
6 7
1 1
u(t) = L (t) = tet x(t) = u(t 2) = (t 2)et2 .
(s 1)2
We find y(t) from the second equation in the original system.
x (t) x (t) + et2 tet2 (t 1)et2 + et2
y(t) = = = et2 .
2 2
19. We first take the Laplace transform of both sides of all three of these equations and use the
initial conditions to obtain a system of equations for the Laplace transforms of the solution
functions:
sX(s) + 6 = 3X(s) + Y (s) 2Z(s),
sY (s) 2 = X(s) + 2Y (s) + Z(s),
sZ(s) + 12 = 4X(s) + Y (s) 3Z(s).
Simplifying yields
(s 3)X(s) Y (s) + 2Z(s) = 6,
X(s) + (s 2)Y (s) Z(s) = 2, (7.60)
4X(s) Y (s) + (s + 3)Z(s) = 12.
To solve this system, we will use substitution to eliminate the function Y (s). Therefore, we
solve for Y (s) in the first equation in (7.60) to obtain
Y (s) = (s 3)X(s) + 2Z(s) + 6.
Substituting this expression into the two remaining equations in (7.60) and simplifying yields
(s2 5s + 7)X(s) + (2s 5)Z(s) = 6s + 14,

(7.61)
(s + 1)X(s) + (s + 1)Z(s) = 6.
Next we will eliminate the function X(s) from the system given in (7.61). To do this we can
either multiply the first equation by (s + 1) and the second by (s2 5s + 7) and add, or we
can solve the last equation given in (7.61) for X(s) to obtain
6
X(s) = Z(s) + , (7.62)
s+1
475
Chapter 7
and substitute this into the first equation in (7.61). By either method we see that
12s2 + 38s 28 12s2 + 38s 28

Z(s) = = .
(s + 1)(s2 3s + 2) (s + 1)(s 2)(s 1)
Now, Z(s) has the partial fraction expansion

13 1
Z(s) = + .
s+1 s1
Therefore, by taking inverse Laplace transforms of both sides of this equation, we obtain
6 7
1 1 13 1
z(t) = L {Z(s)} (t) = L + (t) = 13et + et .
s+1 s1
To find X(s), we will use equation (7.62) and the expression found above for Z(s). Thus, we
have
6 13 1 6 7 1
X(s) = Z(s) + = + + = +
s+1 s + 1 s 6 1 s+1 s +71 s 1
7 1
x(t) = L1 {X(s)} (t) = L1 + (t) = 7et + et .
s+1 s1
To find y(t), we could substitute the expressions that we have already found for X(s) and
Z(s) into the Y (s) = (s 3)X(s) + 2Z(s) + 6, which we found above, or we could return to
the original system of dierential equations and use x(t) and z(t) to solve for y(t). For the
latter method, we solve the first equation in the original system for y(t) to obtain
y(t) = x (t) 3x(t) + 2z(t)

= 7et + et + 21et 3et 26et + 2et = 2et .
Therefore, the solution to the initial value problem is
x(t) = 7et + et , y(t) = 2et , z(t) = 13et + et .
21. We refer the reader to the discussion in Section 5.1 in obtaining the system (1) on page 242 of
the text governing interconnected tanks. All the arguments provided remain in force except
for the one aected by the new valve condition, which the formula for the input rate for
476
Exercises 7.9
the tank A. In Section 5.1, just fresh water was pumped into the tank A and so there was no
salt coming from outside of the system into the tank A . Now we have more complicated rule:
the incoming liquid is fresh water for the first 5 min, but then it changes to a solution having
a concentration 2 kg/L. This solution contributes additional
2 (kg/L) 6 (L/min) = 12 (kg/min)
to the input rate into the tank A. Thus, from the valve, we have
>
0, t < 5,
= 12u(t 5) (kg/min)
12, t > 5
of salt coming to the tank A. With this change, the system (1) in the text becomes
x = x/3 + y/12 + 12u(t 5),

(7.63)
y = x/3 y/3.
Also, we have the initial conditions x(0) = x0 = 0, y(0) = y0 = 4. Let X := L {x} and
Y := L {y}. Taking the Laplace transform of both equations in the system above, we get
1 1
L {x } (s) = X(s) + Y (s) + 12L {u(t 5)} (s),
3 12
1 1
L {y } (s) = X(s) Y (s).
3 3
Since L {u(t 5)} (s) = e5s /s and
L {x } (s) = sX(s) x(0) = sX(s),

L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s) 4,
we obtain
1 1 12e5s
sX(s) = X(s) + Y (s) + ,
3 12 s
1 1
sY (s) 4 = X(s) Y (s)
3 3
which simplifies to
144e5s
4(3s + 1)X(s) Y (s) = ,
s
X(s) + (3s + 1)Y (s) = 12.
477
Chapter 7
From the second equation in this system, we have X(s) = (3s + 1)Y (s) 12. Substitution
into the first equation yields
144e5s
4(3s + 1) [(3s + 1)Y (s) 12] Y (s) =
s
- . 144e5s
4(3s + 1)2 1 Y (s) = 48(3s + 1) + .
s
Note that
+ ,+ ,
2 1 1
4(3s + 1) 1 = [2(3s + 1) + 1] [2(3s + 1) 1] = (6s + 3)(6s + 1) = 36 s + s+ .
2 6
Therefore,
4(3s + 1) 4e5s
Y (s) = +
3(s + 1/2)(s + 1/6) s(s + 1/2)(s + 1/6)
4 5
2 2 5s 48 24 72
= + +e + ,
(s + 1/2) (s + 1/6) s s + 1/2 s + 1/6
where we have applied the partial fractions decomposition. Taking the inverse Laplace trans-
form and using Theorem 8 in Section 7.6 for the inverse Laplace transform of the term having
the exponential factor, we get
6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1
y(t) = 2L (t) + 2L (t)
(s + 1/2) (s + 1/6)
4 6 7 6 7 6 75
1 1 1 1 1 1
+ 48L + 24L 72L (t 5)u(t 5)
s s + 1/2 s + 1/6
- .
= 2et/2 + 2et/6 + 48 + 24e(t5)/2 72e(t5)/6 u(t 5).
From the second equation in (7.63), after some algebra, we find x(t).
- .
x(t) = 3y (t) + y = et/2 + et/6 + 48 12e(t5)/2 36e(t5)/6 u(t 5).
23. Recall that Kirchhos voltage law says that, in an electrical circuit consisting of an inductor
of L H, a resistor of R , a capacitor of C F, and a voltage source of E V,
EL + ER + EC = E, (7.64)
478
Exercises 7.9
where EL , ER , and EC denote the voltage drops across the inductor, resistor, and capacitor,
respectively. These voltage grops are given by
dI q
EL = L , ER := RI, EC := , (7.65)
dt C
where I denotes the current passing through the correspondent element.
Also, Kirchhos current law states that the algebraic sum of currents passing through any
point in an electrical network equals to zero.
The electrical network shown in Figure 7.28 consists of three closed circuits: loop 1 through
the battery, R1 = 2 resistor, L1 = 0.1 H inductor, and L2 = 0.2 H inductor; loop 2 through
the inductor L1 and R2 = 1 resistor; loop 3 through the battery, resistors R1 and R2 , and
inductor L2 . We apply Kirchhos voltage law (7.64) to two of these loops, say, the loop 1 and
the loop 2, and (since the equation obtained from Kirchhos voltage law for the third loop is
a linear combination of the other two) Kirchhos current law to one of the junction points,
say, the upper one. Thus, choosing the clockwise direction in the loops and using formulas
(7.65), we obtain
Loop 1:
ER1 + EL1 + EL2 = E 2I1 + 0.1I3 + 0.2I1 = 6;
Loop 2:
EL1 + ER2 = 0 0.1I3 I2 = 0
with the negative sign due to the counterclockwise direction of the current I2 in this loop;
Upper junction point:

I1 I2 I3 = 0.
Therefore, we have the following system for the currents I1 , I2 , and I3 :
2I1 + 0.1I3 + 0.2I1 = 6,

0.1I3 I2 = 0, (7.66)
I1 I2 I3 = 0
479
Chapter 7
with initial conditions I1 (0) = I2 (0) = I3 (0) = 0.
Let I1 (s) := L {I1 } (s), I2 (s) := L {I2 } (s), and I3 (s) := L {I3 } (s). Using the initial condi-
tions, we conclude that
L {I1 } (s) = sI1 (s) I1 (0) = sI1 (s),
L {I3 } (s) = sI3 (s) I3 (0) = sI3 (s).
Using these equations and taking the Laplace transform of the equations in (7.66), we come
up with
6
(0.2s + 2)I1 (s) + 0.1sI3(s) = ,
s
0.1sI3 (s) I2 (s) = 0,
I1 (s) I2 (s) I3 (s) = 0
Expressing I2 (s) = 0.1sI3 (s) from the second equation and substituting this into the third
equation, we get
I1 (s) 0.1sI3(s) I3 (s) = 0 I1 (s) = (0.1s + 1)I3 (s).
The latter, when substituted into the first equation, yields

6
(0.2s + 2)(0.1s + 1)I3 (s) + 0.1sI3 (s) =
s
- . 6
2(0.1s + 1)2 + 0.1s I3 (s) =
s
6 300
I3 (s) = = .
s[2(0.1s + 1)2 + 0.1s] s(s + 20)(s + 5)
We use the partial fractions decomposition to find that
3 1 4
I3 (s) = +
s s + 20 s + 5
and so 6 7
1 3 1 4
I3 (t) = L + (t) = 3 + e20t 4e5t .
s s + 20 s + 5
Now we can find I2 (t) using the second equation in (7.66).
) *
I2 (t) = 0.1I3 (t) = 0.1 3 + e20t 4e5t = 2e20t + 2e5t .
Finally, the third equation in (7.66) yields
I1 (t) = I2 (t) + I3 (t) = 3 e20t 2e5t .
480
Review Problems
1. By the definition of Laplace transform,
3 32 3
L {f } (s) = est f (t) dt = est (3) dt + est (6 t) dt.
0 0 2
For the first integral, we have
32 1t=2
st 3est 11 3(1 e2s )
e (3) dt = = .
s 1t=0 s
0
The second integral is an improper integral. Using integration by parts, we obtain

3 3M 1
st 1t=M 3M st
e 1 e
est (6 t) dt = lim est (6 t) dt = lim (6 t) 1 (1)dt
M M s t=2 s
2
L2 1 M 2
t=M
4e2s (6 M)esM est 1
= lim + 2 11
M s s s t=2
4 2s 5
4e (6 M)esM esM e2s 4e2s e2s
= lim + 2 2 = 2 .
M s s s s s s
Thus + ,
3(1 e2s ) 4e2s e2s 3 1 1
L {f } (s) = + 2 = + e2s 2 .
s s s s s s
3. From Table 7.1 on page 358 of the text, using the formula for the Laplace transform of eat tn
with n = 2 and a = 9, we get
/ 0 2! 2
L t2 e9t (s) = 3
= .
[s (9)] (s + 9)3
5. We use the linearity of the Laplace transform and Table 7.1 to obtain
/ 0 / 0 / 0 / 0
L e2t t3 + t2 sin 5t (s) = L e2t (s) L t3 (s) + L t2 (s) L {sin 5t} (s)
1 3! 2! 5 1 6 2 5
= 4+ 3 2 2
= 4+ 3 2 .
s2 s s s +5 s2 s s s + 25
481
Chapter 7
7. We apply Theorem 6 in Section 7.3 and obtain

4 5
d d s (s2 + 36) s(2s) s2 36
L {t cos 6t} (s) = L {cos 6t} (s) = = = .
ds ds s2 + 62 (s2 + 36)2 (s2 + 36)2
9. We apply formula (8), Section 7.6, on page 387 of the text and the linear property of the
Laplace transform to get
/ 0 / 0 / 0
L t2 u(t 4) (s) = e4s L (t + 4)2 (s) = e4s L t2 + 8s + 16 (s)
+ , + ,
4s 2 8 16 4s 1 4 8
= e + + = 2e + + .
s3 s2 s s3 s2 s
11. Using the linearity of the inverse Laplace transform and Table 7.1 we find
6 7 6 7
1 7 7 1 2! 7
L 3
(t) = L 3
(t) = t2 e3t .
(s + 3) 2! [s (3)] 2
13. We apply partial fractions to find the inverse Laplace transform. Since the quadratic poly-
nomial s2 + 4s + 13 = (s + 2)2 + 32 is irreducible, the partial fraction decomposition for the
given function has the form
4s2 + 13s + 19 A B(s + 2) + C(3)
= + .
(s 1)(s2 + 4s + 13) s1 (s + 2)2 + 32
4s2 + 13s + 19 = A[(s + 2)2 + 32 ] + [B(s + 2) + C(3)](s 1) .
With s = 1, this gives 36 = 18A or A = 2. Substituting s = 2, we get
9 = 9A 9C C = A 1 = 1.
Finally, with s = 0, we compute
19 = 13A + (2B + 3C)(1) B = 2.
Thus
4s2 + 13s + 19 2 2(s + 2) + (1)(3)
2
= + ,
(s 1)(s + 4s + 13) s1 (s + 2)2 + 32
482
Review Problems
and so
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 4s2 + 13s + 19 1 1 s+2
1
L (t) = 2L (t) + 2L (t)
(s 1)(s2 + 4s + 13) s1 (s + 2)2 + 32
6 7
1 3
+L (t)
(s + 2)2 + 32
= 2et + 2e2t cos 3t + e2t sin 3t .
15. The partial fraction decomposition for the given function has the form
2s2 + 3s 1 A B C A(s + 2) + B(s + 1)(s + 2) + C(s + 1)2
= + + = .
(s + 1)2 (s + 2) (s + 1)2 s + 1 s + 2 (s + 1)2 (s + 2)
Thus
2s2 + 3s 1 = A(s + 2) + B(s + 1)(s + 2) + C(s + 1)2 .
We evaluate both sides of this equation at s = 2, 1, and 0. This yields
s = 2 : 2(2)2 + 3(2) 1 = C(2 + 1)2 C = 1,

s = 1 : 2(1)2 + 3(1) 1 = A(1 + 2) A = 2,
s=0: 1 = 2A + 2B + C B = (1 2A C)/2 = 1.
Therefore,
6 7 6 7
1 2s2 + 3s 1 1 2 1 1
L 2
(t) = L 2
+ + (t) = 2tet + et + e2t .
(s + 1) (s + 2) (s + 1) s+1 s+2
17. First we apply Theorem 8 in Section 7.6 to get

6 2s 7 6 7
1 e (4s + 2) 1 4s + 2
L (t) = L (t 2)u(t 2). (7.67)
(s 1)(s + 2) (s 1)(s + 2)
Applying partial fractions yields
6 7
4s + 2 2 2 1 4s + 2
= + L (t) = 2et + 2e2t .
(s 1)(s + 2) s1 s+2 (s 1)(s + 2)
Therefore, it follows from (7.67) that

6 2s 7
1 e (4s + 2) - . ) *
L (t) = 2et2 + 2e2(t2) u(t 2) = 2et2 + 2e42t u(t 2).
(s 1)(s + 2)
483
Chapter 7
19. Applying the Laplace transform to both sides of the given equation and using the linearity of
the Laplace transform yields
L {y 7y + 10y} (s) = L {y } (s) 7L {y } (s) + 10L {y} (s) = 0. (7.68)
By Theorem 5 in Section 7.3,
L {y } (s) = sL {y} (s) y(0) = sL {y} (s),

L {y } (s) = s2 L {y} (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 L {y} (s) + 3,
where we have used the initial conditions, y(0) = 0 and y (0) = 3. Substituting these
expressions into (7.68), we get
- .
s2 L {y} (s) + 3 7 [sL {y} (s)] + 10L {y} (s) = 0
(s2 7s + 10)L {y} (s) + 3 = 0
3 3 1 1
L {y} (s) = 2 = = .
s 7s + 10 (s 2)(s 5) s2 s5
Thus
6 7 6 7 6 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
y(t) = L (t) = L (t) L (t) = e2t e5t .
s2 s5 s2 s5
21. Let Y (s) := L {y} (s). Taking the Laplace transform of the given equation and using proper-
ties of the Laplace transform, we obtain
/ 0 2 4 2 + 4s
L {y + 2y + 2y} (s) = L t2 + 4t (s) = 3 + 2 = .
s s s3
Since
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s), L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s) + 1,
we have
- 2 . 2 + 4s
s Y (s) + 1 + 2 [sY (s)] + 2Y (s) =
s3
2 + 4s 2 + 4s s3
(s2 + 2s + 2)Y (s) = 1 =
s3 s3
484
Review Problems
2 + 4s s3 2 + 4s s3
Y (s) = = .
s3 (s2 + 2s + 2) s3 [(s + 1)2 + 12 ]
The partial fraction decomposition for Y (s) has the form
2 + 4s s3 A B C D(s + 1) + E(1)
3 2 2
= 3+ 2+ + .
s [(s + 1) + 1 ] s s s (s + 1)2 + 12
Clearing fractions, we obtain
2 + 4s s3 = A[(s + 1)2 + 1] + Bs[(s + 1)2 + 1] + Cs2 [(s + 1)2 + 1] + [D(s + 1) + E]s3 .
Comparing coecients at the corresponding power of s in both sides of this equation yields
s0 : 2 = 2A A = 1,
1
s : 4 = 2A + 2B B = (4 2A)/2 = 1,
s2 : 0 = A + 2B + 2C C = (A + 2B)/2 = 3/2,
s4 : 0 = C + D D = C = 3/2,
3
s : 1 = B + 2C + D + E E = 1 B 2C D = 1/2.
Therefore,
1 1 3/2 (3/2)(s + 1) (1/2)(1)
Y (s) = 3
+ 2 + 2 2

s s s (s + 1) + 1 (s + 1)2 + 12
t2 3 3 1
y(t) = L1 {Y (s)} (t) = + t + et cos t et sin t .
2 2 2 2
23. By formula (4) in Section 7.6,

es
L {u(t 1)} (s) = .
s
Thus, applying the Laplace transform to both sides of the given equation and using the initial
conditions, we get
es
L {y + 3y + 4y} (s) =
s
- 2 . es
s Y (s) 1 + 3 [sY (s)] + 4Y (s) =
s
1 es
Y (s) = 2 +
s + 3s + 4 s(s2 + 3s + 4)
485
Chapter 7
1 1
Y (s) = + es ,
(s + 3/2)2 + ( 7/2)2 s[(s + 3/2)2 + ( 7/2)2 ]
where Y (s) := L {y} (s). To apply the inverse Laplace transform, we need the partial fraction
decomposition of the last fraction above.

1 A B(s + 3/2) + C( 7/2)
= + .
s[(s + 3/2)2 + ( 7/2)2 ] s (s + 3/2)2 + ( 7/2)2
Solving for A, B, and C yields
1 1 3
A= , B= , C= .
4 4 4 7
Therefore,
L M
1 1/4 (1/4)(s + 3/2) (3/4 7)( 7/2)
Y (s) = + es
(s + 3/2)2 + ( 7/2)2 s (s + 3/2)2 + ( 7/2)2 (s + 3/2)2 + ( 7/2)2
and the inverse Laplace transform gives

6 7
1 1
y(t) = L (t)
(s + 3/2)2 + ( 7/2)2
> O
1/4 (1/4)(s + 3/2) (3/4 7)( 7/2)
+L1 (t 1)u(t 1)
s (s + 3/2)2 + (7/4) (s + 3/2)2 + (7/4)
J K
2 3t/2 7t
= e sin
7 2
L J K J KM
1 1 3(t1)/2 7(t 1) 3 3(t1)/2 7(t 1)
+ e cos e sin u(t 1).
4 4 2 4 7 2
25. Let Y (s) := L {y} (s). Then, from the initial conditions, we have
L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s), L {y } (s) = s2 Y (s) sy(0) y (0) = s2 Y (s).
Moreover, Theorem 6 in Section 7.3 yields

d d
L {ty } (s) = L {y } (s) = [sY (s)] = sY (s) Y (s),
ds ds
d d - 2 .
L {ty } (s) = L {y } (s) = s Y (s) = s2 Y (s) 2sY (s).
ds ds
486
Review Problems
Hence, applying the Laplace transform to the given equation and using the linearity of the
Laplace transform, we obtain
L {ty + 2(t 1)y 2y} (s) = L {ty } (s) + 2L {ty } (s) 2L {y } (s) 2L {y} (s) = 0
- 2 .
s Y (s) 2sY (s) + 2 [sY (s) Y (s)] 2 [sY (s)] 2Y (s) = 0
4(s + 1)
s(s + 2)Y (s) 4(s + 1)Y (s) = 0 Y (s) + Y (s) = 0.
s(s + 2)
Separating variables and integrating yields
+ ,
dY 4(s + 1) 1 1
= ds = 2 + ds
Y s(s + 2) s s+2
ln |Y | = 2(ln |s| + ln |s + 2|) + C
eC c1
Y (s) = 2 2
= 2 ,
s (s + 2) s (s + 2)2
where c1 = 0 is an arbitrary constant. Allowing c1 = 0, we also get the solution Y (s) 0,

which was lost in separation of variables. Thus
4 5
c1 c1 1 1 1 1
Y (s) = 2 = + +
s (s + 2)2 4 s2 s (s + 2)2 s + 2
and so
c1 ) * ) *
y(t) = L1 {Y (s)} (t) = t 1 + te2t + e2t = c t 1 + te2t + e2t ,
4
where c = c1 /4 is an arbitrary constant.
27. Note that the original equation can be written in the form
y(t) + t y(t) = e3t .
Let Y (s) := L {y} (s). Applying the Laplace transform to both sides of this equation and
using Theorem 11 in Section 7.7, we obtain
/ 0
L {y(t) + t y(t)} (s) = Y (s) + L {t} (s)Y (s) = L e3t (s)
1 1 s2
Y (s) + 2 Y (s) = Y (s) = .
s s+3 (s + 3)(s2 + 1)
487
Chapter 7
The partial fraction decomposition for Y (s) has the form
s2 A Bs + C A(s2 + 1) + (Bs + C)(s + 3)

= + = .
(s + 3)(s2 + 1) s+3 s2 + 1 (s + 3)(s2 + 1)
Thus
s2 = A(s2 + 1) + (Bs + C)(s + 3).
Evaluating both sides of this equation at s = 3, 0, and 2 yields
s = 3 : 9 = A(10) A = 9/10,
s=0: 0 = A + 3C C = A/3 = 3/10,
s = 2 : 4 = 5A 2B + C B = (5A + C 4)/2 = 1/10.
Therefore,
9/10 (1/10)s 3/10

Y (s) = + 2 2
s+3 s +1 s +1
9 3t 1 3
y(t) = L1 {Y (s)} (t) = e + cos t sin t .
10 10 10
29. To find the transfer function, we use formula (15) on page 403 of the text. Comparing given
equation with (14), we find that a = 1, b = 5, and c = 6. Thus (15) yields
1 1
H(s) = = 2 .
as2 + bs + c s 5s + 6
The impulse response function h(t) is defined as L1 {H} (t). Using partial fractions, we see
that
1 1 1 1
H(s) = = =
s2 5s + 6 (s 3)(s 2) s3 s2
6 7
1 1
h(t) = L1 (t) = e3t e2t .
s3 s2
31. Let X(s) := L {x} (s), Y (s) := L {y} (s). Using the initial condition, we obtain
L {x } (s) = sX(s) x(0) = sX(s), L {y } (s) = sY (s) y(0) = sY (s).
488
Review Problems
Therefore, applying the Laplace transform to both sides of the equations in the given system
yields
sX(s) + Y (s) = L {0} (s) = 0,

1 e2s 1 e2s
X(s) + sY (s) = L {1 u(t 2)} (s) = = .
s s s
Expressing Y (s) = sX(s) from the first equation and substituting this into the second
equation, we eliminate Y (s):
1 e2s
X(s) s2 X(s) =
s
1 e2s 1 e2s
X(s) = 2 = .
s(s 1) s(s 1)(s + 1)
Since
1 1 1/2 1/2
= ,
s(s 1)(s + 1) s s1 s+1
the inverse Laplace transform yields
6 + ,7
1
) 2s
* 1 1/2 1/2
x(t) = L 1e (t)
s s1 s+1
6 7 6 7
1 1 1/2 1/2 1 1 1/2 1/2
= L (t) L (t 2)u(t 2)
s s1 s+1 s s1 s+1
4 5
et + et et2 + e(t2)
= 1 1 u(t 2) .
2 2
We now find y(t) from the first equation in the original system.
et et et2 e(t2)
y(t) = x (t) = u(t 2) .
2 2
489
Chapter 7
490
CHAPTER 8: Series Solutions of Dierential
Equations
EXERCISES 8.1: Introduction: The Taylor Polynomial Approximation, page 430
1. To find Taylor approximations

y (0) y (0) 2 y (0) 3
y(0) + x+ x + x + ,
1! 2! 3!
we need the values of y(0), y (0), y (0), etc. y(0) is provided by the initial condition, y(0) = 1.
Substituting x = 0 into the given dierential equation,
y (x) = x2 + y(x)2 , (8.1)
we obtain
y (0) = 02 + y(0)2 = 0 + 12 = 1.
Dierentiating both sides of (8.1) yields
y (x) = 2x + 2y(x)y (x),
and so
y (0) = 2(0) + 2y(0)y (0) = 0 + 2(1)(1) = 2.
Hence
1 2
y(x) = 1 + x + x2 + = 1 + x + x2 + .
1! 2!
3. Using the initial condition, y(0) = 0 we substitute x = 0 and y = 0 into the given equation
and find y (0).
y (0) = sin(0) + e0 = 1.
491
Chapter 8
To determine y (0), we dierentiate the given equation with respect to x and substitute x = 0,
y = 0, and y = 1 in the formula obtained:
y (0) = (sin y + ex ) = (sin y) + (ex ) = y cos y + ex ,

y (0) = 1 cos 0 + e0 = 2.
Similarly, dierentiating y (x) and substituting, we obtain

2
y = (y cos y + ex ) = (y cos y) + (ex ) = y cos y + (y ) ( sin y) + ex ,
2
y (0) = y (0) cos 0 + (y (0)) ( sin y(0)) + e0 = 2 cos 0 + (1)2 ( sin 0) + 1 = 3.
Thus the first three nonzero terms in the Taylor polynomial approximations to the solution
of the given initial value problem are
y (0) y (0) 2 y (0) 3
y(x) = y(0) + x+ x + x +
1! 2! 3!
1 2 3 1
= 0 + x + x2 + x3 + = x + x2 + x3 + .
1 2 6 2
5. We need the values of x(0), x (0), x (0), etc. The first two are given by the initial conditions:
x(0) = 1, x (0) = 0.
Writing the given equation in the form
x (t) = tx(t) (8.2)
we find that
x (0) = 0 x(0) = 0 1 = 0.
Dierentiating (8.2) and substituting t = 0 we conclude that
x (t) = [tx (t) + x(t)] x (0) = [0 x (0) + x(0)] = 1,

x(4) (t) = [tx (t) + 2x (t)] x(4) (0) = [0 x (0) + 2x (0)] = 0,
x(5) (t) = [tx (t) + 3x (t)] x(5) (0) = [0 x (0) + 3x (0)] = 0,
- . - .
x(6) (t) = tx(4) (t) + 4x (t) x(6) (0) = 0 x(4) (0) + 4x (0) = 4.
Therefore,
1 3 4 6 t3 t6
x(t) = 1 t + t + = 1 + + .
3! 6! 6 180
492
Exercises 8.1
7. We use the initial conditions to find y (0). Writing the given equation in the form
y () = y()3 + sin
and substituting = 0, y(0) = 0 we get
y (0) = y(0)3 + sin 0 = 0.
Dierentiating the given equation we obtain
) *
y = (y ) = y 3 + (sin ) = 3y 2 y + cos
y (0) = 3y(0)2y (0) + cos 0 = 3(0)2 (0) + 1 = 1.
Similarly, we get
2
y (4) = (y ) = 3y 2 y 6y (y ) sin
2
y (4) (0) = 3y(0)2 y (0) 6y(0) (y (0)) sin 0 = 0.
To simplify further computations we observe that since the Taylor expansion for y() has the
form
1 3
y() = + ,
3!
then the Taylor expansion for y()3 must begin with the term (1/3!)3 9 , so that
) *(k) 11
y()3 1 =0 for k = 0, 1, . . . , 8 .
=0
Hence
) *(3) ) *(3) 11
y (5) = y 3 cos y (5) (0) = y 3 1 cos 0 = 1,
1 =0
) *(4) ) *(4) 1
y (6) = y 3 + sin y (6) (0) = y 3 1 sin 0 = 0,
=0
) *(5) 1
) *(5) 1
y (7) = y 3 + cos y (7) (0) = y 3 1 + cos 0 = 1.
=0
Thus, the first three nonzero terms of the Taylor approximations are
1 3 1 1 1 1 5 1 7
y() = 5 + 7 + = 3 + +
3! 5! 7! 6 120 5040
493
Chapter 8
9. (a) To construct p3 (x) we need f (1), f (1), f (1), and f (1). Thus we have
f (x) = ln x f (1) = ln 1 = 0,
1
f (x) = x f (1) = (1)1 = 1,
f (x) = x2 f (1) = (1)2 = 1,
f (x) = 2x3 f (1) = 2(1)3 = 2,
and so
1 1 2
p3 (x) = 0 + (x 1) + (x 1)2 + (x 1)3
1! 2! 3!
(x 1)2 (x 1)3
= x1 + .
2 3
(b) To apply formula (6), we first compute
) *
f (4) (x) = [f (x)] = 2x3 = 6x4 .
Thus, the error formula (6) yields
f (4) () 6 4 (x 1)4
ln x p3 (x) =: e3 (x) = (x x0 )4 = (x 1)4 =
4! 24 4 4
1 1
1 (1.5 1)4 1 (0.5)4
|ln(1.5) p3 (1.5)| = 11 1=
1
4 4 4 4
(0.5)4 1
|ln(1.5) p3 (1.5)| = = 0.015625 ,
4 64
where we have used the fact > 1.
(c) Direct calculations yield

1 + ,1
1 (0.5)2 (0.5)3 11
1
|ln(1.5) p3 (1.5)| 10.405465 0.5
2
+
3 1 0.011202 .
(d) See Figure B.51 in the answers of the text.
11. First, we rewrite the given equation in the form
y = py qy + g.
494
Exercises 8.1
On the right-hand side of this equation, the function y is dierentiable (y exists) and the
functions y, p, q, and g are dierentiable (even twice). Thus we conclude that its left-hand
side, y , is dierentiable being the product, sum, and dierence of dierentiable functions.
Therefore, y = (y ) exists and is given by

y = (py qy + g) = p y py q y qy + g .
Similarly, we conclude that the right-hand side of the equation above is a dierentiable func-
tion since all the functions involved are dierentiable (notice that we have just proved the
dierentiability of y ). Hence, y , its left-hand side is dierentiable as well, i.e., (y ) = y (4)
does exist.
13. With form k = r = A = 1 and = 10, the Dungs equation becomes
y + y + y 3 = cos 10t or y = y y 3 + cos 10t.
Substituting the initial conditions, y(0) = 0 and y (0) = 1 into the latter equation yields
y (0) = y(0) y(0)3 + cos(10 0) = 0 (0)3 + cos 0 = 1.
Dierentiating the given equation, we conclude that

) *
y = y y 3 + cos 10t = y 3y 2 y 10 sin 10t,
which, at t = 0, gives
y (0) = y (0) 3y(0)2y (0) 10 sin(10 0) = 1 3(0)2 (1) 10 sin 0 = 1.
Thus, the Taylor polynomial approximations to the solution of the given initial value problem
are
y (0) y (0) 2 y (0) 3 1 1
y(t) = y(0) + t+ t + t + = t + t2 t3 + .
1! 2! 3! 2 6
15. For the Taylor polynomial p2 (x), we need y(0), y (0), and y (0). We already know y(0) and
y (0) from the initial conditions:
y(0) = 1 and y (0) = 0.
495
Chapter 8
Expressing y (x) from the given equation yields
2y (x) + xy(x)
y (x) = . (8.3)
x
The formal substitution of x = 0 in (8.3) gives 0/0indeterminate form. On the other hand,
since the dierentiability of a function implies its continuity, and we are given that y(x) has
derivatives of all orders at x = 0, we conclude that all the derivatives of y(x) are continuous
at x = 0. Therefore,
y (0) = lim y (x),
x0
and we can find the above limit by applying LHospitals rule. Namely,
4 5
2y (x) + xy(x)
y (0) = lim
x0 x
[2y (x) + xy(x)]

= lim = lim [2y (x) + xy (x) + y(x)] ,
x0 (x) x0
and the last limit can be found by substitution due to the continuity of y(x) and its derivatives
at x = 0. Hence,
y (0) = [2y (0) + 0 y (0) + y(0)] = 2y (0) 1.
Solving for y (0) yields y (0) = 1/3, and so
y (0) y (0) 2 x2
p2 (x) = y(0) + x+ x =1 .
1! 2! 6
EXERCISES 8.2: Power Series and Analytic Functions, page 438
1. Since an = 2n /(n + 1), the ratio test yields

1 1
1 an+1 1 (n+1)
21 (n + 1)
1
lim 1 1 = lim 2 /(n + 2)
= lim
1
= = L.
n an 1 n 2 n /(n + 1) n n+2 2
So, the radius of convergence is

1
= = 2.
L
496
Exercises 8.2
In this power series, x0 = 1. Hence, the endpoints of the interval of convergence are
x1 = x0 + = 1 + 2 = 3,
x2 = x0 = 1 2 = 1.
At the point x1 , the series becomes

H H
2n n 1
(3 1) = =
n=0
n+1 n=0
n+1
(harmonic series); at the point x2 we have

H H
2n n (1)n
(1 1) = <
n=0
n+1 n=0
n+1
by alternating series test. Therefore, the set of convergence is [1, 3).
3. We will use the ratio test given in Theorem 2 on page 432 of the text to find the radius of
convergence for this power series. Since an = n2 /2n , we see that
an+1 (n + 1)2 /2n+1 (n + 1)2
= = .
an n2 /2n 2n2
Therefore, we have
1 1 1 1 + ,2
1 an+1 1 1 (n + 1)2 1 1 (n + 1)2
1 1 1
lim 11 1 = lim 1
1 1 2
1=
1 lim 2
= lim 1 + = .
n an n 2n 2 n n 2 n n 2
Thus, the radius of convergence is = 2. Hence, this power series converges absolutely for
|x + 2| < 2. That is, for
2 < x + 2 < 2 or 4 < x < 0.
We must now check the end points of this interval. We first check the end point 4 or
x + 2 = 2 which yields the series

H
H
n2 (2)n
= (1)n n2 .
n=0
2n n=0
This series diverges since the nth term, an = (1)n n2 , does not approach zero as n goes to
infinity. (Recall that it is necessary for the nth term of a convergent series to approach zero
497
Chapter 8
as n goes to infinity. But this fact in itself does not prove that a series converges.) Next, we
check the end point x = 0 or x + 2 = 2 which yields the series

H
H
n2 2n
= n2 .
n=0
2n n=0
Again, as above, this series diverges. Therefore, this power series converges in the open interval
(4, 0) and diverges outside of this interval.
5. With an = 3/n3 , the ratio test gives

+ ,3 + ,3
3/(n + 1)3 n n
L = lim = lim = lim = 1.
n 3/n3 n n + 1 n n + 1
Therefore, the radius of convergence is = 1/L = 1. At the points x0 = 2 1, that is,

x = 3 and x = 1, we have the series
H
H
3 3(1)n
and ,
n=0
n3 n=0
n3
which are known to converge. Therefore, the set of convergence of the given series is the closed
interval [1, 3].
7. By writing

H
H
) *k H
a2k x2k = a2k x2 = bk z k ,
k=0 k=0 k=0
2
where bk := a2k and z := x , we obtain a power series centered at the origin. The ratio test
then yields the radius of convergence to be 1/L, where
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 bk+1 1 1 a2(k+1) 1 1 a2k+2 1
1
L = lim 1 1 = lim 1 1 = lim 1 1.
k bk 1 k 1 a2k 1 k 1 a2k 1
P
So, the series k 2
k=0 bk z converges for |z| < 1/L and diverges for |z| > 1/L. Since z = x ,
1 1 21
|z| < 1x 1 < 1
1
|x| < .
L L L

Hence, the original series converges for |x| < 1/ L and diverges for |x| > 1/ L. By the

definition, 1/ L is its radius of convergence.
498
Exercises 8.2
The second statement can be proved in a similar way, since

H
H
H
) *k
a2k+1 x2k+1 = x a2k+1 x2 = x bk z k ,
k=0 k=0 k=0
where bk := a2k+1 and z := x2 .
9. Since the addition of power series reduces to the addition of the coecients at the correspond-
ing powers of the variable, we make the following changes in indices of summation.
P
f (x) : n k f (x) = k=0 [1/(k + 1)] xk ,
P (k+1) k
g(x) : n 1 k g(x) = k=0 2 x .
Therefore,

H H H 4 5
1 k (k+1) k 1 k1
f (x) + g(x) = x + 2 x = +2 xk .
k=0
k+1 k=0 k=0
k+1
11. We want to find the product f (x)g(x) of the two series

H xn x2 x3 x4
f (x) = =1+x+ + + + ,
n=0
n! 2 6 24
and
4
H 5
(1)k x3 x5 x7
g(x) = sin x = x2k+1 = x + + .
(2k + 1)! 6 120 7!
k=0
Therefore, we have
+ ,+ ,
x2 x3 x4 x3 x5 x7
f (x)g(x) = 1+x+ + + + x + +
2 6 24 6 120 7!
+ , + , + ,
2 1 1 3 1 1 4 1 1 1
= x+x + x + x + + x5 +
2 6 6 6 24 12 120
1
= x + x2 + + x3 + .
3
Note that since the radius of convergence for both of the given series is = , the expansion
of the product f (x)g(x) also converges for all values of x.
499
Chapter 8
13. Using formula (6) on page 434 of the text, we obtain

L ML M
H (1)n H
f (x)g(x) = xn (1)n xn
n!
+n=0 n=0
,
1 2 1 3 ) *
= 1 x + x x + 1 x + x2 x3 +
2 6
4 + , 5
1
= (1)(1) + [(1)(1) + (1)(1)] x + (1)(1) + (1)(1) + (1) x2 +
2
5
= 1 2x + x2 +
2
P n
P
15. (a) Let q(x) = n=0 an x . Multiplying both sides of the given equation by n=0 xn /n!, we
obtain J KJ K

H H H
n 1 n 1 n
an x x = x .
n=0 n=0
n! n=0
2n
P P
Thus, the right-hand side, n=0 xn /2n , is the Cauchy product of q(x) and n
n=0 x /n!.
(b) With cn = 1/2n and bn = 1/n!, formula (6) on page 434 of the text yields:
1 1
n=0: = c0 = a0 b0 = a0 = a0 ;
20 0!
1 1 1
n=1: = c1 = a0 b1 + a1 b0 = a0 + a1 = a0 + a1 ;
21 1! 0!
1 1 1 1 a0
n=2: = c2 = a0 b2 + a1 b1 + a2 b0 = a0 + a1 + a2 = + a1 + a2 ;
22 2! 1! 0! 2
1 a0 a1
n=3: = c3 = a0 b3 + a1 b2 + a2 b1 + a3 b0 = + + a2 + a3 ;
23 6 2
etc.
(c) The system in (b) simplifies to
1 = a0 , a0 = 1 ,
1/2 = a0 + a1 , a1 = 1/2 a0 = 1/2 ,
1/4 = a0 /2 + a1 + a2 , a2 = 1/4 a0 /2 a1 = 1/4 ,
1/8 = a0 /6 + a1 /2 + a2 + a3 , a3 = 1/8 a0 /6 a1 /2 a2 = 1/24 ,
.. ..
. .
500
Exercises 8.2
Thus,
1 1 1 3
q(x) = 1 x + x2 x + .
2 4 24
17. Since 1 1 1 1
1 an+1 1 1 (1)n+1 1
lim 1 1 1
= lim 1 1 = lim 1 = 1,
n 1 an 1 n (1)n 1 n
by the ratio test, we find the radius of convergence of the given series to be = 1/1 = 1 > 0.
Therefore, Theorem 4 of page 434 of the text can be applied. This yields

H
H
- .
1 n n1 2
(1 + x) = (1) nx (1 + x) = (1)n nxn1 ,
n=1 n=1
and the radius of convergence of this series is also = 1.
19. Here we will assume that this series has a positive radius of convergence. Thus, since we have

H
f (x) = an xn = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + a3 x3 + + an xn + ,
n=0
we can dierentiate term by term to obtain

H
2 n1
f (x) = 0 + a1 + a2 2x + a3 3x + + an nx + = an nxn1 .
n=1
Note that the summation for f (x) starts at zero while the summation for f (x) starts at one.
21. Using the ratio test, we find that the radius of convergence of the given series is
1 1
= n+1 n
= = 1 > 0.
limn |(1) /(1) | 1
Thus, by Theorem 4 on page 434 of the text,

3x 3x LH

M
g(x) = f (t) dt = (1)n tn dt
0 0 n=0
3x 1x
H H 1 1 H (1)n n+1
n n nn+1 1
= (1) t dt = (1) t 1 = x .
n=0 n=0
n + 1 0 n=0
n + 1
0
501
Chapter 8
On the other hand,

3x 1x
dt 1
g(x) = = ln(1 + t) 1 = ln(1 + x), x (1, 1).
1+t 0
0
23. Setting k = n 1, we have n = k + 1. Note that k = 0 when n = 1. Hence, substitution into

the given series yields

H
H
n1
nan x = (k + 1)ak+1 xk .
n=1 k=0
25. We let n + 1 = k so that n = k 1; when n = 0, then k = 1. Thus,

H
H
n+1
an x = ak1 xk .
n=0 k=1
27. Termwise multiplication yields

H
H
H
2 n n 2
x n(n + 1)an x = n(n + 1)an x x = n(n + 1)an xn+2 .
n=0 n=0 n=0
Now we can shift the summation index by letting k = n + 2. Then we have n = k 2,

n + 1 = k 1, k = 2 when n = 0, and so

H
H
n+2
n(n + 1)an x = (k 2)(k 1)ak2xk .
n=0 k=2
By replacing k by n, we obtain the desired form.
29. We need to determine the nth derivative of f (x) at the point x = . Thus, we observe that
f (x) = f (0) (x) = cos x f () = f (0) () = cos = 1,

f (x) = sin x f () = sin = 0,
f (x) = cos x f () = cos = 1,
f (x) = sin x f () = sin = 0,
f (4) (x) = cos x f (4) () = cos = 1.
Since f (4) (x) = cos x = f (x), the four derivatives given above will be repeated indefinitely.
Thus, we see that f (n) () = 0 if n is odd and f (n) () = 1 if n is even (where the signs
502
Exercises 8.2
alternate starting at 1 when n = 0). Therefore, the Taylor series for f about the point
x0 = is given by
1 1 (1)n+1 (x )2n
f (x) = 1 + 0 + (x )2 + 0 (x )4 + + +
2! 4! (2n)!

H (1)n+1 (x )2n
= .
n=0
(2n)!
31. Writing
1+x (1 x) + 2x 1
f (x) = = = 1 + 2x ,
1x 1x 1x
we can use the power series expansion (3) on page 433 of the text (geometric series) to obtain
the desired Taylor series. Thus we have
H H
1 k
f (x) = 1 + 2x = 1 + 2x x =1+ 2xk+1 .
1x k=0 k=0
Shifting the summation index, that is, letting k + 1 = n, yields

H
H
k+1
f (x) = 1 + 2x =1+ 2xn .
k=0 n=1
33. Using the formula

f (j) (x0 )
cj =
j!
for the coecients of the Taylor series for f (x) about x0 , we find
1
f (x0 ) = x3 + 3x 4 1x=1 = 0 c0 = 0,
1
f (x0 ) = 3x2 + 3 1x=1 = 6 c1 = 6/1! = 6,
1
f (x0 ) = 6x 1x=1 = 6 c2 = 6/2! = 3,
f (x) 6 c3 = 6/3! = 1,
(j)
f (x) 0 cj = 0 for j 4.
Therefore,
x3 + 3x 4 = 6(x 1) + 3(x 1)2 + (x 1)3 .
503
Chapter 8
35. (a) We have

1 1 1
= = , where s = (x 1).
x 1 + (x 1) 1s
P
Since 1/(1 s) = n
n=0 s , the substitution s = (x 1) into both sides of this equality
yields the expansion

H
H H
1 1
= = sn = [(x 1)]n = (1)n (x 1)n ,
x 1 s n=0 n=0 n=0
which is valid for

|s| = |x 1| < 1 0 < x < 2.
(b) Since the above series has positive radius of convergence = 1, Theorem 4 on page 434
of the text can be applied. Hence, for 0 < x < 2,
3x 3x LH
M
H 3x
1 n n n
ln x = dt = (1) (t 1) dt = (1) (t 1)n dt
t n=0 n=0
1 1 1
1x
H 1 1 H (1) n H (1)k1
n n+1 1 n+1
= (1) (t 1) 1 = (x 1) = (x 1)k .
n=0
n + 1 1 n=0
n + 1 k=1
k
37. For n = 0, f (0) (0) := f (0) = 0 by the definition of f (x).
To find f (0), we use the definition of the derivative.

2
f (x) f (0) e1/x
f (0) = lim = lim . (8.4)
x0 x0 x0 x
We compute left-hand and right-hand side limits by making the substitution t = 1/x. Note
that t + when x 0+ and t when x 0 . Thus we have
2
e1/x 2 t 1
lim = lim tet = lim t2 = lim 2 = 0,
x0 x t t e t 2tet
where we applied LHospitals rule to the indeterminate form /. Therefore, the limit in
(8.4) exists and equals 0. For any x = 0,
# % + ,
1/x2 1/x2 1 2 2
f (x) = e =e 2 = 3 e1/x .
x x
504
Exercises 8.3
Next, we proceed by induction. Assuming that, for some n 1,

+ ,
(n) (n) 1 1/x2
f (0) = 0 and f (x) = p e , x = 0,
x
where p(t) is a polynomial in t, we show that
+ ,
(n+1) (n+1) 1 1/x2
f (0) = 0 and f (x) = q e , x = 0,
x
where q(t) is a polynomial in t. This will imply that f (n) (0) = 0 for all n 0.
Indeed, the substitution t = 1/x in the one-sided limits yields

2
f (n) (x) f (n) (0) p(1/x)e1/x tp(t) r(t)
lim = lim = lim t2 = lim t2 ,
x0 x0 x0 x t e t e
where r(t) = a0 tk + + ak is a polynomial. Applying the LHospitals rule k times, we obtain

r(t) r (t) r (t)
lim 2 = lim = lim 2
t et t (et2 ) t 2tet
r (t) k!a0
= lim 2 = = lim 2 = 0.
t (4t2 + 2)et t (2k tk + )et
Since both one-sided limits exist and are equal, the regular limit exists and equals to the same
number. That is,
f (n) (x) f (n) (0)
f (n+1) (0) = lim = 0.
x0 x0
For any x = 0,
4 + , 5 4 + , + , 5 + ,4 + , 5
(n+1) 1 1/x2 1 1 1/x2 1 1/x2 1
f (x) = p e = p e +p e 2
x x x x x
4 + , + , 5 + ,
1 1 1 2 1/x2 1 1/x2
= p + p e = q e ,
x x2 x x3 x
where q(t) = p (t)t2 + p(t)2t3 .
EXERCISES 8.3: Power Series Solutions to Linear Dierential Equations, page 449
1. Dividing the given equation by (x + 1) yields

x2 3
y y + y = 0.
x+1 x+1
505
Chapter 8
Thus we see that

x2 3
p(x) = , q(x) = .
x+1 x+1
These are rational functions and so they are analytic everywhere except, perhaps, at zeros
of their denominators. Solving x + 1 = 0, we find that x = 1, which is a point of infinite
discontinuity for both functions. Consequently, x = 1 is the only singular point of the given
equation.
3. Writing the equation in standard form yields

2 sin
y + y + 2 y = 0.
2 2 2
The coecients
2 sin
p() = and q() =
2 2 2 2

are quotients of analytic functions, and so they are analytic everywhere except zeros = 2
of the denominator where they have infinite discontinuities. Hence, the given equation has

two singular points, = 2.
5. In standard form, the equation becomes

t+1 t2
x + x 2 x = 0.
t2 t2 t t2
Hence
t+1 t+1 t2 t2
p(t) = = , q(t) = = .
t2 t2 (t + 1)(t 2) t2 t2 (t + 1)(t 2)
The point t = 1 is a removable singularity for p(t) since, for t = 1, we can cancel (t+1)-term
in the numerator and denominator, and so p(t) becomes analytic at t = 1 if we set
1 1
p(1) := lim p(t) = lim = .
t1 t1 t2 3
At the point t = 2, p(t) has infinite discontinuity. Thus p(t) is analytic everywhere except
t = 2. Similarly, q(t) is analytic everywhere except t = 1. Therefore, the given equation has
two singular points, t = 1 and t = 2.
506
Exercises 8.3
7. In standard form, this equation becomes

# cos x %
y + y = 0.
sin x
Thus, p(x) = 0 and, hence, is analytic everywhere. We also see that
cos x
q(x) = = cot x.
sin x
Note that q(x) is the quotient of two functions (cos x and sin x) that each have a power series
expansion with a positive radius of convergence about each real number x. Thus, according to
page 434 of the text, we see that q(x) will also have a power series expansion with a positive
radius of convergence about every real number x as long as the denominator, sin x, is not
equal to zero. Since the cotangent function is at integer multiples of , we see that q(x)
is not defined and, therefore, not analytic at n. Hence, the dierential equation is singular
only at the points n, where n is an integer.
9. Dividing the dierential equation by sin , we get

ln
y y = 0.
sin
Thus, p() 0 and q() = ln / sin . The function q() is not defined for 0 because
of the logarithmic term and has infinite discontinuities at positive zeros of the denominator.
Namely,
sin = 0 = k, k = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
At all other points , q() is analytic as a quotient of two analytic functions. Hence, the
singular points of the given equation are
0 and = k, k = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
11. The coecient, x + 2, is a polynomial, and so it is analytic everywhere. Therefore, x = 0 is

an ordinary point of the given equation. We seek a power series solution of the form

H
H
n
y(x) = an x y (x) = nan xn1 ,
n=0 n=1
507
Chapter 8
where we have applied Theorem 4 on page 434 of the text to find the power series expansion
of y (x). We now substitute the power series for y and y into the given dierential equation
and obtain

H
H
n1
nan x + (x + 2) an xn = 0
n=1 n=0

H H
H
n1 n
nan x + 2an x + an xn+1 = 0. (8.5)
n=1 n=0 n=0
To sum these series, we make shifts in indices of summation so that they sum over the same
power of x. In the first sum, we set k = n 1 so that n = k + 1 and k runs from 0 to ; in
the second sum, we just replace n by k; in the third sum, we let k = n + 1 and so n = k 1,
and the summation starts from 1. Thus the equation (8.5) becomes

H
H
H
k k
(k + 1)ak+1 x + 2ak x + ak1 xk = 0
k=0 k=0
L
Mk=1L
M
H H H
k k
a1 + (k + 1)ak+1 x + 2a0 + 2ak x + ak1 xk = 0
k=1 k=1 k=1

H
(a1 + 2a0 ) + [(k + 1)ak+1 + 2ak + ak1 ] xk = 0.
k=1
For the power series on the left-hand side to be identically zero, we must have all zero coe-
cients. Hence,
a1 + 2a0 = 0 and (k + 1)ak+1 + 2ak + ak1 = 0 for all k 1.
This yields
a1 + 2a0 = 0 a1 = 2a0 ,
k = 1 : 2a2 + 2a1 + a0 = 0 a2 = (2a1 a0 ) /2 = (4a0 a0 ) /2 = 3a0 /2 ,
k = 2 : 3a3 + 2a2 + a1 = 0 a3 = (2a2 a1 ) /3 = (3a0 + 2a0 ) /3 = a0 /3 ,
..
.
Therefore,
+ ,
3a0 2 a0 3 3x2 x3
y(x) = a0 2a0 x + x x + = a0 1 2x + + ,
2 3 2 3
where a0 is an arbitrary constant (which is, actually, y(0)).
508
Exercises 8.3
13. This equation has no singular points since the coecients p(x) 0 and q(x) = x2 are
analytic everywhere. So, let

H
H
H
k k1
z(x) = ak x z (x) = kak x z (x) = k(k 1)ak xk2 ,
k=0 k=1 k=2
where we used Theorem 4 on page 434 of the text dierentiating the series termwise. Substi-
tution z and z into the given equation yields

H
H
H
H
z x2 z = k(k 1)ak xk2 x2 ak xk = k(k 1)ak xk2 ak xk+2 .
k=2 k=0 k=2 k=0
We now shift indices of summation so that they sum over the same power of x. For the first
sum, we substitute n = k 2 so that k = n + 2, k 1 = n + 1, and the summation starts
from n = 0. In the second summation, we let n = k + 2 which yields k = n 2 and n = 2 as
the starting index. Thus we obtain

H
H
2 n
z x z = (n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 x an2 xn .
n=0 n=2
Next step in writing the right-hand side as a single power series is to start both summations
at the same point. To do this we observe that

H
H
H
H
n n n
(n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 x an2 x = 2a2 + 6a3 x + (n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 x an2 xn
n=0 n=2 n=2 n=2
H
= 2a2 + 6a3 x + [(n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 an2 ] xn .
n=2
In order for this power series to equal zero, each coecient must be zero. Therefore, we obtain
2a2 = 0, 6a3 = 0 and (n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 an2 = 0, n 2.
From the first two equations we find that a2 = 0 and a3 = 0. Next we take n = 2 and n = 3
in the above recurrence relation and get
n = 2 : (4)(3)a4 a0 = 0 a4 = a0 /12 ,
n = 3 : (5)(4)a5 a1 = 0 a5 = a1 /20 .
509
Chapter 8
Hence,

H a0 4 a1 5
z(x) = ak xk = a0 + a1 x + (0)x2 + (0)x3 + x + x +
12 20
k=0
+ , + ,
x4 x5
= a0 1 + + + a1 x + + .
12 20
15. Zero is an ordinary point for this equation since the functions p(x) = x 1 and q(x) = 1
are both analytic everywhere and, hence, at the point x = 0. Thus, we can assume that the
solution to this linear dierential equation has a power series expansion with a positive radius
of convergence about the point x = 0. That is, we assume that

H
y(x) = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + a3 x3 + = an xn .
n=0
In order to solve the dierential equation we must find the coecients an . To do this, we must
substitute y(x) and its derivatives into the given dierential equation. Hence, we must find
y (x) and y (x). Since y(x) has a power series expansion with a positive radius of convergence
about the point x = 0, we can find its derivative by dierentiating term by term. We can
similarly dierentiate y (x) to find y (x). Thus, we have

H
2
y (x) = 0 + a1 + 2a2 x + 3a3 x + = nan xn1
n=1

H
y (x) = 2a2 + 6a3 x + = n(n 1)an xn2 .
n=2
By substituting these expressions into the dierential equation, we obtain

H
H
H
n2 n1
y + (x 1)y + y = n(n 1)an x + (x 1) nan x + an xn = 0.
n=2 n=1 n=0
Simplifying yields

H
H
H
H
n2 n n1
n(n 1)an x + nan x nan x + an xn = 0. (8.6)
n=2 n=1 n=1 n=0
We want to be able to write the left-hand side of this equation as a single power series. This
will allow us to find expressions for the coecient of each power of x. Therefore, we first need
510
Exercises 8.3
to shift the indices in each power series above so that they sum over the same powers of x.
Thus, we let k = n 2 in the first summation and note that this means that n = k + 2 and
that k = 0 when n = 2. This yields

H
H
n2
n(n 1)an x = (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 xk .
n=2 k=0
In the third power series, we let k = n 1 which implies that n = k + 1 and k = 0 when
n = 1. Thus, we see that

H
H
n1
nan x = (k + 1)ak+1 xk .
n=1 k=0
For the second and last power series we need only to replace n with k. Substituting all of
these expressions into their appropriate places in equation (8.6) above yields

H
H
H
H
k k k
(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 x + kak x (k + 1)ak+1 x + ak xk = 0.
k=0 k=1 k=0 k=0
Our next step in writing the left-hand side as a single power series is to start all of the
summations at the same point. To do this we observe that

H
H
k 0
(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 x = (2)(1)a2 x + (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 xk ,
k=0 k=1
H
H
(k + 1)ak+1 xk = (1)a1 x0 + (k + 1)ak+1 xk ,
k=0 k=1

H
H
ak xk = a0 x0 + ak xk .
k=0 k=1
Thus, all of the summations now start at one. Therefore, we have

H
H
0 k
(2)(1)a2 x + (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 x + kak xk
k=1 k=1

H
H
(1)a1 x0 (k + 1)ak+1xk + a0 x0 + ak xk = 0
k=1 k=1

H ) *
2a2 a1 + a0 + (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 xk + kak xk (k + 1)ak+1 xk + ak xk = 0
k=1
511
Chapter 8

H
2a2 a1 + a0 + ((k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 + (k + 1)ak (k + 1)ak+1 ) xk = 0.
k=1
In order for this power series to equal zero, each coecient must be zero. Therefore, we obtain
a1 a0
2a2 a1 + a0 = 0 a2 = ,
2
and
(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 + (k + 1)ak (k + 1)ak+1 = 0, k1

ak+1 ak
ak+2 = , k 1,
k+2
where we have canceled the factor (k + 1) from the recurrence relation, the last equation
obtained above. Note that in this recurrence relation we have solved for the coecient with
the largest subscript, namely ak+2 . Also, note that the first value for k in the recurrence
relation is the same as the first value for k used in the summation notation. By using the
recurrence relation with k = 1, we find that
a1 a0
a2 a1 a1 (a1 + a0 )
a3 = = 2 = ,
3 3 6
where we have plugged in the expression for a2 that we found above. By letting k = 2 in the
recurrence equation, we obtain
(a1 + a0 ) a1 a0
a3 a2 2a1 + a0 )
a4 = = 6 2 = ,
4 4 12
where we have plugged in the values for a2 and a3 found above. Continuing this process will
allow us to find as many coecients for the power series of the solution to the dierential
equation as we may want. Notice that the coecients just found involve only the variables a0
and a1 . From the recurrence equation, we see that this will be the case for all coecients of the
power series solution. Thus, a0 and a1 are arbitrary constants and these variables will be our
arbitrary variables in the general solution. Hence, substituting the values for the coecients
that we found above into the solution
H
y(x) = an xn = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + a3 x3 + a4 x4 + ,
n=0
512
Exercises 8.3
yields the solution

a1 a0 2 (a1 + a0 ) 3 2a1 + a0 4
y(x) = a0 + a1 x + x + x + x +
+ 2 ,6 + 12 ,
x2 x3 x4 x2 x3 x4
= a0 1 + + + a1 x + + .
2 6 12 2 6 6
19. Since x = 0 is an ordinary point for the given equation, we seek for a power series expansion
of a general solution of the form

H
H
n
y(x) = an x y (x) = nan xn1 .
n=0 n=1
Substituting y(x) and y (x) into the given equation, we obtain

H
H
H
H
n1 n n1
nan x 2x an x = nan x 2an xn+1 = 0.
n=1 n=0 n=1 n=0
We shift the indices of summations so that they sum over the same powers of x. In the first
sum, we let k = n 1. Then n = k + 1 and the summation starts from k = 0. In the second
sum, let k = n + 1. Then n = k 1 and k = 1 when n = 0. Thus we have

H
H
H
k k
(k + 1)ak+1x 2ak1x = a1 + [(k + 1)ak+1 2ak1 ]xk = 0.
k=0 k=1 k=1
In order for this power series to equal zero, each coecient must be zero. That is,
a1 = 0, a1 = 0,

(k + 1)ak+1 2ak1 = 0, k1 ak+1 = 2ak1 /(k + 1) , k 1.
Since a1 = 0, it follows from this recurrence relation that all odd coecients are zeros. Indeed,
2a1 2a3
a3 = = 0, a5 = = 0, etc.
3 5
For even coecients, we have
k = 1 : a2 = 2a0 /2 ,
k = 3 : a4 = 2a2 /4 = 2[2a0 /2]/4 = 22 a0 /(2 4) ,
k = 5 : a6 = 2a4 /6 = 2[22 a0 /(2 4)]/6 = 23 a0 /(2 4 6) ,
..
.
513
Chapter 8
The pattern for the even coecients is now apparent. Namely,

2k a0 2k a0 a0
a2k = = k = , k = 1, 2, . . . .
2 4 (2k) 2 (1 2 k) k!
This formula remains correct for k = 0 as well with 0! := 1. Thus

H
H
a0 x2k
y(x) = x2k = a0 ,
k=0
k! k=0
k!
where a0 is an arbitrary constant.
21. Since x = 0 is an ordinary point for this dierential equation, we will assume that the solution
has a power series expansion with a positive radius of convergence about the point x = 0.
Thus, we have

H
H
H
n n1
y(x) = an x y (x) = nan x y (x) = n(n 1)an xn2 .
n=0 n=1 n=2
By plugging these expressions into the dierential equation, we obtain

H
H
H
n2 n1
y xy + 4y = n(n 1)an x x nan x +4 an xn = 0
n=2 n=1 n=0

H
H H
n(n 1)an xn2 nan xn + 4an xn = 0.
n=2 n=1 n=0
In order for each power series to sum over the same powers of x, we will shift the index in
the first summation by letting k = n 2, and we will let k = n in the other two power series.
Thus, we have

H
H
H
k k
(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2x kak x + 4ak xk = 0.
k=0 k=1 k=0
Next we want all of the summations to start at the same point. Therefore, we will take the
first term in the first and last power series out of the summation sign. This yields

H
H
H
(2)(1)a2 x0 + (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 xk kak xk + 4a0 x0 + 4ak xk = 0
k=1 k=1 k=1

H
H
H
2a2 + 4a0 + (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 xk kak xk + 4ak xk = 0
k=1 k=1 k=1
514
Exercises 8.3

H
2a2 + 4a0 + [(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 + (k + 4)ak ] xk = 0.
k=1
By setting each coecient of the power series equal to zero, we see that
4a0
2a2 + 4a0 = 0 a2 = = 2a0 ,
2
(k 4)ak
(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 + (k + 4)ak = 0 ak+2 = , k 1,
(k + 2)(k + 1)
where we have solved the recurrence equation, the last equation above, for ak+2 , the coecient
with the largest subscript. Thus, we have
3a1 a1
k=1 a3 = = ,
32 2
2a2 (2)(4)a0 a0
k=2 a4 = = = ,
43 432 3
a3 (3)(1)a1 a1
k=3 a5 = = = ,
54 5432 40
k=4 a6 = 0,
a5 (3)(1)(1)a1 a1
k=5 a7 = = = ,
76 765432 560
2a6
k=6 a8 = = 0,
87
3a7 (3)(1)(1)(3)a1
k=7 a9 = = ,
98 9!
4a8
k=8 a10 = = 0,
10 9
5a9 (3)(1)(1)(3)(5)a1
k=9 a11 = = .
11 10 11!
Now we can see a pattern starting to develop. (Note that it is easier to determine sucha pattern
if we consider specific coecients that have not been multiplied out.) We first note that a0 and
a1 can be chosen arbitrarily. Next we notice that the coecients with even subscripts larger
than 4 are zero. We also see that the general formula for a coecient with an odd subscript
is given by
(3)(1)(1) (2n 5)a1
a2n+1 = .
(2n + 1)!
515
Chapter 8
Notice that this formula is also valid for a3 and a5 . Substituting these expressions for the
coecients into the solution

H
y(x) = an xn = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + a3 x3 + a4 x4 + ,
n=0
yields
a1 3 a0 4 a1 5
y(x) = a0 + a1 x 2a0 x2 x + x + x +
2 3 40
(3)(1)(1) (2n 5)a1 2n+1
+ x +
(2n + 1)!
4 5 4 5
2 x4 x3 x5 (3)(1)(1) (2n 5) 2n+1
= a0 1 2x + + a1 x + ++ x +
3 2 40 (2n + 1)!
4 5 L
M
x4 H (3)(1)(1) (2k 5) 2k+1
2
= a0 1 2x + + a1 x + x .
3 k=1
(2k + 1)!
29. Since x = 0 is an ordinary point for this dierential equation, we can assume that a solution
to this problem is given by

H
H
H
n n1
n=0 n=1 n=2
By substituting the initial conditions, y(0) = 1 and y (0) = 2, into the first two equations
above, we see that
y(0) = a0 = 1, and y (0) = a1 = 2.
Next we will substitute the expressions found above for y(x), y (x), and y (x) into the dier-
ential equation to obtain

H
H
H
n2 n1
y + y xy = n(n 1)an x + nan x x an xn = 0
n=2 n=1 n=0

H
H
H
n(n 1)an xn2 + nan xn1 an xn+1 = 0.
n=2 n=1 n=0
By setting k = n 2 in the first power series above, k = n 1 in the second power series
above, and k = n + 1 in the last power series, we can shift the indices so that x is raised to
516
Exercises 8.3
the power k in each power series. Thus, we obtain

H
H
H
k k
(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2x + (k + 1)ak+1 x ak1 xk = 0.
k=0 k=0 k=1
We can start all of the summations at the same point if we remove the first term from each
of the first two power series above. Therefore, we have

H
H
H
(2)(1)a2 + (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2xk + (1)a1 + (k + 1)ak+1 xk ak1 xk = 0
k=1 k=1 k=1

H
2a2 + a1 + [(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 + (k + 1)ak+1 ak1 ] xk = 0.
k=1
By equating coecients, we see that all of the coecients of the terms in the power series
above must be zero. Thus, we have
a1
2a2 + a1 = 0 a2 = ,
2
(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 + (k + 1)ak+1 ak1 = 0
ak1 (k + 1)ak+1
ak+1 = , k 1.
(k + 2)(k + 1)
Thus, we see that
a0 2a2 a0 a1
k=1 =
a3 = + .
32 6 6
Using the fact that a0 = 1 and a1 = 2, which we found from the initial conditions, we
calculate
(2)
a2 = = 1,
2
1 2 1
a3 = + = .
6 6 6
By substituting these coecients, we obtain the cubic polynomial approximation
x3
y(x) = 1 2x + x2 .
6
The graphs of the linear, quadratic and cubic polynomial approximations are easily generated
by using the software supplied with the text.
517
Chapter 8
31. The point x0 = 0 is an ordinary point for the given equation since p(x) = 2x/(x2 + 2) and
q(x) = 3/(x2 + 2) are analytic at zero. Hence we can express a general solution in the form

H
y(x) = an xn .
n=0
Substituting this expansion into the given dierential equation yields

H
H
H
2 n2 n1
(x + 2) n(n 1)an x + 2x nan x +3 an xn = 0
n=2 n=1 n=0

H
H H
H
n(n 1)an xn + 2n(n 1)an xn2 + 2nan xn + 3an xn = 0.
n=2 n=2 n=1 n=0
To sum over like powers xk , we put k = n 2 into the second summation and k = n into the
other summations. This gives

H
H
H
H
k(k 1)ak xk + 2(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 xk + 2kak xk + 3ak xk = 0.
k=2 k=0 k=1 k=0
Next we separate the terms corresponding to k = 0 and k = 1 and combine the rest under
one summation.

H
(4a2 + 3a0 ) + (12a3 + 5a1 )x + [k(k 1)ak + 2(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 + 2kak + 3ak ] xk = 0.
k=2
Setting the coecients equal to zero and simplifying, we get
4a2 + 3a0 = 0,
12a3 + 5a1 = 0,
(k 2 + k + 3)ak + 2(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 = 0, k2
a2 = 3a0 /4 ,
a3 = 5a1 /12 ,
ak+2 = (k 2 + k + 3)ak /[2(k + 2)(k + 1)], k 2.
From the initial conditions, we have
a0 = y(0) = 1 and a1 = y (0) = 2.
518
Exercises 8.3
Therefore,
a2 = 3(1)/4 = 3/4 ,
a3 = 5(2)/12 = 5/6 ,
and the cubic polynomial approximation for the solution is
3x2 5x3
y(x) = a0 + a1 x + x2 x2 + a3 x3 = 1 + 2x .
4 6
33. In Problem 7, Exercises 8.2 we showed that the radius of convergence of a power series
P 2n

n=0 a2n x is = 1/ L, where
1 1
1 a2(n+1) 1
L = lim 11 1.
n a2n 1
In the series (13), a2n = (1)n /n! and so

1 1
1 (1)n+1 /(n + 1)! 1
L = lim 11 1 = lim 1 = 0.
n n
(1) /n! 1 n n + 1

Therefore, L = 0 and = .
35. With the given values of parameters, we have an initial value problem
+ ,
t 1
0.1q (t) + 1 + q (t) + q(t) = 0, q(0) = 10, q (0) = 0.
10 2
Simplifying yields
q (t) + (10 + t) q (t) + 5q(t) = 0, q(0) = 10, q (0) = 0.

P
The point t = 0 is an ordinary point for this equation. Let q(t) = n=0 an tn be the power
series expansion of q(t) about t = 0. Substituting this series into the above dierential
equation, we obtain

H
H
H
n2 n1
n(n 1)an t + (10 + t) nan t +5 an tn = 0
n=2 n=1 n=0

H
H H
H
n2 n1 n
n(n 1)an t + 10nan t + nan t + 5an tn = 0.
n=2 n=1 n=1 n=0
519
Chapter 8
Setting k = n 2 in the first summation, k = n 1 in the second summation, and k = n in

the last two summations, we obtain

H
H
H
H
k k k
(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 t + 10(k + 1)ak+1 t + kak t + 5ak tk = 0.
k=0 k=0 k=1 k=0
Separating the terms corresponding to k = 0 and combining the rest under one sum yields

H
(2a2 + 10a1 + 5a0 ) + [(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 + 10(k + 1)ak+1 + (k + 5)ak ] tk = 0.
k=1
Setting the coecients equal to zero, we obtain the recurrence relations
2a2 + 10a1 + 5a0 = 0,

(8.7)
(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 + 10(k + 1)ak+1 + (k + 5)ak = 0, k 1.
Next we use the initial conditions to find a0 and a1 .
a0 = q(0) = 10, a1 = q (0) = 0.
From the first equation in (8.7) we have

10a1 5a0
a2 = = 25.
2
Taking k = 1 and k = 2 in the second equation in (8.7), we find a3 and a4 .
k = 1 : 6a3 + 20a2 + 6a1 = 0 a3 = (20a2 + 6a1 )/6 = 250/3,

k = 2 : 12a4 + 30a3 + 7a2 = 0 a4 = (30a3 + 7a2 )/12 = 775/4.
Hence
250t3 775t4 250t3 775t4
q(t) = 10 + (0)t 25t2 + + = 10 25t2 + + .
3 4 3 4
EXERCISES 8.4: Equations with Analytic Coecients, page 456

3
3. For this equation, p(x) = 0 and q(x) = . Therefore, singular points will occur
1 + x + x2
when
1 3
1 + x + x2 = 0 x= i.
2 2
520
Exercises 8.4
Thus, x = 1 is an ordinary point for this equation, and we can find a power series solution
with a radius of convergence of at least the minimum of the distances between 1 and points

(1/2) ( 3/2)i, which, in fact, are equal. Recall that the distance between two complex
numbers, z1 = a + bi and z2 = c + di, is given by
$
dist (z1 , z2 ) = (a c)2 + (b d)2 .

Thus, the distance between (1 + 0 i) and (1/2) + ( 3/2)i is
&
'4
' + ,52 L M2 !
( 1 1 3 9 3
+ 0 = + = 3.
2 2 4 4
Therefore, the radius of convergence for the power series solution of this dierential equation

about x = 1 will be at least = 3.
9. We see that x = 0 and x = 2 are the only singular points for this dierential equation and,
thus, x = 1 is an ordinary point. Therefore, according to Theorem 5 on page 451 of the text,
there exists a power series solution of this equation about the point x = 1 with a radius of
convergence of at least one, the distance from 1 to either 0 or 2. That is, we have a general
solution for this dierential equation of the form

H
y(x) = an (x 1)n ,
n=0
which is convergent for all x at least in the interval (0, 2), the interval on which the inequality
|x 1| < 1 is satisfied. To find this solution we will proceed as in Example 3 on page 453 of
the text. Thus, we make the substitution t = x 1, which implies that x = t + 1. (Note that
dx/dt = 1.) We then define a new function
Y (t) := y(t + 1) = y(x)

+ ,+ , + ,
dY dy dx dy dy
= = 1 =
dt dx dt dx dx
2
+ , + , + 2 ,+ ,
dY d dY d dy dy dx d2 y
= = = = .
dt2 dt dt dt dx dx2 dt dx2
521
Chapter 8
Hence, with the substitutions t = x 1 and Y (t) = y(t + 1), we transform the dierential
equation, (x2 2x) y (x) + 2y(x) = 0, into the dierential equation
- .
(t + 1)2 2(t + 1) y (t + 1) + 2y(t + 1) = 0
- .
(t + 1)2 2(t + 1) Y (t) + 2Y (t) = 0
)2 *
t 1 Y (t) + 2Y (t) = 0. (8.8)
To find a general solution to (8.8), we first note that zero is an ordinary point of equation
(8.8). Thus, we can assume that we have a power series solution of equation (8.8) of the form

H
Y (t) = an tn ,
n=0
which converges for all t in (1, 1). (This means that x = t + 1 will be in the interval (0, 2)
as desired.) Substituting into equation (8.8) yields

)2 *H H
t 1 n(n 1)an tn2 + 2 an tn = 0
n=2 n=0

H
H
H
n n2
n(n 1)an t n(n 1)an t + 2an tn = 0.
n=2 n=2 n=0
Making the shift in the index, k = n 2, in the second power series above and replacing n
with k in the other two power series allows us to take each summation over the same power
of t. This gives us

H
H
H
k k
k(k 1)ak t (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 t + 2ak tk = 0.
k=2 k=0 k=0
In order to start all of these summations at the same point, we must take the first two terms
out of the summation sign in the last two power series. Thus we have,

H
H
k(k 1)ak tk (2)(1)a2 (3)(2)a3 t (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 tk
k=2 k=2

H
+2a0 + 2a1 t + 2ak tk = 0
k=2
522
Exercises 8.4

H
2a0 2a2 + (2a1 6a3 ) t + [k(k 1)ak (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 + 2ak ] tk = 0.
k=2
For this power series to equal zero, each coecient must be zero. Thus, we have
a1
2a0 2a2 = 0 a2 = a0 , 2a1 6a3 = 0 a3 = ,
3
k(k 1)ak (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 + 2ak = 0, k2
k(k 1)ak + 2ak (k 2 k + 2)ak

ak+2 = , k2 ak+2 = , k 2.
(k + 2)(k + 1) (k + 2)(k + 1)
4a2 a2 a0
k=2 a4 = = = ,
43 3 3
8a3 2a1
k=3 a5 = = , etc.
54 15
Plugging these values for the coecients into the power series solution,

H
Y (t) = an tn = a0 + a1 t + a2 t2 + a3 t3 + a4 t4 + ,
n=0
yields
a1 t3 a0 t4 2a1 t5
2
Y (t) = a0 + a1 t + a0 t + + + +
+ 3 3, 15+ ,
2 t4 t3 2t5
Y (t) = a0 1 + t + + + a1 t + + + .
3 3 15
Lastly, we want to change back to the independent variable x. To do this, we recall that
Y (t) = y(t + 1). Thus, if t = x 1, then
Y (t) = Y (x 1) = y ([x 1] + 1) = y(x).
Thus, we replace t with x1 in the solution just found, and we obtain a power series expansion
for a general solution in the independent variable x. Substituting, we have
4 5 4 5
2 1 4 1 3 2 5
y(x) = a0 1 + (x 1) + (x 1) + + a1 (x 1) + (x 1) + (x 1) + .
3 3 15
523
Chapter 8
17. Here p(x) = 0 and q(x) = sin x both of which are analytic everywhere. Thus, x = is an
ordinary point for this dierential equation, and there are no singular points. Therefore, by
Theorem 5 on page 451 of the text, we can assume that this equation has a general power
series solution about the point x = with an infinite radius of convergence (i.e., = ).
That is, we assume that we have a solution to this dierential equation given by

L
M
H H
y(x) = an (x )n y (x) = nan (x )n1 ,
n=0 n=1
which converges for all x. If we apply the initial conditions, y() = 1 and y () = 0, we
see that a0 = 1 and a1 = 0. To find a general solution of this dierential equation, we will
combine the methods of Example 3 and Example 4 on pages 453455 of the text. Thus, we
will first define a new function, Y (t), using the transformation t = x . Thus, we define
Y (t) := y(t + ) = y(x).
Hence, by the chain rule (using the fact that x = t + which implies that dx/dt = 1), we
have dY /dt = (dy/dx)(dx/dt) = dy/dx, and similarly d2 Y /dt2 = d2 y/dx2 . We now solve the
transformed dierential equation
d2 Y d2 Y
sin(t + )Y (t) = 0 + (sin t)Y (t) = 0, (8.9)
dt2 dt2
where we have used the fact that sin(t + ) = sin t. When we have found the solution Y (t),
we will use the fact that y(x) = Y (x ) to obtain the solution to the original dierential
equation in terms of the independent variable x. Hence, we seek a power series solution to
equation (8.9) of the form

H
H
H
n n1
Y (t) = an t Y (t) = nan t Y (t) = n(n 1)an tn2 .
n=0 n=1 n=2
Since the initial conditions, y() = 1 and y () = 0, transform into Y (0) = 1 and Y (0) = 0,
we must have
Y (0) = a0 = 1 and Y (0) = a1 = 0.
524
Exercises 8.4
Next we note that q(t) = sin t is an analytic function with a Maclaurin series given by

H (1)n t2n+1 t3 t5 t7
sin t = =t + + .
n=0
(2n + 1)! 6 120 5040
By substituting the expressions that we found for Y (t), Y (t), and sin t into equation (8.9),
we obtain + ,H
H t3 t5 t7
n2
n(n 1)an t + t + + an tn = 0.
n=2
6 120 5040 n=0
Therefore, expanding this last equation (and explicitly showing only terms of up to order
four), yields
) * ) *
2a2 + 6a3 t + 12a4 t2 + 20a5 t3 + 30a6 t4 + + t a0 + a1 t + a2 t2 + a3 t3 +
t3
(a0 + a1 t + ) + = 0
) * )6 *
2a2 + 6a3 t + 12a4 t2 + 20a5 t3 + 30a6 t4 + + t a0 + a1 t + a2 t2 + a3 t3 +
+ ,
a0 t3 a1 t4
+ + = 0.
6 6
By grouping these terms according to their powers of t, we obtain
# a0 % 3 # a1 % 4
2
2a2 + (6a3 + a0 ) t + (12a4 + a1 ) t + 20a5 + a2 t + 30a6 + a3 t + = 0.
6 6
Setting these coecients to zero and recalling that a0 = 1 and a1 = 0 yields the system of
equations
2a2 = 0 a2 = 0,
a0 1
6a3 + a0 = 0 a3 = = ,
6 6
a1
12a4 + a1 = 0 a4 = = 0,
12
a0 1
a0 a2 1
20a5 + a2 =0 a5 = 6 = 6 = ,
6 20 20 120
a1 1
a1 a3 0+
30a6 + a3 =0 a6 = 6 = 6 = 1 .
6 30 30 180
525
Chapter 8
Plugging these coecients into the power series solution

H
Y (t) = an tn = a0 + a1 t + a2 t2 + ,
n=0
yields the solution to equation (8.9):

t3 t5 t6 t3 t5 t6
Y (t) = 1 + 0 + 0 + 0 + + + = 1 + + + .
6 120 180 6 120 180
Lastly we want to find the solution to the original equation with the independent variable x.
In order to do this, we recall that t = x and Y (x ) = y(x). Therefore, by substituting
these values into the equation above, we obtain the solution
1 1 1
y(x) = 1 (x )3 + (x )5 + (x )6 + .
6 120 180
21. We assume that this dierential equation has a power series solution with a positive radius of
convergence about the point x = 0. This is reasonable because all of the coecients and the
forcing function g(x) = sin x are analytic everywhere. Thus, we assume that

H
H
n
y(x) = an x y (x) = nan xn1 .
n=0 n=1
By substituting these expressions and the Maclaurin expansion for sin x into the dierential
equation, y (x) xy(x) = sin x, we obtain

H
H
H
n1 n x2n+1
nan x x an x = (1)n .
n=1 n=0 n=0
(2n + 1)!
In the first power series on the left, we make the shift k = n 1. In the second power series
on the left, we make the shift k = n + 1. Thus, we obtain

H
H
H
k k x2n+1
(k + 1)ak+1 x ak1 x = (1)n .
k=0 k=1 n=0
(2n + 1)!
Separating out the first term of the first power series on the left yields

H
H
H
k k x2n+1
a1 + (k + 1)ak+1 x ak1 x = (1)n
n=0
(2n + 1)!
k=1 k=1
526
Exercises 8.4

H
H x2n+1
a1 + [(k + 1)ak+1 ak1 ] xk = (1)n .
k=1 n=0
(2n + 1)!
Therefore, by expanding both of the power series, we have
a1 + (2a2 a0 ) x + (3a3 a1 ) x2 + (4a4 a2 ) x3 + (5a5 a3 ) x4

x3 x5 x7
+ (6a6 a4 ) x5 + (7a7 a5 ) x6 + = x + + .
6 120 5040
By equating the coecients of like powers of x, we obtain
a1 = 0,
a0 + 1
2a2 a0 = 1 a2 = ,
2
a1
3a3 a1 = 0 a3 = = 0,
3
1 a2 1/6 a0 1
4a4 a2 = a4 = = + ,
6 4 8 12
a3
5a5 a3 = 0 a5 = = 0,
5
1 a4 1/120 a0 11
6a6 a4 = a6 = = + .
120 6 48 720
Substituting these coecients into the power series solution and noting that a0 is an arbitrary
number, yields

H
y(x) = an xn
n=0
+
, + , + ,
a0 1 2 a0 1 4 a0 11
= a0 + 0 + + x +0+ + x +0+ + x6 +
2 2 8 12 48 720
4 5 4 5
1 2 1 4 1 6 1 2 1 4 11 6
= a0 1 + x + x + x + + x + x + x + .
2 8 48 2 12 720
27. Observe that x = 0 is an ordinary point for this dierential equation. Therefore, we can
assume that this equation has a power series solution about the point x = 0 with a positive
527
Chapter 8
radius of convergence. Thus, we assume that

H
H
H
n n1
n=0 n=1 n=2
The Maclaurin series for tan x is
x3 2x5
tan x = x + + + ,
3 15
which is given in the table on the inside front cover of the text. Substituting the expressions
for y(x), y (x), y (x), and the Maclaurin series for the function tan x into the dierential
equation, (1 x2 )y y + y = tan x, yields

) *H H H x3 2x5
1 x2 n(n 1)an xn2 nan xn1 + an xn = x + + +
n=2 n=1 n=0
3 15

H
H
H
H
n2 n n1
n(n 1)an x n(n 1)an x nan x + an xn
n=2 n=2 n=1 n=0
x3 2x5
=x+ + + .
3 15
By shifting the indices of the power series on the left-hand side of this equation, we obtain

H
H
H
H
k k k x3 2x5
(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2x k(k 1)ak x (k + 1)ak+1x + ak xk = x + + + .
k=0 k=2 k=0 k=0
3 15
Removing the first two terms from the summation notation in the first, third and fourth power
series above yields

H
H
k
(2)(1)a2 + (3)(2)a3 x + (k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 x k(k 1)ak xk (1)a1 (2)a2 x
k=2 k=2

H
H x3 2x5
(k + 1)ak+1xk + a0 + a1 x + ak xk = x + + +
k=2 k=2
3 15
(2a2 a1 + a0 ) + (6a3 2a2 + a1 ) x

H x3 2x5
+ [(k + 2)(k + 1)ak+2 k(k 1)ak (k + 1)ak+1 + ak ] xk = x + + + .
3 15
k=2
528
Exercises 8.5
By equating the coecients of the two power series, we see that

a1 a0
2a2 a1 + a0 = 0 a2 = ,
2
2a2 a1 + 1 1 a0
6a3 2a2 + a1 = 1 a3 = = ,
6 6
a2 + 3a3 a1 2a0 + 1
4 3a4 2 1a2 3a3 + a2 = 0 a4 = = .
12 24
Therefore, noting that a0 and a1 are arbitrary, we can substitute these coecients into the
P
power series solution y(x) = n 2 3 4
n=0 an x = a0 + a1 x + a2 x + a3 x + a4 x + to obtain
#a + , + ,
1 a0 % 2 1 a0 3 a1 a0 1
y(x) = a0 + a1 x + x + x + + x4 +
2 2 6 6 24 12 24
+ , + ,
1 2 1 3 1 4 1 2 1 4
= a0 1 x x x + + a1 x + x + x +
2 6 12 2 24
+ ,
1 3 1 4
+ x + x + .
6 24
EXERCISES 8.5: Cauchy-Euler (Equidimensional) Equations Revisited, page 460
5. Notice that, since x > 0, we can multiply this dierential equation by x2 and rewrite it to
obtain
d2 y dy
x2 2
5x + 13y = 0.
dx dx
We see that this is a Cauchy-Euler equation. Thus, we will assume that a solution has the
form
y(x) = xr y (x) = rxr1 y (x) = r(r 1)xr2 .
Substituting these expressions into the dierential equation above yields
r(r 1)xr 5rxr + 13xr = 0

) 2 *
r 6r + 13 xr = 0 r 2 6r + 13 = 0.
We obtained this last equation by using the assumption that x > 0. (We also could arrive at
this equation by using equation (4) on page 458 of the text.) Using the quadratic formula, we
529
Chapter 8
see that the roots to this equation are

6 36 52
r= = 3 2i.
2
Therefore, using formulas (5) and (6) on page 458 of the text with complex conjugates roots
(and using Eulers formula), we have two linearly independent solutions give by
y1 (x) = x3 cos(2 ln x), y2 (x) = x3 sin(2 ln x).
Hence the general solution to this equation is given by
y(x) = c1 x3 cos(2 ln x) + c2 x3 sin(2 ln x).
7. This equation is a third order Cauchy-Euler equation, and, thus, we will assume that a solution
has the form y(x) = xr . This implies that
y (x) = rxr1 y (x) = r(r 1)xr2 y (x) = r(r 1)(r 2)xr3 .
By substituting these expressions into the dierential equation, we obtain
[r(r 1)(r 2) + 4r(r 1) + 10r 10] xr = 0

- 3 .
r + r 2 + 8r 10 xr = 0 r 3 + r 2 + 8r 10 = 0.
By inspection we see that r = 1 is a root of this last equation. Thus, one solution to this
dierential equation will be given by y1 (x) = x and we can factor the indicial equation above
as follows:
(r 1)(r 2 + 2r + 10) = 0.
Therefore, using the quadratic formula, we see that the roots to this equation are r = 1, 13i.
Thus, we can find two more linearly independent solutions to this equation by using Eulers
formula as was done on page 458 of the text. Thus, three linearly independent solutions to
this problem are given by
y1 (x) = x, y2 (x) = x1 cos(3 ln x), y3 (x) = x1 sin(3 ln x).
Hence, the general solution to this dierential equation is
y(x) = c1 x + c2 x1 cos(3 ln x) + c3 x1 sin(3 ln x).
530
Exercises 8.5
13. We first must find two linearly independent solutions to the associated homogeneous equation.
Since this is a Cauchy-Euler equation, we assume that there are solutions of the form
y(x) = xr y (x) = rxr1 y (x) = r(r 1)xr2 .
Substituting these expressions into the associated homogeneous equation yields
[r(r 1) 2r + 2] xr = 0 r 2 3r + 2 = 0 (r 1)(r 2) = 0.
Thus, the roots to this indicial equation are r = 1, 2. Therefore, a general solution to the
associated homogeneous equation is
yh (x) = c1 x + c2 x2 .
For the variation of parameters method, let y1 (x) = x and y2 (x) = x2 , and then assume that
a particular solution has the form
yp (x) = v1 (x)y1 (x) + v2 (x)y2 (x) = v1 (x)x + v2 (x)x2 .
In order to find v1 (x) and v2 (x), we would like to use formula (10) on page 195 of the text.
To use equation (10), we must first find the Wronskian of y1 and y2 . Thus, we compute
W [y1 , y2 ] (x) = y1 (x)y2 (x) y2 (x)y1 (x) = 2x2 x2 = x2 .
Next we must write the dierential equation given in this problem in standard form. When
we do this, we see that g(x) = x5/2 . Therefore, by equation (10), we have
3 3
x5/2 x2 2
v1 (x) = 2
dx = (x5/2 )dx = x3/2
x 3
and 3 3
x5/2 x 2 5/2
v2 (x) = 2
dx = x7/2 dx = x .
x 5
Thus, a particular solution is given by
+ , + ,
2 3/2 2 5/2 4 1/2
yp (x) = x x+ x x2 = x .
3 5 15
Therefore, a general solution of the nonhomogeneous dierential equation is given by
4 1/2
y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x) = c1 x + c2 x2 + x .
15
531
Chapter 8
19. (a) For this linear dierential operator L, we have

- . - .
L [xr ] (x) = x3 r(r 1)(r 2)xr3 + x rxr1 xr
= r(r 1)(r 2)xr + rxr xr
) *
= r 3 3r 2 + 3r 1 xr = (r 1)3 xr .
(b) From part (a) above, we see that r = 1 is a root of multiplicity three of the indicial
equation. Thus, we have one solution given by
y1 (x) = x. (8.10)
To find two more linearly independent solutions, we use a method similar to that used
in the text. By taking the partial derivative of L [xr ] (x) = (r 1)3 xr with respect to r,
we have
/ 0
{L [xr ] (x)} = (r 1)3 xr = 3(r 1)2 xr + (r 1)3 xr ln x
r r
2 / 0
2
{L [xr ] (x)} = 3(r 1)2 xr + (r 1)3 xr ln x
r r
= 6(r 1)xr + 6(r 1)2 xr ln x + (r 1)3 xr (ln x)2 .
Since r 1 is a factor of every term in {L [xr ] (x)} /r and 2 {L [xr ] (x)} /r 2 above,
we see that
1
1
{L [xr ] (x)} 1 = 0, (8.11)
r r=1
and
2 1
r 1
2
{L [x ] (x)} 1 = 0, (8.12)
r r=1
We can use these facts to find the two solutions that we seek. In order to find a second
solution, we would like an alternative form for
1
{L [xr ] (x)} 11
r 1 .
r=1
Using the fact that

L[y](x) = x3 y (x) + xy (x) y(x)
532
Exercises 8.5
and proceeding as in equation (9) on page 458 of the text with w(r, x) = xr , we have
6 3
7
r 3 w w
{L [x ] (x)} = {L[w](x)} = x +x w
r r r x3 x
4w 2w w 4
3 w 2w w
= x3 + x = x + x
rx+3 ,rx + r , x3 r 4 xr 5 r
3
w w w w
= x3 3 +x =L (x),
x r x r r r
where we are using the fact that mixed partials of w(r, x) are equal. Therefore, combining
this with equation (8.11) above yields
1 4 r 1 5
1 x 1 - 1 .
r
{L [x ] (x)} 1 L 1 = L xr ln x 1r=1 = L[x ln x] = 0.
r r=1 r r=1
Thus, a second linearly independent solution is given by
y2 (x) = x ln x.
To find a third solution, we will use equation (8.12) above. Hence, we would like to find
an alternative form for 2 {L [xr ] (x)} /r 2 . To do this, we use the fact that
4
r 3 w 2w w
{L [x ] (x)} = x 3
+x ,
r rx rx r
which we found above and the fact that mixed partial derivatives of w(r, x) are equal.
Thus, we have
4 5 6 7
2 r r 4
3 w 2w w
{L [x ] (x)} = {L [x ] (x)} = x +x
r 2 r r r rx3 rx r
5 3 2 5 3
w w w w w 2w
= x3 2 3 + x 2 2 = x3 3 2 + x 2

r x+ 2 ,r x +r2 , x r 4 xr 5 r 2
3 2 2
w w w w
= x3 3 2
+x 2
2 =L (x) = 0.
x r x r r r 2
Therefore, combining this with equation (8.12) above yields

1 4 2 r 1 5
2 r 1 (x ) 1 - .
2
{L [x ] (x)} 1 = L 2
1 = L x(ln x)2 = 0,
r r=1 r r=1
533
Chapter 8
where we have used the fact that 2 xr /r 2 = xr (ln x)2 . Thus we see that another solution
is
y3 (x) = x(ln x)2 ,
which, by inspection, is linearly independent from y1 and y2 . Thus, a general solution to

the dierential equation is y(x) = C1 x + C2 x ln x + C3 x(ln x)2 .
EXERCISES 8.6: Method of Frobenius, page 472
5. By putting this equation in standard form, we see that

x1 x1 1
p(x) == = = ,
(x2 1)2 (x 1)2 (x + 1)2 (x 1)(x + 1)2
and
3 3
q(x) =
2 2
= .
(x 1) (x 1) (x + 1)2
2
Thus, x = 1, 1 are singular points of this equation. To check if x = 1 is regular, we note

that
1 3
(x 1)p(x) = 2
and (x 1)2 q(x) = .
(x + 1) (x + 1)2
These functions are analytic at x = 1. Therefore, x = 1 is a regular singular point for this
dierential equation. Next we check the singular point x = 1. Here
1
(x + 1)p(x) =
(x 1)(x + 1)
is not analytic at x = 1. Therefore, x = 1 is an irregular singular point for this dierential
equation.
13. By putting this equation in standard form, we see that

x2 4 (x 2)(x + 2) x+2
p(x) = 2 2
= 2 2
= ,
(x x 2) (x 2) (x + 1) (x 2)(x + 1)2
6x
q(x) = .
(x 2)2 (x + 1)2 )
Thus, we have
x+2 6x
(x 2)p(x) = and (x 2)2 q(x) = .
(x + 1)2 (x + 1)2
534
Exercises 8.6
Therefore, x = 2 is a regular singular point of this dierential equation. We also observe that
x+2 4
lim (x 2)p(x) = lim 2
= = p0 ,
x2 x2 (x + 1) 9
6x 12 4
lim (x 2)2 q(x) = lim 2
= = = q0 .
x2 x2 (x + 1) 9 3
Thus, we can use equation (16) on page 463 of the text to obtain the indicial equation
4r 4 5r 4
r(r 1) + =0 r2 = 0.
9 3 9 3
By the quadratic formula, we see that the roots to this equation and, therefore, the exponents
of the singularity x = 2, are given by

5+ 25 + 432 5 + 457
r1 = = ,
18 18
5 457
r2 = .
18
21. Here p(x) = x1 and q(x) = 1. This implies that xp(x) = 1 and x2 q(x) = x2 . Therefore, we
see that x = 0 is a regular singular point for this dierential equation, and so we can use the
method of Frobenius to find a solution to this problem. (Note also that x = 0 is the only
singular point for this equation.) Thus, we will assume that this solution has the form

H
H
r n
w(r, x) = x an x = an xn+r .
n=0 n=0
We also notice that
p0 = lim xp(x) = lim 1 = 1,

x0 x0
q0 = lim x q(x) = lim x2 = 0.
2
x0 x0
Hence, we see that the indicial equation is given by
r(r 1) + r = r 2 = 0.
This means that r1 = r2 = 0. Since x = 0 is the only singular point for this dierential
equation, we observe that the series solution w(0, x) which we will find by the method of
535
Chapter 8
Frobenius converges for all x > 0. To find the solution, we note that

H
w(r, x) = an xn+r
n=0

H
w (r, x) = (n + r)an xn+r1
n=0
H
w (r, x) = (n + r)(n + r 1)an xn+r2 .
n=0
Notice that the power series for w and w start at n = 0. Substituting these expressions into
the dierential equation and simplifying yields

H
H
H
(n + r)(n + r 1)an xn+r + (n + r)an xn+r + an xn+r+2 = 0.
n=0 n=0 n=0
Next we want each power series to sum over xk+r . Thus, we let k = n in the first and second
power series and shift the index in the last power series by letting k = n + 2. Therefore, we
have
H H H
(k + r)(k + r 1)ak xk+r + (k + r)ak xk+r + ak2 xk+r = 0.
k=0 k=0 k=2
We will separate out the first two terms from the first two power series above so that we can
start all of our power series at the same place. Thus, we have

H
(r 1)ra0 xr + r(1 + r)a1 x1+r + (k + r)(k + r 1)ak xk+r
k=2

H
H
r 1+r k+r
+ra0 x + (1 + r)a1 x + (k + r)ak x + ak2 xk+r = 0
k=2 k=2
r 1+r
[r(r 1) + r] a0 x + [r(r + 1) + (r + 1)] a1 x
H
+ [(k + r)(k + r 1)ak + (k + r)ak + ak2 ] xk+r = 0.
k=2
By equating coecients and assuming that a0 = 0, we obtain
r(r 1) + r = 0 (the indicial equation),

[r(r + 1) + (r + 1)] a1 = 0 (r + 1)2 a1 = 0,
536
Exercises 8.6
and, for k 2, the recurrence relation
ak2
(k + r)(k + r 1)ak + (k + r)ak + ak2 = 0 ak = , k 2.
(k + r)2
Using the fact (which we found from the indicial equation above) that r1 = 0, we observe that
a1 = 0. Next, using the recurrence relation (and the fact that r1 = 0), we see that
ak2
ak = , k 2.
k2
Hence,
a0
k=2 a2 = ,
4
a1
k=3 a3 = = 0,
9
a0
a2
k=4 a4 = = 4 = a0 ,
16 16 64
a3
k=5 a5 = = 0,
25
a0
a4 a0
k=6 a6 = = 64 = .
36 36 2304
Substituting these coecients into the solution

H
w(0, x) = an xn = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + a3 x3 + a4 x4 + a5 x5 + a6 x6 + ,
n=0
we obtain the series solution for x > 0 given by

4 5
1 2 1 4 1 6
w(0, x) = a0 1 x + x x + .
4 64 2304
25. For this equation, we see that xp(x) = x/2 and x2 q(x) = (x + 3)/4. Thus, x = 0 is a regular
singular point for this equation and we can use the method of Frobenius to find a solution.
To this end, we compute
x (x + 3) 3
lim xp(x) = lim = 0, and lim x2 q(x) = lim = .
x0 x0 2 x0 x0 4 4
537
Chapter 8
Therefore, by equation (16) on page 463 of the text, the indicial equation is
3
r(r 1) =0 4r 2 4r 3 = 0 (2r + 1)(2r 3) = 0.
4
This indicial equation has roots r1 = 3/2 and r2 = 1/2. By the method of Frobenius, we
can assume that a solution to this dierential equation will have the form

H
w(r, x) = an xn+r
n=0

H
w (r, x) = (n + r)an xn+r1
n=0
H
w (r, x) = (n + r 1)(n + r)an xn+r2 ,
n=0
where r = r1 = 3/2. Since x = 0 is the only singular point for this equation, we see that
the solution, w(3/2, x), converges for all x > 0. The first step in finding this solution is to
plug w(r, x) and its first and second derivatives (which we have found above by term by term
dierentiation) into the dierential equation. Thus, we obtain

H
H
H
H
n+r n+r+1 n+r+1
4(n + r 1)(n + r)an x + 2(n + r)an x an x 3an xn+r = 0.
n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0
By shifting indices, we can sum each power series over the same power of x, namely xk+r .
Thus, with the substitution k = n in the first and last power series and the substitution
k = n + 1 in the two remaining power series, we obtain

H
H
H
H
4(k + r 1)(k + r)ak xk+r + 2(k + r 1)ak1 xk+r ak1 xk+r 3ak xk+r = 0.
k=0 k=1 k=1 k=0
Next removing the first term (the k = 0 term) from the first and last power series above and
writing the result as a single power series yields

H
H
4(r 1)ra0 xr + 4(k + r 1)(k + r)ak xk+r + 2(k + r 1)ak1xk+r
k=1 k=1

H
H
k+r r
ak1 x 3a0 x 3ak xk+r = 0
k=1 k=1
538
Exercises 8.6
[4(r 1)r 3] a0 xr
H
+ [4(k + r 1)(k + r)ak + 2(k + r 1)ak1 ak1 3ak ] xk+r = 0.
k=1
By equating coecients we see that each coecient in the power series must be zero. Also we
are assuming that a0 = 0. Therefore, we have
4(r 1)r 3 = 0, (the indicial equation),

4(k + r 1)(k + r)ak + 2(k + r 1)ak1 ak1 3ak = 0, k 1.
Thus, the recurrence equation is given by
(3 2k 2r)ak1
ak = , k 1.
4(k + r 1)(k + r) 3
Therefore, for r = r1 = 3/2, we have
2kak1 ak1
ak = , k1 ak = , k 1.
4(k + 1/2)(k + 3/2) 3 2(k + 2)
Thus, we see that
a0 a0
k=1 a1 = = ,
23 20 3!
a1 a0 a0
k=2 a2 = = = 1 ,
24 2234 2 4!
a2 a0
k=3 a3 = = 2 ,
25 2 5!
a3 a0
k=4 a4 = = 3 .
26 2 6!
Inspection of this sequence shows that we can write the nth coecient, an , for n 1 as
(1)n a0
an = .
2n1 (n + 2)!
Substituting these coecients into the solution given by

+ , H
3
w ,x = an xn+(3/2) ,
2 n=0
539
Chapter 8
yields a power series solution for x > 0 given by

+ , H
3 3/2 (1)n xn+(3/2)
w , x = a0 x + a0 .
2 n=1
2n1 (n + 2)!
But since substituting n = 0 into the general coecient, an , yields (1)0 a0 /(21 2!) = a0 , the
solution that we found above can be written as
+ , H
3 (1)n xn+(3/2)
w , x = a0 n1 (n + 2)!
.
2 n=0
2
27. In this equation, we see that p(x) = 1/x and q(x) = 1. Thus, the only singular point is
x = 0. Since xp(x) = 1 and x2 q(x) = x2 , we see that x = 0 is a regular singular point for
this equation and so we can use the method of Frobenius to find a solution to this equation.
We also note that the solution that we find by this method will converge for all x > 0. To
find this solution we observe that
p0 = lim xp(x) = lim (1) = 1 and q0 = lim x2 q(x) = lim (x2 ) = 0.

x0 x0 x0 x0
Thus, according to equation (16) on page 463 of the text, the indicial equation for the point
x = 0 is
r(r 1) r = 0 r(r 2) = 0.
Therefore, the roots to the indicial equation are r1 = 2, r2 = 0. Hence, we will use the method
of Frobenius to find the solution w(2, x). If we let

H
w(r, x) = an xn+r ,
n=0
then

H
H
n+r1
w (r, x) = (n + r)an x , and w (r, x) = (n + r 1)(n + r)an xn+r2 .
n=0 n=0
By substituting these expressions into the dierential equation and simplifying, we obtain

H
H
H
n+r1 n+r1
(n + r 1)(n + r)an x (n + r)an x an xn+r+1 = 0.
n=0 n=0 n=0
540
Exercises 8.6
Next we shift the indices by letting k = n 1 in the first two power series above and k = n + 1
in the last power series above. Therefore, we have

H
H
H
(k + r)(k + r + 1)ak+1 xk+r (k + r + 1)ak+1xk+r ak1 xk+r = 0.
k=1 k=1 k=1
We can start all three of these summations at the same term, the k = 1 term, if we separate
out the first two terms (the k = 1 and k = 0 terms) from the first two power series. Thus,
we have

H
(r 1)ra0 xr1 + r(r + 1)a1 xr + (k + r)(k + r + 1)ak+1 xk+r
k=1

H
H
r1 r k+r
ra0 x (r + 1)a1 x (k + r + 1)ak+1 x ak1 xk+r = 0
k=1 k=1
[(r 1)r r] a0 xr1 + [r(r + 1) (r + 1)] a1 xr
H
+ [(k + r)(k + r + 1)ak+1 (k + r + 1)ak+1 ak1 ] xk+r = 0.
k=1
By equating coecients and assuming that a0 = 0, we obtain
r(r 1) r = 0, (the indicial equation),

(r + 1)(r 1)a1 = 0, (8.13)
(k + r)(k + r + 1)ak+1 (k + r + 1)ak+1 ak1 = 0, k 1,
where the last equation above is the recurrence relation. Simplifying this recurrence relation
yields
ak1
ak+1 = , k 1. (8.14)
(k + r + 1)(k + r 1)
Next we let r = r1 = 2 in equation (8.13) and in the recurrence relation, equation (8.14), to
obtain
3a1 = 0 a1 = 0,
ak1
ak+1 = , k 1.
(k + 3)(k + 1)
541
Chapter 8
Thus, we have
a0
k=1 a2 = ,
42
a1
k=2 a3 = = 0,
53
a2 a0 a0 a0
k=3 a4 = = = 4 = 4 ,
64 6442 2 32211 2 3! 2!
a3
k=4 a5 = = 0,
75
a4 a0 a0
k=5 a6 = = = .
86 8 6 24 3! 2! 26 4! 3!
By inspection we can now see that the coecients of the power series solution w(2, x) are
a2n1 = 0
and
a0
a2n = ,
22n
(n + 1)!n!
for all n 1. Thus, substituting these coecients into the power series solution yields the
solution
H x2n+2
w(2, x) = a0 .
n=0
22n (n + 1)!n!
35. In applying the method of Frobenius to this third order linear dierential equation, we will
seek a solution of the form

H
w(r, x) = an xn+r
n=0

H

w (r, x) = (n + r)an xn+r1
n=0
H
w (r, x) = (n + r 1)(n + r)an xn+r2
n=0
H
w (r, x) = (n + r 2)(n + r 1)(n + r)an xn+r3 ,
n=0
where we have dierentiated term by term. Substituting these expressions into the dierential
equation and simplifying yields
542
Exercises 8.6

H
H
n+r
6(n + r 2)(n + r 1)(n + r)an x + 13(n + r 1)(n + r)an xn+r
n=0 n=0

H
H
H
+ (n + r)an xn+r + (n + r)an xn+r+1 + an xn+r+1 = 0.
n=0 n=0 n=0
By the shift of index k = n + 1 in the last two power series above and the shift k = n in all
of the other power series, we obtain

H
H
6(k + r 2)(k + r 1)(k + r)ak xk+r + 13(k + r 1)(k + r)ak xk+r
k=0 k=0

H H
H
k+r k+r
+ (k + r)ak x + (k 1 + r)ak1 x + ak1 xk+r = 0.
k=0 k=1 k=1
Next we remove the first term from each of the first three power series above so that all of
these series start at k = 1. Thus, we have

H
6(r 2)(r 1)ra0 xr + 6(k + r 2)(k + r 1)(k + r)ak xk+r
k=1

H
H
r k+r r
+13(r 1)ra0 x + 13(k + r 1)(k + r)ak x + ra0 x + (k + r)ak xk+r
k=1 k=1

H
H
+ (k 1 + r)ak1 xk+r + ak1 xk+r = 0
k=1 k=1
r
[6(r 2)(r 1)r + 13(r 1)r + r] a0 x
H
+ [6(k + r 2)(k + r 1)(k + r)ak + 13(k + r 1)(k + r)ak
k=1
+(k + r)ak + (k 1 + r)ak1 + ak1 ] xk+r = 0. (8.15)
If we assume that a0 = 0 and set the coecient of xr equal to zero, we find that the indicial
equation is
6(r 2)(r 1)r + 13(r 1)r + r = 0 r 2 (6r 5) = 0.
Hence, the roots to the indicial equation are 0, 0, and 5/6. We will find the solution associated
with the largest of these roots. That is, we will find w(5/6, x). Also, from equation (8.15), we
543
Chapter 8
see that we have the recurrence relation
6(k + r 2)(k + r 1)(k + r)ak + 13(k + r 1)(k + r)ak

+(k + r)ak + (k 1 + r)ak1 + ak1 = 0, k1
ak1
ak = , k 1.
6(k + r 2)(k + r 1) + 13(k + r 1) + 1
If we assume that r = 5/6, then this recurrence relation simplifies to

ak1
ak = , k 1.
k(6k + 5)
Therefore, we have
a0
k=1 a1 = ,
11
a1 a0
k=2 a2 = = ,
34 374
a2 a0
k=3 a3 = = .
69 25, 806
P
By substituting these coecients into the solution w(5/6, x) = n=0 an x
n+(5/6)
, we obtain
+ , + ,
5 5/6 x11/6 x17/6 x23/6
w , x = a0 x + + .
6 11 374 25, 806
41. If we let z = 1/x ( dz/dx = 1/x2 ), then we can define a new function Y (z) as
+ ,
1
Y (z) := y = y(x).
z
Thus, by the chain rule, we have
+ ,+ , + ,+ ,
dy dY dY dz dY 1
= = = 2 (8.16)
dx dx dz dx dz x
dy dY
x2 = . (8.17)
dx dz
Therefore, using the product rule and chain rule, we see that
+ , 4+ ,+ ,5
d2 y d2 Y d dY d 1 dY
= = = 2 (by (8.16) above)
dx2 dx2 dx dx dx x dz
544
Exercises 8.6
+ , + , + , + ,
d 1 dY 1 d dY
= 2 + 2 (by product rule)
dx x dz x dx dz
+ , + , + , 4+ 2 , + ,5
2 dY 1 dY dz
= 3
+ 2 2
(by chain rule)
x dz x dz dx
+ , + , + ,2 + 2 , + ,
2 dY 1 dY dz 1
= 3
+ 2 since = 2
x dz x dz 2 dx x
2 dY 1 d2 Y
= + .
x3 dz x4 dz 2
Hence, we have
d2 y dY 1 d2 Y dY d2 Y
x3 = 2 + = 2 + z . (8.18)
dx2 dz x dz 2 dz dz 2
By using the fact that Y (z) = y(x) and equations (8.17) and (8.18) above, we can now
transform the original dierential equation into the dierential equation
dY d2 Y dY
2 +z 2 + Y = 0 zY + 3Y Y = 0. (8.19)
dz dz dz
We will now solve this transformed dierential equation. To this end, we first note that
3
p(z) = zp(z) = 3,
z
and
1
q(z) z 2 g(z) = z.
z
Therefore, z = 0 is a regular singular point of this equation and so infinity is a regular singular
point of the original equation.
To find a power series solution for equation (8.19), we first compute
p0 = lim zp(z) = 3 and q0 = lim z 2 q(z) = 0.

z0 z0
Thus, the indicial equation for equation (8.19) is
r(r 1) + 3r = 0 r(r + 2) = 0.
Hence, this indicial equation has roots r1 = 0 and r2 = 2. We seek a solution of the form

H
w(r, z) = an z n+r .
n=0
545
Chapter 8
Substituting this expression into equation (8.19) above yields

H
H
H
z (n + r 1)(n + r)an z n+r2 + 3 (n + r)an z n+r1 an z n+r = 0.
n=0 n=0 n=0
By simplifying, this equation becomes

H
H
H
n+r1 n+r1
(n + r 1)(n + r)an z + 3(n + r)an z an z n+r = 0.
n=0 n=0 n=0
Making the shift of index k = n 1 in the first two power series and k = n in the last power
series allows us to sum each power series over the same powers of z, namely z k+r . Thus, we
have

H
H
H
k+r n+r
(k + r)(k + r + 1)ak+1 z + 3(k + r + 1)ak+1 z ak z k+r = 0.
k=1 k=1 k=0
By removing the first term from the first two power series above, we can write these three
summations as a single power series. Therefore, we have

H
r1
(r 1)ra0 z + (k + r)(k + r + 1)ak+1z k+r
k=0

H
H
r1 n+r
+3ra0 z + 3(k + r + 1)ak+1 z ak z k+r = 0
k=0 k=0

H
[(r 1)r + 3r] a0 z r1 + [(k + r)(k + r + 1)ak+1 + 3(k + r + 1)ak+1 ak ] z k+r = 0.
k=0
Equating coecients and assuming that a0 = 0 yields the indicial equation, (r 1)r + 3r = 0,
and the recurrence relation
(k + r)(k + r + 1)ak+1 + 3(k + r + 1)ak+1 ak = 0, k0

ak
ak+1 = , k 0.
(k + r + 1)(k + r + 3)
Thus, with r = r1 = 0, we obtain the recurrence relation
ak
ak+1 = , k 3.
(k + 1)(k + 3)
546
Exercises 8.7
Since a0 is an arbitrary number, we see from this recurrence equation that the next three
coecients are given by
a0
k=0 a1 = ,
3
a1 a0
k=1 a2 = = ,
8 24
a2 a0
k=2 a3 = = .
15 360
Thus, from the method of Frobenius, we obtain a power series solution for equation (8.19)
given by

H + ,
1n 1 2 1 3
Y (z) = w(0, z) = an z = a0 1 + z + z + z + .
n=0
3 24 360
In order to find the solution of the original dierential equation, we again make the substitution
z = 1/x and Y (z) = Y (x1 ) = y(x). Therefore, in the solution found above, we replace the
zs with 1/x to obtain the solution given by
+ ,
) 1 * 1 1 1 2 1 3
y(x) = Y x = a0 1 + x + x + x + .
3 24 360
EXERCISES 8.7: Finding a Second Linearly Independent Solution, page 482
3. In Problem 21 of Exercises 8.6, we found one power series solution for this dierential equation
about the point x = 0 given by
1 2 1 4 1
y1 (x) = 1 x + x x6 + ,
4 64 2304
where we let a0 = 1. We also found that the roots to the indicial equation are r1 = r2 = 0.
Thus, to find a second linearly independent solution about the regular singular point x = 0,
we will use part (b) of Theorem 7 on page 475 of the text. Therefore, we see that this second
linearly independent solution will have the form given by

H
y2 (x) = y1 (x) ln x + bn xn
n=1

H
y2 (x) = y1 (x) ln x 1
+ x y1 (x) + nbn xn1
n=1
547
Chapter 8

H
y2 (x) = y1 (x) ln x + 2x1 y1 (x) x2 y1 (x) + n(n 1)bn xn2 .
n=1
Substituting these expressions into the dierential equation yields

>
O
H
x2 y1(x) ln x + 2x1 y1 (x) x2 y1 (x) + n(n 1)bn xn2
n=1
>
O >
O
H H
+x y1 (x) ln x + x1 y1 (x) + nbn xn1 + x2 y1 (x) ln x + bn xn = 0,
n=1 n=1
which simplifies to

H
x2 y1(x) ln x + 2xy1 (x) y1 (x) + n(n 1)bn xn
n=1

H
H
+xy1 (x) ln x + y1 (x) + n 2
nbn x + x y1 (x) ln x + bn xn+2 = 0,
n=1 n=1
) *
x2 y1(x) + xy1 (x) 2
+ x y1 (x) ln x + 2xy1 (x)
H
H
H
n n
+ n(n 1)bn x + nbn x + bn xn+2 = 0.
n=1 n=1 n=1
Therefore, since y1 (x) is a solution to the dierential equation, the term in braces is zero and
the above equation reduces to

H
H
H
2xy1 (x) + n(n 1)bn x + n n
nbn x + bn xn+2 = 0.
n=1 n=1 n=1
Next we make the substitution k = n + 2 in the last power series above and the substitution
k = n in the other two power series so that we can sum all three of the power series over the
same power of x, namely xk . Thus, we have

H
H
H
2xy1 (x) + k(k 1)bk x + k k
kbk x + bk2 xk = 0.
k=1 k=1 k=3
By separating out the first two terms in the first two summations above and simplifying, we
obtain

H
H
H
2xy1 (x) + 0 + 2b2 x + 2 k
k(k 1)bk x + b1 x + 2b2 x + 2 k
kbk x + bk2 xk = 0
k=3 k=3 k=3
548
Exercises 8.7

H ) *
2xy1 (x) + b1 x + 4b2 x2 + k 2 bk + bk2 xk = 0. (8.20)
k=3
By dierentiating the series for y1 (x) term by term, we obtain

1 1 3 1 5
y1 (x) = x + x x + .
2 16 384
Thus, substituting this expression for y1 (x) into equation (8.20) above and simplifying yields
6 7 H
2 1 4 1 6 2
) 2 *
x + x x + + b1 x + 4b2 x + k bk + bk2 xk = 0.
8 192 k=3
Therefore, by equating coecients, we see that
b1 = 0;
1
4b2 1 = 0 b2 = ;
4
9b3 + b1 = 0 b3 = 0;
1 3
+ 16b4 + b2 = 0 b4 = ;
8 128
25b5 + b3 = 0 b5 = 0;
1 11
+ 36b6 + b4 = 0 b6 = .
192 13, 824
Substituting these coecients into the solution

H
y2 (x) = y1 (x) ln x + bn xn ,
n=1
yields
1 2 3 4 11
y2 (x) = y1 (x) ln x +x x + x6 + .
4 128 13, 824
Thus, a general solution of this dierential equation is given by
y(x) = c1 y1 (x) + c2 y2 (x),
where
1 2 1 4 1
y1 (x) = 1 x + x x6 + ,
4 64 2304
1 3 4 11
y2 (x) = y1 (x) ln x + x2 x + x6 + .
4 128 13, 824
549
Chapter 8
7. In Problem 25 of Section 8.6, we found a solution to this dierential equation about the regular
singular point x = 0 given by

H (1)n xn+(3/2) 1 5/2 1 7/2
y1 (x) = = x3/2 x + x + ,
n=0
2n1 (n + 2)! 6 48
where we let a0 = 1. We also found that the roots to the indicial equation for this problem
are r1 = 3/2 and r2 = 1/2, and so r1 r2 = 2. Thus, in order to find a second linearly
independent solution about x = 0, we will use part (c) of Theorem 7 on page 475 of the text.
Therefore, we will assume that this second solution has the form

H
y2 (x) = Cy1 (x) ln x + bn xn(1/2) , b0 = 0
n=0
H + ,
1 1
y2 (x)= Cy1 (x) ln x
+ C y1 (x) + n bn xn(3/2)
x n=0
2
H + ,+ ,
1 1 3 1
y2 (x) = Cy1 (x) ln x + 2C y1 (x) C 2 y1 (x) + n n bn xn(5/2) .
x x n=0
2 2
Substituting these expressions into the dierential equation yields

L + ,+ , M
1 1 H 3 1
2
4x Cy1 (x) ln x + 2C y1 (x) C 2 y1 (x) + n n bn xn(5/2)
x x n=0
2 2
L + , M
1 H 1
2
+2x Cy1 (x) ln x + C y1 (x) + n bn xn(3/2)
x n=0
2
L
M
H
(x + 3) Cy1 (x) ln x + bn xn(1/2) = 0.
n=0
Multiplying through, we get

L + ,+ , M
H 3 1
4x2 Cy1 (x) ln x + 8Cxy1 (x) 4Cy1 (x) + 4 n n bn xn(1/2)
n=0
2 2
L + , M
H 1
+ 2x2 Cy1 (x) ln x + 2Cxy1 (x) + 2 n bn xn+(1/2)
n=0
2
L
M
H H
Cxy1 (x) ln x + bn xn+(1/2) + 3Cy1(x) ln x + 3bn xn(1/2) = 0,
n=0 n=0
550
Exercises 8.7
which simplifies to
- .
C 4x2 y1 (x) + 2x2 y1 (x) xy1 (x) 3y1 (x) ln x + 8Cxy1 (x) + 2C(x 2)y1 (x)
H
H
n(1/2)
+ (2n 3) (2n 1) bn x + (2n 1) bn xn+(1/2)
n=0 n=0

H
H
bn xn+(1/2) 3bn xn(1/2) = 0.
n=0 n=0
Since y1 (x) is a solution to the dierential equation, the term in brackets is zero. By shifting
indices so that each power series is summed over the same power of x, we have

H
8Cxy1 (x) + 2C(x 2)y1(x) + (2k 3) (2k 1) bk xk(1/2)
k=0

H
H
H
k(1/2) k(1/2)
+ (2k 3) bk1 x bk1 x 3bk xk(1/2) = 0.
k=1 k=1 k=0
By writing all of these summations as a single power series (noting that the k = 0 term of the
first and last summations add to zero), we obtain

H
8Cxy1 (x) + 2C(x 2)y1(x) + (2k 3) (2k 1) bk xk(1/2)
k=0

H
+ [(2k 3) (2k 1) bk + (2k 3) bk1 bk1 3bk ] xk(1/2) = 0.
k=1
Substituting into this equation the expressions for y1 (x) and y1 (x) given by

H
H
(1)n xn+(3/2) (1)n [n + (3/2)]xn+(1/2)
y1 (x) = , y1 (x) = ,
n=0
2n1 (n + 2)! n=0
2n1 (n + 2)!
yields

H
H
8C(1)n [n + (3/2)]xn+(3/2) 2C(1)n xn+(5/2)
+
n=0
2n1 (n + 2)! n=0
2n1 (n + 2)!

H
H
4C(1)n xn+(3/2)
+ [4k(k 2)bk + 2(k 2)bk1 ] xk(1/2) = 0,
n=0
2n1 (n + 2)!
k=1
551
Chapter 8
where we have simplified the expression inside the last summation. Combining the first and
third power series yields

H
H
8C(1)n (n + 1)xn+(3/2) 2C(1)n xn+(5/2)
+
n=0
2n1 (n + 2)! n=0
2n1 (n + 2)!

H
+ [4k(k 2)bk + 2(k 2)bk1 ] xk(1/2) = 0, (8.21)
k=1
By writing out the terms up to order x7/2 , we obtain

4 5 4 5
3/2 1 5/2 3 7/2 5/2 1 7/2
8C x x + x + + 2C x x +
3 16 6
- .
+ (4b1 2b0 )x + (12b3 + 2b2 )x5/2 + (32b4 + 4b3 )x7/2 + = 0.
1/2
Setting the coecients equal to zero, yields
4b1 2b0 = 0 b1 = b0 /2;

8C = 0 C = 0;
(8/3)C + 2C + 12b3 + 2b2 = 0 b3 = b2 /6;
(2/3)C (1/3)C + 32b4 + 4b3 = 0 b4 = b3 /8 = b2 /48.
From this we see that b0 and b2 are arbitrary constants and that C = 0. Also, since C = 0, we
can use the last power series in (8.21) to obtain the recurrence equation bk = bk1 /(2k). Thus,
every coecient after b4 will depend only on b2 (not on b0 ). Substituting these coecients
into the solution,

H
y2 (x) = Cy1 (x) ln x + bn xn(1/2) ,
n=0
yields 4 5 4 5
1/2 1 1/2 3/2 1 5/2 1 7/2
y2 (x) = b0 x x + b2 x x + x +
2 6 48
The expression in the brackets following b2 is just the series expansion for y1 (x). Hence, in
order to obtain a second linearly independent solution, we must choose b0 to be nonzero.
Taking b0 = 1 and b2 = 0 gives
1 1/2
y2 (x) = x1/2 x .
2
552
Exercises 8.7
y(x) = c1 y1 (x) + c2 y2 (x),
where
1 5/2 1 7/2 1 1/2

y1 (x) = x3/2 x + x + and y2 (x) = x1/2 x .
6 48 2
17. In Problem 35 of Section 8.6, we assumed that there exists a series solution to this problem of
P
the form w(r, x) = n=0 an x
n+r
. This led to the equation (cf. equation (8.15), of the solution
to Problem 35, Exercises 8.6)

H
2 r
/ 0
r (6r 5)a0 x + (k + r)2 [6(k + r) 5]ak + (k + r)ak1 xk+r = 0. (8.22)
k=1
From this we found the indicial equation r 2 (6r 5) = 0, which has roots r = 0, 0, 5/6. By
using the root 5/6, we found the solution w(5/6, x). Hence one solution is
x11/6 x17/6 x23/6

y1 (x) = x5/6 + + ,
11 374 25, 806
where we have chosen a0 = 1 in w(5/6, x). We now seek two more linearly independent
solutions to this dierential equation. To find a second linearly independent solution, we will
use the root r = 0 and set the coecients in equation (8.22) to zero to obtain the recurrence
relation
k 2 (6k 5)ak + kak1 = 0, k 1.
Solving for ak in terms of ak1 gives
ak1
ak = , k 1.
k(6k 5)
Thus, we have
k=1 a1 = a0 ,
a1 a0
k=2 a2 = = ,
14 14
553
Chapter 8
a2 a0
k=3 a3 = = ,
39 546
a3 a0
k=4 a4 = = ,
76 41, 496
a4 a0
k=5 a5 = = .
125 5, 187, 000
Plugging these coecients into the solution w(0, x) and setting a0 = 1 yields a second linearly
independent solution
1 2 1 3 1 1
y2 (x) = 1 x + x x + x4 x5 + .
14 546 41, 496 5, 187, 000
To find a third linearly independent solution, we will use the repeated root r = 0 and assume
that, as in the case of second order equations with repeated roots, the solution that we seek
will have the form
H
y3 (x) = y2 (x) ln x + cn xn .
n=1
Since the first three derivatives of y3 (x) are given by

H
y3 (x) = y2 (x) ln x 1
+ x y2 (x) + ncn xn1 ,
n=1

H
y3 (x) = y2 (x) ln x + 2x1 y2 (x) x2 y2 (x) + (n 1)ncn xn2 ,
n=1

H
y3 (x) = y2(x) ln x + 3x1 y2 (x) 3x2 y2 (x) 3
+ 2x y2 (x) + (n 2)(n 1)ncn xn3 ,
n=1
substituting y3 (x) into the dierential equation yields

) *
6x3 y (x) + 13x2 y (x) + x + x2 y (x) + xy(x)
L
M
H
= 6x3 y2 (x) ln x + 3x1 y2(x) 3x2 y2 (x) + 2x3 y2 (x) + (n 2)(n 1)ncn xn3
n=1
L
M
H
1 2
+13x2 y2 (x) ln x + 2x y2 (x) x y2 (x) + (n 1)ncn xn2
n=1
L
M L
M
) * H H
+ x + x2 y2 (x) ln x + x1 y2 (x) + ncn xn1 + x y2 (x) ln x + cn xn = 0.
n=1 n=1
554
Exercises 8.7
Since y2 (x) is a solution to the given equation, this simplifies to

H
18x2 y2 (x) + 8xy2 (x) + xy2 (x) + 6(n 2)(n 1)ncn xn
n=1

H
H
H
H
n n n+1
+ 13(n 1)ncn x + ncn x + ncn x + cn xn+1 = 0.
n=1 n=1 n=1 n=1
By shifting indices and then starting all of the resulting power series at the same point, we
can combine all of the summations above into a single power series. Thus, we have
18x2 y2 (x) + 8xy2 (x) + xy2 (x)

H
+c1 x + [6(k 2)(k 1)kck + 13(k 1)kck + kck + kck1] xk = 0. (8.23)
k=2
By computing y2 (x) and y2(x), we obtain
1 1 2 1
y2 (x) = 1 + x x + x3 + ,
7 182 10374
1 1 1
y2(x) = x+ x2 + .
7 91 3458
By substituting these expressions into equation (8.23), we have

+ , + ,
2 1 x x2 x x2 x3
18x + + + 8x 1 + + +
7 91 3458 7 182 10374
+ , H
x2 x3 x4 - 3 .
+x 1 x + + + + c1 x + (6k 5k 2 )ck + kck1 xk = 0.
14 546 41, 496 k=2
Writing out the terms up to orderx3 we find

+ , + ,
19 2 31
(7 + c1 ) x + + 28c2 + 2c1 x + + 117c3 + 3c2 x3 + = 0.
7 182
By equating coecients to zero, we obtain
7 + c1 = 0 c1 = 7;
19/7 + 28c2 + 2c1 = 0 c2 = 117/196;
31/182 + 117c3 + 3c2 = 0 c3 = 4997/298116.
555
Chapter 8
Therefore, plugging these coecients into the expansion

H
y3 (x) = y2 (x) ln x + cn xn ,
n=1
yields a third linearly independent solution is given by

117 2 4997 3
y3 (x) = y2 (x) ln x + 7x x + x + .
196 298116
Thus, a general solution is
y(x) = c1 y1 (x) + c2 y2 (x) + c3 y3 (x),
where
x11/6 x17/6 x23/6
y1 (x) = x5/6 + + ,
11 374 25, 806
x2 x3 x4 x5
y2 (x) = 1 x + + + ,
14 546 41, 496 5, 187, 000
117x2 4997x3
y3 (x) = y2 (x) ln x + 7x + + .
196 298, 116
23. We will try to find a solution of the form

H
y(x) = an xn+r
n=0

H

y (x) = (n + r)an xn+r1
n=0
H
y (x) = (n + r)(n + r 1)an xn+r2 .
n=0
Therefore, we substitute these expressions into the dierential equation to obtain

H
H
H
x2 y + y 2y = x2 (n + r)(n + r 1)an xn+r2 + (n + r)an xn+r1 2 an xn+r = 0
n=0 n=0 n=0

H
H
H
(k + r)(k + r 1)ak xk+r + (k + r + 1)ak+1 xk+r 2ak xk+r = 0
k=0 k=1 k=0
556
Exercises 8.7

H
ra0 xr1 + [(k + r)(k + r 1)ak + (k + r + 1)ak+1 2ak ] xk+r = 0,
k=0
where we have changed all of the indices and the starting point for the second summation so
that we could write these three power series as a single power series. By assuming that a0 = 0
and ra0 xr1 = 0, we see that r = 0. Plugging r = 0 into the coecients in the summation
and noting that each of these coecients must be zero yields the recurrence relation
k(k 1)ak + (k + 1)ak+1 2ak = 0, k0

ak+1 = (2 k)ak , k 0.
Thus, we see that the coecients of the solution are given by
k=0 a1 = 2a0 ; k = 1 a2 = a1 = 2a0 ;

k=2 a3 = 0 ; k=3 a4 = a3 = 0 .
Since each coecient is a multiple of the previous coecient, we see that an = 0 for n 3. If
we take a0 = 1, then one solution is
y1 (x) = 1 + 2x + 2x2 .
We will now use the reduction of order procedure described in Problem 31, Section 6.1, on
page 326 of the text to find a second linearly independent solution. Thus we seek for a solution
of the form
y(x) = y1 (x)v(x)
y (x) = y1 (x)v(x) + y1 (x)v (x)
y (x) = y1 (x)v(x) + 2y1 (x)v (x) + y1 (x)v (x).
Substituting y(x), y (x), and y (x) into the given equation yields
x2 y + y 2y = x2 [y1v + 2y1 v + y1 v ] + [y1 v + y1 v ] 2 [y1 v]

- . - . - .
= x2 y1 v + 2x2 y1 + y1 v + x2 y1 + y1 2y1 v
- . - .
= x2 y1 v + 2x2 y1 + y1 v = 0
557
Chapter 8
(since y1 is a solution, the coecient at v equals to zero). With w = v , the last equation
becomes a first order separable equation which can be solved by methods of Section 2.2.
Namely,
- . - .
x2 y1 (x) w (x) + 2x2 y1 (x) + y1 (x) w(x) = 0
+ ,
dw 2x2 y1 (x) + y1 (x) 2y (x) 1
= dx = + 2 dx
w x2 y1 (x) y1 (x) x
3 3
2y (x)dx dx 1
ln |w| = = 2 ln |y 1 (x)| +
y1 (x) x2 x
4 5
1 e1/x
w(x) = exp 2 ln |y1(x)| + = , (8.24)
x [y1 (x)]2
where we have taken zero integration constant and positive function w. Since
[y1 (x)]2 = 4x4 + 8x3 + 8x2 + 4x + 1 and

2 3 4
x x x
e1/x = 1 + x1 + + + +
2 6 24
(we have used the Maclaurin expansion for ez with z = 1/x), performing long division with
descending powers of x in each polynomial, we see that
x2 x3 x4
e1/x 1 + x1 + + + + 1 1 1
= 2 6 24 = x4 x5 + x6 + .
[y1 (x)]2 4 3 2
4x + 8x + 8x + 4x + 1 4 4 8
Therefore, (8.24) yields
1 1 1
v (x) = w(x) = x4 x5 + x6 +
34 + 4 8 ,
1 4 1 5 1 6 1 1 4 1 5
v(x) = x x + x + dx = x3 + x x +
4 4 8 12 16 40
and so
4 5
- 2
. 1 3 1 4 1 5
y(x) = y1 (x)v(x) = 1 + 2x + 2x x + x x +
12 16 40
1 1 2 1 3
= x1 x x + .
6 24 120
is a second linearly independent solution. Thus, a general solution to this dierential equation
is given by y(x) = c1 y1 (x) + c2 y2 (x), where
1 1 2 1 3
y1 (x) = 1 + 2x + 2x2 and y2 (x) = x1 x x + .
6 24 120
558
Exercises 8.8
EXERCISES 8.8: Special Functions, page 493
1. For this problem, we see that = 1/2, + + 1/4, and = 2. First we note that is not
an integer. Next, by solving in the last two equations above simultaneously for and , we
see that either = 1 and = 1 or = 2 and = 1. Therefore, by assuming that = 1 and
= 2, equations (10) on page 485 and (17) on page 486 of the text yield the two solutions
+ , + ,
1 1/2 3 5 3
y1 (x) = F 1, 2; ; x and y2 (x) = x F , ; ;x .
2 2 2 2
Therefore, a general solution for this dierential equation is given by
+ , + ,
1 1/2 3 5 3
y(x) = c1 F 1, 2; ; x + c2 x F , ; ;x .
2 2 2 2
Notice that

H
H
()n ()n ()n ()n
F (, ; ; x) = 1 + xn = 1 + xn = F (, ; ; x).
n=0
n!()n n=0
n!()n
Therefore, letting = 2 and = 1 yields an equivalent form of the same solution given by
+ , + ,
1 1/2 5 3 3
y(x) = c1 F 2, 1; ; x + c2 x F , ; ;x .
2 2 2 2
13. This equation can be written as

+ ,
2 2 1
x y + xy + x y = 0.
4
Thus, 2 = 1/4 which implies that = 1/2. Since this is not an integer (even though 2 is
an integer), by the discussion on page 487 of the text, two linearly independent solutions to
this problem are given by equations (25) and (26) also on page 487, that is

H
(1)n # x %2n+1/2
y1 (x) = J1/2 (x) = ,
n=0
n! (3/2 + n) 2
H
(1)n # x %2n1/2
y2 (x) = J1/2 (x) = .
n=0
n! (1/2 + n) 2
Therefore, a general solution to this dierential equation is given by
y(x) = c1 J1/2 (x) + c2 J1/2 (x).
559
Chapter 8
15. In this problem = 1. Thus, one solution to this dierential equation is given by
(1)n # x %2n+1

H
y1 (x) = J1 (x) = .
n=0
n! (2 + n) 2
By the discussion on page 487 of the text, J1 (x) and J1 (x) are linearly dependent. Thus,
J1 (x) will not be a second linearly independent solution for this problem. But, a second
linearly independent solution will be given by equation (30) on page 488 of the text with
m = 1. That is we have
cos()J (x) J (x)
y2 (x) = Y1 (x) = lim .
1 sin()
Therefore, a general solution to this dierential equation is given by
y(x) = c1 J1 (x) + c2 Y1 (x).
21. Let y(x) = x J (x). Then, by equation (31) on page 488 of the text, we have
y (x) = x J1 (x).

/ - .0
y (x) = Dx [y (x)] = Dx [x J1 (x)] = Dx x x1 J1 (x)
- .
= x1 J1 (x) + xDx x1 J1 (x) = x1 J1 (x) + x J2 (x).
Notice that in order to take the last derivative above, we have again used equation (31) on
page 488 of the text. By substituting these expressions into the left-hand side of the first
dierential equation given in the problem, we obtain
- .
xy + (1 2)y + xy = x x1 J1 (x) + x J2 (x) + (1 2) [x J1 (x)] + x [x J (x)]
= x J1 (x) + x+1 J2 (x) + x J1 (x) 2x J1 (x) + x+1 J (x). (8.25)
Notice that by equation (33) on page 488 of the text, we have
2( 1)
J (x) = J1 (x) J2 (x)
x
560
Exercises 8.8
x+1 J (x) = 2( 1)x J1 (x) x+1 J2 (x).
Replacing x+1 J (x) in equation (8.25) with the above expression and simplifying yields
xy + (1 2)y + xy = x J1 (x) + x+1 J2 (x) + x J1 (x)

2x J1 (x) + 2( 1)x J1 (x) x+1 J2 (x) = 0.
Therefore, y(x) = x J (x) is a solution to this type of dierential equation.
In order to find a solution to the dierential equation xy 2y + xy = 0, we observe that this

equation is of the same type as the equation given above with
3
1 2 = 2 = .
2
Thus, a solution to this equation will be

H (1)n # x %2n+3/2
y(x) = x3/2 J3/2 (x) = x3/2 .
n=0
n!(5/2 + n) 2
29. In Legendre polynomials, n is a fixed nonnegative integer. Thus, in the first such polynomial,
n equals zero. Therefore, we see that [n/2] = [0/2] = 0 and, by equation (43) on page 491 of
the text, we have
(1)0 0! 0
P0 (x) = 20 x = 1.
0!0!0!
Similarly, we have
4 5
1 (1)0 2! 1
n=1 =0 P1 (x) = 21 x = x,
2 1!0!1!
4 5 + ,
2 2 (1)0 4! 2 (1)1 2! 0 3x2 1
n=2 =1 P2 (x) = 2 x + x = ,
2 2!0!2! 1!1!0! 2
4 5 + ,
3 3 (1)0 6! 3 (1)1 4! 1 5x3 3x
n=3 =1 P3 (x) = 2 x + x = ,
2 3!0!3! 2!1!1! 2
4 5 + ,
4 4 (1)0 8! 4 (1)1 6! 2 (1)2 4! 0
n=4 =2 P4 (x) = 2 x + x + x
2 4!0!4! 3!1!2! 2!2!0!
35x4 30x2 + 3
= .
8
561
Chapter 8
37. Since the Taylor series expansion of an analytic function f (t) about t = 0 is given by

H f (n) (0)
f (t) = tn ,
n=0
n!
2
we see that H(x) is just the nth derivative of y(t) = e2txt with respect to t evaluated at the
point t = 0 (treating x as a fixed parameter). Therefore, we have
2
y(t) = e2txt H0 (x) = y(0) = e0 = 1,
2
y (t) = (2x 2t)e2txt H1 (x) = y (0) = 2xe0 = 2x,
2
y (t) = [2 + (2x 2t)2 ] e2txt H2 (x) = y (0) = [2 + (2x)2 ] e0 = 4x2 2,
2
y (t) = [6(2x 2t) + (2x 2t)3 ] e2txt H3 (x) = y (0) = 8x3 12x.
39. To find the first four Laguerre polynomials, we need to find the first four derivatives of the
function y(x) = xn ex . Therefore, we have
y (0) (x) = xn ex ,
) *
y (x) = nxn1 xn ex ,
) *
y (x) = n(n 1)xn2 2nxn1 + xn ex ,
) *
y (x) = n(n 1)(n 2)xn3 3n(n 1)xn2 + 3nxn1 xn ex .
Substituting these expressions into Rodriguess formula and plugging in the appropriate values
of n yields
ex
L0 (x) = x0 ex = 1,
0!
ex - .
L1 (x) = 1x11 x1 ex = 1 x,
1!
ex - . 2 4x + x2
L2 (x) = 2(2 1)x22 2 2x21 + x2 ex = ,
2! 2
ex - .
L3 (x) = 3(3 1)(3 2)x33 3 3(3 1)x32 + 3 3x31 x3 ex
3!
6 18x + 9x2 x3
= .
6
562
Review Problems
1. (a) To construct the Taylor polynomials
y (0) y (0) 2 y (n) (0) n

pn (x) = y(0) + x+ x ++ x
1! 2! n!
approximating the solution to the given initial value problem, we need y(0), y (0), etc.
y(0) is provided by the initial condition, y(0) = 1. The value of y (0) can be deduced
from the dierential equation itself. We have
y (0) = (0)y(0) y(0)2 = (0)(1) (1)2 = 1.
Dierentiating both sides of the given equation, y = xy y 2 , and substituting x = 0

into the resulting equation, we get
y = y + xy 2yy
y (0) = y(0) + (0)y (0) 2y(0)y (0) = (1) + (0)(1) 2(1)(1) = 3.
Dierentiating once more yields
y = y + y + xy 2y y 2yy
y (0) = (1) + (1) + (0)(3) 2(1)(1) 2(1)(3) = 10.
Thus,
1 3 10 3 3x2 5x3
p3 (x) = 1 + x + x2 + x = 1x+ .
1! 2! 3! 2 3
(b) The values of z(0) and z (0) are given. Namely, z(0) = 1 and z (0) = 1. Substituting
x = 0 into the given equation yields
z (0) (0)3 z (0) + (0)z(0)2 = 0 z (0) = 0.
We now dierentiate the given equation and evaluate the result at x = 0.
z 3x2 z x3 z + z 2 + 2xzz = 0
563
Chapter 8
z (0) = 3(0)2z (0) + (0)3 z (0) z(0)2 2(0)z(0)z (0) = 1.
One more dierentiation yields
z (4) 6xz 3x2 z 3x2 z x3 z + 2zz + 2zz + 2xz z + 2xzz = 0

z (4) (0) = 4z(0)z (0) = 4.
Hence,
1 0 1 3 4 4 x3 x4
p4 (x) = 1 + x + x2 + x + x = 1 + x + .
1! 2! 3! 4! 6 6
3. (a) Since both p(x) = x2 and q(x) = 2 are analytic at x = 0, a general solution to the
given equation is also analytic at this point. Thus, it has an expansion
H
y= ak xk
k=0

H

y = kak xk1
k=1
H
y = k(k 1)ak xk2 .
k=2
Substituting these expansions for y, y , and y into the original equation yields

H
H H
k2 2 k1
k(k 1)ak x +x kak x 2 ak xk = 0
k=2 k=1 k=0

H
H
H
k(k 1)ak xk2 + kak xk+1 2ak xk = 0.
k=2 k=1 k=0
We now shift the indices of summation so that all three sums contain like powers xn . In
the first sum, we let k 2 = n; in the second sum, let k + 1 = n; and let k = n in the
third sum. This yields
H
H
H
(n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 xn + (n 1)an1 xn 2an xn = 0.
n=0 n=2 n=0
Separating the terms corresponding to n = 0 and n = 1, and combining the rest under
one summation, we obtain

H
(2a2 2a0 ) + (6a3 2a1 ) x + [(n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 + (n 1)an1 2an ] xn = 0.
n=2
564
Review Problems
Therefore,
2a2 2a0 = 0,
6a3 2a1 = 0,
(n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 + (n 1)an1 2an = 0, n 2.
This yields
a1 2an (n 1)an1
a2 = a0 , a3 = , and an+2 = , n 2.
3 (n + 2)(n + 1)
Hence,
a1
y(x) = a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + a3 x3 + = a0 + a1 x + a0 x2 + x3 +
+ , 3
) * x 3
= a0 1 + x2 + + a1 x + + .
3
5. Clearly, x = 2 is an ordinary point for the given equation because p(x) = x 2 and q(x) = 1
are analytic everywhere. Thus we seek for a solution of the form

H
w(x) = ak (x 2)k .
k=0
Dierentiating this power series yields

H
H
k1
w (x) = kak (x 2) and w (x) = k(k 1)ak (x 2)k2 .
k=1 k=2
Therefore,

H
H
w + (x 2)w w = k(k 1)ak (x 2)k2 + (x 2) kak (x 2)k1
k=2 k=1

H
ak (x 2)k = 0
k=0

H
H
H
k(k 1)ak (x 2)k2 + kak (x 2)k ak (x 2)k = 0.
k=2 k=1 k=0
Shifting the index of summation in the first sum yields

H
H
H
n n
(n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 (x 2) + nan (x 2) an (x 2)n = 0
n=0 n=1 n=0
565
Chapter 8
L
M
L
M
H H H
n n n
2a2 + (n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 (x 2) + nan (x 2) a0 + an (x 2) =0
n=1 n=1 n=1

H
(2a2 a0 ) + [(n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 + nan an ] (x 2)n = 0,
n=1
where we have separated the terms corresponding to n = 0 and collected the rest under one
summation. In order that the above power series equals zero, it must have all zero coecients.
Thus,
2a2 a0 = 0,
(n + 2)(n + 1)an+2 + nan an = 0, n1
a2 = a0 /2 ,

an+2 = (1 n)an /[(n + 2)(n + 1)] , n 1.
For n = 1 and n = 2, the last equation gives a3 = 0 and a4 = a2 /12 = a0 /24. Therefore,
w(x) = a0 + a1 (x 2) + a2 (x 2)2 + a3 (x 2)3 + a4 (x 2)4 +

a0 1
= a0 + a1 (x 2) + (x 2)2 + (0)(x 2)3 a0 (x 2)4 +
4 2 5 24
(x 2)2 (x 2)4
= a0 1 + + + a1 (x 2).
2 24
7. (a) The point x = 0 is a regular singular point for the given equation because
5x 5 9x
p(x) = 2
= , q(x) = ,
x x x2
and the limits
p0 = lim xp(x) = lim (5) = 5,

x0 x0
2
q0 = lim x q(x) = lim (9 x) = 9
x0 x0
exist. The indicial equation (3) on page 461 of the text becomes
r(r 1) + (5)r + 9 = 0 r 2 6r + 9 = 0 (r 3)2 = 0.
566
Review Problems
Hence, r = 3 is the exponent of the singularity x = 0, and a solution to the given

dierential equation has the form

H
H
3 k
y=x ak x = ak xk+3 .
k=0 k=0
Substituting this power series into the given equation yields

J K J K J K
H H H
x2 ak xk+3 5x ak xk+3 + (9 x) ak xk+3 = 0
k=0 k=0 k=0

H
H
H
k+3 k+3
(k + 3)(k + 2)ak x 5(k + 3)ak x + (9 x) ak xk+3 = 0
k=0 k=0 k=0

H
H
[(k + 3)(k + 2) 5(k + 3) + 9] ak xk+3 ak xk+4 = 0
k=0 k=0

H
H
k 2 ak xk+3 ak xk+4 = 0
k=0 k=0

H H
n2 an xn+3 an1 xn+3 = 0
n=1 n=1
H
) *
n2 an an1 xn+3 = 0 .
n=1
Thus,
an1
n2 an an1 = 0 or an = , n 1.
n2
This recurrence relation yields
n = 1 : a1 = a0 /(1)2 = a0 ,
n = 2 : a2 = a1 /(2)2 = a0 /4 ,
n = 3 : a3 = a2 /(3)2 = (a0 /4) /9 = a0 /36 .
Therefore,
) *
y(x) = x3 a0 + a1 x + a2 x2 + a3 x3 +
# % + ,
3 a0 2 a0 3 3 4 x5 x6
= x a0 + a0 x + x + x + = a0 x + x + + + .
4 36 4 36
567
Chapter 8
568
CHAPTER 9: Matrix Methods for Linear Systems
EXERCISES 9.1: Introduction, page 507
3. We start by expressing right-hand sides of all equations as dot products.
x + y + z = [1, 1, 1] [x, y, z], 2z x = [1, 0, 2] [x, y, z], 4y = [0, 4, 0] [x, y, z].
Thus, by definition of the product of a matrix and column vector, the matrix form is given by

x 1 1 1 x

y = 1 0 2 y .

z 0 4 0 z
7. First we have to express the second derivative, y , as a first derivative in order to rewrite the
equation as a first order system. Denoting y by v we get
y = v, y = v,
or k b
mv + bv + ky = 0 v = y v.
m m
Expressing the right-hand side of each equation as a dot product, we obtain
4 5
k b k b
v = [0, 1] [y, v], y v = , [y, v].
m m m m
Thus, the matrix form of the system is
L M L ML M
y 0 1 y
= .
v k/m b/m v
11. Introducing the auxiliary variables
x1 = x, x2 = x , x3 = y, x4 = y ,
569
Chapter 9
we can rewrite the given system in normal form:
x1 = x2 x1 = x2
x3 = x4 x2 = 3x1 2x3
or
x2 + 3x1 + 2x3 = 0 x3 = x4
x4 2x1 = 0 x4 = 2x1 .
Since
x2 = [0, 1, 0, 0] [x1 , x2 , x3 , x4 ], 3x1 2x3 = [3, 0, 2, 0] [x1 , x2 , x3 , x4 ],

x4 = [0, 0, 0, 1] [x1 , x2 , x3 , x4 ], 2x1 = [2, 0, 0, 0] [x1 , x2 , x3 , x4 ],
the matrix is given by

x1 0 1 0 0 x1

x2
= 3 0 2 0 x2 .

x3 0 0 0 1 x3
x4 2 0 0 0 x4
EXERCISES 9.2: Review 1: Linear Algebraic Equations, page 512
3. By subtracting 2 times the first equation from the second, we eliminate x1 from the latter.
Similarly, x1 is eliminated from the third equation by subtracting the first equation from it.
So we get
x1 + 2x2 + x3 = 3, x1 + 2x2 + x3 = 3,
3x3 = 6, or x2 3x3 = 6,
x2 3x3 = 6 (interchanging last two equations) x3 = 2.
The second unknown, x2 , can be eliminated from the first equation by subtracting 2 times
the first one from it:
x1 + 7x3 = 15,
x2 3x3 = 6,
x3 = 2.
570
Exercises 9.2
Finally, we eliminate x3 from the first two equations by adding (7) times and 3 times,
respectively, the third equation. This gives
x1 = 1,
x2 = 0,
x3 = 2.
7. Subtracting 3 times the first equation from the second equation yields
x1 + 3x2 = 0,
0 = 0.
The last equation is trivially satisfied, so we ignore it. Thus, just one equation remains:
x1 + 3x2 = 0 x1 = 3x2 .
Choosing x2 as a free variable, we get x1 = 3s, x2 = s, where s is any number.
9. We eliminate x1 from the first equation by adding (1 i) times the second equation to it:
[2 (1 + i)(1 i)]x2 = 0,
x1 (1 + i)x2 = 0.
Since (1 i)(1 + i) = 12 i2 = 1 (1) = 2, we obtain
0 = 0, 1 1 + i
x2 = x1 = x1 .
x1 (1 + i)x2 = 0 1+i 2
Assigning an arbitrary complex value to x1 , say 2s, we see that the system has infinitely many
solutions given by
x1 = 2s, x2 = (1 + i)s, where s is any complex number.
11. It is slightly more convenient to put the last equation at the top:
x1 + x2 + 5x3 = 0,
2x1 + x3 = 1,
3x1 + x2 + 4x3 = 1.
571
Chapter 9
We then eliminate x1 from the second equation by adding 2 times the first one to it; and by
subtracting 3 times the first equation from the third, we eliminate x1 in the latter.
x1 + x2 + 5x3 = 0,
2x2 11x3 = 1,
2x2 + 11x3 = 1.
To make the computations more convenient, we multiply the first equation by 2.
2x1 + 2x2 + 10x3 = 0,

2x2 11x3 = 1,
2x2 + 11x3 = 1.
Now we add the second equation to each of the remaining, and obtain
2x1 x3 = 1,
2x1 x3 = 1,
2x2 11x3 = 1, or
2x2 11x3 = 1.
0=0
Choosing x3 as free variable, i.e., x3 = s, yields x1 = (s + 1)/2, x2 = (11s + 1)/2,

< s < .
13. The given system can be written in the equivalent form
(2 r)x1 3x2 = 0,
x1 (2 + r)x2 = 0.
The variable x1 can be eliminated from the first equation by subtracting (2 r) times the
second equation:
[3 + (2 r)(2 + r)]x2 = 0, (1 r 2 ) x2 = 0,
or
x1 (2 + r)x2 = 0 x1 (2 + r)x2 = 0.
If 1 r 2 = 0, i.e., r = 1, then the first equation implies x2 = 0. Substituting this into

the second equation, we get x1 . Thus, the given system has a unique (zero) solution for any
r = 1, in particular, for r = 2.
572
Exercises 9.3
If r = 1 or r = 1, then the first equation in the latter system becomes trivial 0 = 0, and the
system degenerates to
x1 (2 + r)x2 = 0 x1 = (2 + r)x2 .
Therefore, there are infinitely many solutions to the given system of the form
x1 = (2 + r)s, x2 = s, s (, ), r = 1 .
In particular, for r = 1 we obtain
x1 = 3s, x2 = s, s (, ).
EXERCISES 9.3: Review 2: Matrices and Vectors, page 521

L ML M L M L M
1 2 1 0 12 02 1 2
5. (a) AB = = = .
2 3 1 1 23 03 1 3
L ML M L M L M
1 2 1 1 1 4 1 2 5 1
(b) AC = = = .
2 3 2 1 2 6 2 3 8 1
(c) By the Distributive Property of matrix multiplication given on page 515 of the text, we
have
L M L M L M
1 2 5 1 6 3
A (B + C) = AB + AC = + = .
1 3 8 1 9 4
13. Authors note: We will use Ri + cRj Rk to denote the row operation add row i to c times
row j and place the result into row k. We will use cRj Rk to denote the row operation
multiply row j by c and place the result into row k.
As in Example 1 on page 517 of the text, we will perform row-reduction on the matrix [A|I].
Thus, we have
1
1
2 1 1 1 1 0 0
1
[A|I] =
2 1 0 11 0 1 0

1
3 1 1 1 0 0 1
573
Chapter 9
1
1
2 1 1 1 1 0 0
R2 + R1 R2 1
0 0 1 1 1 1 0
2R3 + 3R1 R3 1
1
0 1 1 1 3 0 2
1
1
2 0 0 1 2 0 2
1
R1 R3 R1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
1
1
0 1 1 1 3 0 2
1
1
R1 /2 R1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
1
R3 R2 0 1 1 11 3 0 2

1
R2 R3 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
1
1
1 0 0 1 1 0 1
1
R2 + R3 R2 0 1 0 11 2 1 2
.
1
0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Therefore, the inverse matrix is

1 0 1

A 1
= 2 1 2

.
1 1 0
To check the algebra, its a good idea to multiply A by A1 to verify that the product is the
identity matrix.
19. Authors note: We will use Ri + cRj Rk to denote the row operation add row i to c times
row j and place the result into row k. We will use cRj Rk to denote the row operation
multiply row j by c and place the result into row k.
To find the inverse matrix X1 (t), we will again use the method of Example 1 on page 517 of
the text. Thus, we start with
1
1
et et e2t 1 1 0 0
1
[X(t)|I] = t
e e
t
2e2t 11 0 1 0

1
et et 4e2t 1 0 0 1
574
Exercises 9.3
1
t t 2t 1
e e e 1 1 0 0
R2 R1 R2 1
0 2et e2t 11 1 1 0
R3 R1 R3
1
0 0 3e2t 1 1 0 1
1
1
et et e2t 1 1 0 0
R2 /2 R2 1
0 et e2t /2 11 1/2 1/2 0
R3 /3 R3
2t 11
0 0 e 1/3 0 1/3
1
t 1
et e 0 1 4/3 0 1/3
R1 R3 R1 1
0 et 1
0 1 1/3 1/2 1/6
R2 R3 /2 R2
2t 11
0 0 e 1/3 0 1/3
1
1
et 0 0 1 1 1/2 1/2
1
R1 R2 R1 0 et 0 11 1/3 1/2 1/6

1
0 0 e2t 1 1/3 0 1/3
1
1
et R1 R1 1 0 0 1 et et /2 et /2
1
et R2 R2 0 1 0 11 et /3 et /2 et /6
.
1
e2t R3 R3 0 0 1 1 e2t /3 0 e2t /3
Thus, the inverse matrix X1 (t) is given by the matrix

et et /2 et /2

X1 (t) = et /3 et /2 et /6 .

e2t /3 0 e2t /3
23. We will calculate this determinant by first finding its cofactor expansion about row 1. There-
fore, we have 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 1
1 1
1 3 1 2 1 = (1) 11 1 2 1
1 0 + 0 = 2 10 = 12.
1 1 1 5 2 1
1 1
1 1 5 2 1
37. We first calculate X (t) by dierentiating each entry of X(t). Therefore, we have
L M
2t 3t
2e 3e
X (t) = .
2e2t 6e3t
575
Chapter 9
Thus, substituting the matrix X(t) into the dierential equation and performing matrix mul-
tiplication yields
L M L ML M L M
2e2t 3e3t 1 1 e2t e3t e2t + e2t e3t + 2e3t
= = .
2e2t 6e3t 2 4 e2t 2e3t 2e2t 4e2t 2e3t 8e3t
Since this equation is true, we see that X(t) does satisfy the given dierential equation.
?
39. (a) To calculate A(t) dt, we integrate each entry of A(t) to obtain
3 L ? ? , M L 2 M
t dt e dt t /2 + c1 et + c2
A(t) dt = ? ? , = .
1 dt e dt t + c3 et + c4
(b) Taking the definite integral of each entry of B(t) yields

31 L ?1 ?1 M L 11 1 M L M
cos t dt sin t dt sin t 1 cos t 11 sin 1 cos 1 1
B(t) dt = ?01 ? 01 = 101 101 = .
sin t dt cos t dt cos t 1 sin t 1 1 cos 1 sin 1
0 0 0 0 0
(c) By the product rule on page 521 of the text, we see that
d
[A(t)B(t)] = A(t)B (t) + A (t)B(t).
dt
Therefore, we first calculate A (t) and B (t) by dierentiating each entry of A(t) and
B(t), respectively, to obtain
L M L M
t
1 e sin t cos t
A (t) = and B (t) = .
0 et cos t sin t
Hence, by matrix multiplication we have
d
[A(t)B(t)] = A(t)B (t) + A (t)B(t)
dt L ML M L ML M
t et sin t cos t 1 et cos t sin t
= +
1 et cos t sin t 0 et sin t cos t
L M L M
et cos t t sin t t cos t et sin t cos t + et sin t et cos t sin t
= +
et cos t sin t cos t et sin t et sin t et cos t
L M
(1 + et ) cos t + (et t) sin t (et t) cos t (et + 1) sin t
= .
et cos t + (et 1) sin t (et 1) cos t et sin t
576
Exercises 9.4
EXERCISES 9.4: Linear Systems in Normal Form, page 530
1. To write this system in matrix form, we will define the vectors x(t) = col[x(t), y(t)] (which
means that x (t) = col[x (t), y (t)]) and f(t) = col[t2 , et ], and the matrix
L M
3 1
A(t) = .
1 2
Thus, this system becomes the equation in matrix form given by

L M L ML M L M
x (t) 3 1 x(t) t2
= + .
y (t) 1 2 y(t) et
We can see that this equation is equivalent to the original system by performing matrix
multiplication and addition to obtain the vector equation
L M L M L M L M
x (t) 3x(t) y(t) t2 3x(t) y(t) + t2
= + = .
y (t) x(t) + 2y(t) et x(t) + 2y(t) + et
Since two vectors are equal only when their corresponding components are equal, we see that
this vector equation implies that
x (t) = 3x(t) y(t) + t2 ,

y (t) = x(t) + 2y(t) + et ,
which is the original system.
5. This equation can be written as a first order system in normal form by using the substitutions
x1 (t) = y(t) and x2 (t) = y (t). With these substitutions this dierential equation becomes the
system
x1 (t) = 0 x1 (t) + x2 (t),
x2 (t) = 10x1 (t) + 3x2 (t) + sin t.
We can then write this system as a matrix dierential equation by defining the vectors x(t) =
col[x1 (t), x2 (t)] (which means that x (t) = col[x1 (t), x2 (t)]), f(t) = col[0, sin t], and the matrix
L M
0 1
A= .
10 3
577
Chapter 9
Hence, the system above in normal form becomes the dierential equation given in matrix
form by
L M L ML M L M
x1 (t) 0 1 x1 (t) 0
= + .
x2 (t) 10 3 x2 (t) sin t
(As in Problem 1 above, we can see that this equation in matrix form is equivalent to the
system by performing matrix multiplication and addition and then noting that corresponding
components of equal vectors are equal.)
7. This equation can be written as a first order system in normal form by using the substitutions
x1 (t) = w(t), x2 (t) = w (t), x3 (t) = w (t), and x4 (t) = w (t). With these substitutions this
dierential equation becomes the system
x1 (t) = 0 x1 (t) + x2 (t) + 0 x3 (t) + 0 x4 (t),

x2 (t) = 0 x1 (t) + 0 x2 (t) + x3 (t) + 0 x4 (t),
x3 (t) = 0 x1 (t) + 0 x2 (t) + 0 x3 (t) + x4 (t),
x4 (t) = x1 (t) + 0 x2 (t) + 0 x3 (t) + 0 x4 (t) + t2 .
We can then write this system as a matrix dierential equation x = Ax by defining the vectors
x(t) = col[x1 (t), x2 (t), x3 (t), x4 (t)] (which means that x (t) = col[x1 (t), x2 (t), x3 (t), x4 (t)]),
f(t) = col[0, 0, 0, t2], and the matrix

0 1 0 0

0 0 1 0
A=
0 0 0 1
.

1 0 0 0
That is, the given fourth order dierential equation is equivalent to the matrix system

x1 (t) 0 1 0 0 x1 (t) 0

x2 (t) 0 0 1 0 x2 (t) 0
= + .

x
3 (t) 0 0 0 1 3x (t) 0
x4 (t) 1 0 0 0 x4 (t) t2
578
Exercises 9.4
17. Notice that by scalar multiplication these vector functions can be written as

e2t e2t 0

0 , e2t , e3t .

5e2t e2t 0
Thus, as in Example 2 on page 526 of the text, we will prove that these vectors are linearly
independent by showing that the only way that we can have

e2t e2t 0

c1 2t
0 + c2 e + c3 e
3t =0

5e2t e2t 0
for all t in (, ) is for c1 = c2 = c3 = 0. Since the equation above must be true for all t,
it must be true for t = 0. Thus, c1 , c2 , and c3 must satisfy

1 1 0

c1 0

+ c2
1 + c3 1

= 0,
5 1 0
which is equivalent to the system
c1 + c2 = 0,
c2 + c3 = 0,
5c1 c2 = 0.
By solving the first and last of these equations simultaneously, we see that c1 = c2 = 0.
Substituting these values into the second equation above yields c3 = 0. Therefore, the original
set of vectors must be linearly independent on the interval (, ).
21. Since it is given that these vectors are solutions to the system x (t) = Ax(t), in order to
determine whether they are linearly independent, we need only calculate their Wronskian.
If their Wronskian is never zero, then these vectors are linearly independent and so form a
fundamental solution set. If the Wronskian is identically zero, then the vectors are linearly
dependent, and they do not form a fundamental solution set. Thus, we observe
1 1
1 t t 1
1 e e e3t 1
1 1
W [x1 , x2 , x3 ] (t) = 11 2et 0 e3t 11
1 t t 1
1 e e 2e3t 1
579
Chapter 9
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 e3t 1 1 2et e3t 1 1 2et 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
= et 1 t 1 et 1 t 1 + e3t 1 t t 1
1 e 2e 13t 1 e 2e 1
3t 1 e e 1
) * ) *
= et 0 + e4t et 4e2t + e2t + e3t (2 0) = 2e3t = 0,
where we have used cofactors to calculate the determinant. Therefore, this set of vectors
is linearly independent and so forms a fundamental solution set for the system. Thus, a
fundamental matrix is given by

t t 3t
e e e

X(t) = 2et
0 e3t
,
et et 2e3t
and a general solution of the system will be

et et e3t

x(t) = X(t)c = c1
2e
t + c2 0 + c3 e3t .

et et 2e3t
27. In order to show that X(t) is a fundamental matrix for the system, we must first show that
each of its column vectors is a solution. Thus, we substitute each of the vectors

6et 3e2t 2e3t

x1 (t) =
e t ,
x2 (t) = e2t ,
x 3 (t) = e3t

t 2t 3t
5e e e
into the given system to obtain

t t
0 6 0 6e 6e

Ax1 (t) = 1 0
1 e t = t = x1 (t),
e
t t
1 1 0 5e 5e

0 6 0 3e2t 6e2t

Ax2 (t) =
1 0 1

e2t = 2e2t = x (t),
2
2t 2t
1 1 0 e 2e
580
Exercises 9.4

0 6 0 2e3t 6e3t

Ax3 (t) =
1 0 1 e3t = 3e3t = x3 (t).

1 1 0 e3t 3e3t
Therefore, each column vector of X(t) is a solution to the system on (, ).
Next we must show that these vectors are linearly independent. Since they are solutions to a
dierential equation in matrix form, it is enough to show that their Wronskian is never zero.
Thus, we find
1 1
1 t 2t 3t 1
1 6e 3e 2e 1
1 1
1
W (t) = 1 e t
e2t
e 11
3t
1 1
1 5et e2t e3t 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 e2t e3t 1 1 et e3t 1 1 et e2t 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
= 6et 1 2t 3t 1 + 3e2t 1 1 + 2e3t 1 1
1 e e 1 1 5et
e 1
3t 1 5et
e2t 1
) * ) * ) *
= 6et et et + 3e2t e2t + 5e2t + 2e3t e3t + 5e3t = 20 = 0,
where we have used cofactors to calculate the determinant. Hence, these three vectors are
linearly independent. Therefore, X(t) is a fundamental matrix for this system.
We will now find the inverse of the matrix X(t) by performing row-reduction on the matrix
[X(t)|I] [I|X1 (t)].
Thus, we have
1
1
6et 3e2t 2e3t 1 1 0 0
1
[X(t)|I] =
et e2t e3t 11 0 1 0
t 2t 3t 11
5e e e 0 0 1
1
t 2t 3t 1
e e e 1 0 1 0
R2 R1 1
6et
3e 2t
2e3t 11 1 0 0
R1 R2
t 2t 3t 11
5e e e 0 0 1
1
1
et e2t e3t 1 0 1 0
R2 6R1 R2 1
0 3e2t 8e3t 11 1 6 0
R3 + 5R1 R3
1
0 4e2t 4e3t 1 0 5 1
581
Chapter 9
1
t 2t 1
3t
e e e 1 0 1 0
R3 /4 R2 1
0 e2t e3t 11 0 5/4 1/4
R2 R3
1
0 3e2t 8e3t 1 1 6 0
1
1
et 0 0 1 0 1/4 1/4
R1 + R2 R1 1
0 e2t e3t 11 0 5/4 1/4
R3 3R2 R3
3t 11
0 0 5e 1 9/4 3/4
1
1
et 0 0 1 0 1/4 1/4
1 1
R3 R3 0 e2t 3t 1
e 1 0 5/4 1/4
5
3t 11
0 0 e 1/5 9/20 3/20
1
1
et 0 0 1 0 1/4 1/4
1
R2 R3 R2 0 e2t 0 11 1/5 4/5 2/5

1
0 0 e3t 1 1/5 9/20 3/20
1
1
et R1 R1 1 0 0 1 0 et /4 et /4
1
e2t R2 R2 0 1 0 11 e2t /5 4e2t /5 2e2t /5 .

1
e3t R3 R3 0 0 1 1 e3t /5 9e3t /20 3e3t /20

0 et /4 et /4

X1 (t) = 2t
e /5 2e2t /5
4e2t /5
.
3t 3t 3t
e /5 9e /20 3e /20
We now can use Problem 26 to find the solution to this dierential equation for any initial
value. For the initial value given here we note that t0 = 0. Thus, substituting t0 = 0 into the
matrix X1 (t) above yields

0 1/4 1/4

X1 (0) =
1/5 2/5
4/5 .
1/5 9/20 3/20
Hence, we see that the solution to this problem is given by
x(t) = X(t)X1 (0)x(0)
582
Exercises 9.4

6et 3e2t 2e3t 0 1/4 1/4 1

=
e
t
e2t e3t 1/5
4/5 2/5

0

5et e2t e3t 1/5 9/20 3/20 1

6et 3e2t 2e3t 1/4 (3/2)et + (3/5)e2t (1/10)e3t

=
e
t
e2t e3t 1/5

= (1/4)et (1/5)e2t (1/20)e3t

.

5et e2t e3t 1/20 (5/4)et (1/5)e2t (1/20)e3t
There are two short cuts that can be taken to solve the given problem. First, since we only
need X1 (0), it suces to compute the inverse of X(0), not X(t). Second, by producing
X1 (t) we automatically know that det X(0) = 0 and hence X(t) is a fundamental matrix.
Thus, it was not really necessary to compute the Wronskian.
33. Let (t) be an arbitrary solution to the system x (t) = A(t)x(t) on the interval I. We want
to find c = col(c1 , c2 , . . . , cn ) so that
(t) = c1 x1 (t) + c2 x2 (t) + + cn xn (t),
where x1 , x2 , . . . , xn are n linearly independent solutions for this system. Since
c1 x1 (t) + c2 x2 (t) + + cn xn (t) = X(t)c ,
where X(t) is the fundamental matrix whose columns are the vectors x1 , x2 , . . . , xn , this
equation can be written as
(t) = X(t)c (9.1)
Since x1 , x2 , . . . , xn are linearly independent solutions of the system x (t) = A(t)x(t), their
Wronskian is never zero. Therefore, as was discussed on page 528 of the text, X(t) has an
inverse at each point in I. Thus, at t0 , a point in I, X1 (t0 ) exists and equation (9.1) becomes
(t0 ) = X (t0 ) c X1 (t0 ) (t0 ) = X1 (t0 ) X (t0 ) c = c .
Hence, if we define c0 to be the vector c0 = X1 (t0 ) (t0 ), then equation (9.1) is true at the
point t0 (i. e. (t0 ) = X(t0 )X1 (t0 )(t0 )). To see that, for this definition of c0 , equation
(9.1) is true for all t in I (and so this is the vector that we seek), notice that (t) and X(t)c0
583
Chapter 9
are both solutions to same initial value problem (with the initial value given at the point t0 ).
Therefore, by the uniqueness of solutions, Theorem 2 on page 525 of the text, these solutions
must be equal on I, which means that (t) = X(t)c0 for all t in I.
EXERCISES 9.5: Homogeneous Linear Systems with Constant Coecients, page 541
5. The characteristic equation for this matrix is given by

1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1r 0 0 1 1 r 2 1
1 1 1 1
|A rI| = 11 0 r 2 11 = (1 r) 1 1
1 1 1 2 r 1
1 0 2 r 1
) 2 *
= (1 r) r 4 = (1 r)(r 2)(r + 2) = 0.
Thus, the eigenvalues of this matrix are r = 1, 2, 2. Substituting the eigenvalue r = 1, into
equation (A rI)u = 0 yields

0 0 0 u1 0

(A I)u =
0 1 2

u2 = 0 ,
(9.2)
0 2 1 u3 0

u2 + 2u3 = 0,
2u2 u3 = 0.
This system reduces to the system u2 = 0, u3 = 0, which does not assign any value to u1 .
Thus, we can let u1 be any value, say u1 = s, and u2 = 0, u3 = 0 and the system given by
(9.2) will be satisfied. From this we see that the eigenvectors associated with the eigenvalue
r = 1 are given by
u1 = col (u1 , u2 , u3) = col(s, 0, 0) = scol(1, 0, 0).
For r = 2 we observe that the equation (A rI)u = 0 becomes

1 0 0 u1 0

(A 2I)u = 0 2 2
u2 = 0 ,
0 2 2 u3 0
584
Exercises 9.5
whose corresponding system of equations reduces to u1 = 0, u2 = u3 . Therefore, we can pick

u2 to be any value, say u2 = s (which means that u3 = s), and we find that the eigenvectors
for this matrix associated with the eigenvalue r = 2 are given by
u2 = col (u1 , u2 , u3 ) = col(0, s, s) = scol(0, 1, 1).
For r = 2, we solve the equation

3 0 0 u1 0

(A + 2I)u =
0 2 2 u2 = 0 ,

0 2 2 u3 0
which reduces to the system u1 = 0, u2 = u3 . Hence, u3 is arbitrary, and so we will let u3 = s
(which means that u2 = s). Thus, solutions to this system and, therefore, eigenvectors for
this matrix associated with the eigenvalue r = 2 are given by the vectors
u3 = col (u1 , u2 , u3) = col(0, s, s) = scol(0, 1, 1).
13. We must first find the eigenvalues and eigenvectors associated with the given matrix A. Thus,
we note that the characteristic equation for this matrix is given by
1 1
1 1
1 1r 2 2 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 2 r 3 11 = 0
1 1
1 2 3 r 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 r 3 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 r 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
(1 r) 1 1 21 1 +21 1=0
1 3 r 1 1 2 r 1 1 2 3 1
) *
(1 r) r 2 9 2(2r 6) + 2(6 + 2r) = (1 r)(r 2)(r + 2) = 0
(r + 3)[(1 r)(r 3) + 8] = 0 (r + 3)(r 5)(r + 1) = 0.
Therefore, the eigenvalues are r = 3, 1, 5. To find an eigenvector associated with the

eigenvalue r = 3, we must find a vector u = col(u1 , u2 , u3 ) which satisfies the equation
(A + 3I)u = 0. Thus, we have

4 2 2 u1 0 2 0 0 u1 0

(A + 3I)u =
2 3 3 u2 = 0

0 1 1 u2 = 0 ,

2 3 3 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
585
Chapter 9
where we have obtained the last equation above by using elementary row operations. This
equation is equivalent to the system u1 = 0, u2 = u3 . Hence, if we let u3 have the arbitrary
value s1 , then we see that, for the matrix A, the eigenvectors associated with the eigenvalue
r = 3 are given by
u = col (u1 , u2, u3 ) = col (0, s1 , s1 ) = s1 col(0, 1, 1).
Thus, if we choose s1 = 1, then vector u1 = col(0, 1, 1) is one eigenvector associated with this
eigenvalue. For the eigenvalue r = 1, we must find a vector u which satisfies the equation
(A + I)u = 0. Thus, we see that

2 2 2 u1 0 1 2 0 u1 0

(A + I)u =
2 1 3 u2 = 0
0 1 1 u2 = 0 ,

2 3 1 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
which is equivalent to the system u1 = 2u2 , u3 = u2 . Therefore, if we let u2 = s2 , then

we see that vectors which satisfy the equation (A + I)u = 0 and, hence, eigenvectors for the
matrix A associated with the eigenvalue r = 1 are given by
u = col (u1 , u2 , u3) = col (2s2 , s2 , s2 ) = s2 col(2, 1, 1).
By letting s2 = 1, we find that one such vector will be the vector u2 = col(2, 1, 1). In
order to find an eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 5, we will solve the equation
(A 5I)u = 0. Thus, we have

4 2 2 u1 0 1 0 1 u1 0

(A 5I)u =
2 5 3

u2 = 0
0 1 1 u2 = 0 ,

2 3 5 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
which is equivalent to the system u1 = u3 , u2 = u3 . Thus, if we let u3 = s3 , then, for the

matrix A, the eigenvectors associated with the eigenvalue r = 5 are given by
u = col (u1 , u2 , u3) = col (s3 , s3 , s3 ) = s3 col(1, 1, 1).
586
Exercises 9.5
Hence, by letting s3 = 1, we see that one such vector will be the vector u3 = col(1, 1, 1).
Therefore, by Corollary 1 on page 538 of the text, we see that a fundamental solution set for
this equation is given by
/ 3t 0
e u1 , et u2 , e5t u3 .
Thus, a general solution for this system is

0 2 1

x(t) = c1 e3t u1 + c2 et u2 + c3 e5t u3 = c1 e3t
1 + c2 et
1
+ c 3 e5t
1 .
1 1 1
21. A fundamental matrix for this system has three columns which are linearly independent
solutions. Therefore, we will first find three such solutions. To this end, we will first find the
eigenvalues for the matrix A by solving the characteristic equation given by
1 1
1 1
1 r 1 0 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 0 r 1 11 = 0
1 1
1 8 14 7 r 1
1 1 1 1
1 r 1 11 11 0 1 11
1
r 1 11 1=0
1 14 7 r 1 1 8 7 r 1
r 3 7r 2 + 14r 8 = 0 (r 1)(r 2)(r 4) = 0.
Hence, this matrix has three distinct eigenvalues, r = 1, 2, 4, and, according to Theorem 6
on page 538 of the text, the eigenvectors associated with these eigenvalues will be linearly
independent. Thus, these eigenvectors will be used in finding the three linearly independent
solutions which we seek. To find an eigenvector, u = col(u1 , u2 , u3), associated with the
eigenvalue r = 1, we will solve the equation (A I)u = 0. Therefore, we have

1 1 0 u1 0 1 0 1 u1 0

(A I)u = 0 1 = 0 = 0 ,
1 u2 0 1 1 u2
8 14 6 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
which is equivalent to the system u1 = u3 , u2 = u3 . Thus, by letting u3 = 1 (which implies

that u1 = u2 = 1), we find that one eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 1 is given
587
Chapter 9
by the vector u1 = col(1, 1, 1). To find an eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 2,
we solve the equation

2 1 0 u1 0 4 0 1 u1 0

(A 2I)u = 0 2 1 u2 = 0

0 2 1 u2 = 0 ,

8 14 5 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
which is equivalent to the system 4u1 = u3 , 2u2 = u3 . Hence, letting u3 = 4 implies that
u1 = 1 and u2 = 2. Therefore, one eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 2 is the
vector u2 = col(1, 2, 4). In order to find an eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 4,
we will solve the equation

4 1 0 u1 0 16 0 1 u1 0

(A4I)u = 0 4 1
u2 = 0
0 4 1 u2 = 0 ,

8 14 3 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
which is equivalent to the system 16u1 = u3 , 4u2 = u3. Therefore, letting u3 = 16 implies
that u1 = 1 and u2 = 4. Thus, one eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 4 is the
vector u3 = col(1, 4, 16). Therefore, by Theorem 5 on page 536 of the text (or Corollary 1),
we see that three linearly independent solutions of this system are given by et u1 , e2t u2 , and
e4t u3 . Thus, a fundamental matrix for this system will be the matrix

et e2t e4t

et 2e2t 4e4t .

t 2t 4t
e 4e 16e
33. Since the coecient matrix for this system is a 3 3 real symmetric matrix, by the discussion
on page 540 of the text, we know that we can find three linearly independent eigenvectors for
this matrix. Therefore, to find the solution to this initial value problem, we must first find
three such eigenvectors. To do this we first find eigenvalues for this matrix. Therefore, we
solve the characteristic equation given by
1 1
1 1
1 1r 2 1 2
1 1
|A rI| = 11 2 1 r 2 11 = 0
1 1
1 2 2 1 r 1
588
Exercises 9.5
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 r 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 r 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
(1 r) 1 1+21 1 +21 1=0
1 2 1 r 1 1 2 1r 1 1 2 2 1
- .
(1 r) (1 r)2 4 + 2 [2(1 r) + 4] + 2 [4 2(1 r)] = 0
(1 r)(r 3)(r + 1) + 8(r + 1) = (r + 1)(r 5)(r + 1) = 0.
Thus, the eigenvalues are r = 1 and r = 5, with r = 1 an eigenvalue of multiplicity two.

In order to find an eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 5, we solve the equation

4 2 2 u1 0 1 0 1 u1 0

(A 5I)u = 2
4 2 u2 = 0 1 u2 = 0

0 1 .
2 2 4 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
This equation is equivalent to the system u1 = u3 , u2 = u3 . Thus, if we let u3 = 1, we see that

for this coecient matrix an eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 5 is given by the
vector u1 = col(u1 , u2, u3 ) = col(1, 1, 1). We must now find two more linearly independent
eigenvectors for this coecient matrix. By the discussion above, these eigenvectors will be
associated with the eigenvalue r = 1. Thus, we solve the equation

2 2 2 u1 0 1 1 1 u1 0

(A + I)u = 2 2 2
u2 = 0 0
0 0 u2 = 0 , (9.3)

2 2 2 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
which is equivalent to the equation u1 u2 + u3 = 0. Therefore, if we arbitrarily assign the

value s to u2 and v to u3 , we see that u1 = s v, and solutions to equation (9.3) above will
be given by
sv 1 1

u=
s = s 1 + v 0 .

v 0 1
By taking s = 1 and v = 0, we see that one solution to equation (9.3) will be the vector
u2 = col(1, 1, 0). Hence, this is one eigenvector for the coecient matrix. Similarly, by letting
s = 0 and v = 1, we find a second eigenvector will be the vector u3 = col(1, 0, 1). Since the
eigenvectors u1 , u2 , and u3 are linearly independent, by Theorem 5 on page 536 of the text,
589
Chapter 9
we see that a general solution for this system will be given by

1 1 1

x(t) = c1 e 1
5t t
+ c2 e 1
+ c3 et
0
.
1 0 1
To find a solution which satisfies the initial condition, we must solve the equation

1 1 1 1 1 1 c1 2

x(0) = c1
1 + c2 1 + c 3 0
1 1
0 c2 = 3 .

1 0 1 1 0 1 c3 2
This equation can be solved by either using elementary row operations on the augmented
matrix associated with this equation or by solving the system
c1 + c2 c3 = 2,
c1 + c2 = 3,
c1 + c3 = 2.
By either method we find that c1 = 1, c2 = 2, and c3 = 1. Therefore, the solution to this

initial value problem is given by

1 1 1

x(t) = e 1 2e 1 + e 0
5t t t

1 0 1

e5t 2et et 3et + e5t

=
e 5t
2et
+ 0 = 2et e5t .

e5t + 0 + et et + e5t
37. (a) In order to find the eigenvalues for the matrix A, we will solve the characteristic equation
1 1
1 1
1 2r 1 6 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 0 2r 5 11 = 0 (2 r)3 = 0.
1 1
1 0 0 2r 1
590
Exercises 9.5
Thus, r = 2 is an eigenvalue of multiplicity three. To find the eigenvectors for the matrix
A associated with this eigenvalue, we solve the equation

0 1 6 u1 0

(A 2I)u = 0 0 5
u2 = 0 .
0 0 0 u3 0
This equation is equivalent to the system u2 = 0, u3 = 0. Therefore, we can assign u1 to

be any arbitrary value, say u1 = s, and we find that the vector
u = col(u1 , u2, u3 ) = col(s, 0, 0) = scol(1, 0, 0)
will solve this equation and will, thus, be an eigenvector for the matrix A. We also notice
that the vectors u = scol(1, 0, 0) are the only vectors that will solve this equation, and,
hence, they will be the only eigenvectors for the matrix A.
(b) By taking s = 1, we find that, for the matrix A, one eigenvector associated with the
eigenvalue r = 2 will be the vector u1 = col(1, 0, 0). Therefore, by the way eigenvalues
and eigenvectors were defined (as was discussed in the text on page 533), we see that
one solution to the system x = Ax will be given by the vector

1

x1 (t) = e2t u1 = e2t
.
0
0
(c) We know that u1 = col(1, 0, 0) is an eigenvector for the matrix A associated with the
eigenvalue r = 2. Thus, u1 satisfies the equation
(A 2I)u1 = 0 Au1 = 2u1 . (9.4)
We want to find a constant vector u2 = col(v1 , v2 , v3 ) such that
x2 (t) = te2t u1 + e2t u2
will be a second solution to the system x = Ax. To do this, we will first show that
x2 will satisfy the equation x = Ax if and only if the vector u2 satisfies the equation
591
Chapter 9
(A 2I)u2 = u1 . To this end, we find that
x2 (t) = 2te2t u1 + e2t u1 + 2e2t u2 = 2te2t u1 + e2t (u1 + 2u2 ) ,
where we have used the fact that u1 and u2 are constant vectors. We also have
Ax2 (t) = A (te2t u1 + e2t u2 )
= A (te2t u1 ) + A (e2t u2 ) , distributive property of matrix multiplication
(page 515 of the text)
= te2t (Au1 ) + e2t (Au2 ) , associative property of matrix multiplication
(page 515 of the text)
= 2te2t u1 + e2t Au2 , by equation (9.4) above.
Thus, if x2 (t) is to be a solution to the given system we, must have
x2 (t) = Ax2 (t)

2te2t u1 + e2t (u1 + 2u2 ) = 2te2t u1 + e2t Au2
e2t (u1 + 2u2 ) = e2t Au2 .
By dividing both sides of this equation by the nonzero term e2t , we obtain
u1 + 2u2 = Au2 (A 2I)u2 = u1 .
Since all of these steps are reversible, if a vector u2 satisfies this last equation, then
x2 (t) = te2t u1 + e2t u2 will be a solution to the system x = Ax. Now we can use the
formula (A 2I)u2 = u1 to find the vector u2 = col(v1 , v2 , v3 ). Hence, we solve the
equation
0 1 6 v1 1

(A 2I)u2 = 0 0 5 v2 = 0

.
0 0 0 v3 0
This equation is equivalent to the system v2 +6v3 = 1, 5v3 = 0, which implies that v2 = 1,
v3 = 0. Therefore, the vector u2 = col(0, 1, 0) will satisfy the equation (A 2I)u2 = u1
and, thus,
1 0

x2 (t) = te2t 0

+ e2t 1

0 0
592
Exercises 9.5
will be a second solution to the given system. We can see by inspection x2 (t) and
x1 (t) = e2t u1 are linearly independent.
(d) To find a third linearly independent solution to this system we will try to find a solution
t2
of the form x3 (t) = e2t u1 + te2t u2 + e2t u3 , where u3 is a constant vector that we must
2
find, and u1 and u2 are the vectors that we found in parts (b) and (c), respectively.
To find the vector u3 , we will proceed as we did in part (c) above. We will first show
that x3 (t) will be a solution to the given system if and only if the vector u3 satisfies the
equation (A 2I)u3 = u2 . To do this we observe that
x3 (t) = te2t u1 + t2 e2t u1 + e2t u2 + 2te2t u2 + 2e2t u3 .
Also, using the facts that
(A 2I)u1 = 0 Au1 = 2u1 (9.5)
and
(A 2I)u2 = u1 Au2 = u1 + 2u2 , (9.6)
we have
+ ,
t2 2t
Ax3 (t) = A e u1 + te2t u2 + e2t u3
2
+ ,
t2 2t
= A e u1 + A (te2t u2 ) + +A (e2t u3 ) , distributive property
2
t2 2t
= e (Au1 ) + te2t (Au2 ) + e2t (Au3 ) , associative property
2
t2 2t
= e (2u1 ) + te2t (u1 + 2u2 ) + e2t Au3 , equations (9.5) and (9.6)
2
= t2 e2t u1 + te2t u1 + 2te2t u2 + e2t Au3 .
Therefore, for x3 (t) to satisfy the given system, we must have
x3 (t) = Ax3 (t)
593
Chapter 9
te2t u1 + t2 e2t u1 + e2t u2 + 2te2t u2 + 2e2t u3 = t2 e2t u1 + te2t u1 + 2te2t u2 + e2t Au3
e2t u2 + 2e2t u3 = e2t Au3
u2 + 2u3 = Au3
(A 2I)u3 = u2 .
Again since these steps are reversible, we see that, if a vector u3 satisfies the equation
(A 2I)u3 = u2 , then the vector
t2 2t
x3 (t) = e u1 + te2t u2 + e2t u3
2
will be a third linearly independent solution to the given system. Thus, we can use this
equation to find the vector u3 = col(v1 , v2 , v3 ). Hence, we solve

0 1 6 v1 0

(A 2I)u3 = 0 0 5 v2 = 1

.
0 0 0 v3 0
This equation is equivalent to the system v2 + 6v3 = 0, 5v3 = 1, which implies that
v3 = 1/5, v2 = 6/5. Therefore, if we let u3 = col(0, 6/5, 1/5), then

1 0 0
t2 2t
x3 (t) = e 0
+ te
2t
1
+e
2t
6/5
2
0 0 1/5
will be a third solution to the given system and we see by inspection that this solution
is linearly independent from the solutions x1 (t) and x2 (t).
(e) Notice that
(A 2I)3 u3 = (A 2I)2 [(A 2I)u3 ]

= (A 2I)2 u2 = (A 2I) [(A 2I)u2 ] = (A 2I)u1 = 0.
43. According to Problem 42, we will look for solutions of the form x(t) = tr u, where r is an
eigenvalue for the coecient matrix and u is an associated eigenvector. To find the eigenvalues
594
Exercises 9.5
for this matrix, we solve the equation

1 1
1 1r 3 1
1 1
|A rI| = 1 1=0
1 1 5 r 1
(1 r)(5 r) + 3 = 0
r 2 6r + 8 = 0 (r 2)(r 4) = 0.
Therefore, the coecient matrix has the eigenvalues r = 2, 4. Since these are distinct eigen-
values, Theorem 6 on page 538 of the text assures us that their associated eigenvectors will
be linearly independent. To find an eigenvector u = col(u1, u2 ) associated with the eigenvalue
r = 2, we solve the system
L ML M L M
1 3 u1 0
(A 2I)u = = ,
1 3 u2 0
which is equivalent to the equation u1 + 3u2 = 0. Thus, if we let u2 = 1 then, in order to

satisfy this equation, we must have u1 = 3. Hence, we see that the vector u1 = col(3, 1) will
be an eigenvector for the coecient matrix of the given system associated with the eigenvalue
r = 2. Therefore, according to Problem 42, one solution to this system will be given by
L M
3
x1 (t) = t2 u1 = t2 .
1
To find an eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 4, we solve the equation

L ML M L M
3 3 u1 0
(A 4I)u = = ,
1 1 u2 0
which is equivalent to the equation u1 = u2 . Thus, if we let u2 = 1, then we must have

u1 = 1 and so an eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 4 will be given by the vector
u2 = col(1, 1). Therefore, another solution to the given system will be
L M
1
x2 (t) = t4 u2 = t4 .
1
595
Chapter 9
Clearly the solutions x1 (t) and x2 (t) are linearly independent. So the general solution to the
given system with t > 0 will be
L M L M L M L M
3 1 3t2 t4
x(t) = c1 t2 + c2 t4 = c1 + c2 .
1 1 t2 t4
EXERCISES 9.6: Complex Eigenvalues, page 549
3. To find the eigenvalues for the matrix A, we solve the characteristic equation given by
1 1
1 1
1 1r 2 1 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 0 1r 1 11 = 0
1 1
1 0 1 1 r 1
1 1
1 1r 1 1
1 1
(1 r) 1 10+0=0
1 1 1 r 1
- . ) *
(1 r) (1 r)2 + 1 = (1 r) r 2 2r + 2 = 0.
By this equation and the quadratic formula, we see that the roots to the characteristic equation
and, therefore, the eigenvalues for the matrix A are r = 1, and r = 1i. To find an eigenvector
u = col(u1, u2 , u3 ) associated with the real eigenvalue r = 1, we solve the system

0 2 1 u1 0

(A I)u = 0 0 1
u2 = 0 ,
0 1 0 u3 0
which implies that u2 = 0, u3 = 0. Therefore, we can set u1 arbitrarily to any value, say
u1 = s. Then the vectors
will satisfy the above equation and, therefore, be eigenvectors for the matrix A. Hence, if we
set s = 1, we see that one eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 1 will be the vector
u1 = col(1, 0, 0). Therefore, one solution to the given system will be

1

x1 (t) = e u1 = e 0
t t
.
0
596
Exercises 9.6
In order to find an eigenvector z = col(z1 , z2 , z3 ) associated with the complex eigenvalue

r = 1 + i, we solve the equation

i 2 1 z1 0

[A (1 + i)I]z =
0 i 1

z2 = 0 .

0 1 i z3 0
This equation is equivalent to the system
iz1 + 2z2 z3 = 0 and iz2 + z3 = 0.
Thus, if we let z2 = s, then we see that z3 = is and
iz1 = 2z2 + z3 = 2s + is (i)(iz1 ) = (i)(2s + is)

z1 = 2is s = s 2is ,
where we have used the fact that i2 = 1. Hence, eigenvectors associated with the eigenvalue
r = 1+i will be z = scol(12i, 1, i). By taking s = 1, we see that one eigenvector associated
with this eigenvalue will be the vector

1 2i 1 2

z1 =
1 = 1 + i 0 .

i 0 1
Thus, by the notation on page 545 of the text, we have = 1, = 1, a = col(1, 1, 0), and
b = col(2, 0, 1). Therefore, according to formulas (6) and (7) on page 546 of the text, two
more linearly independent solutions to the given system will be given by
x2 (t) = (et cos t)a (et sin t)b and x3 (t) = (et sin t)a + (et cos t)b.
Hence, the general solution to the system given in this problem will be
x(t) = c1 x2 (t) + c2 x3 (t) + c3 x1 (t)

1 2 1 2 1

t t
= c1 e cos t 1 c1 e sin t 0 + c2 et sin t 1 + c2 et cos t 0 + c3 et 0 .

0 1 0 1 0
597
Chapter 9
7. In order to find a fundamental matrix for this system, we must first find three linearly indepen-
dent solutions. Thus, we seek the eigenvalues for the matrix A by solving the characteristic
equation given by
1 1
1 1
1 r 0 1 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 0 r 1 11 = 0
1 1
1 0 1 r 1
1 1
1 r 1 1 ) *
1 1
r 1 10+0 =0 r r 2 + 1 = 0.
1 1 r 1
Hence, the eigenvalues for the matrix A will be r = 0 and r = i. To find an eigenvector
u = col(u1, u2 , u3 ) associated with the real eigenvalue r = 0, we solve the equation

0 0 1 u1 0

(A 0I)u = 0 0 1
u2
= 0 ,
0 1 0 u3 0
which is equivalent to the system u3 = 0, u2 = 0. Thus, if we let u1 have the arbitrary value
u1 = s, then the vectors
will satisfy this equation and will, therefore, be eigenvectors for the matrix A associated with
the eigenvalue r = 0. Hence, by letting s = 1, we find that one of these eigenvectors will be
the vector u = col(1, 0, 0). Thus, one solution to the given system will be

1

x1 (t) = e u =
0
0 .
0
To find two more linearly independent solutions for this system, we will first look for an
eigenvector associated with the complex eigenvalue r = i. That is, we seek a vector, say,
z = col(z1 , z2 , z3 ) which satisfies the equation

i 0 1 z1 0

(A iI)z =
0 i 1 z2 = 0
,

0 1 i z3 0
598
Exercises 9.6
iz1 = z3 and iz2 = z3 .
Thus, if we let z3 be any arbitrary value, say z3 = is, (which means that we must have z1 = s
and z2 = s), then we see that the vectors, given by
z = col(z1 , z2 , z3 ) = col(s, s, is) = scol(1, 1, i),
will be eigenvectors for the matrix A associated with the eigenvalue r = i. Therefore, by
letting s = 1, we find that one of these eigenvectors will be the vector

1 1 0

z= 1
= 1 + i 0 .

i 0 1
From this, by the notation given on page 546 of the text, we see that = 0, = 1, a =
col(1, 1, 0), and b = col(0, 0, 1). Therefore, by formulas (6) and (7) on page 546 of the text,
two more linearly independent solutions for this system will be

cos t 0 cos t

x2 (t) = (cos t)a (sin t)b = cos t 0 = cos t

0 sin t sin t
and
sin t 0 sin t

x3 (t) = (sin t)a + (cos t)b =
sin t + 0 = sin t .

0 cos t cos t
Finally, since a fundamental matrix for the system given in this problem must have three
columns which are linearly independent solutions of the system, we see that such a funda-
mental matrix will be given by the matrix

1 cos t sin t

X(t) =
0 cos t sin t
.

0 sin t cos t
599
Chapter 9
17. We will assume that t > 0. According to Problem 42 in Exercises 9.5, a solution to this
Cauchy-Euler system will have the form x(t) = tr u, where r is an eigenvalue for the coecient
matrix of the system and u is an eigenvector associated with this eigenvalue. Therefore, we
first must find the eigenvalues for this matrix by solving the characteristic equation given by
1 1
1 1
1 1 r 1 0 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 2 1 r 1 1=0
1
1 1
1 0 1 1 r 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 r 1 1 1 2 1 1
1 1 1 1
(1 r) 1 1+1 1=0
1 1 1 r 1 1 0 1 r 1
- . ) *
(1 r) (1 r)2 1 + 2(1 r) = (1 + r) r 2 + 2r + 2 = 0.
From this equation and by using the quadratic formula, we see that the eigenvalues for this
coecient matrix will be r = 1, 1 i. The eigenvectors associated with the real eigenvalue
r = 1 will be the vectors u = col(u1 , u2 , u3 ) which satisfy the equation

0 1 0 u1 0

(A + I)u =
2 0 1 u2 = 0 ,
0 1 0 u3 0
which is equivalent to the system u2 = 0, 2u1 + u3 = 0. Thus, by letting u1 = 1 (which means

that u3 = 2), we see that the vector
u = col(u1 , u2 , u3 ) = col(1, 0, 2)
satisfies this equation and is, therefore, an eigenvector of the coecient matrix associated
with the eigenvalue r = 1. Hence, according to Problem 42 of Exercises 9.5, we see that a
solution to this Cauchy-Euler system will be given by

1 t1

x1 (t) = t1 u = t1
0 = 0 .

2 2t1
600
Exercises 9.6
To find the eigenvectors z = col(z1 , z2 , z3 ) associated with the complex eigenvalue r = 1 + i,

we solve the equation

i 1 0 z1 0

(A (1 + i)I)z =
2 i1
z2 = 0

0 1 i z3 0

i 1 0 z1 0

0 i 1 z2 = 0

,
0 0 0 z3 0
which is equivalent to the system iz1 z2 = 0, iz2 + z3 = 0. Thus, if we let z1 = 1, we must

let z2 = i and z3 = 1 in order to satisfy this system. Therefore, one eigenvector for the
coecient matrix associated with the eigenvalue r = 1+i will be the vector z = col(1, i, 1)
and another solution to this system will be x(t) = t1+i z. We would like to find real solutions
to this problem. Therefore, we note that by Eulers formula we have
t1+i = t1 ti = t1 ei ln t = t1 [cos(ln t) + i sin(ln t)],
where we have made use of our assumption that t > 0. Hence, the solution that we have just
found becomes
x(t) = t1+i z = t1 [cos(ln t) + i sin(ln t)]z

1 t1 cos(ln t) t1 sin(ln t)

= t1 [cos(ln t) + i sin(ln t)] 1
i = t sin(ln t)
+ i t1 cos(ln t) .

1 t1 cos(ln t) t1 sin(ln t)
Thus, by Lemma 2 (adapted to systems) on page 172 of the text we see that two more linearly
independent solutions to this Cauchy-Euler system will be

t1 cos(ln t) t1 sin(ln t)

x2 (t) =
t1 sin(ln t)
and x3 (t) =
t1
cos(ln t) ,

t1 cos(ln t) t1 sin(ln t)
601
Chapter 9
and, hence, a general solution will be given by

t1 t1 cos(ln t) t1 sin(ln t)

x(t) = c1 1
0 + c2 t sin(ln t)
+ c3 t1 cos(ln t) .

2t1 t1 cos(ln t) 1
t sin(ln t)
EXERCISES 9.7: Nonhomogeneous Linear Systems, page 555
3. We must first find the general solution to the corresponding homogeneous system. Therefore,
we first find the eigenvalues for the coecient matrix A by solving the characteristic equation
given by
1 1
1 1
1 1 r 2 2 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 2 1 r 2 11 = 0
1 1
1 2 2 1r 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1r 2 11 1 2 2 11 1 2 1 r 1
1 1 1 1
(1 r) 1 1 +21 1+21 1=0
1 2 1r 1 1 2 1r 1 1 2 2 1
- .
(1 r) (1 r)2 4 + 2 [2(1 r) 4] + 2 [4 2(1 r)] = 0
(1 r)(r 2 2r 3) + 4(2r 6) = 0
(1 r)(r + 1)(r 3) + 8(r 3) = (r 3)(r 2 9) = (r 3)(r 3)(r + 3) = 0.
Thus, the eigenvalues for the matrix A are r = 3, 3, where r = 3 is an eigenvalue of

multiplicity two. Notice that, even though the matrix A has only two distinct eigenvalues, we
are still guaranteed three linearly independent eigenvectors because A is a 33 real symmetric
matrix. To find an eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 3, we must find a vector
u = col(u1, u2 , u3 ) which satisfies the system

4 2 2 u1 0 1 0 1 u1 0

(A + 3I)u = 2 4 2 u2 = 0

0 1 1 u2 = 0 ,

2 2 4 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
which is equivalent to the system u1 + u3 = 0, u2 + u3 = 0. Hence, by letting u3 = 1, we

must have u1 = u2 = 1, and so the vector u1 = col(1, 1, 1) will then satisfy the above system.
602
Exercises 9.7
Therefore, this vector is an eigenvector for the matrix A associated with the eigenvalue r = 3.
Thus, one solution to the corresponding homogeneous system is given by

1

x1 (t) = e u1 = e 1
3t 3t
.
1
To find eigenvectors u = col(u1 , u2 , u3) associated with the eigenvalue r = 3, we solve the
equation given by

2 2 2 u1 0

(A 3I)u =
2 2 2 u2 = 0 ,

2 2 2 u3 0
which is equivalent to the equation u1 + u2 u3 = 0. Thus, if we let u3 = s and u2 = v, then
we must have u1 = s v. Hence, solutions to the above equation and, therefore, eigenvectors
for A associated with the eigenvalue r = 3 will be the vectors

sv 1 1

u=
v = s 0
+ v 1 ,

s 1 0
where s and v are arbitrary scalars. Therefore, letting s = 1 and v = 0 yields the eigenvector
u2 = col(1, 0, 1). Similarly, by letting s = 0 and v = 1, we obtain the eigenvector u3 =
col(1, 1, 0), which we can see by inspection is linearly independent from u2 . Hence, two more
solutions to the corresponding homogeneous system which are linearly independent from each
other and from x1 (t) are given by

1 1

x2 (t) = e u2 = e 0
3t
3t
and x3 (t) = e u3 = e 1
3t 3t
.
1 0
Thus, the general solution to the corresponding homogeneous system will be

1 1 1

xh (t) = c1 e3t
1 + c2 e3t 0 + c3 e3t 1 .

1 1 0
603
Chapter 9
To find a particular solution to the nonhomogeneous system, we note that

2et 2

f(t) =
4et = et
4 = et g ,

2et 2
where g = col(2, 4, 2). Therefore, we will assume that a particular solution to the nonhomo-
geneous system will have the form xp (t) = et a, where a = col(a1 , a2 , a3 ) is a constant vector
which must be determined. Hence, we see that xp (t) = et a. By substituting xp (t) into the
given system, we obtain
et a = Axp (t) + f(t) = Aet a + et g = et Aa + et g .
Therefore, we have
et a = et Aa + et g a = Aa + g (I A)a = g

0 2 2 a1 2

2 0 2 .
a2 = 4
2 2 0 a3 2
The last equation above can be solved by either performing elementary row operations on the
augmented matrix or by solving the system
2a2 2a3 = 2,
2a1 2a3 = 4,
2a1 2a2 = 2.
Either way, we obtain a1 = 1, a2 = 0, and a3 = 1. Thus, a particular solution to the
nonhomogeneous system will be given by

1

xp (t) = et a = et
0 ,

1
and so the general solution to the nonhomogeneous system will be

1 1 1 1

3t
x(t) = xh (t) + xp (t) = c1 e 1 + c2 e 0 + c3 e 1 + e 0
3t 3t t
.
1 1 0 1
604
Exercises 9.7
13. We must first find a fundamental matrix for the corresponding homogeneous system x = Ax.
To this end, we first find the eigenvalues of the matrix A by solving the characteristic equation
given by
1 1
1 2r 1 1
1 1
|A rI| = 1 1=0 (2 r)(2 r) + 3 = 0 r2 1 = 0 .
1 3 2 r 1
Thus, the eigenvalues of the coecient matrix A are r = 1. The eigenvectors associated
with the eigenvalue r = 1 are the vectors u = col(u1 , u2) which satisfy the equation
L ML M L M
1 1 u1 0
(A I)u = = .
3 3 u2 0
This equation is equivalent to the equation u1 + u2 = 0. Therefore, if we let u1 = 1, then

we have u2 = 1, so one eigenvector of the matrix A associated with the eigenvalue r = 1 is
the vector u1 = col(1, 1). Hence, one solution of the corresponding homogeneous system is
given by L M L M
1 et
x1 (t) = et u1 = et = .
1 et
L ML M L M
3 1 u1 0
(A + I)u = = ,
3 1 u2 0
which is equivalent to the equation 3u1 + u2 = 0. Since u1 = 1 and u2 = 3 satisfy this

equation, one eigenvector for the matrix A associated with the eigenvalue r = 1 is the
vector u2 = col(1, 3). Thus, another linearly independent solution of the corresponding
homogeneous system is
L M L M
1 et
x2 (t) = et u2 = et = .
3 3et
Hence, the general solution of the homogeneous system is given by

L M L M
et et
xh (t) = c1 + c2 ,
et 3et
605
Chapter 9
and a fundamental matrix is L M

et et
X(t) = .
et 3et
To find the inverse matrix X1 (t), we will perform row-reduction on the matrix [X(t)|I]. Thus,
we have
L 1 M L 1 M
et et 1 1 0 et et 1 1 0
1 1
[X(t)|I] = 1 1
et 3et 1 0 1 0 2et 1 1 1
L 1 M L 1 M
et 0 11 3/2 1/2 1 0 11 (3/2)et (1/2)et
1 1 .
0 et 1 1/2 1/2 0 1 1 (1/2)et (1/2)et
Therefore, we see that L M

(3/2)et (1/2)et
X1 (t) = .
(1/2)et (1/2)et
Hence, we have
L ML M L M
(3/2)et (1/2)et 2et 5
X1 (t)f(t) = = ,
(1/2)et (1/2)et 4et 3e2t
and so we have L ? M L M
3
(5)dt 5t
X1 (t)f(t) dt = ? = ,
3 e2t dt (3/2)e2t
where we have taken the constants of integration to be zero. Thus, by equation (8) on page 553
of the text, we see that
L ML M L M
et et 5t 5tet (3/2)et
xp (t) = = .
et 3et (3/2)e2t 5tet + (9/2)et
Therefore, by adding xh (t) and xp (t) we obtain

L M L M L M
et et 5tet (3/2)et
x(t) = c1 + c2 + .
et 3et 5tet + (9/2)et
We remark that this answer is the same as the answer given in the text as can be seen by
replacing c1 by c1 + 9/4.
606
Exercises 9.7
15. We must first find a fundamental matrix for the associated homogeneous system. We will do
this by finding the solutions derived from the eigenvalues and the associated eigenvectors for
the coecient matrix A. Therefore, we find these eigenvalues by solving the characteristic
equation given by
1 1
1 4 r 2 1
1 1
|A rI| = 1 1=0
1 2 1 r 1
(4 r)(1 r) 4 = 0 r 2 + 5r = 0 .
Thus, the eigenvalues for the matrix A are r = 5, 0. An eigenvector for this matrix associated
with the eigenvalue r = 0 is the vector u = col(u1 , u2) which satisfies the equation
L ML M L M
4 2 u1 0
Au = = .
2 1 u2 0
This equation is equivalent to the equation 2u1 = u2 . Therefore, if we let u1 = 1 and u2 = 2,

then the vector u1 = col(1, 2) satisfies this equation and is, therefore, an eigenvector for the
matrix A associated with the eigenvalue r = 0. Hence, one solution to the homogeneous
system is given by L M
(0)t 1
x1 (t) = e u1 = .
2
L ML M L M
1 2 u1 0
(A + 5I)u = = ,
2 4 u2 0
which is equivalent to the equation u1 + 2u2 = 0. Thus, by letting u2 = 1 and u1 = 2, the

vector u2 = col(u1 , u2 ) = col(2, 1) satisfies this equation and is, therefore, an eigenvector for
A associated with the eigenvalue r = 5. Hence, since the two eigenvalues of A are distinct,
we see that another linearly independent solution to the corresponding homogeneous system
is given by L M L M
2 2e5t
x2 (t) = e5t u2 = e5t = .
1 e5t
607
Chapter 9
By combining these two solutions, we see that a general solution to the homogeneous system
is L M L M
1 2e5t
xh (t) = c1 + c2
2 e5t
and a fundamental matrix for this system is the matrix
L M
1 2e5t
X(t) = .
2 e5t
We will use equation (10) on page 553 of the text to find a particular solution to the nonho-
mogeneous system. Thus, we need to find the inverse matrix X1 (t). This can be done, for
example, by performing row-reduction on the matrix [X(t)|I] to obtain the matrix [I|X1 (t)].
In this way, we find that the required inverse matrix is given by
L M
1/5 2/5
X1 (t) = .
(2/5)e5t (1/5)e5t
Therefore, we have
L ML M L M
1/5 2/5 t1 t1 + (8/5)
X1 (t)f(t) = = .
(2/5)e5t (1/5)e5t 4 + 2t1 (4/5)e5t
From this we see that
3 L ? M L M
1
[t + (8/5)] dt ln |t| + (8/5)t
X1 (t)f(t) dt = ? = ,
(4/5)e5t dt (4/25)e5t
where we have taken the constants of integration to be zero. Hence, by equation (10) on
page 553 of the text, we obtain
3
xp (t) = X(t) X1 (t)f(t) dt
L ML M L M
1 2e5t ln |t| + (8/5)t ln |t| + (8/5)t (8/25)
= = .
2 e5t (4/25)e5t 2 ln |t| + (16/5)t + (4/25)
Adding xh (t) and xp (t) yields the general solution to the nonhomogeneous system given by
L M L M L M
1 2e5t ln |t| + (8/5)t (8/25)
x(t) = c1 + c2 + .
2 e5t 2 ln |t| + (16/5)t + (4/25)
608
Exercises 9.7
21. We will find the solution to this initial value problem by using equation (13) on page 554 of
the text. Therefore, we must first find a fundamental matrix for the associated homogeneous
system. This means that we must find the eigenvalues and corresponding eigenvectors for the
coecient matrix of this system by solving the characteristic equation
1 1
1 r 2 1
1 1
|A rI| = 1 1
1 1 3 r 1
r(3 r) + 2 = 0 r 2 3r + 2 = 0 (r 2)(r 1) = 0.
Hence, r = 1, 2 are the eigenvalues for this matrix. To find an eigenvector u = col(u1 , u2 ) for
this coecient matrix associated with the eigenvalue r = 1, we solve the system
L ML M L M
1 2 u1 0
(A I)u = = .
1 2 u2 0
This system is equivalent to the equation u1 = 2u2. Thus, u1 = 2 and u2 = 1 is a set of

values which satisfies this equation and, therefore, the vector u1 = col(2, 1) is an eigenvector
for the coecient matrix corresponding to the eigenvalue r = 1. Hence, one solution to the
homogeneous system is given by
L M L M
2 2et
x1 (t) = et u1 = et = .
1 et
Similarly, by solving the equation

L ML M L M
2 2 u1 0
(A 2I)u = = ,
1 1 u2 0
we find that one eigenvector for the coecient matrix associated with the eigenvalue r = 2
is u2 = col(u1 , u2) = col(1, 1). Thus, another linearly independent solution to the associated
homogeneous problem is given by
L M L M
1 e2t
x2 (t) = e2t u2 = e2t = .
1 e2t
609
Chapter 9
By combining these two solutions, we obtain a general solution to the homogeneous system
L M L M
2et e2t
xh (t) = c1 + c2 ,
et e2t
and the fundamental matrix L M

2et e2t
X(t) = .
et e2t
In order to use equation (13) on page 554 of the text, we must also find the inverse of the
fundamental matrix. One way of doing this is to perform row-reduction on the matrix [X(t)|I]
to obtain the matrix [I|X1(t)]. Thus, we find that
L M
t t
e e
X1 (t) = .
e2t 2e2t
From this we see that

L ML M L M
es es es 2
X1 (s)f(s) = = .
e2s 2e2s es 3es
(a) Using the initial condition x(0) = col(5, 4), and t0 = 0, we have
L M
1 1
X1 (0) = .
1 2
Therefore
3t 3t L ?t M L M
(2)ds 2t
X1 (s)f(s) ds = X1 (s)f(s) ds = ?0t = ,
0
(3es ) ds 3et 3
t0 0
from which it follows that

3t L ML M L M
2et e2t 2t 4tet + 3et 3e2t
X(t) X1 (s)f(s) ds = = .
et e2t 3et 3 2tet + 3et 3e2t
t0
We also find that

L ML ML M L ML M L M
2et e2t 1 1 5 2et e2t 1 2et + 3e2t
X(t)X1 (t0 )x0 = = = .
et e2t 1 2 4 et e2t 3 et + 3e2t
610
Exercises 9.7
Hence, by substituting these expressions into equation (13) on page 554 of the text, we
obtain the solution to this initial value problem given by
3t
x(t) = X(t)X1(t0 )x0 + X(t) X1 (s)f(s) ds
t0
L M L M L M
2et + 3e2t 4tet + 3et 3e2t 4tet + 5et
= + = .
et + 3e2t 2tet + 3et 3e2t 2tet + 4et
(b) Using the initial condition x(1) = col(0, 1), and t0 = 1, we have
L M
e1 e1
X1 (1) = .
e2 2e2
Therefore
3t 3t
1
X (s)f(s) ds = X1 (s)f(s) ds
t0 1
L ?t M L M
(2)ds 2t 2
= ?1t = ,
1
(3es ) ds 3et 3e1

3t L ML M
2et e2t 2t 2
X(t) X1 (s)f(s) ds =
et e2t 3et 3e1
t0
L M L M
4tet 4et + 3et 3e2t1 4tet et 3e2t1
= = .
2tet 2et + 3et 3e2t1 2tet + et 3e2t1
We also find that

L ML ML M
2et e2t e1 e1 0
X(t)X1(t0 )x0 =
et e2t e2 2e2 1
L ML M L M
2et e2t e1 2et1 + 2e2t2
= = .
et e2t 2e2 et1 + 2e2t2
611
Chapter 9
3t
x(t) = X(t)X1 (t0 )x0 + X(t) X1 (s)f(s) ds
t0
L M L M
2et1 + 2e2t2 4tet et 3e2t1
= +
et1 + 2e2t22tet + et 3e2t1
L M
2et1 + 2e2t2 + 4tet et 3e2t1
= .
et1 + 2e2t2 + 2tet + et 3e2t1
(c) Using the initial condition x(5) = col(1, 0), and t0 = 5, we have
L M
e5 e5
X1 (5) = .
e10 2e10
Therefore
3t 3t L ?t M L M
(2)ds 2t 10
X1 (s)f(s) ds = X1 (s)f(s) ds = ?5t = ,
5
(3es ) ds 3et 3e5
t0 5

3t L ML M
2et e2t 2t 10
X(t) X1 (s)f(s) ds =
et e2t 3et 3e5
t0
L M L M
4tet 20et + 3et 3e2t5 4tet 17et 3e2t5
= = .
2tet 10et + 3et 3e2t5 2tet 7et 3e2t5
We also find that

L ML ML M
2et e2t e5 e5 1
X(t)X1(t0 )x0 =
et e2t e10 2e10 0
L ML M L M
2et e2t e5 2et5 e2t10
= = .
et e2t e10 et5 e2t10
612
Exercises 9.7
3t
x(t) = X(t)X1 (t0 )x0 + X(t) X1 (s)f(s) ds
t0
L M L M
2et5 e2t10 4tet 17et 3e2t5
= +
et5 e2t10 2tet 7et 3e2t5
L M
2et5 e2t10 + 4tet 17et 3e2t5
= .
et5 e2t10 + 2tet 7et 3e2t5
25. (a) We will find a fundamental solutions set for the corresponding homogeneous system by
deriving solutions using the eigenvalues and associated eigenvectors for the coecient
matrix. Therefore, we first solve the characteristic equation
1 1
1 r 1 1
1 1
|A rI| = 1 1=0
1 2 3 r 1
r(3 r) + 2 = 0 r 2 3r + 2 = 0 (r 2)(r 1) = 0.
Therefore, we see that the eigenvalues for the coecient matrix of this problem are
r = 1, 2. Since these eigenvalues are distinct, the associated eigenvectors will be linearly
independent, and so the solutions derived from these eigenvectors will also be linearly
independent. We find an eigenvector for this matrix associated with the eigenvalue r = 1
by solving the equation
L ML M
1 1 u1
(A I)u = = 0.
2 2 u2
Since the vector u1 = col(u1, u2 ) = col(1, 1) satisfies this equation, we see that this vector
is one such eigenvector and so one solution to the homogeneous problem is given by
L M
1
x1 (t) = et u1 = et .
1
613
Chapter 9

L ML M
2 1 u1
(A 2I)u = = 0.
2 1 u2
The vector u2 = col(u1, u2 ) = col(1, 2) is one vector which satisfies this equation and
so it is one eigenvector of the coecient matrix associated with the eigenvalue r = 2.
Thus, another linearly independent solution to the corresponding homogeneous problem
is given by L M
1
x2 (t) = e2t u2 = e2t ,
2
and a fundamental solution set for this homogeneous system is the set
/ t 0
e u1 , e2t u2 , where u1 = col(1, 1) and u2 = col(1, 2).
(b) If we assume that xp (t) = tet a for some constant vector a = col(a1 , a2 ), then we have
L M L M L M
t t t t
te a1 e a1 te a1 + e a1
xp (t) = tet a + et a = + = .
tet a2 et a2 tet a2 + et a2
We also have
L M L ML M L M L M
0 1 0 1 tet a1 et tet a2 + et
xp (t) + f(t) = + = .
2 3 2 3 tet a2 0 2tet a1 + 3tet a2
Thus, if xp (t) = tet a is to satisfy this system, we must have

L M L M
tet a1 + et a1 tet a2 + et
= ,
tet a2 + et a2 2tet a1 + 3tet a2
which means that

tet a1 + et a1 = tet a2 + et ,
tet a2 + et a2 = 2tet a1 + 3tet a2 .
By dividing out the term et and equating coecients, this system becomes the system
a1 = a2 , a1 = 1,
a2 = 2a1 + 3a2 , a2 = 0.
614
Exercises 9.7
Since this set of equations implies that 1 = a1 = a2 = 0, which is of course impossible,

we see that this system has no solutions. Therefore, we cannot find a vector a for which
xp (t) = tet a is a particular solution to this problem.
(c) Assuming that

L M L M L M
tet a1 et b1 tet a1 + et b1
xp (t) = tet a + et b = + = ,
tet a2 et b2 tet a2 + et b2
where a = col(a1 , a2 ) and b = col(b1 , b2 ) are two constant vectors, implies that
L M
t t t
te a1 + e a1 + e b1
xp (t) = tet a + et a + et b = t t t
.
te a2 + e a2 + e a2
We also see that
L M L ML M L M
0 1 0 1 tet a1 + et b1 et
xp (t) + f(t) = +
2 3 2 3 tet a2 + et b2 0
L M
tet a2 + et b2 + et
= .
2tet a1 2et b1 + 3tet a2 + 3et b2
Thus, if xp (t) is to satisfy this system, we must have

L M L M
tet a1 + et a1 + et b1 tet a2 + et b2 + et
= , (9.7)
tet a2 + et a2 + et b2 2tet a1 2et b1 + 3tet a2 + 3et b2
which implies the system of equations given by
tet a1 + et a1 + et b1 = tet a2 + et b2 + et ,
tet a2 + et a2 + et b2 = 2tet a1 2et b1 + 3tet a2 + 3et b2 .
Dividing each equation by et and equating the coecients in the resulting equations
yields the system
a1 = a2 , a1 + b1 = b2 + 1 ,
(9.8)
a2 = 2a1 + 3a2 , a2 + b2 = 2b1 + 3b2 .
Taking the pair of equations on the right and simplifying yields the system
b1 b2 = 1 a1 ,
(9.9)
2b1 2b2 = a2 .
615
Chapter 9
By multiplying the first of these equations by 2, we obtain the system

2b1 2b2 = 2 2a1 ,
2b1 2b2 = a2 ,
which when subtracted yields 2 2a1 + a2 = 0. Applying the first equation in (9.8) (the
equation a1 = a2 ) to this equation yields a1 = a2 = 2. By substituting these values for
a1 and a2 into equation (9.9) above we see that both equations reduce to the equation
b2 = b1 + 1.
(Note also that the remaining equation in (9.8) reduces to the first equation in that set.)
Thus, b1 is free to be any value, say b1 = s, and the set of values a1 = a2 = 2, b1 = s,
b2 = s + 1, satisfies all of the equations given in (9.8) and, hence, the system given
in (9.7). Therefore, particular solutions to the nonhomogeneous equation given in this
problem are
L M L M L M L M L M
2 s 2 0 1
xp (t) = tet + et = tet + et + set .
2 s+1 2 1 1
But, since the vector u = et col(1, 1) is a solution to the corresponding homogeneous
system, the last term can be incorporated into the solution xh (t) and we obtain one
particular solution to this problem given by
L M L M
2 0
xp (t) = tet + et .
2 1
(d) To find the general solution to the nonhomogeneous system given in this problem, we
first form the solution to the corresponding homogeneous system using the fundamental
solution set found in part (a). Thus, we have
L M L M
1 1
xh (t) = c1 et + c2 e2t .
1 2
By adding the solution found in part (c) to this solution, we obtain the general solution
given by L M L M L M L M
1 1 2 0
x(t) = c1 et + c2 e2t + tet + et .
1 2 2 1
616
Exercises 9.8
EXERCISES 9.8: The Matrix Exponential Function, page 566
3. (a) From the characteristic equation, |A rI| = 0, we obtain

1 1
1 1
1 2r 1 1 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 3 1 r 1 1=0
1
1 1
1 9 3 4 r 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 r 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 r 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
(2 r) 1 11 1 + (1) 1 1=0
1 3 4 r 1 1 9 4 r 1 1 9 3 1
(2 r)[(1 r)(4 r) 3] [3(4 r) 9] [9 9(1 r)] = 0
r3 + 3r 2 + 3r + 1 = (r + 1)3 = 0.
Therefore, for the matrix A, r = 1 is an eigenvalue of multiplicity three. Thus, by the

Cayley-Hamilton theorem as stated on page 561 of the text, we have
(A + I)3 = 0
(so that r = 1 and k = 3).
(b) In order to find eAt , we first notice (as was done in the text on page 560) that
eAt = e[I+(A+I)]t , commutative and associative properties of matrix addition

= eIt e(A+I)t , property (d) on page 559 of the text [since (A + I)I = I(A + I)]
= et Ie(A+I)t , property (e) on page 559 of the text
= et e(A+I)t .
Therefore, to find eAt we need only to find e(A+I)t then multiply the resulting expression
by et . By formula (2) on page 558 of the text and using the fact that (A + I)3 = 0
(which implies that (A + I)n = 0 for n 3), we have
+ 2, + n,
(A+I)t 2t n t
e = I + (A + I)t + (A + I) + + (A + I) +
2 n!
+ 2,
2 t
= I + (A + I)t + (A + I) . (9.10)
2
617
Chapter 9
Since
3 1 1 3 1 1 3 0 1

(A + I)2 =
3 0 1 3 0 1 = 0 0 0 ,

9 3 3 9 3 3 9 0 3
equation (9.10) becomes

2 2
1 0 0 3t t t 3(t /2) 0 t /2

e(A+I)t
= 0 1 0 +
3t 0 t +
0 0 0

0 0 1 9t 3t 3t 9(t2 /2) 0 3(t2 /2)

1 + 3t 3t2 /2 t t + t2 /2

= 3t 1 t .

9t 9t2 /2 3t 1 3t + 3t2 /2
Hence, we have

1 + 3t 3t2 /2 t t + t2 /2

eAt = et
3t 1 t .

9t 9t2 /2 3t 1 3t + 3t2 /2
9. By equation (6) on page 562 of the text, we see that eAt = X(t)X1 (0), where X(t) is a
fundamental matrix for the system x = Ax. We will construct this fundamental matrix from
three linearly independent solutions derived from the eigenvalues and associated eigenvectors
for the matrix A. Thus, we solve the characteristic equation
1 1
1 1
1 r 1 0 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 0 r 1 11 = 0
1 1
1 1 1 1 r 1
1 1 1 1
1 r 1 1 1 0 1 1
1 1 1 1
(r) 1 11 1=0
1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 r 1
r[r(1 r) + 1] + 1 = r 3 + r 2 r + 1 = (r 1)(r 2 + 1) = 0.
Therefore, the eigenvalues of the matrix A are r = 1 and r = i. To find an eigenvector
618
Exercises 9.8
u = col(u1, u2 , u3 ) associated with the eigenvalue r = 1, we solve the system

1 1 0 u1 0 1 0 1 u1 0

(A I)u = 0
0 1 1 u2 = 0
0 1 1 u2 = 0 .

1 1 0 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
This system is equivalent to the system u1 = u3 , u2 = u3 . Hence, u3 is free to be any arbitrary

value, say u3 = 1. Then u1 = u2 = 1, and so the vector u = col(1, 1, 1) is an eigenvector
associated with r = 1. Hence, one solution to the system x = Ax is given by

1 et

x1 (t) = e u = e 1
t t
=
et
.
t
1 e
Since the eigenvalue r = i is complex, we want to find two more linearly independent solutions
for the system x = Ax derived from the eigenvectors associated with this eigenvalue. These
eigenvectors, z = col(z1 , z2 , z3 ), must satisfy the equation

i 1 0 z1 0

(A iI)z = 0 i 1
z2
= 0 ,

1 1 1 i z3 0
which is equivalent to the system z1 = z3 , z2 = iz3 . Thus, one solution to this system is
z3 = 1, z1 = 1, and z2 = i and so one eigenvector for A associated with the eigenvalue
r = i is given by
z1 1 1 0

z=
z2 = i = 0 + i 1 .
z3 1 1 0
By the notation on page 546 of the text, this means that = 0, = 1, a = col(1, 0, 1) and
b = col(0, 1, 0). Therefore, by equations (6) and (7) on page 546 of the text we see that two
more linearly independent solutions to the system x = Ax are given by

cos t 0 cos t

x2 (t) = e (cos t)a e (sin t)b =
(0)t (0)t
0 sin t

= sin t ,

cos t 0 cos t
619
Chapter 9

sin t 0 sin t

x3 (t) = e(0)t (sin t)a + e(0)t (cos t)b =
0 + cos t = cos t .

sin t 0 sin t
Thus, a fundamental matrix for this system is

et cos t sin t 1 1 0

X(t) =
et
sin t cos t
X(0) =
1 0 1
.
et cos t sin t 1 1 0
To find the inverse of the matrix X(0) we can, for example, perform row-reduction on the
matrix [X(0)|I] to obtain the matrix [I|X1 (0)]. Thus, we see that

1/2 0 1/2

X (0) =
1
1/2 0 1/2
.
1/2 1 1/2
Hence, we obtain

et cos t sin t 1/2 0 1/2

eAt = X(t)X1 (0) =
e
t
sin t cos t

1/2 0 1/2

et cos t sin t 1/2 1 1/2

t t
e + cos t sin t 2 sin t e cos t sin t
1

= et cos t sin t 2 cos t et cos t + sin t .
2
et cos t + sin t 2 sin t et + cos t + sin t
11. The first step in finding eAt using a fundamental matrix for the system x = Ax is to find the
eigenvalues for the matrix A. Thus, we solve the characteristic equation
1 1
1 1
1 5 r 4 0 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 1 r 2 11 = 0
1 1
1 0 2 5r 1
1 1 1 1
1 r 2 11 1 1 2 11
1 1
(5 r) 1 1 +41 1=0
1 2 5r 1 1 0 5r 1
620
Exercises 9.8
(5 r)[r(5 r) 4] + 4(5 r) = r(r 5)2 = 0.
Therefore, the eigenvalues of A are r = 0, 5, with r = 5 an eigenvalue of multiplicity two.

Next we must find the eigenvectors and generalized eigenvectors for the matrix A and from
these vectors derive three linearly independent solutions of the system x = Ax. To find the
eigenvector associated with the eigenvalue r = 0, we solve the equation

5 4 0 u1 0 1 0 2 u1 0

Au = 1 0 2
u2 = 0 0 2 5 u2

= 0 .

0 2 5 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
This equation is equivalent to the system u1 = 2u3 , 2u2 = 5u3 and one solution to this
system is u3 = 2, u1 = 4, u2 = 5. Therefore, one eigenvector of the matrix A associated
with the eigenvalue r = 0 is given by the vector
u1 = col (u1 u2 u3 ) = col(4, 5, 2),
and so one solution to the system x = Ax is

4

x1 (t) = e u1 = 5
0
.
2

0 4 0 u1 0

(A 5I)u = 1 5 2
u2
= 0 ,
0 2 0 u3 0
which is equivalent to the system u2 = 0, u1 = 2u3 . One solution to this system is u3 = 1,
u1 = 2, u2 = 0. Thus, one eigenvector of the matrix A associated with the eigenvalue r = 5
is the vector
u2 = col (u1 u2 u3 ) = col(2, 0, 1),
and so another linearly independent solution to the system x = Ax is given by

2 2e5t

x2 (t) = e5t u2 = e5t
0 = 0 .

1 e5t
621
Chapter 9
Since r = 5 is an eigenvalue of multiplicity two, we can find a generalized eigenvector (with

k = 2) associated with the eigenvalue r = 5 which will be linearly independent from the vector
u2 found above. Thus, we solve the equation
(A 5I)2 u = 0. (9.11)
Because
0 4 0 0 4 0 4 20 8

(A 5I)2 =
1 5 2 1 5 2 = 5 25 10 ,

0 2 0 0 2 0 2 10 4
we see that equation (9.11) becomes

4 20 8 u1 0 1 5 2 u1 0

5 25 10 u2 = 0 0 0 0 u2 = 0 .

2 10 4 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
This equation is equivalent to the equation
u1 + 5u2 2u3 = 0
and is, therefore, satisfied if we let u2 = s, u3 = v, and u1 = 5s 2v for any values of s and
v. Hence, solutions to equation (9.11) are given by

u1 5s 2v 5 2

u=
u2 = s = s 1 +v 0

.

u3 v 0 1
Notice that the vectors vcol(2, 0, 1) are the eigenvectors that we found above associated
with the eigenvalue r = 5. Since we are looking for a vector which satisfies equation (9.11)
and is linearly independent from this eigenvector we will choose s = 1 and v = 0. Thus, a
generalized eigenvector for the matrix A associated with the eigenvalue r = 5 and linearly
independent of the eigenvector u2 is given by
u3 = col(5, 1, 0).
622
Exercises 9.8
Hence, by formula (8) on page 563 of the text, we see that another linearly independent
solution to the system x = Ax is given by
x3 (t) = eAt u3 = e5t [u3 + t(A 5I)u3 ]

5 0 4 0 5

= e5t
1 + te5t 1 5 2 1

0 0 2 0 0

5 4 5e5t 4te5t

= e5t 5t
1 + te 0 =
e5t ,

0 2 2te5t
where we have used the fact that, by our choice of u3 , (A 5I)2 u3 = 0 and so (A 5I)n u3 = 0
for n 2. (This is the reason why we used the generalized eigenvector to calculate x3 (t).
The Cayley-Hamilton theorem, as given on page 561 of the text, states that A satisfies its
characteristic equation, which in this case means that A(A 5I)2 = 0. However, we cannot
assume from this fact that (A 5I)2 = 0 because in matrix multiplication it is possible for
two nonzero matrices to have a zero product.)
Our last step is to find a fundamental matrix for the system x = Ax using the linearly
independent solutions found above and then to use this fundamental matrix to calculate eAt .
Thus, from these three solutions we obtain the fundamental matrix given by

5t 5t 5t
4 2e 5e 4te 4 2 5

X(t) = 5 5t X(0) = 5 0 1

0 e .
2 e5t 2te5t 2 1 0
We can find the inverse matrix X1 (0) by (for example) performing row-reduction on the
matrix [X(0)|I] to obtain the matrix [I|X1 (0)]. Thus, we find

1 5 2
1
2 10 21 .
X1 (0) =
25
5 0 10
623
Chapter 9
Therefore, by formula (6) on page 562 of the text, we see that

4 2e5t 5e5t 4te5t 1 5 2
1
eAt = X(t)X1 (0) = 5 0 e5t 2 10 21
25
5t 5t
2 e 2te 5 0 10

4 + 29e5t 20te5t 20 20e5t 8 + 8e5t 40te5t
1

.
= 5 + 5e5t 25 10 + 10e5t
25
2 2e5t + 10te5t 10 + 10e5t 4 + 21e5t + 20te5t
17. We first calculate the eigenvalues for the matrix A by solving the characteristic equation
1 1
1 1
1 r 1 0 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 0 r 1 1=0
1
1 1
1 2 5 4 r 1
1 1 1 1
1 r 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0 1 1
(r) 1 11 1=0
1 5 4 r 1 1 2 4 r 1
) *
r[r(4 r) + 5] 2 = r 3 + 4r 2 + 5r + 2 = (r + 1)2 (r + 2) = 0.
Thus, the eigenvalues for A are r = 1, 2, with r = 1 an eigenvalue of multiplicity two.

To find an eigenvector u = col(u1 , u2 , u3 ) associated with the eigenvalue r = 1, we solve the
equation
1 1 0 u1 0

(A + I)u =
0 11 u2 = 0 ,

2 5 3 u3 0
which is equivalent to the system u1 = u3 , u2 = u3 . Therefore, by letting u3 = 1 (so that
u1 = 1 and u2 = 1), we see that one eigenvector for the matrix A associated with the
eigenvalue r = 1 is the vector
u1 = col(u1 , u2 , u3) = col(1, 1, 1).
Hence, one solution to the system x = Ax is given by

1

x1 (t) = et u1 = et
1 .

1
624
Exercises 9.8
Since r = 1 is an eigenvalue of multiplicity two, we can find a generalized eigenvector

associated with this eigenvalue (with k = 2) which will be linearly independent from the
vector u1 . To do this, we solve the equation
(A + I)2 u = 0

1 1 0 1 1 0 u1 0

0 0 u2
1 1 1 1 = 0
2 5 3 2 5 3 u3 0

1 2 1 u1 0 1 2 1 u1 0

2 4 2 u2 = 0 0 0 0 u2 = 0 ,
4 8 4 u3 0 0 0 0 u3 0
which is equivalent to the equation u1 + 2u2 + u3 = 0. This equation will be satisfied if we let
u3 = s, u2 = v, and u1 = 2v s for any values of s and v. Thus, generalized eigenvectors
associated with the eigenvalue r = 1 are given by

u1 2v s 1 2

u=
u 2
=
v = s 0 + v 1 .

u3 s 1 0
Hence, by letting s = 2 and v = 1, we find one such generalized eigenvector to be the vector
u2 = col(0, 1, 2),
which we see by inspection is linearly independent from u1 . Therefore, by equation (8) on

page 563 of the text, we obtain a second linearly independent solution of the system x = Ax
given by
x2 (t) = eAt u2 = et [u2 + t(A + I)u2 ]

0 1 1 0 0

= e 1
t t
+ te 0
1 1 1

2 2 5 3 2
625
Chapter 9

0 1 t

= et
1 + tet 1 = et 1 + t .

2 1 2t
In order to obtain a third linearly independent solution to this system, we will find an eigen-
vector associated with the eigenvalue r = 2 by solving the equation

2 1 0 u1 0

(A + 2I)u = 0 2 1
u2 = 0 .
2 5 2 u3 0
This equation is equivalent to the system 2u1 + u2 = 0, 2u2 + u3 = 0. One solution to this
system is given by u1 = 1, u2 = 2, and u3 = 4. Thus, one eigenvector associated with the
eigenvalue r = 2 is the vector
u3 = col(u1 , u2 , u3) = col(1, 2, 4),
and another linearly independent solution to this system is given by

1

x3 (t) = e u3 = e 2
2t 2t
.
4
Hence, by combining the three linearly independent solutions that we have just found, we see
that a general solution to this system is

1 t 1

x(t) = c1 et t
1 + c2 e 1 + t
+ c3 e2t 2 .

1 2t 4
23. In Problem 3, we found that

1 + 3t 3t2 /2 t t + t2 /2

eAt = et
3t 1 t .

9t 9t2 /2 3t 1 3t + 3t2 /2
626
Exercises 9.8
In order to use the variation of parameters formula (equation (13) on page 565 of the text),
?t
we need to find expressions for eAt x0 and 0 eA(ts) f(s) ds, where we have used the fact that
t0 = 0. Thus, we first notice that
3t 3t 3t
A(ts)
e f(s) ds = AtAs
e f(s) ds = eAt
eAs f(s) ds .
0 0 0
Since f(s) = col(0, s, 0), we observe that

1 3s 3s2 /2 s s + s2 /2 0

eAs f(s) = es 3s 1 s

9s 9s2 /2 3s 1 + 3s + 3s2 /2 0

s2 s2 es

= es
s = ses .

3s2 3s2 es
Therefore, we have
3t 3t
eA(ts) f(s) ds = eAt eAs f(s) ds
0 0
?t
2 s
(s e )ds
0? t
At

= e (ses
)ds
?t 0 2 s
0
(3s e )ds

2 et (t2 2t + 2)

= eAt
1 + et (t 1) ,

6 3et (t2 2t + 2)
where we have used integration by parts to evaluate the three integrals above. Next, since
x0 = col(0, 3, 0), we see that

1 + 3t 3t2 /2 t t + t2 /2 0 3t

eAt x0 = et 3t 1 t 3 = et 3 .

2
9t 9t /2 3t 1 3t + 3t2 /2 0 9t
627
Chapter 9
Finally, substituting these expressions into the variation of parameters formula (13), page 565
of the text, yields
3t
At
x(t) = e x0 + eA(ts) f(s) ds
0

t 2
3t 2 e (t 2t + 2)

= et 3 + eAt 1 + et
(t 1) ,

t 2
9t 6 3e (t 2t + 2)
where eAt is given above.
628
CHAPTER 10: Partial Dierential Equations
EXERCISES 10.2: Method of Separation of Variables, page 587
5. To find a general solution to this equation, we first observe that the auxiliary equation asso-
ciated with the corresponding homogeneous equation is given by r 2 1 = 0. This equation
has roots r = 1. Thus, the solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is given by
yh (x) = C1 ex + C2 ex .
By the method of undetermined coecients, we see that the form of a particular solution to
the nonhomogeneous equation is
yp (x) = A + Bx,
where we have used the fact that neither y = 1 nor y = x is a solution to the corresponding
homogeneous equation. To find A and B, we note that
yp (x) = B and yp (x) = 0.
By substituting these expressions into the original dierential equation, we obtain
yp(x) yp (x) = A Bx = 1 2x.
By equating coecients, we see that A = 1 and B = 2. Substituting these values into the
equation for yp (x) yields
yp (x) = 1 + 2x.
Thus, we see that

y(x) = yh (x) + yp (x) = C1 ex + C2 ex 1 + 2x.
629
Chapter 10
Next we try to find C1 and C2 so that the solution y(x) will satisfy the boundary conditions.
That is, we want to find C1 and C2 satisfying
y(0) = C1 + C2 1 = 0 and y(1) = C1 e + C2 e1 + 1 = 1 + e.
From the first equation we see that C2 = 1 C1 . Substituting this expression for C2 into the
second equation and simplifying yields
) *
e e1 = C1 e e1 .
Thus, C1 = 1 and C2 = 0. Therefore,
y(x) = ex 1 + 2x
is the only solution to the boundary value problem.
13. First note that the auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 + = 0. To find eigenvalues which
yield nontrivial solutions we will consider the three cases: < 0, = 0, and > 0.

Case 1, < 0: In this case the roots to the auxiliary equation are r = (where we
note that is a positive number). Therefore, a general solution to the dierential equation
y + y = 0 is given by

x
y(x) = C1 e + C2 e x
.
In order to apply the boundary conditions we need to find y (x). Thus, we have

y (x) = C1 e x
C2 e x
.
By applying the boundary conditions we obtain

y(0) y (0) = C1 + C2 C1 + C2 = 0
# % # %
1 C1 + 1 + C2 = 0,
and

y() = C1 e + C2 e
=0 C2 = C1 e2
.
630
Exercises 10.2
By combining these expressions, we observe that

# % # %
1 C1 1 + C1 e2 = 0
8# % # % 9
C1 1 1 + e2 = 0. (10.1)
This last expression will be true if C1 = 0 or if

1
2
e = .
1 +

But since > 0, we see that e2 > 1 while (1 )/(1 + ) < 1. Therefore, the
only way that equation (10.1) can be true is for C1 = 0. This means that C2 must also equal
zero and so in this case we have only the trivial solution.
Case 2, = 0: In this case we are solving the dierential equation y = 0. This equation has
a general solution given by
y(x) = C1 + C2 x y (x) = C2 .
y(0) y (0) = C1 C2 = 0 and y() = C1 + C2 = 0.
Solving these equations simultaneously yields C1 = C2 = 0. Thus, we again find only the
trivial solution.

Case 3, > 0: In this case the roots to the associated auxiliary equation are r = i.
Therefore, the general solution is given by
# % # %
y(x) = C1 cos x + C2 sin x
# % # %
y (x) = C1 sin x + C2 cos x .
By applying the boundary conditions, we obtain

y(0) y (0) = C1 C2 = 0 C1 = C2 ,
631
Chapter 10
y
2 4 6
0 x
Figure 10A: The intersection of the graphs y = x and y = tan(x), x > 0.
and
# % # %
y() = C1 cos + C2 sin = 0.
By combining these results, we obtain

8 # % # %9
C2 cos + sin = 0
Therefore, in order to obtain a solution other than the trivial solution, we must solve the
equation
# % # %
cos + sin = 0.
By simplifying this equation becomes

# %
tan = .
To see that there exist values for > 0 which satisfy this equation, we examine the graphs
of the equations y = x and y = tan(x). For any values of x > 0 where these two graphs
intersect, we set = x2 . These values for will be the eigenvalues that we seek. From
the graph in Figure 10-A, we see that there are (countably) infinitely many such eigenvalues.
These values satisfy the equations
#$ % $
tan n + n = 0.
632
Exercises 10.2
As n becomes large, we can also see from the graph that these eigenvalues approach the square
of odd multiples of 1/2. That is,
(2n 1)2
n ,
4
when n is large. Corresponding to the eigenvalue n we obtain the solutions
#$ % #$ % $ #$ % #$ %
yn (x) = C1n cos n x + C2n sin n x = n C2n cos n x + C2n sin n x

(since C1n = n C2n ). Thus
8$ #$ % #$ %9
yn (x) = Cn n cos n x + sin n x ,
where Cn is arbitrary.
17. We are solving the problem

u(x, t) 2 u(x, t)
=3 , 0 < x < , t > 0,
t t2
u(0, t) = u(, t) = 0, t > 0,
u(x, 0) = sin x 7 sin 3x + sin 5x.
A solution to this partial dierential equation satisfying the first boundary condition is given
in equation (11) on page 582 of the text. By letting = 3 and L = in this equation we
obtain the series
H 2
u(x, t) = cn e3n t sin nx . (10.2)
n=1
To satisfy the initial condition, we let t = 0 in this equation and set the result equal to
sin x 7 sin 3x + sin 5x. This yields

H
u(x, t) = cn sin nx = sin x 7 sin 3x + sin 5x.
n=1
By equating the coecients of the like terms, we see that c1 = 1, c3 = 7, c5 = 1, and all
other cn s are zero. Plugging these values into equation (10.2) gives the solution
2 2 2
u(x, t) = e3(1) t sin x 7e3(3) t sin 3x + e3(5) t sin 5x
= e3t sin x 7e27t sin 3x + e75t sin 5x .
633
Chapter 10
21. By letting = 3 and L = in formula (24) on page 585 of the text, we see that the solution
we want will have the form

H
u(x, t) = [an cos 3nt + bn sin 3nt] sin nx . (10.3)
n=1

u H
= [3nan sin 3nt + 3nbn cos 3nt] sin nx .
t n=1
In order for the solution to satisfy the initial conditions, we must find an and bn such that

H
u(x, 0) = an sin nx = 6 sin 2x + 2 sin 6x,
n=1
and
u(x, 0) H
= 3nbn sin nx = 11 sin 9x 14 sin 15x.
t n=1
From the first condition, we observe that we must have a term for n = 2, 6 and for these terms
we want a2 = 6 and a6 = 2. All of the other an s must be zero. By comparing coecients in
the second condition, we see that we require
11 14
3(9)b9 = 11 or b9 = and 3(15)b15 = 14 or b15 = .
27 45
We also see that all other values for bn must be zero. Therefore, by substituting these values
into equation (10.3) above, we obtain the solution of the vibrating string problem with = 3,
L = and f (x) and g(x) as given. This solution is given by
11 14
u(x, t) = 6 cos(3 2 t) sin 2x+ 2 cos(3 6 t) sin 6x+ sin(3 9 t) sin 9x sin(3 15 t) sin 15x.
27 45
Or by simplifying, we obtain
11 14
u(x, t) = 6 cos 6t sin 2x + 2 cos 18t sin 6x + sin 27t sin 9x sin 45t sin 15x.
27 45
23. We know from equation (11) on page 582 of the text that a formal solution to the heat flow
problem is given by

H 2
u(x, t) = cn e2(n) t sin nx , (10.4)
n=1
634
Exercises 10.3
where we have made the substitutions = 2 and L = 1. For this function to be a solution to
the problem it must satisfy the initial condition u(x, 0) = f (x), 0 < x < 1. Therefore, we let
t = 0 in equation (10.4) above and set the result equal to f (x) to obtain

H H
1
u(x, 0) = cn sin nx = sin nx .
n=1 n=1
n2
By equating coecients, we see that cn = n2 . Substituting these values of cn into equation

(10.4) yields the solution

H 2
u(x, t) = n2 e2(n) t sin nx .
n=1
EXERCISES 10.3: Fourier Series, page 603
5. Note that f (x) = ex cos(3x) = ex cos 3x. Since
f (x) = ex cos 3x = ex cos 3x = f (x)
unless x = 0 we see that this function is not even. Similarly since
f (x) = ex cos 3x = ex cos 3x = f (x),
this function is also not odd.
13. For this problem T = 1. Thus, by Definition 1 on page 594 of the text, the Fourier series for
this function will be given by

a0 H
+ (an cos nx + bn sin nx) . (10.5)
2 n=1
To compute a0 , we use equation (9) given in Definition 1 in the text noting that cos(0x) = 1.
Thus, we have
31 11
2 x3 11 1 1 2
a0 = x dx = 1 = = .
3 1 3 3 3
1
635
Chapter 10
To find an for n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., we again use equation (9) on page 594 of the text. This yields
31 31
2
an = x cos nx dx = 2 x2 cos nx dx,
1 0
where we have used the fact that x2 cos nx is an even function. Thus, using integration by
parts twice, we obtain

31 11 31
sin nx 11 2
an = 2 x2 cos nx dx = 2 x2 1 x sin nx dx
n 0 n
0 0

+ , 1 31
sin n 2 cos nx 1 1 1
= 2 0 x 1 + cos nx dx
n n n 0 n
0
L J 11 KM
2 2 1 1
= 2 0 + 2 2 (cos n 0) 2 2 sin nx11
n n n 0
4 4 4
= (1)n (sin n 0) = (1)n .
n2 2 n3 3 n2 2
To calculate the bn s, note that since x2 is even and sin nx is odd, their product is odd (see
Problem 7 in this section of the text). Since x2 sin nx is also continuous, by Theorem 1 on
page 590 of the text, we have
31
bn = x2 sin nx dx = 0 .
1
By plugging these coecients into equation (10.5) above, we see that the Fourier series asso-
ciated with x2 is given by

1 H 4
+ (1)n cos nx .
3 n=1 n2 2
21. We use Theorem 2 on page 600 of the text. Notice that f (x) = x2 and f (x) = 2x are
continuous on [1, 1]. Thus, the Fourier series for f converges to f (x) for 1 < x < 1.
Furthermore,
) * ) *
f 1+ = lim + x2 = 1 and f 1 = lim x2 = 1.
x1 x1
636
Exercises 10.3
Hence,
1 - ) +* ) *. 1
f 1 + f 1 = (1 + 1) = 1,
2 2
and so, by Theorem 2, the sum of the Fourier series equals 1 when x = 1. Therefore, the
Fourier series converges to
f (x) = x2 for 1 x 1.
Since the sum function must be periodic with period 2, the sum function is the 2-periodic
extension of f (x) which we can write as
g(x) = (x 2n)2 , 2n 1 x < 2n + 1, n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
29. To calculate the coecients of this expansion we use formula (20) on page 599 of the text.
Thus we have ?1
1 0f (x) dx
c0 = = 0,
2 =
P0 P0 2
where we have used the fact that f (x) is an odd function. To find c1 we first calculate the
denominator to be
31 31 11
2 x3 11 2
P1 = P12 (x) dx = 2
x dx = 1 = .
3 1 3
1 1
Therefore, we obtain
31 31 11
3 3 x2 11 3
c1 = f (x)P1 (x) dx = 2 x dx = 3 1 = .
2 2 2 0 2
1 0
Notice that in order to calculate the above integral, we used the fact that the product of the
two odd functions f (x) and P1 (x) is even. To find c2 , we first observe that, since f (x) is odd
and P2 (x) is even, their product is odd and so we have
31
f (x)P2 (x) dx = 0.
1
Hence ?1
1
f (x)P2 (x) dx 0
c2 = 2 = = 0.
P2 P2 2
637
Chapter 10
31. We need to show that

3
2
Hm (x)Hn (x)ex dx = 0,

for m = n, where m, n = 0, 1, 2. Therefore, we need to calculate several integrals. Lets begin

with m = 0, n = 2. Here we see that
3 3
x2
) * 2
H0 (x)H2 (x)e dx = 4x2 2 ex dx

3N 30
) * x2
) * 2
= lim 4x2 2 e dx + lim 4x2 2 ex dx .
N M
0 M
We will first calculate the indefinite integral using integration by parts with the substitution
2
u = x, dv = 2xex dx
2
du = dx, v = ex .
That is we find
3 3 3
) 2 * x2 2 x2 2
4x 2 e dx = 2 2x e dx 2 ex dx
4 3 5 3
x2 x2 2 2
= 2 xe + e dx 2 ex dx = 2xex + C.
Substituting this result in for the integrals we are calculating and using LHospitals rule to
find the limits, yields
3 + 1N , + 10 ,
x2 x2 1 x2 1
H0 (x)H2 (x)e dx = lim 2xe 1 + lim 2xe 1
N 0 M M

,+ + ,
2N 2M
= lim + 0 + lim 0 M 2
N eN 2 M e
2N 2M
= lim N 2 lim M 2 = 0 0 = 0.
N e M e
When m = 0, n = 1 and m = 1, n = 2, the integrals are, respectively,

3 3
x2 2
H0 (x)H1 (x)e dx = 2xex dx

638
Exercises 10.4
3 5/2 2 3/2 /2 /2 3/2 2 5/2 3 x
Figure 10B: The graph of the -periodic extension of f .
and
3 3
x2 2
H1 (x)H2 (x)e dx = 2x(4x2 2)ex dx .

In each case the integrands are odd functions and hence their integrals over symmetric intervals
of the form (N, N) are zero. Since it is easy to show that the above improper integrals are
convergent, we get
3 3N
= lim = lim 0 = 0.
N N
N
Since we have shown that the 3 integrals above are all equal to zero, the first three Hermite
polynomials are orthogonal.
EXERCISES 10.4: Fourier Cosine and Sine Series, page 611
2 on the interval (, ) is
3. (a) The -periodic extension f(x)

0, < x < /2,

1, /2 < x < 0,
f2(x) =
0,
0 < x < /2,

1, /2 < x < ,
2 + 2) = f(x).
with f(x 2 The graph of this function is given in Figure 10-B.
(b) Using the formula on page 607 of the text, the odd 2-periodic extension fo on the
639
Chapter 10
3 5/2 2 3/2 /2 /2 3/2 2 5/2 3 x
Figure 10C: The graph of the odd 2-periodic extension of f .
interval (, ) is

1, < x < /2,
>

f (x), < x < 0, 0, /2 < x < 0,
fo (x) = =
f (x), 0<x<
0, 0 < x < /2,

1, /2 < x < ,
with fo (x + 2) = fo (x). The graph of fo (x) is given in Figure 10-C.
(c) Using the formula on page 608 of the text, the even 2-periodic extension fe on the
interval (, ) is

1, < x < /2,
>

f (x), < x < 0, 0, /2 < x < 0,
fe (x) = =
f (x), 0<x<
0, 0 < x < /2,

1, /2 < x < ,
with fe (x + 2) = fe (x). The graph of fe (x) is given in Figure 10-D.
7. Since f is piecewise continuous on the interval [0, ], we can use equation (6) in Definition 2 on
page 609 of the text to calculate its Fourier sine series. In this problem T = and f (x) = x2 .
Thus we have

H 3
2
f (x) = bn sin nx , with bn = x2 sin nx dx .
n=1

0
640
Exercises 10.4
3 5/2 2 3/2 /2 /2 3/2 2 5/2 3 7/2 x
Figure 10D: The graph of the even 2-periodic extension of f .
To calculate the coecients, we use integration by parts twice to obtain

3 3
2 cos nx 11 2
2
bn = x sin nx dx = x 1 + x cos nx dx
2 n 0 n
0 0

1 3
2
cos n 2 sin nx 11 1
= + 0 + x 1 sin nx dx
n n n n 0
2
4 # 1 % 50
cos n 2 1 cos nx 1
= + 0 1
n n n n 0
2 cos n 2
= + 3 (cos n cos 0) ,
n n
where n = 1, 2, 3, . . . . Since cos n = 1 if n is even and cos n = 1 if n is odd for all
n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., we see that
2 (1)n 2[(1)n 1]
bn = + .
2 n n3
Therefore, for n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., we have
2(1)n+1 4[(1)n 1]
bn = + .
n n3
Substituting these coecients into the Fourier sine series for f (x) = x2 , yields
H 6 7
2(1)n+1 4[(1)n 1]
+ sin nx .
n=1
n n3
Since f (x) = x2 and f (x) = 2x are piecewise continuous on the interval [0, ], Theorem 2
on page 600 of the text implies that this Fourier series converges pointwise to f (x) on the
641
Chapter 10
interval (0, ). Hence, we can write

6
H 7
2 2(1)n+1 4[(1)n 1]
f (x) = x = + sin nx ,
n=1
n n3
for x in the interval (0, ). But since the odd 2-periodic extension of f (x) is discontinuous at
odd multiples of , the Gibbs phenomenon (see Problem 39 on page 606 of the text) occurs
around these points, and so the convergence of this Fourier sine series is not uniform on (0, ).
13. Since f (x) = ex is piecewise continuous on the interval [0, 1], we can use Definition 2 on
page 609 of the text to find its Fourier cosine series. Therefore, we have
31
a0 H
+ an cos nx, where an = 2 ex cos nx dx .
2 n=1 0
Using the fact that cos 0 = 1, we find the coecient a0 to be

31
a0 = 2 ex dx = 2(e 1).
0
We will use integration by parts twice (or the table of integrals on the inside cover of the text)
to calculate the integrals in the remaining coecients. This yields
3
ex (cos nx + n sin nx)
ex cos nx dx = ,
1 + n2 2
where n = 1, 2, 3, . . .. Thus, the remaining coecients are given by
31 12
x 2ex (cos nx + n sin nx) 11
an = 2 e cos nx dx = 1
1 + n2 2 0
0
2e(cos n) 2e(1) 2 [(1)n e 1]
= = , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . ,
1 + n2 2 1 + n2 2 1 + n2 2
where we have used the fact that cos n = 1 if n is even and cos n = 1 if n is odd. By
substituting the above coecients into the Fourier cosine series for f given above, we obtain

H
x (1)n e 1
e =e1+2 cos nx ,
n=1
1 + n2 2
642
Exercises 10.4
for 0 < x < 1. Note that we can say that ex for 0 < x < 1 equals its Fourier cosine series
because this series converges uniformly. To see this, first notice that the even 2-periodic
extension of f (x) = ex , 0 < x < 1, is given by
>
ex , 1 < x < 0,
fe (x) =
ex , 0 < x < 1,
with fe (x + 2) = fe (x). Since this extension is continuous on (, ) and fe (x) is piecewise

continuous on [1, 1], Theorem 3 on page 601 of the text states that its Fourier series (which is
the one we found above) converges uniformly to fe (x) on [1, 1] and so it converges uniformly
to f (x) = ex on (0, 1).
17. This problem is the same as the heat flow problem on page 580 of the text with = 5, L =
and f (x) = 1 cos 2x. Therefore, the formal solution to this problem is given in equations
(11) and (12) on pages 582 and 583 of the text. Thus, the formal solution is

H 2
u(x, t) = cn e5n t sin nx 0 < x < , t > 0, (10.6)
n=1
where
H
f (x) = 1 cos 2x = cn sin nx .
n=1
Therefore, we must find the Fourier sine series for 1 cos 2x. To do this, we can use equations
(6) and (7) of Definition 2 on page 609 of the text. Hence, the coecients are given by
3
2
cn = (1 cos 2x) sin nx dx

0
3 3
2 2
= sin nx dx cos 2x sin nx dx , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .

0 0
Calculating the first integral above yields

3
2 2 2
sin nx dx = (cos n 1) = [1 (1)n ] ,
n n
0
643
Chapter 10
where we have used the fact that cos n = 1 if n is even and cos n = 1 if n is odd. To
calculate the second integral, we use the fact that 2 cos sin = sin( ) + sin( + ), to
obtain

3 3 3
2 1
cos 2x sin nx dx = sin[(n 2)x] dx + sin[(n + 2)x] dx

0 0 0
1 1
= {cos[(n 2)] 1} + {cos[(n + 2)] 1}
(n 2) (n + 2)
1 1
= [(1)n 1] + [(1)n 1] .
(n 2) (n + 2)
Combining these two integrals yields
2 1 1
cn = [1 (1)n ] + [(1)n 1] + [(1)n 1]
n (n 2) (n + 2)
>
0, if n is even,
=
4/(n) 2/[(n 2)] 2/[(n + 2)], if n is odd,
for n = 1, 2, 3, . . .. Hence, we obtain the formal solution to this problem by substituting these
coecients into equation (10.6) above and setting n = 2k 1. Therefore, we have
4 5
2H 2 1 1 2
u(x, t) = e5(2k1) t sin(2k 1)x .
k=1 2k 1 2k 3 2k + 1
EXERCISES 10.5: The Heat Equation, page 624
3. If we let = 3, L = , and f (x) = x, we see that this problem has the same form as the
problem in Example 1 on page 613 of the text. Therefore, we can find the formal solution to
this problem by substituting these values into equation (14) on page 615 of the text. Hence,
we have

H
H
3n2 t
u(x, t) = cn cos e cos nx , where f (x) = cn cos nx . (10.7)
n=0 n=0
Thus, we must find the Fourier cosine series coecients for f (x) = x, 0 < x < . (Note that
the even 2-extension for f (x) = x, 0 < x < , which is given by
>
x, for < x < 0,
fe (x) =
x, for 0 < x < ,
644
Exercises 10.5
with fe (x + 2) = fe (x), is continuous. Also note that its derivative is piecewise continuous
on [.]. Therefore, the Fourier series for this extension converges uniformly to fe . This
means that the equality sign in the second equation given in formula (10.7) above is justified
for 0 < x < .) To find the required Fourier series coecients, we use equations (4) and (5)
given in Definition 2 on page 609 of the text. Hence, we have

a0 H
x= + an cos nx ,
2 n=1
(so that c0 = a0 /2 and cn = an for n = 1, 2, 3, . . .) where

3 1 3
2 2 x2 11 2
a0 = x dx = = and an = x cos nx dx,
2 10
0 0
for n = 1, 2, 3, . . .. To calculate the second integral above we use integration by parts to obtain

3 1 3
2 2 x 1 1
an = x cos nx dx = sin nx1 sin nx dx
n 0 n
40 # 1 % 5 0
2 1 cos nx 1 2 2
= 0 1 = 2
(cos n 1) = [(1)n 1] .
n n 0 n n2
Combining these results yields

,
if n = 0,
an = 4/(n2 ), if n is odd,

0, if n is even and n = 0,
where n = 0, 1, 2, . . .. The formal solution for this problem is, therefore, found by substituting
these coecients into the first equation given in formula (10.7) above. (Recall that c0 = a0 /2
and cn = an for n = 1, 2, 3, . . ..) Thus, we have
H
0 4 2
u(x, t) = e cos 0 2
e3(2k+1) t cos(2k + 1)x
2 k=0
(2k + 1)

H 4 2
= 2
e3(2k+1) t cos(2k + 1)x
2 k=0 (2k + 1)
645
Chapter 10
7. This problem has nonhomogeneous boundary conditions and so has the same form as the
problem in Example 2 on page 616 of the text. By comparing these two problems, we see that
for this problem = 2, L = , U1 = 5, U2 = 10, and f (x) = sin 3x sin 5x. To solve this
problem, we assume that the solution consists of a steady state solution v(x) and a transient
solution w(x, t). The steady state solution is given in equation (24) on page 617 of the text
and is
(10 5)x 5
v(x) = 5 + = 5+ x.

The formal transient solution is given by equations (39) and (40) on page 619 of the text. By
using these equations and making appropriate substitutions, we obtain

H 2
w(x, t) = cn e2n t sin nx , (10.8)
n=1
where the coecients (the cn s) are given by
H
5
f (x) v(x) = sin 3x sin 5x 5 x= cn sin nx , 0 < x < .
n=1
Therefore, we must find the Fourier sine series coecients for the function f (x) v(x) for
0 < x < . Since the function f (x) = sin 3x sin 5x is already in the form of a sine series, we
only need to find the Fourier sine series for v(x) = 5 5x/ and then add sin 3x sin 5x
to this series. The resulting coecients are the ones that we need. (Note that the Fourier sine
series for 5 5x/ will converge pointwise but not uniformly to 5 5x/ for 0 < x < .)
To find the desired Fourier series we use equations (6) and (7) in Definition 2 on page 609 of
the text. Thus, with the appropriate substitutions, we have
3 + ,
5x H 2 5x
5 = bn sin nx , where bn = 5 sin nx dx .
n=1

0
To find the bn s, we will use integration by parts to obtain

3 3
10 10
bn = sin nx dx 2 x sin nx dx

0 0
646
Exercises 10.5

1 3
10 10 x 1 1
= (cos n 1) 2 cos nx1 + cos nx dx
n n 0 n
0
10 10 8 9
= (cos n 1) 2 cos n + 0
n n
10 10
= (2 cos n 1) = [2(1)n 1] , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
n n
Thus, the Fourier sine series for sin 3x sin 5x 5 5x/ is given by
H
5x 10
sin 3x sin 5x 5 = sin 3x sin 5x + [2(1)n 1] sin nx
n=1
n
30 10 30 10
= sin 3x sin 5x
sin x + sin 2x sin 3x + sin 4x
2 3 4
H
30 10
sin 5x + [2(1)n 1] sin nx
5 n
+ , n=6
30 5 10 5
= sin x + sin 2x + 1 sin 3x + sin 4x
2
+ , H
6 10
1+ sin 5x + [2(1)n 1] sin nx .
n=6
n
We therefore obtain the formal transient solution by taking the coecients from this Fourier
series and substituting them in for the cn coecients in equation (10.8) above. Thus, we find
+ ,
30 2(1)2 t 5 2(2)2 t 10 2(3)2 t 5 2(4)2 t
w(x, t) = e sin x + e sin 2x + 1 e sin 3x + e sin 4x
2
+ , H
6 2(5)2 t 10 2
1+ e sin 5x + [2(1)n 1] e2n t sin nx ,
n=6
n
and so the formal solution to the original problem is given by
u(x, t) = v(x) + w(x, t)

+ ,
5x 30 2t 5 8t 10 18t 5 32t
= 5+ e sin x + e sin 2x + 1 e sin 3x + e sin 4x
2
+ , H
6 50t 10 2
1+ e sin 5x + [2(1)n 1] e2n t sin nx .
n=6
n
647
Chapter 10
9. Notice that this problem is a nonhomogeneous partial dierential equation and has the same
form as the problem given in Example 3 on page 618 of the text. By comparing these problems,
we see that here = 1,P (x) = ex , L = , U1 = U2 = 0, and f (x) = sin 2x. As in Example 3,
we will assume that the solution is the sum of a steady state solution v(x) and a transient
solution w(x, t). The steady state solution is the solution to the boundary value problem
v (x) = ex , 0 < x < , v(0) = v() = 0.
Thus the steady state solution can be found either by solving this ODE or by substituting
the appropriate values into equation (35) given on page 618 of the text. By either method we
find
e 1
v(x) = x ex + 1.

The formal transient solution is then given by equations (39) and (40) on page 619 of the
text. By making the appropriate substitutions into this equation, we obtain

H 2
w(x, t) = cn en t sin nx , (10.9)
n=1
where the cn s are given by

H
e 1
f (x) v(x) = sin 2x x + ex 1 = cn sin nx .
n=1
Hence, the problem is to find the Fourier sine coecients for f (x) v(x). The first term,
f (x) = sin 2x, is already in the desired form. Therefore, the Fourier sine series for f (x) v(x)
is
H H
sin 2x + bn sin nx = b1 sin x + (b2 + 1) sin 2x + bn sin nx ,
n=1 n=3
where the bn s are the Fourier sine coecients for v(x). This implies that if n = 2, then
cn = bn and if n = 2, then cn = bn + 1. The bn coecients are given by equation (7) on
page 609 of the text. Thus, we have
3 4 5
2 e 1 x
bn = x + e 1 sin nx dx

0
648
Exercises 10.5
+ , 3 3 3
2 e 1 2 x 2
= x sin nx dx + e sin nx dx sin nx dx .

0 0 0
We will calculate each integral separately. The first integral is found by using integration by
parts. This yields

+ , 3 1 3
2 e 1 2(e 1) x 1 1
x sin nx dx = 2
cos nx1 + cos nx dx
n 0 n
0 0
2(e 1) 8
9 2(e 1)
= cos n + 0 + 0 = (1)n .
2 n n
To find the second integral we use the table of integrals on the inside front cover of the text
(or use integration by parts twice) to obtain
3 4 5
2 x 2 e n cos n + n 2n - .
e sin nx dx = 2
= 2
e (1)n+1 + 1 .
1+n (1 + n )
0
The last integral is found to be

3
2 2 2
sin nx dx = [cos n 1] = [(1)n 1] .
n n
0
By combining all of these results, we find that the Fourier coecients for v(x) are given by
2(e 1) 2n - . 2
bn = (1)n + e (1)n+1
+ 1 + [(1)n 1] .
n (1 + n2 ) n
Therefore, the coecients for the formal transient solution are

- .
2(e 1) (1)n +

2n
e (1)n+1 + 1 +
2
[(1)n 1] , if n = 2,

n 2
(1 + n ) n
cn =

) *
e 1 + 4 1 e + 1,

if n = 2.
5
Since the formal solution to the PDE given in this problem is the sum of its steady state
solution and its transient solution, we find this final solution to be
H
e 1 x 2
u(x, t) = v(x) + w(x, t) = xe +1+ cn en t sin nx ,
n=1
where the cn s are given above.
649
Chapter 10
11. Let u(x, t) = X(x)T (t). Substituting u(x, t) = X(x)T (t) into the PDE yields
T (t) X (x)
T (t)X(x) = 4X (x)T (t) = = K,
4T (t) X(x)
where K is a constant. Substituting the solution u(x, t) = X(x)T (t) into the boundary
conditions, we obtain
X (0)T (t) = 0, X()T (t) = 0, t > 0.
Thus, we assume that X (0) = 0 and X() = 0 since this allows the expressions above to be
true for all t > 0 without implying that u(x, t) 0. Therefore, we have the two ODEs
X (x) = KX(x), 0 < x < ,

(10.10)
X (0) = X() = 0,
and
T (t) = 4KT (t), t > 0. (10.11)
To solve boundary value problem (10.10), we will examine three cases.
Case 1: Assume K = 0. Now equation (10.10) becomes X = 0. The solution is X(x) = ax+b,
where a and b are arbitrary constants. To find these constants we use the boundary conditions
in (10.10). Thus, we have
X (0) = a = 0 a=0 X(x) = b,
and so
X() = b = 0 b = 0.
Therefore, in this case we have only the trivial solution.
Case 2: Assume K > 0. In this case the auxiliary equation for equation (10.10) is r 2 K = 0.

The roots to this equation are r = K. Thus, the solution is

X(x) = C1 e Kx
+ C2 e Kx
,
650
Exercises 10.5
where C1 and C2 are arbitrary constants. To find these constants we again use the boundary
conditions in (10.10). We first note that

X (x) = C1 Ke Kx C2 Ke Kx .
Therefore,
# %
X (0) = C1 K C2 K = 0 C1 = C2 X(x) = C1 e Kx + e Kx .
The other boundary condition implies that

# % # %
K K 2 K
X() = C1 e +e =0 C1 e + 1 = 0.
The only way that the final equation above can be zero is for C1 to be zero. Therefore, we
again obtain only the trivial solution.
Case 3: Assume K < 0, so K > 0. Then the auxiliary equation for equation (10.10) has the

roots r = K = i K. Therefore, the solution is
# % # %
X(x) = C1 sin Kx + C2 cos Kx
# % # %
X (x) = C1 K cos Kx C2 K sin Kx .
Using the boundary condition X (0) = 0, we obtain

0 = X (0) = C1 K cos 0 C2 K sin 0 = C1 K C1 = 0.
) *
Hence, X(x) = C2 cos Kx . Applying the other boundary condition yields
# %
0 = X() = C2 cos K
(2n + 1)2
K = (2n + 1) K= , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
2 4
Therefore, nontrivial solutions to problem (10.10) above are given by

+ ,
2n + 1
Xn (x) = cn cos x , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
2
651
Chapter 10
By substituting the values of K into equation (10.11), we obtain
T (t) = (2n + 1)2 T (t), t > 0.
This is a separable dierential equation, and we find

3 3
dT 2 dT 2
= (2n + 1) dt = (2n + 1) dt
T T
2
ln |T | = (2n + 1)2 t + A Tn (t) = bn e(2n+1) t , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . ,
(where bn = eA ). Hence, by the superposition principle (and since un (x, t) = Xn (x)Tn (t)),
we see that the formal solution to the original PDE is
H + , H 4+ , 5
(2n+1)2 t 2n + 1 (2n+1)2 t 1
u(x, t) = bn e cn cos x = an e cos n + x , (10.12)
n=0
2 n=0
2
where an = bn cn . To find the an s, we use the initial condition to obtain

H 4+ , 5
1
u(x, 0) = f (x) = an cos n + x . (10.13)
n=0
2
Therefore, the formal solution to this PDE is given by equation (10.12), where the an s are
given by equation (10.13).
17. This problem is similar to the problem given in Example 4 on page 619 of the text with = 1,
L = W = , and f (x, y) = y. The formal solution to this problem is given in equation (52)
on page 621 of the text with its coecients given on pages 621 and 622 in equations (54)
and (55). By making appropriate substitutions in the first of these equations, we see that the
formal solution to this problem is
H
H
2 +n2 )t
u(x, y, t) = amn e(m cos mx sin ny . (10.14)
m=0 n=1
We can find the coecients, a0 n, n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., by using equation (54) on page 621 of the
text with the appropriate substitutions. This yields

3 3 3 3
2 2
a0n = y sin ny dx dy = y sin ny dx dy
2 2
0 0 0 0
652
Exercises 10.6
3
2
= y sin ny dy (use integration by parts)

0

1 3
2 y 1 1
= cos ny 1 + cos ny dy
n 0 n
0
4 + 1 ,5
2 1 1
1 2# % 2
= cos n + sin ny 1 = cos n = (1)n+1 .
n n2 0 n n
We will use equation (55) on page 622 of the text to find the other coecients. Thus for
m 1 and n 1, we have
3 3
4
amn = y cos mx sin ny dx dy
2
0 0

3 3 3
4 4
= y sin ny cos mx dx dy = 2 y sin ny(0) dy = 0.
2
0 0 0
The formal solution to this problem is found by substituting these coecients into equation
(10.14). To do this we first note that the coecients for any terms containing m = 0 are zero.
Hence, only terms containing m = 0 will appears in the summation. Therefore, the formal
H H
2 n+1 n2 t (1)n+1 n2 t
u(x, y, t) = (1) e sin ny = 2 e sin ny .
n=1
n n=1
n
EXERCISES 10.6: The Wave Equation, page 636
1. This problem has the form of the problem given in equations (1)(4) on page 625 of the text.
Here, however, = 1, L = 1, f (x) = x(1 x), and g(x) = sin 7x. This problem is consistent
because
f (0) = 0 = f (1), and g(0) = sin 0 = 0 = sin 7 = g(1).
The solution to this problem was derived in Section 10.2 of the text and given again in equation
(5) on page 625 of the text. Making appropriate substitutions in equation (5) yields a formal
653
Chapter 10
solution given by

H
u(x, t) = [an cos nt + bn sin nt] sin nx . (10.15)
n=1
To find the an s we note that they are the Fourier sine coecients for x(1 x) and so are
given by equation (7) on page 609 of the text. Thus, for n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., we have
1
31 3 31
an = 2 x(1 x) sin nx dx = 2 x sin nx dx x2 sin nx dx .
0 0 0
We will use integration by parts to calculate these two integrals. This yields
31
1 1
x sin nx dx = cos n = (1)n
n n
0
and
31 + ,
2 1 2 1 1 1 2
x sin nx dx = cos n 2 2 cos n + = (1)n + 3 3 [(1)n 1].
n n n n n n
0
Therefore, for n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., we see that

6 7
1 n 1 2 4
an = 2 (1) + (1) 3 3 [(1) 1] = 3 3 [(1)n 1] .
n n
n n n n
This can also be expressed as

>
0, if n is even,
an = 3 3
8/(n ), if n is odd.
The bn s were found in equation (7) on page 626. By making appropriate substitutions in this
equations we have

H
sin 7x = nbn sin nx.
n=1
From this we see that for n = 7
1
7b7 = 1 b7 = ,
7
654
Exercises 10.6
and for all other ns, bn = 0. By substituting these coecients into the formal solution given
in equation (10.15) above, we obtain
H
1 8
u(x, t) = sin 7t sin 7x + cos[(2k + 1)t] sin[(2k + 1)x].
7 k=0
[(2k + 1)]3
5. First we note that this problem is consistent because
g(0) = 0 = g(L) and f (0) = 0 = f (L).
The formal solution to this problem is given in equation (5) on page 625 of the text with the
coecients given in equations (6) and (7) on page 626. By equation (7), we see that

H n # nx %
g(x) = 0 = bn sin .
n=1
L L
Thus, each term in this infinite series must be zero and so bn = 0 for all ns. Therefore, the
formal solution given in equation (5) on page 625 of the text becomes

H + , # nx %
nt
u(x, t) = an cos sin . (10.16)
n=1
L L
To find the an s we note that by equation (6) on page 626 of the text these coecients are the
Fourier sine coecients for f (x). Therefore, by using equation (7) on page 609 of the text,
for n = 1, 2, 3, . . . we have

3L # nx % 3a # nx % 3L # nx %
2 2 h0 Lx
an = f (x) sin dx = x sin dx + h0 sin dx
L L L a L La L
0 0 a

3a # nx % 3L # nx % 3L # nx %
2h0 1 L 1
= x sin dx + sin dx x sin dx .
L a L La L La L
0 a a
By using integration by parts, we find

3 # nx % # nx % # nx %
xL L2
x sin dx = cos + 2 2 sin .
L n L n L
655
Chapter 10
Therefore, for n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., the coecients become

6 4 # na % # na %5 8 # na %9
2h0 1 aL L2 L2
an = cos + 2 2 sin cos n cos
L a n L n L n(L a) L
4 # %5 2 8 # 7
1 L2
aL na L na %9
cos n + cos + 2 2 sin n sin .
La n n L n L
After simplifying, this becomes
2h0 L2 # na %
an = sin , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
n2 2 a(L a) L
By substituting this result into equation (10.16) above, we obtain the formal solution to this
problem given by
# na %
+ , # nx %
2h0 L2 H 1 nt
u(x, t) = 2 sin cos sin .
a(L a) n=1 n2 L L L
7. If we let = 1, h(x, t) = tx, L = , f (x) = sin x, and g(x) = 5 sin 2x 3 sin 5x, then we see
that this problem has the same form as the problem given in Example 1 on page 627 of the
text. The formal solution to the problem in Example 1 is given in equation (16) on page 628
of the text. Therefore, with the appropriate substitutions, the formal solution to this problem
is

H 3t
1
u(x, t) = an cos nt + bn sin nt + hn (s) sin[n(t s)] ds sin nx . (10.17)
n
n=1 0
The an s are shown in equation (14) on page 628 of the text to satisfy

H
sin x = an sin nx .
n=1
Thus, the only nonzero term in this infinite series is the term for n = 1. Therefore, we see
that a1 = 1 and an = 0 for n = 1. The bn s are given in equation (15) on page 628 of the text
and so must satisfy

H
5 sin 2x 3 sin 5x = nbn sin nx ,
n=1
which implies that
5 3
2b2 = 5 b2 = and 5b5 = 3 b5 = ,
2 5
656
Exercises 10.6
and bn = 0 for all other values of n. To calculate the integral given in the formal solution we
must first find the functions hn (t). To do this, we note that in Example 1, the functions hn (t),
n = 1, 2, . . ., are the Fourier sine coecients for h(x, t) = tx with t fixed. These functions are
given below equation (13) on page 628 of the text. (We will assume proper convergence of
this series.) Thus, we have
3 3
2 2t
hn (t) = tx sin nx dx = x sin nx dx

0 0
4 5
2t 1 2t 2t
= cos n + 0 + 2 sin n sin 0 = cos n = (1)n+1 ,
n n
n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., where we have used integration by parts to calculate this integral. Substituting
this result into the integral in equation (10.17) above yields
3t 3t
2s
hn (s) sin[n(t s)] ds = (1)n+1 sin[n(t s)] ds

0 0
4 5
2(1)n+1 t sin nt 2(1)n+1
= = (nt sin nt) ,
n n n2 n3
where n = 1, 2, 3, . . .. By plugging the an s, the bn s, and the result we just found into equation
(10.17), we obtain the formal solution to this problem given by
H 4 5
5 3 1 2(1)n+1
u(x, t) = cos t sin x + sin 2t sin 2x sin 5t sin 5x + (nt sin nt) sin nx
2 5 n=1
n n3
H + ,
5 3 (1)n+1 sin nt
= cos t sin x + sin 2t sin 2x sin 5t sin 5x + 2 3
t sin nx .
2 5 n=1
n n
11. We will assume that a solution to this problem has the form u(x, t) = X(x)T (t). Substituting
this expression into the partial dierential equations yields
X(x)T (t) + X(x)T (t) + X(x)T (t) = 2 X (x)T (t).
Dividing this equation by 2 X(x)T (t) yields

T (t) + T (t) + T (t) X (x)
= .
2 T (t) X(x)
657
Chapter 10
Since these two expressions must be equal for all x in (0, L) and all t > 0, they can not vary.
Therefore, they must both equal a constant, say K. This gives us the two ordinary dierential
equations
T (t) + T (t) + T (t) ) *
=K T (t) + T (t) + 1 2 K T (t) = 0 (10.18)
2 T (t)
and
X (x)
=K X (x) KX(x) = 0. (10.19)
X(x)
Substituting u(x, t) = X(x)T (t) into the boundary conditions, u(0, t) = u(L, t) = 0, t > 0, we
obtain
X(0)T (t) = 0 = X(L)T (t), t > 0.
Since we are seeking a nontrivial solution to the partial dierential equation, we do not want
T (t) 0. Therefore, for the above equation to be zero, we must have X(0) = X(L) = 0.
Combining this fact with equation (10.19) above yields the boundary value problem given by
X (x) KX(x) = 0, with X(0) = X(L) = 0.
This problem was solved in Section 10.2 of the text. There we found that for K = (n/L)2 ,
n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., we obtain nonzero solutions of the form
# nx %
Xn (x) = An sin , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . . (10.20)
L
Plugging these values of K into equation (10.18) above yields the family of linear ordinary
dierential equations with constant coecients given by
+ ,
2 n2 2
T (t) + T (t) + 1 + T (t) = 0, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . . (10.21)
L2
The auxiliary equations associated with these ODEs are
+ ,
2 2 n2 2
r +r+ 1+ = 0.
L2
By using the quadratic formula, we obtain the roots to these auxiliary equations. Thus, we
have
" + ,
2 n2 2
1 14 1+
L2 1 L2 4L2 42n2 2
r= =
2 2 2L
658
Exercises 10.6

1 3L2 + 42 n2 2
= i, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
2 2L
Hence, the solutions to the linear equations given in equation (10.21) above are
L J K J KM
3L 2 + 42 n2 2 3L2 + 42 n2 2
Tn (t) = et/2 Bn cos t + Cn sin t ,
2L 2L
for n = 1, 2, 3, . . .. By letting
3L2 + 42 n2 2
n = , (10.22)
2L
for n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., this family of solutions can be more easily written as
Tn (t) = et/2 [Bn cos n t + Cn sin n t] .
Substituting the solutions we have just found and the solutions given in equation (10.20) above
into u(x, t) = X(x)T (t), yields solutions to the original partial dierential equation given by
# nx %
t/2
un (x, t) = Xn (x)Tn (t) = An e [Bn cos n t + Cn sin n t] sin , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
L
By the superposition principle, we see that solutions to the PDE will have the form

H # nx %
u(x, t) = et/2 [an cos n t + bn sin n t] sin ,
n=1
L
where n is given in equation (10.22) above, an = An Bn , and bn = An Cn . To find the

coecients an and bn , we use the initial conditions u(x, 0) = f (x) and u(x, 0)/t = 0.
Therefore, since

u(x, t) H /
= (1/2) et/2 [an cos n t + bn sin n t]
t n=1
0 # nx %
t/2
+e [an n sin n t + bn n cos n t] sin ,
L
we have
u(x, 0) H R an S # nx %
=0= + bn n sin .
t n=1
2 L
659
Chapter 10
Hence, each term in this infinite series must be zero which implies that
an an
+ bn n = 0 bn = , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
2 2n
Thus, we can write

H 4 5 # nx %
t/2 1
u(x, t) = an e cos n t + sin n t sin , (10.23)
n=1
2n L
where n is given above in equation (10.22). To find the an s, we use the remaining initial
condition to obtain
H # nx %
u(x, 0) = f (x) = an sin .
n=1
L
Therefore, the an s are the Fourier sine coecients of f (x) and so satisfy
3L # nx %
2
an = f (x) sin dx . (10.24)
L L
0
Combining all of these results, we see that a formal solution to the telegraph problem is given
by equation (10.23) where n and an are given in equation (10.22) and (10.24), respectively.
15. This problem has the form of the problem solved in Example 2 on page 631 of the text with
f (x) = g(x) = x. There it was found that dAlemberts formula given in equation (32) on
page 631 of the text is a solution to this problem. By making the appropriate substitutions
in this equation (and noting that f (x + t) = x + t and f (x t) = x t), we obtain the
solution
3
x+t L 1x+t M
1 1 1 s2 11
u(x, t) = [(x + t) + (x t)] + s ds = x +
2 2 2 2 1xt
xt
1 - . 1
= x+ (x + t)2 (x t)2 = x + [4tx] = x + tx .
4 4
EXERCISES 10.7: Laplaces Equation, page 649
3. To solve this problem using separation of variables, we will assume that a solution has the
form u(x, y) = X(x)Y (y). Making this substitution into the partial dierential equation yields
X (x)Y (y) + X(x)Y (y) = 0.
660
Exercises 10.7
By dividing the above equation by X(x)Y (y), we obtain

X (x) Y (y)
+ = 0.
X(x) Y (y)
Since this equation must be true for 0 < x < and 0 < y < , there must be a constant K
such that
X (x) Y (y)
= = K, 0 < x < , and 0 < y < .
X(x) Y (y)
This leads to the two ordinary dierential equations given by
X (x) KX(x) = 0 (10.25)
and
Y (y) + KY (y) = 0 (10.26)
By making the substitution u(x, y) = X(x)Y (y) into the first boundary conditions, that is,
u(0, y) = u(, y) = 0, we obtain
X(0)Y (y) = X()Y (y) = 0.
Since we do not want the trivial solution which would be obtained if we let Y (y) 0, these
boundary conditions imply that
X(0) = X() = 0.
Combining these boundary conditions with equation (10.25) above yields the boundary value
problem
X (x) KX(x) = 0, with X(0) = X() = 0.
To solve this problem, we will consider three cases.
Case 1: K = 0. For this case, the dierential equation becomes X (x) = 0, which has solutions
X(x) = A + Bx. By applying the first of the boundary conditions, we obtain
X(0) = A = 0 X(x) = Bx.
The second boundary condition yields
X() = B = 0 B = 0.
661
Chapter 10
Thus, in this case we obtain only the trivial solution.
Case 2: K > 0. In this case, the auxiliary equation associated with this dierential equation

is r 2 K = 0, which has the real roots r = K. Thus, solutions to this problem are given
by

X(x) = Ae Kx
+ Be Kx
.
Applying the boundary conditions yields

X(0) = A + B = 0 A = B X(x) = Be Kx
+ Be Kx
and
# %
X() = Be K
+ Be K
=0 B e2 K 1 = 0.
This last expression is true only if K = 0 or if B = 0. Since we are assuming that K > 0, we
must have B = 0 which means that A = B = 0. Therefore, in this case we again find only
the trivial solution.
Case 3: K < 0. The auxiliary equation associated with the dierential equation in this case

has the complex valued roots r = Ki, (where K > 0). Therefore, solutions to the
ODE for this case are given by
# % # %
X(x) = A cos Kx + B sin Kx .

# %
X(0) = A = 0 X(x) = B sin Kx
and
# %
X() = B sin K = 0 K = n K = n2 , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . ,
where we have assumed that B = 0 since this would lead to the trivial solution. Therefore,
nontrivial solutions Xn (x) = Bn sin nx are obtained when K = n2 , n = 1, 2, 3 . . . .
662
Exercises 10.7
To solve the dierential equation given in equation (10.26) above, we use these values for K.
This yields the family of linear ordinary dierential equations given by
Y (y) n2 Y (y) = 0, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
The auxiliary equations associated with these ODEs are r 2 n2 = 0, which have the real
roots r = n, n = 1, 2, 3, . . .. Hence, the solutions to this family of dierential equations are
given by
Yn (y) = Cn eny + Dn eny , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
With the substitutions K1n = Cn + Dn and K2n = Cn Dn , so that

K1n + K2n K1n K2n
Cn = , and Dn = ,
2 2
we see that these solutions can be written as
K1n + K2n ny K1n K2n ny
Yn (y) = e + e
2 2
eny + eny eny eny
= K1n + K2n = K1n cosh ny + K2n sinh ny .
2 2
This last expression can in turn be written as
Yn (y) = An sinh (ny + En ) ,
2
where An = K2n 2
K1n and En = tanh1 (K1n /K2n ). (See Problem 18.)
The last boundary condition u(x, ) = X(x)Y () = 0 implies that Y () = 0(since we do

not want the trivial solution). Therefore, by substituting into the solutions just found, we
obtain
Yn () = An sinh (n + En ) .
Since we do not want An = 0, this implies that sinh (n + En ) = 0. This will be true only if
n + En = 0 or in other words if En = n. Substituting these expressions for En into the
family of solutions we found for Y (y), yields
Yn (y) = An sinh (ny n) .
663
Chapter 10
Therefore, substituting the solutions just found for X(x) and Y (y) into un (x, y) = Xn (x)Yn (y)
we see that
un (x, y) = an sin nx sinh(ny n),
where an = An Bn . By the superposition principle, a formal solution to the original partial

dierential equation is given by

H
H
u(x, y) = un (x, y) = an sin nx sinh(ny n). (10.27)
n=1 n=1
In order to find an expression for the coecients an , we will apply the remaining boundary
condition, u(x, 0) = f (x). From this condition, we obtain

H
u(x, 0) = f (x) = an sin nx sinh(n),
n=1
which implies that an sinh(n) are the coecients of the Fourier sine series of f (x). There-
fore, by equation (7) on page 609 of the text, we see that (with T = )
3 3
2 2
an sinh(n) = f (x) sin nx dx an = f (x) sin nx dx .
sinh(n)
0 0
Thus, a formal solution to this ODE is given in equation (10.27) with the an s given by the
equation above.
5. This problem has two nonhomogeneous boundary conditions, and, therefore, we will solve two
PDE problems, one for each of these boundary conditions. These problems are
2u 2u
+ = 0, 0 < x < , 0 < y < 1;
x2 y 2
u(0, y) u(, y)
= = 0, 0 y 1,
x x
u(x, 0) = cos x cos 3x, u(x, 1) = 0, 0 x ,
and
2u 2u
+ = 0, 0 < x < , 0 < y < 1;
x2 y 2
664
Exercises 10.7
u(0, y) u(, y)
= = 0, 0 y 1,
x x
u(x, 0) = 0, u(x, 1) = cos 2x, 0 x .
If u1 and u2 are solutions to the first and second problems, respectively, then u = u1 + u2 will
be a solution to the original problem. To see this notice that
+ 2 , + 2 ,
2u 2u u1 2 u2 u1 2 u2
+ = + + +
x2 y 2 x2 x2 y 2 y 2
+ 2 , + ,
u1 2 u1 2 u2 2 u2
= + + + = 0 + 0 = 0,
x2 y 2 x2 y 2
u(0, y) u1 (0, y) u2 (0, y)
= + = 0 + 0 = 0,
x x x
u(, y) u1 (, y) u2 (, y)
= + = 0 + 0 = 0,
x x x
u(x, 0) = u1 (x, 0) + u2 (x, 0) = cos x cos 3x + 0 = cos x cos 3x ,
u(x, 1) = u1 (x, 1) + u2 (x, 1) = 0 + cos 2x = cos 2x .
This is an application of the superposition principle.
The first of these two problems has the form of the problem given in Example 1 on page 639
of the text with a = , b = 1, and f (x) = cos x cos 3x. A formal solution to this problem is
given in equation (10) on page 641 of the text. Thus, by making the appropriate substitutions,
we find that a formal solution to the first problem is

H
u1 (x, y) = E0 (y 1) + En cos nx sinh(ny n).
n=1
To find the coecients En , we use the nonhomogeneous boundary condition
u(x, 0) = cos x cos 3x .
Thus, we have

H
u1 (x, 0) = cos x cos 3x = E0 + En cos nx sinh(n).
n=1
665
Chapter 10
From this we see that for n = 1,
1
E1 sinh(1) = 1 E1 =
sinh(1)
and for n = 3,
1
E3 sinh(3) = 1 E1 = .
sinh(3)
For all other values of n, En = 0. By substituting these values into the expression found above
for u1 , we obtain the formal solution to the first of our two problems given by
cos x sinh(y 1) cos 3x sinh(3y 3)

u1 (x, y) = . (10.28)
sinh(1) sinh(3)
To solve the second of our problems, we note that, except for the last two boundary conditions,
it is similar to the problem solved in Example 1 on page 639 of the text. As in that example,
using the separation of variables technique, we find that the ODE
X (x) KX(x) = 0, X (0) = X () = 0,
has solutions Xn (x) = an cos nx, when K = n2 , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . . By substituting these values

for K into the ODE
Y (y) + KY (y) = 0,
we again find that a family solutions to this dierential equation is given by
Y0 (y) = A0 + B0 y,
Yn (y) = Cn sinh [n (y + Dn )] , n = 1, 2, 3 . . . .
At this point, the problem we are solving diers from the example. The boundary condition
u(x, 0) = X(x)Y (0) = 0, 0 x , implies that Y (0) = 0 (since we dont want the trivial
solution). Therefore, applying this boundary condition to each of the solutions found above
yields
Y0 (0) = A0 + 0 = 0 A0 = 0,
Yn (0) = Cn sinh (nDn ) = 0 Dn = 0,
666
Exercises 10.7
where we have used the fact that sinh x = 0 only when x = 0. By substituting these results
into the solutions found above, we obtain
Y0 (y) = B0 y,
Yn (y) = Cn sinh ny, n = 1, 2, 3 . . . .
Combining these solutions with the solutions Xn (x) = an cos nx yields
u2,0(x, y) = X0 (x)Y0 (y) = a0 B0 y cos 0 = E0 y ,

u2,n (x, y) = Xn (x)Yn (y) = an Cn cos nx sinh ny = En cos nx sinh ny ,
where E0 = a0 B0 and En = an Cn . Thus, by the superposition principle, we find that a formal

solution to the second problem is given by

H
u2 (x, y) = E0 y + En cos nx sinh ny .
n=1
By applying the last boundary condition of this second problem, namely u(x, 1) = cos 2x, to
these solutions, we see that

H
u2 (x, 1) = E0 + En cos nx sinh n = cos 2x ..
n=1
Therefore, when n = 2,
1
E2 sinh 2 = 1 E2 = ,
sinh 2
and for all other values of n, En = 0. By substituting these coecients into the solution
u2 (x, y) that we found above, we obtain the formal solution to this second problem
cos 2x sinh 2y
u2 (x, y) = .
sinh 2
By the superposition principle (as noted at the beginning of this problem), a formal solution
to the original partial dierential equation is the sum of this solution and the solution given
in equation (10.28). Thus, the solution that we seek is
cos x sinh(y 1) cos 3x sinh(3y 3) cos 2x sinh 2y
u(x, y) = + .
sinh(1) sinh(3) sinh 2
667
Chapter 10
11. In this problem, the technique of separation of variables, as in Example 2 on page 642 of the
text, leads to the two ODEs
r 2 R (r) + rR (r) R(r) = 0 and T () + T () = 0.
Again, as in Example 2, we require the solution u(r, ) to be continuous on its domain.

Therefore, T () must again be periodic with period 2. This implies that T () = T () and
T () = T (). Thus, as in Example 2, a family of solutions for the second ODE above
which satisfies these periodic boundary conditions is
T0 () = B and Tn () = An cos n + Bn sin n , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
In solving this problem, it was found that = n2 , n = 0, 1, 2 . . .. Again, as in Example 2,

substituting these values for into the first ODE above leads to the solutions
R0 (r) = C + D ln r and Rn (r) = Cn r n + Dn r n , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
Here, however, we are not concerned with what happens when r = 0. By our assumption that
u(r, ) = R(r)T (), we see that solutions of the PDE given in this problem will have the form
) *
u0 (r, ) = B(C + D ln r) and un (r, ) = Cn r n + Dn r n (An cos n + Bn sin n) ,
where n = 1, 2, 3, . . .. Thus, by the superposition principle, we see that a formal solution to

this Dirichlet problem is given by

H ) *
u(r, ) = BC + BD ln r + Cn r n + Dn r n (An cos n + Bn sin n) ,
n=1
or

H -) n * ) * .
u(r, ) = a + b ln r + cn r + en r n cos n + dn r n + fn r n sin n , (10.29)
n=1
where a = BC, b = BD, cn = Cn An , en = Dn An , dn = Cn Bn , and fn = Dn Bn . To find these

coecients, we apply the boundary conditions u(1, ) = sin 4 cos , and u(2, ) = sin ,
. From the first boundary condition, we see that

H
u(1, ) = a + [(cn + en ) cos n + (dn + fn ) sin n] = sin 4 cos ,
n=1
668
Exercises 10.7
which implies that a = 0, d4 + f4 = 1, c1 + e1 = 1, and for all other values of n, cn + en = 0

and dn + fn = 0. From the second boundary condition, we have

H -) * ) * .
u(2, ) = a + b ln 2 + cn 2n + en 2n cos n + dn 2n + fn 2n sin n = sin ,
n=1
which implies that a = 0, b = 0, 2d1 +21 f1 = 1, and for all other values of n, 2n c1 +2n e1 = 0
and 2n d1 + 2n f1 = 0. By combining these results, we obtain a = 0, b = 0, and the three
systems of two equations in two unknowns given by
d4 + f4 = 1, c1 + e1 = 1, d1 + f1 = 0,
4
and 1
and
4
2 d4 + 2 f4 = 0 2c1 + 2 e1 = 0 2d1 + 21 f1 = 1,
(where the first equation in each system was derived from the first boundary condition and
the second equation in each system was derived from the second boundary condition), and
for all other values of n, cn = 0 , en = 0, dn = 0, fn = 0. Solving each system of equations
simultaneously yields
1 256 1 4 2 2
d4 = , f4 = , c1 = , e1 = , d1 = , f1 = .
255 255 3 3 3 3
By substituting these values for the coecients into equation (10.29) above, we find that a
solution to this Dirichlet problem is given by
+ , + , + ,
1 4 1 2 2 1 1 4 256 4
u(r, ) = r r cos + r r sin + r r sin 4 .
3 3 3 3 255 255
15. Here, as in Example 2 on page 642 of the text, the technique of separation of variables leads
to the two ODEs given by
r 2 R (r) + rR (r) R(r) = 0 and T () + T () = 0.
Since we want to avoid the trivial solution, the boundary condition u(r, 0) = R(r)T (0) = 0
implies that T (0) = 0 and the boundary condition u(r, ) = R(r)T () = 0 implies that
T () = 0. Therefore, we seek a nontrivial solution to the ODE
T () + T () = 0, with T (0) = 0 and T () = 0. (10.30)
669
Chapter 10
To do this we will consider three cases for .
Case 1: = 0. This case leads to the dierential equation T () = 0, which has solutions
T () = A+B. Applying the first boundary condition yields 0 = T (0) = B. Thus, T () = A.
The second boundary condition implies that 0 = T () = A. Hence, A = 0. Therefore, in
this case we find only the trivial solution.
Case 2: < 0. In this case, the auxiliary equation associated with the linear dierential equa-

tion given in equation (10.30) above is r 2 + = 0, which has the real roots r = (where
> 0). Thus, the solution to this dierential equation has the form

T () = C1 e + C2 e
.
Applying the first boundary condition yields

0 = T (0) = C1 + C2 C1 = C2 T () = C2 e + C2 e
.
From the second boundary condition, we obtain

# % # %
2
0 = T () = C2 e +e C2 e 1 = 0.
Since we are assuming that < 0, the only way that this last expression can be zero is for
C2 = 0. Thus, C1 = C2 = 0 and we again obtain the trivial solution.
Case 3: > 0. In this case, the roots to the auxiliary equation associated with this dierential

equation are r = i. Therefore, the solution to the dierential equation given in equation
(10.30) is

T () = C1 sin + C2 cos .
From the boundary conditions, we see that

0 = T (0) = C2 T () = C1 sin ,
and

0 = T () = C1 sin .
670
Exercises 10.7

Since we do not want the trivial solution, this last boundary condition yields sin = 0.

This will be true if = n or, in other words, if = n2 , n = 1, 2, 3, . . .. With these values
for , we find nontrivial solution for the dierential equation given in equation (10.30) above
to be
Tn () = Bn sin n , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
Substituting the values for that we have just found into the dierential equation
r 2 R (r) + rR (r) R(r) = 0,
yields the ODE

r 2 R (r) + rR (r) n2 R(r) = 0, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
This is the same Cauchy-Euler equation that was solved in Example 2 on page 642 of the
text. There it was found that the solutions have the form
Rn (r) = Cn r n + Dn r n , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
Since we require that u(r, ) to be bounded on its domain, we see that u(r, ) = R(r)T ()
must be bounded about r = 0. This implies that R() must be bounded. Therefore, Dn = 0
and so the solutions to this Cauchy-Euler equation are given by
Rn (r) = Cn r n , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
Since we have assumed that u(r, ) = R(r)T (), we see that formal solutions to the original
partial dierential equation are
un (r, ) = Bn Cn r n sin n = cn r n sin n ,
where cn = Bn Cn . Therefore, by the superposition principle, we obtain the formal solutions

to this Dirichlet problem

H
u(r, ) = cn r n sin n .
n=1
The final boundary condition yields

H
u(1, ) = sin 3 = cn sin n .
n=1
671
Chapter 10
This implies that c3 = 1 and for all other values of n, cn = 0. Substituting these values for the
coecients into the formal solution found above, yields the solution to this Dirichlet problem
on the half disk
u(r, ) = r 3 sin 3 .
17. As in Example 2 on page 642 of the text, we solve this problem by separation of variables.
There it was found that we must solve the two ordinary dierential equations
r 2 R (r) + rR (r) R(r) = 0, (10.31)
and
T () + T () = 0 with T () = T (n) and T () = T (n). (10.32)
In Example 2, we found that when = n2 , n = 0, 1, 2, . . ., the linear dierential equation

given in equation (10.32) has nontrivial solutions of the form
Tn () = An cos n + Bn sin n , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . ,
and equation (10.31) has solutions of the form
R0 (r) = C + D ln r and Rn (r) = Cn r n + Dn r n , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
(Note that here we are not concerned with what happens to u(r, ) around r = 0.) Thus,
since we are assuming that u(r, ) = R(r)T (), we see that solutions to the original partial
dierential equation will be given by
u0 (r, ) = A0 (C + D ln r) = a0 + b0 ln r,
and
) *
un (r, ) = Cn r n + Dn r n (An cos n + Bn sin n)
) * ) *
= an r n + bn r n cos n + cn r n + dn r n sin n ,
672
Exercises 10.7
where a0 = A0 C, b0 = A0 D, an = Cn An , bn = Dn An , cn = Cn Bn , and dn = Dn Bn . Thus, by

the superposition principle, we see that a formal solution to the partial dierential equation
given in this problem will have the form

H -) n * ) * .
u(r, ) = a0 + b0 ln r + an r + bn r n cos n + cn r n + dn r n sin n . (10.33)
n=1
By applying the first boundary condition, we obtain

H
u(1, ) = f () = a0 + [(an + bn ) cos n + (cn + dn ) sin n] ,
n=1
where we have used the fact that ln 1 = 0. Comparing this equation with equation (8) on
page 594 of the text, we see that a0 , (an + bn ), and (cn + dn ) are the Fourier coecients of
f () (with T = ). Therefore, by equations (9) and (10) on that same page we see that
3
1
a0 = f () d ,
2

3
1
an + bn = f () cos n d , (10.34)

3
1
cn + d n = f () sin n d , n = 1, 2, 3 . . . .

To apply the last boundary condition, we must find u/r. Hence, we find

u(r, ) b0 H -) * ) * .
= + an nr n1 bn nr n1 cos n + cn nr n1 dn nr n1 sin n .
r r n=1
Applying the last boundary condition yields

u(3, ) b0 H -) * ) * .
= g() = + an n3n1 bn n3n1 cos n + cn n3n1 dn n3n1 sin n .
r 3 n=1
Again by comparing this to equation (8) on page 594 of the text, we see that
b0 ) * ) *
, n3n1 an n3n1 bn , and n3n1 cn n3n1 dn
3
673
Chapter 10
are the Fourier coecients of g() (with T = ). Thus, by equations (9) and (10) on that
same page of the text, we see that
3
3
b0 = g() d ,
2

3
1
n3n1 an n3n1 bn = g() cos n d , (10.35)

3
1
n3n1 cn n3n1 dn = g() sin n d , n = 1, 2, 3 . . . .

Therefore, the formal solution to this partial dierential equation will be given by equation
(10.33) with the coecients given by equations (10.34) and (10.35).
674
CHAPTER 11: Eigenvalue Problems and
Sturm-Liouville Equations
EXERCISES 11.2: Eigenvalues and Eigenfunctions, page 671
1. The auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 + 2r + 26 = 0, which has roots r = 1 5i.
Hence a general solution to the dierential equation y + 2y + 26y = 0 is given by
y(x) = C1 ex cos 5x + C2 ex sin 5x.
We will now try to determine C1 and C2 so that the boundary conditions are satisfied. Setting
x = 0 and x = , we find
y(0) = C1 = 1, y() = C1 e = e .
Both boundary conditions yield the same result, C1 = 1. Hence, there is a one parameter
family of solutions,
y(x) = ex cos 5x + C2 ex sin 5x.,
where C2 is arbitrary.
13. First note that the auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 + = 0. To find eigenvalues which
yield nontrivial solutions we will consider the three cases < 0, = 0, and > 0.

Case 1. < 0: In this case the roots to the auxiliary equation are (where we note that
is a positive number). Therefore, a general solution to the dierential equation y +y = 0
is given by

x
y(x) = C1 e + C2 e x
.
y(0) = C1 + C2 = 0 C2 = C1 .
675
Chapter 11
Thus
# %
y(x) = C1 e x e x .
In order to apply the second boundary conditions, we need to find y (x). Thus, we have
# %
x x
y(x) = C1 e +e .
Thus
# %
y(1) = C1 e + e = 0. (11.1)

Since > 0 and e + e
= 0, the only way that equation (11.1) can be true is for
C1 = 0. So in this case we have only the trivial solution. Thus, there are no eigenvalues for
< 0.
Case 2. = 0: In this case we are solving the dierential equation y = 0. This equation has
y(x) = C1 + C2 x y (x) = C2 .
y(0) = C1 = 0 and y (1) = C1 = 0.
Thus C1 = C2 = 0, and zero is not an eigenvalue.

Case 3. > 0: In this case the roots to the associated auxiliary equation are r = i.
Therefore, the general solution is given by
# % # %
y(x) = C1 cos x + C2 sin x .

# %
y(0) = C1 = 0 y(x) = C2 sin x .
In order to apply the second boundary conditions we need to find y (x). Thus, we have
# %
y (x) = C2 cos x ,
676
Exercises 11.2
and so
# %
y (1) = C2 cos = 0.
Therefore, in order to obtain a solution other than the trivial solution, we must have
# % + ,
1
cos =0 = n+ , n = 0, 1, 2, . . .
2
+ ,2
1
n = n + 2 , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
2
For the eigenvalue n , we have the corresponding eigenfunctions,
4+ , 5
1
yn (x) = Cn sin n + x , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . ,
2
where Cn is an arbitrary nonzero constant.
19. The equation (xy ) + x1 y = 0 can be rewritten as the Cauchy-Euler equation
x2 y + xy + y = 0, x > 0. (11.2)
Substituting y = xr gives r 2 + = 0 as the auxiliary equation for (11.2). Again we will

consider the three cases < 0, = 0, and > 0.
Case 1. < 0: Let = 2 , for > 0. The roots of the auxiliary equation are r = and
so a general solution to (11.2) is
y(x) = C1 x + C2 x .
We first find y (x).

) *
y (x) = C1 x1 C2 x1 = C1 x1 C2 x1 .
Substituting into the first boundary condition gives
y (1) = (C1 C2 ) = 0.
Since > 0,
) *
C1 C2 = 0 C1 = C2 y(x) = C1 x + x .
677
Chapter 11
Substituting this into the second condition yields

) *
y (e ) = C1 e + e = 0. (11.3)
Since e + e = 0 the only way that equation (11.3) can be true is for C1 = 0. So in this
case we have only the trivial solution. Thus, there is no eigenvalue for < 0.
Case 2. = 0: In this case we are solving the dierential equation (xy ) = 0. This equation
can be solved as follows:
C1
xy = C1 y = y(x) = C2 + C1 ln x .
x
y (1) = C1 = 0 and y (e ) = C2 + C1 ln (e ) = C2 + C1 = 0.
trivial solution. Therefore, = 0 is not an eigenvalue.
Case 3. > 0: Let = 2 , for > 0. The roots of the auxiliary equation are r = i and so
a general solution (11.2) is
y(x) = C1 cos ( ln x) + C2 sin ( ln x) .
We next find y(x).

#% #%
y (x) = C1 sin ( ln x) + C2 cos ( ln x) .
x x
y (1) = C2 = 0 C2 = 0.
Applying the second boundary condition, we obtain
y (e ) = C1 cos ( ln(e )) = C1 cos () = 0.
+ ,
1
cos () = 0 = n + n = 0, 1, 2, . . .
2
678
Exercises 11.2
+ ,2
1 1
=n+ n = n+ , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
2 2
Corresponding to the eigenvalues, n s, we have the eigenfunctions.
4+ , 5
1
yn (x) = Cn cos n + ln x , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . ,
2
25. As in Problem 13, the auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 + = 0. To find eigenvalues
which yield nontrivial solutions we will consider the three cases < 0, = 0, and > 0.

Case 1. < 0: The roots of the auxiliary equation are r = and so a general solution
to the dierential equation y + y = 0 is given by

x
y(x) = C1 e + C2 e x
.
By applying the first boundary condition we obtain
y(0) = C1 + C2 = 0 C2 = C1 .
Thus
# %
y(x) = C1 e x e x .
Applying the second boundary conditions yields

) * # 2
2
%
y 1 + 2 = C1 e (1+ ) e (1+ ) = 0.

(1+2 )
Multiplying by e yields
# 2
%
C1 e2 (1+ ) 1 = 0.
Now either C1 = 0 or

(1+2 )

e2 =1 (1 + 2 ) = 0 = 0.
Since < 0, we must have C1 = 0 and hence there are no eigenvalues for < 0.
679
Chapter 11
Case 2. = 0: In this case we are solving the dierential equation y = 0. This equation has
y(x) = C1 + C2 x.

) * ) *
y(0) = C1 = 0 and y 1 + 2 = C1 + C2 1 + 2 = 0.
Solving these equations simultaneously yields C1 = C2 = 0. Thus, we find that is = 0 not

an eigenvalue.

Case 3. > 0: The roots of the auxiliary equation are r = i and so a general solution is
# % # %
y(x) = C1 cos x + C2 sin x .
Substituting in the first boundary condition yields

# % # %
y(0) = C1 cos 0 + C2 sin 0 = C1 = 0.
# %
By applying the second boundary condition to y(x) = C2 sin x , we obtain
) * # %
y 1 + 2 = C2 sin (1 + 2 ) = 0.
# %
sin (1 + 2 ) = 0 (1 + 2 ) = n, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .

Hence choose the eigenvalues n , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . , such that n (1 + 2n ) = n; and the
corresponding eigenfunctions are
#$ %
yn (x) = Cn sin n x , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . ,
where the Cn s are arbitrary nonzero constants.
33. (a) We assume that u(x, t) = X(x)T (t). Then
utt = X(x)T (t), ux = X (x)T (t), and uxx = X (x)T (t).
680
Exercises 11.2
Substituting these functions into utt = uxx + 2ux , we obtain
X(x)T (t) = X (x)T (t) + 2X (x)T (t).

X (x) + 2X (x) T (t)
= = , (11.4)
X(x) T (t)
where is some constant. The first equation in (11.4) gives
X (x) + 2X (x) + X(x) = 0.
Lets now consider the boundary conditions. From u(0, t) = 0 and u(, t) = 0, t > 0, we
conclude that
X(0)T (t) = 0 and X()T (t) = 0, t > 0.
Hence either T (t) = 0 for all t > 0, which implies u(x, t) 0, or
X(0) = X() = 0.
Ignoring the trivial solution u(x, t) 0, we obtain the boundary value problem
X (x) + 2X (x) + X(x) = 0, X(0) = X() = 0.

(b) The auxiliary equation for this problem, r 2 + 2r + = 0, has roots r = 1 1 .
To find eigenvalues which yield nontrivial solutions, we will consider the three cases
1 < 0, 1 = 0, and 1 > 0.
$
Case 1, 1 < 0 ( > 1): Let = (1 ) = 1. In this case the roots to the
auxiliary equation are r = 1 i (where is a positive number). Therefore, a general
solution to the dierential equation is given by
X(x) = C1 ex cos x + C2 ex sin x.
X(0) = C1 = 0 and X() = e (C1 cos + C2 sin ) = 0 .
681
Chapter 11
Solving these equations simultaneously yields C1 = 0 and C2 sin = 0. Therefore, in

order to obtain a solution other than the trivial solution, we must have
sin = 0 = n = n, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .

Since = 1,

1=n = n2 + 1, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
Thus the eigenvalues are given by
n = n2 + 1, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
Corresponding to the eigenvalue n , we obtain the solutions
Xn (x) = Cn ex sin nx, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . ,
where Cn = 0 is arbitrary.
Case 2, 1 = 0 ( = 1): In this case the associated auxiliary equation has double root
r = 1. Therefore, the general solution is given by
X(x) = C1 ex + C2 xex .
X(0) = C1 = 0 and X() = e (C1 + C2 ) = 0 .
Solving these equations simultaneously yields C1 = C2 = 0. So in this case we have only

the trivial solution. Thus, = 1 is not an eigenvalue.

Case 3, 1 > 0 ( < 1): Let = 1 . In this case the roots to the auxiliary
equation are r = 1 (where is a positive number). Therefore, a general solution
to the dierential equation is given by
X(x) = C1 e(1)x + C2 e(1+)x .
682
Exercises 11.3
By applying the first boundary condition we find
X(0) = C1 + C2 = 0 C2 = C1 .
So we can express X(x) as

- .
X(x) = C1 e(1)x e(1+)x .
Thus the second condition gives us

- .
X() = C1 e(1) e(1+) .
Since e(1) e(1+) = 0, C1 = 0, and again in this case we have only the trivial
solution. Thus, there are no eigenvalues for < 1.
Therefore, the eigenvalues are n = n2 + 1, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . , with corresponding eigenfunc-
tions Xn (x) = Cn ex sin nx, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . , where Cn is an arbitrary nonzero constant.
EXERCISES 11.3: Regular Sturm-Liouville Boundary Value Problems, page 682
3. Here A2 = x(1 x) and A1 = 2x. Using formula (4) on page 673 of the text, we find
1 ? 1 ? 1 ?
(x) = e [A1 (x)/A2 (x)]dx = e [2x/x(1x)]dx = e2 dx/(1x)
x(1 x) x(1 x) x(1 x)
1 1 1 x
= e2 ln(1x) = (1 x)2 = .
x(1 x) x(1 x) x
Multiplying the original equation by (x) = (1 x)/x, we get
1x
(1 x)2 y (x) 2(1 x)y (x) + y(x) = 0
x
- . 1x
(1 x)2 y (x) + y(x) = 0.
x
9. Here we consider the linear dierential operator L[y] := y +y; y(0) = y(), y (0) = y ().
We must show that
(u, L[v]) = (L[u], v),
683
Chapter 11
where u(x) and v(x) are any functions in the domain of L. Now
3 3 3

(u, L[v]) = u(x) [v (x) + v(x)] dx = u(x)v (x) dx + u(x)v(x) dx
0 0 0
and
3 3 3
(L[u], v) = [u (x) + u(x)] v(x) dx = u (x)v(x) dx + u(x)v(x)dx.
0 0 0
? ?
Hence it suces to show that u(x)v (x) dx = u (x)v(x) dx. To do this we start with
0 0
?
u (x)v(x) dx and integrate by parts twice. Doing this we obtain
0
3 3
1 1
u (x)v(x) dx = u (x)v(x) 10 u(x)v (x) 10 +

u(x)v (x) dx.
0 0
1 1
Hence, we just need to show u (x)v(x) 10 u(x)v (x) 10 = 0. Expanding gives
1 1
u (x)v(x) 10 u(x)v (x) 10 = u ()v() u (0)v(0) u()v () + u(0)v (0).
Since u is in the domain of L, we have u(0) = u(), and u (0) = u (). Hence,
1 1
u(x)v(x) 10 u(x)v (x) 10 = u() [v() + v(0)] u() [v () + v (0)] .
But v also lies in the domain of L and hence v(0) = v() and v (0) = v (). This makes
1 1
the expressions in the brackets zero and we have u (x)v(x) 1 u(x)v (x) 1 = 0. 0 0
Therefore, L is selfadjoint.
17. In Problem 13 of Section 11.2, we found the eigenvalues to be

+ ,2
1
n = n + 2, n = 0, 1, 2, . . .
2
with the corresponding eigenfunctions
4+ , 5
1
yn (x) = Cn sin n + x , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . ,
2
684
Exercises 11.3
(a) We need only to choose the Cn so that

31 4+ , 5
1
Cn2 2
sin n+ x dx = 1.
2
0
We compute
31 4+ , 5 31
2 2 1 1 2
Cn sin n+ x dx = C (1 cos [(2n + 1)x]) dx
2 2 n
0 0
+ ,11
1 2 1 1 1
= Cn x sin [(2n + 1)x] 11 = Cn2 .
2 (2n + 1) 0 2

Hence, we can take Cn = 2 which gives
6 4+ , 57
1
2 sin n + x ,
2 n=0
as an orthonormal system of eigenfunctions.
(b) To obtain the eigenfunction expansion for f (x) = x, we use formula (25) on page 679 of
the text. Thus,
31 4+ , 5
1
cn = x 2 sin n + x dx .
2
0
-) * .
Using integration by parts with u = 2x and dv = sin n + 12 x dx, we find
11 31
2x cos[(n + 1/2)x] 11 2x cos[(n + 1/2)x] dx
cn = 1 +
(n + 1/2) 1 (n + 1/2)
0 0
11
2 cos[(n + 1/2)] 2 sin[(n + 1/2)x] 11
= + 1
(n + 1/2) (n + 1/2)2 2 1
0
n

2 sin[(n + 1/2)] (1) 2
= 0+ 2 2
= .
(n + 1/2) (n + 1/2)2 2
Therefore

H 4+ , 5 H 4+ , 5
1 2(1)n 1
x= cn 2 sin n + x = 2 2
sin n + x
n=0
2 n=0
(n + 1/2) 2
4+ , 5
8 H (1)n 1
= sin n + x .
2 n=0 (2n + 1)2 2
685
Chapter 11
23. In Problem 19 of Section 11.2, we found the eigenvalues

+ ,2
1
n = n + , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . ,
2
with the corresponding eigenfunctions
4+ , 5
1
yn (x) = Cn cos n + ln x , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . ,
2
(a) We need only to choose the Cn so that

3e 4+ , 5
1 1
Cn2 2
cos n+ ln x dx = 1.
2 x
1
To compute, we let u = ln x and so du = dx/x. Substituting, we find

3e 4+ , 5 3 4+ , 5
1 1 1
Cn2 2
cos n+ ln x 2
dx = Cn cos 2
n+ u du
2 x 2
1 0
3
1 2
= C {1 + cos [(2n + 1)u]} du
2 n
0
+ ,1
1 2 1 1
= C u+ sin [(2n + 1)u] 11 = Cn2 .
2 n 2n + 1 0 2
$
Hence, we can take Cn = 2/, which gives
>! 4+ , 5O
2 1
cos n + ln x ,
2
n=0
as an orthonormal system of eigenfunctions.
(b) To obtain the eigenfunction expansion for f (x) = x, we use formula (25) on page 679 of
the text. Thus, with w(x) = x1 , we have
3e ! 4+ , 5
2 1
cn = x cos n + ln x x1 dx.
2
1
686
Exercises 11.4
Let u = ln x. Then du = dx/x, and we have

! 3 4+ , 5
2 u 1
cn = e cos n + u du
2
0
! 1
2 eu cos[(n + 1/2)u] + eu (n + 1/2) sin[(n + 1/2)u] 11
= 1
1 + (n + 1/2)2 0
! !
n
2 e (n + 1/2) sin[(n + 1/2)] 1 2 (1) e (n + 1/2) 1
= 2
= .
1 + (n + 1/2) 1 + (n + 1/2)2
Therefore,
! 4+ , 5
H 2 1
x = cn cos n+ ln x
n=0
2
H 4+ , 5
2 (1)n e (n + 1/2) 1 1
= cos n+ ln x .
n=0
1 + (n + 1/2)2 2
EXERCISES 11.4: Nonhomogeneous Boundary Value Problems and the Fredholm

Alternative, page 692
3. Here our dierential operator is given by

) *
L[y] = 1 + x2 y + 2xy + y.
Substituting into the formula (3) page 684 of the text, we obtain
- . - .
L+ [y] = (1 + x2 )y (2xy) + y = 2xy + (1 + x2 )y 2y 2xy + y
= 2y + 2xy + 2xy + (1 + x2 )y 2y 2xy + y = (1 + x2 )y + 2xy + y.
L[y] = y 2y + 10y; y(0) = y() = 0.
Hence
L+ [v] = v + 2v + 10v.
687
Chapter 11
To find the D (L+ ), we must have

1
P (u, v)(x) 10 = 0 (11.5)
for all u in D(L) and v in D (L+ ). Using formula (9) page 685 of the text for P (u, v) with
A1 = 2 and A2 = 1, we find
P (u, v) = 2uv uv + u v.
Evaluating at and 0, condition (11.5) becomes
2u()v() u()v () + u ()v() + 2u(0)v(0) + u(0)v (0) u (0)v(0) = 0.
Since u in D(L), we know that u(0) = u() = 0. Thus the above equation becomes
u()v() u (0)v(0) = 0.
Since u() and u (0) can take on any value, we must have v(0) = v() = 0 for this equation
to hold for all u in D(L). Hence D (L+ ) consists of all function v having continuous second
derivatives on [0, ] and satisfying the boundary condition
v(0) = v() = 0.
L[y] = y + 6y + 10y; y (0) = y () = 0.
Hence
L+ [v] = v 6v + 10v.
To find the D (L+ ), we must have

1
P (u, v)(x) 10 = 0 (11.6)
for all u in D(L) and v in D (L+ ). Again using formula (9) page 685 of the text for P (u, v)
with A1 = 6 and A2 = 1, we find
P (u, v) = 6uv uv + uv.
688
Exercises 11.4
Evaluating at and 0, condition (11.6) becomes
6u()v() u()v () + u ()v() 6u(0)v(0) + u(0)v (0) u (0)v(0) = 0.
Applying the boundary conditions u (0) = u () = 0 to the above equation yields
6u()v() u()v () 6u(0)v(0) + u(0)v (0) = 0

u() [6v() v ()] u(0) [6v(0) v (0)] = 0.
Since u() and u(0) can take on any value, we must have 6v()v () = 0 and 6v(0)v (0) = 0
in order for the equation to hold for all u in D(L). Therefore, the adjoint boundary value
problem is
L+ [v] = v 6v + 10v; 6v() = v () and 6v(0) = v (0).
17. In Problem 7 we found the adjoint boundary value problem
L+ [v] = v + 2v + 10v; v(0) = v() = 0. (11.7)
The auxiliary equation for (11.7) is r 2 + 2r + 10 = 0, which has roots r = 1 3i. Hence a
general solution to the dierential equation in (11.7) is given by
y(x) = C1 ex cos 3x + C2 ex sin 3x.
Using the boundary conditions in (11.7) to determine C1 and C2 , we find
y(0) = C1 = 0 and y() = C1 e = 0.
Thus C1 = 0 and C2 is arbitrary. Therefore, every solution to the adjoint problem (11.7) has
the form
y(x) = C2 ex sin 3x.
It follows from the Fredholm alternative that if h is continuous, then the nonhomogeneous
problem has a solution if and only if
3
h(x)ex sin 3x dx = 0.
0
689
Chapter 11
21. In Problem 11 we found the adjoint boundary value problem
L+ [v] = v 6v + 10v; 6v() = v () and 6v(0) = v (0). (11.8)
The auxiliary equation for (11.8) is r 2 6r + 10 = 0, which has roots r = 3 i. Hence a

general solution to the dierential equation in (11.8) is given by
y(x) = C1 e3x cos x + C2 e3x sin x.
To apply the boundary conditions in (11.8), we first determine y (x).
y (x) = 3C1 e3x cos x C1 e3x sin x + 3C2 e3x sin x + C2 e3x cos x.
Applying the first condition, we have
6C1 e3 = 3C1 e3 C2 e3 3C1 = C2 .
Applying the second condition, we have
6C1 = 3C1 + C2 3C1 = C2 .
Thus C2 = 3C1 where C1 is arbitrary. Therefore, every solution to the adjoint problem (11.8)
has the form
y(x) = C1 e3x (cos x + 3 sin x).
It follows from the Fredholm alternative that if h is continuous, then the nonhomogeneous
problem has a solution if and only if
3
h(x)e3x (cos x + 3 sin x) dx = 0.
0
EXERCISES 11.5: Solution by Eigenfunction Expansion, page 698
3. In Example 1 on page 696 of the text we noted that the boundary value problem
y + y = 0; y(0) = 0, y() = 0,
690
Exercises 11.5
has eigenvalues n = n2 , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . , with corresponding eigenfunctions
n (x) = sin nx, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
Here r(x) 1, so we need to determine coecients n such that

f (x) H
f (x) = = n sin nx = sin 2x + sin 8x.
r(x) n=1
Clearly 2 = 8 = 1 and the remaining n s are zero. Since = 4 = 2 and 2 = 1 = 0 there

is no solution to this problem.
5. In equation (18) on page 666 of the text we noted that the boundary value problem
y + y = 0; y (0) = 0, y () = 0,
has eigenvalues n = n2 , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . , with corresponding eigenfunctions
n (x) = cos nx, n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
Here r(x) 1, so we need to determine coecients n such that

f (x) H
f (x) = = n cos nx = cos 4x + cos 7x.
r(x) n=0
Clearly 4 = 7 = 1 and the remaining n s are zero. Since = 1 = 1 and 1 = 0,
( 1 ) c1 1 = 0
is satisfied for any value of c1 . Calculating c4 and c7 , we get

4 1 1
c4 = = =
4 1 16 15
and
7 1 1
c7 = = = .
7 1 49 48
Hence a one parameter family of solutions is

H 1 1
(x) = cn n (x) = c1 cos x cos 4x cos 7x ,
n=0
15 48
where c1 is arbitrary.
691
Chapter 11
9. We first find the eigenvalues and corresponding eigenfunctions for this problem. Note that the
auxiliary equation for this problem is r 2 + = 0. To find eigenvalues which yield nontrivial
solutions we will consider the three cases < 0, = 0, and > 0.

Case 1, < 0: Let = , then the roots to the auxiliary equation are r = and a
general solution to the dierential equation is given by
y(x) = C1 sinh x + C2 cosh x.
Since
y (x) = C1 cosh x + C2 sinh x,
by applying the boundary conditions we obtain
y (0) = C1 = 0 and y() = C1 sinh + C2 cosh = 0.
Hence C1 = 0 and y() = C2 cosh = 0. Therefore C2 = 0 and we find only the trivial
solution.
Case 2, = 0: In this case the dierential equation becomes y = 0. This equation has a
general solution given by
y(x) = C1 + C2 x.
Since y (x) = C2 , by applying the boundary conditions we obtain
y (0) = C2 = 0 and y() = C1 + C2 = 0.
trivial solution.
Case 3, > 0: Let = 2 , for > 0. The roots of the auxiliary equation are r = i and so
a general solution is
y(x) = C1 cos x + C2 sin x.
Since
y (x) = C1 sin x + C2 cos x,
692
Exercises 11.5
using the first boundary condition we find
y (0) = C1 sin( 0) + C2 cos( 0) = 0 C2 = 0 C2 = 0.
Thus substituting into the second boundary condition yields
y() = C1 cos = 0.
1
cos = 0 =n+ , n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .
2
Hence choose n = (n + 1/2)2 , n = 0, 1, 2, . . ., and
4+ , 5
1
yn (x) = Cn cos n + x ,
2
where the Cn s are arbitrary nonzero constants.
Next we need to choose the Cn so that

3 4+ , 5
1
Cn2 cos 2
n+ x dx = 1.
2
0
Computing we find
3 4+ , 5 3
1 1 2
Cn2
cos 2
n+
x dx = C {1 + cos[(2n + 1)x]} dx
2 2 n
0 0
6 71
1 2 1 1
= Cn x + sin[(2n + 1)x] 11 = Cn2 .
2 2n + 1 0 2
$
An orthonormal system of eigenfunctions is given when we take Cn = 2/,
>! 4+ , 5O
2 1
cos n + x .
2
n=0
Now f (x) has the eigenfunction expansion

! 4+ , 5
H 2 1
f (x) = n cos n + x ,
n=0
2
693
Chapter 11
where
! 3 4+ , 5
2 1
n = f (x) cos n + x dx.
2
0
Therefore, with n as described above, the solution to the given boundary value problem has
a formal expansion
! 4+ , 5 H ! 4+ , 5
H n 2 1 n 2 1
(x) = cos n+ x = cos n+ x .
n=0
1 n 2 n=0
1 (n + 1/2)2 2
EXERCISES 11.6: Greens Functions, page 706
1. A general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation, y = 0, is yh (x) = Ax + B.

Thus we seek for paricular solutions z1 (x) and z2 (x) of this form satisfying
z1 (0) = 0,
(11.9)
z2 () = 0.
The first equation yields

z1 (0) = B = 0.
Since A is arbitrary, we choose A = 1 and so z1 (x) = x. Next, from the second equation in
(11.9) we get
z2 () = A = 0.
Taking B = 1, we obtain z2 (x) = 1.
With p(x) 1, we now compute
C = p(x)W [z1 , z2 ] (x) = (1)[(x)(0) (1)(1)] = 1.
Thus, the Greens function is

> >
z1 (s)z2 (x)/C, 0 s x, s, 0 s x,
G(x, s) = =
z1 (x)z2 (s)/C, x s x, x s .
694
Exercises 11.6
3. A general solution to the homogeneous problem, y = 0, is yh (x) = Ax + B, so z1 (x) and

z2 (x) must be of this form. To get z1 (x) we want to choose A and B so that
z1 (0) = B = 0.
Since A is arbitrary, we can set it equal to 1 and z1 (x) = x. Next, to get z2 (x) we need to
choose A and B so that
z2 () + z2 () = A + B + A = 0.
Thus B = (1 + )A. Taking A = 1, we get z2 (x) = x 1 .
Now compute
C = p(x)W [z1 , z2 ] (x) = (1)[(x)(1) (1)(x 1 )] = 1 + .
Thus, the Greens function is

s(x 1 )
>
, 0 s x,
z1 (s)z2 (x)/C, 0 s x, 1+
G(x, s) = =
z1 (x)z2 (s)/C, x s

x(s 1 )
, x s .
1+
5. The corresponding homogeneous dierential equation, y + 4y = 0, has the characteristic

equation r 2 + 4 = 0, whose roots are r = 2i. Hence, a general solution to the homogeneous
problem is given by
yh (x) = C1 cos 2x + C2 sin 2x.
A solution z1 (x) must satisfy the first boundary condition, z1 (0) = 0. Substitution yields
z1 (0) = C1 cos(2 0) + C2 sin(2 0) = 0 C1 = 0.
Setting C2 = 1, we get z1 (x) = sin 2x. For z2 (x), we have to find constants C1 and C2 such
that the second boundary condition is satisfied. Since
yh (x) = 2C1 sin 2x + 2C2 cos 2x,
695
Chapter 11
we have
z2 () = 2C1 sin(2) + 2C2 cos(2) = 2C2 = 0 C2 = 0.
With C1 = 1, z2 (x) = cos 2x.
Next we find
C = p(x)W [z1 , z2 ] (x) = (1)[(sin 2x)(2 sin 2x) (cos 2x)(2 cos 2x)] = 2.
Thus, the Greens function in this problem is given by

> >
z1 (s)z2 (x)/C, 0 s x, (sin 2s cos 2x)/2 , 0 s x,
G(x, s) = =
z1 (x)z2 (s)/C, x s (sin 2x cos 2s)/2 , x s .
13. In Problem 3 we found the Greens function for this boundary value problem. When f (x) = x,
the solution is given by equation (16) on page 702 of the text. Substituting for f (x) and G(x, s)
yields
3b 3 3x 3
s2 (x 1 ) xs(s 1 )
y(x) = G(x, s)f (s) ds = G(x, s)s ds = ds + ds.
1+ 1+
a 0 0 x
Computing
3x + ,1x + ,
s2 (x 1 ) (x 1 ) s3 11 (x 1 ) x3 x4 x3
ds = = = + ,
1+ 1+ 3 1s=0 1+ 3 3(1 + ) 3
0
3 4 51 4 3 5
xs(s 1 ) x s3 (1 + )s2 11 x (1 + ) 2
ds = 1 =
1+ 1+ 3 2 s=x 1+ 3 2
x
4 3 5
x x (1 + )x2 3x 2x x4 x3
+ = + + ,
1+ 3 2 3(1 + ) 2 3(1 + ) 2
we finally get
4 5 4 5
x4 x3 3x 2x x4 x3
y(x) = + + + +
3(1 + ) 3 3(1 + ) 2 3(1 + ) 2
3
4 2 3
5 3 2
x x (3 + )x
= + x= + .
6 2 3(1 + ) 6 6(1 + )
696
Exercises 11.6
17. A general solution to the corresponding homogeneous problem y y = 0 is
yh (x) = C1 ex + C2 ex .
So z1 (x) and z2 (x) must be of this form. To get z1 (x) we want to choose constants C1 and C2
so that
z1 (0) = C1 e0 + C2 e0 = C1 + C2 = 0.
Let C1 = 1. Then C2 = 1 and so z1 (x) = ex ex . Likewise, to get a z2 (x), we find C1 and

C2 so that
z2 (1) = C1 e1 + C2 e1 = 0 C2 = C1 e2 .
If we let C1 = 1, then C2 = e2 . Hence z2 (x) = ex e2 ex = ex e2x . We now compute

-) x *) * ) *) *.
C = p(x)W [z1 , z2 ] (x) = (1) e ex ex + e2x ex + ex ex e2x = 2e2 2.
Thus, the Greens function is in this problem is

>
z1 (s)z2 (x)/C, 0 s x,
G(x, s) =
z1 (x)z2 (s)/C, x s 1
>
(es es ) (ex e2x ) / (2 2e2 ) , 0 s x,
=
(ex ex ) (es e2s ) / (2 2e2 ) , x s 1.
Here f (x) = x. Using Greens function to solve the boundary value problem, we find
3b 3x s 31 x
(e es )(ex e2x )(s) (e ex )(es e2s )(s)
y(x) = G(x, s)f (s) ds = ds + ds.
2 2e2 2 2e2
a 0 x
Computing integrals yields

3x 3x
(es es )(ex e2x )(s) ex e2x ) *
ds = ses ses ds
2 2e2 2 2e2
0 0
x
e e 2x ) *1x
= ses es + ses + es 10
2 2e2
ex e2x ) *
= xex ex + xex + ex ,
2 2e2
697
Chapter 11
31 31
(ex ex )(es e2s )(s) ex ex ) *
ds = ses se2s ds
2 2e2 2 2e2
x x
x
e e x ) *11
= ses es + se2s + e2s 1x
2 2e2
ex ex - ) *.
= 2e xex ex + xe2x + e2x .
2 2e2
Thus
ex e2x ) x x x x
* ex ex - ) x x 2x 2x
*.
y(x) = xe e + xe + e 2e xe e + xe + e
2 2e2 2 2e2
(e e )(xe e + xe + e ) (ex ex )(2e xex + ex xe2x e2x )
x 2x x x x x
=
2 2e2
2x + 2xe2 2e1+x + 2e1x e1+x e1x
= = x + .
2 2e2 e2 1
25. Substitution y = xr into the corresponding homogeneous Cauchy-Euler equation
x2 y 2xy + 2y = 0,
we obtain the auxiliary equation
r(r 1) 2r + 2 = 0 or r 2 3r + 2 = (r 1)(r 2) = 0.
Hence a general solution to the corresponding homogeneous equation is
yh (x) = C1 x + C2 x2 .
To get z1 (x) we want to choose C1 and C2 so that
z1 (1) = C1 + C2 = 0 C2 = C1 .
Let C1 = 1, then C2 = 1 and z1 (x) = x x2 . Next we find z2 (x) satisfying
z2 (2) = 2C1 + 4C2 = 0 C1 = 2C2 .
Hence, we let C2 = 1, then C1 = 2 and z2 (x) = 2x x2 . Now compute (see the formula for
K(x, s) in Problem 22)
) 2* - .
C(s) = A2 (s)W [z1 , z2 ] (s) = s (s s2 )(2 2s) (1 2s)(2s s2 )
698
Exercises 11.6
) 2* ) *
s 2s 4s2 + 2s3 2s + 5s2 2s3 = s4 ,
=

(s s2 )(2x x2 )
>
, 1 s x,
z1 (s)z2 (x)/C(s), 1 s x, s4
K(x, s) = =
z1 (x)z2 (s)/C(s), x s 2

(x x2 )(2s s2 )
, x s 2.
s4
Simplifying yields
>
x(2 x)(s3 s2 ), 1 s x,
K(x, s) =
x(1 x)(2s3 s2 ), x s 2.
Hence, a solution to the boundary value problem with f (x) = x is

3b 3x 32
y(x) = K(x, s)f (s) ds = K(x, s)f (s) ds + K(x, s)f (s) ds
a 1 x
3x 32
= [x(2 x)(s3 s2 )](s) ds + [x(1 x)(2s3 s2 )](s) ds
1 x
3x 32
) * ) 2 1
* ) * ) 2 *
= 2x x2
s s ds + x x 2
2s s1 ds
1 x
) *) *1x ) *) *12
= 2x x2
s 1
ln s 1 + x x2 2s1 ln s 1
1 x
= x2 ln 2 x ln 2 x ln x .
29. Let f (x) = (x s). Let H(x, s) be the solution to

4 H(x, s)
= (x s)
x4
that satisfies the given boundary conditions, the jump condition
3 H(x, s) 3 H(x, s)
lim+ lim = 1,
xs x3 xs x3
and H, H/x, 2 H/x2 are continuous on the square [0, ] [0, ]. We begin by integrating
to obtain
3 H(x, s)
= u(x s) + C1 ,
x3
699
Chapter 11
where u is the unit step function and C1 is a constant. (Recall in Section 7.8 we observed
that u(t a) = (t a), at least formally.) 3 H/x3 is not continuous along the line x = s,
but it does satisfy the jump condition
3 H(x, s) 3 H(x, s)
lim lim = lim+ [u(x s) + C1 ] lim [u(x s) + C1 ]
xs+ x3 xs x3 xs xs
= (1 + C1 ) C1 = 1.
We want H(x, s) to satisfy the boundary condition y () = 0. So we solve
3H
(, s) = u( s) + C1 = 1 + C1 = 0
x3
to obtain C1 = 1. Thus
3 H(x, s)
= u(x s) + 1 .
x3
We now integrate again with respect to x to obtain
2 H(x, s)
= x u(x s)(x s) + C2 .
x2
(The reader should verify this is the antiderivative for x = s by dierentiating it.) We
selected this particular form of the antiderivative because we need 2 H/x2 to be continuous
on [0, ] [0, ]. (The jump of u(x s) when x s is canceled by the vanishing of this term
by the factor (x s).) Since
2 H(x, s)
lim = s + C2 ,
xs x2
we can define
2H
(s, s) = s + C2 ,
x2
and we now have a continuous function. Next, we want y () = 0. Solving we find
2H
0= (, s) = u( s)( s) + C2 = ( s) + C2 = s + C2 .
x2
Thus, we find that C2 = s. Now,
2 H(x, s)
= (x s) u(x s)(x s) .
x2
700
Exercises 11.7
We integrate with respect to x again to get

H(x, s) x2 (x s)2
= sx u(x s) + C3 ,
x 2 2
which is continuous on [0, ] [0, ]. We now want the boundary condition y (0) = 0 satisfied.
Solving, we obtain
H s2
0= (0, s) = u(0 s) + C3 = C3 .
x 2
Hence,
H(x, s) x2 (x s)2
= sx u(x s) .
x 2 2
Integrating once more with respect to x, we have
x3 sx2 (x s)3
H(x, s) = u(x s) + C4 .
6 2 6
Now H(x, s) is continuous on [0, ][0, ]. We want H(x, s) to satisfy the boundary condition
y(0) = 0. Solving, we find
(0 s)3
0 = H(0, s) = u(0 s) + C4 = C4 .
6
Hence,
x3 sx2 (x s)3
H(x, s) = u(x s) ,
6 2 6
which we can rewrite in the form
2

s (s 3x)

, 0 s x,
6
H(x, s) =

x2 (x 3s)
, x s .
6
EXERCISES 11.7: Singular Sturm-Liouville Boundary Value Problems, page 715
1. This is a typical singular Sturm-Liouville boundary value problem. Condition (ii) of Lemma 1
on page 710 of the main text holds since
lim p(x) = lim+ x = 0

x0+ x0
701
Chapter 11
and y(x), y (x) remain bounded as x 0+ . Because
lim p(x) = p(1) = 1

x1
and y(1) = 0, the analogue of condition (i) of Lemma 1 holds at the right endpoint. Hence L
is selfadjoint.
The equation is Bessels equation of order 2. On page 712 of the text, we observed that the
solutions to this boundary value problem are given by
yn (x) = cn J2 (2n x) ,

where n = 2n is the increasing sequence of real zeros of J2 (x), that is, J2 (2n ) = 0.
Now to find an eigenfunction expansion for the given nonhomogeneous equation we compute
the eigenfunction expansion for f (x)/x (see page 694):

f (x) H
an J2 (2n x) ,
x n=1
where ?1
0
f (x)J2 (2n x) dx
an = ?1 2 , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
0
xJ 2 (2n x) dx
Therefore,

H an
y(x) = 2
J2 (2n x) .
n=1
2n
3. Again, this is a typical singular Sturm-Liouville boundary value problem. L is selfadjoint

since condition (ii) of Lemma 1 on page 710 of the main text holds at the left endpoint and
the analogue of condition (i) holds at the right endpoint.
) *
This is Bessels equation of order 0. As we observed on page 712 of the text, J0 x satisfies
) *
the boundary conditions at the origin. At the right endpoint, we want J0 = 0. Now it
follows from equation (32) on page 488 of the text, that the zeros of J0 and J1 are the same.

So if we let n = 1n , the increasing sequence of zeros of J1 , then J0 (1n ) = 0. Hence, the
eigenfunctions are given by
yn (x) = J0 (1n x) , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
702
Exercises 11.7
To find an eigenfunction expansion for the solution to the nonhomogeneous equation, we first
expand f (x)/x (see page 694):

f (x) H
bn J0 (1n x) ,
x n=1
where ?1
0
f (x)J0 (1n x) dx
bn = ?1 2 , n = 1, 2, 3, . . . .
0
xJ0 (1n x) dx
Therefore,

H bn
y(x) = 2
J0 (1n x) .
n=1
1n
11. (a) Let (x) be an eigenfunction for

4 5
d dy 2
x y + xy = 0.
dx dx x
Therefore,
d 2
[x (x)] (x) + x(x) = 0
dx x
2
(x) + x (x) (x) + x(x) = 0.
x
Multiplying both side by (x) and integrating both sides from 0 to 1, we obtain
31 31 31 31
2
(x) (x) dx + x(x) (x) dx [(x)]2 dx + x[(x)]2 dx = 0. (11.10)
x
0 0 0 0
Now integrating by parts with u = (x) (x) and dv = dx, we have
31 31
11
(x) (x) dx = x(x) (x) 10

x [ (x) (x) + (x) (x)] dx
0 0
31 31
11
= x(x) (x) 10
2
x [ (x)] dx x(x) (x) dx.
0 0
703
Chapter 11
Since (1) = 0, we have

11
x(x) (x) 10 = 0,
31 31 31
2
(x) (x) dx = x [ (x)] dx x(x) (x) dx.

0 0 0
Thus equation (11.10) reduces to
31 31 31
2
x [ (x)] dx x(x) (x) dx + x(x) (x) dx
0 0 0
31 31
2 1 2
x [(x)] dx + x[(x)]2 dx = 0
0 0
31 31 31
2
x [ (x)] dx 2 x1 [(x)]2 dx + x[(x)]2 dx = 0. (11.11)
0 0 0
(b) First note that each integrand in (11.11) is nonnegative on the interval (0, 1), hence
each integral is nonnegative. Moreover, since (x) is an eigenfunction, it is a continuous
function which is not the zero function. Hence, the second and third integrals are strictly
positive. Thus, if > 0, then must be positive in order for the left-hand side of (11.11)
to sum to zero.
(c) If = 0, then only the first and third terms remain on the left hand side of equa-
tion (11.11). Since the first integral need only be nonnegative, we only need to be
nonnegative in order for equation (11.11) to be satisfied.
To show = 0 is not an eigenvalue, we solve Bessels equation with = 0, that is, we
solve
xy + y = 0,
which is the same as the Cauchy-Euler equation
x2 y + xy = 0.
704
Exercises 11.8
Solving this Cauchy-Euler equation, we find a general solution
y(x) = c1 + c2 ln x.
Since limx0+ y(x) = if c2 = 0, we take c2 = 0. Now y(x) = c1 satisfies the boundary

condition (17) in the text. The right endpoint boundary condition (18) is y(1) = 0. So
we want 0 = y(1) = c1 . Hence the only solution to Bessels equation of order 0 that
satisfies the boundary conditions (17) and (18) is the trivial solution. Hence = 0 is not
an eigenvalue.
EXERCISES 11.8: Oscillation and Comparison Theory, page 725
5. To apply the Sturm fundamental theorem to
y + (1 ex ) y = 0, 0 < x < , (11.12)
we must find a q(x) and a function (x) such that q(x) 1 ex , 0 < x < , and (x) is a
solution to
y + q(x)y = 0, 0 < x < . (11.13)
Because, for x > 0, 1 ex < 0, we choose q(x) 0. Hence equation (11.13) becomes
y = 0. The function (x) = x + 4 is a nontrivial solution to this dierential equation. Since
(x) = x + 4 does not have a zero for x > 0, any nontrivial solution to (11.12) can have
at most one zero in 0 < x < . To use the Sturm fundamental theorem to show that any
nontrivial solution to
y + (1 ex ) y = 0, < x < 0, (11.14)
has infinitely many zeros, we must find a q(x) and a function (x) such that q(x) 1 ex ,
x < 0, and (x) is a solution to
y + q(x)y = 0, < x < 0.
Because 1 e1 0.632, we choose q(x) 1/4 and only consider the interval (, 1).
Hence, we obtain
1
y + y = 0,
4
705
Chapter 11
which has nontrivial solution (x) = sin(x/2). Now the function (x) has infinitely many
zeros in (, 1) and between any two consecutive zeros of (x) any nontrivial solution to
(11.14) must have a zero; hence any nontrivial solution to (11.14) will have infinitely many
zeros in (, 1).
9. First express
) *
y + x2 y + 4 ex y = 0,
in Strum-Liouville form by multiplying by the integrating factor e1/x :

) * ) * ) *
e1/x y + e1/x x2 y + e1/x 4 ex y = 0 e1/x y + e1/x 4 ex y = 0.
Now when x gets large, we have

! " " !
p e1/large 1 1 1
1/large large
= .
q e (4 e ) (1)(4 small) 4 2
Hence, the distance between consecutive zeros is approximately /2.
11. We apply Corollary 5 with p(x) = 1 + x, q(x) = ex , and r(x) 1 to a nontrivial solution
on the interval [0, 5]. On this interval we have pM = 6, pm = 1, qM = 1, qm = e5 , and
rM = rm = 1. Therefore, for
6 7
qM qm
> max , ,0 = 0,
rM rm
the distance between two consecutive zeros of a nontrivial solution (x) to the given equation
is bounded between
! ! ! !
pm 1 pM 6
= and = .
qM + rM 1+ qm + rm e5+
706
CHAPTER 12: Stability of Autonomous Systems
EXERCISES 12.2: Linear Systems in the Plane, page 753
3. The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 + 2r + 10 = 0, which has roots r = 1 3i.
Since the real part of each root is negative, the trajectories approach the origin, and the origin
is an asymptotically stable spiral point.
7. The critical point is the solution to the system
4x + 2y + 8 = 0,
x 2y + 1 = 0.
Solving this system, we obtain the critical point (3, 2). Now we use the change of variables
x = u + 3, y = v + 2,
to translate the critical point (3, 2) to the origin (0, 0). Substituting into the system of this
problem and simplifying, we obtain a system of dierential equations in u and v:
du dx
= = 4(u + 3) + 2(v + 2) + 8 = 4u + 2v,
dt dt
dv dy
= = (u + 3) 2(v + 2) + 1 = u 2v.
dt dt

The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 + 6r + 6 = 0, which has roots r = 3 3.
Since both roots are distinct and negative, the origin is an asymptotically stable improper node
of the new system. Therefore, the critical point (3, 2) is an asymptotically stable improper
node of the original system.
9. The critical point is the solution to the system
2x + y + 9 = 0,
5x 2y 22 = 0.
707
Chapter 12
Solving this system, we obtain the critical point (4, 1). Now we use the change of variables
x = u 4, y = v 1,
to translate the critical point (4, 1) to the origin (0, 0). Substituting into the system of
this problem and simplifying, we obtain a system of dierential equations in u and v:
du dx
= = 2(u 4) + (v 1) + 9 = 2u + v,
dt dt
dv dy
= = 5(u 4) 2(v 1) 22 = 5u 2v.
dt dt
The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 + 1 = 0, which has roots r = i. Since
both roots are distinct and pure imaginary, the origin is a stable center of the new system.
Therefore, the critical point (4, 1) is a stable center of the original system.
15. The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 + r 12 = 0, which has roots r = 4 and
r = 3. Since the roots are real and have opposite signs, the origin is an unstable saddle point.
To sketch the phase plane diagram, we must first determine two lines passing through the
origin that correspond to the transformed axes. To find the transformed axes, we make the
substitution y = mx into
dy dy/dt 5x 2y
= =
dx dx/dt x + 2y
to obtain
5x 2mx
m= .
x + 2mx
Solving for m yields
5
m(x + 2mx) = 5x 2mx 2m2 + 3m 5 = 0 m= or m = 1.
2
So m = 5/2 or m = 1. Hence, the two axes are y = 5x/2 and y = x. On the line y = x
one finds
dx
= 3x,
dt
so the trajectories move away from the origin. On the line y = 5x/2 one finds
dy
= 4y,
dt
708
Exercises 12.3
so the trajectories move towards the origin. A phase plane diagram is given in Figure B.56 in
the answers of the text.
19. The characteristic equation for this system is (r + 2)(r + 2) = 0 which has roots r = 2, 2.
Since the roots are equal, real, and negative, the origin is an asymptotically stable point. To
sketch the phase plane diagram, we determine the slope of the two lines passing through the
origin that correspond to the transformed axes by substituting y = mx into
dy dy/dt 2y
= =
dx dx/dt 2x + y
to obtain
2mx
m= .
2x + mx
Solving for m yields
m(2x + mx) = 2mx m2 = 0 m = 0.
Since there is only one line (y = 0) through the origin that is a trajectory, the origin is an
improper node. A phase plane diagram is given in Figure B.58 in the answers of the text.
EXERCISES 12.3: Almost Linear Systems, page 764
5. This system is almost linear since ad bc = (1)(1) (5)(1) = 0, and the functions
F (x, y) = G(x, y) = y 2 = 0 involve only high order terms in y. Since the characteristic
equation for this system is r 2 + 4 = 0 which has pure imaginary roots r = 2i, the origin is
either a center or a spiral point and the stability is indeterminant.
7. To see that this system is almost linear, we first express ex+y , cos x, and cos y using their
respective Maclaurin series. Hence, the system
dx
= ex+y cos x ,
dt
dy
= cos y + x 1 ,
dt
709
Chapter 12
becomes
4 5 4 5
dx (x + y)2 x2
= 1 + (x + y) + + 1 +
dt 2! 2!
= x + y + (higher orders) = x + y + F (x, y),
4 2
5
dy y
= 1 + + x 1 = x + (higher orders) = x + G(x, y).
dt 2!
This system is almost linear since ad bc = (1)(0) (1)(1) = 0, and F (x, y), G(x, y) each
only involve higher order forms in x and y. The characteristic equation for this system is

r 2 r 1 = 0 which has roots r = (1 5)/2. Since these roots are real and have dierent
signs the origin is an unstable saddle point.
9. The critical points for this system are the solutions to the pair of equations
16 xy = 0,
x y 3 = 0.
Solving the second equation for x in terms of y and substituting this into the first equation
we obtain
16 y 4 = 0
which has solutions y = 2. Hence the critical points are (8, 2) and (8, 2).
We consider the critical point (8, 2). Using the change of variables x = u + 8 and y = v + 2,
we obtain the system
du
= 16 (u + 8)(v + 2),
dt
dv
= (u + 8) (v + 2)3 ,
dt
which simplifies to the almost linear system
du
= 2u 8v uv,
dt
dv
= u 12v 6v 2 v 3 .
dt
The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 +14r +32 = 0, which has the distinct negative

roots r = 7 17. Hence (8, 2) is an improper node which is asymptotically stable.
710
Exercises 12.3
Next we consider the critical point (8, 2). Using the change of variables x = u 8 and
y = v 2, we obtain the system
du
= 16 (u 8)(v 2),
dt
dv
= (u 8) (v 2)3 ,
dt
which simplifies to the almost linear system
du
= 2u + 8v uv,
dt
dv
= u 12v + 6v 2 v 3 .
dt
The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 + 10r 32 = 0, which has the distinct roots

r = 5 57. Since these roots are real and have dierent signs, (8, 2) is an unstable
saddle point.
13. The critical points for this system are the solutions to the pair of equations
1 xy = 0,
x y 3 = 0.
Solving the second equation for x in terms of y and substituting this into the first equation
we obtain
1 y4 = 0
which has solutions y = 1. Hence the critical points are (1, 1) and (1, 1).
We consider the critical point (1, 1). Using the change of variables x = u + 1 and y = v + 1,
we obtain the almost linear system
du
= 1 (u + 1)(v + 1) = u v uv,
dt
dv
= (u + 1) (v + 1)3 = u 3v 3v 2 v 3 .
dt
The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 +4r+4 = 0, which has the equal negative roots
r = 2. Hence (1, 1) is an improper or proper node or spiral point which is asymptotically
stable.
711
Chapter 12
Next we consider the critical point (1, 1). Using the change of variables x = u 1 and
y = v 1, we obtain the almost linear system
du
= 1 (u 1)(v 1) = u + v uv,
dt
dv
= (u 1) (v 1)3 = u 3v + 3v 2 v 3 .
dt

The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 + 2r 4 = 0, which has roots r = 1 5.
Since these roots are real and have dierent signs, (1, 1) is an unstable saddle point. A
phase plane diagram is given in Figure B.59 in the answers of the text.
21. Case 1: h = 0. The critical points for this system are the solutions to the pair of equations
x(1 4x y) = 0,
y(1 2y 5x) = 0.
To solve this system, we first let x = 0, then y(1 2y) = 0. So y = 0 or y = 1/2.
When y = 0, we must have x(1 4x) = 0. So x = 0 or x = 1/4.
And if x = 0 and y = 0, we have the system
1 4x y = 0,
1 2y 5x = 0,
which has the solution x = 1/3, y = 1/3. Hence the critical points are (0, 0), (0, 1/2),
(1/4, 0), and (1/3, 1/3).
At the critical point (0, 0), the characteristic equation is r 2 2r + 1 = 0, which has equal
positive roots r = 1. Hence (0, 0) is an improper or proper node or spiral point which is
unstable. From Figure B.61 in the text, we see that (0, 0) is an improper node.
Next we consider the critical point (0, 1/2). Using the change of variables y = v + 1/2 and
x = u, we obtain the almost linear system
+ ,
du 1 1
= u 1 4u v = u 4u2 uv,
dt 2 2
+ ,
dv 1 5
= v+ (1 2v 1 5u) = u v 2v 2 5uv.
dt 2 2
712
Exercises 12.3
The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 + (1/2)r (1/2) = 0, which has roots r = 1/2
and r = 1. Since these roots are real and have dierent signs, (0, 1/2) is an unstable saddle
point.
Now consider the critical point (1/4, 0). Using the change of variables x = u + 1/4 and y = v,
we obtain the almost linear system
+ ,
du 1 1
= u+ (1 4u 1 v) = u v 4u2 uv,
dt 4 4
+ ,
dv 5 1
= v 1 2v 5u = v 2v 2 5uv.
dt 2 4
The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 +(5/4)r+(1/4) = 0, which has roots r = 1/4
and r = 1. Since these roots are distinct and negative, (1/4, 0) is an improper node which
is asymptotically stable.
At the critical point (1/3, 1/3), we use the change of variables x = u + 1/3 and y = v 1/3
to obtain the almost linear system
+ ,+ ,
du 1 4 1 4 1
= u+ 1 4u v + = u v 4u2 uv,
dt 3 3 3 3 3
+ ,+ ,
dv 1 2 5 5 2
= v 1 2v + 5u = u + v 2v 2 5uv.
dt 3 3 3 3 3
The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 + (2/3)r (1/3) = 0 which has roots r = 1/3
and r = 1. Again since these roots are real and have dierent signs, (1/3, 1/3) is an
unstable saddle point, but not of interest since y < 0. Species x survives while species y dies
o. A phase plane diagram is given in Figure B.61 in the answers of the text.
Case 2: h = 1/32. The critical points for this system are the solutions to the pair of equations
1
x(1 4x y) = 0,
32
y(1 2y 5x) = 0.
To solve this system, we first set y = 0 and solve x(1 4x) 1/32 = 0, which has solutions

x = (2 2)/16.
713
Chapter 12
If y = 0, we have 1 2y 5x = 0. So y = (1/2) (5/2)x. Substituting, we obtain

4 + ,5
1 5 1
x 1 4x x = 0.
2 2 32
Simplifying, we obtain
3 1 1
x2 + x = 0,
2 2 32
which has the solution x = 1/4 or x = 1/12. When x = 1/4, we have
+ ,
1 5 1 1
y= = .
2 2 4 8
And when x = 1/12, we have + ,

1 5 1 7
y= = .
2 2 12 24
Hence the critical points are
J K J K + , + ,
2 2 2+ 2 1 1 1 7
,0 , ,0 , , , and , .
16 16 4 8 12 24
J K
2 2 2 2
At the critical point , 0 , we use the change of variables x = u + and y = v
16 16
to obtain the almost linear system
J KJ K
du 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2
= u+ 1 4u v = u v 4u2 uv,
dt 16 4 32 2 16
J K
dv 10 5 2 6+5 2
= v 1 2v 5u = v 2v 2 5uv.
dt 16 16
The characteristic equation for this system is

J KJ K
2 6+5 2
r r = 0,
2 16
J K
2 2
which has distinct positive roots. Hence , 0 is an unstable improper node.
16
714
Exercises 12.3
J K
2+ 2
Now consider the critical point , 0 , where we use the change of variables y = v and
16

2+ 2
x= u+ to obtain the almost linear system
16
J KJ K
du 2+ 2 2+ 2 1 2 2+ 2
= u+ 1 4u v = u v 4u2 uv,
dt 16 4 32 2 16
J K
dv 10 + 5 2 65 2
= v 1 2v 5u = v 2v 2 5uv.
dt 16 16
The characteristic equation for this system is

J KJ K
2 65 2
r+ r = 0,
2 16
J K
2+ 2
which has distinct negative roots. Hence , 0 is an asymptotically stable improper
16
node.
When the critical point is (1/12, 7/24), the change of variables x = u + 1/12 and y = v + 7/24
leads to the almost linear system
+ ,+ ,
du 1 1 7 1 1 1
= u+ 1 4u v = u v 4u2 uv,
dt 12 3 24 32 24 12
+ ,+ ,
dv 7 7 5 35 7
= v+ 1 2v 5u = u v 2v 2 5uv.
dt 24 12 12 24 12
The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 + (13/24)r (7/48) = 0, which has roots

r = (13 505)/48. Since these roots have opposite signs, (1/12, 7/24) is an unstable saddle
point.
And when the critical point is (1/4, 1/8), the change of variables x = u+1/4 and y = v 1/8
leads to the almost linear system
+ ,+ ,
du 1 1 1 7 1
= u+ 1 4u 1 v + = u v 4u2 uv,
dt 4 8 32 8 4
+ ,+ ,
dv 1 1 5 5 1
= v 1 2v + 5u = u + v 2v 2 5uv.
dt 8 4 4 8 4
715
Chapter 12
The characteristic equation for this system is r 2 + (5/8)r (1/16) = 0, which has roots

r = (5 41)/16. Since these roots have opposite signs, (1/4, 1/8) is an unstable saddle
point. But since y < 0, this point is not of interest.
Hence, this is competitive exclusion; one species survives while the other dies o. A phase
plane diagram is given in Figure B.62 in the answers of the text.
Case 3: h = 5/32. The critical points for this system are the solutions to the pair of equations
5
x(1 4x y) = 0,
32
y(1 2y 5x) = 0.
To solve this system, we first set y = 0 and solve

5
x(1 4x) = 0,
32
which has complex solutions. If y = 0, then we must have
1 5
1 2y 5x = 0 y= x.
2 2
Substituting we obtain 4 + ,5
1 5 5
x 1 4x x = 0.
2 2 32
Simplifying, we obtain
3 1 5
x2 + x = 0,
2 2 32
which also has only complex solutions. Hence there are no critical points. The phase plane
diagram shows that species y survives while the x dies o. A phase plane diagram is given in
EXERCISES 12.4: Energy Methods, page 774
3. Here g(x) = x2 /(x 1) = x + 1 + 1/(x 1). By integrating g(x), we obtain the potential
function
x2
G(x) = + x + ln |x 1| + C,
2
716
Exercises 12.4
and so
v 2 x2
E(x, v) = + + x + ln |x 1| + C.
2 2
Since E(0, 0) = 0 implies C = 0, let
v 2 x2
E(x, v) = + + x + ln |x 1|.
2 2
Now, since we are interested in E near the origin, we let |x 1| = 1 x (because for x near
0, x 1 < 0). Therefore,
v 2 x2
E(x, v) = + + x + ln(1 x).
2 2
9. Here we have g(x) = 2x2 + x 1 and hence the potential function

2x3 x2
G(x) = + x.
3 2
The local maxima and minima of G(x) occur when G (x) = g(x) = 2x2 + x 1 = 0. Thus
the phase plane diagram has critical points at (1, 0) and (1/2, 0). Since G(x) has a strict
local minimum at x = 1/2, the critical point (1/2, 0) is a center. Furthermore, since x = 1
is strict local maximum, the critical point (1, 0) is a saddle point. A sketch of the potential
plane and phase plane diagram is given in Figure B.65 in the answers of the text.
11. Here we have g(x) = x/(x 2) = 1 + 2/(x 2) so the potential function is
G(x) = x + 2 ln |x 2| = x + 2 ln(2 x),
for x near zero. Local maxima and minima of G(x) occur when G (x) = g(x) = x/(x 2) = 0.
Thus the phase plane diagram has critical points at (0, 0). Furthermore we note that x = 2
is not in the domain of g(x) nor of G(x). Now G(x) has a strict local maximum at x = 0,
hence the critical point (0, 0) is a saddle point. A sketch of the potential plane and phase
plane diagram for x < 2 is given in Figure B.66 in the answers of the text.
13. We first observe that vh(x, v) = v 2 > 0 for v = 0. Hence, the energy is continually decreasing
along a trajectory. The level curves for the energy function
v 2 x2 x4
E(x, v) = +
2 2 4
717
Chapter 12
are just the integral curves for Example 2(a) and are sketch in Figure 12.22 on page 770 of
the text. The critical points for this damped system are the same as in the example and
moreover, they are of the same type. The resulting phase plane is given in Figure B.67 in the
answers of the text.
EXERCISES 12.5: Lyapunovs Direct Method, page 782
3. We compute V (x, y) with V (x, y) = x2 + y 2.
V (x, y) = Vx (x, y)f (x, y) + Vy (x, y)g(x, y)

) * ) *
= 2x y 2 + xy 2 x3 + 2y xy + x2 y y 3
) *2
= 4x2 y 2 2x4 2y 4 = 2 x2 y 2 .
According to Theorem 3, since V is negative semidefinite, V is positive definite function, and

(0, 0) is an isolated critical point of the system, the origin is stable.
5. The origin is an isolated critical point for the system. Using the hint, we compute V (x, y)
with V (x, y) = x2 y 2. Computing, we obtain

) * ) * ) *2
= 2x 2x3 2y 2x2 y y 3 = 4x4 4x2 y 2 + 2y 2 = 2x4 + x2 y 2 ,
which is positive definite. Now V (0, 0) = 0, and in every disk centered at the origin, V is
positive at some point (namely, those points where |x| > |y|). Therefore, by Theorem 4, the
origin is unstable.
7. We compute V (x, y) with V (x, y) = ax4 + by 2 .

) * ) *
= 4ax3 2y x3 + 2by x3 y 5
= 8ax3 y 4ax6 2bx3 y 2by 6 .
718
Exercises 12.6
To eliminate the x3 y term, we let a = 1 and b = 4, then
V (x, y) = 4x6 8y 6,
and we get that V is negative definite. Since V is positive definite and the origin is an isolated
critical point, according to Theorem 3, the origin is asymptotically stable.
11. Here we set

dx dy d2 x
y= = 2 .
dt dt dt
Then, we obtain the system
dx
= y,
dt
dy ) *
= 1 y2 y x .
dt
Clearly, the zero solution is a solution to this system. To apply Lyapunovs direct method,
we try the positive definite function V (x, y) = ax2 + by 2 and compute V .

- ) * .
= 2ax (y) + 2by 1 y 2 y x = 2axy 2by 2 + 2by 4 2bxy .
To eliminate the xy terms, we choose a = b = 1, then

) *
V (x, y) = 2y 2 1 y 2 .
Hence V is negative semidefinite for |y| < 1, so by Theorem 3, the origin is stable.
EXERCISES 12.6: Limit Cycles and Periodic Solutions, page 791

dr
5. We compute r :
dt
dr dx dy - ) *. - ) *.
r = x +y = x x y + x r 3 4r 2 + 5r 3 + y x + y + y r 3 4r 2 + 5r 3
dt dt dt ) * ) *
= x xy + x2 r 3 4r 2 + 5r 3 + xy + y 2 + y 2 r 3 4r 2 + 5r 3
2
) * ) *
= r 2 + r 2 r 3 4r 2 + 5r 3 = r 2 r 3 4r 2 + 5r 2 .
719
Chapter 12
Hence
dr ) *
= r r 3 4r 2 + 5r 2 = r(r 1)2 (r 2).
dt
Now dr/dt = 0 when r = 0, 1, 2. The critical point is represented by r = 0, and when r = 1
or 2, we have limit cycles of radius 1 and 2. When r lies in (0, 1), we have dr/dt < 0, so
a trajectory in this region spirals into the origin. Therefore, the origin is an asymptotically
stable spiral point. Now, when r lies in (1, 2), we again have dr/dt < 0, so a trajectory in this
region spirals into the limit cycle r = 1. This tells us that r = 1 is a semistable limit cycle.
Finally, when r > 2, dr/dt > 0, so a trajectory in this region spirals away from the limit cycle
r = 2. Hence, r = 2 is an unstable limit cycle.
d
To find the direction of the trajectories, we compute r 2 .
dt
d dy dx - ) *. - ) *.
r2 = x y = x x + y + y r 3 4r 2 + 5r 3 y x y + x r 3 4r 2 + 5r 3
dt dt dt ) * ) *
= x + xy + xy r 3 4r 2 + 5r 3 xy + y 2 xy r 3 4r 2 + 5r 3
2
= x2 + y 2 = r 2 .
Hence d/dt = 1, which tells us that the trajectories revolve counterclockwise about the origin.
A phase plane diagram is given in Figure B.74 in the answers of the text.
11. We compute r dr/dt:

4 + ,5 4 + ,5
dr dx dy 1 1
r = x +y = x y + x sin + y x + y sin
dt dt dt r r
+ , + , + ,
1 1 1
= xy + x2 sin xy + y 2 sin = r 2 sin .
r r r
Hence, + ,
dr 1
= r sin ,
dt r
and dr/dt = 0 when r = 1/(n), n = 1, 2, . . . . Consequently, the origin (r = 0) is not an
isolated critical point. Observe that
dr 1 1
>0 for <r< ,
dt (2n + 1) 2n
720
Exercises 12.6
dr 1 1
<0 for <r< .
dt 2n (2n 1)
Thus, trajectories spiral into the limit cycles r = 1/(2n) and away from the limit cycles
r = 1/[(2n + 1)]. To determine the direction of the spiral, we compute r 2 d/dt.
4 + ,5 4 + ,5
2 d dy dx 1 1
r = x y = x x + y sin y y + x sin
dt dt dt r r
+ , + ,
1 1
= x2 + xy sin y 2 xy sin = r 2 .
r r
Hence d/dt = 1, which tells us that the trajectories revolve clockwise about the origin. A
phase plane diagram is given in Figure B.77 in the answers of the text.
15. We compute fx + gy in order to apply Theorem 6. Thus

) * ) * ) *
fx (x, y) + gy (x, y) = 8 + 3x2 + 7 + 3y 2 = 3 x2 + y 2 5 ,
which is less than 0 for the given domain. Hence, by Theorem 6, there are no nonconstant
periodic solutions in the disk x2 + y 2 < 5.
19. It is easily seen that (0, 0) is a critical point, however, it is not easily shown that it is the only
critical point for this system. Using the Lyapunov function V (x, y) = 2x2 + y 2, we compute
V (x, y). Thus
dx dy
V (x, y) = Vx (x, y) + Vy (x, y)
) dt dt * ) *
= 4x 2x y 2x3 3xy 2 + 2y 2x + 4y 4y 3 2x2 y
) * ) *2
= 8x2 8x4 16x2 y 2 + 8y 2 8y 4 = 8 x2 + y 2 8 x2 + y 2 .
Therefore, V (x, y) < 0 for x2 + y 2 > 1 and V (x, y) > 0 for x2 + y 2 < 1. Let C1 be the curve
2x2 + y 2 = 1/2, which lies inside x2 + y 2 = 1, and let C2 be the curve 2x2 + y 2 = 3, which lies
outside x2 + y 2 = 1. Now V (x, y) > 0 on C1 and V (x, y) < 0 on C2 . Hence, we let R be the
region between the curves C1 and C2 . Now, any trajectory that enters R is contained in R.
So by Theorem 7, the system has a nonconstant periodic solution in R.
721
Chapter 12
25. To apply Theorem 8, we check to see that all five conditions hold. Here we have g(x) = x and
f (x) = x2 (x2 1). Clearly, f (x) is even, hence condition (a) holds. Now
3x
2
) 2
* x5 x3
F (x) = s s 1 ds = .
5 3
0
$ $
Hence F (x) < 0 for 0 < x < 5/3 and F (x) > 0 for x > 5/3. Therefore, condition (b)
holds. Furthermore, condition (c) holds since F (x) + as x +, monotonically for
$
x > 5/3. As stated above, g(x) = x is an odd function with g(x) > 0 for x > 0, thus
condition (d) holds. Finally, since
3x
x2
G(x) = s ds = ,
2
0
we clearly have G(x) + as x +, hence condition (e) holds. It follows from Theo-
rem 8, that the Lienard equation has a unique nonconstant periodic solution.
EXERCISES 12.7: Stability of Higher-Dimensional Systems, page 798
5. From the characteristic equation

) *
(r 1) r 2 + 1 = 0,
we find that the eigenvalues are 1, i. Since at least one eigenvalue, 1, has a positive real
part, the zero solution is unstable.
9. The characteristic equation is

) 2 *) *
r + 1 r 2 + 1 = 0,
which has eigenvalues i, i. Next we determine the eigenspace for the eigenvalue i. Com-
puting we find 1 1 1 1
1 i 1 1 0 11 1 1 i 0 0 11
1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 i 0 1 11 1 0 0 1 0 11
1 1
1 1 1 1.
1 0 0 i 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 0 0 1 i 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
722
Exercises 12.7
Hence the eigenspace is degenerate and by Problem 8(c) on page 798 of the text, the zero
solution is unstable. Note: it can be shown that the eigenspace for the eigenvalue i is also
degenerate.
13. To find the fundamental matrix for this system we first recall the Taylor series ex , sin x, and
cos x. These are
x2 x3
ex = 1 + x + + + ,
2! 3!
x3 x5
sin x = x + ,
3! 5!
x2 x4
cos x = 1 + .
2! 4!
Hence
+ , + , + 2 , + 2 ,
dx1 x21 x22 x1 x2
= 1 x1 + + 1 + 2 = x1 + + + ,
dt 2! 2! 2! 2!
+ 3
, + 3 ,
dx2 x x
= x2 + x3 3 + = x2 x3 + 3 + ,
dt 3! 3!
4 5 4 5
dx3 (x2 + x3 )2 (x2 + x3 )2
= 1 1 + (x2 + x3 ) + + = x2 x3 + .
dt 2! 2!
Thus,

1 0 0

A=
0 1 1
.
0 1 1
Calculating the eigenvalues, we have

1 1
1 1
1 1 r 0 0 1
1 1
|A rI| = 11 0 1 r 1 1 = 0.
1
1 1
1 0 1 1 r 1
Hence, the characteristic equation is (r + 1)(r 2 + 2r + 2) = 0. Therefore, the eigenvalues are

1, 1 i. Since the real part of each is negative, the zero solution is asymptotically stable.
723
Chapter 12
15. Solving for the critical points, we must have
x1 + 1 = 0,
2x1 x2 + 2x3 4 = 0,
3x1 2x2 x3 + 1 = 0.
Solving this system, we find that the only solution is (1, 2, 2). We now use the change of
variables
x1 = u + 1, x2 = v 2, x3 = w + 2
to translate the critical point to the origin. Substituting, we obtain the system
du
= u,
dt
dv
= 2u v + 2w,
dt
dw
= 3u 2v w.
dt
Here A is given by
1 0 0

A=
2 1 2
.
3 2 1
Finding the characteristic equation, we have (r + 1)(r 2 + 2r + 5) = 0. Hence the eigenvalues
are 1, 1 2i. Since each eigenvalue has a negative real part, the critical point (1, 2, 2) is
asymptotically stable.
724
CHAPTER 13: Existence and Uniqueness Theory
EXERCISES 13.1: Introduction: Successive Approximations, page 812
1. In this problem, x0 = 1, y0 = y(x0 ) = 4, and f (x, y) = x2 y. Thus, applying formula (3) on

page 807 of the text yields
3x 3x 3x 3x
-2 . 2
y(x) = y0 + f (t, y(t)) dt = 4 + t y(t) dt = 4 + t dt y(t) dt .
x0 1 1 1
Since
3x 1x
2 t3 11 x3 1
t dt = 1 = ,
3 1 3 3
1
the equation becomes

3x 3x
x3 1 11 x3
y(x) = 4 + y(t) dt = + y(t) dt .
3 3 3 3
1 1
3. In the initial conditions, x0 = 1 and y0 = 3. Also, f (x, y) = (y x)2 = y 2 2xy + x2 .

Therefore,
3x 3x
) 2 *
y(x) = y0 + f (t, y(t)) dt = 3 + y (t) 2ty(t) + t2 dt.
x0 1
Using the linear property of integrals, we find that

3x 3x 3x 3x
) *
y 2(t) 2ty(t) + t2 dt = y 2(t) dt 2 ty(t) dt + t2 dt
1 1 1 1
3x
- 2 . x3 1
= y (t) 2ty(t) dt + ,
3 3
1
725
Chapter 13
we have
3x 3x
x3 10 2
y(x) = + y (t) dt 2 ty(t) dt. (13.1)
3 3
1 1
Note that we can rewrite the last integral using integration by parts in terms of integrals of
the function y(x) alone. Namely,
1t=x
3x 3t 1 3x 3 t 3x 3x 3 t
1
ty(t) dt = t y(s) ds11 y(s) ds dt = x y(s) ds y(s) ds dt
1
1 1 t=1 1 1 1 1 1
Thus, another form of the answer (13.1) is

3x 3x 3x 3 t
x3 10 2
y(x) = + y (t) dt + x y(t) dt y(s) ds dt .
3 3
1 1 1 1
5. In this problem, we have + ,

1 3
g(x) = x+ .
2 x
Thus the recurrence formula (7) on page 807 of the text becomes
+ ,
1 3
xn+1 = g (xn ) = xn + , n = 0, 1, . . . .
2 xn
With x0 = 3 as an initial approximation, we compute
+ , + , + , + ,
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
x1 = x0 + = 3+ = 2.0 , x2 = x1 + = 2+ = 1.75 ,
2 x0 2 3 2 x1 2 2
and so on. The results of these computations is given in Table 13-A.
+ ,
1 3
Table 13A: Approximations for a solution of x = x+ .
2 x
x0 = 3.0 x3 = 1.732142857
x1 = 2.0 x4 = 1.732050810
x2 = 1.75 x5 = 1.732050808
We stopped iterating after x5 because x4 x5 < 108 . Hence x 1.73205081.
726
Exercises 13.1
7. Since g(x) = 1/ (x2 + 4), we have the recurrence formula
1
xn+1 = g (xn ) = , n = 0, 1, . . .
x2n +4
with an initial approximation x0 = 0.5. Hence
1 1 4
x1 = = = 0.2352941176,
x20
+4 2
(0.5) + 4 17
1 1
x2 = 2 0.2465870307 , etc.
x1 + 4 (0.2352941176)2 + 4
See Table 13-B. We stopped iterating after x7 because the error x6 x7 < 109 . Hence
x 0.24626617.
1
Table 13B: Approximations for a solution of x = .
x2 +4
x0 = 0.5 x4 = 0.2462664586
x1 = 0.2352941176 x5 = 0.2462661636
x2 = 0.2465870307 x6 = 0.2462661724
x3 = 0.2462565820 x7 = 0.2462661721
9. To start the method of successive substitutions, we observe that

+ ,1/4
5x
g(x) = .
3
Therefore, according to equation (7) on page 807 of the text, we can find the next approxi-
mation from the previous one by using the recurrence relation
+ ,1/4
5 xn
xn+1 = g (xn ) = .
3
We start the procedure at the point x0 = 1. Thus, we obtain

+ ,1/4 + ,1/4 + ,1/4
5 x0 51 4
x1 = = = 1.074569932 ,
3 3 3
727
Chapter 13
+ ,1/4 + ,1/4
5 x1 5 1.074569932
x2 = 1.069526372 ,
3 3
+ ,1/4 + ,1/4
5 x2 5 1.069526372
x3 = 1.069869749 .
3 3
By continuing this process, we fill in Table 13-C below. Noticing that x7 x6 < 108 , we
stopped the procedure after seven steps. So, x 1.06984787.
+ ,1/4
5x
Table 13C: Approximations for a solution of x = .
3
x0 = 1.0 x4 = 1.069846382
x1 = 1.074569932 x5 = 1.069847972
x2 = 1.069526372 x6 = 1.069847864
x3 = 1.069869749 x7 = 1.069847871
11. First, we derive an integral equation corresponding to the given initial value problem. We
have f (x, y) = y, x0 = 0, y0 = y(0) = 2, and so the formula (3) on page 807 of the text
yields
3x 3x
y(x) = 2 + [y(t)] dt = 2 y(t) dt .
0 0
Thus, Picards recurrence formula (15) becomes

3x
yn+1 (x) = 2 yn (t) dt, n = 0, 1, . . . .
0
Starting with y0 (x) y0 = 2, we compute

3x 3x
1t=x
y1 (x) = 2 y0 (t) dt = 2 2 dt = 2 2t 1t=0 = 2 2x ,
0 0
3x 3x
1t=x
y2 (x) = 2 y1 (t) dt = 2 (2 2t) dt = 2 + (t 1)2 1t=0 = 2 2x + x2 .
0 0
728
Exercises 13.1
13. In this problem, f (x, y) = 3x2 , x0 = 1, y0 = y(1) = 2, and so Picards iterations to the
solution of the given initial value problem are given by
3x
) * 1t=x
yn+1(x) = 2 + 3t2 dt = 2 + t3 1t=1 = x3 + 1 .
1
Since the right-hand side does not depend on n, the sequence of iterations yk (x), k = 1, 2, . . .,
is a constant sequence. That is,
yk (x) = x3 + 1 for any k 1.
In particular, y1 (x) = y2 (x) = x3 + 1.
(In this connection, note the following. If it happens that one of the iterations, say, yk (x),
obtained via (15) matches the exact solution to the integral equation (3), then all the subse-
quent iterations will give the same function yk (x). In other words, the sequence of iterations
will become a constant sequence starting from its kth term. In the given problem, the first
application of (15) gives the exact solution, x3 + 1, to the original initial value problem and,
hence, to the corresponding integral equation (3).)
15. We first write this dierential equation as an integral equation. Integrating both sides from
x0 = 0 to x and using the fact that y(0) = 0, we obtain
3x 3x
- . - .
y(x) y(0) = y(t) et dt y(x) = y(t) et dt .
0 0
Hence, by equation (15) on page 811 of the text, the Picard iterations are given by
3x
- .
yn+1 (x) = yn (t) et dt .
0
Thus, starting with y0 (x) y0 = 0, we calculate

3x 3x
- t
.
y1 (x) = y0 (t) e dt = et dt = 1 ex ,
0 0
729
Chapter 13
3x 3x
- t
. ) *
y2 (x) = y1 (t) e dt = 1 2et dt = 1 ex = 2 + x 2ex .
0 0
17. First of all, remark that the function f (x, y(x)) in the integral equation (3), that is,
3x
y(x) = y0 + f (t, y(t)) dt ,
x0
is a continuous function as the composition of f (x, y) and y(x), which are both continuous by
our assumption. Next, if y(x) satisfies (3), then
3x0
y (x0 ) = y0 + f (t, y(t)) dt = y0 ,
x0
because the integral term is zero as a definite integral of a continuous function with equal
limits of integration. Therefore, y(x) satisfies the initial condition in (1).
We recall that, by the fundamental theorem of calculus, if g(x) is a continuous function on an

?x
interval [a, b], then, for any fixed c in [a, b], the function G(x) := a g(t) dt is an antiderivative
for g(x) on (a, b), i.e.,
+3 x ,

G (x) = g(t) dt = g(x).
a
Thus,
3x
1
y (x) = y0 + f (t, y(t)) dt = f (t, y(t)) 1t=x = f (x, y(x)),
x0
and so y(x) satisfies the dierential equation in (1).
19. The graphs of the functions y = (x2 + 1)/2 and y = x are sketched on the same coordinate
axes in Figure 13-A.
By examining this figure, we see that these two graphs intersect only at (1, 1). We can find
this point by solving the equation
x2 + 1
x= ,
2
730
Exercises 13.1
x2 + 1
y= y=x
2
4
P1 Q1
P0 Q0
1
P1
P0 Q1
Q0
0 1 2 3 4
x2 + 1
Figure 13A: The method of successive substitution for the equation x = .
2
for x. Thus, we have
2x = x2 + 1 x2 2x + 1 = 0 (x 1)2 = 0 x = 1.
Since y = x, the only intersection point is (1, 1).
To approximate the solution to the equation x = (x2 + 1)/2 using the method of successive
substitutions, we use the recurrence relation
x2n + 1
xn+1 = .
2
Starting this method at x0 = 0, we obtain the approximations given in Table 13-D. These
approximations do appear to be approaching the solution x = 1.
However, if we start the process at the point x = 2, we obtain the approximations given in
Table 13-E.
We observe that these approximations are getting larger and so do not seem to approach a
fixed point. This also appears to be the case if we examine the pictorial representation for the
731
Chapter 13
x2 + 1
Table 13D: Approximations for a solution of x = starting at x0 = 0.
2
x1 = 0.5 x15 = 0.89859837

x2 = 0.625 x20 = 0.91988745
x3 = 0.6953125 x30 = 0.94337158
x4 = 0.7417297 x40 = 0.95611749
x5 = 0.7750815 x50 = 0.96414507
x10 = 0.8610982 x99 = 0.98102848
x2 + 1
Table 13E: Approximations for a solution of x = starting at x0 = 2.
2
x1 = 2.5 x4 = 25.4946594
x2 = 3.625 x5 = 325.488829
x3 = 7.0703125 x6 = 52971.9891
method of successive substitutions given in Figure 13-A. By plugging x0 = 0 into the function
(x2 + 1)/2, we find P0 to be the point (0, 0.5). Then by moving parallel to the x-axis from
the point P0 to the line y = x, we observe that Q0 is the point (0.5, 0.5). Next, by moving
parallel to the y-axis from the point Q0 to the curve y = (x2 + 1)/2, we find that P1 is the
point (0.5, 0.625). Continuing this process moves us slowly in a step fashion to the point (1, 1).
However, if we start this process at x0 = 2, we observe that this method moves us through
larger and larger steps away from the point of intersection (1, 1).
Note that for this equation, the movement of the method of successive substitutions is to
the right. This is because the term (x2n + 1)/2, in the recurrence relation, is increasing for
x > 0. Thus, the sequence of approximations {xn } is an increasing sequence. Starting at a
nonnegative point less than 1 moves us to the fixed point at x = 1, but starting at a point
larger that 1 moves us to ever increasing values for our approximations and, therefore, away
from the fixed point.
732
Exercises 13.2
EXERCISES 13.2: Picards Existence and Uniqueness Theorem, page 820
1. In order to determine whether this sequence of functions converges uniformly, we find yn y.

Since
# x% x
yn (x) y(x) = 1 1= ,
n n
we have
|x| 1
yn y = max |yn (x) y(x)| = max = .
x[1,1] x[1,1] n n
Thus
1
lim yn y = lim =0
n n n
and {yn (x)} converges to y(x) uniformly on [1, 1].
3. In order to determine whether this sequence of functions converges uniformly, we must find
lim yn y .
n
Therefore, we first compute

1 1
1 nx 1 nx
yn y = yn = max 11 2 2
1 = max
1 ,
x[0,1] 1 + n x x[0,1] 1 + n2 x2
where we have removed the absolute value signs because the term (nx)/(1 + n2 x2 ) is nonneg-
ative when x [0, 1]. We will use calculus methods to obtain this maximum value. Thus, we
dierentiate the function yn (x) = (nx)/(1 + n2 x2 ) to obtain
n(1 n2 x2 )
yn (x) = .
(1 + n2 x2 )2
Setting yn (x) equal to zero and solving yields
) * 1
n 1 n2 x2 = 0 n2 x2 = 1 x= .
n
Since we are interested in the values of x on the interval [0, 1], we will only examine the critical
point x = 1/n. By the first derivative test, we observe that the function yn (x) has a local
maximum value at the point x = 1/n. At this point, we have
+ ,
1 n (n1 ) 1
yn = 2 = .
n 2 1
1 + n (n ) 2
733
Chapter 13
Computing
n(0)
yn (0) = = 0,
1 + n2 (0)2
n(1) n 1 1
yn (1) = 2 2
= 2
< for n 2,
1 + n (1) 1+n n 2
we conclude that
1
max yn (x) = .
x[0,1] 2
Therefore,
1 1
lim yn y = lim
= = 0.
n n 2 2
Thus, the given sequence of functions does not converge uniformly to the function y(x) 0
on the interval [0, 1].
This sequence of functions does, however, converge pointwise to the function y(x) 0 on the
interval [0, 1]. To see this, notice that for any fixed x (0, 1] we have
nx 1
lim [yn (x) y(x)] = lim 2 2
= lim = 0,
n n 1 + n x n 2nx
where we have found this limit by using LHospitals rule. At the point x = 0, we observe
that
0
lim [yn (0) y(0)] = lim
= 0.
n 1 n
Thus, we have pointwise convergence but not uniform convergence. See Figure 13-B(a) for
the graphs of functions y1 (x), y10 (x), y30 (x), and y90 (x).
5. We know (as was stated on page 433 of the text) that for all x such that |x| < 1 the geometric
P
series, k
k=0 x , converges to the function f (x) = 1/(1 x). Thus, for all x [0, 1/2], we have

H
1
== 1 + x + x2 + + xk + = xk .
1x
k=0

1 1
1Hn
H 1
H + ,k
H
1 k k1 k 1
yn y = max |yn (x) y(x)| = max 1 x x 1 = max x =
x[0,1/2] x[0,1/2] 1 1 x[0,1/2] 2
k=0 k=0 k=n+1 k=n+1
734
Exercises 13.2
0.5 y1 (x) 20 y20 (x)
y15 (x)
10
y10 (x)
y10 (x)
y30 (x) y5 (x)
y90 (x)
0 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
(a) (b)
Figure 13B: Graphs of functions in Problems 3 and 7.
and so LM
H + ,k
1
lim yn y = lim .
n n
k=n+1
2
P k
Since k=n+1 (1/2) is the tail end of a convergent series, its limit must be zero. Hence, we
have L M
H + ,k
1
lim yn y = lim = 0.
n n
k=n+1
2
Therefore, the given sequence of functions converges uniformly to the function y(x) = 1/(1x)
on the interval [0, 1/2].
7. Let x [0, 1] be fixed.
If x = 0, then yn (0) = n2 (0) = 0 for any n and so limn yn (0) = limn 0 = 0.
For x > 0, let Nx := [2/x] + 1 with [] denoting the interger part of a number. Then, for
n Nx , one has 4 5
2 2 2
n +1> x>
x x n
and so, in evaluating yn (x), the third line in its definition must be used. This yields yn (x) = 0
for all n Nx , which implies that limn yn (x) = limn 0 = 0.
735
Chapter 13
Hence, for any fixed x [0, 1], limn yn (x) = 0 = y(x).
On the other hand, for any n, the function yn (x) is a continuous piecewise linear function,
which is increasing on [0, 1/n], decreasing on (1/n, 2/n), and zero on [1/n, 1]. Thus it attains
its maximum value at x = 1/n, which is
+ , + ,
1 2 1
yn =n = n.
n n
Therefore,
lim yn y = lim yn = lim n = ,
n n n
and the sequence does not converge uniformly on [0, 1]. See Figure 13-B(b) for the graphs of
y5 (x), y10 (x), y15 (x), and y20 (x).
9. We need to find an h > 0 such that h < min (h1 , 1 /M, 1/L). We are given that
R1 = {(x, y) : |x 1| 1, |y| 1} = {(x, y) : 0 x 2, 1 y 1} ,
and so h1 = 1 and 1 = 1. Thus, we must find values for M and L.
In order to find M, notice that, as was stated on page 816 of the text, we require that M
satisfy the condition
|f (x, y)| = |y 2 x| M,
for all (x, y) in R1 . To find this upper bound for |f (x, y)|, we must find the maximum and
the minimum values of f (x, y) on R1 . (Since f (x, y) is a continuous function on the closed
and bounded region R1 , it will have a maximum and a minimum there.) We will use calculus
methods to find this maximum and this minimum. Since the first partial derivatives of f (x, y),
given by
fx (x, y) = 1, and fy (x, y) = 2y,
are never both zero, the maximum and minimum must occur on the boundary of R1 . Notice
that R1 is bounded on the left by the line x = 0, on the right by the line x = 2, on the top
by the line y = 1, and on the bottom by the line y = 1. Therefore, we will examine the
behavior of f (x, y) (and, thus, of |f (x, y)|) on each of these lines.
736
Exercises 13.2
Case 1: On the left side of R1 where x = 0, the function f (x, y) becomes the function in the
single variable y, given by
f (0, y) = F1 (y) = y 2 0 = y 2 , y [1, 1].
This function has a maximum at y = 1 and a minimum at y = 0. Thus, on the left

side of R1 we see that f reaches a maximum value of f (0, 1) = 1 and a minimum value
of f (0, 0) = 0.
Case 2: On the right side of R1 where x = 2, the function f (x, y) becomes the function in the
single variable y, given by
f (2, y) = F2 (y) = y 2 2, y [1, 1].
This function also has a maximum at y = 1 and a minimum at y = 0. Thus, on the

right side of R1 , the function f (x, y) reaches a maximum value of f (2, 1) = 1 and a
minimum value of f (2, 0) = 2.
Case 3: On the top and bottom of R1 where y = 1, the function f (x, y) becomes the function
given by
f (x, 1) = F3 (x) = (1)2 x = 1 x, x [0, 2].
This function also has a maximum at x = 0 and a minimum at x = 2. Thus, on both

the top and bottom of the region R1 , the function f (x, y) reaches a maximum value of
f (0, 1) = 1 and a minimum value of f (2, 1) = 1.
From the above cases we see that the maximum value of f (x, y) is 1 and the minimum value
is 2 on the boundary of R1 . Thus, we have |f (x, y)| 2 for all (x, y) in R1 . Hence, we
choose M = 2.
To find L, we observe that L is an upper bound for

1 1
1 f 1
1 1 = |2y| = 2|y|,
1 y 1
on R1 . Since y [1, 1] in this region, we have |y| 1. Hence, we see that

1 1
1 f 1
1 1 = 2|y| 2,
1 y 1
737
Chapter 13
for all (x, y) in R1 . Therefore, we choose L = 2.
Now we can choose h 0 such that

+ , + ,
1 1 11 1
h < min h1 , , = min 1, = .
M L 22 2
Thus, Theorem 3 guarantees that the given initial value problem will have a unique solution
on the interval [1 h, 1 + h], where 0 < h < 1/2.
11. We are given that the recurrence relation for these approximations is yn+1 = T [yn ]. Using
the definition of T [y], we have
3x
3
yn+1 = x x + 1 (u x)yn (u) du.
0
Thus, starting these approximations with y0 (x) = x3 x + 1, we obtain

3x 3x
- .
y1 (x) = x3 x + 1 + (u x)y0 (u) du = x3 x + 1 + (u x) u3 u + 1 du
0 0
3x
= x3 x + 1 + (u4 u2 + u xu3 + xu x) du
40 5
3 x5 x3 x2 x5 x3 2
= x x+1+ + + x .
5 3 2 4 2
By simplifying, we obtain
1 5 7 3 1 2
y1 (x) = x + x x x + 1.
20 6 2
Substituting this result into the recurrence relation yields

3x
y2 (x) = x3 x + 1 (u x)y1 (u) du
0
3x 4 5
3 1 5 7 3 1 2
= x x+1 (u x) u + u u u + 1 du
20 6 2
0
738
Exercises 13.2
4
3 1 7 7 5 1 4 1 3 1 2
= x x+1+ x + x x x + x
140 30 8 3 2
5
1 7 7 5 1 4 1 3 2
+ x x + x + x x .
120 24 6 2
When simplified, this yields
1 7 7 5 1 4 7 3 1 2
y2 (x) = x x + x + x x x + 1.
840 120 24 6 2
13. Using properties of limits and the linear property of integrals, we can rewrite the statement
that
3b 3b
lim yn (x) dx = y(x) dx
n
a a
in an equivalent form
b
3 3b 3b
lim yn (x) y(x) dx = 0 lim [yn (x) y(x)] dx = 0. (13.2)
n n
a a a
The sequence {yn } converges uniformly to y on [a, b], which means, by the definitionof uniform
convergence, that
yn yC[a,b] := max |yn (x) y(x)| 0 as n .

x[a,b]
Since 1 b 1
13 1 3b
1 1
1 [yn (x) y(x)] dx1 |yn (x) y(x)| dx (b a) yn y
1 1 C[a,b] 0
1 1
a a
as n , we conclude that
1 b 1
13 1
1 1
lim 11 [yn (x) y(x)] dx11 = 0,
n
1 1
a
and (13.2) follows. (Recall that limn an = 0 if and only if limn |an | = 0.)
739
Chapter 13
15. (a) In the given system,

x (t) = y 2 (t), x(0) = 0;
(13.3)
y (t) = z(t), y(0) = 1;
z (t) = x(t)y(t), z(0) = 0,
replacing t by s, integrating the dierential equations from s = 0 to s = t, and using the
fundamental theorem of calculus we obtain
?t ?t ?t
x (s) ds = y 2 (s) ds; x(t) x(0) = y 2(s) ds;
0 0 0
?t ?t ?t
y (s) ds = z(s) ds; y(t) y(0) = z(s) ds;
0 0 0
?t ?t ?t
z (s) ds = x(s)y(s) ds z(t) z(0) = x(s)y(s) ds.
0 0 0
By the initial conditions in (13.3), x(0) = 0, y(0) = z(0) = 1. Substituting these values
into the above system yields
?t
x(t) = y 2(s) ds;
0
?t
y(t) 1 = z(s) ds; (13.4)
0
?t
z(t) 1 = x(s)y(s) ds,
0
which is equivalent to the given system of integral equations. Thus, (13.3) implies (13.4).
Conversely, dierentiating equations in (13.4) and using the fundamental theorem of cal-
culus (its part regarding integrals with variable upper bound), we conclude that solutions
x(t), y(t), and z(t) to (13.4) also satisfy dierential equations in (13.3). Clearly,
?0
x(0) = y 2 (s) ds = 0;
0
?0
y(0) 1 = z(s) ds = 0;
0
?0
z(t) 1 = x(s)y(s) ds = 0,
0
and the initial conditions in (13.3) are satisfied. Therefore, (13.4) implies (13.3).
740
Exercises 13.3
(b) With starting iterations x0 (t) x(0) = 0, y0 (t) y(0) = 1, and z0 (t) z(0) = 1, we
compute x1 (t), y1 (t), and z1 (t).
?t ?t
x1 (t) = y02 (s) ds = (1)2 ds = t;
0 0
?t ?t
y1 (t) = 1 + z0 (s) ds = 1 + (1) ds = 1 + t;
0 0
?t ?t
z1 (t) = 1 + x0 (s)y0 (s) ds = 1 + (0) ds = 1.
0 0
Applying given recurrence formulas again yields
?t ?t 1t t3
x2 (t) = y12(s) ds = (1 + s)2 ds = (1 + s)3 /3 10 = t t2 ;
0 0 3
?t ?t
y2 (t) = 1 + z1 (s) ds = 1 + 1 ds = 1 + t;
0 0
?t ?t 1t t2 t3
z2 (t) = 1 + x1 (s)y1 (s) ds = 1 2 1
s(1 + s) ds = 1 (s /2 + s /3) 0 = 1 . 3
0 0 2 3
EXERCISES 13.3: Existence of Solutions of Linear Equations, page 826
1. In this problem, L M L M
cos t t tan t
A(t) = , f(t) = .
t3 1 et

In A(t), functions cos t, t3 , and 1 are continuous on (, ) while t is continuous on
[0, ). Therefore, A(t) is continuous on [0, ). In f(t), the exponential function is continuous
everywhere, but tan t has infinite discontinuities at t = (k + 1/2), k = 0, 1, 2, . . . . The
largest interval containing the initial point, t = 2, where tan t and, therefore, f(t), is continuous
is (/2, 3/2). Since A(t) is also continuous on (/2, 3/2), by Theorem 6, given initial value
problem has a unique solution on this interval.
3. By comparing this problem to the problem given in (14) on page 825 of the text, we see that
in this case
p1 (t) = ln t, p2 (t) 0, p3 (t) = tan t, and g(t) = e2t .
741
Chapter 13
We also observe that t0 = 1. Thus, we must find an interval containing t0 = 1 on which all of
the functions p1 (t), p2 (t), p3 (t), and g(t) are simultaneously continuous. Therefore, we note
that p2 (t) and g(t) are continuous everywhere; p1 (t) is continuous on the interval (0, ); and
the interval which contains t0 = 1 on which p3 (t) is continuous is (/2, /2). Hence, these
four functions are simultaneously continuous on the interval (0, /2) and this interval contains
the point t0 = 1. Therefore, Theorem 7 given on page 825 of the text guarantees that we will
have a unique solution to this initial value problem on the whole interval (0, /2).
5. In this problem, we use Theorem 5. Since

L M
sin x2
f(t, x) = ,
3x1
we have L M L M
f 0 f cos x2
(t, x) = , (t, x) = .
x1 3 x2 0
Vectors f, f/x1 , and f/x2 are continuous on
R = { < t < , < x1 < , < x2 < }
(which is the whole space R3 ) since their components are. Moreover,

1 1 1 1
1 f 1 1 f 1
1 (t, x) 1 = 3, 1 (t, x) 1 = | cos x2 | 1
1 x1 1 1 x2 1
for any (t, x), and the condition (3) in Theorem 5 is satisfied with L = 3. Hence, given initial
value problem has a unique solution on the whole real axis < t < .
7. The equation
y (t) (sin t)y (t) + et y(t) = 0
is a linear homogeneous equation and, hence, has a trivial solution, y(t) 0. Clearly, this
solution satisfies the initial conditions, y(0) = y (0) = y (0) = 0. All that remains to note is
that the coecients, sin t and et , are continuous on (, ) and so, by Theorem 7, the
solution y 0 is unique.
742
Exercises 13.4
EXERCISES 13.4: Continuous Dependence of Solutions, page 832
3. To apply Theorem 9, we first determine the constant L for f (x, y) = ecos y + x2 . To do this,
we observe that
f
(x, y) = ecos y sin y.
y
Now on any rectangle R0 , we have
1 1
1 f 1
1 (x, y)1 = |ecos y sin y| = |ecos y | |sin y| e.
1 y 1

(More detailed analysis shows that this function attains its maximum at y = ( 5 1)/2,
and this maximum equals to 1.4585 . . . .) Thus, since h = 1, we have by Theorem 9,
|(x, y0 ) (x, y20)| |y0 y20 | ee .
Since we are given that |y0 y20 | 102 , we obtain the result
|(x, y0 ) (x, y20 )| 102 ee 0.151543 .
9. We can use inequality (18) in Theorem 10 to obtain the bound, but first must determine the
constant L and the constant . Here f (x, y) = sin x + (1 + y 2 )1 and F (x, y) = x + 1 y 2 .
Now, 1 1 1 1
1 f 1 1 1
1 (x, y)1 = 1 2y 1
1 y 1 1 (1 + y 2 )2 1
and 1 1
1 F 1
1 (x, y) 1 = |2y| 2.
1 y 1
To find an upper bound for |f /y| on R0 , we maximize 2y/(1 + y 2)2 . Hence, we obtain
+ ,
2y 2(1 + y 2)2 2y 2(1 + y 2 )2y 2(1 + y 2 ) 8y 2 2 6y 2
= = = .
(1 + y 2)2 (1 + y 2 )4 (1 + y 2)3 (1 + y 2)3
Setting this equal to zero and solving for y, we obtain
2 6y 2 1
=0 2 6y 2 = 0 y = .
(1 + y 2)3 3
743
Chapter 13

Since 2y/(1 + y 2 )2 is odd, we need only use y = 1/ 3. Thus
1 1
1 f 1 2/ 3 3 3
1 (x, y)1
1 y 1 (1 + 1/3)2 = 8 ,

and so L = 3 3/8. To obtain we seek an upper bound for
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
|f (x, y) F (x, y)| = 11sin x + x 1 + y 2 1 |sin x x| + 1
1 1 1 + y2 1 + y 2 1.
1
1 + y2
Using Taylors theorem with remainder we have
x3 cos
sin x = x ,
3!
where 0 x. Thus for 1 x 1 we obtain
1 1
1 x3
cos 1 |x|3 cos 1
|sin x x| = 11x x11 = .
3! 3! 6
Applying Taylors theorem with remainder to 1/(1 + y 2 ) 1 + y 2 , we obtain
g(y) = (1 + y 2 )1 1 + y 2 ,
g (y) = 2y(1 + y 2 )2 + 2y ,
g (y) = 2(1 + y 2 )2 + 2(1 + y 2)3 (2y)2 + 2 ,
g (y) = 4(1 + y 2)3 (2y) 6(1 + y 2)4 (2y)3 + 2(1 + y 2)3 (8y) .
Since g(0) = g (0) = g (0) = 0, we have

g ()
(1 + y 2 )1 1 + y 2 = ,
3!
where 0 y. Thus, we obtain
1 1
1 1 1 g () 1 8 + 48 + 16
1(1 + y ) 1 + y 1 = 1
2 1 2 1
1 3! 1 6
= 12.
Hence
1 73
|f (x, y) F (x, y)|
+ 12 = .
6 6
It now follows from inequality (18) in Theorem 10 that
73 33/8
|(x) (x)| e 23.294541 ,
6
for x in [1, 1].
744

Solucion Ejercicios Impares Ed Nagle

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationSolucionario de todos los ejercicios impares del Nagle, Ecuaciones diferenciales y problemas en la frontera

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Solucion Ejercicios Impares Ed Nagle

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Solucion Ejercicios Impares Ed Nagle

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents

CHAPTER 2: First Order Dierential Equations 27

CHAPTER 3: Mathematical Models and Numerical Methods Involving First

CHAPTER 4: Linear Second Order Equations 167

CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Systems and Phase Plane Analysis 259

CHAPTER 6: Theory of Higher Order Linear Dierential Equations 341

CHAPTER 7: Laplace Transforms 389

CHAPTER 9: Matrix Methods for Linear Systems 569

CHAPTER 10: Partial Dierential Equations 629

CHAPTER 11: Eigenvalue Problems and Sturm-Liouville Equations 675

CHAPTER 12: Stability of Autonomous Systems 707

CHAPTER 13: Existence and Uniqueness Theory 725

EXERCISES 1.2: Solutions and Initial Value Problems, page 14

which is an identity on (, ). Thus (x) is an explicit solution on (, ).

y + y = sin x + 2 + sin x + x2 = 2 + x2 = x2 + 2 for all x in (, ).

Therefore, y = sin x + x2 is a solution to the dierential equation on the interval (, ).

5. Dierentiating x(t) = cos 2t, we get

7. We dierentiate y = e2x 3ex twice:

Hence y = e2x 3ex is an explicit solution to the given dierential equation.

9. Dierentiating the equation x2 + y 2 = 6 implicitly, we obtain

11. Dierentiating the equation exy + y = x 1 implicitly with respect to x yields

13. Dierentiating the equation sin y + xy x3 = 2 implicitly with respect to x, we obtain

(y sin y + 1)y + (cos y + x)y = 6x y

Figure 1A: Graphs of the functions y = Ce3x + 1 for C = 0, 0.5, 1, and 2.

17. Dierentiating (x), we find that

which is identical to (x) found in (1.2).

For the last equation to hold on an interval for x, we must have

3m2 + 8m 3 = (3m 1)(m + 3) = 0.

For the last equation to hold on an interval for x, we must have

To solve for m we use the quadratic formula:

(b) In this initial value problem,

x0 = 0 and y0 = 107 . The function f (x, y) is continuous everywhere; f (x, y)/y is

y(x0 )y (x0 ) 4x0 = 0 (1.3)

Thus x0 = 0, which is a contradiction.

EXERCISES 1.3: Direction Fields, page 22

1. (a) For y = 2x,

Thus y = 2x and y = 2x are solutions to the dierential equation dy/dx = 4x/y on

the dierential equation dy/dx = x + sin y. Thus

Hence, by Second Derivative Test, (x) has a relative minimum at x .

dierentiable function on an interval cannot have two relative minima on an interval

(e) For y = x 1, dy/dx = 1 and x y = x (x 1) = 1. Thus the given dierential

lim (x) = 1 lim [x (x)] = 1,

and so the line y = x 1 is a slant asymptote for (x).

17. The isoclines for the equation

19. Integrating both sides of the equation dy/y = dx/x yields

EXERCISES 1.4: The Approximation Method of Euler, page 28

x1 = x0 + 0.1 = 0 + 0.1 = 0.1 ,

x2 = x1 + 0.1 = 0.1 + 0.1 = 0.2 ,

x1 = x0 + 0.1 = 0.1 , y1 = y0 + 0.1 [y0 (2 y0 )] = 3 + 0.1 [3(2 3)] = 2.700;

tn+1 = tn + h and (tn+1 ) xn+1 = xn + hf (tn , xn ), n = 0, 1, 2, . . . .

For the case N = 1, we have h = (1 0)/1 = 1 which gives us

t1 = 0 + 1 = 1 and (1) x1 = 0 + 1 (1 + 0 sin 0) = 1.

For the case N = 2, we have h = 1/2 = 0.5 . Thus we have

t1 = 0 + 0.5 = 0.5 , x1 = 0 + 0.5 (1 + 0 sin 0) = 0.5 ,

t2 = 0.5 + 0.5 = 1, (1) x2 = 0.5 + 0.5 [1 + 0.5 sin(0.25)] 1.06185 .

tn+1 = tn + 0.25 and xn+1 = xn + 0.25 [1 + tn sin(tn xn )] .

t1 = 0 + 0.25 = 0.25 , x1 = 0 + 0.25 [1 + 0 sin(0)] = 0.25 .

Plugging these values into the recursive equations above yields